-?

TJHE LIB^AF^Y
OF THE

Sttttbtrsitt)

of Toronto,

FROM

THOMAS HODGINS,
189O.

M.A.

HOOGEVEEN'S

GREEK PARTICLES.

Hoog.

Price 7s. 6d. Boards.

H773 d
.Es

HOOGEVEEN'S

GREEK PARTICLES,
ABRIDGED
AND

TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH

BY THE REV. JOHN SEAGER, B.A.
RECTOR OF WELCH BICKNOR, MONMOUTHSHIRE,

AUTHOR OF CLASSICAL CRITICISMS

'

IN VARIOUS

NOS. OF THE

CLASSICAL JOURNAL/

T
LONDON:
PRINTED BY
A. 3.

VALPY, RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET.

j

SOLD BY LONGMAN AND CO.j BALDWIN AND CRADOCK SIMPKIN AND MARSHALL; WHITTAKER AND CO.; PARKER AND VINCENT, OXFORD DEIGHTONS
;

AND NEWBY, CAMBRIDGE

AND ALL

OTHER BOOKSELLERS.

PUBLISFfED BY

THE SAME.

VIGER ON THE IDIOMS OF THE GREEK LANTranslated into English, and abridged for the Use of Schools. By the Rev. J. SEAGER, Author of ' Critical Observations on Classical Authors,' and several Greek Criticisms in the Classical Journal. 8vo. Pr. 9s. Qd. boards.
' The publication before us is well fitted to carry students still farther into the recondite parts of that majestic language, and to display to them much of that interesting mechanism which escapes the uninstiucted eye. We, therefore, gladly lend our assistance in so rational an attempt as that \v\lrich is here undertaken, and observe, with pleasure that, in confoimity with the improved spirit of the age, Mr. Valpy's list of New School Books contains several others ou the same

GUAGE;

plan.'

Lond. Mag. Nov. 1828.

'

This Volume

is

compiled with much industry and judgment

and altogether a more valuable

service could not well have been rendered to the inquiring student of the classics. have great satisfaction in Announcing that the same able editor is about to favour us with the critical works of Bos and Hermann executed on a similar plan.' Oxford Literary Gazette, No. 3.
' But when they have made real advances in Greek prose, read over with them the whole of Vigerus. Mr. Berry, what I now recommend, is really one of the most useful parts of education. You should make thm read Vigerus in this way twice every year for five or six or seveu years.' Dr. Pafr. See Johnstone's Life of Parr, Vol. 8,

We

BOS AND
%*
The
four

HERMANN
one
vol. 8vo.

plan, and will soon be published.

are under abridgment on the [Hermann in November, 1829.]

same

Works

will form about

200 pages each, and may be purchased sepa-

rately, or together in

PREFACE.
ONE
of the principal
difficulties

of languages arises from

their particles.

That
in

difficulty is

perhaps greater in the

Greek language than

any

other.

The

intellectual people,

who formed
others to

that language, attended with greater nicety than

transitions,

numerous modifications,

and connex-

ions, of thought,
ticles, to

and expressed them by a variety of parin languages

which none can be found equivalent

constructed with less acuteness and refinement.

The meaning

and use of many of the Greek

of a short explanation by

particles being thus incapable

literal translation,

they have been

the subjects of multiplied and voluminous discussion.

One

of the most renowned Professors

written a treatise in four books,
2

of the present age has

folio

occupying sixty-six

columns very closely printed with very small types, on the

little

particle av alone

which thus makes perhaps as great

a figure as

its little rival

word

ov

in the

Parmenides of Plato.
any certain and
to

Of those who have been unable

distinct

to assign

meaning

to particles,

some have had recourse

device almost as ingenious as the Lusus Nature of natural

Professor

Hermann.
last

Published in the

Number

of the

new

edition of

H. Stephens'

Thesaurus, printed by Mr. Valpy.

Vi

PREFACE.

philosophers, and have declared them to be mere expletives,

altogether void of signification
;

while others have attributed

to them meanings which are wholly gratuitous and imaginary. 1

To

overthrow the doctrine of redundant or expletive Greek

;

particles

to

show

that they
;

were
to

all originally

formed from

words separately significant

teach the various ways in

which they

affect other

words, and to ascertain the proper

;

meaning and use of each

in particular was the design of " Doctrina Particularum Lingua Hoogeveens's celebrated

Graca"

To

those

who may be
it in

prevented by the size and

price of that standard work, or

by ignorance of the Latin

language, from studying

the original, the author of this

to

Abridgment has endeavored

supply a useful substitute.

;

He

has given in

it

the substance of Hoogeveen's doctrine

servilely followed,

which however he has not

but

in

many

parts has taken the liberty of making alterations which can-

not here be particularly specified.

he has
strictly followed,

The method of Hoogeveen

a more clear and orderly

except where the brevity necessary

in this work, or the advantage of

arrangement, required a different division of the heads or

paragraphs

the numerals of which in such parts do not, of

course, exactly correspond with those of the original.

For

the sake of brevity he has proceeded also with regard to

on the plan mentioned quotation of passages, and translation,

in his preface to the

Abridgment of Viger

a
;

and has sub-

stituted

numerals instead of the names of the Muses prefixed

See note m,
See pp.
v.

p. 148. of the
vi.

Abridgment of Viger, octavo, 1828.

and

PREFACE.
to the

yii

books of Herodotus, and by which Hoogeveen very

pedantically quotes those books.

With Hooge veen's

to that

original materials

he has incorporated

those added by Schiitz in his Epitome, and also the Appendix

Epitome

and has here and there made a few ad-

ditions of his own. 1

For information as
the quotations are

to the Editions of

books from which

to,

made,

or

which are referred

see

below, *y*.

J.S.
Welch Bicknor,

These are either included

in brackets

J,

or are in notes at the

bottoms of the pages.

N. B.
lipses,

It is intended to publish similar

abridgments of Bos on the El-

and Hermann on the Metres, of the Greek language.

respect to the references, as passages

%* With
in

may be

readily found

any books divided always into verses or other small portions, the editions

of such books need not be specified.

Of books not

so divided (as indeed

of most books) the editions referred to

the best,

may

generally be understood to be

when

there

is

no

specification of any particular edition.

The

fol:

lowing, however, have sometimes been cited without such specification

jEschines, Orat. Aurel. Allobr. 1607.

Aristides, interpr. Canter. 1604.

Clemens

Alexandr. Colon. 1688.

to the edition

Demosthenes, Aurel. Allobr. 1607. Diof Demosth.

Hippocrates, Gener. 1657. Pausanias,

narchus, appended

Isocrates, interpr. Wolf. 1604.

landr.

Lysias, Marburg. 1683.

Xy-

Hanov. 1603. Philo Judaeus, Colon. 1613.

to the

Plutarch, Franco/. 1599.

Proclus, appended

Basil edition of Plato, (but Plato himself is usually

quoted from the edition otSerranus.)

,??

Vlll

NEW SCHOOL BOOKS

and may
be

JUST PUBLISHED,
Booksellers.

had of all

SCHOOL AND COLLEGE GREEK CLASSICS, WITH ENGLISH &c.

NOTES, QUESTIONS,
the express desire of many eminent Schoolmasters, Mr. VALPY has commenced as are chiefly read the publication of a SERIES of such of the in the upper Classes of Schools and in Colleges. The best Texts are adopted, and the CRITICAL and EXPLANATORY NOTES are presented, it is presumed, in a more inviting and accessible form than those of Latin Commentators, by avoiding that profuseness of annotation which frequently anticipates the ingenuity, supersedes the industry, and consequently retards rather than promotes the improvement, of the pupil. EXAMINATION QUESTIONS, adapted to the points discussed in the Notes, and INDEXES, are also added ; and the Series, it is hoped, will constitute a convenient introduction to the niceties and elegancies of Greek Literature, and to the perusal of that portion of the relics of antiquity which is best calculated to interest a youthful

At

GREEK AUTHORS

mind.

Each volume will be sold separately and it is intended that all shall be published cheap duodecimo form. The following are already published By the Rev. J. R. MAJOR, 5s. Trin. Col. Camb., and Master of Wisbech School.
;

in a

HECUBA OF EURIPIDES.

' This is, beyond all comparison, the best student's edition of a Greek Play, which has ever been given to the public. The original edition of Person, which forms the ground- work of the present, is, after all, a book more adapted to the finished scholar and classical critic, than to those who are only pursuing the studies which are to render them worthy of a station within the envied pale.' Literary Chronicle, Jan. 1827.

MEDEA. By PHCENISS^l.
CEDIPUS

TYRANNUS OF SOPHOCLES.
late

the Same. 5*. By the Same.

55.

By

the

Itev. J.

BRASSE, D. D.

Fellow of Trin. Col. Camb.

5s.

' The very useful illustrations given of all the difficult passages are well adapted to remove many of the obstacles, which usually stand in the way of a young Greek Scholar.' Monthly Rev. May,182Q.

By the Same. 5s. THUCYDIDES, HERODOTUS, XENOPHON, DEMOSTHENES, &c. will be published in
succession during the year 1829.

(EDIPUS COLONEUS.

ROBINSON'S ANTIQUITIES OF GREECE

being an

Account of the Manners and Customs of the Greeks, designed to illustrate the GREEK CLASSICS, by explaining Words and Phrases according to the Rites and Customs to which they refer. To which are prefixed, a brief History of the Grecian States, and Biographical Sketches of the principal Greek Writers. Archbishop POTTER, LAKEMACHER, and Bos, contain nothing which is not in this Edition, which has also much useful matter not to be found in those works. The Second Edition, considerably bds* enlarged and improved, and illustrated with Plates. 8vo. Price 17s.
*** This work has been intirely re-written, and has been so much enlarged by extracts from Potter, Lakemacher, and others who have treated on Grecian antiquities, as to be rendered more valuable to the student than in the state in which it first appeared. The classical authorities, which, in the former edition, were incorporated with the text, are as placed at the foot of each page. This, it is expected, will be found an improvement, inasmuch it will render the book more uniform, as well as more easy to the student, by obviating the
difficulties which a frequent recurrence to the authorities must necessarily occasion, and by preventing his attention from being drawn to them rather than directed to the subject-matter itself.

GREEK GRADUS
Lexicon
;

or,

Greek, Latin, and English Prosodial

containing the Interpretation, in Latin and English, of all words which occur in the Greek Poets, from the earliest period to the time of Ptolemy Philadelphus, and also the Quantities of each Syllable ; thus combining the advantages of a For the Use of Schools and Lexicon of the Greek Poets and a Greek Gradus. Colleges. By the Rev. J. BRASSE, D.D. late Fellow of Trin. Coll. Camb. One thick vol. 8vo. Pr. 24s, bds.

GREEK PARTICLES.
OF THE DISTINCTIVE AND THE ADVERSATIVE USE OF
THE PARTICLE AAAA.
1. diversity ; 2. opposition. Diversity, as 'AXXd, but, notes aveyvus, dXX' OVK eyvois. Opposition, (when it is adversative,) as in oi/x' VTT' avayrys, dXX' CKOVTES Plat. Phaedr. See also Aristoph. Ach. 47. I.

I.

in

than: ov TO Kepbaiveiv paXXov Tepirei, dXXa ro ri/mo Thucyd. ii, 44. v. Demostb. in Mid. p. 554. [1. 15.] ed. Reisk. II. Sometimes it signifies a concession of something previous with a denial of something consequent; as in Aristoph. Ach. 470. dXX' OVK&T' dXX' uTretfjii' q. d. I confess I have been so far troublesome to you ; but I will be so no longer ; / will be gone. Sometimes to a preceding proposition depending on eTreiSr) or the like, it opposes a contrary proposition, forming at the same time the apodosis as in Horn. Od. ', 151. III. 'AXXa is sometimes adversative without any negation of what precedes; as in Horn. Od. a', 48. IV. Both in its discretive or distinctive use, and in its adversative, dXXd is put after /uer. a. distinctively : dXXd ra /uev *ca0' fyuds e/uo/ ye Soieet KaXws e^etv, dXXa ra TrXdyta XvTrel /ue Xenoph. Cyrop. vii, 1, So Horn. 11. TT', 240. b. adversative ly ; as, "EvO* aXXoi pkv 16. dXX' OVK ^Arpeibr) 'Aya^ueyu^oyi ijvbave Trdvres eTrev^ujfJirjffav 'A^atot, Ov^u : Horn. II. a', 24. v. et II. o, 690. sqq. V. From its distinctive power is derived its use in exceptions and An example of its exceptive sense is in Iliad a', 286*. objections.
It is

put for

>

77,

0at:

It

P.YI,

used in exception after a negation also, and is interpreted by ei except: as, aXXos 6' OVTIS /uot roaov ainos, ovpavitjjvwv, a XX a q>iXr) pirrjp : Horn. II. <j>, 27^. VI. It objects in Horn. II. a', 165. and in 1 Corinth, xv, 35. dXX'
is

Ijoei rts,

&c.
;

used in syllogism or enthymema, to introduce an affirmative assumption after a proposition universally negative as, ov yap roL irw CVTOI iKavoi elatv ayiaviarcu, o'i av To^eviacrn', f/ aKovri^an', i] 'unreva)'AXX' ovrot vtv iirtirTTijjLQvttg, r/v be irov Trorijaai be*}, TOVTV XetVwi'rat.
It is

Hoog.

AAAA

ADVERSATIVE.
elai,

(now these our enemies) tSiwrcu

1,5, 11.

Kara TOVS TTOVOVS

Xeuoph. Cyrop.

VII. It has a similar use not only in anticipating objections, but in reply to anticipated pleas or objections : as, Ei av ye Kaprepos efftn, Oea be ffe y eiva.ro pfirrjp, 'A XX' (yet, still} oye Qeprepos eerrtv, eirel ?rXeoveaaiv avaaoei : Horn. II. a', 281. [See Abridgement of Viger, p.

172. R.i.] VIII. It serves for correction or qualification of something already said as, /zeXay^oX^s, dXX', are povcriKos &V, Trpaorepov : Plat. Phaedr. p. 268. x. 367. ed. Bip. IX. It is not inelegantly reiterated in an alternation of injunctions or commands, and objections ; as in Aristoph. Ach. 402. seq<$. where it is used elliptically. Dicseop. eoraXetro*' avrov. Cephisoph. a XX' dSt/j'aroi/. Dicaeop. dXX' opus. Then, when Dicreopolis has himself called Euripides, the latter answers, dXX' ov tr\o\r]. Dicaeop. dXX' KKVK\iidr)T. Eurip. dXX' abvraTov. Dicaeop. dXX' O/JLUIS. Eurip. dXX' eKKVKXriaofjiai, well then, I will be wheeled forth. [Abr. Vig.
;

p. 173. R.

ii.]

Xr
II. a',

It retains its discretive or adversative force also

when

it is

as a hortatory particle: as,

Aristoph. Ach. 1093. dXXd In this sense it is dappovvres op/za>/ze0a, Xenoph. Cyrop. 1, 5, 13. often put before aye or ayere, as in II. a', 410. So dXXa Sj), aXA' 'iOi, dXX' ela, and the like. in abrupt speech, and from its XI. 'AXXa, from its employment nature, is usually placed first in a sentence; but not always ; as, trv & dXXd fjLoi araXayuov elpr/vrfs eva els rbv KaXa^ioKov evaraXa^ov rovrort, Aristoph. Ach. 1032, [It here signifies, at least: see Abr. of
ffirevbe,
its adversative sense, it adds energy to the expression of indignation; as, dXX' efic rot epew, ys virepoTrXiricri TCL\ ay wore Qvpov oXeffay : Iliad a', 204. (where at the same time it enforces the and to supasseveration!) See also II. a', 32. and Aristoph. Ach. 110.

258. having has preceded. dXX' ws Ta^ffra

videaQ', be persuaded then: reference to something different or opposite

dXXa

used Horn.

which

Vrg.p. 173. iii.] Without losing

plications, prayers, or wishes, as in [Iliad a', 508.] and II. 5', 464. In questions, such imperatives as aye, or et?re, are often omitted
after
TTWS

dXXd through
bri
;

haste, and eagerness for information ; as, dXXd Plat. Phredr. p. 242. dXXa THUS 7roie7 ; Xenoph. Cyrop. i,
;

3, 11.

So dXXd TTOU &j dXXd ri p.riv and the like. XI. In a reply to what is conceded or approved of in the main, dXXa is abruptly used in despatching an objection to some part, before a general approbation is expressed as, dXX' OTTWS pev eyw
; ;

efyeiv
f

v/jiiis,

prjb' vTrovoelre'

roye per TOI ievat

:

els rriv TroXeiir,

rjbrj

Kal epol /SeXrtov elvat boicel irpos iravTO.

Xenoph. Cyrop.

and rather: irav\ dXXa bcvpl KaracXt>/e<s 7rpo<rAristoph. Vesp. 1203. So with /i), and not rather ; when preference of something following is expressed, without absolute exclusion of something preceding;
It signifies,
:

3,20. XII.

fjiavdave

as, uroTfov roils TOIOVTOIS oieadai biopdovv (jriv TroXtv), Kal ry Kal roTs robots, Aristot. Rep. ii, 5.

dXXa

fjiij

rots

^tXooro^'a

AAAA
II.

ELLIPTICAL.

ON THE
'AXXa
is

ELLIPTICAL AND

THE SUPPOSED REDUNDANT

EMPLOYMENT OF AAAA.
I.

Phaedrus says

&c.
like,
II.

elliplically to indicate confidence or readiness ; as in reply to Socrates, dXX' ev 'iadi, on eei rov0' oi/rws, Plato Phaedr. x. p. 314. ed. Bip. underst. OVK oKvtjaet, or the

used

before d\Xd. In objections,

:

when no

absolute opposition or contrariety

is

signified

Persia, an

as, to Ismenias, requesting an audience of the king of officer answers, dXX', w %elve 0??/3a7e, ropos e^rlr evr^wptos

Htpvais, &c. .Elian. V. H. i, 21. In Xenoph. M. S. iii, 11, 18. it occurs in four different senses in dXXa pa At", etyrj (Socrates), OVK avros eXiceadai the same passage
:

irpos ae j3ov\ojnai f
(j)T)

dXXd

ffe

Trpbs eyue

Tropeveffdai.

'AXXa

7ropevcroinat t

TIS

(Theodota), JJLOVOV vTro&e%ov. In the (piXwTepa aov evbov y.

said
;

'A XX'
first

vtrobe^ofjiai ae, etyrj' eav jj.ii place it is corrective of what

;

in the third it desecond, adversative notes readiness, but so that it is opposed, as it were, to the doubt of the other party, whether she would come; in the fourth it expresses consent qualified with an exception. III. In alternate brief objections and answers, with an ellipsis of a XX' eicl STTI rrjv elprjvvjv ; dXX' vTrfjp-^ev aTraartv. irorepov or dpa Toy TroXe/iov ; dXX' avrol irepl eipyvrjs e(3ov\eijeoOe : Demosth. pro Cor. p. 233. [I. 12.] ed. Reisk. IV. In approbation dXXa Ka\js JJLOL boKels Xeyetv, Plat, de Rep.

Theodota had

in the

iv.

/cat

el^at.

vvv, e<paffav t Xa/3wv rovs 'tTTirovs, 7ro/et, OTTCJS apiarov boKei aoi dXXa be^opai re, etyr}, KOI ayadrj Tv^y rjfjiels re t7nre~is yevoipeda,

Kal

vjjiels

bteXoire

TCI KOLVCL

'.

Xenoph. Cyrop.
in
;

iv, 5,

51.

V. For ou
or rejected
&atf*6viot
:

/toyov, feat ri ^et

dXXa

superadding to what is not denied dXX' r/juels avrot cat Aa*:eTOVS aXXovs Xeyetv
Kra),

TToXefj-ely yriBijfjtev

belv

even

we

ourselves too,

and

the

La-

cedcemonians, &c. Demosth. Phil, iii, p. 117- [I- 9-] ed. Reisk. See 2 Cor. vii, 2. VI. It is used correctively, with an ellipsis of a negative, when something of less moment, which has preceded, is denied, and is opposed by something of greater moment following ; as in 1 Corinth. but. x, 20. where it may be rendered, nay, or nay VII. It is used elliptically in the beginning of books, chapters, or 'AXXa 6avspeeches, to excite attention to something remarkable; as, &6w \eyeiv commences a speech in Xenoph. Cyrop. pctffTa [lev taws 13. and d\X' eywye vfjuv e0eXw etTrelv 'PoSiW oaj>, a chapter in ii, 1 Mian. V. H. i. where it refers to something preceding; as in the be,

the Memorabilia; and ginning of Xenophon's Symposium it refers to In the beginning so in the beginning of the epwriKos X. of Demosth. of Xenophon's book de Lacedsem. Rep. ctXX' eyio e v vor] aa s Trore, o>$
r/

?,TrapTr),

&c. it has a sense of asseveration. VIII. In expressions made abrupt by rage , Aristoph. Pint. 592.

as,

dXXa

o-e

Zevs

4
IX.
It

AAAA

TAP.

sometimes abruptly commences a dialogue, as in that of Menippus and Proteus in Lucian, [p. 193. ed. Salmur.] 'AXX' vbwp OVK aniQavov, &c. where if it refers to p.ev ye yivevdai, c5 Ilpwrev, any thing, it must be to something imaginary, and which must be supposed to have preceded the author's commencement. X. For dXXd ye, at least ; as, et ft)) 7ra<n bvvarov, dXXd Kara ^vXat : Aristot. See Xenoph. Cyrop. v, 5, 33. [See Abr. of Vig. p. 173, iii.] XI. 'AXXa has been erroneously supposed redundant. In Iliad \J/,
In Iliad </, 771. it appears 319. e. g. it retains its adversative force. to be a mere repetition (on account of the preceding parenthesis) of dXXa in v. 7^8. and to have the same sense. In Demosth. c. Aristog. rS>v pev els auTijpiav avr i. 0epoVrwi/ p. 771- [1. 11. ed. Reisk.] a XX' oi/6' OTIOVV TrdpeoTtv e-^v, it serves for asseveration. The form is elliptical; q. d. ov\ on. peya rt, dXX' ovb' OTLOVV : a stronger negaSo dXX' ovbe pucpov, Demosth. de fals. tion than ovb' OTIOVV simply. leg. p. 352. [1. 21.]ed. Reisk. and dXX' ovbe TO fjHKporarov, Proam. In Aristoph. Nub. 1367. 1372. dXXa urges or p. 1455. [1. 18.] In Xenoph. Anab. i, 3, 3. it adds emphasis to asseveration. exhorts.
1. In this combination yap introduces a reason for TAP. the opposition, diversity, or objection to something preceding, which
is

AAAA

Xevffatt),

explicitly, as, 'AXXa yap Kpeovra TOVS irapeffr&ras Xoyous : Eurip. Phceniss. 1318. the construction being, dXXd Travaw TOVS Xdyovs, \evaau) yap Kptovra. So

signified

by dXXa; sometimes

iravffb)

in Plato Phaedr. p.

&c.

228. (t. x. p. 282. ed. Bip.) dXXa yap ovSerepa, [See Abr. of Vig. p. 173. v.] and the causal proposition sometimes follows explicitly with a repetition of yap ; as, dXXd yap, OTI /uei/ TraXaiorarot ovrot ol vop.oi elal, erases* 6 yap AvKovpyos Kara TOVS 'HpacXet'Sas
II.

Xeyerai yevetrdat Xenoph. Rep. Lac. c. 10. But the force of each particle in this combination is sometimes more latent and that in a threefold manner. First, when the opposition or objection itself involves a cause, of which yap is the indication ; as in dXXa yap voarov irpofyaais y\vKepov KutXue p.ivai t Find. the sense being, Pyth. iv, 56. where yap performs the office of &d
: ; ;

dXXa cK(t)\voi>TO /ueTvat bta voffTov yXvKepov irpoQaow. Ov. Met. vi, 152. Virg. ^n. vi, 28. dXXa yap, ort

So sed enim,

iv Liraprri /udXiorra iretQovTat TOIS appals re /cat rots vo/uots, to-yuev airavres : Xenoph. de Lac. Rep. c. viii. q. d. dXXa ort /uevev ZTT. o-a^es, rouro yap
III. Secondly, when recourse must be had to a repetition of something preceding; as, dXXa yap ev $>ov biicrjv buoopev u>v av evQ&be. abiKriaufjiei', Plato de Rep. ii, p. 366. where between dXXa and yap we must understand OVK d/^utot d7raXXd^o//ey. Or when the reason indicated by ydp is elicited from what follows; as in Xen. Mem. ii, 1, 17. where the sense is the same as if the words had run thus, dXX' ot ets rj)i> fiaffi\iKrlv OVK citrtv rkyy-^v icaibevofjievoL v&aif*ovffTepoi
Viiiv.

ph

W-

TI

yap

ktafyepovai,

&c.

IV. Thirdly, when the deficiency is to be supplied by something extraneous; as, icat xpr/at/xov pev eboKet elvac dXXa yap ovrc rpe-

AAAA
^>etv

FE.
>

KqyaOos Kaprj\oi>, &ar erro^eTo-Qai, ovre, &c. where we must understand, but that use of camels was abolished, for, &c. and in Aristoph. Ach. 738. after

ovSeis edeXet KO\OS

vii,

Xen. Cyrop.

1.

dXXa, ovbev ^aXe^rov is to be understood ; in Horn. II. 0, 581. avTearrj. V. Other words are sometimes inserted between dXXd and yap both in verse arid in prose as, Bavpaara pev, 0rj, 'iaus Sow Xeyeiv,
;

dXXa yivwffKb) yap on Xoyoi, ^v^dls, &c. Xenoph. Cyrop. ii, 1,

.

QavfjLdffTa..

Lamachus
el/nt

teal /udXiara evbvovrai rats After dXXa understand OVK &rn ravri Xeyets vv rov orparj/yoV, Trrw^os &v ;

ovrot

13.

Dicaeop. eyw yap

Trrw^os

Ach.
else.

594-.

why what
difference

are
is

The

Lamachus dXXci ris yap el; Aristoph. you then? if not a beggar, then something noted by dXXa, the ratiocination by yap but
;
: ;

the sentence takes an interrogative instead of an affirmative form, to elicit from Dicaeop. a declaration of what else it is that he is. VI. It is to be remarked that in the first of the cases, when the opposition and the reason are explicit, if the former, introduced by dXXa yap precedes, and the latter follows, then the latter being deserted as it were by its particle yap, is supported by be instead ; as,

dXXa yap
rwo-av be

Trepie^ovrai TOV OVOJJUITOS yuaXXor

:

T&V aXXwv

'Iti/rajy*

e'cr-

KO.I ol

lonians
etTre,

Kaflapws yeyovores"Iwves for these too are genuine Herodot. i, 146. [147-] aXXa yap TOVTOVS e&pev av 6'

TI bp&viv : Plato Phaedr. p. 26l. (t. X. p. 353. ed. Bip.) where the order of the sense is, dXXa av ciTre, ri

ev btKaarripioLS ol avribiKOi

&c.

ew^uev yap TOVTOVS."

AAAA FE.
to something

1.

When

something more general

is

to be restricted

special, with emphasis and enforcement, ye is added to dXXa. ovroi fcarayeXwev ar, says Phaedrus, (Plato Phaedr. p. 268.) Socrates concedes this general affirmation, but with an

more

emphatical restriction dXX' OVK &v dypoucws ye, olpat, Xot^op^o-etav but at least they would not revile us in a rude and coarse manner. ra5v 5' dyp/wv, el pr) Trdvra, dXXa rd ye TrXetffra Aristot. de Rep. i, p.
:

182.
In Aristoph. Nub. 400. [401. ed. Br.] dXXa opposes Jupiter's not destroying certain perjurers, to his striking his own temple; and ye introduces the stronger argument against his supremacy drawn from this last circumstance, with an indication that the argument drawn from his sparing the perjurers is no longer insisted on, as being
less

irrefragable and triumphant. The proper sense therefore of each particle remaining*, dXXd expresses some opposition to what precedes, and ye softens or qualifies that opposition : as in Luke xxiv, 21. where ov ^cuVerat, or the like,
II.
is

suppressed after dXXd. III. But the sense of these particles is not so obvious, when it depends on words not expressed. In JLIian. V. H. i, 32. Sinaeta, sudalso; for the

a Even according to Hoogeveen's own explication, the reason, in this passage of Plato, precedes instead of following; and perhaps it does so in that from Herodotus

words

ZffTuffav Se,

&c. seem

rather to contain an admission or concession of Herodotus than an affirmation.

J. S.

AAAA AH. AAA*

H.

denly meeting Artaxerxes, is in great perplexity, because he has nothing to present to him according to custom: dXX' ovros ye, continues ZElian, vrpos rov Trorauov rov irXrjffiov irapappeovra eXflwy avv &c. where there seems to be an ellipsis, which may be thus airovbfj, supplied : 6'n av aXXos OKvriaeie pr) e^wv aia bovvai t dXX' ovros, KcuVep i Kara {J.YJ yuv t irpos rov Trorauov ye rov irXrjffiov eXOwv, KCLI apvffa.fj.evos So aXXa will answer to owiiaete understood, ovros rov vSaros, &c.
to aXXos, and (/Sards
iiceivos

ye

to

am.

similar ellipsis

is

in c. 34.

dXX'

ye avXXaflwv TO iraibiov, &C. 'AXXd ye are sometimes found with an omission of the enunciation of opposition before them ; when the ellipsis is to be supplied from the context: e. g. ear ovv dXXd vvv y' en ideXijffrjTe arpareveaOat : Demosth. Ol. iii, p. 37- 1 18. ed. Reisk. i. e. etTrep OVK aXXws, dXXa vvv ye. [Since not before, yet at least now. See Abr. of Vig. note o
p. 173.]

combination neither of the particles is redunddXXa is opposed to e^ei, otypa reXeao-i/ to avrfjuap ^6\ov icaraTre^, and ye concedes in some measure what So far is either from precedes, but presses more what follows. being idle, that it is perhaps even to be understood when not expressed: e. g. one may suppose el /*?) 6'Xov, /ueoos ye, in Demosth. to be said for dXXa pepos ye, since 6'Xoi> and pepos are opposed. Thus dXXd ye is equivalent to at certe, at saltern, yet at least : v. c. in Cic. de Orat. ii, c. l6. V. In Soph. Electr. 412. there is a transposition on account of the metre <5 0eoi Trarp^loi, avyyeveade y' dXXa vvv. underst. eiVore. 'AXXa answers to el, and yv>, limited by ye, to TTOTC.
IV.
in

Thus

this

ant.

In Horn.

11.

a, S3.

AAAA AH.

1.

Here each

particle retains

its

proper force

dXXd

that of opposition, and &) that of urgency: so in transition, or change of subject : dXXctTroiJ S>/ /3ovXei Kadtgouevot avayvw^ev ; Plato Phaedr. p. 228. (t. x. p. 287- ed. Bip.) and Euthyphro, having inquired and heard who was the accuser of Socrates, dismisses that topic, and

dXXa j) says, dXXa &ij riva ypatyyv ae yeypaTrrcu, Plat, in Euthyphr. 0eovs ovre \avQavetv ovre /3id<ra<r0ai bwaTov, after an admission that

men may be deceived

174.
II.
1.

Plat, de

Rep.

ii,

p. 365. [See

Abr. of Vig. p.
:

1.]

Sometimes these
S>)

particles are separated

oSe yap

/3aaiXevs

xw

e*
l

Soph. Antig.

l6'3.

by other words dXXd iry 6r/ ;

dXX*
Plat.

Phaedr.

AAA'
485.

H.
rj,

1.

'AXX'

ri

is

literally,

but either: Mrj tnv olvov vireprj

fio\a&r]v t dXX'

irplv fj,edveii>, eiraviaTaao,

Trapeuv

/xi)

tfive

Theogn.

II. It is sometimes [For interpreted, unless, except, except that. an explanation of this sense see Abridgement of Viger, p. 174. R. x.

and note jp.]

Trercu dXX'

Bip.)

following are additional examples: ovSev vTroXetirpodvfjius, Plat. Phaedr. p. 231. (t. x. p. 288. ed. ovbey a\\o aKOtrely TrpoaqKetv avQpwwu> KO.\ nepl T&V aXXwr, dXX'
rj

The

Trotelv

AAA' HTOI.

AAAA
;

KAI.

/ TO apiaTOV Kal TO /3e\rtorov, Plat. Phaed. fiorjdovvTes efjtol, dXX' /) opQov re KCU biKaiov

III. When ?/ is repeated after ctXXa, its ordinary disjunctive sense obvious to every one; see 2 Cor. i, 13. [Abr. of Vig. p. 174. 1. 45.] IV. 'A.iredarov av, dXX' r) as Tvpavvos fjLovov, aXX' ert vofiigwv eetx $K&tKot>: Lucian. Tyrannic, [p. 801. E. ed. Salmur.] i.e. dXX' OVK
is

rtVa aXXov \6yov l^ovfft, Plat. Apol. Socr. p. 34.

vas; why, are you mad? Soph. Electr. 879. [See Abr. of Vig. p. The following is an example of its affirmative sense, (in 175.1. 3.] truth, in good truth, really,) dXX' i\ ireirovQa 5eV VTTO tyvuv Eurip. Alcest. 819. Barn. [See Abr. of Vig. p. 174. 1. 45. and note
1. Here dXXa introduces AAA' HTOI. something different from what has preceded, and rot, being confirmative, presses what follows,

aXXws ?} us Tvpavvos povov. V. 'AXX' r/ is to be distinguished from dXX' r), which latter is sometimes interrogat ive, sometimes affirmative. dXX' % obvrrj o-e e't'X^e; what, are you seized with pain ? Xen. Symp. i, 15. aXX* i\ iJte^rj-

as preferable ?/ prefixed to roc denotes division or distribution, wherefore two members, with pkv and be, commonly follow. So that by the whole phrase, something preceding being reprobated or disap;

proved, something different and preferable is proposed. Thus iti Horn. 11. i, 65. dXXa opposes banqueting to war, rot presses the former, and 7} followed by /iey and 5e indicates distribution of employ-

ment, by which some are to prepare supper, and others to keep watch. II. Sometimes the opposition or difference is not fully expressed, but what should have preceded is to be understood ; as in Horn. II. dXX' ??rot yuev eywv aTTOTravo-o^at, &c. where cessation is op0, 372. posed to the annoyance which Achilles has already suffered from Xanthus. III. Sometimes the reprobation or correction of what precedes is lighter; as in II. a, 211. where a lesser evil is allowed in preference
to a greater.

IV. This use gives rise to, or rather is accompanied by, that in which dXX' ?]rot denotes transition as, 'AXX' r/roi pkv rai/ra /uera^paNuv 6' aye, &c. II. a, 141. See also II. t, 697. Kal QVTIS.
;

1. Kat in its augmentative sense, even, is often dXXa, and often without ob puvov preceding; as, iravrcs SaetXXa Kal ol Travv yeyqKpvovres TrX?)*' r&v veoyv&v TOVTOJV KO.I rrjirliov' for ou fjiovov cKelrot, dXXa pafcores obvpovTut, Lucian. dial. mort. p. 443.

AAAA KAI.
to

TO.

added

K-ac.

II.

'AXXa
'Iva.

Kal

is

used when what

kv Tvpy, pybe
:

is
ret

more

is

added

to

what

is

less

as, Kal

(rot
jj,i)

kv 'Ap/3//Xots

btrjyri era) /.tat*

dXXa

Kat pexpts 'Ivhtiv i]\Bov / advanced moreover even an far as to the Indi : Lucian. dial. mort. xii. III. St. Paul uses these particles with an ellipsis to be supplied from what precedes Rom. vi, 5. ix, 10. 2 Cor. xi, 1.
;

AAAA
1.

MHN,&c.

AAAA MHN, AAAA MHN FE, AAAA MHN FE KAI, 'AXXd pr\v serves for affirmation orasseveAAAA MHN KAI.
ration

as the Megarensian, in producing the pigs which he has brought for sale, says dXXa pay KaXal, Aristoph. Ach. 765. II. Hence it is used in assumption, as in the minor proposition of
;

[See Abr. of Vig. p. 174. ix.] sometimes (with the interposition however of some other word) followed by ye, which by its limitative power
a syllogism.
III.

And

in this use it is

strengthens a position either conceded by all, or legitimately deduced from premises ; as, OVKOVV Xvirovvrat /iev KOI yjaipovoi Kal oi i'ubpoves Ka-l
ol (fipovtuot, Kal ol SeiXot Kal ol dvfpetoi TrapairXrjtrtws. Kal ol av&peioi, ayadoi' ol Se 6etXot Kal ye
<f>p6n/jiot

'AXXa

/u

>/

o'/

a^poves, fcatco/. Kat \virovvrai ol ayaBoi. m Ka\ ol KUKOII Plat. Tlapa7r\T)ffi(i)S apa yaipovai Gorg. p. 4p8. (t. iv. p. 111. ed. Bip.) As if he' had said, if any thing must be granted, this certainly must be granted, that the wise

are

good &c.
t

IV.

And without

this syllogistical

method dXXa

^v

ye has an

illa-

tive force

with limitation.

Thus Cebes, being asked by Socrates

whether the soul be visible, answers, ov^ v?r' dv0pu7rwv ye, not at least by man : to which Socrates rejoins, dXXa p.riv riuels ye ra opard KOI ra pfi ry T&V a.v8puKwv (ftvaet eXeyo/uev, but when we spoke of things visible and invisible, we certainly meant such as were so to mankind :
Plat. Phaed. p. 79. (c. 26. ed. Fisch.) V. 'AXXa ftjjv ye is put for aXXa ^i]v ye KCU, as in Plat. Phasdr. p. 240. (t. x. p. 306. ed. Bip.) Socrates, after he has said that a lover wishes his beloved to be deprived of parents, friends, and relations,

adds, dXXa pv\v overlay ye e^ovra ^pvo-ov, fj TIVOS a\\r}s KTrjffews, ovre ewaXwroi' 6/io/ws, oi/re dXdvra vp.era^ipifrrov r/y^trerat, but moreover certainly if he has property, &c. VI. 'AXXa fjiriv ye is used in answers conceding more than is asked ; as in Plato, to the question whether to know and not to know be not possible to us, it is answered, dXXa pfiv aXXo y' ovbev Xenrerai wept eKaoTOv, 7rX)v ei'Se^at ?/ pij eibevat, Theaet. p. 188. (t. ii. p. 147. ed.
Bip.) VII. The ellipsis of KO.I, but without the limiting ye, is supplied by Aristot. ii. de Rep. c. 9. where, certain defects in the Lacedaemonian republic having been noted by him, he adds, dXXa fjtr)v Kal ra ?rept rrtv tyopetav e'^et 0awXws, but moreover what regards the magistracy of the Ephori also, &c. So Plato de Rep. v. p. 468. (t. vii. p. 42. ed.
Bip.)

dXXa

wv

K al Ka0' "Oprjpot',

&c.

VIII. Sometimes ye follows <ca, some other word however intervening ; as, dXXa p)i> KOI yua^etra/ ye nav wov, &c. Plat, de Rep. v. p. 467- (t. vii. p. 39. ed. Bip.) IX. The asseveration of dXXa priv is softened by TTOV : as, dXXd juriv

ye rwv SovXwi/ i^u^as KCKTrjadat 5e|a//ie0' av f*a\\ov ras eKovaius, y ras aKovaius apapravovoas, &c. but truly there is no doubt I think that, &c. Plat. Hipp. min. p. 3/5. (t. iii. p. 223. ed. Bip.) X. Sometimes d\Xa and p)p are separated by ov which negatives
TTOV Tas

AAA' OY.
o'ierai TTOV,

AAA' OYN,
jtn/v
:

&c.
/u)j/

9
aye
TLS olbev,

some other word following, and not

a
/u?)

as, d\\' ov

olbev avTa elvai

ed. Bip.) where Plato

might have

said,

Plat. Theaet. p. 188. (t. ii. p. 147. dXXa ova oierai TTOV.

^v

AAA' OY. 1. In dXX' ov, ov does not affect oXXa, but connects with something following, which it negatives ; as, ri be; j(pvao^pi](rovrcis oiet Tovffbe vvv ev6a.be a^l^Oat, dXX' ov Xoywv aKovffOfj.erovs ; Plat, de Hep. v. p. 450. (t. vii. p. 4. ed. Bip.) and not to hear, &c. II. So also when the form of the sentence is declarative, and not TOVS avro apa exaaTOv TO ov cKTiraZouevovs, interrogative <f>tXoa6(f)Ovs, d\X' ov QtXobofyvs, K\r]Teov, and not lovers of opinion : Plato ib. III. For dXX' ov, aXXa firi is used by Plato in the same sense: bta
:

--

Tavrrjv TIJV atTiav VTrepfiaXXeiv,

fj.el2.ov

dXXd
J

yu) TrXrfOet Kal bia TO trXfjQosi

elvai,

dXX' ov

jueyeflet

Phaed.

c.

49.

AA A' OYN, AAA' OYN

discretive, adversative, or in for it' collects or concludes

what

is

to

FE. 1. 'AXX' olv is combined of aXXa, whatever sense taken, and ovv collective not only from what precedes, but from be understood extrinsicallv thus in those verses of Euri;
:

--

pides, 'E/zot fJtev, el Kal prj KO.&' 'EXX^vwv "^Qova Tedpap^ed^ dXX' ovv ZvveTa p.oi boKe'is Xeyetv, (Phoeniss. 501.) ovv collects from what has preceded, that Polynices has spoken wisely, and dXXa opposes what

p) : yet hoivever in my judgment you speak wisely. discretive or disjunctive in this phrase in Plat, de Rep. vi. p. 509. (t. vi. p. 121. ed. Bip.) VOTJITOV bvw avrw elvcu, Kat fiaffiXeveiv, TO fj.ev VOTJTOV yevovs re Kal TOTTOV, TO & av oparou, 'iva f/>)
is last,

to

ei

Kal

II.

'AXXa

is

ovpavov eiiruv bofa

biTTa
e'icri,

trot

bpaTov, VOTJTOV

dXX' ovv e^eis raCra aofyi^eadai irept TO ovo[j.a' : but however then, be that as it may f you

have,

&c.
by ye
:

III. 'AXX' ovv is qualified

i}v *rat

ol 6'

(monarchs)

uet

rots

avTols

KaTabeeaTepav e-^iiioiv, dXX' ovv rals ye Here TTO\V iiXXwv Trpoe^ovffiv : Isocr. Nicocl. p. 59- in it.
Ti]V fyvaiv

dXXa opposes

Ttpoe\ovGiv to TIJV tyvvtv KctTaceeaTepav e\iffiv f ye limits their superiority to experience or tact, raTs e/^7retpt'ats, and ovv collects their experience CK TOV ael UVTOVS eiriaTaTelv.

follows negative hypothetical propoaXXo TrXeoveKTOVffiv, dXX' ovv eXnioi ye ffirovbaiats Isocr. ad Demon, p. 20. eV ovv bwapeOa, etre ^/* vTrepexovffiv dXX' ovv TO ye irpoQvpov Trape-^ofjievot: Plat, de Leg. ix. p. 859- (t. ix. p. 14. ed. Bip.) 'iaws jj.ev ovv, MS eiKa$(t), rpovov Ttva OVK eotKev ov yap iravv avyywpd), TOV ev TO"IS Xoyots ffKoirovfj-evov ret OVTU, ev eiKoai paXXov

IV. 'AXX' ovv ye

;

commonly

sitions

as, et
:

fj,rjbev

GKOTrelv,

r)

TOV ev

TO~IS

p. 100. (c. 39. ed. Fisch.)

Plat. Pheed. epyois' dXX' ovv by Tavrrj ye wpfjirjffa : In this last passage, to understand the

conclusion
tiXXrj

we must have

recourse to an ellipsis: q. d.

eiirep [e?re<]

OVK eijv, dXX' ovv by TavTrf ye. V. 'AXX' ovv ye is used in transition, as in Aristoph. Vesp. 1185. where through ovv a transition is made from scenic spectacles to those of games, and dXXa marks difference, et //>} ftovXei TOVTO

being understood.

Hoog.

10

AAAA TOI, &c.

AAAA
rot,

AAAflS TE KAI.

KAI TOI. 1. In TOI KAI, confirms what dXXct affects either as a discretive or an adversative particle ; /cat added intends its force. etKo'rws ye av aXXa rot /caVetvoi/ riyeladat ^pr) vvv ijbrj atyobpa aTropelv, aTTOp&v' &c. Plat. Sophist, p. 231. (t. ii. p. 22$. ed. Bip.) where dXXa KOI indicates an ellipsis of ov povov av aTcopels before it. Neoptolemus to Ulysses threatening to draw his sword : dXXu Kypt TOI ravrov roS' Philoct. 1248. ot//et Spwi'ra, KOV IJL\\OVT en i Soph. II. Tot strengthens the force of dXXa in objections or exceptions : Megar. biajreivapes aiel TTOTTO irvp. Dicveop. aXX' rjbv rot, rjv av\os napr}, why that is a pleasant thing enough, if, &c. Aristoph. Ach. See also Eurip. Phoen. 1653. Xen. Cyrop. iii, 3, 24. dAX' 752*.
TOI,
a\\a
rot
ctpfce* rot,

AAAA

AAAA

w Kvpe, &c.

AAAH2 TE

KAI.

1.

This combination

is

employed

in

con-

It is interpreted especially ; necting enunciations simply together. being literally, both otherwise, or in other respects or accounts, and . II. It introduces, in various constructions, some heightening circumstance, or reason, or efficient cause of something : rjbtaTov eartv ev TV /3/w TO TU avrov vpcLTTeiv, aXXtos re cat et rts eXotro rotavra iravTwv airoffrepeloQai \virvip6v cart Trparretv, &c. Plato Epist. ix. KCU ^aXeTrov, aXXws re K$V VTT' e%9pov T<f TOVTO trvji flawy : Demosth. de Cor. [p. 227. ! 8. ed. Reisk.] ToXfiijTeoy TO a\r}&s eiTrelv, aXXws re icat irept aXrjdeias Xeyovra: Plat. Phaedr. p. 247.1. 26. So Xen. Memor. ii, 8, 2. Thucyd. vii, 80. (t. x. p. 322. ed. Bip.) jy a\\r) aiKia /cat t<ro//otpta TWV KaK&v e^pvaa rtva ofio)s TO /uera woXXwi/ aXXws re /cat otTro Kovtytffn'. ov& &s pybta ev rig irapovri ebo^nSeTO* o'/as XayuTrpor^ros Kal av^fjiaTOs TOV TTQ&TOV es otav TeXevTrjv Kal ra?re/VOTIJTO. a(f>lKTo: Thucyd. vii. c. 75. p^orov ovv rjfuy Kara TO vbariov
fipe-)(ovffi

TOVS Trobus 'ievaif

CTOVS re
es
:

&puv TOV
Xots

*rat

Tfjs

^juepas

Kal OVK arjbes, aXXws re Kal T^v^e rr\v Plat. Phaedr. p. 22p. 1.6. (t. x. p. :

284. ed. Bip.)

{/TTOTrrot

Qoovfiov

peyav
iv. c.

KaT^ffTrjaav,

rWes

Thucyd.

104.

h. e.

ctXXtus re Kal aXX^Sta re aXXa /cat bta TO

it

aXXjJXoes VTTUTTTOVS elvai.

III.

The

passages

nature of the phrase will appear from considering where other words intervene between aXXws re and
!

in

/cat,

which are then obviously referred to distinct parts of the sentence : aXXwsre yap aTrtorov ro 22. and foil.] [See Abr. of Vig. p. 127Heliodor. iEthiop. c. 17. So iii, : fiovKoXwv yet'os, Kal vvv ir\eov
c. 4.
viii, c.

13.

Sometimes when other words intervene, aXXws re and /cat are still in the same member of the sentence as, dXXd pot TO. ^pry/uara TOV vlov curobovvat KeXevaov, a 'Xa/Bei', aXXws re pevroi Kal /ca/ctDs TreTrpaydrt :
;

Aristoph. Nub. 1270. ed. Kust. IV. We see that ctXXws re /cat is used as aXXoVre /car, or aXXo/ re /cat, when words intervene, and after /cat follows what is principally denoted : Heliodor. viii, 14. Thucyd. iv, 100. and the phrase is often found where aXXos re /cat would seein rather to be required ; as,
'iaaoi

yap,

on

'nrvimov

aTparevpa kv VVKT\ ropa^uiSes eernv, aXXws re

iii ;

kat /3dp/3apoM

Xen. Cyrop.

3, 14.

foraXXo

re

feat.

AMEAEI.

AN.

1 1

V. The order of the words is sometimes changed, especially when expression of way or manner follows; as, ola bi} TrpetrpvriKos re aXXws ecu irpbs rijs obouropias KeKOiritafAvos t VTTI^W Karel^eroi Heliodor.
vi,

14.
1. 'A/zeXet is properly a verb, fear or solicitude of another by is primarily used expression of our yourself easy, &c. See

AMEAEI.
to

and
its

remove the

own confidence: be of good heart; make Aristoph. Ach. 36? Lysistr. 172. II. When it assumed the nature of a particle,

it

remained

still

con-

See Xenoph. firmative, signifying certainly, in truth, in reality, &c. Cyrop. viii, 3, 4. Theophr. Eth. Char, [c.xiii. p. 70. 1. 1. ed. Simps. c. xvi. p. 79. 1. 5. c. xxiii. p. 97. 1. 3. c. xxv. p. 102. 1. 6.] Lucian. Nigrin. t. i. p. 65. [p. 39. A. ed. Salmur.]
III. It came afterwards to be used on very light occasions in the sense of nimirum, nempe, where there is no appearance of endeavour to remove fear or solicitude ; as, KCU e/^e roivvv, 6 FXavKwv e'^q, KOWII)vov rrjs \^r)(j>ov ravTrjs rldere. 'A^Xet, efyr) o 0/aao-yjua^os, Trdffi ravra bebeyjLieva iiplv re^ic'e : why as to that, said Thrasymachus, &c. PJato de Rep. v. [See note k, p. 129- of Abr. of Vig.] IV. 'A/ieXet be, utique vero ; c't/^Xei be Kal, quin etiam: aueXei 5e KCLI TridrjKov 6pe^ai Metros, moreover, but besides: Theophr. Char,

cap. v. 4. V. For rotyapovv, Suid. for

to,

cbrXws, ovrws, (OJTWS'?) rotyapovv

Hesych.

AN, KE, KEN.

*A*> (KG or
is

KCV in poetry),

is

a particle by

which the force of affirmation

simply diminished.

I._OF THE POWER OF AN, (TERMED AOPlITOAOriKH,) IN RENDERING THE SENSE OF OTHER WORDS LESS DEFINITE AND DETERMINATE.
I. The primary and predominant power of ay, and to which all its other powers must be referred, is that of rendering the meaning of other words less certain and definite ; by os av and 6Wts civ no cer-

willing he is about to do
II.

is designated, by o n av no certain thing, by ov av and av no certain place, by OTTWS av no certain manner, by orav no certain time by ypatyot av the certainty of an act, or actuality, is in OVK taken away. Thus also when a negative is added to verbs but in Kvpte, el %s ube, OVK av curedave the act is absolutely denied aireOave fjiov 6 abe\<j>os, (John ii, 32), the certainty of the act denied in four different is taken away. The act then may be taken away manners fora person may be said to be able to do a thing, or to be to do it, or it may be said that it behoves him to do it, or that

tain person

OTTOV

it.

In this its first power, now treated of, av is jo'med especially with the relative os, with uaos, OOTIS, and with the adverbs ov, oirov, 6acc$, with nearly the same signification as the Latin

12

AN.

a av bey avvapfjLotrdfjvai, Xen. usually with a subjunctive mood, as, most commonly with the and Ach. 355. ii. and Aristoph. Cyrop. subjunctive of the aorists ; as, juerctjueXet, &v av ev irotriauHrtv i Piat. Phzedr. p. 264. (t. x. p. 358. ed. Bip.) and Horn. II. a, 527. Act.

Apost.

eiriffTrifj-nv

atai larpos elvat, /cat aXXo*> Troieiv, $ av rr\v rovrwv vrapaSw : Plat. Phaedr. p. 268. 1. 15. (t. x. p. 366. ed. Bip.) and in p. 248. 1. 22. (p. 324. ed. Bip.) Matth. xxii, 9. Sometimes with an indicative, as in Aristoph. Act). 873. or an optative, Iliad, o, 550. [On the use of av with these different moods see Abr. of Vig.
vii, 3.

It is joined also with adverbs, as ov av, oirov av, 176. r. ii.] wheresoever, Plat. Phxdr. p. 251. 1. 42. (t. x. p. 332. ed. Bip.) OTTWS av, howsoever, in whatsoever manner ; &c. oaaKis av, as often soever as, 1 Cor. xi, 25. 26.

p.

II.

ON THE POTENTIAL USE

*AN

OF

AN, TERMED AYNHTIKOI.

takes away the act of verbs in a fourfold way; with regard I. Its most frequent either to power, or will, or duty, or future time. use is the potential, or bwyriKos, [in which it properly signifies possibility

without actuality,] usually with an optative mood, as in Aristoph. Ach. 313. Demosth. Olynth. i. [p. 13. 1. 6. ed. Reisk.] In Latin a subjunctive mood is used in the same sense see Ov.
:

Metam.
II.

ii,

12.
:

fj.a\iara

Sometimes with an infinitive yr]6rjfj.ev yap ev ry roiavry (TroXet) av evpeiv biKaioavvrjv, Kartbovres be Kplvai av o TrdXcu $r}rovfjiev: Plat, de Rep. iv, p. 420. (t. vi, p. 327- ed. Bip.) where av evpeiv and So av nadelv for TtaQelv Kplvai av are for evpeiv and Kplvai bvvaadat.
bvvaffdai, Plat. Phaedr. p. 235. fin.
III.
(t.

x. p.

Not unfrequently

with participles.

297- ed. Bip.) [See the examples in the

Abr. of Vig. p. 177.I.9-]

IV. [On the construction of av with an indicative mood, see Abr. of Vig. p. 176. iii. and note u.~\ V. With the indicative of any tense it often signifies the doing or occurrence of something, not at any particular time, but usually, frequently, every now and then, or as it may happen, upon occasion : [see examples in the Abr. of Vig. p. 177. 1. 15.] It is also used for evading a direct confession or affirmation, to give some appearance of uncertainty to what is certain. [As an example of this use Hoogeveen cites the passage of Aristoph. Plut. 983. differently interpreted in the Abr. of Vig. p. 177.] It has also a conjectural sense, especially with ra^a or taws' as ra^ av flovfiuvtyrj, Aristoph. Vesp. 277' a"d presently afterwards, ra^ av tflTftjs Ketrcu Trvperruv. VI. *Av changes the signification of the future indicative from as,' H reov, ?/ Ata^ros iwv yepas, certainty or necessity to possibility
N

i)

'Obvaijos

"Afo

138. where

aw

Agamemnon,
i,

fCC^oXwfferat, ov Kev tVw^uat : Iliad, a, expressing somewhat depending on the will of and therefore more certain, is put without icev, but as expressive of something not depending on his will,

eXojv, 6 be tcev

as

AN.
and therefore more uncertain,
Abr. of Vig.]
is

13

qualified

by

KCV.

[See note

p. 1/8.

VII. When av is joined with bvvauai, some contingency, case, or condition is put, explicitly or implicitly, on which the power expressed by bvvauai is represented as depending thus Lucian says, had Athens been the birthplace of Homer, ovb' av els CTT' W^s a/ois e</,i:

Keffdai

bvvairo ry Xdyw

&r}uoadevrjs,

Dem. Encom.

p.

891.

Ttjv

rov rw ovrt pqroptKov re KUI iriQavov re^rrfv TTWS Kal irodev av TIS bvva tro TToptffaadai; Plato Phaedr. p. 269. 1. 31. (t. x. p. 369. ed. Bip.) underst. eav fiovXotro ijroi peXXoi prjTOpiKos yeveadai.

III.

ON THE PARTICLE AN

IN WILL.

ITS

SIGNIFICATION

OF

I.

possibility.

*Av sometimes indicates volition or choice, rather than power or With the optative r/s 5' ovrws avovs, os fyue Ka rrp iatro
: ;

vuds av, Megar. Aristoph. Ach. 737* he does not intimate that no one could or ought to buy them, but that no one
(pavepav kapiav
for

With the 2 aor. opt. Horn. II. a. v. 60. to. indication of will is particularly observable, when an optative with av is explained by an imperative ; as, Xeyots av for 6e\e 1- 12. Xeyeiv, Plato Phaedr. By -n-poayois av, Plat. Phaedr. p. 229. this form somewhat of civility is usually imparted to a command or

would choose
II.

An

injunction
in

but not always, for the order of Orestes to ^Egisthus, e. g. ; v Soph. El. 1498. x w o7s " v * aw X > * s imperious and peAbr. of 1. 25. and note #.] 177. [See remptory. Vig. p. III. In oblique or indirect phraseology it is joined with an infinitive also in its signification of will as, etyrj 6 'Appevtos TTO\\OV av TOVTO
l
l

vrpiacrdai:

Xenoph. Cyrop. iii. p. 73. IV. With verbs, which of themselves

signify will,

av denotes

1.

an

inclination or willingness to wish ; as, flovXoifjtrjv av, w Swcpares, aXX' dppwSw, ar\ rovvavriov yevrjTai : Plat. Euthyphr. p. 3. 1. 6. (c. 2. init. ed. Fisch.) 2. a propension to be willing; as, at K e0eXw<rt Ilav3. a softened or civil injunction ; as, aaffdat iro\euoio, Iliad. 17, 374.

(3ov\oi uqv
6.

6' a v vpas Kal TOVTO biavofjaai, Xenoph. Cyrop. viii, 6, 4. It qualifies a wish expressed with regard to something already past and irreversible; as, apyfiv KXveiv av ovb' airaE, ej3ov\6fjirjv t Soph. Phil. 1232.

IV.

ON THE
is

SIGNIFICATION OF NECESSITY AND OF DUTY

BY AN.

"AN

adavaTov ^v^fj a v ei r\, Plat. Pha?dr. p. 246. and duty, as in ry OVK av but in the former fia<Ti\rjas ava aTop e'xwv ayopevots, Iliad. (3, 250. in the latter it and av an affirmation soften serves to ; passage only lias its signification of will. [See in. ii.]

said to signify necessity

as in e

ctvayicrjs

ayevvr^rov re Kal

14

AN.

V.

ON THE

SIGNIFICATION OF THE FUTURE BY AN.

I. *Av gives a signification of the future by taking off the actuality 1. obliquely, of what would have happened ; in the sense of verbs: with all moods except the imperative, and with the oblique tenses :

with the imperfect

av

KadeiXicere TpiaKoaias vavs*

l\v 5'

av

iroXts

irXea Qopiifiov ffTpartwTwv

ravr old' on av ISpare, Aristoph. Ach. 552. seqq. He recounts not what the Athenians could or ought to have done, but what they would have done. So St. John viii, 42. With the plusquamperfectum : avrip-iraaro av et pf) bt e/jie, Philo Jud.

Legat. ad Cai. p. 774. 1. 32. With the Aor. 1. in the sense of the plusquamperfectum : eKelvos OavfjiaffTos, ov 6 Mapavas, el ret bUaia at Movaai biKaaai ijdeXov, ctvreWith the 2 aor. indie, in the sense of bepev av ; Lucian. t. i. p. 244. the imperf. subj. OVTTOT av e ayaOov irarpos eyevro icaicos, Theogn. 436. in the sense of the plusquamperfectum : ml vv K' en nXeovas \vKt(t)v KTave bios 'Obvaaevs, Et //?), &c. Iliad, e, 679* s ^>> 544. add St. John xi, 32. With the optative : et <nriaToir)v t OVK av aroiros e't'qv, Plat. Phaedr. p. 229- 1. 25. With an infinitive : ri av oiei aKovvavras ciirelv, Plat. Phaedr. p. 268. 1. 16. (t. x. p. 366. ed. Bip.) II. 2. directly, of what will happen ; helping to supply the place of the future indicative; as, et 6e" ce ju>/ Swwo-tv, eyw be KCV avros eXxu/uat : but if they will not give it, I will take it myself: Iliad, o,
138. and immediately afterwards,
'Obvfffjos

v,

"A|w eXt^v, 206. and i, 157.

6 be KCV

?} reov, rj A'iavros liav yepas, T) See also cexoXwcrerat, ov Key tfcw/^at.

VI.

ON THE

ELLIPTICAL AND EXPLETIVE USES OF AN.

I. There is no ellipsis of cii>, when the optative mood is used without it to express a wish ; as, vfftv ^ev Qeoi bolev eKirepaai Uptapoio troXtVf &c. Horn. II. a, 18. II. An ellipsis of it may with more reason be supposed, when a word put without av must be taken in the same sense as if av were

expressed ; as, ro be ^vtrov irXfjOos e'lrj poi oaov pyre <j>epeiv t pyre ayetv bvvatro a\Xos rj 6 a&typwv, for oaov av, Plato Phaedr. So OTTOJS e^erarovs Xdyovs, ot Te-)(vr) Kal avev re^vris ypafyoivTO, for ot av, aaifjiev Ibid. p. 277- 1. 12. [but see Abr. of Vig. p. 179. r. iii.] III. There is an ellipsis of it in its potential use in Iliad e, 303. o ov bvo y avbpe Qepotev. [See note v. on p. 177 of the Abr. of

IV. When power, or want of power, is mentioned hypothetically, there is an ellipsis of av before <5vva/zcu, as, el fi.ij 1\v ovros napa 0eov, OVK rfivvaTO Trotelv ovbev, for OVK av jjbvvaTO : St. John ix, 33.

V. There is an ellipsis of it in its signification of will also aXXo ^vrcvcrps, &c. Alcaeus. See Hor, Od. i, 18, 1.

as,

AN.
VI. In
its

15

^kv \6yov avr$ at avvQr}Kai t when an aorist of the optative or subjunctive is used for the indicative of the future ; as with e/iTreo-ot, Eccles. xxxviii, 15. and with eorw, St. John xii, 27. VIII. There is another elliptical use of av, in which the ellipsis is not of that particle itself, but of some other word or words implied by the presence of av, as, apyvpiov opa^/uas av yrrjff* e'iKOffi Els ipanov y' o'fcrw & a vets vTrobr'ifiara Aristoph. Plut. 984. where yrrfae is to be understood again with the second av. This ellipsis is very frequent in such responsory phrases as TTWS av ; TTWS yap av ; Kal TTWS ay ; as, e<70' onus Qarepa yevotr av, xpvffos 77 apyvpos ; Answ. Kal TTWS civ ; rifj.1v
V aoret, fyuets S ev Heipaiei 7ifJiev, el^ov rtVa for el%ov av, Lys. adv. Agorat. p. 227and
:

[supposed] signification of duty : epSot ns r> eWros tlbelrj re^vriv, Aristoph. Vesp. 1422. VII. In its signification of the oblique future : et uv ovv ovros

underst. yevotTo

Plat. Phileb. p. 43.

I.

42.

(t. iv.

p.

275. ed. Bip.)

;

and presently afterwards, TTWS yap av ; viz. opdfis boZagotro Kal \exQeiij IX. Sometimes not only a preceding verb is to be repeated with av t but a negative also is to be added as, Socr. OVK av eir} TO /u>)
;

ravrov T$ xaipeiv ; Protarch. TTWS yap av; viz. ravrov OVK eiij; Plat. Ibid. p. 43. 1. 34. (p. 274. t. iv. ed. Bip.) X. Sometimes the ellipsis is of something not expressed before, but to be assumed extrinsically ; an example may be seen in Budseus p. 496. and in the Abr. of Vig. p. 179. r. ii. XI. *Av is said to be sometimes expletory or redundant ; but this has not been sufficiently proved from the passages adduced for that av purpose : e. g. in the passage cited by Buda?us, p. 497. Kovfyorepov o v or K e v a & [i e 6 a Kal evreX^orepov, roaovrtp ras eTrtovffas
Xvirelffdai Trore

6W

'

rjbuv av apiari] <ro uev re, Kal ei7r/r/<ro^ev, Kal Kadevbrjtrofjev : Xen. Cyrop. v, 3, 35. each av takes oft' actuality in the sense of the verb with which it is joined. In aXXa K$V evfaivro av yeveaQai, ci. rq>
flfjepas

Trapovra rvy^avet, Plat. Alcib. ii. p. 142. (t. v. p. 85. ed. Bip.) the second av affects yereaOat, [to which it imparts a future sense, which it would not otherwise have.] In the passage of Plato, de Legg. iv. p. 705. 1. 13. (t. viii. p. 163. ed. Bip.) TOVTO yap e-^ovtra
prj

(TroXts)

apyvpov Kal 'xpvaov idiom be no less considered as consisting of two members, to each of which one av belongs, than if it had been constructed as follows, iro\\rjv juev
7roXXj)v efaywyriv
Trape^ofji^vrj j/ojut'oymros

av

iraXiv avreTT/yUTrXar' av, the participle 7rapexofj.evr) is put, by an of the language, for a verb ; and the sentence may therefore

av napel^e, vopiafjaTOS & apyvpov Kal ^pvaov TraXtv avT7rlfj.In TTWS ^e y' av KaXtis Xeyots av ; Aristoph. Ach. 306\ the first av affects TTWS : without it TTWS would have so qualified KaX&s Xeyots, as to make the sense, in what manner, &c. but now TTWS av is equivalent to OVK: av eir) OTTWS, so that by a figurative queseayii)yfiv TrXar' av.
it denies the possibility of the thing. XII. But av is sometimes really repeated with one and the same word, to assist the memory or attention after a parenthesis of considerable length, as, OVK av eir' e/tr/s ye veorrjTOs ( ) we 0ayXws av o OTTovbotyvpos e^vyev, Aristoph. Ach. 210. waTrep ovv av, a v ebonovpev et av TIS ^'i^eye, Xeywv on * ( ) /J-erpius ry/^its

tion

--

---

16
Trpos

AN.

APA.

(t. vi.

c Plat, de Rep. iv. p. 420. I. 25. avrov airoXoyelffBcti, Xeyotres, also for the sake of more impressive incuU p. 327. ed. Bip.) be a OVK av, 17 av &oaets 'i<rws t cation, or of emphasis; as, U\KTJ ' also Aristoph. Vesp. 506. seqq. Orest. See a v 710. Eurip. o&oatfji
. :

&

[508. ed. Br.]

VII.
I.

ON THE CONDITIONAL

USE OF AN.

Besides the uses of av already mentioned, there is another in it is employed hypothetically for putting a case, or stating a supposition on which something else depends ; as, av aot 7rei0w/*e0a, Plat, de Rep. iv. OVTC yewpyos yewpyos eorcu, oi/re -cepayuevs Kepauevs p. 420. (t. vi. p. 328. ed. Bip.) if we are persuaded by you, then so

which
.

and

so.

This use of ay is so nearly akin to that termed aoptyroXoyiKos, that offTis av and av rts, oaoi av and av rives, OTTOV av and av TTOV, and the like, may be interchanged without any difference of meaning ; and so in Iliad, a, 527- for o TL Kev or av Karavevcrw, av TI Karavevan) may be substituted without alteration of the sense. III. This agreement is very apparent too, when a case or supposition is expressed by a participle with av, as, 01 be iroXXol oi/re av rvpat vibos bibovevrjs arroff^oivro av, oi/re arparrfylas Plat. Alcib. ii. p. 142. (t. V. p. 85. ed. Bip.) for av rvpavvls bibwrai: and eVe) yevouevov y av, dlov \eyouev, ayairdff&at av, for av yevrjTaii Plat. Politic, p. 301. 1. 34. (t. vi. p. 97. ed. Bip.) IV. *Ar (cat, or Kal av (always coalescing into K$V) signifies, even though, even if; as, <b' Kal Tvy^avy fiatriXevs 6 juieyas &v, TO. fjeyurra aKaGapTov ovra Plat. Sophist, p.' 230. 1. 38. (t. ii. p. 228. ed. Bip ) Sometimes jcai is omitted, so that av alone appears to have the same sense as av Kal or Kg.v, as, Kal yap, av aXrjdes y TO Xeyofievov, a/nvbpav Trotel TI}V fj.a6i]fftv avev TrapabetyuaTwv : Plut. de Anim. Procr. p. 1027. 1. 41.
II.
: :

I.

OF THE PRIMARY POWER OF APA, AND

USES.

ITS

VARIOUS

I. The primary power of apa is that of deducing consequences from premises. It is therefore, like ovv, collective or conclusive ; but

more

syllogistical,

being regularly employed

is

in

the conclusion
:

of

syllogisms, as ciXXa uqv

flu pot, elal Kal deoi'

in the prjv

minor proposition
elfflv

aXXa

elfft flw/utoi'

apa

e. g. el yap elvi cat deoi' there-

fore there are gods too: Lucian. in Jov. Trag. [p. 229- c. ed. Salmur.] See also Lucian. in Vit. Auct.p. 565. [p. 379. B. and D. ed. Salmur.] II. It concludes similarly in enthymemas, [syllogisms in which the major proposition is not expressed,] as, eyw aov TrXovtriwrepos ei/ui* eyw oov apa Kpeiatrtav Epictet. c. 66. where there are several other
'.

examples, ro viKelov eKaartf ry fyvaei, KpaTtarov Kal tfbtaTov ia& eKaar^' Kal ry dv0pw7rw brj 6 Kara TOV vovv (3ivs, etirep paXiGTa TOVTO avQp<i>irvs f

APA.
OVTOS
Kal evbatjioveffTaros
:

17

Aristot. 'HQtK. Nico/*. x, 7. apa "Apa is frequently thus used by Homer: e. g. iu II. e, 333. ovr &p 'Adnvatrj OVT 'E*'vw Diomed knew that Venus was feeble, and not of the
:

number of warlike goddesses; but Minerva and Bellona were wartherefore she could not be Minerva or Bellona. So in dialogues, when an inference is made by one party from a preceding affirmation or denial of another party; as, 11 ovv
like
:

III.

Trepl

4>vxns eXeyouev, bparbv elvat,

Tj

ov% oparoV; ov^ oparoV.

'Aeibes

apa.

Na/. 'OuoioTfpov apa ^v^)) ffw/xaros e<m rut dete7, TO be rw bpary ' Plato Phred. p. 79- (c. 26\ ed. Fisch.) IV. So also in a sorites, apa, through the accumulation of propositions, concludes or connects by the subject of the first proposition

and the predicate of the last. An example is in the book of Wisdom, See also 1 Cor. xv, 14. 20. vi, 17 V. This illative force of apa is more obscure, when it is employed on premises not immediately preceding it, but more remote, or on a diffuse train of argumentation as by ovber apa vvv KaraKptpa rots ev Xptorp 'Irjffov, &c. St. Paul draws an inference in Rom. viii, 1. from all he has said from v. 16. of ch. i.
;

VI. The illative force is not obvious also when apa is inserted in oblique phraseology, in a part where argumentation would not be expected, but where however a conclusion is legitimately drawn from as, 6 be (one who is no longer loved) dvayKa^ernt bi&Keiv premises (is under a necessity of following a person who has ceased to love him) ayaj'aKTu>y KOI e7ri0edc?wj', r/yroTjMis TO airav e ap^rjs, OTI OVK apa
:

dXXa TTO\V /mAAor /u// tpwvrt Phaedr. p. 241. (t. x. p. 309- ed. Bip.) The collective force of apa here will appear more plainly upon altering the construction in the following manner; OVK apa ebei Trore eptivn
e&ei Trore ep&VTi Kat avor'iTa) ^ap/cjeo-flat,

Kal vovv CXOVTI: Plato

o exelvos riyvorjKei. ^ap/5ea0at, dXXa TroXu fjid\\ov firj epwjTi VII. Nor when apa with its inference is put before that from which the inference is drawn; as, Mj^r' ap' TLS vvv KTinnar 'AXeai" ^poto Se^eo-Ow, M^0' 'EXev;v* yvtarbv be, Kal os fj.a\a VIJTTWS eariv 'ls Here from the rjbrj Tpweo-o-tv o'Xeflpou ireipar etyrjirTat : Iliad, rj, 394. certainty of destruction to the Trojans, it is concluded that their offers ought not to be accepted. In the same manner apa with the conclusion is put first in Iliad, a, 93. Apollo is incensed on account of his priest ; therefore not on account of vows or hecatombs. VIII. Nor in an inverted or preposterous method of reasoning; in which the conclusion or consequence is placed first, and apa, instead of accompanying that, accompanies one of the propositions placed last TIKTC yu' dv//p, as, Avrap eyw yeverjv peyuXov Atos ev^o/nat elvai' b 6' ap' Alamos 7roXXo7<nj/ avaaawv MvpyLuSoveo'O'i, Il^Xevs AiaKibrjs* If what is first here be placed last with eK\ibs%et>: Iliad. 0, 189apa, a regular sorites will appear; my father is Peleus, Peleus's was JEacus, JEacuss Jupiter ; therefore my descent is from the great
t ;

Jupiter. IX. From this inverted mode of argumentation arises its signification of nempe, nimirum, scilicet ; to wit, videlicet. For, if a transposition be not admitted in the foregoing lines, ap' may be translated c Hoog.

18

APA.

nempe. See Iliad, o, 306 310. where it so occurs twice ; and in the sense of sane, utique, it is frequently put in the beginning of a sentence ; as, apa, eQrj 6 Kvpos, vvv pet> tempos biaXvdfjvai : Xen. Cyrop. vii, 5, 40. X. In the sense of nimirum, it is often placed between oi/Se and ye, as, ovtt a pa TW ye (Talthybius and Eurybates, who came to take away Briseis) ibwv yj^o-ev 'AxtXXevs, Iliad, a, 330. So ^, 495. and
illative or conclusive power of this particle arises its employment in epiphonemas ; because every epiphonema involves 106. setj.] some conclusion or inference: [see Demetrius Phaler.

603. XI. From the

To

Phocion only, says /Elian, did Alexander use in his letters the salutation xaipeiv, a d ne adds, ovrus apa rjpriKei rov MaKeSoVa 6 OwiaW, V. H. i, 25. where apa collects from what has preceded, the great estimation in which Phocion was held by the Macedonian.
XII.

Nor

is its

sense different,

when seasonableness of time

is

in-

ferred from circumstances previously mentioned : Tfjpos ap' vXoro^telv Hesiod. "Epy. 422. timber felled in autumn /jtefjtvrifjieros &piov epyov, is least subject to decay ; at that season therefore, &c. Hence its use in referring actions or incidents to their times, with a repetition of words significant of time ; as, ctXX' ore >fj , ror' ap* .
jfjios

&

Typos ap': Horn.

II.

w, 786. 789.

H.

OF APA SIGNIFYING EFFECT.

I. When the consequence includes a fact or circumstance mentioned, then arises a power of apa akin to the one before treated of, namely that of indicating effect. 1. When obedience follows an order: &s e^ar', says Homer, (Jupiter gave this command,) and im-

mediately adds, ov* apa irarpos uvrjKovaTriffev 'ATroXXwy, Iliad, o, 236. 2. When something is related as the consequence of a fact or circumstance mentioned ; as,"Hrot o ynev &opw /uaicpoy aveo*^ero Sto
6 6' vnebpatte, KUI Xa/3e yovvwv Kv^as* 'A^tXXevs, Ovrafjievai pe flaws' 7X e & up vTtep VWTOV evi ya/jf "E<7r?7 Iliad. ^>, 69. Here apa indicates that the spear's entering the ground was the consequence of Lycaon's running under it, and embracing the knees of Achilles. II. In this use there is sometimes an ellipsis which must be supin the Cyrop. of Xenoph. Tigranes asks plied from what precedes Cyrus, Trorepa 6' >'/yj| apetvov eirat avv ru> atp ayaflw rhs Ttpwpias irote~i<rdai, % avv rfj ay 5^ta ; to which Cyrus answers, efjLavrov apa ovrw y' av Ttfj.u)poir)v, iii, 1, 15. understand, if I should inflict punishment so as to injure myself, epavTov apa, &c. in that case it would be myself that 1 should punish. III. This force of apa is sometimes rendered less obvious by a me-

tathesis

as, TWV veorrGtv yero/ieywi', 6 apprjv eyuTrrvei avrots,

<f>Q6voVy

aTreXaw-

vwv avrwv TQV TElian V. H. i.

0ar)y,

15. for efjnrrvei

apa TOVTO : awro7s, aTreXai/yw^ avr&v r&v <f>Q6vov bC

"iva.

pfj

fiaffKarGtiffiv,

bt

apa TOVTO, 7m /u>) fiaaKavQwatv. IV. Akin to this transposition are the instances in which the

effi-

APA.
cient cause with apa is put last, and the effect first : as, "Ecus 7rc5/oto bioweTO TTvpcxpopoio TirrQbv vTreKirpodeovTa' c5oXw &' tip'
o

19
TOV

e'OeXyei/

604. The deception practised by Apollo is the </>, cause, and the pursuit the effect. Here, as in the case of inverted argumentation before mentioned, apa takes the sense of nimirum,
'ATroXXwy: Iliad

nempe, scilicet ; and here, as there, its power may be considered as causal, for it may be rendered nam. This is why the examples above cited from Iliad, o, 306. a, 330. and (j>, 608. may be referred to this
head.

HI.
I.

OF THE CONJECTURAL USE OF APA.

cTo-fraffTtKos

"Apa has been represented as having a conjectural sense, termed when an effect or event, having not yet taken place,
;
;

remains doubtful

but since in
as

all
et,

some hypothetical conjunction,

rogation, the conjectural sense may attributed to the former, while apa may be regarded as retaining its proper power of conclusion : Qelos COIKCV o TOTTOS elver wore eav apu [so that if therefore, because it is so ] TroXX&Kts vvptyoXrjTrTos, TrpoVon-os TOV \6yov, Plat. Phaedr. p. 238. (t. x. p. 303. : //;) ytvufiat, dav/naays ed. Bip.) So, ber]9r)Ti TOV Qeov, et apa atyedtjaeTal aoi >/ eWvota r>;s Kapbfas aov, Acts viii, 22. may perhaps be rendered, supplicate God,

the examples of it apa follows ea^, rjv, etre, or a doubtful interperhaps with more propriety be

that therefore, \. e. on account of thy supplication, &c. And with ye : TOV Kuptoy, el apa ye \}sr)\a(f)rj(reiav avrbv KOL evpotef, if perhaps by that means, i. e. by seeking him, &c. Ib. xvii, 27. M>) Trpocrbefapevdiv jj.ev VJJL&V TOVS MeyaXoTToXtVas, eav per avaipeOwcrt Kal btoiKHrdujeav 5e ffudweiv apa, etv, tffxypols AaKebaipoviois evdvs eariv elvaf
etrjrelv

Demosth. /Se/Satot avfjLfia^Oi Qrjfiaiwv btKaiws effovrat Here is a dilemma ; and if the first proposition be
'.

pro Megalopol. not established,

the second must. Upon your rejecting the Megalopolitans, either such a thing must be the consequence, or such another : if not the So that the meaning of kav be awQ&aiv apa former, then the latter. is, but if they should be preserved, which is the necessary consequence

of the former supposition or case not being realised Iliad, a, 65. There Etr' op' oy eu^wX/ys eTri/ieyu^erai, ei&' ecaro/u/^s must be some cause for Apollo's anger: whether therefore, &c. Kat vv KCV evQ" a.7r6\otTO oVa af^pw*' Aiyems, Ei /zr) ap' o^v vorjae A(os 6vHorn. II. e, 312. ./Eneas must have perished, if ya>7?p 'A^poS/ rt\ Venus had not perceived his danger this cause therefore of his preservation is denoted by the insertion of apa.
.
:
1

eav a pa Kal eOe\{i<ry poi 6 Avffias raTreivos fyavy, Plat. Phaedr. p. 257. 1. 23. The meaning is this : your speech, o Socrates, has much excelled the previous one of Lysias ; if THEREFORE Lysias should choose to oppose another also to I doubt that too would be inferior, at least in
"ft<77-e

OKvSi,

fj.ii

irpos

avTov

aXXov avTurapaTeivat

you,

my judgment.
This illative force of apa even after el and the like particles is very evident in Plato, de Rep. v. p. 451. (t. vii. p. 8. ed. Bip.) olov T ovy

20
ITTI

APA.

ra avra ypriaQai ru'i c?wy, av /u?/ rriv avrf)v rootyiiv re Kal This question having been answered in the negative, it follows, el apa rats yvvattj> eirl ravra 'Xjprjffoueda Kal rots avbpaffi, ravra cat StSajcreor avras ; / therefore, &c. Sometimes other words are inserted between et and apa, as, Kal e'i TIS t'5/a Tiva SeStws apa, &c. Thucyd. iv, 86. II. The syllogistic power of apa may be discerned in questions
aTToSiSws;

also expressive of doubt : avT&v TO f]Tplov, tiffirep euoi

'i&e
:

Kal av, et apa Kat ao\ 0atVerai bteffrrjKos Plat. Phaedr. p. 268. (t. x. p. 366. ed.

Bip.

appears so tome; therefore it may perhaps to you.] In 18. the guards of Peter, who had been liberated, wondering his having disappeared, alinquire, rt apa 6 Herpes eyeVero ; From though he had been most carefully guarded, they infer that something So in Aristoph. Vesp. 266. extraordinary must have taken place. r/ XPJfy*' op' ov V TYJS oiKlas rf)<r&e avvbiKaarr^s iriirovQev ; apa concludes (although from what immediately follows, not from any thing preceding) that something unusual must have happened to Philocles. III. In direct questions not expressive of doubt, each particle has obviously its proper signification ; the one of interrogation, the other e tap a ravra ovrws e^ei are these things then so? of conclusion Acts vii, 1 . et apa KaQ" els XavQavet ae Trepiitiv ; Lucian. Soloecist. So, TOVTO ovv (3ov\6[Jievos, fJiijTt apa e\a<j)pia e-^prjaafJLrjy ; did p. 577I therefore? does it follow that I did? 2 Cor. i, 17.
[it

Acts

xii,

'

IV.
I.

OF THE USE OF APA

its signification
;u>/p'

IN TRANSITION.

Akin to
:

cession

CTrel

TaXXa,
TOT

feat
f

ap,
.

of effect is that of due order or sucoir\ay^v tnaaavTO, M/orv\\o> r* apa : Iliad, a, 465. aXX' ore btj, ical ap<f> 6fle\diaiv faetpav II. w, 786. and rijuos , presently afterwards, ifyios 6'

Kara

eKari, Kal

ay
II.

another, apa,

continued narration, where one thing follows after and eVetra are used promiscuously and indifferently. See Horn. II. 0, 4pO 494. i, 207. III. From this signification of things duly following one another, arises its use in transitions, where it connects what follows with what precedes ; and it is especially used when, after the recital of a speech, what followed is mentioned ; &s e^ar'* ol 5' apa Travres eiria^or vies 'Axaiwv Iliad, rj, 403. See also 398. IV. And so it is put for p.ev ovv or /uev 6/7, either inchoative or continuative. See Horn. II. a, 8. Hesiod. [Op. i, IK] Horn. II. 0, 39.

Hence

in

5e,

and

in v. 49. vbv is used in the

is

same sense as apa.

apparent,
n

V. Transition

made more

when

e,

some
KtjpoQi

similar particle follows, as,

fts

ap'

etyrj'

iroTajjibs

d\Xa, avrap, or be ^oXw<raro

paXXov, Iliad 0, 136. So 502. VI. Me/ apa is used in the same manner as uev ovv, and is similarly See followed by Se or aurap in the beginning of a fresh member. Iliad, o, 100. 149. 400. </>, 298. and in Iliad. 0, 427- pev >a is in the first member, and Se apa in the second.

APA
When
the
first

FE.

APA MH,

AP' OY.

21

syllable of the particle is long, it is marked with a circumflex, as above. [See Abr. of Vig. p. 179. iv.] apa KaTabrjXov, <5 Ev0u^pov, o fiovXopai Xeyeiv Plat. Euthyphr. p. 10. In oblique interrogation, in the sense of whether, it occurs but seldom e. g. o-Kei^w^efla, apa dvayKatov, o<rots eort TI evavTtov, evavTiov; Plat. Phaed. fjtrjoafjoOev aXXodev avro ylyvecrdai, r) tfc TOV avr
; :

p. 70.
1. Te is added to apa, when what FE. may be controverted being waved, a question is limited to what is known to be allowed, and is put not for the sake of information, but merely to urge what cannot be denied [is it not so? see note d p. 180. of Abr. of Vig.] dpd ye ov ^p?) Travra aV5pa riyi]ffa/j.evov rf]f eyk-pdretav operas elvat Kp>/7r7&a, ravrrjv irp&TOV iv rfj ~^v\y KaraaKevaaaadat ; Xe:

APA

--

noph.
II.

Mem.
;

i,

5, 4.

Such questions involve or imply a vehement denial of what Demosth. de fals. as, dpa ye o/nota rj TrapaTrXjyffta TOVTOLS they ask leg. p. 241. 1. 48. The answer must be, quite the contrary. Fe denotes
;

that the language of ^Eschines, after his arrival in Macedonia, was not So, el Se TOVTO only not the same as before, but not even like it.
1

vpoifj,ev civrolf

dpa y

at> e'0' rjp.1v

pe\ot

TI

T&V avOpUTrirav

bo'^a.fffj.a.Tuiv

',

Plat. Phaedr. p. 274. (t. x. p. 379- ed. Bip.) The interrogation may be exchanged for simple negation ; ive certainly should at least care

no longer at all about human opinions. III. Another word intervenes between apa and ye in Aristoph. Vesp. [4.] ap' olaOa y', diov Kvw&aXov 0vXarro/*ei> ; Without interrogation the sense would be, you ought at least to know, &c.
the phrase is used in anger, ye still retains its proper Aristoph. apa y' av irpos TWV 6ewv, vpe~is airaXXa^elr^ JJLOL Will you at least be gone? i. e. be gone, lest I say Vesp. 482. something worse ; lest you incur something worse. V. In apa ye ytvaxrfcets, & avayivwaKeis Acts viii, 30. ye softens and limits the doubt implied in the question. VI. Sometimes apd ye may be rendered num forte, the proper limitative force of ye being however still preserved apd ye Sid TOVTO is it perchance on this account? jEschin. Dial. ii. So, dpd ye, w

IV.

When

force

avbpes, evbeetTTepoi TI ?//.ta>v bta TOVTO fyaivovTai eivai ol e'repoi, on ov OVTC eV TreiraibevvTat TOV UVTOV TOOTTOV IUJLIV rj ovbev cipa biotaovcrtv fjfji&v
',

ra7s ovvovaiats, oi/re OTO.V a.yii)viea6cu Trpos rovs TroXeyutous 6ep

Xenoph.

Cyrop.

ii,

2, 1.

APA MH,
KciTrjyopriffb),

dpa

fir)

account, aol Xeyets TO. ypa/uSocrates, TI ce 6j) flovXojjievos ayados yeveadat ^ara, when Euthydemus hesitates for a reply, Socrates proceeds, dpa 10. is it then a physician? fir) laTpos; num ergo medicus? Ibid, iv, 2, underst. that you wish to be, &c. T II. Apa alone is used when a question is intended merely to elicit

T 1. AP' OY. Apa p), num ideo : eav 6t aov on 5id ro ayaadai avrou, KO.\ evvotKuis e^ets Trpos avTov, will you therefore, or on that SiafidXXeffOai bofcis VTT' e/ioD To the question of think, &c. Xenoph. Mem. ii, 6, 34.
;

22

AP OYN,

AP'

OYN OY.ATE.

an answer, whether affirmative or negative ; apa ov, when a negative answer is anticipated. [See Abr. of Vig. p. 180. 1. 19. and notes
b and c.]
III. Apa alone is used in an interrogation consisting of two members : apa TO oariov, on oyiov eon, <j)t\eiTai VTTO TOIV dewv, iy, on 0tXetra, offwv IOTI ; Plato Euthyphr. p. 10. (c. 12. ed. Fisch.) IV. It is used alone also in questions implying a denial : apa teal fiova ravra; Demostli. de fals. leg. p. 218. 1. 36. He adds, ov pa Ala' ciXX'
T

TroXXov ye Kal 5eZ : ert, &c. So, apa ye oftota tj TrapairXriaia. rovrois Ibid. p. 241. 1. 48. The question in Xenoph. Mem. iii, 10, 4. ap' ovv, etyrj, yiyverat ev avOpwTTOts 7ra7rore TO re ^iXo^povws Kal TO eyflpus /3Xe7retv irpos Ttvas ; is
',

no exception to this rule ; for Socrates, as usual, dissembles his knowledge, and affects to seem ignorant. V. On the contrary, apa ov, as before observed, implies or demands
affirmation
:

thyphr. ovrw.

apa ov TOVTO Xot6op/a evTiv Plat. Euthyphr. p. 8. (c.

i,

Socr. ap' ofy ovrws ; 8. ed. Fisch.) See also

EuXen.

Mem.

i,

2, 44.

3, 11.

AP' OYN, 1. Ovv after apa retains its proper OY. 1. Conclusive: in Plat. power, conclusive, inceptive, or transitive. Euthyd. p. 280. to the question, if ill, would you prefer a skilful or unskilful physician ? the answer is, a skilful one. The interrogator proceeds ap' ovv, ort evrv^eaTepov av o'iei TrpaTTeiv, UCTO. aotyov irpuTTWv, y uer' auaBovs; (t. iii. p. 22. ed. Bip.) the conclusion denoted by ovv taking the form of interrogation. So in p. 292. 1. 22. (t. iii.
:

AP OYN

p. 47. ed. Bip.) dp' ovv fj (3affi\in), &c. II. In Plat. Euthyd. p. 301. a disquisition on the 2. Inceptive. ambiguity of the words mine and thine begins, ap' ovv ravra 7)777 aa elvai, Jj/ av aptys, &c. (t. iii. p. 68. ed. Bip.)
III. 3. Transitive. Demosthenes, having shown that /Escliines had made no decree when occasion demanded, passes on thus to another topic: ap' ovv ovbe e\eyev, &airep ovbe eypatyev, rjviKa ep-

yaaaffdai n leoi KUKOV vuds ; OV/JLCVOVV ?]v elneiv erepw : pro Cor. p. 333. 1. 23. IV. It is used for conclusion and transition at the same time in Plat, de Rep. iv. p. 421. where after the answer aXXa K(I\WS uoi
this further question is asked, apa ovv Kal TO TOVTOV trot /uerpiws \eyetv ; (t. vi. p. 330. ed. Bip.) bou> abe\<J>ov T V. Ap' ovv OVK is nonne igitur. In Plat. Phaedr. p. 263. Socrates, about to criticise a speech of Lysias, after reading the exordium, begins thus : dp' ovv ov navn 5j)Xov roye rotorSe, &c. well then, is not this, &c. (t. x. p. 356. ed. Bip.) So, ap' ovv OVK apiOjuTjrio), &c. is not then arithmetic, &c. Plat. Politic, p. 258. 1. 32. (t. vi. p. 7. ed. Bip.) VI. It is to be observed that apa illative is never placed first in a sentence ; but apa interrogative is ; and that ovv with apa and ov is always placed between those words.

boKels \eyeiv,

ATE.

1.

"Are composed of a and

re,

Kara being understood,

is

ATTA.

23

employed

to utpote, qttatenus

to restrict the universality of affirmation ; nearly equivalent : are as, so far forth as, as being, since, &c.

; as, p6voi> by TO avro OVK aTroXenrov eavrov, OVTTOTC Xrjyei Kivovfievov i as not deserting itself, since it does not desert itself: Plat. Phaedr. p. 245. 1. 28. (t. x. dire aotyoi ovres, &c. de p. 318. ed. Bip.) Rep. p. 56'8. But the participle is wanting in the words (t. vii. p. 233. ed. Bip.)

fldffiXevs, fire orrparrjyos, is ca0' II. It is generally construed

fiacrtXevs

ij

arparrjyos eort.

with a participle

KIVOVV,

are

immediately following, on avrovs

are rvpavvibos vp.vriras.

els

ri)v iro\treiav

ov Trapabetypeda,

III. Sometimes it carries a signification of cause or reason, and is rendered quippe, nam ; as Aristotle says Thales took all the oliveyards in Chios and Miletus at a low rate, are ovGevos eTriflaXXovros, *cat since, or because, no one outbid him: De Rep. i. p. 185. 1. 30.

are els afielvat OLKOV p-eraarriaonevos, as being tjbjj irepitypovOij rov ijv, about to remove, &c. ^Eschin. Dial, iii, 32. See also Plato Phaedr. p. 275. 1. 18. (t. x. p. 381. ed. Bip.) are OVK ovvt ao$o~is, &c. IV. It is construed, like ws, with an accusative of a participle instead of a genitive absolute; as Plato, speaking of a disadvantage arising from the invention of letters, says, rovro rCJv fjiadovrwv
p.kv ev \pv%a7s 7rapeei pvr)fjir]S a/ueXer^o'/a, fire bta irianv
VTT'

aXXorp/w^ TUTTWV, OVK evboQev avrovs ixji avTwv ctvayui Phaedr. p. 275. (t. x. p. 381. ed. Bip.) V. It signifies, in the same manner as: ^evois O.T evepyerat c7rayye\\ovTi, Pind. Pyth. Od. iv. So, vavs &0\ e/cas bie^M : Theogn.
VI.
v. It is

96*4.

used for quanquam (although), Anc. Lex. v. H. Steph. Nonnus. [Perhaps it fj.iv eipero Herpes, are dpacrvs means, nor did Peter, as a bold man, as might have been expected from so bold a man, inquire of him. J. S.] VII. Ovv is sometimes added to are, each particle retaining its proper signification : also nep, as, are irep ac?u, Aristot. de Rep. i, 2.
ill

ovSe

ATEXNflS.
fraud

--

1.

'Arex^ws, derived from re^vr],

1.

or artifice,

[see Abridg. of Vig. p. 131.

in its sense of 25.] signifies in its

primary and genuine meaning, fran kly, openly, candidly, sincerely: rouro be cnrXws Kal a.re-^rws, Kal 'ifftos evrjOws e'^w Trap' e/zavr^> : Plato Phaed. p. 100. 1. 33. (c. 49. ed. Fisch.) II. Hence, as what is said candidly and sincerely, is said truly, its signification is derived of, in reality, indeed, when it is used to

augment

Travrobonros
vrpoafyopov

the force of affirmation : as, dXX' are^vtis, wffnep 6 Hpwrevs, Plat. Ion. p. 541. : aotyov ye rovri, Kal yepovri

yiyry

e^evpes

areyv&s

(^apfjiaKoy

arpayyovpias

Aristopli.

Vesp.

806.
III. Its third sense, nearly allied to that last mentioned, is absolutely, entirely, wholly, quite : as, 0elos el wept rovs Xoyovs, w Qa'ibpe, Kal are^vws Plat. Piiftdr. p. 242. I. 9. (t. x. p. 311. ed. Qav^&atos
:

Bip.) See also p. 230.

v

1.

27. and Aristopli. Vesp. 721.

is

[722. Br.j

ATTA. -- 1. Arra

a particle

added

to

words

to

render their

24

AY.

meaning less determinate and precise. 1, To adjectives : principally to oXtya, aXXa, erepa, Trota, TroXXa, and some others : as, dXty* arff {/TToeiTnW, some few things: Aristoph. Vesp. 55. Xoibopeio-dcu be aXXa
arra ovSets e/twXvev avrov, Demostli. de fals. leg. p. 227- 1. 31. eyw soiwe *McA things: Plato eTT/ffrajuai rotavr' arra awyuaffe irpofftyepetv, Phaedr. p. 268. 1. 10. (t. x. p. 366. ed. Bip.) OTTO? aaaa e'/juara, aXX' arra roiavra, ivhat sort of habiliments : Horn. Odyss. r, 218. so/we other such things. Plat. Phaed. p. 108. 1. 15. (c. 57. ed. Fisch.) To adjectives of quality ; as, olicrpa arra XoyoTrotovVres, Xen. Cyrop.
ii.

p. 47.

1.

33.

Sometimes other words intervene between the adjective and arra, as, -rots beKa TaXavTOis aXXa irpoffBrjs arra Trevrr/Kovra, Pherecrat. ap. Harpocrat. Sometimes the adjective is put last i\v yap brj arra
:

rotate, Plat.
II.

Phxd.
is

c. 4. ed. Fisch.

2. It

TroSa arra

trfyiaiv

sometimes added to substantives: as, riyovpevot arbpaeX0di>ra els TO Karaywytov, some slaves or other, no
!

better than slaves: Plat. Phaedr. p. 259.

6.

(t.

x. p.

348. ed. Bip.)

Sometimes it stands by itself for rtva, as, eXeyey arra irpoaKeicvQws, Plat, de Rep. v. (t. vii. p. 2. ed. Bip.) [p. 413. 1. 26. ed. Bas. 1.] III. 3. It is found added to an adverb in Aristophanes only; Av. 1513. [On arra see Abr. ofVig. p. 17. irrjviK O.TT ctTro/Xero;
1.

14,]
:

AV. discretive or disjunctive, 1. Av has a twofold power and adversative. In its disjunctive use it signifies, 1. repetition of the same thing ; again ; as Xenophon says that Cyrus, when he arsacrificed to the av Kal yyv iXuaKero xoa ' s > Kal deovs dvcriats, again, with repetition of sacrifices: Cyrop. iii. See also Iliad a, 541. <jt, 394. In this sense it is joined p. 79- 1. 38. with the synonymous word TraXtv, either preceding or following ;as, eyw civ ira\tv etTrov, Plat. Euthyd. p. 279. ! 30. rovro avro iraXtv av See Xen. Cyrop. iii, biaipeiv avayKaiov, Plat. Politic, p. 26l. 1. 4. 2. interchange or alternation; in turn: as in ii, 1, 26. 2, 28.

rived at the boundaries of the enemy's territory,

gods, and

when he had passed them,

e/ce7

Aristophanes, Xanthias, having related his own dream, desires Sosias to tell his in return ; arap av TO aov av Xe'o>, Vesp. 27. See also v. 735. ed. Br. and Xen. Cyrop. iii. p. 75. 1. 38. [See note s on Abr. of
Vig. p. 132.]
II. Things are sometimes so different as to be opposite or contrary to one another; whence av, which is employed in divisions and subdivisions of things, takes the sense of, on the contrary, on the other

hand: [note r on

(?roXet evbaifiovt) /KiXtora

:

kv Trj rotavri; yfidrifjiev yap av evpelv btKatoffvvrjv, Kat av kv TJ) jcdfaora Plat, de Rep. iv. p. 420. (t. vi. p. 327. ed. Bip.) okovfjievr) bousiav So rursus for contra ; v. c. Curt, vii, 7? 4. and Plato joins av with eravr/a : TavTrjs (& 77 y>y trews) av evavTta. y/yverat, de Rep. iii. p. 394.
p.

132. of Abr. of Vig.]

(t. vi.

p. 276. ed. Bip.)

:

Like aXXa, av is put instead of be after /uev, for distinction of the members of a sentence see Iliad, a, 19. So for neque vero, in
III.

contradistinction; nor again

Thucyd.

iv,

87.

AV0I2, AYTI2, AYTE.

25

IV. Av signifies also backwards, lack : as, ^uarpv^oy av cpixrai, and av Zpvaav, Iliad, a, 459. Suid. p. 378. V. It is also put for 6?) in the sense of especially, above all; as, elTrev ovv TIS boKeiv ol TO. re aXXa aotyvTarov yeyoveyai SoXwi^a, /cat Kara n/y Troiqaiv av TU>V iroir]rS>v TTCLVTMV eXevflepiwrarov : Plat. Tirau p. 21. 1. 21. (t. ix. p. 288. ed. Bip.)
J. AY0I2, AYT12, AYTE. Avdi, formed, according to Eustathius, by syncope from avTodt, differs from avdis. Analogously to aXXodi, erepuQi, &c. it signifies rest in a place, there ; as in Iliad, e, 296. but avdis, although it may signify motion from a place, as in Thucyd. iv, 12. usually denotes time, or repetition. II. Avdis and avrts are the same with regard to meaning, the latter being, according to Suidas, Homeric ; according to Eustathius, Ionic : the former according to Suidas, Attic ; according to EustaSee Horn. II. a, 26. compared with Plato de Rep. thius, common. iii. p. 393. near the end ; (t. vi. p. 276. ed. Bip.) III. Avdts signifies repetition: Ibov yuaX' avdis TOV& erepov see! there again another blunder ! Aristoph. Nub. 6/0. In this phrase avdis is used with asseveration and emphasis, where repetition seems

--

scarcely credible.

IV. With ievai, ep^eadai, and the like verbs, it signifies sometimes sometimes return, as in Iliad. K, 62. repetition, as in Iliad, a, 26. V. And with other verbs it does not always denote a repetition of
the acts of those verbs, but sometimes the performance of some act contrary to a former act ; as, yepas be fJLoi 6We,o ewK6, AVTIS e^w/3p/cwi/ e'Xero Kpelw 'Ayajuejuywj- : Iliad, t, 368. he took it back again. So Theogn. 357. VI. From signifying repetition it assumes a designation of time ; hereafter, at a future time, another time; peTafypaaoi-ieaQa. KO\ avrts,

Horn.

atixppovriffavra

Trpoadet',

avdis

fir)

awfypoveli',

KCU

biKaia.

Hence bvvrjdevTa Trparreu', avdts abvvareiv ; Xen. Mem. i, 2, 23. eloavOis or eaavdis, and separately es avOts, to another time, Thucyd. With av subjoined : owS' avdis av ere aKw^erat Tiavffaiv, Arisiv, 63.
iraXtv avOts, Horn. II. /5, toph. Ach. 854. and with TraXiy prefixed 276. VII. But sometimes av is subjoined to avdis, when the latter signifies again, to express vehemence of emotion ; without which one or other of the particles would be superfluous as, w, ri <r' eWw ; dXX' avQis av TvirTrjaopai Aristoph. Nub. 1382. [1379- Br.] IIaX(vin the sense of retro, back, is sometimes put before avOis, as in Iliad, e, eTr' av 257. Aw TraXu' avdis are conjoined in Aristoph. Nub. 971
:
: : .

TraXtv

aldts vLvivrapevovs

to be taken

ffv^ijtrat, where however avOis with aviorrauevovs, and TrdXtv with trv/u^o-at.
fjiev,

is

perhaps
avOis

[On

and av answering to

see Abr. of Vig. p. 133. 1. 3, 4.] VIII. Of avre nearly the same may be said as of ay and avdis, and it is scarcely joined v/ith TTOexcept that avTe is more poetical In the sense of repetition it occurs in Iliad. ?, 377\iv, av, or avdis.
;

and

it

is

elegantly used

Iliad. 0, 191.

when something preceding and again ; and too.

is

repeated, as in
l>

Hoog.

26
IX. Like av,
it

ATTAP, ATAP.
signifies alternation
;

whence

its

rejoinders ; as, rov b' avre Trpoo-eetTre, Iliad, a, 207alre for vvv fa, dXXd vvv : II. a, 238. 0, 160. X. It signifies hereafter in Horn. II. t, 135.

use in replies anef So vvp r, 184.

AYTAP, ATAP.
you your 97,361. Hence
first:

1.

Avrdp

in

poetry, drap in prose,

and

and dXXd, both a discretive especially in Attic writers, have, like be and adversative use. Discretive, as, drop av Xefyv Trporepos, but tell dream adversative, as in Iliad. Aristoph. Vesp. 15.
it is

conjoined with the adversative particle

o'juws

TO
'.

Karafia TOVTO TroXXovs bt] TTUVV e^r]Tra.TT}KV drdp ouuts Karafifiaouai but however, but nevertheless : Aristoph. Vesp. 975. II. From apa, of which drap is compounded, the latter takes a

conclusive or collective sense, which dXXa (for which drop is said to be put) cannot have alone, but which dXX' ovv has. Thus Strepsiades, having been reproved by Socrates for saying TOV KapboKov in the masbut how then must I culine, replies, drap roKonrbv TTWS ue x() KaXelv call it in future? Aristoph. Nub. 677. concluding from Socrates's reproof, that he had miscalled the thing, and must denominate it
;

differently.
III. 'Arap is used in an involved mode of argumentation ; what ought to be the premises not being placed first drap ri ravfl a TrcWes Icruev, fj,av6avt) ; Aristoph. Nub. 693. Avrdp (for which drdp is put) being compounded of avre and apa, avre here indicates a change of topic, and apa concludes from what follows: q. d. dXXd ravra
1

iravres

'ia/j.ev,

ri

apa fiavQavta

',

conclusive force of apa in avrap is perhaps discoverable in Iliad, a, also, v. 119. where yap in the last member of the sentence assigns a reason upon which depends the conclusion indicated by avrap in the first member. V. The transitive force also of apa, above mentioned, is preserved in awrdp in Iliad. 0, 157. Pelegonus, having informed Achilles of his country, and the time of his arrival, proceeds, aurap e/*ot yevei) e *A/ov evpv peoiTos, [and as to my birth, &c.] where avrdp merely denotes transition from one topic to another. VI. Awap in its sense of transition denotes also that things are done duly and in proper order as, awrop eTret Kara fj.fjp' CKO.^, &c. Horn. II. a, 464. See also 467 and 469. VII. Hence, like apa, it indicates continued narration ; for eTretra : see Iliad. ;, 383. a, 598. o, 1 13. and in this use, as in that last mentioned, eTret is added to it; as in Iliad, a, 458. 484. 0, 377. 383. VIII. It is put for be, distinguishing one member of a sentence from another. It appears to be used for dXXa in abrupt speech, in Iliad, x, 331. IX. When drap is obviously put for dXXa, it is often followed by as, eyw aicovtraa det fiiev 5;} ye, but with some other words between n/v tyvfftv TOV re TXavKwvos fca< TOV 'ASeijudvrou iyyd/*7?>>, drap ovv Kat TOTE IF aw ye >/V0^j/ Here drdp, in its Plat, de Rep. ii. p. 367. discretive or disjunctive use, opposes rdre to det; ye limits or restrains the time; and olv infers from aKovaas the cause of Socrates'^
:

IV.

The

delight.

AYTIKA.

AXPI, MEXPI.
:

37
as, /ua
bi

X. 'Arap has an exceptive force, like u\Xu ye ye- (/ have not indeed been at Sardis) arap
nevertheless it appears to

ov

TOIMV
yet

bonel ye pot (but

me

at least) eoiKevai paXta-a Mopv^ov aay-

juan: Aristoph. Vesp. 1136.

1. AvTiKa commonly signifies, forthwith, immediCLVTIKCL opposed to vvv in Plato vvv TrXarro/uev de Rep. iv. p. 420. (t. vi. p. 327. ed. Bip.) It is construed ffKe\j;6fteOa. with a future tense, when it signifies without any delay, or with the

ATTIKA.
It is
:

--

ately.

[p. 7*
is

feast possible ; as, nvr/fca vir ejuov eeAey}0>/croi'rcu, Plat. Apol. ! 5. ed. Bas. 1.] To express the least possible
;

Socr.

delay, ^uaXa

fjtaxfffOat

sometimes added as in Xen. Cyrop. iii. p. 72. avn'/m paXa bei'iaei When what is spoken of is past, it is construed with a
;

past tense, as in Iliad, a, 386. II. Such being the nature of the particle, it is sometimes used to indicate an immediate commencement of the main topic of discourse, or a return to it, aft? r discussion of what has little or no connexion

with it. Thus Socrates, in Plato's Pheedrus, having done with irrelevant matters, proceeds, avrtKa, Trepl vv 6 Xoyos, 71 o'iei, &c. p. 235. in fin. (t. x. p. 297- ed. Bip.) but to the purpose ; to come to the
point. Jn this manner
or effect, and III. AVTIKO.

may introduce a proof taken from a consequence be rendered and or for, as in Iliad, r, 126. is elegantly used to introduce an instance or example in proof of any thing said ; its true meaning in this use being, not to look far, but to make use immediately of an example at hand: [see note v on p. 133. of Abr. of Vig.] for instance, for example: avr/Ka i)v Ttru eqs $fjv TWV <re nijbkv ^btKrjKOTtar, riva. aoi rovrov -^aptv diet avrov eicreadat Xen. Cyrop. iii, 1, 29 [On avrtKa, and especially on the difference between TO vvv TO Trapov TO avmra, see Abr. of
it

may

Vig. p. 133. and notes u,

v,

and w.]

1. AXPI, MEXPI. "A^pt and f^e^ot, usually with a genitive, a certain trrm or bounsignify uninterrupted continuation as far as dary. That term is either of time, as fte^pis ews eye^ero, Plat. Symp.

--

p. 220.

I.

34.

(t. x.
:

&xpi
II.

TTJS

OaXctTTrjs

p. 268. ed. Bip.) see Acts xx, 6. or of place, as, or of measure or degree, as, ^^XP* Tit s w'ero Selr
'

cqv, Aristot. Polit.

r>/s Tri/JLepov r///^(0as

ii,

7.

The term expressed by the

ovbev ovre T&V
iii.
:

genitive
p. 47.

is

avfjitftepovTotv,

either included, as, ovre

bvrajjie6a

Demosth. Philipp.

see 2

Cor.

iii,

14.

or ex-

cluded, as, juexpe TOV

J3difj.ov <bt\os.

III. Sometimes it is not so much the term itself, as what is limited, space of time or of place, that is denoted: as, Set TOVS ytro/jierovs, And metaphorically ra venl yuexpis av Ztiai, (for bia fitov,) Trovew.
:

TO

ffwfjia

pe\pi -^peias

Ti]s

^v\ijs 7rapa\a/u/3dretv

Epict. C. 46.
:

IV. Sometimes the term is left uncertain and indefinite as, &xpt So Troppw, Lucian. Amor. t. ii. p. 40p. 1. 53. a great way, very Jar. TroXXou, a long time; a^pt Kaipov,for a time: Acts xiii, 11. TOS
itrl

28

TAP.

to a great distance down his sides, for a great way down his sides : Theophrast. Eth. Char. c. xix. And when warros is the genitive, (xpovov, Siaern/ftaros, \oii^aros, or other such words, according to the occasion, being understood,) all term or limit is taken away. Havros is sometimes suppressed ; whence a^pis, for a^pi TTO.VTOS, means utterly,

entirely; as in Iliad. S, 522. TT, 325. also said : /^e^pts av, ueXP ts ov av, pexpt
Trep av, /"e^pi TWOS (for TTOV ; juexpt Trpos, //e^pis

M^ts
irep,

or &xpis ov (until} is ~ A^XP* T*P & v > ^XP IS ov

some time),

ftt'xpt

TIVOS;

(how long?)

/ue^pt

evravda. V. "Axp- and juexP 1 are construed with verbs ; in the indicative mood, when a certain, known, term or limit is spoken of; in the subjunctive or optative, when the term is not yet known : yue)(pt JAW kirl&oos i\v 6 brjuos eva ^etpOTOV^aetv avrl TOV jSaertXews orpar??y6V, as long

as: Plut. in Poplicol. /uexpi Karoi/r>?ffw//v rrjs TT/OTCWS, until: Ephes. iv, 13.

ol

Trdvres els rrjv

I.

ON THE

SIGNIFICATIONS OF THE PARTICLE TAP, CAUSAL, INCEPTIVE, AND RATIOCINATIVE.

to be compounded of ye and apa) being used in probation. sometimes obscure, when the particle is to
-for ;
:

I. is

Tap (which may be thought

in the first place causal,

II. This force of yap is be referred to words not immediately preceding it, but more remote e. g. in St. Mark xvi, 4. where yap assigns a reason, not for the stone's having been rolled away, but for the perplexity of the two women, which made them say, ris airoKv\iaei rtfuv TOV \iQov, &c. III. And also when there is an ellipsis, to be supplied from something preceding, or from something extrinsical, and not expressed. Phaeclrus, about to enter on a discourse, says that he cannot avoid it, because he thinks that Socrates will not let him go until he has spoken to which Socrates answers, navv yap aoi aXrjdfi SOKW. Either KnXws etnas must be understood before these words or, assuming
;

something preceding, they are to be thus taken: iravv aoiaXriOrj bonti' So ill Sophocl. ovbafjL&s yap ae a^rfau), Trplv av CITT^S a^Kyo-y^Trws. Philoct. 1273- [1281.] Travra yap 0pao-ets jjiaTrjv is to be explained either by understanding xaXws TTOIWV TreTravactt, or thus, Trayra 0pa<rets Socrat. 'ivws TOV XoicopovHarrjv* ov yap Trpos Kaipov Xeywv Kvpels. a e'Xeyev. Phaedr. e^atVero yap. jjievov avTu o'iei vopiovTa Xeyetv
Plat.

Phaedr. p. 257-

underst.

TOV

\oi^opovp.evov

olfjiai

vopi^ovTa

So Eurip. Orest. 444. 781. 7<?2. 796. In TTWS yap av bvvalurjv underst. ov yiv&aKdt. In jEschyl. Pers. 232. with Trao-a yap yevotr av 'EXXas /Sao-tXews vTr^fcoos, underst. if Xerxes should take Athens. Tap assigns a reason why the desire of Xerxes to subjugate Athens was not at all strange. IV. The causal force of yap is still less obvious, when the ellipsis must be supplied from something extrinsical. In /ierp/ou yap avbpbs OVK 7reTV)(s TTWTrore, Aristoph. Plut. 245. the deficiency is to be supplied by understanding, it is no wonder that all this has happened In St. John's Gospel, iv, 18. the expression to you, juerpi'ov yap, &c.
XeyeiV etiaiveTO yap. Acts viii, 31. before
;

TAP.
is

29

pa A/a before yap in an complete. answer; and Aristoph. vri TOV At", Nub. 1382. [13/9. Br.] V. The ellipsis before spoken of is very common in answers, both affirmative, as, e%ei yap, it has so : Plat. Phaedr. p. 268. 1. 4. (t. x. p. 366. ed. Bip.) q. d. you say well ; for it has so: and negative ; as, orv be ovbe TO uavTevouevov Karevoriaas. AtlSW. Ma TOVS 0eovs, ov yap epaQov Lucian. Soloec. t. iii. p. 5/7.
xiii, 4.

Milan. V. H.

puts val

VI.
ov

And

cffTLv 6 avrip, os,

also in interrogations : dire pot, says Cyrus, TTOV by eKelvos &c. to which Tigranes replies by another question,

yap aireKTeivev UVTOV ovroal o epos irarrip ; Xenoph. Cyrop. iii, 1, 38. where OVK eonv ert seems to be understood. VII. Fop causal is elegantly used as a close of sentences thus filatov yap closes a sentence in Aristot. de Rep. i. c. 3. at the end. VIII. Tap in its inceptive use occurs in the beginning of narrations, disquisitions, &c. that which it introduces appearing to be assigned as a reason of what has been premised. Thus Aristotle, after some previous discussion, begins thus to treat of the acquisition of procKaffTov yap fcrr/yuaros btrrri ?/ ^pfjals eortv, the use then of each perty
: :

Prometheus in jEschylus begins an possession, &c. de Rep. i, 9. account of the wanderings of lo with, evret yap fjXOes Trpos MoXoo-o-a See also St. Matth. i, 18. So nam in Latin ; Cic. pro buireba, &c.
Arch. c. iii. [ 4.] Ter. Andr. i, 1, 14. IX. Sometimes yap is introductory, even when the reason assigned is not in the same member with it, but in a following one, where be
is

put to perform the

yap, &c.

office

of yap, as in Odyss.

K,

501.

K/pici?,

ris
ris.

Tap should properly have come

after &'ibos,

and

be after

X. In such a case be is not always put in the following member. See II. a, 123. where the sense would be regularly expressed, if yap were placed after ovbe ri. XI. The syllogistical or ratiocinative use of yap is evident in inIn the Ranae of Aristophanes, Bacchus asks if it is not terrogation. a shame that he himself should go on foot while he makes his slave Xanthias ride on an ass to save him from fatigue and from carrying burdens. Xanthias, who feels that he is carrying, although he rides, with conclusion and interrogation at the answers, ov yap ^>tpw 'yw same time q. d. do you think then that I carry nothing? To this Bacchus rejoins, TTWS ^epets yap, os y o^ei; [you ride; therefore you do not carry ; but an interrogative form is given to the argumentation.] But the words may be understood also in a causal sense, ov 0epe(s being understood; and so in v. 29- and in Acharn. 594.
; :

For by a Dicaeop. eyw yap eljjn 7rra>x^ ; Lam. aXXa ris yap el; Greek idiom, the remainder of what a person is saying is often, through who being impatience, partly anticipated and taken up by another, unable to proceed has recourse to interrogation yap or 6Vt being what added, as a particle which would have introduced a reason for
;

the person,

yap;
Twvb', caff 6

rls

whose words are anticipated, had begun to say. So TI Srt rl and in Aristoph. Vesp. Philocl. ri/pov/i' VTTO &c. Chor. ris yap eircl TraXai fiovXonai ye jue0' vp&v eXdbv, ravrd a eVpywv, KaVofcXaW raj 0rfpas See Lucian. Dial. Mort.
yap;
; ;

30
t. i.

TAP
p.
<5

AH, &c.

ris yap el, 388. /3eXrrre, &c. [p. 25 lr E. ed. Salmur.] Prometh. 519. 483. Orest. vEschyl. Eurip. XII. Tap therefore is never in itself interrogative. TV yap ; e. g. is not what or why, but what then? or why then? as in Aristoph.

is not so plain in ri yap aXXo f/, without admitting an ellipsis and transposition, as in Lucian. Dial. Alexander ri yeXgis ; Diogenes ri yap aXXo >/ ave/j-vrjaOriv ola circlet ?/ 'EXXas. q. d. avefjivriffdtjv ola eiroici rj 'EXXus, &c. eiri TOVTM povu yeXa). T'L yap av aXXo y TOVTO yeXyui', [p. 253. c. ed. Salmur.] XIII. It has a similar force in other modes of interrogation : e. g. boKel iraieiv' Socrates replies, &OKW yap to Phaedrus saying ovrw f do I then appear to you to jest ? Plato Phaedr. p. croi traiZeiv 234. I. 39. (t. x. p. 295. ed. Bip.) and in Xen. Mem. i, 4, 14. ou yap Trai'v aot KarabtjXov, on, &c. for is it not evident to you, &c.
:

Nub. 57. But its argumentative power

:

>}

See Cyrop. iii, 1, 38. So when it expresses indignation, and is renand do dered itane ? nempe ? as, Xpvaiinrov yap uefjivrjoOe v/jiels you then dare to name Chrysippus? Lucian. Conviv. p. 440. XIV. It has been erroneously thought adversative, as in Aristoph. Pac. 320. where it rather signifies enim, for, as it does in Prometh. 1000.
;

II.

OF THE PARTICLES TAP AH, TAP AH HOT, TAP OTN, TAP OYN AH, PAP DOY, TAP PA, AND TAP TOI.
I.

When

>/

signifies time, there is

no combination of significations

yap' Hesych. (for poets put bl) first.) II. But when bri is confirmative, it strengthens and adds weight to the argumentative force of yap kv TW TOLOVTM yap 6>) of betvibaiuoves flTTov TOVS avBpio-novs ^o/3ouvrat, Xen. Cyrop. ii, 3, 58. for in truth ;
br)

in

yap by.

yap'

ifir)

for

it is certain that Ylov added, lessens in a small degree the confirmative force of bi), and tends to elicit assent. [So that yap 5>/ TTOU is for doubtless ; for you will allow, &c.] &ppovia yap by TTOV Plato Pha3d. p. 94. avapnoarias OVKOT av ueTaa^pt. III. In yap ovv, yap is causal, and ovv collective or conclusive :
.

yap ovv Karavevffai t/Trepjuerea Kpor/wva, &c. Iliad. {3, 350. Here yap assigns fhe reason why those of the Greeks, who wished to return home, could not do so before a certain time which reason is the promise of Jupiter that they should first take Troy and olv concludes from that promise, that if any attempted to return, they would
0ftyu
;

either perish on the way, or, at least,

not reach Argos before the destruction of Troy. See the preceding lines, to which yap ovv Ovv therefore is indicative of a latent conclusion : e'^oi be refers. <Zbe' To\jj,r)reov yap ovv TO ye aXrjQes elirelv : Plat. Phaedr. p. 247. 1. 25. He does not say eyei with affirmation, (t. x. p. 322. ed. Bip.) but e'^oi; and the reason for using the latter word rather than the former follows, roX/zr;reoi> yap, &c. Ovv concludes that e^ot is rightly used in preference to e'x<?t, since affirmation of the truth of the matter is not professed, but an attempt only.

TAP

AH, &c.

Si

IV. As every conclusion involves an affirmation or negation dependent on premises, ovv sometimes appears to be merely affirmative in augmenting the causal signification of yap: TrpoirKvvti be 'Abpaareiav, \upiv ov jueXXw Xeyeti/* e\7r/5w yap ovv [for I do think ; for 1 do really think,] eXarrov a/iapn^ua, aKovvlws TWOS (f>ovea yeveo-ftai, ?/ cnrare&va KO\U>V re /cat bafaiufr Kal rofjiipuv Plato de Rep. v. p. 451.
:

1.

6.

(t. vii.

p. 6. ed, Bip.)

V. From the confirmative power of these particles combined, they are frequently employed in answers containing affirmation ; as, Xeyw yap ovv, [yes I do say so,] Xen. Cyrop. i, 6, 22. Upon a nicer scrutiny however, the causal sense of yap, and the collective sense of ovv, rnay be discerned here too q, d. aXydevets ovv, rovro Xeyw yap. And so in 6 be yepwv (a(f>6bpa yap ovv fj.efj.vr] jua i) &c. which may be ex:

plained, btrjyrjffofiai TTUVTO. cra^ws* crfyobpa yap /ue^u^juar birjyrioofjiat ovv Travra ad^d)s. As in aXXa yap the former particle indicates an omission of something for which yap assigns a cause, [Abr. of Vig. 173. v.] so in yap ovv the latter particle marks the suppression of a conclusion of which yap gives the reason. VI. AJ), when added, urges the certainty of an affirmation; as in Plato de Legg. iii. p. 682. (t. viii. p. Il6. ed. Bip.) where, after mention of the divine inspiration through which Homer had expressed something, this affirmation follows : Qelov yap ovv brf Kal TO TTOI^TLKOV evdeacmKov ov yevos, &c. for undoubtedly, &c.for so it unquesis, that, &c. This phrase also, as well as yap ovv, is employed in affirmative answers e'^et yap ovv bt), etyiy, ovrtasi Plat, de Rep. v. p. 476.

tionably

p. 58. ed. Bip.) VII. Sometimes however yap proves by an example, and ovv apas, i^ov oofyos ^v, oaris e0aoxe, plies a saying to a particular person irplv av ajjupolv pvdov a.Kovat)S, OVK av biKdvais, av yap ovv vvv uot VIK^V TroXXw bebtiKritrat : Aristoph. Vesp. 725. VIII. Iloy added to yap renders affirmation more cautious, and less positive, expressing some little degree of doubt, which the speaker wishes to have removed by the assent of others. Hence, in Plato, Socrates, who always affects ignorance, frequently uses the phrase ydp TTOI/, as, bcivov yap TTOV TOVT c%i ypa0>/, Phtedr. p. 275. 1. 33. (t. x. p. 382. ed. Bip.) 6 avrcs yap TTOV Qofios, Phaed. p. 101. 1. 17These two particles are separated in Eurip. Heracl. 151. IX. Tap pa, used only in poetry, is nearly equivalent to yap ovv in reciprocal argumentation, (of which above ;) but there is this difference, that pa, which is put for pa, may, besides its collective or In Horn. II. a, 237. Achilles conclusive power, denote effect also. swears his sceptre, which could never vegetate again : the reason
1.

17-

(t. vii.

therefore,

yap pa e ^aXjcos eXex//e $yX\a re Kal fy\oiov. The effect which is OVK avadr]\i}aei, is indicated by pa. So in II. 0, 468. the reason of Apollo's turning back is reverence of his uncle, and
follows,
Trept

by

again the effect of his reverence

to

is

his turning

back.

X. Tap rot scarcely differs from yap bt'i. It is used in asseveration, vouch or assert a reason given trust me ; take my word for it ;
;

32

TE.

depend upon it: %/jnr\riao Xeywv* Travrws y&p rot iravoet vote: Aristoph. Vesp. 601. very properly therefore subjoined to d//e'Xet in Sometimes it may be rendered in Aristoph. Ran. 535. [532. Br.] truth, indeed, truly: aia^iara y&p roi ft* elpyaaaro Avaiffrparos, 6 yap rot \6yos i\ v > Aristoph. Ran. 783. irpoariKov^a. ye 001 fj aKori' Plato Phsedr. t. x. p. 281. ed. Bip. epwrticos Trept ov bteTpipopev, and it has other slighter significations, of which examples are every where to be found.
:

I.

ON THE PRIMARY FORCE

OF THE PARTICLE FE, AND,

ITS ELLIPTICAL USE.

I. Of this particle, which is employed very frequently and elegantly by the most ancient authors, the primary force is that of restraining or confining what is more general to what is more special, a whole to a part, &c. as, el Demosth. pro Cor. et /u?) iravres, o\ov, pepos ye a\Xa retro-apes ye, at least, alff^vvrj, ovbejjuas eXarrwi/ rjfj.ias rots ye ffwQpoffi: Demosth. Olynth. i. [p. 17. 1. 7. ed. Reisk.] Cicero uses quidem in the same sense, pro Fonteio, c. v. [c. iv. 8.] And as what is limited or restrained is urged with greater emphasis, this particle, conceding, or comparatively disregarding, what precedes, insists forcibly on somewhat following and when subjoined to an
fjirj
:

affirmative proposition, has a negative before it, and vice versa aTravres, aXXa Tires ye, and e't Tires, aXX* ov yueVrot ye airavTes.

el

/ur)

II. Sometimes it urges emphatically what follows, without waving or giving up what precedes ; as in Plato de Rep. iv. the guards of the city are said to be fjuffdwroi, ical TCLVTO. ye eTrto-mot, /cat oi/Se p.iaQov This power of Trpos TOIS ffiriois \a^(3uvovTes t (t. vi. p. 326. ed. Bip.) the particle is called TrepiypatyiKtj or circumscriptive. III. The primary meaning of this particle has often been overlooked on account of an ellipsis attending it: e. g. varepov avre pa2e<r<7oyue0',
77,

elaoKe Aafytwv"Ayujue SiaKpivr}, bwr) 5' erepoiffi ye vtKrjv, Iliad. 292. 378. and 396. where the ellipsis is' to be supplied from what precedes, ear be p/ bia.Kpivr\, tyy 6', &c. IV. But the ellipsis is oftener to be supplied from something exas in eaijXde be KCU es T&V Ka/3e/pw/ TO ipov, es TO ov OCJUUTOV trinsical ecrriv effievai aXXoV ye ^ tepe'a Herodot. iii, 37- Before aXXov underst. ovbeva, and thus ye limits the preceding general negation, and is cor: :

rective.

V. In

Iliad, e,
:

p)

7rXe/oi/s

303. fJieya epyov, o o, et pij TrXetovs, aXXa

ov bvo

y avbpe

tyepotev,

underst.

et

men certainly, or at least, not to Lucian. adv. Indoct. TYIV \vpav be avaQelvai els TOV 'ATrdXXwvos ro lepov, [feat] e?rt TroXi/ ye ffwgeadat avr/)r, t. iii. p. 110. [p. 547. A. ed. Salmur.] underst. et /i>) ews TOV vvv. ao-Trao-tws eai^vvTO es ovTiva. TOV ye irobes Kal yovi'a aawfrav Iliad. 0, 6l 1. q. d. ov
:

y avbpe ov tyepotev, which two mention more, could not carry. In

bvo

dXX' ovTiva, &c.

And

in this elliptical

use

it is

often repeated
irpli>

many
rj

times: e. g.

ov

pV

r0wt

deaf

irpiv

y aKOiravaeaQai,

erepoy ye

re.
aaat
"
:

33

Apqa a<f>wi ye, not you at least, if aifjiaros any one else : irpiv y cnroTravyeffQat, and if you desist, yet at least that you will not desist before, &c. The third ye is perhaps repeated merely on account of the repetition of Trpiv ; the last ye limits the certainty of falling to one or other of Pandarus and ^neas, waving the consideration of the probability of both falling q. d. el prj a^u, In a passage of Aristoph. Plut. beginning at v. 571dXX' erepoj' ye. and the ellipses may be supplied in a similar ye occurs four times manner. This latter passage shows that ye is used in concessions made unwillingly, and with all possible repugnance. VI. The meaning is rather obscure also, and liable to be overlooked, when ye is used interrogatively in expressing indignation ; as, Phidip.
: ;

Iliad e, 288.

ov

OVK

EvptTr/^j/

eTrcuvets,

rrofyojraTOv

Streps,

cro^wrctroV

y'

ene~ivov

Aristoph. Nub. 1381. [1378. Br.] But if the interrogative form of the sentence be changed, and the ellipsis supplied, the force of ye appears et rtva aXXoy, eKelvov ye yu>) Xeyrjs ro0wrarov. In a similar manner it is added in expression of admiration: o-o^wrard ye, <5 TlpobiKe: Plat. Phaedr. p. 267. 1. 16. (t. x. p. 364. ed. Dip.) q. d. et Tivn aXXa, ro0wrara ye ravra. VII. In Aristoph. Plut. 11 69. icat nXvve ye, &c. it is used in conceding Mercury's request of admission, but urging more what is to be done in consequence. VIII. From its proper native force arises its confirmative use, which is also elliptical yeXoToV y, <) veavia, TO Soy^ua Xeyets Plato Phaedr. p. 257. 1. 28. (t. x. p. 344. ed. Bip.) underst. o TI av Xeyots,
: : :

TOVTO ye

boypa yeXo/ov
;

Xeyets.

So

in affirmative
aXrjdij ye,

answers very
q. d.
e'i

fre-

quently

as,

Kcil

opQtis ye,

^aXtord ye,

&c.

rt

aXXo

OTIOVV, aXrjdeffTarov ye TOVTO.

particle

IX. The confirmative power of ye is very conspicuous when the is used in a proposition, which even our adversary we know will not as, av be ye oi/re KT^OIS el, cure Xets Epict. Enchir. gainsay c. 66. but you, it is certain, as you will allow, &c. It would be fully dXXa /u/)j', o TI av avretVots, TOVTO y o/^oXoy^trets, OTI expressed thus OVK el ovre KTiiais, ovTe \eis. Cf. Plat, de Rep. v. p. 462. 1. 34. And thus it appears synonymous with bfjTrov, as it not only affirms, but
;

extorts assent.

Xenophon
ii,

certainly

employs these two

is

particles

together, Cyrop.

2, 26.
btj,

X.
is

It is

used for ye

when what

mentioned

after other things

rested on with exultation and triumph, as of

more moment than

those other ; as, after an enumeration of advantages, o 5e y' ijbtoTov TOVTWV eorlv TTUVTUV, &c. Aristoph. Vesp. 603. [605. Br.] XI. The force called TrepiypaQiKrj of this particle appears in emphatical negation ; as in Theocrit. Idyll, xxii, 74. and in Aristoph. Vesp. ou6ev /zereSw/cev, ovbe TOJ Koivy y e/^ot not even to me, although
:

his associate: v. 912.

ov povov

XII. It has an exaggeratory force sometimes, and is equivalent to dXXa Kai as in Plato de Rep. iv. to the question, dpyos Kal d/xeXjjs yevj/orerai ^uaXXov UVTOS avrov ; the answer is TTO\V ye : q. d. ov p. 421. (t. vi. p. 330. ed. Bip.) yes, and much more so:
:

l-invov

dpyos /uaXXov KCU

d/ueXijs-,

dXXa

(cat

TTO\V apyoTepos Kal nfjieXerrrfpos.

Hoog.

34

FE AH, FE AH

IIOY.

See also Plat. Phaedr. p. 263. 1. 5. (t. x. p. 357. ed. Bip.) But perhaps may be allowed that ye in these passages has its affirmative force. XIII. It is put for fjiaXiffra, a use arising from its primary limitative one as, &\\ov TOV 17 TOVTOV ye eVeica elprjvrjs vvv e7ri0i/^uelre, on, &c. Xen. Cyrop. iii. p. 73. 1. 32. XIV. In proofs of an assertion which are founded on instances, ye is put for yovv, in which however the restrictive or limitative power of ye is preserved.. The Persians, says Isocrates, treated their allies with slight and contempt, and made court to their enemies which he proves by instances rfjv fj.ev ye ^uer' 'AyrjffiXaov orrpanav OKTW TOVS be virep avrwv Ktrbwevtravras, erepov TOOOVTOV jjirjvas btedpe'^av,
it
; ; :

Xpovov TOV fjtiadbv aTreareprjarav : Panegyr. p. 141. for, &c. Fe confines at least they certhe general assertion to the instances specified
:

tainly maintained, &c. XV. Fe has been erroneously supposed redundant: as, e.g. in Odyss. v, 245. ou^ V^ v ovvdevfferai r/'Se ye /3ot/X; : but its sense will appear on supplying the ellipsis : ei aXXo OTIOVV ijfjiiv <rvvdevcrerai, ijbe yt povXfi ov awOevyerai : whatever may be the success of other In the Plutus of Aristophanes, designs, this at least ivill not succeed. Chremylus says that all things are subservient to riches ; which Cario confirms by his own example, eywye roi bta afiiKpov apyvpibtov bov\os yeyevrifjiai. [147. Br.] Here ye limits the proof or confirmation to the person of Cario, setting aside the consideration of others. And there is a similar limitation in those answers which occur so often in Plato ; eywye, and o!/uat eywye, I at least certainly think so.

See also Lysias e. So, OVK e/xoiy e ^cuVercu, Aristoph. Acharn. 769. Agorat. p. 227- Plat, in Phaedr. p. 230. I. 31. (t. x. p. 287- ed. Bip.) p. 266. 1. 29. (p. 363. ed. Bip.) Lucian. Dial. Mort. p. 443.

II.

OF THE PARTICLES FE AH AND FE AH HOT.

I. The restriction or limitation signified by ye is enforced by the addition of fy : thus to the question of Socrates, in Plato's Phasdrus, what power the art of rhetoric has, Phaedrus replies, a very great one ; adding, et> ye br) TrX^flovs crvvobois, especially in assemblies of the multitude : [that is to say, in assemblies, &c.] p. 268. (t. x. p. 266. ed. Bip.) rfjv yap Qeaaa\iav aXXws re OVK eviroaov el vat biievat avev and especially with an armed force : dywyov, icac /uera OTtXwv ye by Thucyd. iv, 78. In Latin this sense is expressed by quidem certe: see e. g. Cic. pro Archia c. xii. [ 30.] II. Hence the frequent use of ye by in affirmative answers : Xeyercu ye S>), Plat. Phaedr. p. 242. 1. 39- (t. x. p. 312. ed. Bip.) A>) affirms that men say so; the restriction or limitation will appear on considering the ellipsis : o rt av eiri irepl avrov TO boKovv epol, TOVTO ye
:

So, ye brj, ibid. p. 277. ! 13. aa^es, OTI Xeyerat. III. But in ?rX^v ye 5r), ye has its circumscriptive force, which,

e^e

without waving or remitting what precedes, merely urges or insists on what follows thus, TroVra yap Trapeort vwv, offwv be.6p.eaQa, 7rX>/v
:

ye

btj

rns K\e\L>vbpas t except only the clepsydra: Aristoph. Vesp. 853.

FE MENTOL
ri

FE MHN.

35

aXXo ?} ypafjiiiariKos aireT\eff6r)V avrl <j>i\off6<J>ov ; TrXr/v ye 5?}, (except only} on avrl 'O/u/pov Xpvanrirov efyyovfjieros : Epict. Enchir. c. 73. The sense of ye by is more latent when those particles are subjoined to an interrogative word ; as, ovbe yap ffofyiar

iroQev ye
X/ai>
:

r)

ITXarwi't TOiavrrjv CLV TIS avadetrj

rapa^v

/cat

but it will appear when Plutarch, de Anim. procr. p. 1016. the negation implied by the interrogation is substituted for the latter, i. e. Fe, whether p{]Tt ye brj for iroQev ye &/), much less to Plato. with interrogation or negation, denies at all events that such confusion and inconsistency can be attributed to Plato, whatever may be conceded with respect to a drunken sophist, and >) enforces the
limitation.

IV.
fyv\ri,

When

TTOV is

added,

it

throws a shade of doubt over assertion,

ye brj TTOV $ V X*I> ^ ffa wai/reXws KaKtas (oviror av ^erac^t,) Plato Phaed. p. 94. 1. 4. if I mistake not ; as you will no doubt allow, or the like efcelvo ye bit TTOV ovbels ovre Qe&v, ovre a.vQp6)Truv roXjuci Xt'yetv : Plat. Euthyphr. p. 8.
:

and lays out

for assent; as, ovbe

FE MENTOI.
is
:

1.

To

ye in
:

its

restrictive sense the

adversative

sometimes added OVK e^w 0pa<rcu, o^uws ye pevroi croi bt I cannot tell you plainly ; yet epcD Aristoph. Ran. 6l. nevertheless I will inform you at least by inuendos or indirect intimations.
II.

Elliptic-ally in

Aristoph. Vesp. 1150.

least,

yet however at
(3ov\ei.

&c.

underst.

et

KaraQov ye fjievrot KUL " prj aXXo rl poi x a P

4/

and rot, ov is placed by Homer, II. e, 51 6. /^eraXX^o-av yet nevertheless, (although they rejoiced when they saw him safe and sound) they made no inquiries at least, (whatever else they might say to him.)
fnev

Between
fjiey

ye

ovroi,

1. In this combination ye retains its restrictive, and prjv its adversative, sense : rvyov pev ovS' avrtiv TOVTWV revfy, TTCIVTWS ye f*i]v (but however at all events) emdvuv aTrorev^ : Epict. Enchir. c. 4. So, after q. d. et KOI paXtara TOVTWV Tevfy, e^etVwv y. /*. a.

FE MHN.

mentioning certain excellences of Protagoras as a rhetorician, Socrates adds, Tu)V ye p.rjv oiKrpoyoMV Xoywi/ KeKpaTrjKevai re^vy p.oi ^atVerat TO rov Xa\Kr)boviov adevos : Plat. Phredr. p. 267. Mj^v opposes to the inventions of Protagoras the ohrpoXoyia of the Chalcedonian
Rhetorician, which
TrXetocrtv,
>:paret.
is

limited
rS)V

by

ye, elliptically

q. d.

et

pj

rots

<iXXa

rfj

ye

oiKTpoyo&v Xoywy re^vy 6 XaX^5oi/tos

Aeyet 'AptaroTeXrjs rov KVKVOV K'aXXtVatSa etycu KU\ TroXvTratSa, e\eiv Fe limits the praise but yet : ^Elian. V. H. i. 14. JUT/V icat QVJJLOV evrecvias, and fjiijv signifies that something is set against that praise.
ye
:

So,

/cat

jjct-^effdai

TOVS KVKVOVS rots aerots, afj-vvaoQai ye

\nr\v

avrovs,

aXX' OVK apxetv abiKw, ibid,

but then that

it is

only in self-defence,

&c.
II.

In this combination ye has sometimes the circumscriptive force

36
before mentioned
:

FOYN.
:

thus in Plato de Rep. v. Socrates, after setting forth the greatest of the advantages of his republic, proceeds TO. ye T&V KO.K&V bi airpeTretav oKvut KOI Xeyew, cJv ciTr^XXayfjiijv (TfJUKpoTara. p. 465. (t. vii. p. 36. ed. Bip.) [but as to the smallest pevoi av elev
:

of the

evils,

&c.]

III. And /LU)I> sometimes supplies the place of be after pev, ye ro pev retaining its restrictive force : as, TrpocrotKos yap OaXarra wap' cKaffTTjv fj/nepav fibv, fj.6Xa ye p.rjv ovrws &Xfjivp6v cat iriKpbv yet'

x<W

rovrjpa

but nevertheless, to say nothing of any other inconvenience , &c. Plato de Legg. iv. p. 705. (t. viii. p. 163. ed. Bip.) oi pev bfj Hepaai 6/zotre etyepovTo" o'i ye fjtfjv TroXe/utoe OVKETL ebvvavTO fjieveiv, Xenoph. Cyrop. iii. at the end. [but the enemy on the other hand,
:

&c.]

FOYN. 1. Yovv is compounded of ye and ovv, which are sometimes found together, without being united in one word,e. g. in Xen. Mem. i. p. 731. 1. 10. and iii. p. 782. 1. 5. or separated by another word, as, paXXov y* av ovv OVTU) Trpbs TOVS fiapfiapovs TpeiroiVTO, Plato de Rep. v. p. 469. (t. vii. p. 44. ed. Bip.) It therefore limits or restricts by ye, and concludes by ovv, and is used in arguments w Ai//ce Sean-ora, yet'rwv rather probable than irrefragable and certain,
ijptas'

<TV

yap, oiairep eyb,

6\o(f)vpp.ols'

KCU

roils
:

ytcqaas

Ke^aprjaai rots baKpvoiai TWV tyevyovrtav atet yovv e7r/r?5es twv evravd', tva ravr'

aKpoyo
that

Aristoph. Vesp. 390. [from your having made your abode where you may hear such things, it may at least be fairly concluded
/Ltidcetv,
o'iet in them.] Trapeira TOV fj.ev TO (ftpovipov eyicwTOV be TO a<f>pov \l/eyeti>, avayKala yovv ovra, etr aXX' CLTTOL $eiv Xeyetv ; Plat. Phaedr. p. 236. (t. x. p. 297. ed. Bip.) may you not conclude from his passing over what at least is quite necessary to

you delight

be spoken of, that he will not have any thing else to say ? II. In some passages yovv is, at least therefore : Kai pot, el So*:e7, anoKpivac fjtaXXov be, eVei TOVTO <roi abvvarov, enivevaov yovv TI avavevaov irpos ra epwrwyueva : Luciati. Adv. Indoct. t. iii. p. 103. ?^,
eiTrep

Kat aTrorvy^avetv avjji(3aivot, iroXefjiov yovv epyov p.a-^pfjLivavs yeveadat: Heliodor. vi, 13. and in that sense it is used elliptically by Lucian. ibid. p. 120. 1. from signs or tokens; III. rWv is used in arguments drawn as, KOVK eV0' OTTWS ov^ fyjjiep&v TCTTapwv TO itXe~i<JTOv vbwp avayKaibts e-^ei TOV Oeov iroifjcrai' eireiai yovv Tolfftv Xv^vots ovrou jjiVKrjTes : Aris2. from facts or examples as, w SwKpares, eyw rot toph. Vesp. 262. ffe fjiev btKaiov 6' oiibe OTTUCTTIOVV' &OKCIS be not Kal avTos vopiSii), aotybv TOVTO ytyv&aKeiv' ovbeva y ovv Tfjs avvovaias apyvpiov Trparrr/ Xenoph. Mem. i, 6. [ 11.] Aristolle says that a female hyaena is seldom taken, and adds as a proof, eV evbeica yovv Kvvrjyos TIS jjiiav tyrj Xa/3e7i/, Hist. An. vi. c. 32. IV. In affirmative answers yovv is used in a threefold manner, ye preserving its power of limitation or restriction, and ovv its power of conclusion: 1. when what is given as a sign or proof of the truth of what has been said, is added, or comes after ; as in Plato, one liaving determined the age most proper in man and woman for pro; :

FE nOT.

FE

TOI, &c.^

37

pagation, another answers, u^oTipwv yovv avrr] UK/M} aiouaros re 2. when Kai <f>povi']ae(i)s : de Rep. v. p. 46" 1. (t. vii. p. 26. ed. Bip.) the sign or proof lias preceded; as, CK TWV vvv yovv elpquevuv, [certainly that conclusion must be drawn from what has now been
3. when said:] Plat. Politic, p. 295.1. 16. (t. vi. p. 84. ed. Bip.) that from which a conclusion is drawn is not expressed, but something extrinsical ; as in those frequent answers, CIKUS y ovv, bUawv y' ovv. Thus in Xenoph. to the question, TO TO. nadi) TWV TTOIOVVTWV rl

awuaTwv airouiuelaOat ov
is,

Troiel

eiKos

y'

ovv.

Mem.

iii.

c.

circumstances, which might bable that such is the case.

TWO. rep^tv rois Oewfjevois ; the answer 10. q. d. from a great multitude of be adduced in proof, it is at least pro-

FE DOT.

I.

Fe

is

prefixed to the conjectural particle

;

TTOV,

the

former limiting, and the latter laying out for assent thus in Plato de Rep. x. Socrates, after asking whether it were not just that the poets should come forth and defend their cause either in an ode or in some other kind of poetry, adds, bo~ipev e ye irov av Kal ro'is irpoffrarats avrijs, oaoi
avrfjs elireiv
'.

^u?)

p.

607

TroirjTiKol, (J)iXo7roir]ral be, avev ueTpov \6yov virep (t. vii. p. 109- ed. Bip.) ayopas re\os Tavrijv

you not? Fe 895.

you will give me this eel at least, I think, or to be sure,} instead of the market toll : Aristoph. TTOV is used whenever one suspends a limitation triction on the will or judgment of another ; as, beivov ye
ye
TTOV Swo-ets ejuol,

(or will

Acharn.
or resTTOV
'err

avOpuTTOs a.7ro(3a\wi> on\a, Aristoph. Vesp. 27eliciting assent is added to ye circumscriptive

So
:

oi;

ye

TTOV

Xeyots av, Plat, de Legg. p. 712.

1.

24.

(t.

negation TTOV yap 6r) rvpavv&a. iv. p. 177. ed.

in

Bip.)
II. Sometimes however, since ye is confirmative, (see above,) the employment of ye TTOW is only a civil manner of requiring assent to what one knows to be undeniable as, Kal rots aya6o~is ye TTOV rS>v
;

vewv yepa boriov, Plato de Rep. v. p. 460. 1. 10. Bip.) The answer is opdtis. So, Kalapxovrds y6 TTOU

(t. vii.

p. 25.

ed.

ov rovs 0avXora-

rovs avTois (over the boys) eniaTriaov(nv, a\\a TOVS c/jureiptq. Kal fjXtKiq. iKavovs riyeuovas re Kal TraiSaywyovs elvai, ibid. p. 467. 1 32. This could not be denied ; Trpeirei yap, therefore, is the answer.

FE TOI, FE TOI AH, FE TOI HOT. -- 1.

enforces the limitation of ye, as
in

Tot,

like

S>),

Aristoph. Vesp. 928. [934. Br.]

So

avrrj (this
r. vi.]

1141. [1146. Br.] rolfft (3apfiapois vfyaiverai ?roXXa7s bairuvats' garment) ye TOI eplwv raXavTor caraTreTrw^e pabiws. [On the difference between ye btj, and ye rot, see Abr. of Vig. p. 181.
v.

In Aristoph. Plut. 424. Chremylus, seeing Poverty, asks her who she is ; to which Blepsiades answers, I<TWS 'Epivvvs eariv CK Tpayybtas' flXenei ye TOI paviKuv TL Kal TpuyubiKov : however that may be, she at
least certainly looks,
II.

&c.
'.

For
;

added

is sometimes stronger enforcement or confirmation, Sr) Plat. as, eon ye TOI bfj reXevri), Trept ou TOV Xoyov Trotelrai
still

38

AE.

Phaedr. p. 264. 1. 10. (t. x. p. 358. ed. Bip.) an exclamation of Phaedrus, convinced of what he had before denied.
III.

On

the contrary, to

weaken the

affirmation, vrov

is

added

as,

ehos ye
(t. ix.

rot irov ffotyovs

avbpas

opQtis Xeye(i>, Plato

de Legg. x. p. 888.

p. 74. ed. Bip.)

1.

in its relation to fjiev will be treated of under the but here, as far as may be, separately. It is never the first word of a sentence, but usually the second ; sometimes the third, as in Gal. iii, 23. especially if ov or ^j), or the article, is the first; as, ov de\a) be vpas KVIYWV&US TUV buifjioviwv ytreadat, 1 Cor. x, roy \6yov be nov iraXcu Qavpaaas e^w, Plato Phaedr. p. 25720. 1. 20. (t. x. A different arrangement in these last p. 344. ed. Bip.) passages would not have kept ov be and ovSe, TOV be and roVSe, It is even the fourth, when a preposition with sufficiently distinct. its case follows ov, as in Galat. iii, 23. II. When be occurs without per, the latter particle is to be understood ; as in, JJ.TIVIV f) fj.vpi 'A^cuoTs aXye' edqiee, TroXXas & tyQipovs 4>vxas aibi rrpo'ia-^ev fyowwv, II. o, 3. after fjivpia. Ill this sort of conThe struction, which is very common, it is often rendered et or que. following is more unusual \^evbe1s t at b' a\r)0e~is OVK elcriv iibovai ; Plat. Phileb. p. 36. 1. 42. (t. iv. p. 26l. ed. Bip.) for TWV ijbot'aiv OVK elaiv

AE.

Ae
;

latter particle

at

fJLev

^evbels, at

b'

a\^0els

some other particle in a preceding causes be in a following one to appear redundant, while yet it retains its signification of opposition or relation; as, os a eirel es K\iair)v ayayov KCL\ ^elvta buiKa, avdis be KTelvaifjLi: Odyss. ^, 319Here e is retained as a sign of opposition between ayayov es K\. K. ^. b. and KTeivaipt, although the substitution of eirel for Trporepov gives an appearance of redundancy to be, [or of anacoluthon to the conSo in Iliad e, 38. betva be is put, as if TO reraorov pev struction.] f-ireaavTo had preceded. [It is to be observed that this use of be in the apodosis is most frequent after particles signifying time in the
III.

Sometimes the

insertion of

member

protasis.]

IV. It appears to supply the place of aXXa, disjunctive or adversative; as, a.Kap7ru)t> uev t ^^oiatav be: Aristot. de Rep. i. p. 185. J KCU e00ovelre, rjKaipeHarOe b e l Epist. ad Philipp. iv, 1 0. 9. e<p'
It is
I.

added

to

an adversative sentence

in

Br.] and in Thucyd. iv. c. 86. be TWV 'EXXi^i^w^ TrapeX^XvQa.

avros re OVK

Aristoph. Vesp. 587- [589. eirl KaK<5, en eXevdepwaei

V.
ly
1.
;

It

elegantly closes a sentence either disjunctively or adversative-

as, oV'O/;??0os pev OVK rjcrdero, I,TT)ffixppos be: Plat. Phaedr. p. 243. 5. (t. x.p. 313. ed. Bip.) In this construction, if the negation in the first member be not ex-

pressed separately, as by ov or another particle, but be included in a noun or verb, then in the latter member an affirmative noun or verb must be understood; as, TWV be vXw>> ra a^tara jj,ev 6'Xws appayrj,
bta TO yvfj.vwQel.aav ri\v priTpav rjpa(veffdai Kal airoQviiaKeiv* ire\Kr]Ta Kal ra orpoyyyXa, bia TO eva7retX^00at TT)V pr'jTpav :
TO. be

Theo-

AE.

39

or the like, is to be understood ; and in phrast. After ra be, pi'iyvvrat, the passage of Plato above, if riyvoet had been used instead of OVK or the like, must have been understood after ^rrjat^opos yaOero, e'yrw,
It.

VI. Ae is used also, especially in the end of sentences, to qualify or explain something preceding, and obviate error; as, yeypa^e yap Plato br) Avarias ov-% VTTU epuarov be 7reipdtp.ev6v nva. T&V KaKwv' See also Epictet. c. Phaedr. p. 227. I. 25. (t. x. p. 281. ed. Bip.) T&V ovrwv, 32. [p. 31. 1. 12. ed. Simps. Oxon. 1739-] ra^toro^
:

Xeyw be
it is

TO Trvpwbes Aristot. de Mtind. c. 4. and Rom. ix, 30. But sometimes dispensed with, as in the Gospel of St. John xiv, 22.
:

oi>X o 'lovcapioin/s for oir% 6 'Iflrfcaptwrjjs be.

VII. Ae in the second member sometimes adds an aggravating or heightening circumstance or consideration; as, VTT//KOOS [te^pi Oavarov Qavarov be aravpov: Philipp. ii, 8. q. d. ov povov be /ue^pt Bavarov, aXXa brj KOL /ue^pi Qavarov eravpov [equivalent to KO.I TCIVTO. Qavarov aravpov, and that too the death of the cross ; in our translation, even
:

the death of the cross.] VIII. Ae frequently marks transition, imperfectly, without yuei>, as, Kara{3a.VTt be CIVTM, &C. eicreXQovTt be ry 'lr)<rov, &c. Mattli. viii, 1,5.
'I^o-ovs,

perfectly, with /uev, as KarafiavTi be avr&>, QOVTI be, &c.

if it

had been
KO.I

said, KCU

ravra pkv eXefcv o

&c.

TavTa pev

eiroiriaev o 'Irjaovs, eioe\-

IX. In introducing a fresh topic or point, it may be rendered further, moreover, &c. but it sometimes merely marks the continuation of discourse, as in Theogn. 1039. X. It performs the office of pev br), in concluding one topic and proceeding to another without e in the succeeding member ; as, ev
TrvpeTolcri

be

Tcti'ra.

OKOVOKJI eXirls,

Kai ravra

fjiev btj

ev Trvperoifftv'

OKoaoiffi be,

&c. Hippocr. Aphor. &c.

iv. n.

73. for,

XI.

It is

elliptical
p.ep.ovas,

found in the very beginning of speeches made abrupt and by the agitation and anger of the speaker; as, TTWS be av vvv
;

KVOV abbees, avrl ep.eio artjcraodai

Iliad. 0,

481.

So

II.

a,

541.

XII. From its power of connecting what follows with what precedes, so that the former may not be considered without the latter, arises its use in inverted or preposterous argumentation, when the conclusion is placed first, as in Iliad, rj, 395. ////r' tip', &c. cited under APA, I. VII. p. 17. where yvwror be t &c. ought to form the premises,
although placed after the conclusion, marked by apa. XIII. In a causative member of a sentence, be sometimes supplies the place of yap, which is transposed to a preceding member; as, Zeus yap TTOV roye olbe a tee fjiiv ayye/XaijUt t5wv, erri TroXXa b' aXridrjv : Odyss. |, 120. See under TAP, I. ix. p. 29. So with aXXa yap in the preceding member; as, a XX' ov yap Mtruaicrtv eirfivbave rraat veeadai, be~ifia 6' evl ypeffl dfJKe 0ea [See Abr. of Vig. p. 173. 1. 38.] But yap is not always found in the preceding member: see Iliad e, 391. Theogn. 102. not even with aXXa: aXXa TriQeoQ"' a//<pw be yewrepw earov efjie'io Iliad, a, 259. XIV. This last mentioned employment of be has occasioned a
. :

40

AE.

AAI.

causal sense to be erroneously assigned to it; for in reality it only fills up the vacuity made by the transposition of yap, which, either expressed or understood in a preceding member, is the true causal Thus, in laa. be ptv Kebvrj aXo^y riev ev peyapoifftv' evvfj 6' particle. OVTCOT efjtiKTOf yo\ov & aXeeive yvvatKos : Odyss. a, [433.] the second be
is

put for aXXa,

)(.

yap being understood: q. d. dXXa yap

oi/Tror'

efitKTOy

6. a.

y.

In the passages, in which be has been supposed to be put for be found to have its proper distinctive or adversative use, or to be repeated or added on account of an unusually long protasis or parenthesis preceding. Thus in II. <5, 479* xai TTOTC TIS e'nrrioi,
bfj, it

XV.

will

Trarpos

5'

understood
o Trarrip

and answers to per expressed as follows; ayaOos per, o be vlos apelvwv Trarpos. [See Abr. of Vig. p.
oye
;

TroXXoi/ apeivtay,

it

is

distinctive,
fully

for the sentence

would be

201.

r. xviii.]

II. rj, 374. t, 680. but separated by others, who interpose some other word or words between, may be rendered and moreover, and indeed; but here too be retains its adversative sense : vvv yap ?rept -^jv^&v TUIV v/zerepwv 6 ceywv, Kal Trept yfjs, ev rj etyvre, Kal vrepi ou'wv, ev oh erpa^Tjre, Kal Trept yvvaucuv 5e Kal TCKVUV : Xenoph. Cyrop. iii, 3, 43. i. e. ov Trept TOVTUV povov, yudXtcrra Se Trepi rwv yvvatK&V Kal Tetcvwv. See also iii, 2, 24. iii, 2, 7. In Hebr. xi, 36. eYt be befffjitiv, where Kal beffju&v be might have been said. [See notej on p. 201. of Abr. of Vig.] XVII. Ae Kal differs from Kal be. In the latter, Kal connects the whole member following it with what precedes; in the former Kal t

XVI. Kai

be f conjoined

by epic

writers, as Horn.
r.

705. &c.

[see Abr. of Vig. p. 201.

xix.]

being augmentative or exaggerative, influences only the word immediately construed with it, and be shows more evidently its relative sense without any ellipsis. Thus, Kal Trvdojueros ras eKKXrjcrias oiTrayyeXXetV
irpoffbiriyriaaaQai

be Kal

rrjv

CTT'

'Apioro^wi'ros

Trore

yevopevriv TOV
g.
ill

priropos fjia^r}v:

Theophr. Char. c. 7. [p. 41. ed. Simps.] XVIII. Ae is perhaps sometimes put for Kal as a copulative; e. avOts be Kreivaipiy <f>i\ov ft cnro Qvpuv eXo//u^v Odyss. |, 319. but
:

be av Kaprepos eaai, 6ea be ae yeivaro fJirjrrjp, [Iliad, a, 280.] before Kaprepos, pev may be understood, to which be may be correlative. It is sometimes put for Kal in its signification of time:
el

vv%v

Eurip. Phoeu. 418. XIX. Ae, when enclitic, is not the conjunction, but a syllabic adjection ; as, 6be tfbe robe, this, (and the conjunction be sometimes accompanies obe, as in Iliad, e, 26l. 0, 155. thus showing itself to be of a nature distinct from the adjection) roioabe, roaroabe, rrjXtKoffbe, ev6a.be, erOevbe, olKovbe, ayopi)vbe, ovbe bofjiovbe, to his own house or home, Odyss. a, 83. and with ets, els aXabe t to the sea, Odyss. *c, 351. 07/3ae, 'A0^va<?e, for Qqfiacrbe, 'AQrjvaabe, by coalescence of bff (by metathesis for 08) into 5 ; a change which always takes place when the noun before the adjection ends in as. Ae is sometimes added in signification of the final cause, as in /^ri <j>6/3ovb' dyopev', II. e, 252.

'AbpavTov

b'

fiXdov els TrapaaTabas

AAI.-

1.

Aai has generally a discretive or distinctive, often an

AE FE.

AE AH.

A'

OVN.

41

adversative, power. Plainly in Aristoph. Ran. 1502. [1454. ed. Br.] ri bal Xeyeis av ; and you, on the other hand, or in turn, what say you? after another had first expressed his sentiments for ri & av ; but again, or further, what do you say ri ba\ bn; KdKovpyeiv be~i ; to this? &c. after conclusion of a preceding argument: Pint. Crit. c. 10. ed. Fisch. II. It is in frequent use when upon denial of something by one person, another inquires in consequence, what or how else then? as, TTUIS bai; how else then? ri bal', what else then? Eurip. Hel. 126'2. See also 05. and Eccles. 970. [978. ed. Br. Aristoph. Piut. 156. where rov be av .] [See Abr. of Vig. p. 202.]
:

III.

Cyrop.

Tt baf; v. 1.6.

may sometimes
7- TI bai
;

be

rendered,

why

so? as in

Xen.

etftri

6 veaviaKos.

These particles are combined without alteration in the AE FE. sense of either, as in Plato Phasdr. p. 230. 1. 26. (t. x. p. 287. ed. ol avrol be ye, &c. Bip.) av be ye, &c. and in Xen. Cyrop. v, 1, 7.
But when be is adversative, be ye is for a\\a ye: thus Plato, after speaking of sciences merely speculative or theoretical, proceeds, at be ye irepi reKTOviKijv av Kat avpfraaav j^eipovpylav, &c. but those on the contrary, which are employed about, &c. Politic, p. 258. 1. 36. (t.
vi.

p. 7. ed. Bip.)

1. A) is added to be, as a mark of transition to a or circumstance of greater weight than any preceding to which all before has been but prefatory or introductory, or beyond which amplification or exaggeration cannot be carried. Socrates,

AE AH.

point

about to introduce to Protagoras, the Sophist, a youth who was desirous of becoming a pupil of the latter, elicits from him a confession of what he wishes to become through the instruction of Protagoras, by asking him first, what he would expect to become, if a pupil of Hippocrates the physician, next if of Polycletus or Phidias the statuaries, he then comes without by) ?/ Qeibtav, &c. (el be Trctpa tloXufcXetror
; * to the point by saying, elev napa be by Tlpwrayopav a^KOfj-evoi eyd) re Kal av, apyvpiov efce/vw ptaQov eroifjioi eaopeda. reXeli' : but now the

the person we are going to, &c. Plato iii. p. 89. ed. Bip.) [p. 283. 1. 52. ed. Basil. 1 .] OIs yap eanv kv Xoyois r; TroXtrcta, TTWS, av ovroi fj,t] aXrjdels wa-ty, aacjjdXws can iro\tTeveadai ; ear be bi) cat Trpos a TO!S e^dpols
case is that

Protagoras
1.

is

Protagor. p. 311.

30.

(t.

de

avjufyepei, buipa fals. legat.

ns Xa/3w^ Xeyy, TTWS ov^l KO.I Kivbvt'evaere See also Xenoph. Cyrop. iii, 1, 6. ijv be

Demosth.
rj

brj

TroXepy

&C. On account of the fresh attention excited by this use, these particles occur when mention is made of something said after a long KOI silence; as, ciKrjv eyeVovro aiwTrrj' dv//e be brj Me^eXaOs aviarciTo So i, 3 692. Elsewhere b^'\n be brj signifies fjiereenre: Iliad, rj, 94. time eVrov ^e brj rob' fj/unp, f| orov, &c. Eurip. Orest. 39.
KpaTrjdeis, II.
1 .
;

A'

OYN.Hoog.

-I.

either expressed

In this combination be or understood, and ovv

commonly answers to makes a conclusion

F

/uei>

1.

42

AE TOI.

AH.

fioyts 5'

from something preceding ; as, rj Xap//cXeia nucpov pev eXoXi/e ovv iraXtv vtyelpTre TOV OKOTTOV Heliod. x, ip. Me> and be distinguish their respective members, and ovv concludes from piKpov eo\6\ve the difficulty Chariclea had to summon firmness sufficient to do what she did. 2. from something following Xeyerw o' ovv
l :

ofjiws,

7ribr)

povXerai

^ifftfjiidprjs

Id. X, 10.

i.

e.

^LifftfJiiOpris

/SouXercu,

Xeyerw ovv.
II. A' ovv, after pev bi}, concludes recital ; as, 0>epavXas pev br} eboe & ovv, &c. Xen. Cyrop. ii, 3, 6. And without pev OVTWS eiTrev by, or at least with an ellipsis of /uev, as /Elian says, the vulpis marina, having bitten through the line with which it has been caught, v^^erat avdts. ovv KO.I bvo Kal rpia KaTeirtev ayKiorpa : V. H. TToXXd/as
'

i,5.
III. From the use last mentioned arises its inceptive use, be connecting, and ovv noting a commencement of the subject itself after ' o v something prefatory ; as, after four introductory verses, Trpwros

Ad^i'iv tSwv ayopeve M.eva\Kas : Theocr. Idyll, viii, 5. IV. A' ovv is used in proceeding with recital after a declared omission of unnecessary particulars; as in a summary of the history of Tantalus, Pelops, Atreus, and Thyestes, ri T &ppr)r" avafjierpriffaff6ai fie Set ; e&aiire & ovv viv, TCKV' fnroKTeivas, 'Ar/oeus Eurip. Orest. 15. well then, Atreus, &c.
TTort
:

AE TOI.
indeed, in truth
c.

Toi added to be
:

is,

as usual, confirmative;

truly,

yepwv &v KOI iroXtos, e^wv b e Aristoph. Vesp. 1187.

rot irXevpitv j3apvTarr]v,

I.

OF THE PRIMARY POWER OF THE PARTICLE AH.

it

I. A) is usually a subjunctive particle; in poetry, however, takes the lead ; as, bij rore, Iliad, e, 114. and bf) yap.

often

II. Its primary signification is that of time, now; as, cfym by airavol b' 'Aaavpioi KO\ b>) aptffTrjKores rqv, Xen. Cyrop. iii, 3, 12. for $617. eeaav : by this time : ib. iii, 3, 20. Especially after adverbs of time ;

Hesiod. "Epy. 414. ore b)j, Iliad. 0, 148. the poets prefix a\Xa before ore brj, to mark the time of the principal incident of a recital, after narration of other circumstances; as, aXX' ore bij p eKi^ave,&c. but when at last he found her: Iliad,
br),

And

So 762. 769. 0, 1 450. w, 785. After vvv it signifies, instantly, without the least delay ; as, vvv br) nayriTeov, i. e. vvv i]brj, as Plato expresses it, in Phaedr. p. 228. vvv be br) evOabe fjioi Kaicov eWercu 1. 25. Iliad. ^, 92. With a past tense vvv br) is a little while ago, just now ; as, ovs vvv brj e\eyes, Plato de Rep. v. p. 476. 1. 9. and so in ii. p. 314. init. (t. vi. p. 240. ed. Bip.) and in iv. init. [p. 403. 1. 18. ed. Basil. 1 .] and in Gorg. p. 455. (t. iv. p. 22. ed. Bip.) IV. When by precedes vvv, it does not affect the latter, but the enunciation or proposition following as, os br) vvv Kpareet, Iliad. </>, 315. where c\) affects Kpareet : and in v. 458. Neptune, after reminde,

334.
III.

AH.

43

ing Apollo of their ill-treatment by Laomedou, says, rov bfj vvv \aoiai &c. where vvv keeps its signification of time, but br} Repels xaptv closes the recital with an indignant interrogation, equivalent to an exhortation against the Trojans. So, arap bi) vvv for aXXa By vvv t Theogn. 851. UKOVC b>} vvv, Eurip. Orest. 237. 1181. Phreniss. 918. 1436.
;

II.

ON THE HORTATORY USE OF THE PARTICLE AH.

is

its primary sense of time, including briefness and desThis use is very apparent derived the hortatory use of >/. when bf} is used with an imperative mood ; as, Xeye by) ical rr)v erepav See Plato Phaedr. HapTvpiav, Demosth. de Fals. Legat. p. 221. 1. 25. 6 (V p. 2'29- 1. 8. (x. 284. Bip.) &Kove by], ib. p. 230. (p. 28?. Bip.) MI pot, ib. p. 268. I. 7. (p. 366. Bip.) So Acts xiii, 2. Hence it is very frequently subjoined to the imperatives, aye, 0epe,

I.

From

patch,

iOt,
1.

eiirta npbs vpas as, 0epe brj 10. (f)pe by, 'ibb)p.v, &c. Plato

Demosth. de Fals. Legat.

p.

p. 222.

Gorg.
*

455.

1.

9-

(t. iv. p.

21. ed.

i0i 677, aKo\ov6r)tr6v pot rfjbe aye bt}, e<j>rj : Id. de Rep. V. Bip.) p. 474. 1. 23. (t. vii. p. 54. ed. Bip.) II. It is joined with the first person plural of verbs, when the speaker exhorts both himself and others ; as, bieXdwjuevbr) els Be0Xee//,

Luke
cf.

ii,

15.

So Plato Phaedr.
>/,

p. 260.

1.

9.

(p.

350.

ed.

Bip.)

Acts xv, 36.

III.

In

without dropping
TrpoffaiTujv,

used hortatively, vvv urges speed emphatically, signification of time; as, vvv br} yivov yX/o-xpos, T Aristoph. Ach. 450. [451. Br.] now l^vpiTribrjv \nrapaiv
vvv
its
:

then,

now.

III.-

OF THE INTERROGATORY USE OF AH.

I. In interrogations br) denotes an eagerness for reply ; so that it does not lose the signification of speed and despatch inherent in its primary sense 2. ev0jy/uet, <5 IlwXe. II. ri b TI ; quid ita tandem ? why, I pray? or tell me: Plato Gorg. p. 469. (p. 49. ed. Bip.) So in Cratyl. p. 401. 1. 17- (266. Bip.) and in Phsedr. p. 265. 1. 33. (36l. Ar) in such questions may be considered as hortatory also ; Bip.) for one eager for the answer of another, naturally urges and instigates him to make it. Thus, TO. Trola br) ravra Plat, de Rep. iv. p. 421. (330. Bip.) is the same in effect as aye br}, et?re, irola can ravra ; and in this urgency for speed, and impatience of delay, the signification
:

iroiov bt'i TI TO evcrefles vvv ovv irpbs Aios Xeye /-toi, and with adjura$ys elvai KO.I TO aaefies Plato Euthyphr. p. 5. 1. 29. tion in Sophocles also, Philoct. 1228. [1235.] II. Uov bii is in Plat. Phzedr. p. 243. 1. 41. (p. 315. Bip.) and in Xenoph. Cyrop.iii. p. 69. 1. 28. and TTWS >/; in Plat. Cratvl. p. 408. 280. ed. Bip.) and Phaedr. p. 242, 1. 35. (p, 312. ed. Bip. 1. 20.

of ijbrj

is

apparent,

(p.

44
and

AH.

Trot br) ; in Phaedr. [p. 195. I. 28. ed. Bas. 1.] and, with the intervention of another word, rl yap bi'i; TI ovv br] ; ri be by ; occur. III. The addition of Trore augments the signification of wonder in

an eager inquiry;
Xet/orev erepois,

as, ri bfjTroreTov ^wKpaTrjv 6 6eos fJiatovoQai p.ev CKCavrov be yevvyv cnreK&Xvoev; Plut. Qua3st. Plat. init. ri briTTore rovrtav ; and why about these things above all others ? Demosth. de Fals. Legat. p. 201. I. 4. Add Plat, in Protag. p. 324. 1. 33. A//?rore is put after words to render their meaning (p. 1 15. ed. Bip.) less definite, and resembles the Latin cunque, as oorts brjirore, oirov And btj alone is sometimes used in the same like. bt'iTrore, and the manner, as in Plat. Thea^t. p. 209. I. 40. (p. 193. ed. Bip.)

IV. Tt bfi is in some places employed in increpation, as in Iliad. <f>, 436. V. A>) is occasionally put first, but with be preceding ; as, Xeyeis bebr} ri; Plat. Phaedr. p. 242. 1.33. (p. 312. ed. Bip.) see also p. 259T&V be by ypovuv biari ; Demoslh. 1. c. where transition also 1. 12. underst. should an is signified: but wherefore of the times also? account be exacted from the ambassadors.
'.

IV.
I.

OF AH INCEPTIVE.
is

Because commencement of action or speech

attended with

adhortatiori of one's self or others, bt] is employed as an inceptive or inchoative particle : TOVTO br) /uera ravra Treipaaofjiai ere biba^ai, Plato

by aKon&nev QVTO, Id. Phredr. p. 204. (p. 233. ed. Bip.) p. 260. (p. 350. ed. Bip.) and Nicocles, in Isocrates, after prefatory matter, enters on the delivery of his precepts thus : ^>J?/K brj &c. p. v/jwi>, &c. I say then, II. Hence it is used instead of pet> bj] in commencement of dis-

Sympos.

we

cussions; thus Aristotle enters on a subject, after introductory observations, with these words: el bij rts e ap^s ra Trpay/zara qvopeva fiXtyeiev, if then any one, &c. de Rep. i, 2. and Plato, %v OVTW br} irais, &c. Phaedr. p. 237. (p- 300. ed. Bip.) and also in the commencement of a recital of another's words, as, roiovrovs by \6yovs " Qvre etirev, TrdXews, &c/' Thucyd. iv, 58.

And in introducing something worthy of attention, and diffrom what has preceded, b>] is used, with self-adhortation or eV0a b ij elirelv Xeyerai 6 Kvpos, and then is incitation, as it were Cyrus said to have spoken, &c. Xen. Cyrop. ii, l r 10. ovrw bfj o KV/JOS, &c. then, things being so, Cyrus, &c. ii, 1, 14. IV. And because transition involves a fresh commencement, therefore br) serves for transition also, and especially exhibits its hortatory force too when the transition is from recital of what has already been said, to an exhortation that the remainder may be despatched; as, av eivat e'tKOfft pvptabas* aye by, (now then on TToXeftlovs Xeyeis the other hand tell me} rrjs a^s bvvajjiews rl irXtfdos Qrjs elvai ; Xen. Cyrop. ii. p. 39 raftTa fj.ev rots TroXXols airoKeKpifievot av tipev' v/*as be bri fiera Ylpwrayopov epwrw, &c. but now I ask you f &c. Plat.
III.

ferent

Protag. p. 358.

(t. iii.

p. 184. ed. Bip.)

AH.

45

V.

OF THE USE OF AH IN GRADATION.

I. AP/ is used in gradation I. when new force is added to discourse, or when a fresh topic is introduced ; and this use is nearly allied to those before mentioned, as it has somewhat of exhortation, or of inception, or of transition, or of all together : as, al be ?/ aXXcu,

aTraffai TOV arw, eVorrcu, but now as to the other souls yXt-fcOfjievat jj.ev (two classes of spirits had been before mentioned) Plat. Phaedr. p. 248. (p. 324. ed. Bip.) and in the middle of a subject, digressing to a collateral topic, kav be bfj o alpedets Toiybe aipeOfj' aXtffKerai in what manTpoiry, [q. d. but by the by I will now explain to you, ner, &c.] ib. p. 253. (p. 335. ed. Bip.) II. 2. When discourse rises or increases in importance or emThe Athenians, says Herodotus, caring little about Pisisphasis tratus, as long as he remained at Marathon, yet when they know that he is advancing to the city, ovrw brj (then at length) por\Qeovaiv eV So in Plato, This, says Phaedrus, would be ridiculous : avrov, i, 62. oinrtii ye, aXX' ore b i) ffTrovbrj (re TretQui/ji, &c. not replies Socrates so yet ; but when I should really and seriously set about persuading you, &c. Phsedr. p. 260. (p. 350. ed. Bip.) And when one arrives at the particulurization of what is most excellent, after mention of what is less so thus Socrates, about to bestow higher praises on Calliope and Urania than he had before given to the other Muses, says, 0.1 5?) ftaXurra T&V Movo-wv irepi re ovpavov Kal Xoyovs ovaat, Idffi Ka\\iffrr)v Plat. Phsedr. p. 259. 1. '35. (p. 349- ed. Bip.) tywvtiv
: :
; : :

discourse arrives at the proposed or main point, after introduction : as, o pev by rvy^avei. ov, ireplol povXevreor, eiprjrai re iccu tZpiffrar fiXeTrovres be btj irpos avro, ra XotTra Xeyw/zev : Plat. Phaedr. p. 238. 303. ed. Bip.) (p. So, after a simile, or analogous case, the apodosis thus follows in Epictetus : TOV avrov bfj rpoirov KqvTavQa' ov 7rpoaeK\r'iOr)s e^>' eor/aovV rivos; &c. Enchir. c. 32. IV. 4. When in an enumeration of particulars, or in amplification, the highest point or pitch is attained, or where a climax can be carried no higher: thus, when in Xenophon's Cyrop. the Armenian has been led by a train of questions to self-condemnation, evravOa b >}, says the Kal TOVS 7re7rXoi/s author, 6 fnev irals avrov irfpiecrTraffaro Trjv Tiapav, it was arrived when at be &c. KaTeppiftaTo, yvvalKes ebpvnTovTo, [then, at that, &c.] iii, 1. 13. So Croasus, in enumerating the motives
III.

3.

When

which had urged him on to wage war with Cyrus Kal I/TTO r(t)V yeve<70at, KOI beofj.ei'(i)i> HQV TTpoaTarijv
Kal

Wo

re irXovrov,
ruiv

VTTO

b&pwv,
avcKpvffu)-

av6pwTr<t>v,oi

e'Xeyov, ws,

&C.

VTTO TOIOVTUV br}

\6ywv

fievos vTrebe^a^rjv TI}V orparriyiav.

such representations as these then, I say, were what puffed me up, &c. Xen. Cyrop. vii, 2, 23. In Latin
is

vero
/cat

used, or igitur.
it is

V. Hence
by)

So in i, 1. and iv, 55.^o Karc'urXriis ^yiarri btj, Thucyd. viii, 1. Plat. Critia p. 113. TTCLVTWV Trebiwv KuXXwrov Xeyerat, yeveoOai

very aptly joined with superlatives

as,

0o/3os re

46
1.

AH.
(t.

25.

x.

p. 48. ed. Bip.)

;

and with words having the nature of

TT\V

superlatives

as,
it

oaa

bt]

bebtiyfjiat

epavrov Kapblar
;

Aristoph.

Ach.
Kal

1.

VI. Hence

signifies
i

chiefly, especially

as, kv ciXXots re TroXXoZs,

by ev TO~IS Kctftvovcrtv Xcn. Cyrop. i, 6, 21. VII. With TOTS it specifies a precise point of time determined by something else ; as Hesiod says, when you hear the note of the crane, bij rore xopTaeiv eXiKas fiovs, &c. then is the time to fodder well, " &c. Op. 452. and a little afterwards, [Op. and D. ii,77] evr' rore by , Xen. Cyrop. iii, 3, 24. &c. So, rjvtKa be 6?) , by TOT,
,

and,

cJs

ctTnyvrwy,

rore

brj

ol TroXXot

T&V fiapflapwv aTrety^ovro

'.

then,

when

it

came

to that:

The emphasis is repetition of rore after by ; thus Demosthenes, speaking of the fate of traitors, when he whom they have served by their treachery, has no longer any need of them, r}Twv apyeiv Ka.Ta.aTy, Kal says, aXX' eireibav Trpayyuarwv eyKpaTrjs 6
T&V
TO.VTO. a.Trobojuevwj' beffTrorrjs earl,

Thucyd. iv, 127 much augmented by

TOTE

(then,

when

it is

come

TIJV be irovripiav etSws, rore b)}, to that, then} Kal morel, Kal curiere'i, Kal

7rpo7rr)\aKiet : de Cor. p. 319. c. Aristid. pro Quatuorv. p. 320. init.

[p. 241. 1. 21. ed. Reisk.] So Eurip. Orest. 1483. [1490. ed.

Pors.]

VI.

ON THE ASSERTORY OR CONFIRMATIVE USE

OF AH.

I. A)) is used in assertion, and signifies truly, without doubt, really, in truth, &c. : as, 5<o b ft btKalws //dVij Trrepovrat ry rou 0tXoo o0ow btavoia, Plat. Phaedr. p. 249. (P- 327. ed. Bip.) and, oby oXiyovjrdffai al Trepl TO auJfJLa r/oovcu c^ovcri, p. 258. (347. Bip.) ourot bt) 'AOrjvaloi
r

biKr\v avTtjv KaXovcrtv, dXXct ypafyfjv : Plat. Euthyphr. [p. 1. 1. 4. ed. Bas. 1.] See also de Rep. v. p. 450. 1. 23. (t. vii. p. 5. ed. Bip.) II. Hence it is aptly used in affirmative answers, when one confirms by his suffrage what has been said by another : as, brjXov bf),

ye

Plat. Phasdr. p. 258.

bqXabr]
1.
I

1.

33. (346. ed. Bip.)

whence

the

compound

OVKOVV

<f>o(3e'ia6ai ^pj),

&C.
is

Answ.

brj\ab^. Plat. Crito p. 47.

17. evidently ; and brjXabij nion, Plat. Phsedr. p. 80. 1. 7.

used in assertion of one's

own

opi-

III. A>7 retains something of this sense in interrogations prompted by wonder, or other mental emotions as, raSra br) roX/u^s Xeyetv ; and do you really dare, &c. Aristoph. Acharn. 310. [311. Br.]
:

IV. And to this sense it may be referred when used ironically, as Lucian. adv. Indoct. of a rich man, who, although he had wooden legs, bestowed great care and expense upon his shoes, <as KaXXlaTots virobripaffi KeKOffprjfjieva eir) avrw ra uXa, ol irobes b rj : that is to say, his feet; otherwise his feet : p. 105. V. In its ironical sense it commonly follows IDS w$ 5>) Toiib' eveKa
in
:

(T(j>iv

eKrjfioXos

10.
kv

&s
rfj

brj

aXyea Tev^ei, OVVCK eyu, &c. as if forsooth : Iliad, a, av, (5 ^wfcpares, OVK av be^aio e^elvai aoi irotelv o TI boKel
:

(rot

TroXet

Plato Gorg. p. 468.

(t.

iv.

p.

69. ed. Bip.)

You

AHIIOT.
eJs S//

47

decorate your books, says Lucian, airwv, i^" forsooth you could really get any good from them : Adv. Indoct. VI. With relative and comparative words the affirmation of by ola bi}, and sometimes in is usually emphatical : as in os brj, olov /),
*
cJs bf)
:

a7roXavo'w>'

ola

17

evbaipores

avuXiaKovai, scilicet, Plat, de Rep.

iv.

p.

420. (327. Bip.) rrfv rfjvov, ola S>) deos, evjuapws btKOfff*r](Tet>, [as being a god, which he was]: Id. in Critia p. 113. (49. Bip.) But sometimes with the relative it is more emphatical, as in the passage cited under I. from Plat. Phaedr. p. 258. when it may be rendered by the Latin adeo. See Sallust. B. C. c. 37- id adeo suo more vi-

debaturfacere.

Rep.

i.

p. 185.

AHFIOY.
Odyss.

1. TTOV in this combination signifies place, as in a, l6l. neither of the particles affects the sense of the other ;

1.

Aristotle separates olov 18.

and

S>):

olov

Xaprjn

br) t

de

When

and therefore in that case they need no discussion. II. But more frequently they coalesce in one word, bfjTrov, which has a dubitative sense; TTOV, which is conjectural, abating the asserthus Andromache says that Astyanax will be tory force of destroyed by some one or other of the Greeks, ynvi brjirov abeXtyeov whose brother, it may be, or perefcrarev"E/crwp, ?) Trare/o', r/e KCU vlov chance, &c. Iliad, w, 736. III. For the most part, however, each particle preserving its natural force, doubt is blended with assertion in bfj-rrov, and its most frequent use is, when one distrusts, or affects to distrust, his own opinion, and therefore aims at eliciting that of another [its signification, therefore, is, / think ; If I mistake not ; is it not so ? as I think you will allow ; I think I may say, and the like.] TO be ye kv TV avry aet o>, eorws brjTrov avayKT) aet elrat Plato Parmenid. p. 146. (113. ed. Bip.) a^ebov 'iapev uTravres y/7rov, Demosth. Ol. iii.
17 :
'.

'.

p.

11. 1.41.

Reisk.]

iJLejjLv^aQe

ovbels dyvoet bijirov, Id. Philipp. iv. [p. 131.1. 15. ed. . d de Fats. Leg. p. yap 5r)7rou Aeyovr' avro>, Id.

233.

And like 5^, it is used ironically: ert roivvv Ia^(3e1a B^TTOV av\Xe^as e-trepatvev, Demosth. ib. p. 232. forsooth. IV. Of its assertory and dubitative powers the former commonly preponderates. Thus it is used in interrogation, when there is little or no doubt: obi be ris TTOT-' early ; ov bi'inov Srparwv ; it is not
Strato, to be sure: Aristoph. Acharn. 122. V. In replies it is used when the answerer wishes to make his assertion depend in some measure on the assent of the interrogator : thus, iravTws brjTrov, Plat. Euthyphr. p. 5. 1. 34. 2. TOV "Epwra Trorepuv 0. rwr a^t^tr/5^7'^cr/^wv' ^>&fJLGV elvai T&V afjL<f)tff{3r)rr](rlfji<i)t', f/ r&v fit'i MITTOV. Id. Phaedr. p. 263. (p. 357. ed. Bip.) So in Theaetet. p. 163.
',

1.

(t. ii. p. 94. ed. Bip.) VI. Sometimes S//TTOV is used without the least signification of doubt, and merely to elicit or challenge assent as, ov yap bi'iTrov dyyeXwv eiriXapfiaveTai, Hebr. ii, l6. [assuredly ; verily, in our translation.] XaipeQ&VTO. yap <Vre S//TTOV, says Socrates, Plat. Apol. Socr. p. 20. That he did not speak doubtfully appears from his
:

42.

48

AH0EN, AHnOYOEN.
tare
>/

AHTA.
So Demosthenes,

words presently following,

et
elver/

olos

>)j>

XaipeQ&v.

juaAtora kv TOVTOIS adu'^uara, ovbev can yap brjTr ovirpbs ejjie, pro Cor. p. 315. 1. 51. VII. Fe is sometimes added ; when bft affirms or asserts, TTOV elicits
Tiva SOKOITJ
TCI

limits or restrains : as, TI ovv irore Xeyet, [6 0e6s] this ceraofyuTaTOv elvai ov yap brjTrov ^ev&erai ye, [for at least he does not assert a that in case be must granted, any tainly ov yap bijrrov CK Sm^epojueVwv falsehood:] Plat. Apol. Socr. p. 21.

assent,

and ye

QaaKwv

efjie

',

ye en TOV 6eos
(t. x. p.

Kat fiapeos
:

196. ed.

Latin by utique

appovia av eirj, Id. Sympos. p. 187- 1. 12. in Bip.) The sense of these particles is expressed see Curtius vii, 1, 23.

aico 1. &ITO TOV -I. Aiyfler is 17, (i. e. AH0EN, AHIIOY0EN. TOV vvv,) forthwith, as in Eurip. Orest. 1119. [1117- ed. Pors.] II. But its most frequent use arises from the assertory force of dr), and occurs in cases of simulation, cloaking falsehood under show of truth. See Eurip. Orest. 1320. [1313. ed. Pors.] and Heliodor. it is JEthiop. i, 30. avros bfi6ei>, &c. Hence in Heliod. ^thiop. 5, 14.

[See Abr. of Vig. p. 185. 1. 9. and following.] a, 1407. 1. 15.) it is said to be a dubitative adverb; but an example is wanted. IV. Aj/Trovflev is precisely equivalent to S^rrov, when the latter suspends assertion in some measure on the assent of another person

opposed
III.

to

7-6

a\r)6es.

By Eustathius (on Odyss.

as, e/cetvo
1.

ye

bi'iirovOev airavres eirlaraffOe

Demusth. de

Class, p. 7^.
;}TTOV-

50. and de Fals. Leg. p. 205. c. 6ev kvoivoty\veiv, Lucian. Lcxiph. t.

Mid. 398.
ii.

ov yap aKatpov

140.

et;re,

See Aristoph. Plut. p. 336. rt fiovXet pe KpiaaOctt KU\OV ; ol/mt e a epelv avrpayaXovs
Tral:
f* it

not so? Aristoph. Vesp. 295.

AHTA. -- 1.
fj.ai

jam, by and by, presently by

Trpos II. It
ere,

Ai?ra has all the uses and significations of ? : as, this or that time ; as, KOU bijra btaXefy,

Synes. KUI bfjra fipufjirji', Xenofjh. hortatory: Xafiov, Xafiou brjr, Eurip. Orest. 220. [213. ed. Pors.] and 1231. [1229. Pors.] Add Aristoph. Vesp. 331. [332. ed. Br.] Hence it is aptly used in supplication, and in conjuring: as in Eurip. Orest. 92. / pray you now ; for heaven's sake, or the like. Also in deprecation; as, /i>/ bijd", tKerevu a, evdabe Aristoph. Nub. 696' and in expression of abhorrence or aversion : HA. 0are?i' Ep. pj &t]Ta. Eurip. Orest. 1329. 'Opea-r)i> nyp e>oe r^e yj. [1352. ed. Pors.] Heaven forbid ! say not so! See Eurip. Phoeniss. 742. and Demoslh. in Mid. p. 410. c. [p. 574. 1. 2. ed. Reisk.J III. Where less emotion of mind is expressed, it may be rendered by no means: as in Soph. Philoct. Neopt. fiovXei Xo/3w^ca S^ra Phil. M/) 5^/ra TOVTO y'. v. 7^1. Kat dlya) TL aov %
is

also

Sometimes

it

expresses scarcely any, or no, emotion, and

may be

translated, truly, indeed ; or in Latin, utique, sane. A. TUVTU 6>/r' avaa^ETa ; A. ov bijra. Aristoph. Ach. 619. So Eurip. Phoeniss.
16*55.

and

it is

used

in

answers to avoid the bluntness of a bare

;

negative:

enrol', KIVIJOQS avroi', liwfv'pares, *ca0ei/e(s

ov

bfJTa,

6'

o$

AHTA.
Plat. Syrapos. p. 218. 1. 24. Philoct. 732. [735. ed. Br.]
:

49
See also Soph.

(t. x.

p. 263. ed. Bip.)

IV. In interrogation also ^ret, like &rj, expresses eagerness for information tandem ; I pray ; tell me: riva bfjr av Xeyots ; Aristoph. Vesp. 1171. So v. Ipl. Eurip. Or. 1473. Pho3iiiss. 423. This use results from its hortatory one ; for TTOI bijra 0evyw ; e. g. or 6i/ra, TTO* 0evw ; >}, (Eurip. Phoaniss. 984.) is equivalent to, etTre So in v. 990. and in Heraclid. 127. Hence it is subjoined to aXXa used abruptly as, a\Xa Ifir eX0; Eurip. Or. 779 <! d. aXX' aye j), etTre ;uoi, Trorepov UTreXevero/^at ; V. 'AXXa brjra. is used as aXXa &fj in cohortation. See above, under AAAA, I, x. and Plat, in Soph. p. 249. (t. ii. p. 265. ed. Bip.) VI. In sum, bijTa expresses every kind of emotion, and with particular propriety in interrogation : e. g. self-satisfaction or exultation ;
;

as, ri

biJT*,

eTret&av rets /a'^Xas oVrw/ueVas

see,

'ibrjre

then,
trerai

when you

rets bfjra bta

&c. Aristoph. Ach. 1010. 6pva\\ibas ib. 917- Fear : otjuot,

; ;

what will you say Wonder: eVetra fyaifj.ot

ri biJTa

KaKov yevrj-

ibovn rotovrov evvirviov

Aristoph. Vesp. 24. Grief

[but burlesqued ;] ri /we brjr, w /zeXea prJTep, CTIKTCS ; ib. tience : ri bfjra ptXXere ; Eurip. Or. 275. rl bijra e-^ttv ffrpetir] ; Plat. Phaedr. p. 236. (p. 300. ed. Bip.) Commiseration : eira b^r ov TroXX

and despair, 311. Impa-

ry yripy KUKO. ; Aristoph. Vesp. 439VII. A;ra, as well as Si), is inceptive or inchoative, noting a state of preparation or readiness to proceed, with a sense of cohortation :
ri bfjra TrapdSetyjua rts

evecrri beiva

av

Trapadefjievos, f/cavws

av evpot ro

r)TOVfj.vovi

well then, what example, &c. Then, a little afterwards, as if released from the perplexity of deliberation, the speaker proceeds rl bfjra KO.I vvv ravro rovro ebpdov, Ka.Qa.irep kv rots e/uirpoffdev biypovfjieda, aafjiGv ; why, what should prevent us from doing what we did in the former case? Plat. Polit. p. 279. (t. vi. p. 50. ed.Bip.) An example of its use in transition, a use nearly allied to that just mentioned, occurs in the same dialogue, p. 272. fiovXei bfjra eyw aot rpoirov riva otarplri*; and have you a mind now that I should, &c. (p. 35. ed.
:

Bip.) VIII.
I.]

Ajjfra

resembles

bt)

as to its use in gradation also, [see AJ),

KO.I

V.

[rovrov pera ^,ITCL\KOVS enivov rov xpovov,'] vTrep<f>vws: and in truth; and I can assure

bfjra <J>t\adr)va~tos l\v

: Aristoph. Ach. you joined with superlatives : /cat bijra rovro pot rfjs rexvrjs earl Kop^orarov, and what is more ; and what is above all: Plat. Euthyphr. p. 11. (c. 12. ed. Fisch.) [p. 5. 1. 13. ed. Bas. 1.] and with words having the nature of superlatives bpqs ovovirep brjra

142.

Hence

it is

Aristoph. Vesp. 792. IX. It is put for by in its assertory or confirmative use also ; in tw bvaryve ov, bvffrrjve bfjra bio. irovtav Travrtav Ravels I truth, &c. Soph. Philoct. 759. [761. ed. Br.] See Aristoph. Vesp. 13. Acharn. 68. Eurip. Phren. 164. 1696. It has a great force of assertion or affirmation, when used interrogatively too ; as, rara bfjr OVK uy-^ovn ; and are not these things See then enough to make one hang ones self? Aristoph. Ach. 125. also v. 1126. and Vesp. 415. [417. ed. Br.] The questions are equiva;

rovro Kep^avels

H*og.

M)

El.

lent to affirmations: ri yap evrtv crjd* 6 Kepavvus; (Aristoph. Nutr, core yap crjO* 6 Kcpavvbs 402.) is equivalent to ev av Xeyetv <f>aivet*

aXXo
.

ri'

a\\' erne

rt e<rr.

It is assertory also in affirmative

!

answers

Re. Aa'f #Se

4>iA.

Ao^

5^r\ Rd. This a torch 1364. [1373. ed. Br.]

Phil.

Yes, a torch,

I say: Aristoph. Vesp.

may sometimes be expressed by then: fiovaXXas Ttvas ; Eurip. Phcen. 729- So v. 908. and 916. [Without interrogation it might be rendered, it seems then you wish me to, &c.]
X. Its signification Xet TpaTTWfjiai bij& obovs

EL

1.

The

sense of

et, if, is

conditional.

It is

put

in

the

first

member of

hypothetical propositions : as, et yap elm pupal, elal Kal Oeol : Lueian. and in 2 Pet. ii, 4. el yap 6 0eos, &c. the conclusion follows in v. 9. [On the difference between ei and ear, see Abr.

of Vig. p. 190.1. 27.]

II. Sometimes the supposition or condition is put last; as* per w, TOV e^Qpbv et n Ttpupriaopai : Eurip. Or. 1102. See Aristoph. Ran. 536. [533. ed. Br.] HI. Sometimes the second member of the proposition, or the conclusion, is understood, the first being interrogative : et VVKTOS avrols

TrpoaftaXoifiev

Jlepteffvpeda

Eurip. Phan. 73 1. Xoxov; what if we were to, &c. suppressed, says (he Scholiast. IV. Et is put for eav, and usually with an optative mood, whenever av is in the consequent member, [put first in the following example] : and the av understood in et has sometimes its potential use ; as, j3ovXoia6' av 'Apftevias yrjs epyaZeadai onoffrjv av fiovXrjffde ;
etc

is

"E0a<Tay P. 73.

ot

XaAa7ot,

et

irtarevoifjiev

p.fj

abtKrjffecrdai

Xen. Cyrop.

iii.

V. Sometimes av

in the

consequent has

its

potential signification;

as, el Se TIS TOVS Kparovvras TOV 7r\r;0ai/s ITT' aper^v TrpoTptyetev, aptyoSee also Xen. Cyrop. iii. rtpovs av ^eXrjffete : Isocr. ad Nic. p. 32.

p. 65. TTWS

av
in

TOTC,

&c.

the consequent part has also a signification of the future ; OVK as, et fjev ovv peXXater pov KaTayeXyv, (for KaTayeXaffovtri fj.ov} av eirj arioes : Plat. Euthyphr. p. 3. 1. 43. (c. 3. ed. Fiscb.) See Aristoph. Ran. 536. [533. ed. Br.]and [Acharn.] 1195. [1197. ed. Br.] VII. But most frequently av in the consequent part gives the signification of an oblique future, et being in the antecedent part ; as,
et

VI. *Af

pot TO Ne<rropetoj/ evyXwffcrov

fjteXos,
:

'AvTfjvopos

re.

TOV fypvybs,

So/iy

Oeds, OVK

Athen. XV. See on *Av, V. p. 14. And in dialogues the antecedent part is sometimes spoken by one person, and the consequent, having the signification of an oblique 0. YeXolov y ay, as, Dw. Et ae ireiOotpi eyio, &c. future, by another w 2wK-pares, eir) Plat. Phaedr. p. 260. (p. 350. ed. Bip.) VIII. Ei is thus construed with the future indicative, because the future has this in common with the particle av, that it takes away

av

cvvaijjirjv airopvrjiJioievetv

I use this logical term for the second in prepart of hypothetical propositions,

ference to conclusion, the term used

by

Hoogeveen.

J. S.

El.
actuality in (he sense of verbs
vofjtiffai cfyutw0>/o-e<70at IX. It is construed
: :

51
>}

ns ifect, irwra. xptf et b& Tro'Xe/id* Demosth. Olyntli. i. p. 4. I. 53. ei yap avrovs with the aor. I. in Hebr. iv, 8.

'Irjtrovs

Kareiravaev, OVK av Trepl aXXrjs eXaXet yuera ravra f/yuepas : but not in signification of an oblique future, or of contingency, but in putting a case as to something past; and so ei prj is construed with the in-

dicative of the aorist, when what has been done is put as not done ; as in Iliad, e, 6/9- 0> 544. X. It does not wholly lose its conditional sense, when used in et Trore rot obtesting or conjuring ; as, K\vdi />tev, 'Apyvpdro^f, ^apievr' eVt vrjov epei//a, ?} et bf] Trore, &c. Iliad, a, 40. Cf. 395. and 504.

XI. When the proposition is not conditional or hypothetical, ei is causal, and its member contains the reason, or the premises from which a conclusion is drawn ; as, atet yap rot afjivvovviv Oeol avro/, et
rot

Tpwas

e^wfce

KpoVov

Trots iravras o'Xe<r<7etv

et

that:
t

Iliad. 0,

216.

So,

be reeva,
;

deos vTrep fipuv, ris KO.&

r//u<3r

: since, because, seeing KUI K\r)povopoi : Rom. viii, I/. Thus et is put for eVet in ib. 31.

Acts iv, 9. XII. Et is used in interrogation, both direct and oblique. An exam* et 6' pie of direct interrogation is in Plato de Rep. a^oiv ^uerav jcetrai; v. p. 4/8. (t. vii. p. 63. ed. Bip.) and in Odyss. a, 158. Acts
i,

6.

vii, 1.

xix, 2.
it

XIII. In oblique interrogation

is

construed with an indicative

trot

mood
1

as, tVws
iv, 1.

av ovv

epoto

/ue, et

Uncurl

irapatvu>

roils

pri epw<rt

\api-

ZeffOat: Plato Phaedr. p. 234. (p. 294. ed.

Bip.)

See
;

Iliad, e, 183.

with an optative, av being suppressed as, r/pwrj/o-ev, : Plut. in Cses. p. 713. i- e. en-atvolev &t>. avaKpivovres rets ypa^cts, et e^ot ravra ovrws : Acts xvii, 1 1 . as other particles [words] interrogative in their nature are construed with av
et

John

Or

TOVS vofiovs cTraivolei>

even

e. g. ri av TOVTO 0eXot elvai ; ; After certain verbs, as 6au/*ac?w, )(a/pw, a^flo^uat, baKpvw, fcXat'w, ayaraji.T<5, Kplvw, et expresses the reason or efficient cause of what those verbs signify ; but still its sense is in some degree hypothetical, and not so positive or absolute as that of ort, for which it is said to be put: r&v KeXevovrwv fj-era roi> 'EXXT/vwv Trept r^s irpbs $t'Xi7r-

in direct interrogation

XIV.

irov elpqvrjs fiovXeveadat,

8avfj.aeiv
:

e'0r/,

et ?rept rStv vfierepwv Ibluv

aXXoV nva

bel Tretadijvat
raits

Demosth. de

Fals. Leg. p. 241.

f]

e\aipov,

'Adyvaluv TrdXa: ib. p. 241. ovoe ebaKpvaev CTTI ravrats TTJV 'EXXaSa, et Trapa TOIS ib. p. 242. rt yap brjTrore avpfjia'xpis VTTO T&V irpeafiebiv vfipiovTai MvpoicXea p,ev eicptvas, el Trapa rwv ra ^ueraXXa ewvrjfjievwv eiKoaiv
Trpay/^afftv ^61;
:

el Trpoffe^et

KCU eyetperat

rHJv

e^eXe^e bpa-^pas Trap' eKaarov, cat K7/^to-o0aivra ypa<f)^v

leptSJv "XprjfJiaTwv

ebtuices, el rptalv varepov rjpepats CTTI ib. p. 239. See also JEA. V. H. iv, 9.
i,

rfjv

TpcnreZav edrjKev evrra pvds ; Acts xxvi, 8. and Hor.Serm.

is

1,

87.
Its use,
:

XV.
tioned

when rendered
rts at<r0j/orerat,

we, lest,

not unlike that last

men-

0d/fy

e'i

Eurip.
signifies,
ei KpeftoioQe

a.v,

XVI. After a negative it sometimes pa rov At", (^vrjffaifjtrjv lff\abas viz.)

even though ; as, OVA: y vpels Aristoph.

:

&
Vesp. 297. Eun.

El TAP.

So

si in

Latin

redeam

wow,

si

me

obsecret

Ter.

In Odyss. 5, 144. where it is said that Ulysses deliberated ill which manner, whether embracing her knees, or standing aloof, he should supplicate Nausicaa, ei Se/ete noXtv Kal et/mra ot'i/, ei has been

thought to stand for onus, but perhaps its force is rather that of exploring the will of another person ; whether he should supplicate her, that supplication] she might IF [in consequence of

PERHAPS

show him the city, &c. XVII. Ei is sometimes expressive of a wish as, et pot 00oyyos ev (^pa^loat Eurip. Hecub. 836. airovfjievy yuot KOV^OV
;
:

yevotro
et boirjs

reXos, jEschyl. S. adv. Theb. 266. tion in the phrase et iror erjv ye,

And

this appears to

be

its

significa-

which occurs so often

in

Homer

epos eWe Kwumtbos, ei TTOT ev\v ye: I wish he were SO still: II. y, 180. There is anaposiopesis or ellipsis after et, 1 wish, so TTOT erjv ye. In that the following should be the punctuation : et*

thus, SaTjp

O.VT

II. X, 7^1. Nestor says, ws eov, such I was among men. I wish

ei*
:

nor

erjv

formerly at

ye, per avbpaffiv, least I was [though

X7/0er' evl
a.v$>pa.aiv,
e'i*

HO longer.]
poiffi

erret ov-irar*
11.

epos

irals,

et*

TTOT erjv ye,

/ueyaTrdr*

Qe&v

w, 426.

olos 'Qbvffaevs
still ;

eWe
:

/uer'

once certainly he was : Odyss. r, TTOT erjv ye, bvopopov 314. Odyss. w, 287- Laertes, efjiov TratS', et' whose words these are, thought his son was dead. And without ye : iror erjv' vvv 6' ijbrj airetyQiTO irarijp be JJLOI early 'Qbvaaevs, et*
erjv

ye,

/ wish

he were so

\vyp
ple

oXeOptp.
is sometimes understood. [Hoogeveen's supposed examseen in the Abr. of Vig. p. 187. 1. 32. but see note q on

XVIII. Et

may be

that page.]

still

but yap ; This appears plainly when other words intervene ; as, et riva evpot^ut, w BaK^t, ypauv, cnroa&ffoi yap av 0avet<ra : I wish I could find some old woman, for she, &c. Lucian. Dial. Mer. iv. t. iii, p. 287. 1. 4-9. This might have been expressed in the usual manner, et yap nva evpoipt, airoff&ooi av. In ^Eschylus, Prometheus, bound to the rock by Jupiter, says, et yap yu' VTTO yrjv, vep1.

EI TAP.
retains

These

particles are expressive of a wish

its

causal sense.

Qev T 'AtSoy TOV veKpobeypovos els cnrepavTov Tdprapov nxer, where yap implies approbation of what the chorus had been saying of the tyranny of Jupiter ; and assigns, as a ground or reason for that approbation, the case of Prometheus himself, signified by a wish for a different fate. To Cyrus, who had said that Araspes might serve him,

Araspes replies, et yap yevotro o TI eyw <roi kv Kaipy av yevoiprjv av j(jpnffifjios: Xen. Cyrop. vi. c. 20. understand, that would be highly satisfactory to me, or the like,/0r I wish, &c. Cf. Iliad. /3, 371. 6, 18p. and 288. tr, 464. where, as in all other passages in which it occurs, at yap (Doric for ei yap) signifies, for 1 wish. In Eurip. Orest. 1103. [1098. ed. Pors.] Orestes says to Py lades, c5 0/Xrar', ei yap TOVTO KarQavoi^ ibtov : q. d. O dearest friend, for you. deserve to be dear to me on account of your advice, (to make Menelaus also suffer) which

EIFE, EIFE
delights
II.

AH.EI MEN, El AE.

53

me

so

much, that I only wish I could

death.

see it successfully exe-

cuted before
Et,

my
in

a wish, is construed with an optative the case of the verb &(j>e\ov, &fye\es, otyeXe. When, therefore, it is joined with an infinitive, either &q>e\ov or the optative ofefleXw must be understood ; as in Odyss. rj, 311. In Latin si, unaccompanied by any other particle, expresses a wish ; as in Virg. ALn. vi, 187.

when expressive of

mood, except

EIFE, EIFE AH. I. In eiye, et puts a case or condition, on which something depends, and which ye limits or restricts: if indeed; at
least if; that is if: as, eiye

Sps

ravO', tUo-Trep avbqs, orel^e TrpocrKvaas

X0oVa worse
Plat.
iii,

Soph. Philoct. 1403.

Socrates
:

Can any discourse or language

Phaedrus,
ei

be
:

? says

ovbels, replies

ye av

a\r)t)ij
i,

Xeyets

Phaedr. p. 242. (p. 312. ed. Bip.)

See Coloss.

23. Galat.

4.
II.

v/j,eis

Eiye frequently indicates rather assurance than doubt : as, be ov% OVTWS euaBere TOV XptaroV, eiye avrov r/fcowoxtre : Ephes. iv, 21. q.d. avrov yap ST/TTOV fiKovaare, for to be sure, or doubtless, ye have heard him: [if so be that ye have heard him, in our transsomething certain is spoken of, et is causal, and eiye rendered, since. indeed ; at least since, or seeing that: as, o& yap brjirov, eiye typovifj-ov del yeveadat TOV fi\\ovra aufypova eaeadai,
lation.] III.

When

may be

Trapa'xprjpa e atypovos awfypwv av TIS yevotro : Xen. Cyrop. iii, 1, 1O. See also Ephes. iv. [iii. 2.] In such passages the restrictive power

of ye can scarcely be made appear without supposing an ellipsis : e.g. ov yap brjTrov Trapa^pi/yua e afypovos ffuxpputi' av TIS yevoiro, et prf bi The sense of etye seems to be aXXo, d\\' etye or ctAA' art ye, &c. causal rather than conditional or hypothetical, in 2 Cor. v, 3. also.
translators appear to have thought otherwise.] To strengthen affirmation, br} is added to eiye: as, rjf 0uo-ei ^avelrat ro Ov/noeibes rip TOTTU rijv fj.ecrrjv e^ov e/fetVwv rafyv, et ye 5r)

[Our

IV.

in truth ; since, as is really the case] r<$ per XoyiartKat TO ap^etv, rtf ^e BvfjLoeibel TO ap^eadai /cat ro ap^etv <cara q>uaiy early : Plut. Quaest. Plat. p. 1008. b.
[since

EI
to

MEN,
in
:

EI AE.
the
first.

1.

When
et /*et/

contrary suppositions or conditions,

et fjiev

Both

there are two members containing et 5e in the second member answers and t e are sometimes thus used

elliptically
-

et a\\' eZ }iv bwarovot yepas /meyaOvpot 'A^atot, 5e K e fj,rj bwucrtv, eyw be Kv avros e\o>/^at Iliad, a, 136. Here et fj.kv marks the antecedent part of the hypothetical proposition, while the consequent, Travao/mt, or KaXov av e'ir], or the like, is wholly omitted. See Eustath. ad 1. who has collected examples. There is another in
:

Xenoph. Cyrop.
the
full

viii,

7. 3.

Near the end of the 2nd book of Maccab.

expression occurs.
is

II.

There

an
:

/3oi/Xe<r0e:

as,

et

for

et

5e /3oi/Xet
t

most frequently of /3ou\et or av /ue> fteu aicovaov, cyfo 6e re rot (caraX^w, Iliad, t, 2^2. and in v. 46. ftov\ovrai is understood
ellipsis after et Se also,
Se,

after

6e.

54

El

MEN,

El AE.

El KAI.

This ellipsis of ftovXet is most usual before aye in its hortative sense : as, ei 5', aye fjiev iretpfoai, but if you choose, come then, make the experiment : Iliad, a, 303. So 525. c, 170. r, 108. v, 580. 582.

The kindred word

voXefjLOLO baYipevat,

sometimes expressed as, et # efleXets oaaov (^eprepr) dpi: Iliad. 0, 487. but here on the other hand there appears to be an ellipsis of aye, come
eQeXets
ev
is
:

o<j)p'

elbrjs,

on, try.
be povXet, or et /3ovXet be, is used in superaddition, signifying moreover; and in amplification, nay even; nay, what is more: [see Abr. of Vig. p. 189. ' xi.] a constant ellipsis : et be, or ei be 1. et III. In et fjtev pfj, there is TL rSiv VTTO TOVTWV ijpeffKe /not prjBevTwv, fj.ev ^ov^Lav av %yov* et b& /ui), TOT av avTos eireipufJLrjv, a yiyvwaKw, X^yetv Demosth. Philipp. i. [p. 40. 1. 5. ed. Reisk.] where ijpe<TKe, expressed after ei fjtev, is to be understood after et be /uij. See Plat. Phaedr. p. 273. 1. 38. (p. 377. ed. 2. There Bip.) where Xe"yets aXXo n is understood after ei be //>/. is an ellipsis of pkv in the first member OKOCFOI etc vXevptTtbos epTrvot yivovrai, rjv avaicadapduxriy kv TeffcrapaKOtTa ripeprjffiv, atf %s av fj (Jij&s
et

But

besides,

yevrjTac

ijv

6e

p,rj,

els

<f>Qifftv

fj.eQioTa.vTat,

for

r}'

fj^v

avaKaOapdwaiv

Hippocr. Aphor.
/uev

v, 15.
et

position only, with

TOtfft

be

Sometimes the second hypothetical prop}, is expressed, and the first, in which et
3.

is wholly omitted : as, 6 Kpoto-os irporiyopeve A.ap^aKi]i'ol(n, fieTtevat MtXria^ea* et be pfj f ofyeas TTITVOS rpoVov aTretXee eKTptyetv : Herodot. Erat. vi, 37. The first proposition, if ex-

should have been,

pressed, might have been, et pev TOV MtXrtaSea /uert^vat e/3oi/Xovro, K-aXws av eaeaQat. So, /zaXtora fiev evper^s yivov T&V (3e\TiffT<t)V el be py, jjitfjiov TO. irapa rots aXXots /caXws e^oira : Isocr. ad Nicocl. p. 35. Add Revel, ii, l6. IV. When et be //>/ is repeated in a sentence having more than two members, it is to be rendered by sin minus, or si id non, rather than by alioquin: as in Plat, de Rep. v. TIVOS av afjuKporarou fterafia\6vTos, e\Qoi els TOVTOV TOV TpoTrov Tfjs iroXtrelas TrdXts* /uaXtora pev evos m ei be fjifj bvolv el be /u*/, 6Vt oXtyt'orrwv : p. 473. (t. vii. p. 52. ed. Bip.) if not one, two ; if not two, as few as possible. It is remarkable that et be follows sentences in which p}, either //?/ negative or prohibitory, precedes ; as, o<rns ovv eXetdepos elvai /3oi/Xerat, fjtrjre 6eXeru TI, pyre ^evyerw n r&v eir aXXots* et be pri, bovXevetv avayKYi I Epict. Ench. C. 20. ^t) 0epe ovv irpos TOV pavTtv opefyv % eKicXtffiv' et be f.it], rpe^niiv avry irpoaet ib. c. 39* I n such cases the whole prohibition or negation is to be understood after et be /ur), as, ct be pi priTe QeXeTia /t//re ^ewyerc*, &c. or as if it were a negation,
:

el

be

p) ovre deXet

TI,

ovre

V. Sometimes ye

is

<j>evyet, &C. and SO, et be fit] /u>) 0epe, &C. added, which rather limits what follows than

affects ei be pr) : as, olbe flaXXovirtv olvov veov els O.OKOVS naXatovs* el be priye, pfjywfTai ol aoncot, otherwise this at least, or however, happens, that the bottles are broken : Matth. ix, 17. So 2 Corinth,
xi,

16.

sition,

EI KAI. and teat

1.

Ei Kal

is

affirming,

although ; ei putting a case or suppoand resting on it as, ireTretV/xeda be wepl

:

El
TO. Kpet'rrova, Krai ifjtwv, ayairrfTot,

MH.

55

t^ojueva erwrtjotas, el Kat ovrw XaXovnotwithstanding that we use language so harsh and alarming : Hebr. vi, 9- [For the difference between et KOI and icat et, see the Abr. of Vig. p. 188. r. vi.] et r II. Other words are sometimes inserted between el and KCU Demosth. de KCU TrapeX/Tro/jev vvv, avro TO 7rpay/xa eavr> evpriaei
/uev
: : :

el yap Kal Class, p. 75. 1. 26. fjivOwbeffrepov eortv, aXX' app.6<ret : Lycurg. adv. Leocr. c. 23. See 2 Corinth, iv, 3. III. Sometimes the particles are to be considered separately, el signifying if, and Kal also; as, rt ovv, e^Tj, et Kal aXXa v/utv ayaOa irpoayevotro bia r?)i> elprjvrjv ; what if other advantages also, &c. Xen. Cyrop. iii, 2, 18. Cr. Otyuot KOKWV bvcrrijvosl w raXas eyw Nu. Et Kat ra TTGOS TOVTOHTIV elbelrjs KOKU ekora 6' &p Eurip. Pho3n. 1356.
! ;

7roto7juev, et Kat

They
and

r)v yvwju^v r)s fcopjjs p.udoifjiv l Heliodor. i, 20. are to be considered separately also when el is interrogative, ' Kat relates to a noun a or epwr, et Kal pronoun added ; as, f/v

1. Et pr), if not, unless, is used in the antecedent part of hypothetical propositions, in which what is introduced by et /u/ in the antecedent part is stated as an obstacle to what is mentioned in the consequent; as, et prj Sed/ei r?)v rijs afyo&pa pavias 6o^av, Ovoi av rots Trat&Kots Plat. Phaedr. p. 251. 1. f. (p. 330. ed. Bip.) Sometimes, when 5ta follows et /Ltj), there is an elegant ellipsis, and fl fj,rj bia may be rendered but for; as, Mt\Ttabrjv ets ro flapa6pov
:

El MH.

Xen. Cyrop.

ii,

4, 31.

e/t/3aXe7j>

e^^tVavro,

Kai el

fifj

Gorg.
P.YI

p. 5 16. (t. iv. p. 150. ed. Bip.) bia TYIV eKcivov fAe\\r)<riv : Thucyd.

bia TOV Ylpvraviv, eveireaev av Plat. av fcaraXa/3et/, et eboKovv 18. See also Philo Jud. ii,
:

Legal, ad Cai. p. 774. 1. 32. In the above mentioned propositions

virtually affirmative
;

et

for

by

et /u>) Septet
it

may be observed to be we understand that the lover

did

fear.
;

Nay,
1

in

some phrases
\jsevffTr)s
;

even presses affirmation with vehefj.^

mence

6 apvovperos ort 'Irjtrovs OVK eartv 22. (See Ter. Andr. i, 5, 2.) but in some uses, when av is neither expressed nor understood, et /w?) involves no affirmation, but rather signifies exception; as, OVK eTrtyivwffKere eavrovs, ort 'iT/ffcvs Xptoros ev vpTiv eanv ; et pi] TI aboKipoi lore : 2 Cor. xiii,

as, ris eartv 6

el

6 Xpiffrosi

John

ii,

5. except ye be reprobates. Had St. Paul been addressing reprobates, [or persons, whom he believed to be reprobate,] he would have said, et i*ri aboKipot ijire, eTriyvo/^re av eavrovs, ort, &c. II. In the last example but one (1 John ii, 22) et pf] presses what
is last

mentioned, with comparative disregard of what precedes in it even wholly excludes what precedes by its restriction of what follows ; whence it gradually assumes an exceptive power:
:

some passages

thus, ovcets 0eos erepos

el pij ets, 1

Corinth,

viii,

4.

Here

et

fjirj

excepts

a wounonly, or a pronoun, essential to the phrase ? Might not some other part of speech be added to Kal ? as e. g. an adverb. Might it not be said, that ef a person who had used the words eiKorus
is

Why

? Xeycrat, another inquired et KO! oATjflws Here again Boyle's recipe for dysentery occurs. See Preface to Abridgement of

Viger, p. v. n. 2.

S.

56

EIFIEP.

dXXa. "

In all these one, with exclusion of the rest. So 1 Corinth, x, 13. passages el /o) naturally follows that from which the exception is made : sometimes however it precedes it as, KCU el /ui) eva aprov, So Cicero puts OVK efyov fted* eavT&v ev TU> TrXo/w : St. Mark viii, 14. nisi first, de Amicitia c. 5. [ 18. p. 38.1. l.ofMr. Barker's 4th edit.] In such passages it may often be interpreted by dXXa, but ; as in St. Mark indeed, in relating the same occurrence St. Matth. xvii, 8. almost in the same words, has actually used dXXd instead of St. Matthew's el ^. With a verb also it may have the signification of
:

not another," says St. Paul, el fjtrj rives elaiv QeXovTes fieTaarpe^at TO evayye\LOv TOV XptoroiJ : but there are some, &c. Gal. i, 7. Even with a verb in the imperative mood, fj.T)bev aXX', el pr)"aQie: Aristoph. Eq. 1103. So 1 Corinth,
gospel
is
01 rapaffffOVTes vfjtds, teal

The

vii,

I?.

Et fit] is put for on ju>), as, el prj beatoice biKrjv OVK ayair^, he is not content that he has escaped punishment : jEschin. [See the other example of Hoogev. in the Abr. of Vig. p. 188. 1. 32.] IV. Sometimes ei and pri relate to different words ; et to a verb, and JM) to some other word when each must be rendered separately, if not ; as, KO.I Zuyyvufjiri, el /uj) /uera Kaicias, bofyjs be uaXXov afiapTtg.,
III.
;

rfj

Trporepov

aTrpaypoffvvr]
is, ei

evavna

roX/uw/uei>

Thucyd.

i,

32.

The
et

order of the sense

roXyuw/iev evavrla, pfi juera Kaicias,

et ft>),

&c.
/j
KpiOels,

V. "Apa
fipn in

is

added

to

and Dionys. of Halic. has used

et
/^//

the same sense as Aristotle has used

I

irov

evda&e

5i6drw avr<p biKas,

'iffos

ecrrai biKaaTijs

6f)\eos

&ffirep earl voptfjiov, el pri tip a, t5 Ae:te, 6 per bijpos Dion. Hal. vii. p. 457* TO re yap appev fyvtrei TOV : Aristot. de i}yefJLoviKa)Tepor t el prj irov yvveaTTjKe irupa
<j>vatv

Rep.

i,

8. unless
pri TL

VI. Et
dismissal,

haply, or perchance. dXXa is a phrase by which something

is

urged, with

comparative disregard, of somewhat preceding; as, ftrjoap&s ye navvy, ei fJttf rt dXXa r/)v Trept TOV tf\tov b^oioT^Ta av 5tetwv : if nothing else, yet at least, &c. Plat, de Rep. vi. p. 509.
or
(t. vii.

p. 121. ed. Bip.)

1.

EIIIEP.
joined to
signified
re, Plat,
et,

Other
TTJ;,

Trep,

TTOU, Trore, rts, rt, TTWS.

is si

particles of indefinite signification are subHep limits the condition

by et, so that etTrep de Rep. v. p. 457.

modo, if only, if indeed:

et?rep olov

TOVS avdpwTrovs, e^otpereovs eli^at

ytyvwr/cw TOVS TOIOV(p. 20. ed. Bip.) etTrep eel evepyov Kal Tretdofjievov e^etv TO orparev/*a, CK TTJS ffrpartas, Xen. Cyrop. ii, 3, 23. Abr. of

[See

Vig. p. 189.

r. xii.]

II. As Trep in its limitative sense affects et in its conditional sense, so as to make it signify an indispensable condition ; so et in its causal sense is, by the addition of Trep, made to signify an indispensable or necessary cause apx?js yap r) a7roXo/xeV/s, OVTC avrri Trore eV row, oilre
:

seeing that} e apxTjS Set ra Trarra yiyveff8ai: Plat. Phaedr. p. 245. (p. 318. ed. Bip.) Here ro Travra yiyveaOai e^ dp^s constitutes the necessary cause why the first
e
eKeivr)s yev^areTai, e'inep (since,

aXXo

origin

is

Etrep

imperishable. is used when something

is

not merely to be proved, but

EinEP.

57

proved by an eminently cogent or triumphant argument ; as St. Paul proves to the Thessaloniaus that they were worthy of the kingdom of God, for which they suffered, by this argument, etTrep biKaiov irapa
0e^ji O.VT air obov vai rots dXiflovffiv
j/jutDv
:

vfjids

0Xn//tv,

KO.\
:

vfjCiv

rots 0Xt/3o/^evots
ef?dor$>

iiveaiv /ue6'

2 Thess.

i,

6.

So

Aristotle
Kat

TO
raj

yap oiKelov

rrj (bvcreif KpctTtffTOV KO.I rjoiffTov

eV0' e<caoTfe)*

avOputKo) 5) 6 Kara

TOV vovv fitos, etTrep yudXtora TOVTO avOpwTros I Eth. x, 7. III. In some passages it may be doubted whether the signification of eiTrep is conditional or causal ; as in the following : avt'evj^jpal aoi y eiTrep apeivov TO.V& ripiv eivai, return yiyveaQai : Plat. Phaedr. p.

257. 1. 1.9. (p- 344. ed. Bip.) In Rom. ditional sense ; Hoogeveen, a causal.

viii,

17.

Beza gives

it

a con-

IV. When etTrep in ils conditional sense is joined to Trore, rls, ciXXos, or other such indeterminate words, it brings with it an augmentative or intending power, and ?rep eminently exerts its limitative force ; as, T(g TroXe^tw Trpoffe-^eir, etTrep Trore, Kat rvv ^pr/para elfftyepovras if ever, now above all other times: Demosth. Ol. i. p. 2. 1. 5. vvfj^epei 6' es re Ta ^Xen. Cyrop. iii, 3, 42. vfuv, e'tTrep r^> Kal aXXw, TO vucyv
: :

TroXejLitJfct,

These

etTrep Trore, /^dXtora brj oKvrjpoTepot eyevovro : Thucyd. iv,55. two last passages show that KO.I is not always in the opposed

or corresponding member, as Viger asserts. [The assertion, being erroneous, has been omitted in the Abridgement.] Aristophanes adds emphasis and enforcement to the phrase by the insertion of <b>) after eiTrep : EvpiTn'S??, EvptTrtStov, i/7rct/covaor, eiirep bi]
Tror'

avOp&Trwv

Tivt

Ach. 404,

1. ellipsis is easily discoverable in the examples given; or ()(p^ara et<T7/veytfare.) 2. etTrep ry a\\y e'tTrep Trore (TTpoae/^ere,) 3. eiTrep Trore (oV^^pot eye^ovro.) (o-i/^u0epet).

V.

An

VI. Sometimes after eiTrep alone there is an ellipsis to be supplied from something preceding as, eVeir' a?ro rnppov TOVS Oeovs ctXX' OVK otTro rf/s yijs etTrep Aristoph. [Nub. 226.] underst. vireptypovelv, [or simply t/Trep^poi'ets.] VII. An ellipsis also occurs of the whole consequent part of a hypothetical proposition after the antecedent introduced by etVep
;
; :

as, etTrep yap c' efleX^mv 'Q\v/j,7rtos darepoTr^n/s e^ eewv arv^eX/^af o ydp TroXv Qeprarvs kanv : Iliad, a, 581. understand, he could

do

it.

which

the adversative force of Trep arises the signification has of although : see Iliad. 0, 577IX. EtTrep apa occurs elliptic-ally in the middle of sentences; [representing something as doubtful, and therefore what depends on it as conditional or hypothetical: see Abr. of Vig. p. 189' r. xiv.] rovro p.ev OVK e'ori 0tX/av aTreiTretv, dXX' e^Opav aveiirelv' i'jpKet yap, etTrep apa [iffriendship was at all events to be renounced] TO ^u>)

VIII.

From

e'tVep

o-uvaXyeterflaf TO be KO.I irpoaaviaoai, Troppw beivov : Synesius. And in r/ vfjds rtVvurat, d\X' OVK, etTrep interrogative sentences: 6 Zevs apa : [if some one must necessarily be punished,] eavroV ; OEnomaus

ap. Euseb. Prgepar. 6.

X. EtTrep apa is not always thus elliptically used ; but sometimes introduces a negation, put as a supposition, for the sake of argument,

Hoog.

58

El HH, &c.*- EITI2.

;

EITE.
eiirep
:

and by no means conceded

as, ov ofa tfyeipev,

apa
1

eye/poirat, if it be true that the 15.

dead are not raised

veKpri oi* Corinth, xv,

XI. Et apa is used elliptically in the same manner as eWep apa, in Euseb. Praepar. vi. p. 265. and el & apa also in the beginning of a subsequent member, with reference to something in a preceding member. [See Abr. of Vig. p. 190. 1. 5.] XII. If the force of e'tirep be considered more minutely and accurately, it will be found that its apparent limitative power depends on ye understood ; wcp proposing indefinitely what ye restrains to something more particular. Thus ye is actually added by Plato, when he makes Theaetetus say, in reply to a doubt expressed by Socrates whether he should drop a topic, or discuss it in some manner or
other, ri prjf t
<3

SwKpares, etTrep
37.
(t. ii.

ye

Kal

birrjovv

0atVerat

belv

if
:

indeed

it

appears to be necessary in some manner or other at least

1.

Theaet. p. 187-

p. 146. ed. Bip.)

EI nn, EI nor, EI HOTE, EI nns. i. The addition of these particles affects the meaning of el very little, or not at all. ECTTI? and ciirov signify part or place indefinitely; if in any part, if any where: Thucyd. iv. c. 69. and 125. and e. 4. II. Ooreadds indeterminate signification of time to the condition et 6/ irore: expressed by ei : if ever; if at any time: etTrore
}

Iliad.

39.

III. tlais

adds

any means ; Thucyd. iv,

Acts

EITI2). The original sense of condition in etm is on many occasions nearly lost by use; for etm and etrt signify not only if any one t if any thing, but whosoever, whatsoever ; every, all ; as, etyOeipov eirt -xpfiatnov l\v kv TV TreSt'w, whatsoever was of use ; all that was

signification of means or manner indefinitely; if if in any manner : eiirus wtrajjLevoi e\oiev TO etTrws frvvaivro /caravn/o-ajres els 11. cf. Rom. i, 10. xi, 14. xxvii, 12.

by

useful: Xen. H. Gr.

8.

ova

ecrriv aXridij,

Latin, *i quis, si
Catil.
iii.

c. 3. [

1,9. So Rom. xiii, 9- and in Philipp. iv, joined with ems open), e'irts eiratvos. Ill qui, si quid, are used in the same sense: see Gic. in 8.] Virg. ^n. ii, 420. and 159.
vii,

&c.

is

is used in disjunction of propositions when usually connects two cases or conditions, as in Demosth. Olynth. i. p. 3. 1. 38. [p. 14. 1. 11. ed. Reisk.] but in St. Paul's 1 Ep. to the Corinth, iii, 22. it connects eight. II. The same may be said of avre as of etre : avrt rts els ifoXv^i/3^-

EITE.

--

1.

Et're

hypothetical.

It

Qpav fjUKpav eyiiTreerT/, avre els TO fJLeyiaTOV TreXayos peaov, oyua>s ye yet ovbkv %TTOV: Plato de Rep. v. p. 453. 1. 34. (t. vii. p. 11. ed. Bip.)

whether,
III.
rts

or.
?/

the latter member ; as, etre Avaias, f) follows in aXXos: Plat. Phasdr. p. 277. 1. 35. (p. 386. ed. Bip.) IV. For etre repeated, Homer has at followed by r/re, whether or: Iliad, r, 147.

Sometimes

BAN.
V. As
ei is
;

59

used in expressing doubt, so etre repeated, when doubt as in 2 Corinth, xii, 2. 3. Hence its use when relates to two things deliberation or consideration is mentioned crKOTretre, etre opdtis eyw
:

Xoyt'c?o/iat

ravra, etre Kal

^r/

Demoslh. de Rhod.

lib.
:

p.

r?)v ffKe^iv TTOtw/zefla, etre <J0eXetav, etre fiXafiyv Trape^et in general, 301. ed. 237. 1. 31.
:

p. 79. 1. 17. Plat. Phaedr.

when put in each And (p. Bip.) 6'rt o'iei rl of two members, it stands for Trorepov and ij yeXotov, o rcdveths I Plat. Euthyph. p. Sta^epetv, etre dXXorptos, e'ire otKeios
1.

4.

16.

VI. In Thucyd. iv, 22. where icat follows eV're not repeated, there appears to be an ellipsis: opwvres be ol AafceSat/idvtot ovre atyioiv oToV
re ov ev 7rX?;0et etTretv, (underst. tyopcis eboKei avrots vy^wpe7v.
e'tre

avretTrov rt,) etre

fcai

VTTO r^s

17*-

VII. Sometimes etre is followed by ovv, which has a signification of concession, (derived from its collective or conclusive power) conditional however, on account of etre preceding; as, Sai/zoVta^ifs^ue voPlat. Apol. Socr. p. etr' ovv KO.IVCL etre TraXata /ut'cjetv Kal Sta<ricetv, ov not ^o*:et fcaXor etvat e^ue rovrwv ovbev Trotelr, KOI rr\\iK6vbe 27.
:

ovruy Kal TOVTO rovvo^a. e^ovTa t 34.

etr'

ovv aXijOes,

etr'

ovv

\fcevbos

ib.

p.

EAN. 1. 'Eav, if9 (a particle marking the antecedent part of hypothetical propositions) is compounded of et and av t as eVea*', Ion. of t?ret and av. For eav the poets say atfce, at<cev, or eiVe see Iliad. X, 391. Of eav is formed r/v; so that ea', atiee, atfcej', et*:e, and ?V niay be considered as identical. The difference between et and eut> is this, that the former is usually construed with an indicative mood the latter, on account of its component part av, with a subjunctive : [but see Abr. of Vig. p. 190. 1. 27.] II. *Av, when in composition with et in eay, may affect a following verb in any of the manners in which it affects verbs when alone and
: ;

uncompounded. See"Av.
421.
6at.
TTOV
:

at/ce Trt'fl/jrat,

So,

at'x'

E. g. it exerts its potential force in Iliad, a, if he can be persuaded, for et apa bvvrjfferat irdQeveuprjre Tra, if you can find any any where, for tav evp^re

will in Odyss. rj, 315. olnov edeXwv ye fjievois. 'Eav ev iroirjs, for et See St. Matth. iv, 9. And like GeXets ev iroieiv Ecclesiastic, xii, 1. o'Jore 0ep/*a/vetv re, eav av, it is construed with a verb denoting will fiovXwpai, Kal ^vxeiv: Plat. Phajdr. p. 268. 1. 11. (p. 366. ed. See Iliad. 77, 375. In denoting the future, eav is chiefly conBip.) strued with the aor. 1. subjunctive ; as often as the signification of the future is blended with that of the past; as, eav be TO aXas /uwpavshall have become insipid: St. Matth. v, 13. where Ofj, but if the salt avin eav takes off from the actuality in the sense of the verb yuwpatveaQai just so much as the time intervening between the integrity and the deterioration of the salt. So in St. John xii, 32. Ka'yw eav vj//w0<5

Aristoph.

Ach. 732.

It signifies

5e eyw KOI

KTijfjLara boirjv,
:

aiK

CK

rTjs yf/s. q. d. OVTTW v\^tjjdr]v eK rrjs yi/s, aXX' tyiodw. III. 'Eav has the same power as av in rendering the

meaning of

other words less determinate. whatsoever, St. Mark vi, 22.

See p. Ephes.

11. I.
vi,

and
1

II.

Thus
vi,

8.

Corinth,

o eav, o 18.

00
TI eav,

EAN MEN, EAN

AE.

EAN

KAI.

EANTE.

Coloss. iii, 23. oaot eav, Revel, iii, 19. oaaKts lav, as often soever as: Revel, xi, 6. onov eav, wheresoever: Judith, viii, 22. 3 Maccab. iii, 29. and St. Matth. viii, 19. where it signifies whithersoever. See Casaub. ad Act. Ap. ii, 21. [See Abr. of Vig. p. 191. 1, 8. and note t on that page.]

IV. 'Eav
.

is

rendered

etsi,

quamvis, although,

in

Corinth, iv, 15.

AE. 1. As et /uev, el be, are used MEN, elliptically as correlative, so eav uev, eav be. Thus in Plato's Protagoras, eav eav be ur) (unfiev j3ov\r)rai, airobebuKev o eytt 7rparro/mt apyvptov' derst. /SovAqrat,) roffovrov KaredrjKe : p. 328, 1. 18. (t. iii. p. 122. ed. Bip.) Nay, these conjunctions are* interchanged ; eav be ;uj) e.g. instead of et be yu), following el in Daniel iii, 15. and et be ph ye following K$V fjLev (for Kal eav uev} in St. Luke xiii, 9II. It may be observed that after an affirmative sentence eav be pt} follows, with an ellipsis of what is denied ; after a negative sentence (whether eav pev has or has not preceded) eav be, with an ellipsis of what is affirmed : e. g. Qappet, (ptjaeie rts oV ov yap eV ovbev vfipttreav be, (underst. vfipioOfiffwuai,) rore opyielade, vvv afyevres ; Qriar)' Demosth. in Mid. p. 415. 1. 50. where it is to be observed also that apa is understood with eav be.

EAN

EAN

--

EAN KAI. J. As et Kal signifies even though, so do eav Kal and r)v cat but with this slight difference, that av in eav has somewhat of indefinite in its signification, or of indeterminate futurity of
:

--

time

as, eav Kal TO au>fj.a

TOVUOV

/to)
:

iraprjj,

ri\v

ye biavoiav

rr/v

eu^v

o'ieffOb) rots

ytyvofjtevots Trapearavat

Isocr. Nicocl. p. 72. even

though

body shall not be present. Other words too are inserted between eav or yv and *at, as they are between et and Kal ijv ns Kal prj irapaKa\y , Thucyd. viii, 2. eav HYI Kal (JLOVOIKU TretyvKrj, Plat, de Legg. viii. p. 829. (t viii. p. 399- ed. Bip.)

my

II.

EANTE. I. 'Eavre repeated differs from etre in being construed with the subjunctive mood, on account of av comprehended in it, and in being scarcely used of the past, but frequently of the future : thus, eav re evdabe jua^wyue0a, eav re tovres vTravrw/xev avrots* re i]v evdabe avrovs bey(a)fj.eda t i']v re e?r' eKeivovs tovres rv\v /za^r/v o-vvaTrrwftev
:

Xen. Cyrop.
e'ire

etre be^oueda, for etre with

iii. p. 78. for etre yua^e<ro/xe0a, e'ire VTravTrjffouev, avva\l>ouev. So with the subjunctive of an aorist,

a future indicative, in the

Book of Wisdom,

iii,

17.

18.
II.
It is

used, however, in the signification of the present in

is

Rom.

xiv, 8.
III. But when eav re compounded; nor is re Thus eav re yap is put

put only once,

it is

not to be considered as

to be referred to eav, but to some other word. for feat yap eav, especially when followed by

Kal superadditory, even; as, eav re

yap

*:at

Trepto-adrepov rt nav^r/o-wyuat,

&c. 2 Corinth,
IV.
It is to

x, 8.

be observed

lastly,

that, like etre,

eavre scarcely suf-

EI0E, &c.

EITA, EFIEITA.
when followed by
olv
:

6l
as,

fers elision before a vowel, except ovv, kavT ovv.

cir

ON THE
I.
Ei'fle,

PARTICLES EI0E, AI0E, AI0' HfcEAAON, AI0' ft^EAON, A10' O$EAON.

a particle of wishing, is compounded of el conditional, and meaning of which does not appear. Were it a simple word, it would be circumflexed. It involves in its signification a supposition or case, and also a dependant consequence, both suppressed ; thus the full expression would be, e. g. el TOVTO fiot yeVoiro, TO Kal TO
0e, the

ay, or evTv^tjs a.v elr]v t or the like. its construction, the nature of a wish requires that it should be joined with an optative mood ; as, eWe yevotTo deols <f>i\a, Theogn. 729- cWe you^eiev, Plat. Phaedr. [p. 195. 1. 39. ed. Bas. 1.] But it is construed with an indicative also, not only of otyeXov conTToififfaiut

II.

As

to

stantly, but of other verbs Tufyv irpov\a(3ov TOV tyovov,

as,

eWe

irpurus

<roi

When
is

an infinitive, understood; as

Lucian. Tyrannic, with an accusative before

eiOe ae urj
OvrjTo'icrt

t.

eveTv^ov, eide TI]V ii. p. 157. I. 32. it, follows e'ide, eirf

in

yereadai wfjua, Phocylid.

41.
III. It is most frequently construed with the singular number either of the imperfect or of the 2nd aorist of d^e/Xw or ctyeXXw : as, would that thou commanded' at ! Iliad, |, 84. or w'0eXXes arjfjLciiveiv, without the augment; cuff otye\ov aya/uos neveiv, would that I had remained unmarried ! [For more correct information with respect to the construction of etfle, see A.br. of Vig. p. 92-] IV. In the junction of eiOe and wfyeXoy, neither appears to be

aW

ct6' redundant, as a>'0eXov seems to indicate fatality otyeXe, q. d. / wish it was to have been ; that it had been so fated.
:

EITA, EIIEITA.
is

1.

The predominant

signification of elra

that of [sequence in] the order or series of time or things ; then ; next; afterwards: avQpuiros i\v> elr' eyever ifaityvris Kopa : Aristoph. Vesp. 49. Hence it fitly follows Trpwrov in Aristoph. Vesp. 1101. In Demosthenes a succession of events is thus marked : TO Trp&rov, fjLe.ro. ravro,
TrdXiv,

avdis,

elra,

juera

ravra

Olynth.

i.

p. 2. [p.

12.1.26.

ed. Reisk.]

cession

Elra therefore has place properly, only where there is a sucof members, two at least in number, corresponding to a succession of things spoken of in those members ; but sometimes, even when two such members coalesce, being blended e. g. by the substitution of a participle in the former for a verb, which would have kept it distinct from the latter, elra still retains its place, as if m TOVT the members had been thus, separate and successive 6bvt>r)6els, elr' 'iaws Ke'iTat frvpe-Tuv, for bia TOVT' ubwriOi], elra, &c. elra Aristoph. Vesp. 284. Trorepov e-^wv avro, ov cTTtOvpeH re Kal ep, 5. for 1. re /cat epy ; fj OVA: eyuv Plato Sympos. p. 200.
II.
:

62
Trorepov e^et, elra eVifly/uet

EITA, EOEITA.
Tr)v

Ae^occa yap, p.^ ayvofjffnffa KOI ; fieXaivav epfiaXXr} avrl rfjs \evKtfs tfsrjtyov, for ayvorj Kal crQaXrj, elra eju/SaXXp : JEVrdii. V. H. xiii, 38. [See note a p. 135. Abr. of Vig.] III. It may denote resultance, when one thing is the consequence of another; as in the passage of jEliau just before cited; for the result of the ignorance of the Athenians might easily be the substiTOV a\r)dovs, elra

So Aristoph. Vesp. 52. IV. Elra signifies demum, denique, cceterum ; but only when what follows is not dependant on what precedes, but quite different, and does not occupy the last place as its proper place in the order of a connected series or succession. See Aristoph. Av. 1424. [See Abr. of Vig. p. 135. 1. 18.] V. In introducing an interrogation, it denotes consequence, with a signification of vehemence also : ravra Sj) roXyu^s Xe"yetv 'Eyu^avws rj&Tj Trpbs fyuas ; elr' eya> crov 0e/<ro/uat ; and shall I then spare you? Aristoph. Ach. 311. To a husbandman lamenting the loss of his oxen,
tution of a black for a white pebble.

Dicaeopolis says,

<5

Change the question

the
It

rpioKaKo^aifnav, elra Xevicov afJiTr\i ; ibid. 1073. into a negation, to which it is equivalent, and

appears: you ought not then to wear white. especially expressive of indignation, when a consequence is denied : thus, Semichor. icat Xeyet y', a?rep Xeyei, Strata Trarra.

consequence

is

Semichor.
are just:

elr', el

what Aristoph. Ach. 56l.

Strata, TOIITOV eiTretv avr e^p^r ; and then? ought they to have been spoken

suppose they by this man?

VI. The foregoing examples show that one of its uses is to note incongruence or unsuitableness ; as, in the wearing of white clolhes in the assertion even of what is just and true by a while mourning beggar. [See Abr. of Vig. p. 134. r. ii.] VII. It is used in objections interrupting the discourse of another with vehemence and asperity elr', ov pevToi Xeyets r/Keiv e 'EXX^o-TroVrou what ! and do not you say, &c. ? ^lian. V. H. xiii, 13. VIII. It occurs in objections or replies without any vehemence or as Artaxerxes, to a father accusing his own son capitally, asperity and enumerating his crimes, elra To\prjaeis TOIS 6(j>6a\po1s eavrov TOV vlbv cnrodtriffKovTa vTTopelvai ; ./Elian, i, 34. What follows shows that no indignation is expressed. IX. Sometimes, in abrupt commencements, that from which a consequence is drawn is understood thus a chorus in Aristoph.
;
:

begins with these words, elra bfjr ov ?roXX' eVeori betva T$ y^oa KUKO ; collecting the misery of old age from the wretched appearance of an old man Vesp. 439. X. In some passages elra signifies, notwithstanding, nevertheless ; as in the answer of Eteocles to his brother Polynices, who had taxed him with cowardice, Kq.ra avv 7ro\\o1aiv >ji\0es TTJOOS TOV ov&ev es p.a^riv ; and yet are you come, &c.? Eurip. Phoeniss. 601. The inconsistency is objected ironically : q. d. you believe me to be a coward, it seems ; and then you come against me, coward as I am, with numerous
:

forces.

XI.

"ETreira differs little or not at all

from elra

for

it

signifies

EIIEI.
consequence, as in Iliad ?;, 360. is, for OVKOVV : see Iliad, e, 812.

63
is

and thence

seemingly put, as elra

boKels
LI

eireiTa. Troias

fjjuiepas

#yeiv

Soph. Electr. 263. [266. ed. Br.] XII. "ETret-a has also a use similar to that of elra treated of
ii.

in

avbpes ol Qeufjievoi, el Trrw^os wr, eVetr* v 'Adrjvaiots \eyeiv yueXXw : Aristoph. Ach. 497^ where, it may be observed by the by, eVetra too signifies nevertheless, notwithjj.r}

e. g.

fj.oi (ftdovrjffrjT*,

standing. XIII. And, like elra, it notes, interrogatively, inconsistency or inconsequence , with expression of wonder, indignation, &c. (see V. VI.)

and

so then.

Aristoph. Ach. 917.

Nub. 226. Vesp. 1128. [1133.

ed. Br.]

EI1EI.
that,

1.
;

when
in

as,

And

oblique

signifies first, sequence of time; after, after ap' ovetpos, etrei TOV LivOov CLKOVOE: Iliad. /3, 16. phraseology it is construed with an infinitive mood ;
fir} 6'

'E?ret

as, ^.KvOas yap,

eTret re

tr^t

Aapelov efffiaXelv

es

Trjv

\o>pr)v f

yuera

nejjLOvivai /jitv TioaaOat I Herodot. vi, 84. II. Its second signification, that of cause or reason, (since, because,) is not less errei ov eQev frequent : thus, K\vraifjivriarpr]s 7rpof3e(3ovXa,

TavTa

^epe/wv Iliad, a, 114. Each particle in the compound performs proper function ; eirl with a dative is known to be ratiocinative or causal, being equivalent to bta with an accusative; and el limits what 7rl would have left indefinite thus, eTrel ov edev karl yep e l(>)V 1S P u ^ for irl rw i. e. ta TO OVK elvai -^epetora or eirl TOVT<, i. e. bta TOVTO, So, pr} JJLG Kre~iv\ irpofiefiovXa, Iprefer her for this reason, because, &c. eTret oi>x 6/ioydoTptos"EfC70/)os elfjn, Iliad. 0, 95. i. e. eVt rw jue p,i) elvai And in Eurip. Med. 342. kirel Trarfjp ovbev TrpOTipiji, &c. ofAoyc'icrrpiov. for e?rt rw TOV Trarepa jjirj&ev Trportju^v, because, &c. III. Thus eTrct acquires a causal force ; which, however, is sometimes obscure, when it refers neither to what immediately precedes, nor to anything precisely expressed. Thus in the Ranae of Aristoph. Bacchus, under torture, on receiving a lash, exclaims, "ATroAXor, &c. on which Xanthias says, tfXyrjoev OVK rjieovcras; Bacchus replies, OVK e'ywy', 7rei"lajji(3oy 'I-TrTrwyaKTOs a.ve^ip.vri(TK6fj.r]v. \. 673. [660. ed. Br.] Here e?ret assigns a reason, not for Bacchus's not smarting, but for his having exclaimed "ATroAXoy, and the rest of Hipponax's verse. IV. It is construed elliptically with interrogative particles, when it may be rendered for. Thus in the Nubes of Aristoph. Socrates tells Strepsiades that certain names are not masculine : Sir. OVK upper*
ecTTt
:

its

'

Soc. ovbafji&s y', e?ret TTWS av KaXeveias kvTvyjav ^A.^.vvlq.', v. After cTrel understand el ravr eaTtv appeva. After a negative sentence, whether interrogative or not, el is understood ; after an affirmative one ei/o). An example of the former is in Rom. iii, 6. where el 6 0eos C&LKOS eirj is understood after eTret : of the latter, in Lucian. adv. Indoct. t. iii. p. 100. 1. 16. where, after eirel, all between aairpa and that word is to be understood. The ellipsis is supplied by St. Paul, 1 Cor. xv, 29. where the causal force of cTret will be more apparent if the interrogation re iroirioovmv be changed into direct
vfjuv
;

689.

negation, ovbev

Troujcrovaiv.

Add

Plat. Euthyphr. p. 12.

CTTCC

64
OOTIS
is

EFIEI.

there any one who ? or, by the same change, for there ; for is no one who, &c. V. It retains its causal sense also when used elliptically before as, etrel dirk, for, (if it be not so) tell me: Plat. Euthyd. imperatives
;

p. 287. 1. 21. (t. iii. p. 37. ed. Bip.) end btia&v, Soph. Electr. 353. [352. ed. Br.] Aristoph. Vesp. 517- [519- ed. Br.] [See Abr. of Vig. p. 137. 1. 17'] See also Rom. xi, 22. where el prj eTrtjue/v^s rrj
XpnffTOTT)Ti is understood after ewe/. It may sometimes be doubtful whether ei or et pi) is to be stood after eTret : i. e. whether the latter is to be referred

under-

to the negative or affirmative part of what has preceded it. E. g. in Hebr. ix, 26. where it is said, eVei ebei O.VTOV TroXXam iraOelv CLTTO Kara(3o\ijs KoofjLov, if eTret be referred to the negation preceding, we must understand et, or env, elafjXOev ets xeipoiroir)Ta. ayta, tVa TroXXa/as 7rpoff^>epy if to the eavTov affirmation, then, el )u), or eav pf), ei<rfj\6ev els avrov TOV ovpavov, &c. In these two last passages either av is understood with the indicatives on account of the conditional nature of the affirmation, or the indicative is used in place of the optative with av.
:

So,
be e

et

be ^aptrt, OVK ert

epytav' eTret

fj

X^P 15 OVK

^ Tl yiveraL

XP
l

IS

epywv, OVK
for
eTret,

xi, 6.
Kcil

ert earl \apts, end TO eay rovO' ovrias e^rj,

epyov OVK
f]

eri early

epyov

Rom.
X^P 15 '

X^P IS

^ K ^ rt y^ votT>

<*v

epyov. [See Abr. of Vig. p. 179- r - Hi.] VI. Sometimes apa, either in its syllogistic or collective use, or in its signification of effect , is added to eTret, as, eypcu^a v/juv ev TTJ eiriffTO epyov OVK
eirj

en av

T0\rj,

JJ.TI

ffwavapiyi'vadai
*

iropvois* *rat ov TTCIVTMS Tols Tropvots

TOV

KOGJJIOV

TOVTOV,
'tlytaffTdt

eTret

o0et'Xerc

(0a

eK TOV KOffpov ee\Qe~tv

[the conclusion would be that]

you must needs go

Cor. v, 10. for then out of the world.

yap 6 uvrip o CLTTIOTOS ev TTJ yvvaiK\, KCU tjyiacrTai fj yvvrj // (iiriffTOs ev T^ avbpi' eTret apa ra reKva vfjiwv aKadapTO. effTiV vvv be ayta eaTiv for, were it otherwise, then would it follow as a consequence or effect, that your children would be impure ; whereas they are pure : 1 Corinth, vii, 14. VII. Ovv also is added, noting the consequence or conclusion from premises, as in Hebr. iv, 6. where the order of argumentation would
:

be,

* ETret aTroXetTrerat TraXtv ovv TIVO. opiei r]fj.epav. VIII. Tot too is subjoined to eTret, to enforce and strengthen a reason added, and introduced by tTret; as, eTret' rot oiei pe avrov ovrus civ Trore KopvfiavTiaoat, us, &c. Lucian. Ep. Saturn, t. iii. p. 408. 1. 86. The confirmative force of rot will appear on resolving the interrogation into its implied negation ov TOL ovrws riv Trore Koovj3ctvTictff(t). IX. [On eirei rot ye, next treated of by Hoogeveen, see Abr. of
:

Vig. p. 137- 1. 34.] X. In eTre/Trep, rrep has a limitative force on account of ye suppressed, and advances one reason, others being set aside, as the chief or principal, which ye limits and urges : so that eTretVep is properly, for this reason above all others, that, or principally since, thus, eTrelirep Mpfiriffnfiev \eyeiv, ov fyofiijreov ra rwv x n P LevT(*>v ffKwfj,^a.Ta'. Plat, de
:

v. p. 452. 1. 16. eTreiirep \eyetv ^afieda, TropevTeov irpos TO Tpayy TOV vopov, ibid, yvvaines cipa at rotavrat rots rotovrots avbpaffiv eK\KTeat ovvotKelv KOI o-vju^wXdrretv, eTreiirep eloriy iKaval Kai avy-

Rep.

EnEIAH.EIIAN, EFIEIAAN.
is

65

avrols n)>>
iii,

<j>vaty,

ib.

p. 456.

See also Eurip. PhoenUs. 742 adavarov ye ^ $ VX*I

and Rom.

30.

The ellipsis of ye is supplied by Plato, eTrenrep I. 34. tyaiverai ovya, Phsed. p. 114.
its
1. EIIEIAH. component part

--

'ETreiS/; first signifies

Sr),

time ; and from the force of maturity of time, time fully arrived; when
ijfirjs

now :
II.

Tavrrjv, eTreibrj OaXepos el^

^povos,

fjLvrjarfjpes rjrovv

Eurip.

Electr. 20.

Abr. of Vig.

the construction of eVeiS/} with the optative mood, see p. 138. 1. 10.] III. To signify a precise or instant point of time with more force, evQews, Trpwrct, or ra^tora, is added. [See Abr. of Vig. p. 138. 1. 23.] 'Eireib>i in this its first sense is sometimes joined with an infinitive

[On

in oblique phraseology. IV. In the second or ratiocinative sense of eVetSj), since, seeing that, eiret is both causal and conjunctive; and } retains perhaps in some passages its signification of time; as, TOVTUV ntpt 6 abeXQos vp.1v avrov ovroffl fjiaprvprjaei, eTreibrj eiceivos TereXevrrjKe Plat. Apol. Socr. p. 21. 1. 10. for tTrei eicelros brj rereXevnjce, since he himself is now dead. But some of the other senses of /) are far more frequent; as its inceptive, e. g. in Plato Phaedr. where Socrates, about to enter on
:

mood

a new rhetorical precept, says,

yia
ovffa, since then,

eVei5>}
1.

Xoyov Sura/iis rvy%ave t -^v^ayw

2p. (p. 373. ed. Bip.) where it may also have its confirmative force, serving to strengthen or support a hypothesis; as in Plat. Apol. Socr. ae o/uo\oyov>ra, rlayjfjtt yap eTreiSj) OVK uTroKpivrj, p. 27. 1. 30. and sometimes it seems to have the
p. 271.
vi>v in signification, not of time, but of opposition : as, ei pev for vvv be, e?re<, but now, since, &c. Demoslh. cTrei^j) 6e, yap Olynth. i. p. 2. 1. J3. [p. 11. 1. 4. ed. Reisk.] V. For ewetbr) the poets use eTretij, without the 5. See Horn. II. a, 156. 169. and Eustath. p. 45. 1. 5. p. 1678. 1. 39. VI. 'ETretS^Trep scarcely differs from eTrenrep, except in the addition of signification by the insertion of &), which performs the same office as in erreibr]. The ellipsis of ye, on which the limitative force oftrep

&c.

force of

depends, (see

e?ret,

x.) is supplied

by Plato

in the case

of

eTreiS^Trep,

as well as in that of eiretirep : &ij\ov yap, ort av olaQa, eVetSfjTrep ra ye OelaKaXXtffra Qrjs eibevai av6p&7r(i)i> Euthyphr. p. 13. I. 44. The chief
:

or most cogent
is

selected

arguments which might be adduced, since, if any thing is true, this at least is certainly
of
all

the

true, that

you

say,

&c.

EIIAN,

ECTEIAAN.

--

1.

'ETTCCV differs

from

evret

in

this, that

the latter has place in narration of something past, and is therefore construed with the indicative of a past tense ; whereas eirav speaks conditionally or hypothetically of something to come or to be done ; one of its component particles, av, taking off actuality in the sense of its verb, and therefore it is construed with the subjunctive mood. [See Abr. of Vig. p. 138. 1. 33.] Moreover eVei has a signification of consequence with respect both to time and to ratiocination ;

Hoog.

66

EMOH2.

with respect to time only. ITTOV &^anf]fjia. rt wppy, Demostfr. e?rav e evprjre, aTrayye/Xare juot : when Olynth. ii. p. 8. 1. 39 ye shall have found him : St. Matth. ii, 8. See St. Luke xi, 22. II. That iirav is compounded of eirel and ov, appears 1. from the frequent occurrence of both the particles entire in the compound, eireiav: see Iliad. 413. i, 304. and Eustath. p. 652. 1. 7. 2. , from the practice of the poets, who, as they use ice or KCV for av, so use eTre/ Ke or KGV for eirel av or eirav : see Iliad. 17, 5. 0, 575. 3. from the circumstance that Ionic writers and poets, using fy for eav, use e7rj}j' also for end av or e7red> (Ionic). See II. a, 168. Ionic writers resolve err?)*' into eTredv. see Lucian. de Syr. Dea p. 454. 1. 64. III. 'ETret&av is compounded of eirel, &}, and ay, of which eVe< proposes a positive condition ; any delay of the dependent consequence of which, after that condition shall have been fulfilled, is condemned by Sr), while av removes certainty of time from that consequence : as, TO. rotavra kireibav TIS irepl T&V Oewv \eyrj, bvff^epws irws cnrobe^ofiai, as soon as ; as soon as ever ; Plat. Apol. p. 6. 1. 7- See
also p. 23.
1.

16.

account ofay it is construed with a subjunctive mood. Very rarely an indicative occurs, as, eTret&av fyueis ot/iw^o/zev Kal arevofjiev, eTrtyeX^ : Lucian. Dial. Mort. ii. [On the construction of eTretSuv with an optative mood, see Abr. of Vig. p. 138. 1. 48.]

On

EMIIHI.
[note

--

d on

and

TrdVe,

some

(Ionic ; the Attic form being fyiras and p. 136. of the Abr. of Vig.] is compounded of kv substantive, according to circumstances, being un1. "E/uTTTjs

derstood. It is very common in poetry, but not so in prose. It has a confirmative force, either absolutely, or relatively to something preceding, which may seem opposed to the verisimilitude of what is to be affirmed. II. When it asserts or affirms per se, or without reference, rpoTrots seems to be the substantive understood with tv irdfft, and it may be rendered absolutely, or, at all; as e IT rj s fiot rol^oi fyaivovr <J<ret OVK e^a/^v Trvpos: Odyss. r. 37. [See Abr. of Vig. p. 136. 1. 13.]
JJL

ye Kal afji(})abirjvr 481.] ev^eaQe fftyrj' where however it may be 77, 196. corrective of what Ajax had said before of praying in silence and apart. III. When it affirms with relation to what precedes, it assumes an adversative nature ; for every adversative includes affirmation. But it is adversative not absolutely but respectively, and with reference to apparent opposition between what precedes and what follows ; and it retains its assertory force, inasmuch as assertion or affirmation is required to establish what follows in spite of the apparent oppo* It is rendered therefore, notwithstanding, sition of what precedes. nevertheless, however, yet, still as, katfjiovir), alel juei> oteac, ovbe <re Sometimes Se is XrjOw np^at 5' efjLinjs OVTL bvviiaeai : Iliad, a, 563. added; e/zTrqj Se, attamen, but notwithstanding: see II. e, 191.
piywffe/uev efjurys.
eirel

[Odyss.

ov riva 5e/St/uev

efjiTrrjs

Iliad.

sometimes d\\a,

as in

Theogn. 293.

ETEON.
IV. In Sophocles
7rot*.Te/pw
e
efjurrjs

EYFE.
Kaiirep

67
correspondently : / pity him

and
C^ITT^S,

are used

vtv bvarrivov

nevertheless, although he

KatTrep OVTO. bvcrpevij, is inimical to me : Aj. 122.

That

this particle,

elliptic-ally,

even in its adversative sense, stands for kv Trdat appears from the occurrence in some passages of the
:

as, eV iraai TOVTOIS ov /^erevo^erer a Xaos, in all these notwithstanding that they had seen all these things: Son of Sirach Ixviii, 15. [We say, for all that.] In the same sense ovv irani TOVTOIS is used by St. Luke xxiv, 21. When irep precedes e/u7r;s, there is an ellipsis after the latter, to be supplied from something preceding as, OVK av eywye" ere KeXoipriv

entire expression
thitigs,
i.

e.

aftwepevat, ^areovcri Trep efjurrjs Iliad, i, 514. underst. Xareoval rrep, e/n7rr]s OVK av KeXoiprjv. although they were in need, yet t notwithstanding, 1 would not bid you. oypa /^ei/ ovv bi) Keivr) e/jv x* irep efjnrqs, Odyss. o, 360. for a\eovad wep, epTrqs b er\v
'Apye/ottrtv
:

ETEON.
character
it

But

it is

1. 'Ereoy is by nature an adjective; and in that appears to be used in Iliad. /3, 300. far more frequently used as an adverb, to enforce affir-

--

mation, and signifies, in reality, in truth, seriously, in earnest. It occurs in poetry only, as in Iliad. r\, 359- and joined with a word of the same meaning, ereov ye ecu arpefcews Iliad, o, 53. II. In interrogation it frequently denotes eagerness for information, and is rendered, obsecro, tell me I conjure you; I pray ; as, ri 6* <TT\V ereov; Aristoph. Vesp. 832. [836. Br.] av 6' el ris eYeoi/ ; Id. Eq.
:

730. [733. ed. Br.]

ereov,

rl

Trdrep, ri bvaKoXaiveis

ovv TOVT eartv ereov, J Trarep ; Id. Nub. 93. in reality: Id. Nub. 35. This is said ;

by Phidippides at last, when thoroughly awake, after having given several answers in sleep, or between sleeping and waking. A>) confirmatory
ijKeis
is

Xwi'os et,avir]aiv, iv,

added by Apoll. Rhod. et ereov 5?) vfj.Tepr)s yairjs 'A)(e292. And, after jesting, Blepyrus asks, drap TO^CV
;

ereov

seriously

jokes,

eYeoi/ rjyei

EYFE.
both

jue>
it
:

yap Qeovs
In
this

in earnest: Aristoph. Eccles. 376. Id. Eq. 32. ;

So, after

1.

combination ye
is

has

its
is

waving or discarding what

(f et

less urged.

There

restrictive force, a two-fold ellipsis ;

a\Xo

Trore

before evye, and of

full

e'iprjKas, TreiroirjKas,

or the
Trore,

like, after

so that the
e'-iprjicas.

expression would be,

et

pev a\Xo

dXXa

TOVTO ye ev

II. When construed with other words, it is expressive of commendation or approbation ; as, evy' eiroirjffas, avapviiaas pe, you did well in reminding me, Plato Phaed. p. 60. 1. 29evye avivevaas, Lucian. adv. Indoct. t. iii. p. 193. 1. 5. III. When unconnected, it takes the nature of an interjection ; thus Strepsiades, having been told by Socrates that a cock was to be called dXe<crwp, and a hen dXeK-rpimtva, exclaims in delight, eyye, v) TOV 'Aepa! excellent! Aristoph. Nub. 667. [657. in the edition w KXeo&?//e Lucian. evye, printed for Mr. 1826.]

Priestley,

e^t;,

Lapith. p. 443.

1.

99.

68

EYTE.

IV. Theophrastus subjoins or* : e$ye, on /ue v-nefjtvrjoas, good! it lucky you put me in mind: wept AaXtas. [p. 40. 1. 1. ed. Simps.] V. It is used ironically, as in Plato's Gorgias, where, when Callicles had praised a life overflowing with every kind of pleasure, Socrates exclaims, evye, w /3eXnore* biareXet yap tionep ijpfo, bravo ! well spoken! p. 494. 1. 24. (t. iv. p. 103. ed. Bip.)
is

EYTE.'
this

--

1.

Evrt

sense

rjvre is

more frequent
:

signifies first as, just as, in comparisons. in poetry, as in Iliad, o, 360.

In but

evr' opeos Kopvfyrjfft voros Kare^evev opi^rjv evre is found in Homer ws apa rwv, &c. II. y, 10, II. Secondly it signifies time ; when, after ; [note h on p. 140. of evre nvXas "ucavc, Abr. of Vig.] and this is its most usual sense evr f) (t>apos ecte, Odyss. w, 146. See Theogn. 356. Iliad, e, 396. III. Sometimes av is subjoined to cure, and, from the force of av, evr' av has always a future signification, and is therefore never construed with the indicative of a past tense: ovrt bwfiaeat. ^paicr^elv, Iliad, a, 243. See Iliad. /3, 34. evr' av TroXXol Qvr\aKOYTes Tr/Trrwcrt
:
:

Odyss.

a, 192.

it differs 1. "Ew$ EftS. properly denotes uninterrupted action from axpi and pe\pi scarcely in any thing besides being more fre:

--

quently joined with verbs : fjifj iravaaio /zr/Tror* iaQlaiv retas, etas cravTOV Xadijs btappayels, until you burst before you are aware of it : Aristoph. Pac. 32^ II. The action or state is sometimes without termination, and then This use of ews scarcely occurs eo)s may signify for ever, always. except in the sacred scriptures ; e. g. eyh jue0' vpun> efyu iraaas ras Yet in fjHepas CMS rrjs ovvreXelas TOV alwvos l St. Matth. xxviii, 20. Homer too, ews, unconnected syntactically with ofher words, denotes perpetuity, and is rendered without intermission ; etws ptv bfjuXabbv
avrap, eirel "ibov, &c. Iliad, o, 272. But more frequently what is signified has a bound or termi1. of place or nation; and ews is then construed with a genitive
aiev eirovTO,
III.

space, as ews

of time

quantity, It is construed with a verb also ; St. Mark vi, 23. fjiov, to, unto, and then it is often followed by ov or orov, signifying continued progress to a term or limit : with the 1 aor. indie, cjvyurj, fjv Xafiovtra

2. Ttjs daXavffrjs, ews TOV ovpavov, as far as, quite to. 3. of as, ews r^s reAevrf/s 'HpwSoi/, until, St. Matth. ii, 15. measure, number, &c. as, b&crw aot ews fipiffovs TJJS (3aari\elas

yvvrj kv&Kpvfyev els aXevpov trara rpia, etas ov evfiwdr) oXov, until, &c. ews eXQbv eori; St. Matth. xiii, 33. with the 2 aor. indie, irporjyfv, eTT&vw ov ^v TO iraibiov. St. Matth. ii, 9- [I suppose this last passage
is

in

not meant to be an example of the conjunction of e'ws and ov, for it they are wholly unconnected, the antecedent of ov being governed by en-ayo).] With the 1 aor. subjunct. c/ceXevua rrjpeladat avrbr, eus ov TTf^w avroi' TTjOos Kataapa : Acts xxv, 21. With the 1 aor. of the optative, av being understood, it signifies time future with regard to something past, but past with respect to the time of using the ex-

AN, Ea2 HEP AN.

pm&ion
:

69

Phaedo says that he walked before the prison, waiting, TO cteorjuwrT/pov, until it should be opened: Plato Phaed. p. 59' (c. 3. ed. Fisch.) So with the 2 aor. Men would have followed Homer and Hesiod about, says Plato, OTTTJ rjearav, ews iKav&s iraibeias yueraXci/Soiev, de Rep. x. p. 600. (t. vii. p. 294. ed. Bip.)
as
e<as avoi-^Qeir]

IV.

[When some
is

indeterminate part, rather than the whole, of

signified,] it is rendered while, whilst: rov TdXewv Trapa/cdXet, ews eri 0ws eari : Plat. Pha;d. p. 89- 1. 26. (c. 38. ed. Fisch.) [i. e. not, as long as it is light, but, at some time before it be dark.] e.1 nal av ffvymXeVas, ews en e^eart TrapafceXet/o-at ; Xen.

limited duration

Cyrop.
cats

iii,

3, 49rrj

and with OTOV

/xer'

'iadi

OTOV el ev

ow

avTOv

St.

euvowv TO> dvrt^/fcw Matth. v, 25.

o-ov

ra^v,

indicative of the imperfect, Xen. Cyrop. iii, 3, 58. Horn. a, 193. [The word is not in the verse cited.] V. It is often joined with adverbs, as, ews aprt, ews <r//^epov, ews ov Kptveis xal CKo5e, ews en, ews OTI, &C. and with TTOTC ; etas TTOTC
II.

With the

btKels TO

aljj.0. i]fj.S>v

how long?

Revel,

vi,

10.

The

expression usually

denotes eager desire, or impatience.

In fas &v, the latter particle 1. EftS, affects the following verb rather than ews, taking off actuality in its sense : thus in a simile, ews av awc^rcu TO oKatyos, rore \prj Trpodvfj.oi' elvai' KUI vpels TOIVVV, ews trwoe, &c. Demostli. Philipp. iii.
eo-yuev

EH2 AN,

HEP AN.

Here, in the protasis av is used, because something supposed and not actual is spoken of, ews ay a&SqTcu whereas in the apodosis, an actual state is expressed by ews eepev without fiv.
p. 52. [p. 128.
:

I.

21. ed.Reisk.]

II. As ews ut> usually involves a signification of future time, it is construed with the subjunctive mood, or the optative; with the former very frequently, with the latter seldom as, KUIOVK airoKpivato, ws av TCL d?r' eKeivrjs 6ppr}devTa. ffK\^cno Plat. Pheed. p. 101. (c. 49.
: :

ed. Fisch.)
III.

With the subjunctive and

av,

or with the indicative alone,

:

it

when the term or limit itself, or what is bounded term or limit, it is rendered until. Xenophon joins it with the subjunctive of the present, the future being signified: OVK avctjueVojuej', ews av ri ^erepa x^l a Kanwrati Cyrop. iii, 3, 18. Still some signification of the present is preserved ; until the time when the devastation of our country shall be going on. But the 1 aor. puts as a case, or supposes, completion or consummation: the cicada, says Plato, sings without food or drink, ews av reXevnjffij, until it be dead: Phaedr. p. 259. (p. 348. ed. Bip.) not ews av reXevr^, lest any one should understand that it takes nourishment in the article of death. So the 2 aor. idiovat raura pv, ews av eyyevjjrat avrols, Xen. Cyrop. iii, 3, 53. until it shall have been thoroughly learnt or infixed: not iyyiyvriTai. So St. Matth. ii, 13. v, 26. IV. When what is bounded is term or signified rather than the limit itself, it is rendered like ews, so differs from av ews as but ; long e'wj in this, that the latter indicates continuance or duration of something, whereas the former only supposes it, or puts it as a case: thus,
signifies either the

70
cuts

*H.

av TO otJjfjLa fyiDfteVy ofc uj wore KnjffufieOa Vav5s, ol e7rt0v/4ofyie>, Plato Phaed. p. 66. (c. 11. ed. Fiscli.) /uexpi /ue> nvos fibeHa boKel etvai f/ iarp</3>), ews av yapyaXigy TOV avdpwirov Ceb. Tab. p. 182. V. Whenever ews is construed with the subjunctive or the optative mood, av is left to be understood. Examples of the optative have been given under eais iii. The following are of the subjunctive of etas ov cnroXvarj TOVS aorists eais ov o^Xovs, St. Mutth. xiv, 22. Xafty, KaTaQiXrjcei rt)v \e1pa avrou, S. of Sirach. xxiv, 5. VI. Sometimes irep is inserted between ews and av for indication of uncertainty or indefiniteness in the duration spoken of; as, ews ?rep av ov yu) Travaopai QiXoffotywv Plat. Apol. Socr. p. 29- (c. 17 IjUTryew, ed. Fisch.) so long as I breathe ; q. d./or the whole time of my life, be it long or short.
: :
'.

I.

OF THE FORCE OF *H IN DISJUNCTION, DOUBT OR BERATION, AND INTERROGATION.

DELI-

I. The primary use of r} is disjunctive, and its sense is or. Sometimes of two opposite things, or at least of two or more different things, disjoined by r/, one is preferred, as true, wise, probable, &c. as, rl ovv ; rovrw juereora* \pevSos aya-n^v, r), iiav rovvavriov, fj.LOiv\ [or rather:} Plato de Rep. vi. p. 490. (t. vii. p. 82. ed. Bip.) It is frequently repeated, as, vv 6' r/6' r/e biappalaei trrparov, r}e trawcret : Iliad, i, 78. either or. r) Trept <p6vovs, rj irepi iep&v K\oiras f % TI &\\o : Plato Euthyphr. p. 5. (c. 6. ed. Fisch.) II. When one case of an alternative is approved, as right or pre-

ferable,

?)

serves for probation,

its

and

is

equivalent to
;

et

be p/,

still

however retaining
a\r)Qiyfjs

disjunctive nature

as, T/V (aXrjdeiav) bi&Keiv

avrov TravTws Kal Travrr] ebet, r) a\a6i>i ovrt firfbafjifj fjierelrai (f)t\o<ro(j)ias : Plato de Rep. vi. p. 490. (t. vii. p. 81. ed. Bip.) or, as a consequence. So, ov% TITTOV fiavdarovri iroirjTeov rj yu/iva^oyuevw, r/ row
fieyitrrov re KQI jutaXtarra irpovrjKovTOS /ia0///iaros CTTI reXos ouTrore ibid. p. 504. (p. 111. ed.

rjei t

Bip.) III. Next to its disjunctive use, is (as arising from things disjoined) its use in doubt or deliberation ; as, biavci\a ;uepp/piev, f/ 6'ye
'Arpeibr)v cvapifyi,
:

So II. e, 301. Iliad, a, 190. r/e ^6\ov Ttavaeiev the first clause, Trorepor, el, or the like, is often found [see Abr. of Vig. p. 140. 1. 19 ] eat&Tra, a-rropwv irorepa ffv/JLflovXevot r Kvpw fcarafca/retv eavrov, r] rdvavr/a bibaffKOt riv, &c. Xenoph. Cyrop. iii, 1, 13. aTropr/oreiev av TIS, irorepov eartv apery TIS
Instead of
:

in

bovXov,
or.
el

77

OVK ecrnv
7?e

ovbefjiia,
:

&c.
is
;

Aristot.
/3,

de Rep.
;

ii,

13.

whether

ereo>,

Kal OVKI

Iliad.

Sometimes
Xel\fseis, cu$

ei,

or Trorepov,

301. understood
Ev/ia0j)s
(t. vii.
?}

as, ou

eyuuai.'

To
vi.

irolov

bvfffJiaQrjs

nev ovbe robe irapafor irorepov evpa:

Qil*

Plato de Rep.

p. 486.

p. 73. ed. Bip.)

tf

Homer adds apa or pa conjectural: o^pa t5w;ucu ij ap' e\eurera, piv epvfai yrj: II. (f), 62. IV. When the latter of the disjunctive clauses contains what is contrary to the former, it is not necessary to repeat the former, but

"H.

71

^ o*, with an ellipsis of a verb in the former, is sufficient : thus, TroXews crvfjityepei ry ?roXet, bijXov r/6r/ yeviaQat, Trorepa avrnrotfiaeTai Ttjs r&v 'Pobluv, 7) ov, (avTiTToi^ffCTai viz.) Demosth. de Rhod. Lib. p. 79- And sometimes xal is inserted between ?/ and ov, as in the passage

above, from

II. /3,
T)

301.
:

For

?*/

ou,

/*>)

sometimes occurs
Xeyw,
7} ju?)
:

Trpcxrexeiy, ei biKaia

Plat.

TOVTO v/zwv Seo/mt, rovryTovvovv Apol. Socr. p. 18. (c. 1. ed.

Fisch.)

V. Bordering on doubt
terrogation, employing

is

two clauses or members,

oblique interrogation ; and in such in?/ stands in the latter

1. with et, worepor, or the like, preceding; etn-e, -jrorepov Ko\aets ; Xen. Cyrop. iii, 1, II. epwryv, e'/ye apttei % Tavra avrw, /cat yur) : Plat. Ep. vii. p. 347- The disjunctive power also of 7} is apparent in these passages. 2. Without Ttoreaov, fj takes the lead in oblique interrogation: eliri /uoi, 7} o-vyu/3ovXev<rw Kepi avTov; Xen. Cyrop. iii, 1, 11. 1. 3.Q. If we understand ?} ov after And ffv/jtj3ov\evaw, there will be two members, and a repetition of ij.
Ttfj.^Sj
?*/

member:

in this

sense
,

J)

is

repeated by

Homer

ro^e

ei?r^,

r)

jue/uaatrtv

av0t

/ze-

vetv

>/e

VI.

"H

TroXtvSe a^/ ava-^wp^aovaiv ; II. K, 509 is found in direct interrogations, which

it

affects without

in the least losing its disjunctive power. First, with Trorcpov or wore/cm preceding, when an election is to be made from two contrary, or two

or more different things, it is altogether disjunctive as, Trorepa &' rjyrj, & Kvpe, afjietvov eivai, aiiv rw act ayaOo) ras ri/uwp/as iroteiaOat, ^ ovv rj; afj ctrjuiq.', Xen. Cyrop. iii, 1, 15. Trorepa car' OIKOVS, rj irpoffe&pevwv Trvpot; Eurip. Orest. 403. [397. ed. Pors.] VII. What was said in iv. applies in the case of interrogation also: thus, irorepov o/zoXoyets ovrws, T/ ov ; Plat, de Rep. v. p. 473.
:

(p. 51.

ed. Bip.) [for

r/

elvai

T&V

afJLfyiafiriTriaiiJiuv,

ov^ 6/^oXoye7;] TOV "Epwra Trorepov 0a)juev Plat. riav p) ri [aptyiffflrjrrjai fj.wv viz.]
;

Phredr. p. 263. 1. 26. VIII. Although *\ is not interrogative itself, [see p. 140. 1. 43. of Abr. of Vig. and note / on p. 141.] yet it elegantly affects interrogations in which it is used. First, before r/s, Trader, TTWS, or the like thus in Luinterrogative words, it indicates vehemence or ardour cian, Philip, having shown Alexander the inconsistency of pretending to be a god, and yet exposing himself to be carried off wounded, and groaning, and streaming with blood, and thus refuting visibly the responses of Ammon and his priests, adds, ?} ris OVK ay eyeXaaev bpuiv
:

TOV TOV Aios vibv \etTro\pvyovvTcij beofjievov TU>I' larpwv foorjOelv I Dial. Mort. t. i. p. 398. [p. 258. E. ed. Salmur.] Here j} disjoins the aggravating particulars in the interrogation, from what has preceded.

Secondly,
things are
Troiels
;

it is

not interrogative, but disjunctive, when contrary

1, 12.

interrogatively : as, es TrXovreT^, >} 7rer7?ra or when different things are asked; as, TTOV 5ai vrjvs cornice dot), ?/ a ijyaye bevpo T) ep-rropos etX?/Xov0as

propounded Xen. Cyrop. iii,

;

Odyss. w, 299. where apa is to be understood. Thirdly, in figurative interrogation, by which affirmation or neof gation is rendered more energetic or vehement, v is expressive
vrjos e?r' aXXorptrjs

indignation, but

still

preserves

its

disjunctive force, as another ques-

72
tion precedes ov-% 'EXevtys Iliad, t, 340.
:

'H.
\aov Ay^yaycr evQ&fr bytipas 'ArpefS^i ; jf ; $ fjiovvot 0tX&>v<7 AXo^ovs 'ArpetScu ; In the former member ; appears, and but appears, to
thus, ri
g
f

>:' fjvKojjoio

be
a

interrogative.

it is similarly used in reprehension or reproof in which slighter degree of indignation is expressed ; as in the words of Jupiter to the immortal horses, a SeiXw, ri 0<j>uii hope* 6vrjry ;.

Fourthly,

much

Iliad, p, 445. Here may ; give you ? tell the reason, or did we give you, that, &C. So St. Paul, rj JJLOVOS eyb KOI Bapvd/3as OVK e^ofjiey cfyvfftav TOV pi) epy&effdai ; 1 Cor. ix, 6. *H indicates the difference between this question and those which precede it. Fifthly, without any preceding interrogation it denotes indignation ; as when Jupiter declares that Hector shall not mount the chariot drawn by immortal horses, and adds, rj ov\ a\is, &s ical rei^e' e^et, Kat eTrev^eTai avTMs; Iliad, p, 450.
rj

Iva.

bvorrivoiot per avbpaatv aXye' Igijroy

ellipsis
:

be an

why did we

Sixthly, in objurgation it is emphatically repeated : ?/ a<f v/^wv Xoyos TOV 0eol erj\6ev ; r) els vfias fxovovs KaTijvrrjaev ; 1 Cor. xiv^ 36. Seventhly, when no antecedent interrogation is expressed, one understood will show the disjunctive force of ?/, as, ro per ovv, ofyicu,
iras
fi/uli'

83. ed. Bip.) underst. The ellipsis is extremely evident, oyuoXoyets ravra before T) OVK: oVet ; when after 77 what is opposed or contrary is not understood, but plainly expressed ; as, ras ^v^as OVTU> Qw/jiev TO.S ev^i/eoraros,
p.

ovKo'iei; Plat, de

e3Xtyac($ 6fjio\oyr}fft, TOtavTifv tyvtriv 491. 1. 12. (p. Rep. vi.

ev av0pa>7rots tyveadat. y

7ratSaywy/as rv)(pvffas btatyepovrws KUKCLS ylyveaOaf % o'iet ra CK (f)av\r)s, dXX' OVK CK aSticjJyuara icat rr)V aKparov Trovypiav
t

<j>votas, rpotyfi &io\\vfjivr)s, yiyvetrdat

or,

do you think? &c.

ibid.

1.

42. (p. 85. ed. Bip.) Eighthly, through an ellipsis also it expresses vehemence in interrogation ; as, TIS yap \\pwv eXirls, r) X a P" *1 PrtJHM'Ql irav)>/crews ; rj ovy\ Kat vfte~is ; 1 Thessal. xi, lp. q. d. ris aXXos ?^ v/xels ; rj ov^l icai
vyuels
;

Ninthly, and lastly, it has a slight signification of reprehension in questions put to excite the recollection of what one ought to know, [or to tax one with acting or speaking in a manner inconsistent with some knowledge which one ought to have :] thus Plato, to make something clearer which had been said, asks, rj OVK olaQa. on TOV jjiij

anglais re, Kal ^p^/uacrt, KO.I davarois K0\dovot ; de Rep. 492. (p. 87. ed. Bip.) and Minerva inciting Telemachus to destroy the sailors, says, f/ ovir diets, olov K\eos eXXa/3e b~ios 'Opeffrrjs ; &c. Odyss. a, 298. From this multitude of examples it appears that T) is not interrogative itself, but affects interrogation in various manners.
neiddfjievov
vi,

p.

II.

OF THE USE OF THE PARTICLE *H

When
y;

IN

COMPARISON.

I.

is

used

in

comparison,

its

primary disjunctive force

HMEN, HAE.
still

73

evidently retained ; for in reality it disjoins the things compared : thus, o Xoyos irpoKeirai, irorepa ep&vri ?/ yu>) yuaXXoy els <j)i\iav treov, or: Plat. Phaedr. p. 237. (p. 301. ed. Bip.) eee/rp TO> bibaorKaXw
biKrjv Trporepov
fj

e/^o),

before

you proceed against me

*/

Plat.

Xa^e Euthyphr.

p. 5.
II.
tos,

With respect
rube epya

to construction,

is

often followed

by Kara or

as,

of man ; jue*c?w ?/ one to set forth in words.

III.

fueled) kar\v ?/ ear' ws r Xoyw ris ay

avOpwTrov, too great for the power etTrot, beyond the power of any

See Demosth. Phi!, ii. p. 26. compared, not with others, but with itself, as to different predicates, r/ is elegantly put between two adjectives in the comparative degree, as in Odyss. a, 165. [See Abr. of Vig. p.

When

a thing

is

2/.

1.

35.]
:

IV. "H is disjunctive too, or comparative, when it follows aXXos and dXXotos [Abr. of Vig. p. 140. 1. 27.] although in this use, when removed to a great distance from those words, it occasions some as in Odyss. r, 267. where dXXoIov >/ 'OSvc7/a, different obscurity from Ulysses, not to be compared with Ulysses, are separated by a
;

verse and a half intervening.

HAE. 1. By the conjunction of juey and be with jj, the poetical correlative particles ijjjiev and r/Se (for which Ibe is sometimes substituted) are formed. When r/^ev is in the first clause or member, j/e always corresponds to it in the following; but >/e is sometimes in the latter, when rijjiev is not in the former.

HMEN,

disjoin contraries, as, rjnev uvaK\~irai KVKIVOV vetyos, ri& or : Iliad, e. or different things, as, ov yap ns voov aXXos apeivova rovbe ror'iaei, olov lyw roea) ri/uiev TrdXat, ?/' ert KCU vvv
II.

They

eirideivnt, either

'.

whether
T'eoi, ?/6e

or:

i.

e,

both

and:

Iliad,

i,

105.

"toad 'Apye/wv ri^kv

in

III.

yepovTes, ibid. 36. So v. 227. Sometimes the use of ?/ in doubt or deliberation appears

these particles : o^p' ev yn'wovcjjs ^/uev Oeov, ?}5e KCLI avbpa : Iliad, e, 128. [Hermann has observed that Hoogeveen is in error here. See Abr. of Vig. p. 141. 1.3.] IV. In the foregoing examples the force of ?/ appears to predominate ; but there are others, in which, on the other hand, the copulative

power of /^e*' and be is employed, without any regard to the In such cases however it is to be observed disjunctive power of r/. that I/per is rarely or never put in the first clause, but either /iei> uncompounded, or some other connective. Thus, ws e'0ar'* ot b' apa TOV Here it is not one or the juaXa fj.ev K\VOV, rib" eTtidorro : Iliad, r}, 379. other of K\VOV and eTridovTo, that is meant, but both : they heard and So, nepl p.kv fyaadat CTTOS, r/6' eTrctKOvoat, ib. 100. Cf. V. 79obeyed. V. This copulative use appears more evidently when re occurs in the first clause instead of jnev as, Kai TOL Zevs tyyiwXe oTO/Trrpov r 6l. f]be fieyutoros, ib. 99 "Eierop r' ?/' aXXot Tpwwv ayoJ, Iliad, p, VI. Sometimes qbe is copulative, with Knl preceding Tpties, ical ot, >}6' eTriKovpot, and: Iliad, yu, 368. and on the other hand follows Ibe (tjpev however being understood) in a sentence of
: :

Hoog.

74
three clauses
;

HKEN, HnEP.Hnor.
irov TOL TO^OV,
Ilk.

HTOI.
icaJ
fcXe*os
;

irTepdeircs otarot,

Iliad, e,

r/Se has a copulative use appears also from its being placed between Kal and re, as, x/>v<rov, icai \U\KOV, r/6e yvvaiKas, TroXioV re aibripov ao/m : Iliad, c, 366. Moreover, re, KCU, ?}e are used as equivalent: 7rreXcu re, KUI treat, jySe" fivplKai : Iliad. 0, 351. and re, -qbe, sot "Hpi; r' r/Se IloaeiSdaiy, KCU ITaXXas 'AOtjvr) : II. a, ralero St Xwros r', /6e Opvov, r/Se Kvxetpov 401. and re, r/Se, r;6e II. ?, 352.
: :

171. VII. That

'.

These are two distinct particles, 1. "HKev. HKEN, HI1EP. and should be kept separate though H. Stephens, to show both
;

--

that they

avbp&v

is merely expletive, cites, poi eplfffferat, r/e cai OVKI : Odyss. &, 80. and, Oetiv et> yovvavi Kelrai, ^KCV vocm'jffas ctTrorifferai, r/e icai ovKt : Odyss. a, 267. but Key reduces the sense of the future from certainty or necessity to bare possibility. Seep. 12. vi. It may possibly be that, &c. and, b' rfceV Tts

may be

conjoined, and that KCV

whether
II.
its

it

may happen)

that,

&c.

comparative use is qualified by the junction of ?rep in adversative sense, althovgh ; as, ifa yap nor eyw KCU apeiofftv
II in its
v/u7v, Kaiirep

yeirep vfjClv tivbpuaiv wpi\r)ffa I Iliad, a, 26 1. i.e. r/ rioTots overt : with braver men than you, although

Kpa-

ever brave
>/

you may

be.

Thus
:

in St.

John
T^y

r/s-ep is

very brave, howmore emphalical than

ilTcep rifv

bdav rS>v avQpuirtav /uaXXov So^ar row 0eoi5, xii, 43. i. e. more than the praise of God, although that praise is the most worthy of love.
alone would have been
ri-ycurrjaav

conjectural

expressing doubt or deliberation is added trov do not however coalesce in one compound parthey ticle, although joined by accentuation : vvv ^jikv OVTWS OVK e-^ ciirelv bfjXov be on TiviJtv UKIJUOO., TJTTOV 2a7r</>ous Ttjs KaXijs, rj 'AraKpeovros rov
j|
:

HI1OV.

To

cotyov,

?}

fcai

pho, &c.

crvyypafyewv TIV&V : either it may be (or possibly) oj a Plat. Phaedr. p. 235. (p. 296. ed. Bip.)
1.

Sap-

confir{/ is disjunctive, and rot and principal use is to evince or confirm by parthus Theoticulars what has been before advanced more generally phrastus, having observed that a prater is tiresome to his hearers, proceeds to support the position by mention of various effects ; ware

HTOI.

--

In this combination

mative.

Its true

rovs ctKovovTas

ijTot
:

t7r<Xa0ea0ai,

?/

rvffTafat,

r)

/uera^w KaraXtTroyros

aira\\urreadat

Eth. Char. c. 7. [p. 42. ed. Simps.] "Hroi is placed first, and the simple disjunctive } follows, because it was sufficient to add the confirmatory particle once in the beSee ginning, and to leave it to be understood in the other clauses. also Eurip. Crest. 1197. [1508. ed. Pors.] and Rom.vi, 1 6. in which last passage the confirmatory force of rot will be more evident if the
In translating nal ffvyypatpcwy TLVWV, etiam alias auctores, Hoogeveeu peems not to have been aware of the sense
if)

of ffvyypafyewit, which signifies prose icritern,

tel

Anacreon.

in contradistinction to J. S.

Sappho and

H.

H TAP, T H TAP AN.

75

interrogation be placed after inraKovere, so as to make the former part of the verse interrogative, and the latter affirmative. The sense of the latter part will then appear to be, one thing or the other unquestionably is certain, you are either the servants of sin unto

mark of

death, or of obedience unto righteousness. II. The next use, which borders on the confirmatory one, is in interrogation, when signified to be serious ; as, TOVS be baifjovas ov^t ffroi Oeovs ye fiyovpeOa elvat, 7} Qe&v iralbas ; Plat. Apol. Socr. p. 27 do not we in reality suppose them to be either, &c. III. The confirmatory force is sometimes so faint, that the particle appears to be employed rather for declaration or distinction, and may

be rendered nempe, that is to say ; as, oluai, TWV enl rov fitov yeyovoTuv Xoywv urjbet'a TrXelovs i] ffe ireTroujKevai yeyevijadat, ?/rot nvror Plat. Phaedr. p. Aeyovra, i} aXXovs eW ye rpoTrw irpo(TarayKa$orra 242. (p. 311. ed. Bip.) ws OVK av irore yerotro evbaluwv of/re 7roA<s, ovr' avrjp ovbets, os av fj,r) yuerot typon'iarews VTTU biKatoavvy btayayy rov fiiov, ijroi ev QVTM KeKTrj/uevos, f; oat'tov arbpwr d-p^ovrtav ev eOefft rpa<j)ts re cat irai&evOels evbiKws : Id. Ep. vii. p. 335. IV. When ijrot is alone, [not followed by f/J the disjunctive power of 7) almost wholly disappears ; but still it retains its office of particularizing what has before been mentioned only in general, or as a whole: thus, after speaking of Juno's chariot, as a whole, Homer proceeds to description of ils parts, rwv ?;rot ^pvfferj 'ITVS, avrap
:

Iliad, e, 720. irXfjfjivcu ^' dpyvpov, &C. 7rlffa<t)Tpa, So, Tfjor&e &vo yevofJieaQa^ av 5' ajjL^d) ^eiporo/jnijoreis. This verse contains a general assertion, which, in those following it, is explained by parijroi rov TrpwTotffi fjera irpvXeeafft baftacroas apriOeov ticularizing vvv be 6/} evGa.be fjioi KCIKOV eafferai : Iliad. 0, 90. nentpe, YloXv&wpov,

VTrepOev ^a\*;e'

savoir, to wit.
1. The primary and true sense of r) is that of affirmation: explained therefore by ov-ws, aXr]Ou>s, in reality, in truth; as in Iliad, a, 51p. Its affirmation aft'ects whole sentences or propositions, as, ?) fjiuXa a ov fieXos wvi/ bajucio-aaTo, Iliad, e, 274. ^ /ueya Qavfjia.

H.

it is

rob' o^OaX^olffiv optical, II. 0, 54.

and
;

it

is

not, like
?)

cally connected with other wor<Js

so that 6

oWws, syntactiKaXos, for 6 OVTUS KaXos,

would be a solecism.
direct interrogation (for in indirect it is not used) it imand energy ; still retaining its affirmative force ; as, i) ficiTpl pev Traptiat av^^a-^oi 0eo), ry b' ov irapeiai paXXoi' $tKllp&1f ; eVrai mr) cvv olos re Eurip. Orest. 582. q. d. Spa ry OVTI, &c. Plat. Phaedr. p. 262. (354. c. yi-yvutricciv ; ivill he then in truth, ed. Bip.) T) ovv Kal aXXoOi ircv TO TOIOVTOV eon; Id. Theaetet. p. 188.
II.

To

parts emphasis

(t.

ii.

p. 148. ed. Bip.)

H TAP, H TAP AN. 1. In ] yap it is remarkable that the former particle affects the latter this happens because yap is always a subjunctive particle. T H is confirmatory of the causal signification of yap, as in Priam's words, who, after giving orders to keep the city gates open for the reception of his routed forces, adds the reason, }
:

76
yap 'A)(tXXevs eyyvs

H TAP, T H TAP AN.

or, for too surety, for bespeaking the

6'Se

&c.

Iliad. 0,

532.
:

K\ovtav, for in truth ; So Calchas gives a reason

;

protection of Achilles

r)

yap diopai avbpa

^oXwo-eyuej', os

peya TTUVTWV

'Apyeiwv Kpareet

Iliad, a, 78.

II. In interrogation also yap is subjoined to i\, when used in the thus Socrates asks Phaedrus whether he does sense of dpa rw OVTI not mean the trite and common rules of rhetorick ; as that the procemium should come first, &c. ravra Xeye/s ; if yap ra KO^O. Tfjs Texrys; Plato Phaedr. p. 266. (p. 363. ed. Bip.) [See Abr. of Vig. In this use the p. 142. 1. 14.] is it not so? Phaedrus answers val. particles are most frequently by themselves, at the end of sentences ; \eKTeov. % yap ; Plat. Phaedr. p. 263. as, ri bfj ovv ovros cifj.apTo.vet, (355. ed. Bip.) Socr. fjiaviav yap riva e^>i]aap.ev elVai rov epwra* 7] yap; Ph. vai. ib. p. 265. (360. ed. Bip.) 7 III. H yap is sometimes used in questions neither anticipating, nor followed by, assent ; as, TOV le. &r) evxeptis eQeXovra TTCLVTOS fiaOrj:

JJLO.TOS

rovrov

yeveodat, Kal acrfjevus evrt TO p.nQeiv iovra, Kal cnrXrjffTWS e^ojra, ^' kv btKy (prffro^iev tyiKoaotyov' ?j yap ; The answer is, TroXXot apa Kal aroTroi eaovrai aoi TOIOVTOI, &c. Plat, de Rep. v. p. 475. (t. vii. p. 56. ed. Bip.) IV. The force of yap is more obscure, when 7) yap interrogatively

words that a person uses : in that case however it argues or concludes from something preceding. Thus Aglaitidas to Cyrus, who was pleased with something told him, ^ yap o'iec, etyr), <5 Kvpe, TOVTOVS aXrjdrj \eyetv ravra ; concluding from Cyrus's words, that he believed what had been told him: Xen. Cyrop. ii, 2, 11. and Pylades, concluding from something said by Orestes, that Menelaus had returned, ?) yap e<mv ws dXr;0w$ rf]vb* atyiypevos \66va ; Eurip. Or. In such cases 736. [729- ed. Pors.] See also Eurip. Phoeniss. 1666. yap may perhaps retain in some degree its causal power, and assign a reason for the interrogation, drawn from what precedes. T V. H yap expresses also some degree of surprise with indignation ; itane vero? indeed? is it SO? Call. OVK aicrxvvr) els roiavra aywv rovs
are the first

\6yovs,
vos,

to

Dwfcpares; Socr.
<^y

-fj

osav

avatbrjv oi/rw,

yap eyw ayw evravda, a> yevvale T) f:et&c. Plat. Gorg. p. 4<H. (t. iv. p. 104. ed.
;

Bip.) VI. In

a formula, the sense of which depends r) yap a.v, which is on a supposition or condition not expressed, yap concludes or reasons, 7) confirms or supports the reasoning, and av affects the following verb in one or other of the modes explained under that particle GVTibavoiaiv avaacrets* yap av, 'Arpet'S??, vvv vorara Xtafirjaaio
:
'.

j!

el /*?) ovT&avoiaiv iivaaaes is understood, says Eustath. 232. for (did you not rule a worthless people) you would assuredly have committed an outrage now for the last time, tide ypa^eiev, ws ^PV ^ yap av TfevrjTL fJLo.\\ov r) ir\ovai(o, Kal 7rpeo-/3vrepa> T; t^ewrepw aareloi feat brjfjuo^eXels elev ol Xoyoi: Plat. Phaedr. (p. 281. ed. Bip.) In very many passages 7j yap av may be underst. ei OVTMS eypa^er. rendered otherwise, as in the verse of Homer above cited thus, aXXa Tavra /ney ov fyavep&s TrpoaedrjKe ra p?)yuara, 7j yap av v avrov elvai e^Qpov, etyvyov Chrysost.

Iliad, a,

'

AH, &c.

"H AHFIOY, &c.

77

This interpretation, alioquin or otherwise, has arisen from putting out of consideration the condition or supposition not expressed; for when it is expressed, 7) yap av cannot be so translated e. g. r) yap
;

Kev betXos re Kal ovTtbctvos KttXeo/jurjv, TTI Kev el-Trots : Iliad, a, 293.

el

b)j

trot

irdv epyov

vrrelj-pfjiai,

AH,

H MAAA
?).

AH.
T

1.
btj

subjoined to

First

6//.

may

Other confirmatory particles are doubtless be employed in express-

Its expression of indiging great surprise at something unexpected. nation, and its use in confirming the indignity of a thing by a present example (in which b>) discovers its primary signification of time) may be seen in the following passage ?) 5r) Xo/ym epya Tab' eaaerat, ovb'
:

Iliad, a, 573. : aveKTa, el bt} a<f)U) evcKct Qvi]Twv eptbaiveTOv where the double affirmation gives a nervous character to the expression. II. MdXa also is added to augment the affirmation of 7): 7j //aXa ov j3eXos WKV bapaaffaTO : Iliad, e, 274.
er'

we

III.

The
:

to

T)

juaXct

greatest force is given to affirmation, when / is subjoined thus Achilles, astonished at the reappearance of Lycaon,
7]

says,

TTOTTOI,

peya Oavpa
'.

Tob'

ofyQaXuoHatv opwpai'
jjteyaXijropes,

?)

^taXa

bt)

(of

a certainty, beyond all doubt) Tp&es

avrts avctfTrrjffovTCtt
Iliad. 0, 55.

oiiff-rrep

CTreQvor,

AHITOY.

H MEN. H MHN.

1.

To

r]

is

subjoined also

SJ/TTOV,

which indicates a consciousness of truth with a desire at the same time to elicit the assent of another. Sometimes, however, the

conjectural force of TTOV in the compound is either much diminished, or quite lost; or the whole formula >) >/TTOV is used ironically; as, T)
SjyTTOi; ^ua\'

Tpwwv a.yep(t)^(t)v II. Mev too is

0a/i// 'A^tXXev, f//^art rube TruXtv rrepaetv 583. you hoped forsooth, &c. which, like ye, by its nature limits, and subjoined by limiting presses, and by pressing asseverates av be avvQeo, Kai Iliad, a, pot ojj.oaaov, i\ fj.ev pot Trpotppwv eireatv KO.I ^epaly apt'i^eiv
eoXTras eft
:

fypeffl,
<f>,

Iliad.

77.
is III. The affirmation or asseveration of strengthened by the addition of p/y. These particles serve 1. for grave or serious affirmation ; as, 1] ju?}> icat veos eaal, epos be K Kal irais eiys birXorepos yeve~ 2. for threats ; as, ?] : in truth ; believe me ; Iliad, i, 57. eyu> rjiptv tre ?i JM}V av flXeTretv <TKVTT] 7roi/?ffw : Aristoph. Vesp. 6'41.
?")

^v

ry'ipepov

bwaets avptov TOVTWV

3.

biKriv, ib.

1323. as sure as

you

are alive, &c.

as,
:

for

adding solemn asseveration to promises or compacts;

i'i

eyyvrjTas Karaar^aat TOV 6(pXrj/naTOS shall solemnly undertake to pay the

p. 467. [p. 712. 1. 24. ed. Reisk.] yu>)v, ews a.v TL r&v eavrov Xe/TTj^rai,

fjir/v

eKTtaetv TO apyvpiov

who

money: Demosth.
avrovs

Ttaaatyepvr}*
pi) a.Trop(]aeir>

in Timocr. aurw V7reearo, 7)

rpofyrjs
:

Tissa-

phernes undertook, on the solemn pledge of his faith, &c. Thucyd. 4. for expression of admiration or wonder; a person enviii, 81. forcing, as it were, his own credence, by this double asseveration Kal TO irpoTepov ye KaXuv iffjuv etyavrj TO epwTrjpa: // fiijv as, w Zev,
;

Plat.

Euthydem.

p. 276.

as

I am

alive.

5. for

confirmation

by

78

H nor.

oath ; as, Qeovs vpvvfjH, i) p^v fyoi boKelv ir\eov ae biatyepetv w/a r) errpar)?y/a Xenopli. Cyrop. viii, 4, 7 v^ TOV Kvva, fj /u)> tyw e7ra0oi> rt rwovrov : Plat. Apol. Socr. p. 22. (c. 7. ed. Fisch.) ouvvfii
:

ffot,
et*>,

r)

/u>/v

ur)beTTOTe
:

<rot

erepov Xoyov

fjtrjbeva

jj.r)bevos /ur/re

evtbei-

Id. Phgedr. p. 236. (299- ed. Bip.) efryyeXeiv [See note o on p. 141. of the Abr. of Vig.] These particles were so constantly used in swearing, that they assumed the nature of a regular formula, employed not only by a person himself taking an oath, but in indirect recital of the substance or purport of an oath taken, or in binding any one by the obligation of an oath, even when the very words of the oath are not dictated, but the substance only proposed ; as, TrtorwortiTes avrov rots opxois, ovs ra reXrj TMV A-aKebaiftovluv bp.6aa.VTa OVTOV eleTre^av, ?i /o)v eaeadai ^vupa^ovs avrov6povs t ovs av TrpoaayayrjTai, ovrw be-^ovrat TOV arpaTov Thucyd. iv, 88. opicois \aKebatpov iwv K-araXa^wv ra reXi; rols peylffTots, ^ fjitjr, ovs av eywye Trpoffayaywjuat ^vyuyua^oi/s, eaeadat
uiir
:

avTovofjiovs
a\rid)~i

Id. iv, 86.

:

Trpore/oos

be Xeye, <VXX' eirofj.ooaiJ.evos,

c.

% pi] v

eoelv

Lucian.
all

t. ii.

in

Tox.

11.

Theocritus joins
ration
:
-f\

fjav rot

Kyyw avpiyy

the three particles % priv rot together in assevee^u) evvecHjHjjvov, Id. viii, 21,
particles.
irov

conjectural, express a degree of almost to certainty. They do not coalesce in probability amounting one word ; if they did, i\ would have an acute accent.
II. First, they are used in supposing something very probable, but not demonstrable as, i] TTOV 6m Trjv vTrap\ovrrav cnropiav, iroXXaKis pev eoe^twffavTO aXX//Xovs, etKorots be crfyas avrovs wXo^vpavro :, Lysias Or. Funebr. p. 505. in all probability ; doubtless. So, presently after;

of which

I10T, with the annexed and 7] is affirmative,

1.

These two

particles,

wards,

-f]

elbov, TroXXa

TTOV bta TOV TrapovTa <j>6flov, TroXXa p.ev yii6r)(rav Ibe'iv, <2v OVK 6' aKovaai, &v OVK iJKovffav. But in speaking of what was

certain, or

what he might

safely

sroXv 7rXe70Toi/ eKeivoi, (the

Athenians

assume as certain, he omits TTOV ?j who fought under Themistocles)

:

Kara

airavTwv avdpwirwv btyveyKav Kat ev ro'is flovXevfjiafft, TOV TroXe/uov Kivbvvots. As the hearers of Lysias were Athenians, there was no likelihood that the truth of this proposition would
rrjv aper>)v,
teal et' ro~is

be disputed. III. Secondly, ?] TCOV is significative of circumspection and caution in speech TTOV, w HLvdvtypov, dyvoetrai VTTO TUJV TTO\\WV as, 'Hpa/cXeis, : Plat. it is much but OTTTJ Trore opQws eyei Euthyphr. p. 4. (c. 4. ed. Fisch.) i\ TTOV av, t5 'AyXcurdSa, et ye K\aieiv eTretpwfjieda ae Xen. Cyrop. ii, 2, 13. iroielvy a&obpa av >//u7f eueufjjov IV. Thirdly, as affirmation often induces assent, these particles are
;
-fi
'.

'.

employed

in eliciting or laying

out for that assent

as, tfirov
:

ao<j>bs

%v,

av a^dlv pvOov aKovays, OVK av bucaaats it appears, : I think, that ; to be sure Aristoph. Vesp. 724. V. Fourthly, they are employed in arguing from signs or circumstances not infallible as, 7] TTOV avros ye TroXXa e%ei, oirov ye Kai rjfiijv bebwicev Toaavra Xenoph. Cyrop. viii, 4,31. eKdffTy VI. In arguments a fortiori: OTTOV yap ohiaai TroXeis olot re ycyooffTts etyaaKe, trpiv
; :

H HOY.
af
TOTTOVH TOIOVTOVS

79

KOV (3ovXr]dci'TS
:

7//4e7$
:

TToXXoVS

Isocr.
TTOI;

tie

Pace

denoting vehemence, and TTOV being conjectural. The conjectural sense of irov, perhaps, it may be, is very evident in many questions; as, ris & liXXos ; 7] TTOV air AlyiaOov 0/Xwv ~ijiv Eurip. Or. 435. yvvalices, T) irov TUIV& ib. 842. 0<t;jO///jrat ^o/uwr T\r)/nd)v 'Opeffrrjs VIII. It befits questions asked through presage of calamity as,
; ; ;

VII.

if they could,

much more

easily could we.

is

used

in interrogation

also, %

0/Xrar',

7]

TTOV tyfjifyopav iJKeis (ftepwv

Eurip. Phoeniss. 1079*

IX. Also questions asked by persons hanging back through fear or apprehension thus Socrates to one who encouraged him to proceed with an exposition about which he hesitated, <5 Hpicrre, TI TTOV /3ovXopevos fie TrapaOappvvetv Xeyeis', Plat, de Rep. v. p. 450. (t. vii. p. 5. ed. Bip/) is it not (for I doubt it is) for the purpose of emboldening me, that you say so ? X. Also questions put, to elicit assent ; as, % irov o ye curoQvi]VKuv abtKws, eXeeivos re Kal cidXios eanv ; Plat. Gorg. p. 46p. (t. iv. p. 49. ed. Bip.) doubtless you will alloiv that, &c. Socrates answers, I\TTOV
:
*l

o airoKTivvvs.

XI. The particle fipa added indicates a firm conclusion from premises thus from the boast of Gorgias that no one had for many years asked him any thing new, Chrerephon concludes, 1\ TTOV cipa pybius cnroKpirrj, then of course, I suppose, you easily answer: Plat. Gorg. p. 448. (t. iv. p. 6. ed. Bip.) FIou is added, either to elicit the assent of Gorgias, or to detract somewhat from the strength of the conclusion, since it was possible that some one might yet put a new question to him. XII. Fe sometimes follows ^ TTOV after some intervening word,
:

which word it affects as, >) ,ai (iOXios kanv Plat. Gorg.
;

o ye airoQvi]ffKii)v bbtewt, eXeeo'os re 469. (49- ed. Bip.) Fe waves or discards the consideration of a preceding point, whether he who, supposing himself to be acting justly, had put another to death, were to be pitied, in order to press more strongly the question which follows : doubtless you will grant then I suppose, that he at least who is put to death unjustly, &c. XIII. In 7) TTOV ye //, ye urges the latter part of an argument, with comparative disregard or concession of the former, and bij emphatically affirms and enforces what follows, being at the same time a corrective of the effect of TTOV in diminishing the confirmatory force of 7): TOVTO 5 araaeus ciirtov yiyverat Kal Trapa rols (Jtrjbev o/w/m
TTOV
;

p.

KeKTTjfjievois,

i'i

TTOV
5.

ye

7)

Trapa ye Ov/uoeibeai

Kai TroXefJUKolis a.vbpacrii> t

much more then

Aristot. Polit.
ii,

certainly with

high-spirited
is

and warlike men

XIV. The

sense of % TTOV ye KOI

nearly the same, cat being copu-

lative or exaggeratory : abvyarov be Kal Qaibpov ov p.6vov /caret 2wK/>ari\v etvat, 1\ TTOV ye Kal epcjfjievov avrov yeyovevat, Athen. Deipnos. xi. account of the negation in abvvaTov, it may be rendered, p. 505.

On

much
it

that he should have been also, &c. should be conceded that Pheedrus lived
less

Fe indicates that even

in the

if

time of Socrates,

80
yet that at
least,

HAH.
from
his age,

INA.
is

he could not have been what

last

mentioned.
I. "HSi; differs from vvv in signifying HAH. maturity full readiness or preparation ; [or actual commencement ,] already. Repel the hostile enterprises of Philip , says Demosthenes, TO'IS pkv afjLvvofjtiPhil. iv. p. 55. vots ijbrj, "xpri[jiaTa. KUI raXXct, &v av beuvrai, bibovres ov povov tfbr) Trapeernr, aXXa KOI 7rajOeXr;Xi/0e : ibid. p. 57rjbfl be KO.I r; alvT) Trpus T)}V piav TU>V bevbpwv Kelrat: St. Mali I), iii, 10. II. With a past tense it signifies something which has or had already taken place, but without ascertaining the precise time : % &pa ijbr) 7rapTi\6ev, St.Matth. xix, 15. ry &' f/Si; bvo /uev yeveal nepoirwv
',
'.

avQpfjtnrwv etyQiar : III. Sometimes

251. denotes one thing immediately consequent upon another ; as, KqvrevQev f/Si? irarayos i]v rSJv aff-rribcov, Aristoph. Ach. So that it signifies the term of commencement, as in the fol538. lowing example also, 7ms 6 /SXevrwi' yvvaiKo. irpos TO Tndvfj.rjffai avrijs, ijbrj ejLtoi-^evaei' avrijv ev rfj Kapbtq. avrov : St. Mat til. v, 28. IV. And, on the other hand, it signifies also a time long past ; as,
Iliad, a,
it

1'jbri

yap iror eyw KCU apeioatv 26l. before now. V. With a future tense it
present
;

i'jeirep

v^uv avbpdatv wfAiXrjffa: Iliad, a,

signifies a

time speedily following the

avrap eywr e?rt vfja Qoriv (tareXei/cro^at ijbrj, immediately ; forthwith : Odyss. a, 303. So Iliad, a, 760. [X, 820.] VI. When Trore is added, if a past tense be used, time long since past is signified, as in the passage already cited from Iliad, a, 26l. and in ijbri jnev TTOr' e/utev irapos eVXves evfafjievoio : ib. 454. If a future tense, then time to come, at a great distance ; as, Travrore enl
as,

rwv

7rpoffev%ui'

fjiov

beufmevos, etTrws rjbrj Trore evobwdriaofiai

i

kv

TO)

Oe-

XijILtart

TOU Oeov
10.

e\6e~it> Trpos vjjias

Rom.
delay

i,
;

On
at

if at length at
:

some time or other ,

the other hand

;

once apwov, Iliad, a, 456.

now

instantly

the addition of vvr excludes all ijbr) vvv AavaoTatv aeiKca Xoiyov

I.

OF THE PARTICLE INA

IN

ITS

SIGNIFICATION OF THE

FINAL CAUSE.
I. "Iva, when it signifies the final cause, regards future time, and always construed with the subjunctive mood, [see Abr. ofVig. p. 205. r. I.] because it takes away the act [or actuality in the sense] of the verb e'irts bopv^vs, r] KcnrrjXos d<T7rt5wv, 'iv e/i7roXct /3eXrtov, ravra eTTtdvfjiei /Jct^wv : that he may sell better: Aristoph. Pac. 447.
:

is

Xeyw,
II.

i'va vfj.els

awOiJTe

St.

John

v,

34.

That, of which iva

;

signifies the final cause, is

sometimes sup:

pressed
i,

as, KO.I vvv,

'iva.

ayqre ras

f]fj,epas

rrjs

aKrjvoTrrjytas

Maccab.

underst. ravra ypcKpofjiev. In v. 18. there is no ellipsis. III. Since the final cause or end is something in contemplation or desire rather than in act, whenever it is expressed with negation, iva.
9.

INA.
ph
is

81

constantly used, not Iva ov : [see Abr. of Vig. p. 165. 1. 18.] avwOev eTrefyoprjffe T&V XiOwr, 'iva /u>) Xa/3qre jUj/StTror' avrrjv : It is to be observed that /ujjSeTrore, not ouSeAristoph. Pac. 225. Trore, is used for the same reason. IV. When the optative mood follows it, the potential particle av appears to be understood : Soke fjievos ecu Qapaos, 1v eicbrjXos yevotro :
bpips,

ocrovs

for yevoir av. following is a very different use from those preceding, [in stating a case or supposition :] ueiZova ravrijs ayaTrrjs ovbels \<et t iva rls TI\V \l>v%)iv avrov TWV 0/Xwv airov : that a man lay down his Of) vTrep St. John xv, 13. It limits degree or quantity. life, &c. VI. [In the following examples of the construction of Iva with the indicative mood, Hoogeveen does not allow that it signifies the final
Iliad, e, 2.

V.

The

cause; but see Abr. of Vig. p. 205. r. i. 1. 15. and foil.] irpbs ola \wpia tyevyeiv aipovvrai ol Xayw, ev TOVTOIS TO. biKTva bvaopara eveTreravwes, 'iva. kv r<5 afyocpa (pcvyeiv QVTOS KQVTOV eyuTrtTrrwv evebvl Xen. Cyrop. i, 6, 40. VTTO TTJ pivt juaXttrra e^jpfjv O.VTOVS aTe<j>e<rdai, 'iva us Tr\i(TTOv aveffTTtov Trjs ?/5oi^s Lucian. Nigrin. t. i. p. 75. c^pfjv
:

avTOvs rriv irporepav $i]Tr)aiv C^reTv, 'iva Tore bovros biKijv TOV Orjpiov rovTOVy a7r^XXay/^e0a TOVTOV TOV &j//zaywyoi>, biKrjr atyav bovros : Dinarch. c. Demosth. p. 93. en be TO Trpdy^i' av efaXeyfat Zrir&v, efrjTijaev av fie TOV Tralba, TOV ypatyovra TUS ^iaprvp/as, iv\ el /*j) Trapebibovv, btKaiov Xeyetv eboKovv : Demosth. adv. Aphob. iii. p. 562. la fjirjbev the example given of its construction with the indicative of the pre'iva e'ibopev a]u<f>(i), (Iliad, a, 363.) e'ibo/jiev is put for sent, efavba, With the indicative eibwuev. [See Hermann, de metris, i. p. 85.]

of the future
ayptov avbpa

TroXvy
Iliad.

& opvpaybov

opive 0trpwv Kal Xaa)v t 'iva iravvofjiev

:

0,314. fj.aKaptoi oi TTOIOVVTCS TCIS evroXas UVTOV, Revel, xxii, 14. 'iva carat r/ e^ovaia avrwv CTTI TO tyXov r>ys e?wf/s VII. When the end or purpose of any thing is inquired, ri is subthere is an ellipsis joined to iVa, but without being dependent on it as, 'iva ri /*e eyKareXtalways of some verb in the subjunctive mood
I

Tres

hast thou forsaken me? St. Matth. xxvii, or the like. [See Abr. of Vig. p. 206. 1. 24.] q. d. with what intention? TI fiovXojjievos ; So, 'iva TI v/*e7s evdvfielffOe underst. otyeXf?0i/re. Trovrjpa ev Tals Kapbiais v/jiuiv ; St. Matth. ix, 4.
;

wherefore or
e.

why

46.

i.

iva

TI

epyaorj,

See

Corinth, x, 29-

More

frequently Ivari

is

written, in one

word
(t.

as, Ivari TCLVTU \eyeis ; Plat. Apol. p. 26. (c. 14. ed. Fisch.) fiovXeTai evbaluwv elvat o povXofjievos ; Id. in Sympos. p. 205.

\vari
x.

p. 234. ed. Bip.)

Sometimes
'Ira ri bfi

TOVTO bparov
b>]

408. and
Aristoph.

added, denoting the eagerness of the inquirer: why, I pray, or beseech you? Aristoph. Pac 'iva brj TI TIJV evijv sometimes precedes ri
bij is
;
:

Nub. 1194.

II.

OF THE OTHER USES OF INA IN S1GN1FYI?<G EFFECT, TIME, AND PLACE.

I.

"Iva sometimes signifies effect, being put for ware, or

K-a0'

ov

Hoog.

82
:

INA.
as, bvo fjieyed^jv

bodevrwv

ro/uea 7roXvyu)vov Trepiypu^ai, KCII aXXo Trepiypafyev npos TO eyypatyev eXaaaova

irpos TO
:

so that : eXaaaov for &UTG signifying effect is infrequent, and /UT) is usually added. See St. Luke ix, 45. where it is said that an expression of Christ, fo TrapaKeKaXvufjievov aTr' avr&v, (the disciples) Iva. fir) a'iadutVTai avrd. See also Galat. v, 17. and St. John xvii, 12.
II. In Revel, ix, 20, after a negative, Iva. HY\ signifies the effect that would have followed repentance : the rest of the men, which were not killed by these plagues, yet repented not of the works of their hands, 'iva. fjifj irpoaKwiijatuffi TO. baifjiovia, that they should not

Topics, bvvaTOV can irepi TOV eyypa^/cu ouoiov avry, 'iva TO Xoyov e%r), V T0 ue peyedos Archimed. Prop. v. But this use of iva
teal
/

^*

worship
III.

devils.

In

some passages
is

it

seems doubtful whether the

}JL

final

cause or

the effect

signified
:

as, 6 be

eVoi^/cre TvtyXov, "iva

//>)

btayiyvutvKotfii

TOVTWV prjbeva Aristoph. Plut. 91IV. "lv a denotes time, when: as, eXfjXvdev % &pa, t va boa(r6rj vlos TOV avdp&irov : St. John xii, 23. So xiii, 1. Aristophanes also has been cited for this sense KCU. ravr edeXfiffeis aitofjLooai JJLOL rows Oeovs, 'iv av KeXevfffa *y<'' oe whensoever: Nub. 1235. [1214. ed. Bekk. See Hermann, ad 1. who refers to Hom. Od. c, 27. wl be yauos
1

ff^cbov eaTLV, 'iva ^017 icaXa p,ev avTYjv evvvcrQai, &c.]

V. Its signification of place, where, is much more frequent ; and is always construed with an indicative mood, since something actual, and not contingent, is spoken of; as, KeWi So Pac. 204. and yevoiuav, 'iv 6 id/pv^ 07/<r/ : Aristoph. Vesp. 750. Plato Euthyphr. p. 12. 1. 11. and 22. (c. 13. ed. Fisch.) iva re
in that signification it

^vve^ovffi TCVOVTCS ayK&vos, TTJ TOV ye <f>iXr)s bta \etpos eireipev al^rj And, like other adverbs XaXKeiri, in the part where : Iliad, v, 478.

of place,

it is construed with a genitive case, as, ov% 6p$s tV el KUKOV ; Sophocl. efiadev, 'Iva i\v KUKOV, Herodot. VI. As os is sometimes put for eKelvos, [Abr. of Vig. p. 13. 1. 3.] so iva (but rarely) for ecel, there : Keivovs be KL^r}a6^Qa npo irvXauv

Iliad. K, 127 trtyiv eiretypabov r/yepeeadat : signification of orov, where, the particle irep is often subjoined to it ; as, ov yap elvat et> TYJ 'Ii'bwv x<**P a fifffrov, ovb Iva. Trep avrols afjnreXoiJiaav, wheresoever: Arrian. de Exp. Al. v, 2. q. d. in
<l*v\aKffff',

ev

iva yap

VII. In

its

those places, where vines are found, whatever those places may be. In the foregoing passage irep has its use of rendering things indeterminate; in the folloxving it restricts or limits: eKelvov pev al abeXtyai daiTTeTwcrav eirt T 'E,ptbaraj, Iva ?rep eTtecrev : Lucian. t. i. p. 280. VIII. It signifies whither; as, es TYJV ILiKeXlav, 'iva vep ToirpStTov &pui]VTo, cnro-irXevaavTes, eTroXe^ovv: Thucyd. iv, 48. and so in iv,

74. has been said to have an adversative sense, although, even yap aoL TOVTO Trpos oXiyov btipev, TO efclvai, oaaKis av ovb 7rt iraaats alriais aTroKTjaTroicrjpvTTeiv, oi/)( cnrXws, olfjai, eOeXys, && ff ot but avra enelva Keicpipveis: Luciau. Abdic. t. ii. p. 177.
It

IX.

though ;

as, 'iva

Kevai, offa o
TI

KaXXT^os

es

icdXXos,

>/
;

6 aoibiuos 'Arrtfcos

ypa\^atev,

trot
iii.

o^eXos,

Qavfiaffie t TOV KTVIUCITOS

Id.

adv. Indoct. p.

100.

t.

KAI.
it

83

But in such passages may indicate the end, which the speaker has iu view, that of conceding something to his opponent, in order that he may carry some other point that he wishes.

I.

KAI COPULATIVE.

I. The primary use of cn< is copulative, and; and from its use in connecting things following one another, arises that in which it signifies celerity, or the instantaneous consecution of one thing after another: rravres aXXayrjad^ieOa ev ctroyuw, ev pnrg dfyQaXpov, ev rfj ea^aTrj aaX-myyf aa\iriaei yap, Kai 01 vexpol eyepOi'iaovTail 1 Corinth. xv, 52. i. e. apa rw aa\iri&iv, at the sound of the trumpet. II. Hence it denotes readiness or alacrity : Kai <rot ^paerw rl 7rpay//a betvov Kai fieya, Aristoph. Pac. 402. III. In the New Testament only, it sometimes so closely connects two opposed clauses or members, that one cannot be taken without the other ; and thus it performs the office of pev and be thus, eV
:

TOVT(f OavjuaoroV eariv, on vpeis OVK o'ibare iroQev earl, KOI avey^e. ftov TOVS ofyOaXfiovs : St. John ix, 30. for vjuefs ftev OVK o'ibare, avey^e be. [and yet he hath opened mine eyesJ] So, ris aadevel, Kai OVK

yap

affdeviu

ris

(TKarbaXi^erai, Kai OVK

eytt*

Trvpuvfiai',

The inseparability of the clauses will be more be made affirmative instead of interrogative
affdei'ti,

evident,
:

2 Corinth, xi, 2^. if the sentences ovbels d<70erel, KUI OVK

&c. See also 1 Corinth, ix, 7. IV. The same is to be observed where it connects contraries, in which case it plainly serves instead of pev and b f3ov\ei av ^tVroi,
:

ov^l fiov\ijffr] Taya. : Eurip. Phoeniss. 906. V. If it has here an adversative sense, it has it not of itself, but takes it from the nature of the opposed clauses or members : thus,
*'

KCU ayaQov ovojjia els alwva bia^eret, the (t)rjs apiOfJiOS ^uepcDv, days of, &c. may be numbered, but, &c. Jes. Sir. xli, 13. ^0eX//Kai a7ra, Kai bis, Kai ev&KO'^ev rjf^ds 6 Saravas, but, &C. aap.ev e\6e~ir

ayaOfjs

Thessal. ii, 18. VI. It is used in transition, being put, instead of jnev br), or /uey ovv, iii the conclusion of one head or part, followed by be in the bethus, Kai endow ravra, Kai TO 6epos ereXevra : ginning of the next Thucyd. iii, end of c. 1. then c. 2. begins, roi) & eTnyiyvojjievov -^eiSo in the end of b. iv. Hence in conclusions it is joined ywwi/os. with per brj, as, Kai ravra pev bi) ravra, so frequently occurring in
:

Plato.

VII. By its copulative use may be explained its employment in comparisons for Kara raura ovros r/x*? 6 ** Kidapa Kpovadelaa, just as a harp, (Paus. in Attic.) is in reality, ovros K-CU KtOapa 7/x^e :ara ravra and rovro be opoiov TTJ o\^et Kai TO fiovKepas, (Theoplirast.) is
'

rovro Kai fiovKepas OJ.IOLOV Tn oi^et. VIII. The same may be said when things differing from each other are set in opposition, [and xal is rendered from or than ;] for
earn,

yap erepa
K'at

r;

o TrXoiJros

XP^ art<rrto)

o trXovTOS, e. g. (Aristot. Polit. i.) ^prjfiaricrTiKri Kai ' r ^K e<rr/, or erepa ecrrlv >/ \P-

is

erepa

84,

KAI.

II.

OF KAI

IN ITS SIGNIFICATION OF TIME.

the primary copulative use of Kal is derived its signifiproperly of time immediately following something, and determined by <Js, ore, or the like, preceding ; as, ws airfjXdov air" avrwv els TUV ovpavov ol ayyeXot, Kal ol avdpwjroi ol Troi^eves flirov irpbs aXXiiXovs : St. Luke ii, 15. then. See 1 Maccab. v, l. Sus. 19. So after eyevero eyeVero be cJs wp&v Tpt&v and St. Luke ii, 21. Acts v, 7 eitrfjXdev biaffTijua, Kal fj yvvij avrov
I.

From
of

cation

time.,

II.

avrov: St.
1.

Hence it is put Mark xv,

for tva,

when:

l\v

b&

&pa

rpfrrj,

Kat effravpuaav

25.
its

So Hebr.

viii,

8. [See

Abr. of Vig. p. 40.

35.]
III.

On

account of
:

with
ol

efarrivrjs

ijbrj

be

r)v oi//e,

signification of immediately, KOI is joined Kal eTreTratw^toro avrois tJs eTriirXovv, Kal

KoptV0toi e airi vrjs Trpvuvav eKpovovro : Thucyd. i, 50. It has the signification of time also, when repeated, so that Kal in the apodosis answers to Kal in the protasis. In this case the first is rendered after that, when, and the second is not translated ;

IV.

5r?rel 7rapa\a/3e7v ra Trpay/uara, thus, Kal riKOvae AI/O-/OS, on O/AITTTTOS Kal KareffTrevae rov cnreXOelv : 1 Maccab. vi, 55 Kal elbev 'lovbas 57
,

Kal e#j\0e>>,

&c.

ibid, vii, 23.

III.

OF THE HORTATORY USE OF KAI.

I. From its signification of time or of readiness has arisen the hortatory or excitative use of <cai, as with the imperative mood, for KCU f(oi Ka\et TOV ra/ap)0)', Lysias adv. Agorat. p. 222. [p. 499' <&>; : KO.I fjioi Xeye r)v ed. Reisk.] yjoa0r/v Xa/5wv, for Xeye 5// /uot, read me now, &c. Demosth. pro Cor. p. 320. [p. 243. 1. 7. ed. Reisk.] Here the copulative force of Kal is so far preserved, that it connects what goes before with what follows by the exclusion of all delay. II. This excitative or impulsive force of Kal is observable chiefly in the commencement of abrupt questions, where it denotes also impatience for reply: thus Orestes to Pylades, who had proposed to kill Helen, Kalirws; e^ei yap fiappapovs oVaovas Eurip. Or. 1110.
:

[1 108. ed. Pors.]

Kal TTWS

varpyav yalav ov
is

awcrat 6e\io

Id. Phoeiliss.

907.

very fitly used to express wonder at what is paradoxical : el rts, says Socrates, vpq. uev rt, opq, be ovbev on which Theaetetus asks Kal TTWS why how can that possibly be? Plat. Theaetet. p. 188. (t. ii. p. 148. ed. Bip.) III. Elra, which has a similar force, is joined to Kal in this use

This form of interrogation

K$r' ov^i (pewyets

yf/s

vrrepjSaXwi' opovs

and do you not

then, &c.

Eurip. Orest. 443. IV. But sometimes /cai before a question is merely copulative; as when the question is contained in one of two propositions or affirmations connected by icai: thus, 6 KVTJUWV aTreK-povcraro, Kal, ri ravra; eXeyev. Heliodor. ^.thiop. ii, 2. where the construction is

KAI.
Or when Kal airek-povcraro Kal IXeyev. Jus, uAXa TI effTiv TO ainov, Kal ri TOVTO

85

comes between two questions

IV.

OF THE SUPERADD1TORY USE OF KAI, AND (THENCE ITS USE IN RENDERING THE MEANING OF WORDS INDETERMINATE.
DERIVED)
In this use Kal, besides being copulative, superadds something
:

I.

what has preceded. It is most frequent in the phrase ov povoy dXXa Kal, but ov JJ.OVQV dXXa is usually understood nay, there is sometimes after ov povov an ellipsis of other words also to be supplied from what has gone before as, ravrct ye ravra Kal ol Oeol ireirovdao-t, the gods too, &c. Plat. Euthyphr. p. 8. i. e. ravra ov povov ol avOptoirot (or eKelvot, the persons before spoken of,) dXXa Kal ol Oeol
to
;

treTiOvQaeri. So, el eya> Qalbpov dyvow, Kal epavTOv cntXeXrjffinai: Plat. Phaedr. p. 228. (p. 282. ed. Bip.) i. e. ei e. $. d. ov povov Qaibpov dXXa Kal ep. eir. bos be yuot avrl KaK&v Kai TI iraQelv ayadov, Theogn. 342. i. e. cifTl KaKuiv bos pot ov puvov /j.r)bev KUKOV, dXXa Kal ayadov Tt He asks for two things, to be freed from ill, and to enjoy iraQeiv. good here is the copulative force of Kai. Again, to the liberation from evil he superadds the enjoyment of good here is the superadditory force of the same particle. II. Whenever Kal is repeated in the same clause or member, it is
:

one place superadditory as, Kai pot Xeye Kal TOVTO TO ^fyifffjta Xapwi', Demosth. pro Cor. p. 324. this psephism too : for others had been read before. See also Isocr. ad Nicocl. p. 41. [p. 51. 1. 1. ed. and Kai' Kal br) Kai' Kal 666. s o in Kal &}
in
;

Kai'

a\r]6)"] ye' Kal opO&s ye' Kal iravv not merely copulative, but additory q. d. you have spoken not only truly, but admirably also. III. In this use Kal is sometimes very empliatical, and may be rendered even, especially when it superadds what is more to what is as, dXX' 'A^tXei/, less, whether the latter be expressed or understood

Battie.] Theogn. Kal uriv Kai' of which below. beginning with KCII, as Kal fia\a' Kal

yap

pr)v

Hence many

affirmative formulae

ye' in

which

Kal

is

&c. Iliad, i, 494. Tvbetbijs, os precedes in the following example it is understood vvv ye Kal av Au' Trarpi fj.a^otTO : Iliad, e, 362. underst. ov \LOVOV yud^otr' av TWV avdp&TTtov TW d^Spetordrw, dXXa Kal, &C. IV. When accompanied with negation, it may be rendered ne quidem ; as, OVTTW yvdov Kal eva civbpa bt a^ooavvY\s f.iev eTrt^eipovvTO.
; :

bauaffoi' OvfJiov Kal deol avTol,

peyav

ovbe

TI

ae

'xpr)

vrj\ees fjTOp e^etv' CTpeirTol be re Here what is less is expressed and

TOVTOV

an nondum animadvertisti quenquam, ne unum quidem hominem, qui, &c. Xen. Cyrop. iii, 1, 18."
a<f>po<rvvrjs
;

KpeiTTOVL eavrov pay^eadai, eireibav

6' fjTTrjQrj,

evdvs TreTravjuevov

Tfjs Trpos

I have given Hoogeveen's translation in Latin, that the reader may better judge whether or not he has mistaken the mean-

it

ing of the passage.

It

appears to

me

that

was not the intention of Tigranes to ask had never met wiln Cyrus, whether he even one instance of a man's acting in the manner mentioned, but whether he had

86

KAl.

V. The brevity arising from the ellipsis sometimes occasions a deKal el f} gree of obscurity ; as, el & 77 a.Trapyfi ayi'a, Kal TO tyvpaua' Rom. xi, l6. which would be fully expressed /5<c?a Ay/a, Kal ot KXacot thus : el fj a. &. ov ftovr] ai/rij ayta earlv, aXXa Kal TO <j>vpaua eaviv ayiov, &c. The full expression is in Pluto Avalov \6yov aKovtav eicelvos, ov IJLOVOV aira^ riKOvoev, aXXa /cat TroXXaas eTravaXufjfiaruv eKeXevcrtv oi He might have said more Xeyeiv: Phaedr. p. 228. (p. 282. ed. Bip.)
: :

briefly, aKovtav efcelvos, Kal TroXXaKis eTraraXauflavtov, e. o. X. VI. ws precedes ica) in its superadditory use, ovrw is

When

under-

stood before

Kat, as in
rrjs

the Lord's prayer

v ovpava), Kal enl

y^s, for ovna Kai.

TO deXrjua aov, o>s So, Kal vuels forovrw Kal vuels,

:

ye^0^rw

Acts

viii,

51.

VII. To its additory use may be referred its employment as an adjection to such relative words as 6 TL, dlov, orov, 6'Oer, &c. rendering, like cunque in Latin, the sense more indefinite as, irapetyvXaTTov, 6 .1 Kal fteibtaffete, what it could be that made him smile: Lucian. ras TWV TrpojGarwv epeas, olai Kal ficrav, (such as Lapith. t. iii. p. 428. they were, of whatever kind or quality} eiroiovv iuaTia, Kal tyopovv,
;

Palaephat. fragm. de Invent, purp. The particle &} is sometimes interjected, as, o

TI

S) Kal.

[See Abr.

of Vig.

p. 14.

1.

20.]

VIII. This use of imparting indefiniteness it seems to have, when put before rt, as in Iliad. 0, 268. CK Trora/^olo aawaac eireiTa b Kai Tt iradotui. And before aXXos, as, eyw b\ e'i-jrep Tin TOVTO Kal aXXa>
irpoarjKvvTtos e'iprjTat, voui(i) ka',ao<

vvv apfj-orreiv

elireiv

Denjosth. adv.

Timocr. p. 462. any other whomsoever. So, u^iov rat aXXuv, Kal wept rot)6e, ov vvv dveyrw, bieXdelv

be, eiirep Trepi TOV : ib. p. 468. about

any other whatsoever.

V.

OF THE ADVERSATIVE USE OF KAI.

I. When Kat is adversative, (although,} it is construed with a partiand petroi, o/iws, or some other redciple expressed or understood ditive word, is understood in the clause opposed to that in which Kal
;

is

nov

as, rct^a KCV Kal avairiov alrio^To, Iliad. X, 653. i. e. Kalirep a.vaiBut the participle is usually expressed, ovTa, flaws av airtdwro. Kal fjeua&ra uci^rjs ff^rfffeaQat dtw, Iliad, t, 65 1 . for Kaiirep
,

cr^aeardaL pevTOi, [o/zws.j

is

See
e?ri

Iliad.

/u,

17

This adversative force of Kal

pressed
ofj.i>}s
;

more manifest, when

Mort.
t. i.

as,

//oXts
:

avTifiaivovras
is

/canoVras, K'at Lucian. Dial.

o/uws is exTpa-^rjXor u>Qovvros TOV 'Ep^oi/,

Kat

adversative in jEschylus, S. c.
efjifis

field.] Kel prj TIS apxfis rijs

aKovcreTai,

p. 437 Th. 198. [180. ed. Blomfor dX\' el jjitj, but if any

one, &c.
not known an individual too, in contradistinction to a whole town, act in that manner: for the words immediately following are, vd\tv S', ?^>ij, ofarw 4cfy>a<cay
ir6\iv avTiTaTrofj.vr)v irpbs ir6\iv
fyris,

^TreiS&i'

^TTT?0?f,

TrapaxpyfJUt rainy,
;

airl rov ndx*tr6ai, ireldeffOou 6e\fi

J.S.

KAI
KAI FE, KAl FE AH.

FE,

KAl FE AH.

87

1. Kat and ye are usually separated by some other word or words but they are joined in Acts xi, 18. Their use is in superadding something of more moment to [ii, 18.] something of less not waving or setting aside the latter, as ye alone would do, but amplifying and exaggerating the whole. II. First, with Kal copulative. Menel. 'EXXqvdcovrc [rot] TOV 6fi60ev iiei. Tynd. Kat rwv vo^wv ye [jrj Trpdrepoi/ elvat OeXetv EuTtfjiipv rip. Orest. 487. [481. ed. Pors.] [yes; and what is more,&c.] q. d. what you have said is true, but this is no less true, [and of still greater
;

importance.] So, Nuncius. peiZov rt, -^pfi^ets Tralbas r) veoiovfjevovsi Joe. Kat TctTriXniTra y el KaX&s irpaaffu), K\veiv l Id. Phoeniss. 1218. When Kal is repeated in this use, ye is put after the first icai, as, KOI eXey^ov ye, Kal e7ree\ey)O' us TTOIIJTCOV IV Karrjyop/a re Kal a7roXoy/a : Plat. Phrcdr. p. 267. (p. 364. ed Bip.) III. Ft- augments the signification of alacrity or promptness which Kal has when used abruptly ; thus, on the incidental mention of something, Socrates says, Kal KaX&s ye vTrepvrjaas, I am very glad you have happened to put me in mind: Plat. Phaedr. (p. 363. ed. Bip.) IV. The augmentative and amplifying- power before spoken of is most conspicuous when Kal is suptradditory ; as in Eurip. Phceniss.

1675. where Antigone says, <rvju0ei>o/zae rub' aBXiwraTu trarpl and, Creon having commended her filial piety, but reprehended her folly, adds,Kot fyvdai'ovuai y', ws padys Trepatrepw, nay, what is more, I will even die with him, &c. V. After etTrep in the protasis, ye is sometimes omitted in the apodosis, as, eiirep Trore, Kat vvv: Demosth. Olynlh. i. p. 2. [p. 10. 1. ^.
:

ed. Reisk.] for Kal vvv ye. VI. There is also sometimes an ellipsis of etTrep Kal a\\os, as in Odyss. a, 46. Kal Xiav Kelvos ye eoicort tcelrat oXedpy, i. e. e'iircp TIS Kal

these particles is most frequently thus to Socrates's words, Karoiriv eopTrjs rJKop,ev t Callicles replies, Kal paXa ye aarelas eoprtfs, and a very elegant feast too : Plat. Gorg. [p. 303. 1. 2. ed. Bas. I.] and to the words, TOIITO TrcTreto-yuat, Simmias, Kal 6p6ws ye, and rightly too: Id. Phred. p. 109. (c. 58. ed. Fisch.) VIII. They have the same force too when affirmation of a thing is heightened by denial of the contrary ; as in the reply, Kal ovbev ye a?ro TpoTrov, Plat. Phaedr. p. 278. (p. 388. ed. Bip.) which is equivalent

aXXos, Kal eKeivos ye, &c. VII. The superadditory

in affirmative

power of
:

observable

answers

Homer's, icara jjolpav e'enras. IX. Nor does it wholly disappear, when they are put for *:ac yovv t that is, when something said is illustrated or confirmed by an example ; as in Aristopb. Vesp. 1087 P a ^eivos %v r60\ ware Travra fjirj SeSotKevai : which he proves by an example, Kal fcaretrrpe^a/u^v ye TOVS evavTiovs, and moreover truly, as a proof of my boldness, &c. X. Sometimes S>) is added. To one saying, he knew not whence Apollodorus had got the name of pavtKos, or madman, Apollodorus
Kai irepi replies, Kal ^rj\6v ye S>), ore oi/rw biavoovfj.evos Kal irepl epavrou vuwv paivonat : Plat. Sympos. p. 173. q. d. ravTijv T?IV eirtavvplav

to

88
ov fAovov ort oi/rw

KAI TAP.

, ciavoovpevov pi Qafftv patveoQat, aXXa Kal He not only assigns a reason, but superadds by tcut TOVTO bfjXov. that it is evident : this superaddition is limited by ye: and this cerThen erf confirms and supports either tainty, or at hast, is manifest. the superaddition or the limitation, or both.

1. In xal yap, for, the TAP, with the annexed particles. latter particle is to be considered as compounded of ye and opa. Thus in this sentence, Treidap^lffOat eel rots VTTO TOV XpiorovTrpoorerayjieVots* the two propositions are connected by Kal ; Kal yap effTi erw7//p

KAI

--

fyuw)',

ye limits or restricts the latter, he is certainly, or at least, our Saviour ; and, lastly, apa indicates the congruity between the two propositions, See what has been already or the justness of the conclusion drawn. Or the meaning of the particles may be acsaid of pa and yap. counted for by supposing an ellipsis of aXXo troi epw after Kal. These words actually occur in Xenophon's Cyrop. eyw be TOVS <j>i\ovs TT\OV~ aiovs Trotwv, TOVTOVS JJLOI vojJiiZu) Oijaavpovs, Kal 0vXaicas epov re Kal T&V
T]fjieTep(i)v
fjtrjv.

et <j>povpovs fjttcrdotyopovs eVeoTJjaxiayaQuv Triarorepovs elvat Kai aXXo be ffot eput" eyw yap, &c. viii, 2, lp. Hence K-at yap
}

is

rendered simply for. See Plato Phaidr. p. 25?. (344. ed. Bip.) p. 275. (382. ed. Bip.) Aristoph. Vesp. 26p. and so in almost every page of Greek authors.
II.
TTpiv

Other words sometimes intervene ; as, btboiK eywye* Kal TO yap e<c \6yiav Ka\&v KaKws eirpafa, Sophocl. Philoct. 126l.

[1268. ed. Br.] III. Kai yap is used in the same elliptical manner as yap alone. See Fop, I, iii. Thus to a remark that certain fables about the Gods ought not to be made public, but told 5t' aTropp^rwv, the reply is feat yap ovroi ye ol \6yoi ^aXeTrot, in truth, or for in truth, &c. Plato de Rep. ii. p. 3?8. (t. vi. p. 248. ed. Bip.) understand, from what preSometimes the ellipsis is cedes, bt aTTOpp^rwv &e~i rotavra Xeyeffflai. to be supplied, not with any preceding words, but by something exThus to the Armenian's reason for his rebellion, KaXov trinsical. eboKei pot elvat Kal avrov e\ev6epov elrat, Kal irately e\ev6epiav KO.TUXtTrelv, Cyrus replies, Kal yap ean KaXov /na^eadai OTTUS piirore ns bovXos /iteXXoi yevr/cre<70at Xenoph. Cyrop. iii, ] , 10. underst. Ka\ws
:

eltras, Kal

yap, &c. And so in affirmative answers, Kal yap eari TOVTO, Kal opO&s yap, Kal yap et/cos, and the like. IV. When Kal follows Kal yap in a distinct member of a sentence, the first Kal rather answers to the second, making a polysyndeton, than connects the reason given by yap with what precedes; especially when some other word intervenes between Kal and yap : as in the words of Pylades giving a twofold reason for his unwillingness to survive Orestes, cat avyKareKTavov yap' OVK aprrjffofiac Kal TTCLVT e/3ooAev<r', wv av vvv Ttveis biKas : Eurip. Orest. 1089. [1087. ed. Pors.] V. In this combination too, Kal is sometimes superadditory ; with ar* ellipsis of ov povov and of some preceding word : thus, Socr. olei OVV TlVa T&V TOIOVTWV, OffTIS Kttl OKliMTTlOVV bvffVOVS Al/fTta, 6vlbt$tV avTO, OTI avyypa(j>t ; Phacdr. OVKOVV CIKOS ye e^ wv av Xeyeis* Kal yap av Trj avTOv eiriOvfJiia, MS eotfcev, 6vib(ot : Plat. Phaedr. p. 258. (p.

KAI TAP.
.

89

The full 346. ed. Bip.)/or he would tax his own propensity too expression would be, ov yap ^6vov nj TOV Awn'ov, dXXa Kat Trj avrov So in p. 231. also, (289. 'Bip.) ex-idvfjiia. VI. When superadditory, Kat yap sometimes expresses indignation interrogatively ; as, Kai av yap ^Qiyyy, Kadappa ; and you too, miscreant, do you open your mouth forsooth? Lucian. Lapith. t. iii. p. 445. Here Kal signifies also, and yap is to be resolved into ye apa. See those particles. VII. Sometimes yap appears to be understood ; as in 1 John i, 1.
rijs ^wfjs' Kal (for Kal yap} r/ c?wj) 6 irotutv auapTiai', Kal TIJV avofAiav iroiel' Kal % auapTia kaT\v f] avofjila : ibid, iii, 4. Although indeed such passages may be referred to the interpretative or explanatory use of KCU.

2.

o aKrjKoafiev
.

Trepi

TOV \6yr;v

etyavepwOri,

So,

TTO.S

VIII. To Kal yap is added /}, either in its signification of time, or corroborative, or inceptive. [See on A>), p. 42. ii. p. 44. i. p. 46. i.] In Aristoph. Vesp. 1475. [1483. ed. Br.] it is doubtful which : in the
it may have either of those three significations ; [Phil. . Xantll. ua\Xov K\rjOpa ^aXaffdai raSe'] Kai yap &t] a^uaros apx/i 5e y 'taws /zai/t'as ap-^r}. ibid. [1484. ed. Br.] either now, or truly, or now then ! And with the order inverted : eyw citropaf Kal &tj yap

following

lyw KXewv, ibid. 1219. [1224. ed. Br.] IX. When a second superadditory KCU is subjoined to Kal yap 5)), [an assertion or] proof receives new force and corroboration from the contrary opposed to it; as in the words of Planudes, who, after saying that the deformity and natural defects of jEsop subjected him to slavery, adds, cat yap 6?) Kal Qavpa. av i'ji', el ovrws OTOTTWS e-^ovn TOV ffujjuaros eey<Vero ras TWV &ovXovvT(i)v apKvs 5ta0uye7j j^sop. Vit.
el/z'
/
'.

for in truth it would have been even a wonder, &c. [The preceding words are, a iravTa. Kal boKel Tr\v bov\etav Ato-wTrw irapaaKevaffai, p. 10. ed. Genev. 1628. There is no vestige of the Greek idiom in La Fontaine's French, " Avec ces defauts, quand il n' auroit pas ete de
p. 6.

condition a X. Et or
Kal

tre esclave,
etTrep is

il

ne pouvoit

manquerde

le

devenir."]
'

added

yap et eoTavp&dr} i for though he was crucified through weakness, yet, &c. 2 Corinth, xiii, 4. Tap is ratiocinative, i concedes an objection, and icai is superadXI. Kat following Kal yap, for, is always superadditory ; as in the words of St. Paul following those above cited, Kat yap Kat ?/jue!s aa6evovfjtev ev avTy, aXXa ZrjffOfJieOa avv avrw CK Svra/zews Qeov, &C,for we also are weak in him,&c.
XII. In Kat yap ovv the two last particles have the force before explained, [see pp. 30. 31. iii. iv. v.] and Kat either connects or superadds ; as, Kal yap ovv TO. ye Xeyo/^eva raura, Plat, de Rep. vi. p. 495. 1. 27and rightly in truth ; for certainly (t. vii. p. 92. ed. Bip.) these are the things that are said; therefore you have truly mentioned them as such. XIII. Kat yap pa is poetical only : TTO\V /3ovXo/zat avrryv otKOi ej^etV

to KCU yap, not affecting yap but Kai CK bvvapcus 0eoC : avdei'eias, aXXa fj

as,

ditory.

Kal
113.

yap pa
Kai
is

KXi/raip/ijorrpjjs 7rpo/3e/3oi/Xa

Kovptbirjs aXoftov

Iliad, a,
;

copulative, connecting the

first

member

with the second

Hoog.

SO
for

KAI AH, &c.

what is expressed in the first member, and yap assigns a reason that reason is Agamemnon's preference of Chryseis to Clytaemnestra; for apa) signifies the effect or consequence lastly pa (by aphseresis,
of Chryseis's superiority, (eTret ov edev earl xepetW,) which was Agamemnon's preference of her. XIV. Tot also is added to cat yap, and then MU is either superadditory or copulative, ye limits, apa notes effect, and rot confirms : as,

eyvw

ovbevl

Kal yap rot ovyl ry Kvpiy rwv irpaypaTtov bebwK&s' "^pypuTa TOV \onrov : Demostll. de fals. Leg. p. 218. [Abr. of Vig. p. 196. note a.] XV. But most commonly yap in cat yap rot retains its causal force,
TYIV Ttptjv

7ru7rore e&w/ce

It is affected by it when either affecting rot, or being affected by it. rot corroborates the reason introduced by yap, as, paprvpas rfjs avrtiv

apery's

eyyvs ovras Tovbe TOV pvyparos rovs A.aKebatpovlbiv ra^ovs irape.

^ovraf KUI yap rot peyaXyv O.VTI piKpas anebeifav Tyv TroXtv, bp,ovoovaav fa avrl aTa<naovffi)s aTttyyvav : for in truth Lysias Orat. Funebr. p. 51 6. So, rtva epeiopev oVetpoTroAov KUI yap T ovap etc Atos eoriv Iliad, a, 63. On the other hand yap affects rot, when it introduces an argument or proof in support of the confirmation or asseveration expressed by rot, as, the ancient Athenians thought, says
:

Lysias, drjptwv pkv epyov etvai VTT aXXr/Awv /3/a KparelffQaC av0pu/7rots ^e irpoffrjKetv vopy pet* opiffai TO biKaiov, \6yy be 7rct<ra(, epyw b& TOVTOIS VTTO Xoyoi/ be bibacrKOfJievois. inrrjpeTe'ii', virb vofjiov pev /3a<7tXevo/zevots,
Kal

yap

rot KUI <j)vv-es

davfjLaara ol Trpoyovot TWV ei'dabe Ketuevwv etpya<ravro,

Ka\ws, Kal yrovres o/^ota, TroXXa p.ev k'aXa *cat &c. and indeed,
Kat' rot

or yes indeed, for, &c. Lysias Or. Fun. p. 498. XVI. For Kat yap rot, Lysias has <cat rot yap :
juei/

yap ayfjpaTOt

avroiv at pinjuat,

&c. Or. Fun. p. 522.

1.

KAI AH, KAI AH KAI, KAI AH OTN.

first

Kai and f)

are

combined as that each preserves and now. So Iliad, a, l6l.

so
II.

its

proper and primary sense,

superadditory force of icat is evident, when Kat bfj signifies immediately, at once : e.g. beivov, ical yo??ra, cai ao(j)tffT^v, Kal TO. Totavra 6yof.ia^a)v eue, ws, lav Trporepos rts etTrot ra rrpoffdyfi' eavrw ?rept Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 318. 1. 3. aXXov, if at bfj rai)0' oi/rws e-^ovTa ed. Reisk.] q. d. as if the truth of the imputations could be established not only by argument well or ill founded, but even at once from the mere circumstance of their being cast first upon another by one
:

The

liable to

them

himself.

III. In the following passage Kal signifies readiness,

and

S>)

is

hor-

dXX', tva pi) TroXXa rotavra Xeywv Troppw TOV Kaipov yevw/tat, Trupets a-rrav TO peaov, Kal brj irpbs avra ra Kvpia TOV Xoyov Tpe^opat : [now then; come then ;] Aristid. Panath. So Jocasta, invited by

tatory

Polynices to question him freely, begins with, <cat by a epwrw, Eurip. Phoeniss. 390. IV. Kat by serves for confirmation of a position or assertion, when one proceeds to specification of what has been more generally mentioned ; as, offa pet? ovv e^^/t/^drara rwv oaruiv^v, oXtyt'orats ^u'0parre a b* d^v^drara, evrbs TrXeiffrais Kal vvKVOTUTats. Kal by [and

KAI AH,
6'0,

&c.
jui?

91
rt^a
ai'uyKTjv 6 Xoyos

trull/,]

Kara ras

i>/u/3oXas

rwv

o/rrw*', ^TTTJ

Plat. Tim. p. 74. aTre^aive 5e<v avras etrat, /3jOa^e7av trap^a ecpvaev I although here too *at 6/} may have some sense of readiness and self-

adhortation. V. In this use

otKelov e/caorw

KCLI

and

5>)

are sometimes separated

as,

ro

yap

Kpariarov Kal ifiiarov ea& eKaora). Tliis is general ; then specifically with asseveration, KUI rw cuflpwrrw di) o Kara rov voi/v /3/os, etTrep yuaXtora rovro aVflpwTros : Aristot. Eth. X, /
rfj tyvffei,

VI. So } in its confirmatory use is separated from Kal Kal fjue'is Plat. Theaetet. p. 188. (t. ii. p. Trpos ravra <//o-<tyie)', orav ye, &c. 148. ed. Bip.) VII. They are separated too when indicative of the arrival of discourse at the proposed or main point, after introduction thus, after explaining some circumstances of the story of Orithyia, Plato adds, Kal OVTM b)} reXevrfjffaaav Xe^/flj/vai VTTO roD Bopeoy avapiraaTov yeyovkvai and thus it was that, &c. Phsedr. p. 229- (P- 285. ed. Bip.) VIII. In Kal $} Kal the first Kal is copulative, and the second superadditory. The particles so joined are used, firstly, when after mention of other things, something is added which the aim or tendency of the discourse requires, or when one of several things is more particularly urged and insisted on. Thus Adimantus, discussing with Socrates the question whether the guards should possess gold and silver, says they ought not to be without advantages, when the other citizens possess lands, houses, furniture; and proceeds, cat 6/} cat, & vvv
:

brj

/} eXeyes, ^pvow re Kal apyvpov KKTT]UVOI,&;C. and moreover, to come to the point in question, &c. Plat.de Rep. iv. (t. vi. p. 326. ed. Bip.)

So Socrates, speaking of the invention of

letters,

says that

Theuth

Trpwrov aptdfjioi' re Kal Xoyurpov tvpelv, Kal yew^erp/ai>, Kal a<JTpovo}.dav, eri be TTCTreias re Kal Kvfieias, Kal bt) Kal ypapp-ara : and moreover

the subject of our present discourse, letters: Plat. Phaedr. p. 274. (p. See Abr. of Vig. p. 184. 379- ed. Bip.) [p. 213. 1. 1. in ed. Bas. 1.
in hastening to a conclusion after refutation of objections; and as this involves some alacrity, the particles have a hortatory sense. Thus after refutation of the objections against the happiness of the life proposed for the guards, Kal bri Kal vvv jar) avayKage
///was

note /.] IX. Secondly,

Toiavrrjv
f/

vbaifj.oviav rols
(j>v\aKas
:

a7repyac?era(,
(t. vi.

0vXat TrpoiraTTTetv, eKeivovs TTCLV /uaAXov and now then, &c. Plat, de Rep. iv. p. 420.
/
:

p. 328. ed. Bip.)

X. Thirdly, in the apodosis of similes thus jEschines says that Demosthenes likens him to the Sirens, Kal yap VTT' cKelvwv ov KrjXeladai Kal bij Kal TWV euwv (JHjaiv rovs aKpoajfierovSj dXX' air6\\vaQai Xoytuv eunetpictv, Kal ri)v (frvaiv /nov yeyevrjedat em fiXufirjv TWV UKOVOVTWV: c. Ctesiph. p. 306. [and in the same manner forsooth, that my rhetorical skill, &c. p. 621. 1. 1. ed. Reisk.] XI. Fourthly, in transition from a thesis, or general position, to a
.

thus in Plato's Phaedrus, after this hypothesis or particular case thesis, the sayings of wise men are not to be rejected, but what they say is to be well weighed and considered, the hypothesis follows
:

92

KAI

MAA A,
:

&c.

KAl MEN,

&c.

KAI MHN, &c.

and consequently

in ihese

words

therefore,

effect, ovv beginning and applying. Plato might have said KCU bfj ovv KCU TO vvv Xe^dev, &e. for he has used these particles in applying to Lysias in particular an observation which he had before made more generally Kal bfi ovv /ioi eboe bis Kal Tpls TO. avTa eiprtKevat, &c. Pliaedr. p. 235. (p. 295. ed. Bip.)
:

what XII. Kcu bf) ovv has the same

bfj KOI TO vvv \c-^6h OVK atftereov, has now been said too, &c. p. 260.

Kal

A FE. 1. In *ca< ud\a, Kalis always superadditory, and ^m\a intends or heightens what has been said. The particles are used chiefly in affirmative answers thus, Socr. and exceedingly too: irevQei avros re Kal ol ereupot. Phredr. Kal ua\a
KAI MAAA, KAI
:

MAA

--

Plat. Pliaedr. p. 258. (p. 346. ed. Bip.) i. e. ov irevQei otTrXws /jovov, ctXXa Kal /uaXa TTiKpws. So, ajjfiXvioTTOVffi re Kal eyyvs cpaivovTai TvtyXwv, Kal /uaXa, etyj/. Id. de Rep. vi. hxrTTfp OVK evovffqs Kadapas o^/ews. p. 508. (t. vii. p. lip. ed. Bip.) II. If the affirmation of Kal juaXa
is is

to

be restricted or limited, ye
Call. KCU ^ctXa

added
:

as, KaTOKiv eoprfjs

rJKOfjiev

Kal vaTepovpev.

ye

Id. in

Gorg.

III. In continued discourse pa\a affects a following word instead of the preceding Kal ; and sometimes even in affirmative answers : thus to the words of Socrates, o uev us ry epwrt, 6 6' ws ry fify, ^et XapiZeaOatj eXeytrriv, Phaedrus replies, Kal jzaX' avbpttftis, and very manfully too : Plat. Phaedr. p. 265. (36u. ed. Bip.) where Kal is super-

additory, for
signification

oj*'

f.i6vov ctXXrt Kal,

and /uaXa intends or augments the

1. The commencing a speech or composition, but when Kal is prefixed, it is either or some principal part of it copulative, connecting something new and weighty with what pre-

KAI MEN, KAI MEN AH, KAI MEN AH KAI.

in
;

particles pev 5) are used

cedes or incitative, either of the speaker or writer himself, or of the hearer or reader : thus in the introduction of a fresh argument in Plato's Phaedrus, KCU pev &), el fiev CK T&V epwvrwy TOV /3eXrrel & CK rwv aXXwv, Toy TOV alpolo, e dXiywv av aot fj K\%is e'irf ravra> eTrtTrfbetoTUTov, CK TTO\\(JJV : and again too ; and moreover ; and besides; p. 231. (p. 290. ed.Bip.)q.d. come now, let us consider So in p. 232. Kal JJ.GV brj T&V epwvrwv TroXXoi irporepov this also t &C. TOV awuaTOS Tre(fvfif}6r)ffav, rj TOV Tpoirov eywaav.
;

and the II. When Kal is added to Kal pkv by, it is superadditory whole may be rendered, and moreover ; as, irpwTrjKal TOVS vouovs edero, Kal TToXireiav KaTearfjaaTO, &c. After this has been proved, is added,
;

TWV re^yHJv TO.S uev evpovtra, irapebwKc i Isocr. Paneg. p. 94. (p. 293. ed. Bip.)
teal f*ev brj

Kal

TCIS

be boKipaffaffa, xpfiffdat

TO'IS XotTroIs

So Plato Phiedr.

p. 233.

KAI MHN, KAI

xal PT}V, Kal is

piv

is

1. In HOY KAI. KAI, KAI sometimes copulative, sometimes superadditory ; and affirmative. When Kal is copulative, the whole may be rendered

MHN

MHN

--

KAI MHN,
and
truly KqyaOols avTiTaTTrjTat' Kal pfjv
II.
;

&c.
eai>

93
jcaXoTs

as, eruyujua^wv

bei'ifferat,

Kal roi/rwv irXetoFwv,

ol

ovppayziv edeXovTes
p. 752.

evTrotjjreoi,

tva

6e\(i>ffnrpodvne~tadai:

Xenoph. Mera.ii.

superadditory in Aristoph. Vesp. 519. Phil. Kal TOVTOHTI 0eXw. Bdel. Kal priv eyw : and truly I also ; and in Euripides too perhaps, Phceniss. 707* is rendered, moreover: as, Kal III. Hence Kal pr)v TavraXov elaeibor, &c. Odyss. X, 592. [581.] and so in v. 592. IV. In these significations a twofold use of the particles is to be observed, not without asseveration. The first is when something new is introduced, and then they are rendered at in Latin. Thus in Aristoph. Vesp. 859. [863. ed. Br.] the chorus having heard orders
is

Kru

eTrirpe^/cu

^v

given for bringing several things, says, KOI /*?)' ridels t?rt rals axovba'is Kal rats ev-^als ffjftqv aya6)]v Xe^opev vfjfiv [but we too ; and as to US, we will, &c.] See Euclid, in Optic, p. 603. And especially when something not only new but unexpected is introduced as, eyeXao-are, w KaOdp/jiaTa, el TTJ vv/jityr] TrpovTrirov e?rl TOV rfyuerepov Oeov 'Hpa/cXeovs Kal fjiriv ev elbevat xprft ^> pi Xaftp Trap' ep.ov TOV (TKvfyov, &C. [and yet I would have you know, &c.] Lucian. Lapith. t. iii. p. 430. V. Of this sense of new accession the dramatic writers have eagerly availed themselves in announcing the unexpected appearance of a fresh person, and this is the second use alluded to above ; as, KOI p^v yeporri bevp' apiXXdrat Trobt 6 ^TraprmrT/s Tvv^apews, &C. Eurip. Orest. So v. 1503. [1517. Pors.] 456. [450. ed. Pors.] VI. From this signification of something new and unexpected, arises its use in abrupt commencement of speech or writing: thus Lucian begins his piece Adv. Indoct. with Kal p]v evavriov karlv ov edeXets,
'.

',

VII. Sometimes the new matter introduced by Kal p}v consists of an objection or exception ; which any one who urges wishes of course to strengthen, and this is done by the affirmative force of pi]v thus Creon offers this objection to risking an engagement, Kal firjv TO VIK^LV earn TTO.V cvfiuvXia: Eurip. Phceniss. 728. VIII. As Kal is expressive of alacrity, and fiy}v of asseveration, KCU is /*?}' fitly used by persons entering on the commencement of a subject ; thus Pha?drus, beginning to repeat what Socrates wished to Plat. Phsedr. hear, Kal firjv, w Swrpares, irpoarjKOvaa yi aoi t] aKor} So Aristoph. Vesp. 546. [548. ed. Br.] IX. Also for instigation aye vvv, aye TTUS* Kal fj.fjf vpov Vrtv, vvv a^w/iev, &c. Aristoph. Pac. 512. [why, I tell you >}' eyyvs. ] ^uj) X. Also in threats, which it enforces by asseveration ; as, Kal p)v
: : :

Trpoo-eXOerw Trpos

efj.'

vfj.aiv

evOabl 6 /3ovXoyueros, [hark ye

mark me

:]

Aristoph. Plut. 929.

XL

Sometimes
fj.rjv

as, Kal

Kal, always superadditory, is subjoined to Kal pr^v, Kal OTL Truarjs avrijs, Kal ovre apiKpov, OVTC /ie/5ovos, oi/re rtvi.

fjnitirepov,

OVTC uTifuoTepov fjepovs

Plat, de

Rep.

p. 485.
is

The

latter Kal

CKUVTCS afyievTai p. 71. ed. Bip.) often separated from Kal ^y,
(t. vi.

and moreover, &c.

and
in

that case

it

sometimes belongs
aXXrjs alffxyvrjs,

to a different clause

as, Kal p)v,

on

-^wpls

Tfjs

cat /xeyaXot ttivbvvoi

Trepteffrderiy

rhv vroXtr, pybtov

94
:

KAI NYN.
Se7ai, on,

KAII1EP.
fifty

Demosth. de Fals. Leg. p. 211. The construction is, Kal x w P' s alayyvYis, /cat pey. KtVS. greflf dangers

too,

7T. 7. 7T.

XII. Kai fj^ijv TTOV Kal is used by persons suspending, or affecting to suspend, their assertions on the assent of others ; as, Kal /LO/I/ nov Kal robe be? aKOireiv, orav Kpiveiv fjieXXys (ftvatv 0tAd<ro0ov re Kal pf) l Plat. de Rep. vi. p. 485. (t. vii. p. 53. ed. Bip.) Keu is copulative, nn v assertory, TTOV diminishes or softens the assertion, and the last Kal is superadditory : again, I may certainly assume, I think, that this also
is to be

considered, &c.

of the particles in this combination has separate and usual signification, and now, as in Acts xvi, 37. but other uses are to be noticed ; and in general they mark transition from previous matter to the main point or scope of discourse, as in Acts xx, 22. and 25.
often
its

KAI NYN. -- 1. Each

II. And more particularly transition from motives urged for granting a petition to the petition itself; as in 2 Maccab. xv, 22. III. Hence KOI vvv is used in conclusions, as in St. John xvii, 5.

So Acts xiii, 11. account of the aversion to delay indicated in some of its uses, it becomes hortatory or significative of urgency, with the imperative mood, especially when /cat is considered as protreplic ; but it follows and Thus Menelaus, depends on something introductory. after mentioning among other things, that he had just heard of the murder of Clytaemnestra, says, Kal vvv OTTOV Vrtv, eiTrar', a* veavtbes, 'Ayapejuvovos TTCUS, os ra beiv erXrj KaKa: Eurip. Or. 375. [369- ed. Pors.] and now then tell me, &c. V. Sometimes Kal vvv is both illative and hortatory as, Kal vvv
therefore.

now

IV.

On

TOVS l^eorwras iroXeuiovs eK

rijs x<*>pas a7ro7re/*7ra>/*er,

now

therefore,&c.

Thucyd.

iv,

63.

So Acts
1.

vii,

34.

of Kaiirep is quamquam, cat and being superadditory, nep rendering meaning less determinate whence Kaiirep augments a preceding affirmation or negation by in:

KAII1EP.

--

The proper power

definite

magnitude

Xpi'lfftjjios,

KatTrep npos

vpos TO.VT ovv Evtypalos crot yiyvotr ov% rjKiffra av a\\a uv avbpelos : Plat. Epist. v. although in-

deed, Sfc.
II.

From

this sense arises its adversative use: as, rov re

yap xwptov

TO bvae/jfiarov fipfrepov vofjLt^, o IJLZVOVTWV fi^ur (ippu^pt" yiyveraf ear at prfbevos KwXvovros : VTTO^tjjpyjffatTt be t Kainep -%a\Tr6v ov, eviropov Thucyd. iv, 10. but perhaps the adversative particle is in reality 6'^ws understood : Kaiirep ^aXeTrov ov, opus evnopov carat. So, werre Kal

TOV "Epjuwva, KatTTfp kv KaKols ovra,

papTvpeffdat. See also

avTiftapTvpeadai,

for

ofjuas

avri-

This
/3ois

ellipsis is

where fyadev is for opus supplied by Demosthenes; eKaerrov v/ioir, Kaiirep

Hebr.
v, 8.
:

eibora,

o^iais eTravafjirijffai j3ov\ofjtat

Philipp.

ii.

poets are fond of disjoining these particles by interposing some other word as Horn. II. a, 217. Kal ftdXa Trep 6vp<j> Ke^oX^fjiivov. So i. 623. And with opus added Kyyw a iKvov^ai, Kal yvvi) irtp ova,
III.
; :

The

KAI TAYTA.
:

95

With an adverb, KCU oi//e Eurip. Or. 679* [672. ed. Pors.] Homer has disjoined ihem even without necessity, c, 247. II. c, 135. 1. of on), which is IV. A threefold ellipsis is to be observed:
Iliad,

peculiar to poetry
II.

; as, TOIS b' OVTL bvv^creai, a^vvfievos Trep, y^paiar/jieiv : 2. of vrep, as, ffvv orot, Kal KUKOS uv, a, 241. for Kaiirep a-^vvuevos. 3. of both yiyvopai evdXbs avijp : Theogn. 1114. for Kaiirep KUKOS wv.

particles ; as, ovbev biafyepei bovXov, Kvpios for Kainep wv.

iravrwv wv

Galat.

iv,

ration

1. Ka< ravra serves for aggravation or exaggesomething preceding it: [in English, and too ; and that : in Latin prtesertim. See notes m and n on p. 63. of the Abr. of Vig.] Sometimes TTOICW is understood ; as, ov be pot boKels ov Trpotre^etv TOV vovv rovrots, Kal ravra (Trotels) crotyos aJj/, and that too notwithstanding that you are wise : Plato Gorg. p. 508. (t. iv. p. 132. ed. Bip.) This ellipsis is supplied by Demosthenes, who, having reproached Apollodorus with indulging in licentious amours, adds, Kal ravra yvvalKa eyiav iroiels, pro Phorm. p. 605. Sometimes Trtiff^w, as, fiovos eyw trot a/jiotpos, Kal ravra ev yetrovwv olxOJv : Luciau. La pith. t. iii. p. 435. for Kal ravra Traa^w. So, Karatyayelv yap OVK Aristoph. Plut. 117^. e^w, Kal ravra TOV 2wri/pos iepevs TOV Aios Sometimes some other foregoing verb is to be understood ; as, ravra TraVra, a0' <J>> /zaXiora 5e7, eTrttrrarai 0uXarrea0at, Kal ravra els ovSei'os bibavKaXov TrwTrore (potTrjiravra Xeu. Cyrop. ii, 3, 9* [underst. eTrtV-

KAI TAYTA.
of

rarai 0.] ov yap olba irpoffTV^uv TOIOVT^ KaAAet, vroXXas Kal raiJra, Kal OVK etyvpovs afypaXuTovs rjprjKws I Heliodor. v, 20. for Kal ravra OVK olba. Here it is put after ?roXXas instead of before it in the usual manner, vvvl yap, o travres eOpyXXelre, ws 'QXvvdiovs eKTroXepuicrai Set
^iX/TTTr^,

yeyovev avrojimrov, Kal ravra tJs av vfjuv fj.a\iffTa avftfyepoi : i. p. 2. Here not only yeyovev is understood, but ov'rtus also, the amplification or augmentation expressed by icat ravra being taken from the manner in which the event had happened ; Kal ravra yeyovev ovrws, ws, &c. See also Demosth. Epist. iii. [p. 1485.

Demosth. Olynth.

1.

18. ed. Reisk.]

II.

Sometimes no verb can well be understood ; and ravra appears drop the nature of a pronoun, and assume that of a particle; as, ft yap evbaip.6v y i] fjiaKaptOTOv /uaXXov vvv eari btKaoTOv, r; rpv^epwreri pov, >} beivoTepov 5aiov, Kal ravra yepovTOs Aristoph. Vesp. 549. TOVTO Koprj eVoTrXos says Vulcan, when he has laid open Jupiter's hrad f-teya, w Zev, KOKOV el^es ev ry KetyaXy' CIKOTWS yovv otydvpos
to
; ;
;

TrXoi'

i^woyoi'w^, Kal ravra evoLucian. Dial. Vulc. and Jov. t. i. o^' evos eyeviiQriaa.v, Kal ravra veveKpufAevov, and him too become dead, *ca0ws ra aorpa rov ovpavov r^TrX^Qet, &c. Hebr. xi, 12. It might be rendered, although become dead; but the latter sense would be less forcible and enerKat ravra is found, but rarely, after the participle ; as, getic. Aristid. pro Quatuorv. YleptKXeovs be OVK tyeierw, TedvrjKoros Kal ravra p. 504. for Kal Tavia reOvrjxoros. III. The nature of a pronoun is sometimes so obviously retained,
/yrfja,

TTjXtKavTrjv VTTO T)jv [Aijviyya irapdevov

96
that

KAI TI

&c.

KAITOI, &c.

it is varied by cases; [and by genders and numbers also. Sec Abr. of Vig. p. 63. 1. 27] as, OVTOI yap povvoi 'Iwvuv OVK fiyovcri 'AiraHerodot. i, 147. for <cat Tovpia, Kal OVTOI Kara <f>6vov nva OK^IV
:

OVTOI OVK ayovcrt 'ATrarovpta.

1. Kat ri is used in sudden something on which one has been dwelling to somewhat of more moment, or more in point; as, Kal ri ffoi TOV 'Op0ea % os rov 'ETTITOV Neayflov Xeyw, OTTOV Kal Ka0' ?//ias avrovs eyevero rts, KTTJTOV Xv^vot', Kepa^ueovv 6Vra, rpia^L\i(t>v bpaxjAwv eVptaro ; Lucian. adv. Indoct. t. iii. p. ill. and why should I mention Orpheus, fyc.

KAI

TI

KAI

TI,

KAI TI KAI.

--

transition from

(after
II.

mentioning them.)

But

rt enclitic

diminishes the superadditory force of cat, as,

ev o'Xtywp/a CTrotovVro, ws ov% vTropevovvrns otyas, fj pabius Xrj^/ofjieroi /J/^. Kai TI avrovs 6 orparos, en kv rats 'Adrjvais u>v, cnta^e'. and moreover in some measure, &c. Thucyd. iv, 5. IIL A second superadditory /cat is subjoined, the force of which
is

weakened by

rt,

as, KareffeiaOrj TO ret^os etrl fteya, Kai TI Kal Karij-

small porii, 22. and moreover some tion also, &c. IV. Some other diminuent word is sometimes added ; 6\iyov e. g. j3pa\v, or the like; as, Kai TI Kal Xa\KtStit6v en /3/>a^v, Thucyd. iv,
petydrj

avTov: Arrian. Exp. Al.

1. The first and preKAITOI, KAITOIFE, 7 KAITOI KAI. It is used, when valent signification of icot rot is, and truly. something follows worthy of fresh attention as, Kot'roe av yuev Suo j} rpia (/3</3\t'a) Trap avrwi^ ekeivwv (the booksellers) Trptaftevos e^ets* ol te VVKTVP KO.\ jueO' fyuepav 5ta ^etjoos e^ovffiv avra, Lucian. adv. Indoct. t. iii. p. 111. II. In introducing some new accession to argument by way of corthus Cyrus, after persuading Cyaxares to be the aggressor, roboration and attack the enemy in order to daunt them, adds, Kafaot, eirt eKeivovs per 0o/3epwre/oot/s Trotr/o-o/^ev, f^as 6e avrovs 6appa\e<t)Tpovs , TTO\V TOVTO fjfjuv eyw 7r\eo'e<cn;//a vojitt^w I Xen. Cyrop. iii, 3, 19 ond truly ; or besides, [now ; but ;] thus HermoIII. In pressing an argument in support of advice crates, after advising the states of Sicily which were at variance, to consult in common, adds, Kairoi yv&vat xjpv* Tt ^ 7re)^ r vvobos effTat, aXA.' el TTi^ov\evop.evr]v fjiovov, el ffwfypovovnev, f} naffav 2tKe\/av, ws eyw Kplvti), VTT' 'A.6rjvaiwv bwrjorofjieOa en bi Thucyd. iv, 60. and indeed. [It seems rather to introduce a qualification of the advice already given, or an addition to it but then.] IV. When what has been said is supported by examples or instances, KatYot performs the office of yovv. Thus in Aristophanes the priest of Jupiter says, he has nothing to eat, because no one sacrifices ; and the reason being inquired, he replies, on TTUVTCS etVt -rrXovo-tot, which reason he comfirms by example, KOITOI rore, 6V
; : : ;

--

fjtev

CLV ijKwv

^fnropos eQvcrev tepetoy

crwdels,

&c. Plut.

KAITOI, &c.
I

97

Opposition seems rather ad nothing, &c.]

to be intended here,

AND

YET, when they

V. It serves for conclusion or peroration thus in the Plutus of Aristophanes, Poverty, after recounting the privations which must be endured, if all were rich, adds, nairot TL vXeov TrXovrelv eort, TTO.VTWV TOVTUV airopovvras ; 531. [and yet; or but now.] Kalrot rovro e<m Plat. Apol. Socr. p. 27. TraigovTos VI. It is used in conclusion also, when that conclusion is not so much in words as in acts thus Ulysses desists with the following words from endeavouring to dissuade Neoptolemus from restoring Philoctetes his arms; itatrot a* ea<rw [however I will have done with you,] T$ be ovpTravTi (rrpary Xew rdc' eXOuv, 6s are ri/uwpTyfferai Sophocl. Philoct. 1250. [1257. ed. Br.] VII. It is used in meeting an objection which is understood : thus Hermocrates advises the Sicilians not to bring the Athenians as allies into Sicily; and adds, /catYot eavrwv e/cdorovs, el ffw^pofovpev, j^pj) ra rjjf ra erotpa fiXcnrrovTas, ^uppa^ovs IJLYI irpoariKovra. eVi/crwjueVovs juaXXoj/, T 7rayeff0at, /cat TOVS Kivbvvovs irpocrXapfiavetv Thucyd. iv, 6l. The objection here anticipated is, and are allies of no advantage then,
: : : : } :

although one's enemy be superior? to which it is replied, yes, they may sometimes be of service, but yet, &c. So, bta<f>6etpetv avrov fyrj epe' KatTot ovTk) KaXos Kqyados i\v eKelvos, <Js KQI, &c. Xen. Cyrop. iii, 1, 38. [and yet.] After Kcu'roi underst. oVws/u)) evrtXey^s, on biKata apa TceirovOev. The ellipsis is supplied by Lucian Kcu'roi, OTTWS /i>) es
:

Keivriv 6^77$ KarcKpevyeiv TJJV a.iro\oyia.v vcrrepov, eTrtXaOeoQcu \eyu)v kv roffovry Oopvfiy /cat Trpay/^cm, bis ae r^epov Trpocrjjyopei/fca : Lapith. t.
iii.

p. 436.

It is used in introducing a concluding argument; [of such weight as to supersede the necessity of foregoing ones.] Thus Cupid, after defending himself against the charges of Venus, adds, /ca/rot ri eyw a&iKuf, beutvvs ra fcaXa, ola eariv v^tis be p.fj efyieade TWV KaXuV Lucian. dial. Ven. et Cupid, t. 1. pr) Toivvv eyue atTidade TOVTWV [p. 146. D. ed. Salmur. KatVoi here signifies, but ajttr all.] IX. Kamu sometimes urges an objection as, 6 Zeus 5/7rov TreVerai* et yap eTrXovret, irtDs av dveKT/pvrrev TWV adXrjTwv TOVS VIK&VTCLS,

VIII.

etTrep

KOTIVOV aretyavu)' Kairot [whereas] xpvary jJiaXXov expfjv, enXovTei : Aristoph. Plut. 585. X. It is sometimes adversative ; as, d/^eXet, p.a TOV At", OVK evaaKCLITOI ktbotKa 7rt6a>ffo/uat. Xe^w S' VTrep r&v Aa/ceatjuort(uv, a pot boKel' TroXXd* although; and yet: Aristoph. Ach. 369. where SeSooca is
aretyavojaas

opposed

And in v. 465. Dicreopolis, after receiving seto d/ueXet. veral things from Euripides, says, ci7repx;0/*cU' fat'rot ri bpaara) ; Set yap evbs, ov JUT) rv^wv aTroXwXa : where to cnrep^opai is opposed OVK airep\op.at, the sense

of which

is

latent in ri

bpaaw

or ovirw Set aTrep-^ta-

Oat

upon second thoughts, &c.] XI. It is used in the same manner as /cat JJ.YJV to announce an unCreon expected arrival v.] Thus Eteocles, seeing [see KCU /^f,
:

[but yet,

arrive, while he
fftiv

K'atrot irobiav giving orders to send for him, says, TrapwV opa> yap avrov Trpos bopovs areiyovT* cpovs Eurip. Phreniss. 702. [On icatVot, see note z, p. 195. Abr. of Vig.]
is

/uox.0ov e/cXvet

Hoog.

98
is

KAITOI, &c.

often added, which by its restrictive force augments the XII. FC of rot, as, Kalroi y' earl <r<t>0pwi> : Aristoph. Ach. 6ll. force assertory q. d. if any thing is true, this certainly is : this at least is certainly
true.

XIII. So
o Kvptos,
/3a7m'c?et

when

Kalroi replies to
KO.ITOI

on
7}

i]KOVffat> ol <ba.ptffa.1ot,

on

tacit objection ; as, <Js uvv eyvw 'Irjeovs irXeiovas fjKtdrjra.s Trotet KCU

'lorni/y^s'

ye

e(3cnrTtev, a\\' ol fjiadrjTai avrov is that Jesus baptized no one.

[although indeed] 'Iqaovs avrbs OVK St. John iv, 2. The tacit objection So in Acts xiv. it is said that God
:

suffered

all

nations to walk in their

own ways:

to this

it

might be

objected, that he could not have neglected the nations, since there were so many proofs of his beneficence. This possible objection is obviated therefore in v. 17, m/roiye OVK afjiaprvpov eavrov aQfjKev aya6o7roiiov ovpavoSev : although in truth. XIV. In this use it is construed with a participle : avtap&s Qepei
reAeuTV/v, Kairoiye \vrrofjLevovs rov Oavarov :
TY)v

rov irpoadev ygovov Sm^XevdcJwi' rovs fj.op/jiojEschin. Socrat. dial, de Mort. So Acts

xvii,

27.

is often separated from itcuroi, affecting the word, to which subjoined, by its superadditory force, the accession effected by ye being confirmed by KOITOI as, TroXXov ye 5e&>' gal rot efiovXofjnjt' y' ai> paXXov Jj pot TTO\V ^pvaiov yevevQai : Plat. Phaedr. p. 228. (p. 282. ed. Bip.) irpoatyQeyiJia.aiv yap ov fjnalvopat aeQev, says Helen, (speaking to Electra of the slaughter of Clytaemnestra) els 4>o7/3o> avafyipovaa. T^V aftapriai'. Kairot arevwye TQV KXvrat/^v^orpas fiopoy. Eurip. Orest. 77. XVI. Katroi strengthens or confirms, and ye urges a new accession of proof in argumentation: as, e'urep /3a\\et rovs eniopKovs, TTWS

XV. Fe

it is

ov^i 2/^wy' eviTtpriaev, ovbe KXewvi/jUoi', oi/^e Qeatpov, Kairoi The accession is marked y' eld eTriopKot ; Aristoph. Plut. 3^8.
(rfrtipa
:

by

not simply perjurers, but thoroughpaced perjurers.

[And

yet, here too.]

XVII. Fe has the same use in pressing a word which gives an thus Brasidas says, he fears the reason objection its greatest weight of the Acanthians for not admitting him into their town, is that they doubt his ability to repulse the Athenians ; and adds, KO.IT ot arrpaTty ye rrjb\ r/v vvv eyw e^w, OVK r'ldeXrjaav 'AOrfvaloi, TrXeWes ovres, Trpotrfjil^ai Thucyd. iv, 85. this very army, consisting then of no more
: :

men than now :

[but

and yet.}

xiii. even when disXVIII. Fe performs the office mentioned in joined from Kairoi: as in Aristoph. Ran. 1104. where ,/Eschylus,

having taught the rowers to contradict the magistrates, adds, KOITOI rore y' rjviK ey& "ejwv, OVK r/Tr/orapr', aXX' r/ fjiaav KaXearai, KO.I pvTnraTral etVelv : [whereas in my time, &c. v. 1072. ed. Br.] The possible objection met by KUITOI is, but they
after taxing Euripides with
1

used to do so before. XIX. Fe is so added

in

an adversative sense also: thus Socrates,

after saying that his accusers almost made him forget himself, ovrw viOav&s e'Xeyor, adds, Kairoi aXr)6es ye ovbev eipt]Kaaii',[and yet.~\ Plat. Apol. [p. 7/1. 3. ed. Bas. 1.]

XX. Fc

is

repeated in Plato's Phsedrus

where

to Socrates, saying

KAN, KAN

El, &c.

99

the discourse was brought to its close, Phaedrus replies, KQITOI ye yurjv ye peaovv avrov, p. 241. (p. 310. ed. Bip.) and yet I certainly thought at least, &c. The first ye corroborates the objective force of fccuYot, and the last restricts yurjv.

XXI. Kat superadditory is also subjoined to Kairoi, as, wv uev roivvv avTOKpaT(t)p i]V eyw Kara T^V Trpeaflelav, TOVTOV ea%e TOV Tpoirov vuHv a 6' OVTOI, irXetovs ovres, CVIKWV, aVavr' curoXuXe. Kairot Kni raXXa av icavTa. aKoXovOws TOVTOIS eireTrpaKTO, e'i rts eVetOero uot Demosth. de Fals. Leg. p. 222. but moreover every thing else too, &c. [Kat regards raXXa, and not
:

KAN; KAN
av,

EI,

KAN
:

EI

MH.

and

is

a long syllable

Aristoph.

i. K?? is composed of Ku i Nub. 1128. [1114. ed. Bekk.

<c'

When it is to be shortened, it is written av, Theogn. 6lO. [See Hermann, de emend* rat. Gr. gramm. i. 8. KoV, for Kat eV, has no accent. p. 36.] II. When Kat is copulative, and av conditional, a subjunctive mood always follows, av belonging to the conditional clause, and Kal to the apodosis ; as, eauxfrpovrjcras' K$V TO. Xo/0' ovrut (jtpovys, 'iaws av CKTOS K\avp.aTtDv e%ots iroba, and if : Soph. Philoct. 1252. [1259- ed. Br.] where av may be thus resolved, Kal to^s av e. K. e. voba, av
for Priestley, 1826.]

separately;

So, KQV uoi tKavtis evbei^y eyK(t)fj.ia(t)V ere en-l aofyia Qpovrjs o. r. X. ovbeiroTe Travaouat : Plat. Euthyphr. p. 9 III. But when, Kal being copulative, av is not conditional, but sig-

when

nificative of an oblique future, a subjunctive mood is not put after it, a condition or supposition follows ; as, K$V ee7rpae>, el Karri-

eyw, and he would have effected it, if, &c. Soph. Aj. 45. IV. Sometimes av or f/v answers to K$V, when the conditional part of the sentence consists of two members or clauses as, K$V fjiev TTOXeuov aipfjoGe, urjKeri rJKere bevpo avev oVXwv, el aio^povelre' rjv be Xen. Cyrop. iii. p. 72. elpqvrjs boKfjre be~icrdai, avev OK\U)V i)KTe V. Kat is sometimes referred to an apodosis which is not expressed ; as, K$V uev TTOIJ/OT; KapiroV el be urj ye, &c. St. Luke xiii, 9. After Kapirov understand ev e^ei, or a^es avrriv, or the like. VI. When repeated, K$V may be rendered whether or: as, vavra Kivelrat, K$V pijyua, Kq.v arpefjua, K$V aX\o TL T&V VTrap^ovrwv aadpov Demosth. Olynth. ii. p. 8. Sometimes it signifies or when single, y
peXriff
; : :

Demosth. K$V TLS ciXXos virep TOV vopov Xeyy VII. Sometimes /cat is superadditory, and av signifies the future ; as, T), are fiu&v ovras aotyvTepovs, (oloueda avrovs) K$V vuiiv t7rurXTjai t that they would reprove us too : Plato Phaedr. p. 269. (p. 368. ed. Bip.) voulaavres K<J?.V enl atyas eKaorot e\0elv avrovs, Thucyd. viii, 2. And in this sense it is used elliptically, as, el crept evos re^vy KaXws Plat. Ion. p. 534. (p. rjTriffTavTO \eyeiv, K$V Trepl T&V aXXwv anavTUV 187 t. iv. ed. Bip.) underst. ^Triaravro Xeyeiv. VIII. K^tj/ is also compounded of Kal superadditory and av conditional, Kat pertaining to what precedes, and av to what follows ; as, 6t>;X6les, ovrw feat Trept apKeffet yap jju~iv K$,V, axrirep btKaiocrvvrjs Trept TOV ayadov bu]X6es, Plat, de Rep. vi. p. 506. (t. vii. p. 115.
as, o ri A.eTrTivr)s,
: :

[bieXdysl]

ed. Bip.)

Here

Kal pertains to dpjceaet, otherwise the

second

*cat

would

100

MA.
If you wish

be redundant.

your children, and

wife,

and friends

to

live for ever, says Epictetus, you are foolish; ovTd) K$V rbv Trcu&a deXys (JLVJ auapTaveiv, fjiwpbs el,

and presently adds, and SO also, if, &c.

Enchir.

So Matth. xxi, 21. xxvi, 35. sometimes even ; Kal being superadditory, and av po6 K$V irais yvoirj, Plat. tential TOVTO S Euthyd. p. 279* which is to be thus resolved, TOVTO Se 71/007 av KOL 6 irais which is elliptical, for So Lucian, eycJ 6 K$V yvoirj av ov uovov offrtaovv, aX\a Kal 6 irais. opdoffTabrjv beiirvrjffaiui, Lapith. t. iii. p. 427. X. Or av being significative of will. Thus with the imperative, K$V us a<ppova beaade ue, 2 Cor. xi, l6. XI. Or of an oblique future as, Iva K$V TOV Kpaarirebov TOV iuaTtov avTov aif/wvrai, that they might touch even, &c. So Acts v, 15. K$V ebebeTO avT$ Kepavvy KU\ ppovrfj, he would even have been bound: Lucian. Dial. Merc, et Mart. t. i. p. 268. XII. *Av has the significations of will and of an oblique future blended in Xen. Cyrop. iii, 1, 36. where Tigranes, having been asked how much he would give as a ransom for his wife, answers, tyw ftev
c. 19.
is

IX.

K?v

XIII.

Or av

is

conditional, and the superaddition expressed

;

by

Kal

more

forcible

and emphatical

may

but even touch

as, K^I/ T&V luaTioiv avrov a^/w/iac, if I his clothes: St. Mark v, 28. K$V Orjpiov Biyrj TOV

Hebr. xii, 20. signifying a conditional superaddition is construed even with a participle : to-ws (3ov\ri<reTat icqv cv AlyvirTu Tv^elv &v juaXXov
opovs \i6oflo\r)OriffeTai,

XIV. K$y

77

Kplvat KaK&s: Aristoph. Nub. 1128. [1114. ed. Bekk. for Priestley, 1826.] for Kal kv AtyvTrr^j, av ovrta TV^OI. XV. From this use arises another, which may be called adversative, K$V being rendered although; the conditional superaddition however still remaining : as, 6 yap, ols av eyftj XrityQeirjv, Toiavra irparr<i)v

Kal KaTavKeva^o/jievos, OVTOS

iii.

euol TroXepel^ K$V

fJifiTra)

(3aXXr)

'.

De-

separate force of each particle may be preserved by rendering K$V even then, if or when. So KCI for cai ec, Eurip. Orest. 295. [279- ed Pors.] In this sense av may be put

mosth. Phil.

p. 46.

The

See p. ]6. iv. before Kal. This adversative sense is augmented by oyuws in theapodosis; as, Kr)V ue Qayrjis CTrl pi$av, ouws en KapTrotyoprjffd), Epigr. XVI. On account of that use of av which is treated of in p. 11. r. i. K$V expresses some degree of doubt or uncertainty ; as, TreXrao-rai Kal roorai yevoivr av ws eirl r^s rjfj.Tpas K$V eaKiffuvptoi, [even t
perhaps, to the amount of sixty thousand:] Xen. Cyrop.

MA.

ii,

1, 6.

1.

Ma

is

a particle
it

used for juratory confirmation of some*

thing said : II. It is

neither affirms nor denies. commonly used in negation, ov or some other negative word being either expressed or understood. In affirmation vat is usually prefixed : jua A/a however occurs, as an affirmative oath,

by

itself

without vat
fjta

as, iroXXaKis tipaKiaffa, p-a TOV 'ArrdXXw, Libanius.

TO.

pa

A/'

eyXevafft vov <btX6evos

enr)

Lucian. de Calumn.
:

t. iii.

p. 144.

Tqv"ApTeuiv, 'A/covr/y yapovaat

Aristaenet.

Ep.

x. p. 60.

MEN,
III.

AE.

101

frequently used in negation with ov : either preceding, as, ovrot, pa n/v yrjv, ravra Kartbeadov povw Aristoph. Pac. Ill/, and, ov pa yap 'ATroXXwva, &c. Horn. II. a, 86. or, as is oftener the case, following, and pertaining also to what comes after ; as, pa rf)v Afyuj/rpa, OVK av davpaaaipi, Demosth. Olynth. iii.

But

it

is

much more

So Philipp. iii. p. 50. [p. 124. 1. 22. ed. Reisk.] with some other negative word ; as, ravra rotVvv, pa TOV 'ATro'XXw, *ya) ireTTVcrprjv ovbevos Aristoph. Pac. 6l4. IV. Sometimes after ov, that which is to be denied must be assumed from the foregoing words; as, Prytanis: KaBrjaov, alya. Dicaeop. pa TOV 'ATro'XXw, '/<' /*ev OVK : Aristoph. Ach. 59- underst. / will not sit still and be silent. And so in negative replies, as, rl ovv ; av TIS etTrot* av OVK eywye Demosth. ypd(j>eis ravr' elvai ffrpartwrt/ca ; Ma At", Olynth. i. p. 3. underst. ypotyw, &c. See Aristoph. Ach. 101. Plato
p. 14.

Or

Euthyphr. p. 13. (c. 15. ed. Fisch.) V. Sometimes, for the sake of greater emphasis, ov both precedes and follows, but still without pertaining to pa, as, ov, pa TOV A/', ov TroXw TI btatyepei So in Plat, de Rep. vi. (t. vii. p. 70. ed. Bip.) Phaedr. p. 261. (p. 351. ed. Bip.) Ovbev too precedes in Aristoph. ovbev yap ecrrai betvov, ov pa TOVS Oeovs Vesp. 26. VI. When ov is not expressed, dXXd commonly follows, expressing an opposition which shows that ov is suppressed as in Aristoph. Plut. 1085. [Ran. 1052. ed. Br.] Eurip. noTepov & OVK ovra Xoyov
: : ;

TOIOVTOV irepl r>7 fyaibpas vvedr)Ka ^Eschyl. ^a At", dXX' ovra.. for pci At", ov vve9r]Kas OVK ovra, aXX' ovra. See Aristoph. Plut. 1009 [1008.
',

Br.] Vesp. 173. 296. [297.] 678. [680.] 948. [954.] 1400. Pac. 438.

[439-] 987.

'AXXa sometimes follows at a considerable distance : thus in Eurip. Phoeniss. pa TOV per aorpwv Z//v', &c. is in v. 1013. and ctXXa opposed to the negation is in v. 10l6. The ellipsis is supplied in Aristoph. Ran. 1214. [1183. ed. Br.] where Euripides having said that CEdipus was a happy man, .^Eschylus replies, pa TOV At", ov brjT , dXXa jcafco&at'1

pvv. So also in Vesp. 169. VII. Sometimes instead of dXXa, yap follows, which implies the as, suppression of a negative by expressing the cause of the negation
:

epov irpbs TOVS lepupevovs 8e^(ffQai ae, cat diopdovpevov CIKCIV. rjv be pr) ypa^ys, efyri, ov be^ovrai pe ; pa At", clTre* epi) yap, Here ov is Philostr. de Vit. Apollon. Tyan. iv, 40. e<f>rj, avrrj ap^rj evidently suppressed before pa At". The negative is sometimes to be assumed, not from any preceding
yeypd^/erai
Trap'
:

words, as
TiBrjs;

in the last

example, but extrinsically

yap, ib.

as,

pj n,
At".

etyr}, irpoff-

pd

At', elirev, eiprjKa

vi, 11. for ov,

pd

VIII. Ov pa, val pa, pa all occur iii the same verse in Aristoph. ovic av p eaveis ; Isic. ov pd Ata. Cl. vat pd Am. Isic. pa TOV Ho<reibu, (underst. OVK ed<rw ae :) Eq. 338. [339-]
Cl.
I.

ON THE CONSTRUCTION OF THE PARTICLES MEN AND

AE.
I.

Of p*v and

bk

it

may be

said in general that they are correlative

102

MEN,

AE.

particles employed to connect, and at the same time to oppose or to distinguish propositions, or clauses of sentences, or words. II. When they refer to two things already distinguished or opposed, pev usually refers to the first, and be to the last ; as, vetpCj TO pev
'iva Top pev cTrtreXeZv ff&pa elvai 0tXo7rovos, TTJV be -fyvyfiv 0iXo<ro0os* TO. Soavra, ry be Trpoopyv emoTy TCI avpQepovra : Isocr. ad Dem. But sometimes the contrary 'is observed ; as, rjyov T&V a p. 20.

bvvy

civcit ^ptjpaTtav KpeiTTw, TCI pkv yap (i. e. be (i. e. aKovarpaTo) TTCLVTO. TOV ra a7roXe/7rei, ra^ews paTa) wapapeveL: ib. p. 11. Sop. 20. init. and, Trepi TrXeiovos TTOIOV bofav KciXrjv, vj TcXovrov peyav rots iraial KaTaXnrelv' 6 pev yap (viz. TrXovros) floras, % be (b6a) aflavaros : Id. ad Nicocl. p. 41. III. Hence may arise ambiguity, which is obviated by some addition, or by repetition of something preceding ; as, e%ei be avaXoyov % KprjrtKr) rats npos TY)V ACIKUVIK^V yeupyoval re yap rots per EtXwres, rots be Kprjfflv ol TreploiKoi: Aristot. Polit. ii, 8. and sometimes there is a repetition with both pkv and be [of which the example may be seen in the Abr. of Vig. p. 2. 1. 16.] Mev is referred to the former of two things and be to the latter, and the contrary, with strange variation, in Isocr. Nicocl. p. 59- and 60. IV. Mev and be are not inelegantly subjoined to words repeated by

P&TWV

TToXXo. 7roXXa)j>

p.

the figure anaphora ; as, e-^ov per ^vxyv, e^ov be o-wyua, Plat. Phaedr. 24. (p. 320. ed. Bip.) See also de Rep. vi. p. 494. (t. vii. p. 91. ed.

Bip.) epyov per VVKTOS \verat ITTTTOVS, epyov be xaXtvwffat, e'pyov 6' CTTIj ad^at) epyov b eTndwpaidffacrdai : Xen. Cyrop. iii. V. Regularly these particles are subjoined to the words which have a mutual relation or opposition : but in poetry a regard to the metre

Xaos

has sometimes produced a different arrangement; as, froi pev Meve&c. 11. y, 213. for Mev^Xaos pev for eiriTpoxcibriv dydpeve, and, ovbe pev aXXoi Tpwes e<f ITTTTUV rjyeUlysses is opposed to him
: ; :

pedovro, dXX' airofiavTes opovaav

II.

p, 82. for ovb' e(f fTTTrwv pev t aXX'

{for be) airoftavTes.

VI. In dialogues the connection effected by pev and be is not destroyed by the interruption of another speaker, but is completed by subsequent continuation of what had been begun as, Socr. irpoolptov Socr. ; ^ yap ra Kop-^a Tfjs Te%vr)S ; Phaedr. vat. ftev olpat irp&TOV
:

fV bevTepov be by btriyqfflv Tiva, &c. e by VII. Sometimes the pev is used by one speaker, and the another, anticipating the remaining words of the former : thus when one has said that he does not reckon certain persons among philoso.

phers, but thinks them opolovs pev ^tXoao^ots, another continues, TOVS 5' aXrjdivovs TIVCLS Xeyets ; Plat, de Rep. v. p. 475. (t. vii. p. 57. ed.
Bip.) VIII. Sometimes the form of words following with be is varied, so as not to be conformable to that which has preceded with pev : as, av be, & OVK abtica pevroi eirades, efyrjv elra T$ pev AdjuiSt, The 'Afcapvav, rl CLITICJ. TOV epwra ; Lucian. Dial. Mort. t. i. p. 442. be r regular construction would have been, rw pev kaptbi e0;j/,
*

Aa/U7ri6t,

crVf 10

IX.

When

. 'Aicapvav there are three or

more members or

clauses,

ph

is

put

MEN,
in the first,

AE.

103

each of the following. An example of three is in Iliail. e, 385. of four in Lysias Orat. Fun. p. 490. [p. 54. 1. 6. ed. Reisk.] of five in Theocrit. viii, 57- of six in Lysias Or. Fun. p. 501. of a great number in Iliad. /3, 494. 511. 527. [p. 91. 1. 3. ed. Reisk.] 536. 546. 557. 559. 569. 581. 591. 603. and so on to the end of the But sometimes the be is suppressed in every member or catalogue. clause, as in Solon, v. 43. X. When there is a subordinate partition in either of the principal clauses or members, it is effected by a subsidiary addition of per and be as, eTtaivov pev eveica. iravTa, per irovov, iravTa be Ktvbvvov virobveadat' \aj3e1v 6' kv TCUS yvu>fj.ais fiefiaivs TOVTO, os, &c. Xen. Cyrop. So in the beginning of the 1 Philipp. of Demosth. [p. 40. iii. p. 84. el fiev Trepl KCIIVOV TWOS is 1. 1. ed. Reisk.] opposed to eVeiS*} be, and in the first member there is a subordinate opposition of et fjtey

and be

in

ijpeffKe

to

ei

8 e

jjiri.

XT.

When

there

is

a third partition subordinate to the second, pev

and be are thrice used, each severally in the member or clause to which it belongs, so that the first be answers to the last pet>, the 1 second to the second, and the last to the first thus, (A) 'Eav yuev
:

ovv els TeTayp.ei'rjv re blaiTay KO.I (piXoaoQiav vtK^ffy TO. jSeXr/w rrjs biavoias ayayovra, (i) paKapiov jjtev* KCU ofj.ovor)TtKov TOV evQa.be fiiov
bri

biayovtriv, eyKpaTels

avT&v Kal

Koafjiioi ovres,

(a)
1

Soi/Xwero/zeroi //ev,

KaKia ^vxfjs iveyevero, (b) eXevdep&ffavTes Se, w aperrj, (ii) reXevr^2 KOI eXatypol yeyovores, &c. (B) eav be 3 aavres 6e >} vTTOTrrepot biairy Kal re a<pi\oa6<pq>, <f)i\OTifJ,<p Se ^p^wvrat, &C. Plat. Phaedr. tyopriKwrepq, p. 256. (p. 341. ed. Bip.) XII. Herodotus repeats juev and Se without any subordinate partition, but with a repetition of certain words in place as it were of

such partition
vvv b

et

5e

fj

ar&ffts

fioperjs re KCU 6

^etyuwv

effrciffi,

ijXXaKro T&V wpewj/ TOV ovpavov, rrj p.ev ravry fj.ev TOV VOTOV i\v ^ trraffis

e b Kal Ttjs /ueo^ju/^jOt'cu* ftoperjs^ ii, Ty bk 6 VOTOS vvv ear^fce, TavTrj 26. XIII. Mev is sometimes [for the sake of perspicuity] repeated even in the same member, when there are but two, as when the initial words are repeated on account of a long hyperbaton ; thus, TTJV p.ev
, TavTrjv p.ev &7ras uKiiQapTOV, Kai TI TreTroirjKv'la.v TOIOVTOV, ^ . avn) be TrXavaTai : Plato Phaed. p. 108. (c. 57. ed. Fisch.) (bevyet, XIV. Instead of be other particles are sometimes used as correla-

Travpa p.ev, dXXa paXa Xtyews : Iliad, y. 214. ed. Pors.] and St. Paul, Rom. xiv, 20. ovprjas fjiev TrpwTOv, avrap eVetr', II. a, 50. To pev TrXetov iroXvao\ TO yepas TroXv p,elov : a'tKos TroXejuoto \elpes epal SteTrova'* a Tap
tive

to

fjiev:

thus,

So Eurip. Orest. 562. [556.

TOVT avdis, for TOVTO /zev, TOVTO be: Soph. 166. TOVTO fJLev TOVTO Trot/ be Antig. 107. [165. ed. Brunck.] Averts /3oi/Xerat fjiev etv, ov HGVTOI bvvaTat: Aristot. de Rep. i, 6. pavQavw, iKavws pets ov' on fj.evToi flovXei btopietv, &c. Plat, de Rep. vi. p. 511.
ib.

(p.

ovbev p^v 124. ed. Bip.) avayKrj pev Kal TUVT eTriaTaadat KwXvet ovbe a^iKOov apfjiovtas ixatsiv Plat. Phaedr. p. 268. (p. 367: ed. Bip.) bvoTvx&v per, 7rXj/' dXX' 'EXX/>w^ : Heliodor. Jithiop.

vi, 7-

104

MEN,

AE.

When
rlffrois

sometimes put
\poia T

difference only, and not opposition, is denoted, teal or re is in the place of b : as, KaprioToi per eaav, Kat Kap:

ep.a^pvTO
a.bri\<p

Iliad, a,

267*

IIclXiv Kard<mj6' r/ffv^y

virep
:

TWV bebpapevwv

abrity in Person's edition v. 1311.] re, and answers to a preceding re, in Iliad,
rk.

pkv oppaTt, Eurip. Orest. 1317. [\po<f & On the contrary be is put for
e,

359-

#*'Xe

/*e,

60*

5e

/not

ITTTTOVJ.

II.

OF THE USE OF THE PARTICLES MEN AND

first

AE.

use of these particles is in transition ; when per is put one part of a speech or narration, and be in the of the next; as, dXV tfrot /Ltev ravra peTa<j)paff6fjiffQa <cai beginning av6i.s. vvv & aye, vfja peXaivav epviraopev, &c. Iliad, a, 140. o pev aKovaavres be ol Tlcpaai, &c. Xen. Cyrop. ii, 1, 19ovTkis elirev. II. This use is most remarkable when the transition is from one important or capital part of a history or other work to another : thus Thucydides closes his account of the sixth year of the Peloponnesian war, and at the same time his third book, with these words, ravra pev Kara TOV ^et/^wva TOVTOV eyeVero, icat eKTOveros T$ TroXepy ereXeura T$be, ov QovKvbibijs fyveypa^e' and begins his account of the seventh See year, and his fourth book, with TOV b' kiriyevop.evov Qepovs, &c. also the conclusion of the fifth chapter, and the commencement of the sixth, of Aristot. de Rep. i. III. The second use is in partition, when the article is joined with each of the particles ; as, TO T av irpbs TOVS TroXe/u/ovs aXfci/jov etVai,
I.

The

in the conclusion of

ov T& pev rcpoafiKQVj

b' ov : Xen. roj Cyrop. ii, 3, 5. partition is more remarkable, when the whole to be divided precedes in the genitive case: as, rjvbe ?//jtwv ol /uev Karairpobib&fft,

The

pi] 6e\a)cri Tifjitapeeiv : cffrtv eft r}fjCiv, Ta be OVK e<p

olbe

Herodot.

vii,

157

r&v
1.

OVTW

TO.

pey

^1v

Epict. Ench. c.

IV. This use is remarkably elegant, when ^ev and be mark different rj parts or respects of a single thing: ?/ TOV pevpaTos eneivov Trrjyr) per els O.VTOV ebv t >y 5', aTrof^effTOVperrj, e^w cnroppe't : Plat. Phaedr. p. 255. (p. 339. ed. Bip.) dp' ovv av TWOS eiridvfjiqriKov Xeyw/^e*', TTOVTOS TOV e'ibovs TOVTOV Qfjaofjiev e7rt0i//ue7y, rj TOV /icy, TOV be ov ; Id. de Rep.
v. p.

475. (p. 56. ed. Bip.) V. The fourth tise is in signifying that two things mentioned are not to be disjoined : this is effected by the negative ov followed by and be, a second negative being subjoined to e as, bvelv yap jjiev OVTOW ov-% o per rX^/uwv, o ft ov, Eurip. Hel. 652. Another example is the climax in Demosth. pro Cor. p. 339. [p- 288. 1. 8. ed. Reisk. See Abr. of Vig. p. 197. 1. 14.] See ad Herenn. iv, 25. [ 34.] VI. In the fifth use the particles are adversative, when pev introduces something which might seem at first to preclude what is exas, TOVTOVS av /iot pressed by the words with which be is connected boKu KCU a.p.apravovTas pq.ov tyepeiv, rj TOVS ptaovvTas fAet>, efCTrXeoi be
: ;

vayKy

btaTroiovjjievovs

those,

who, although they hate, yet

MEN,
nevertheless, &c.

AE.
l,

105
28.
i,

Xen. Cyrop.
:

iii,

ovbev ptv

els

dXXr/Xa*

irpoievrat, TiKTOvat be (La

./Elian.

V. H.

15.

The opposition
yap

is

as, /ioXts /uev, e&reive b* els ?/7rap

not less elegant in a sentence of one member; ?/e /^>os, Eurip. Phceniss. 1340.
:

yvvri bovXrj f*ev, dprjKev b' eXevdepov \6yov Soph. Trach. 62. VII. This adversative use depends on 6'/*ws, which is usually understood, but sometimes expressed as, 0erraXoi be vir* avayKys per, ouws be fAi]biov: Aristid. pro Quatuorv. p. 298. /ioXts /*e>, eireiQcTo # ovv o/jtws Heliodor. ^Ethiop. viii, 7. VIII. The sixth use is to denote celerity ; as, TO juev eVeo-ey, // # e'xei balra : ^Elian. V. H. i, 2. no sooner does it fall into the web, than she (the spider} seizes her repast. IX. The seventh use is in exceplion as, aXXo /uev ovbev Kar^fcov:

eauev, Tobe be
Bip.)

1,8.
tcrrtv

Plat, de Rep. v. (p. 7. ed. ovbev ctyiXofipovrjaaTo avrw, elite be : Xen. Cyrop. iii, XeovTd icaJ vovovvra T&V nev aXXwv oiibev 6vivr}ffC 0apjuaicov be
:

nothing

except this

aXXo

fjiev

avry

rtfs

voffov fipwdels iriOrjxos, ./Elian.

V. H.

i,

9.

Sometimes a

negative word is used without aXXos, as, Xa/3wv e/c /zo/ r^s TroXews ouSeva, Arj/jivtovs be Kal 'I/nfiplovs : Thucyd. iv, 28. X. The eighth use is elliptical ; and this is threefold : First, when
fjei>

is

suppressed
(o

as,

(5

0/Xe <J>a7pe,

TTO!

bq Kal nodey;

PH.

irapct

Awiov,

2wfCjt>ares,
:

TOV

for Trapa Ava/ov per Matth. xvi, 26. and p. 38. ii. Without the observation of this ellipsis, many passages cannot be T$ rightly understood or interpreted thus, in Rom. vi, 17. xP iS 0ew, o-t ^re bovXot rrjs apaprlas, appears an absurdity, when thus taken separately but pev being understood after r)re, shows that the clause is to be taken in close connection with the following one in which be corresponds to per vTrrjKovoraTe be eic Kapbtas els ov ira.40. peboOrjre TVTTOV biba^fjs. And in Acts viii, 39 Tlvevfjia. Kvptov
:

Ke^aXoy* Tropevopat be Trpos TrepiTrarov, &c. Plat. Pheedr. in init. See St. James ii, 11. St.

TOV fyiXnnror, KOI OVK eibei* avritv 6 Ewvov^os* eTropevero yap T^V obovavrov yaipwv' fyi\nnros be evpedrj ets"A5wrov, the mere proceeding of the eunuch on his journey seems no good reason why he did not see Philip ; but when we understand per after eTropeuero, it appears that the reason indicated by yap is to be inferred from both the clauses taken together, in the connection marked by the two correrjpTcaffe

lative particles.

XI. Mev is frequently suppressed in partitions having a subdivision one or other of the members as, TOJV ayaOtii' efrOXf] per airoKpiffis, ecrdXa be epya' T&V be KOKU>V betXa (jjepovaiv eirr) Theogn. 1 167avefjiot for T&V fjiev ayaQ&v, &c. and in the subordinate partition of the first
in
;
:

member
e^ovffa,
/uev,

Tapya &
1

&c.

TeXajjiUjGiv e\Ktj TCI yuev eyw a laffOftai, T\i]jjn)v laTpos ovo^jC ov' rot b' ev veKpoiai typovTiaei 7rar>)p aedev : for ovojj.a Eurip. Troad. 1232. or of both : os Trpwrjv fiev spot re KCLI

"Hprj arevT dyopevwr, Tpwcrl ([lev) nayyaeoQai, arap 'Apyeiotfftv ap*/etv vvv be /uera Tpwefffftv (^ev) 6/^tXe7, T&V be XeXaorat : Iliad, e,

On the other hand be is omitted either in the apodosis, or First, in the apodosis together with it. ^on-a y oXXore ftev
:

831. XII.

Hoog.

106

MEN,
r

AE.

"Exropos, aXXor' oiriaQev, for aXXore

7ri

&

Iliad, e,

595.

dXX'

>}Sj? /tie*

eVyueV <X7ro/3Xe7reti> )(p/) KCU aTroa/coTreTy iroppwdev rovg atyLKvovpevovs : Lucian. Dial. Mort. xxvii. c. 8. and frequently after cTretra, when Trp&ra /iev has preceded ; as in Plat. Phaedr. p. 263.
oro/u/>

(p. 356. ed.

Bip.) After elra in Aristoph. Vesp. 1101. [1106. ed. Br.] XIIF. At- is suppressed together with the apodosis itself, when there is an aposiopesis occasioned by interruption ; as, CEd. J Qvyarcp, alvw pev ae rfjs Trpodvpias. Ant. dXX' et yapolfiriv, ov && uovos
tyevytis, Trarep

So Lucian: ovrotrl pev ore Eurip. Phceniss. l6/7 &c. Dial. Mort. t. i. p. 412. [p. 270. B. ed. Salmur.] XIV. And where there is no appearance of aposiopesis ; thus, Tantalus was punished, says Electra, ws pev Xeyovatv, on eUoXaorov eV^e yXoKTaay Eurip. Orest. 8. Here the apodosis may be, eyw & ov o-a^ws ola, or the like. And so Dicaeopolis, begging of Euripides the stage dress of one of his heroes, whose name he cannot recollect; when several have been named to him, and at last Bellerophon, says, ov BeXXepo0oVr/s, dXXa K^Keivos (the one I mean) fiev i\v ^wXcs, irpotraiTwv, <rr&>/uvXos, beivos Xe'yetv Aristoph. Ach. 427. [428. Br.] Here
;

Ke>/3epos

ecrtt/,

aXXows 6' lai. XV. This ellipsis of the apodosis is very frequent when per is added to the first person, especially of the singular number ; when it is both restrictive and affirmative; as, el KOI pr) *:aO"EXXr/vwv e/jtol pev, Xdova redpafjifjied', dXX' ovv IVVCTCL /uot SoiceTs Xeyetv Eurip. Phoeniss. 500. to me at least certainly it appears so, whatever others may think. So Dicaeopolis, when ordered to be silent, answers, /ua rbv 'AiroXXw, 'y&> fjicv ov: Aristoph. Ach. 59XVI. When the affirmation of pev might appear too strong, it is lessened by the addition of TTOV, as, pvYipoveveis pet> TTOV, on, &c. Plat, de Rep. vi. p. 504. (p. 110. ed. Bip.) Cf. Iliad, y, 308.
:

the apodosis

may be

XVII. The affirmation is more emphatical, when one affirms not only of others, but more especially of himself, for whom his own consciousness enables him best to answer; as, rideX^aafiev e\Qe~iv Kal Sis: I Thessal. H, 18. / Trpos vfjtds (eyw /uev IlavXos) Kal cura Paul at least certainly. XVIII. In dialogues it sometimes happens that when one speaker has used pev in a restrictive sense, another taking it as correlative to be in an apodosis to follow, answers it himself with &, as, Lamach.
ey(J>

HGV

iraori YleXoTrovvrjcriois

ael TroXefi^orw

Dicseop.

eyti*

5e Krjpvrrw

&c. Aristoph. Ach. 620. XIX. In these and the like passages, where juev occurs without e, it may, if its use only be regarded, perform the office of ye : but if its nature be considered, it is always necessary to assume an apodosis
Kal IleXoirovvrjffiots,

extraneously : for it is even found joined with ye, as in Iliad, a, 216. in Aristoph. Ach. 153. [154.] In the first passage, therefore, xp% yuev <T(f>(i)'iTep6v ye, 0ea, eVos eipvffaadai, the apodosis \rjyetv 5e epibos is to be understood, which is in v. 210. and in the passage of Aristoph. Dicaeop. KaKiar a7roXo//ujv el n TOVTWV 7re/0o/uat, wv eliras Theor. Kal vvv oirep /ia^t/iwrarov QpaK&v eQvos eirep^ev vfjiiv. Dicaeop.

and

TOVTO piv

ijbrj

eaipes

ye limits rovro, and pev requires

its

apodosis,

MEN
XX. From
as, TOVTO
fj.et>

AH.

107
See also v.

which is to be understood, ra be irpuaQev Xe^Bevra ew. 754. and Lucian. adv. Indoct. t. iii. p. 108. init.
the affirmative use of pev arises
aXrjOes Xeyeis, Plat,
its

de Rep.

v. p.

472.

use in approbation; avrat pev oov(r

Aristoph. Ach. 195. used also in recommendation ; as Amphitheus, in offering the truces, says, avrcu pev dart Trevrereis Aristoph. Ach. 187. in which passages also the ellipsis of the apodosis before treated of may be supposed. XXII. Sometimes both particles are suppressed as, roaw KaXXiov
ajjifipoalas Kal veKTapos,

XXI.

It is

fiapTvpoiiffiv oi TraXcuoi paviat' a(i)<f>poavvi}s, TTJV

K 6eov, rfjs Trap' ai/0pwetc

TTWV yiyvofjievrjs a. y.

Plat. Phsedr. p. 244. for TY\V p,ev

Oeov,

rfjs

be Trap'

MEN
II.

AH.
;

fication of time

[1308. ed. Dr.]

subjoined to pev, first in its primary signi^e^ brj ro% e^eis: Soph. Philoct. 1300. So Horn. II. a, 514.
1.

A;} is

now ;

as, TCI

Sometimes
;

yuev is limitative or restrictive,

and

brj

superadditory

when something more important or urgent is added to what has preceded when the last and finishing accession is made to representation or discourse. Thus the deserters inform Cyrus that his enemies
etyotev re r/?7 avv TO"IS orrXois, Kal Trapararrot avrovs 6 flaaiXevs Kal irapaKeXevoiTO /uev bt) rots ael e^w ovot TroXXct re feat eo-^vptt

ew
:

&v,

and
iii,

moreover that he was

3, 48. III.

now

even exhorting them, &c. Xen. Cyrop.

Mei> by are used in entering on a subject after prefatory mat-

ter

as, TOVTO fjiev

HadrjfjLciros

ye

ctet

epwffti/,
Trpoiroj/

by TWV fyiXoffotywv tyvffewv &c. Plat, de Rep.

Trept topoXoy^ffdio fjfuv, ort

vi.

this then,

&c.

^ev

bfj Trvp,

Kal yfj,

(p. 71. ed. Bip.) let Kal vbup, Kal d>)p, on

: Id. in Tima?o p. 53. (p. 351. ed. Bip.) IV. In transitions too, /ie br) concludes what precedes, and be in the apodosis commences that which is to follow ; as, XpvaravTas pev

<rw/iara eort, bfjXov

br)

ovrws

etirev'

3, 7'

dXXa
TYJV

dreori; b' CTT' Tttvra per b },

6'

Xeye<r0w*

ahlav

TJJS

avT$ ^epavXas Yiepcrrjs Xen. Cyrop. ii, oxr) T$ dey 0/Xov, Tavry e^erw re Kal rwv Trrepwy a.Troj3oXfjs Xa(3<i>fj.ev Plat.
'.

Phsedr. p. 246. (p. 32 1. ed. Bip.) V. When br) is added in the apodosis as well as in the protasis, it has its hortatory force, without dropping its use in transition ; as, o
jj.V
TCS
btj

Tvy^avet

ov, Trept ov flovXevTeov, e'iprjTai re Kal dpiaTai' pXeirov-

be by Trpos avTO TO. Xonra Xeywpev, &c. now then, looking to that t &c. Plat. Phgedr. p. 258. VI. In transition pkv bt} may be understood in the conclusion of one topic, when the next begins with e alone thus, in <Ji/ eVe*ca bel TroXewv yiyveaOat. fj-ovovs Kal Trpooraras T<JJV 'EXXrivwv Kal rjyefJiovas T&V
;

'ETre6e(^av be Kal ev TO~IS bvcrrv^lais TYJV eavroiv Fun. p. 5 1 3. after wv we may understand juev btj

ctper/y^
:

Lysias Or. on account of these

:

things then truly, &c. and be may be rendered farther. VII. From the primary signification of time which has been noted for on finishing a subin by, arises the use of ^e*> bf) in conclusions kind of a and self-satisfaction ject, complacency, or exultation, at
:

108
having indeed

MEN OYN,
now shown,
in transitions

&c.

or proved, what was proposed, is indicated : and no other effect than that of >} seems to have concluding what has preceded. Plato concludes a dissertation on friendship with these words : TO fie v bfj Qvaet oiKelov avayKalov rjfjuv &c. Lys. p. 222. (t. v. irtyavTai <f>iXe~iv, thus then truly it appears, and in which he shows that although such a ed. 250. one, Bip.) p.

republic as he has described may no where actually exist, yet does not follow that it is not the best, with these, TOVTO fiev brj

it
fjifi

avayKae

p.e,

ytyvopeva a7ro0cuVeiv de Rep. v. p. 473. (t.

ola roj X6yu> btrjXdofjiev, ravra iravTaTracrt cat TW epyw by this being so then, do not exact of me, fyc. :

Hence those conclusions vii. p. 51. ed. Bip.) so frequent in Plato, 'KOI ravra pev brj raura" and KCU TCLVTCL fiev btj TO.VTYI : [so much then for this.] VIII. The particles being thus frequently used in commencement,
transition,

and conclusion, it will readily appear that they suit continuation also; for continuation of the same subject is often carried on through different divisions. Thus, y be 'AXefarbpov avrov K Kara TO evwvvfjLOv p.et> otySJv eiriyovTa, ravTrj TTVKVCLS eireTa^av rrj
T&V
ITTTTWV.

rets 'iXas

Xpovov /uev

bij

afjL^oTepa

TO.

orparet'^uara

%yov : Arrian. de xp. Al. i, 15. afterwards ; after this ; this being done. This use is very common in recital of dialogues, or of any words spoken alternately by more than one person: thus Xenophon, after reciting the words ofTiaKpov TOV
iroTdfjiov efyeffT&Tes
f]<rw%ia.v

granes, proceeds, 6 fiev be 'Apfjtevios eXe^e*/ ovrws

br)
:

Kvpos enl
iii,

TOUT-CIS elite'
1.

<f>ev

TOV avbpos.

Cyrop.

always some resemblance to tion is resumed after interruption; as

Thus continuation has commencement; especially when narra39.

in

Aristoph. Plut. 728.

MEN OTN, MEN OYN

is

FE,

MEN OYN

AH.

1.

When

p*?

prefixed to the collective particle ovv, and be or some particle of similar power follows, a double conclusion is indicated, which is

distinguished by /ue^and tire particle opposed to it. Thus Menelaus, being entreated by Orestes to assist him, replies that he has but a ^ v "^ "X vTrep{3asmall force left, whence he concludes, paxV P**
Xoifjieda TleXacryov eXiribos irpoai]Ko^ev.
II.

"Apyos' el be fiaXdaKols Xoyots 5vv//ie0', kvTnvQ* Eurip. Or. 690. [683. ed. Pors.] in battle thereleast,

fore certainly, or at

&c.

ovv, as well as /xev alone, has a restrictive sense : ev pev ovv TOVTI /x' eaaov eXKvffat, Kal /x^Kert, this one only or at least ;

Mev

Aristoph. Pac. 327. but with less III. It is also inceptive, after general introduction indication of preparation or promptness than t)// gives to jjiev bt) in a similar use wept pev ovv rwv TroXireiwi/ olpai Tratri boKe~iv, &c. with irp&Tov /ue> ovv respect then to commonwealths, &c. Isocr. Nicocl.
; :

cvcreflet TO. Trpos

TOVS Oeovs, Isocr. ad

Demon,

p. 8.

It is

even used in

the beginning of a whole work, [but with reference to something introductory: see Abr. of Vig. p. 200. 1. 6. and note h on p. 169.] be being afterwards used for transition in beginning each following head or chapter. Thus Thepphrastus, after a preface, begins the first chapter of his ethic characters with, *i /zev ovv elpwvela bofciev av

MEN OYN,
irpoffTTolrjats,
: uvris IV. It

&c.
TTJV

109
be KO\ctKeiav vno\a(3oi

&c. the second with

f]

the third with

is

used

in

be aboXea^la earl, &c. and so on. commencement of action also, as well as of

speech

',

as, ^wpelr', eireiywpea&'.

eyw pev ovv

rpifiov rrjvb* tfc0v\ao>

Eurip. Or. 1257- [1255. ed. Pors. and I then, for my part, &c.] V. Hence it has in some manner an incitative force, without dropping its collective or inceptive one; as, vvv pev ovv, <5 avbpes, now therefore come, let us [at "vbpes] Trpoffevfapeada -npuTov rjf 0ew first, &c. Aristoph. Pac. 559. Mey may moreover exerl its restrictive
:

power.
VI. Mev ovv, like pev used in conclusion, especially when //, is the sum or result of what has been told in a long recital is collected : thus a messenger in the Phoenissa? of Euripides closes his narration of the Thebans' defence of their city, and the repulse of the enemy,

with these words, Trvpywv pev ovv

yrjs

e0\opev KaraoKafyas

els

Tt)v

irapovcrav rjpepav' el & evrv^rjs carat T0\onrov r/5e 777, Oeols pe\et. v. So St. Luke closes his account of the liberation of the Apos1203.

with ol fjiev ovv enopevovTO j^aipovTes: Acts v. 41." VII. Hence it suits the peroration of a whole speech: thus, eyw pelt ovv, a re yiywaKii), Traprjveaa, &c. Isocrat. Nicocl. [ad Nicocl. p. 6l. 1. 8. ed. Battie.] VIII. It is used in resuming a discussion interrupted by narration, or narration interrupted by discussion thus Aristotle resumes a discussion interrupted by an anecdote of Thales, with these words, QaXfjs fjiev ovv Xeyerai TOVTOV TOV Tponov eTribeifyv irotrjaafrdai Tfjs tro~ &C. effrt 6', wffrrep KadoXov TO TOIOUTOV ^jpr]fj.uTiffTiKov, <J)las' e'iirojjiev, de Rep. i. 7. and Thucydides, after a digression, thus resumes his
tles,
:

narration,
Kparrjs

>/ pev ovv eirtfiov\ri Totavrij TrapeaKevaZero. 6 be MTTTTOSee also Acts TOV Arjpoadevr] TrpoaTeffretXe, <&c. iv. 76", 77

xxviii, 5.

In these passages the transition is facilitated by the cooperation of 5e with pev ovv, as in the passage also above cited from Acts v. and
in St.

John

xix, 24.
in

transition in peneral is marked and association of these particles: e. g. ravra pev wv Oi apotfiaiwv ol Traibes aeicrav' TCIV irvparav b' ybav OVTWS e^dp^e ~M.va\Kas, Theocr. viii, 6l. eyw pev ovv IKCLVO. pot vopi8(it TO. etjOjjpevct' el be TL trv vnodys, fjyovpevos TrapaXeXeltyOat, epu)ra Plat. Pha3dr. p. 234. X. Mev ovv is used in the same manner as pev br} for continuation ; that continuation no more than transition from one part

IX.

And

the

same manner

made evident by the

being of the same subject to another: see Hebr. vii, 11. XI. For pev ovv the Ionic writers and the poets use pev vvv both for commencement and transition : as Herodot. e. g. vi, 109. " 27.
a

Hoogeven observes of

from Euripides, that the indication of conclusion is almost wholly in ovv, since The /uef is opposed to the following Se. same may perhaps be said of the words of
St.

the passage

elusion of the subject, follow these words, Iv S e rais Depots ravrais, &c. And the words jSouAov 8e KO.\ rovs &\\ovs, &c. immediately follow the passage presently afterwards cited from Isocrates. J. S.

Luke

for

immediately after the con-

110

MEN OYN,

&c.

XII. From the collective use of pkv ovv is derived its force in confirmation or asseveration, which of course is strengthened by the support of argument. This force ovv has alone ; but /uev, when not followed by be, increases it by its limitative or restrictive power. The particles exert the force now spoken of most frequently in affirmative answers, the arguments on which assent or affirmation is founded being understood, and to be assumed extraneously but some preceding words, or similar to some preceding, or some other words adjutory of the affirmation, being prefixed to p.ev ovv. E.g.
;

1. a

preceding word

ov Tre^oftrjrai re KOI beboiKev

apa boav

irovij-

plas ; Euth. beboiKe /uei' ovv : he does fear, in truth : Plat. Euthyp. (c. 13. ed. Fisch.) dp' ov% ovrws ; Pr. oi/rw jjiev ovv : Id. in Phileb. ov ?ret-

ffopeOa 'Hffioby \ Yletaofjieda /uef ovv : Id. de Rep. V. p. 469. (p. 43. ed. 2. Similar words : tip' ov robe l\v TO bevbpov, t<p' oirep %yes ^/uas; Bip.) Answ. TOVTO /nevovvavTo Id. Phredr. p. 230. (p. 286. ed. Bip.) ri aot tyalverai, <5 SwKjoares, 6 \6yos; ov% v-ireptyv&s TO. re aXXa, KCLI rols ovo:

fjiaffi

eipTiffdai

Socr. baipoviws

3.

Other words auxiliary to the affirmation

1.

7- (p- 354. ed. Bip.) iravreX&s pet' ovv : Id. de Hep. vi, p. 496. 1. 9. (Bip. 94.) trav7(dv pev ovv fj.a\tffra, Id. in Phileb. [p. 154. 1. 30. ed. Bas. 1.] iravv pevovv, Id. de Rep. v. p. 468. (p. 41. ed. Bip.) [and in Phileb. p. 154. 1. 24. ed. Bas. 1.] XIII. It is used in affirmative answers to anticipated objections stated interrogatively with a negative : as, ovbev ovv e^eis avrl rov

262.

ovv: ib. p. S34. (p. 294. ed. Bip.) : av&yKrj nev ovv, ib. p. vavraTraat ovv, ib. p. 269- (p. 368.
/jiev

^v

Bip.)

pev ovv, yes you have : Epict. Ench. c. 32. encouragement, in place of a//eXet, quiet your apprehensions. Thus in the Orestes of Euripides, the chorus, having been chidden by Electra for awaking her brother Orestes, replies, evbeiv nv ovv VLV ebofa, be easy; 1 think he still sleeps: v. 169.
beiTrvov
;

e-^ets

XIV. Also

for

[nay.]
corrective use,

confirmation expressed by ^ev ovv is heightened by its when something affirmed is substituted for something preceding, which is denied : thus in the Vesp. of Aristoph. the indictment against the dog ends with, Ti^fia. K\WOS OVKIVOS: to which Philocleon replies, ddvaros pev ovv Kvvetos, i\v aira dXJ nay, &c. v. 893. [898. ed. Br.] See also Aristoph. Ach. 285. Or when something more correct, or of more importance, follows, without denial of what precedes ; as, Philocl. efapapravw biKacZuv; Bdel. fcorayeXw/zeros fi&v ovv OVK eiraieis VTT avbpwv, ovs av JJLOVOVOV irpoffnvveis : nay, what is more : Aristoph. Vesp. 513. [515. ed. Br.] XVI. A?) being added, pev ovv bfj is both inceptive and hortatory : thus Socrates, after a definition mutually agreed on, begins, on pev olv bf) eTTtdvpia Plat. Phaedr. p. 237- (p. 6 e'pws, airavrt bfjXov
:

XV. The

301. ed. Bip.)

XVII. By transposition juev bfj ovv is formed ; of which pev bfi serves for transition, and ovv for conclusion or inference : as, eav pev bf} ovv els TTaypevr)v re biatrav Kat <jn\oao<j)iciv riKritry TO. /3eXr/u rfjs biavoias ayayovra, fjLOKaptov nal 6fjiovor)TiKOV rov et'Qabe fliov biayovfft :
if therefore,

&c.

ib. p.

256. (341. Bip.)

MENTOI.

Ill

1. MeVrot appears to be MENTOI, with the annexed particles.sometimes one compound word, at other times two separate particles in juxta-position the latter seems to be the case, when rot affirms, and be following is to be referred to per ; as, ra^v pev rot Trap^yyeXov, ra^y Se ra TrajoayyeXXo/zeva eiroiovv : Xen. Cyrop. ii. 4. 2. and so
;

in

iii.

3. 9.

When Se does not follow, rot may strengthen the limitation expressed by pev as, ov pev TOL eyw TOVOV carte's eifjii, I certainty am not in truth so much to blame, &c. Iliad. </>, 371. III. These particles are used in questions put for the purpose of eliciting assent rather than for information; as, etTre pot, <5 Iw^pares,
II.
:

OVK evdevbe pev rot Trodev Xeyerat 6 Bope*as TT)V 'SlpeiOviav apiraffat ; Socr. Xeyerat yap : Plat. Phaedr. p. 229. (p. 284. ed. Bip.) Socr. ffv &' etTre, ev OVK avTiXeyovffi pev btKaarrjpiois oi ciVTt&iKot ri bp&atv
',

rot;

Phaedr. rovr' avro ib. p. 26l. IV. That the corroborative power of rot is increased by the restrictive power of pev appears principally from answers in which something which precedes is repeated with emphasis ; as, ijperepov 5>) epyov ay e"ir], w$ eoiKev, e/cXea<70cu, rtVes re Kai Trolat tyvcreis eTrtr^Setae
:

ets

TroXews 0v\aic^v.
(t. vi.

Answ.

f]perepot>

pev

rot

Plat,
TO

374.

p. 243. ed. Bip.) q. d. ^uerepov

pev

&

de Rep. ii. p. aXXwi' ew Xeyetv.

[See note c, p. 198. of Abr. of Vig.] V. The serious affirmation of pev limitative and rot corroborative is particularly suited to oaths: opvvpt yap aoi nva. pevToi. riva Qeuiv Plat. Phaedr. p. 236. (299. Bip-) [Hoogeveen appears to have mistaken the sense of this passage. See Abr. of Vig. p. 199] VI. And to grave and serious speech elra rw pev Aa^/t^t atrtwLuciau. Dial. Mort. t. pevtj) TOV vlov, OVK abiKa pev TOL eVafles, e(f>r)v i. Hence to monition : thus Hermon to the philosopher Zep. 442. nothemis, who was making loud outcries on account of the hurts he had received, pefjivriao \ikv rot, w ZrjvodefjH, os OVK abiatyopov fjyrj TOV TTOVOV remember, however, O Zenothemis, &c. Lucian. Lapith. t. iii. So tamen, when for revera : Ov. de Pont, iii, 2, 30. p. 450. VII. They too speak seriously who urge or hasten any thing; hence pev rot in a hasty address Aristoph. Ran. 172. [See note c, p. 198. of Abr. of Vig.] VIII. Me> rot is used also, when what precedes having been refuted, or dismissed as unworthy of refutation, something is laid down as certain, and particularly urged thus St. Paul, having warned Timothy to shun profane and vain babbling, such as that of Hymenaeus and
'.

Philetus,

who

asserted that the resurrection

pei/Toi crrepeos OepeXios TOV

0eov

earrfKev,

being, whatever they

may

babble, this

was already past, adds, 6 &c. 2 Tim. ii. 19- the sense at least is certainly beyond all
be so,
thus,

controversy.
it

IX. Merrot is said to be adversative ; but when it appears to in reality confirms a clause or member opposed to another:

in Aristoph.

bi aiviypuv Qpacrar opus ye pet'roi crol epw, it confirms the opposition of the second clause to the first, efto a particular fected by opus, pev restricting the signification of epw
e\<*)

Ran. 6l. OVK

manner

bi'

alrtyp<ov t and rot confirming that restriction.

112

MENTOI.
put
in

it has especially when, after the apodosis instead of e. In [See p. 103. xiv.] this case the difference between it and be is, that be simply opposes adverse clauses or members; whereas p.iv rot affirms the opposed clause or member, in which it is, with limitation or restriction ; each

X. This apparently adversative use

is /uev, it

of

its

component

fjiev

Kal Tols

: vofjiov fjyov 7roXXo7s avalffxyvTO. eboKet TreTroirjKevat

performing its proper office. Thus, ireidov TMV {3aaiXeuit> Ketpevots' ttr^vporarov /ueiroi TOV cKelvwv rpoirov Isocr. ad Demon, p. 19. rols pet* ovv
particles
roils

VOJJLOIS,

viro

is fiev rot TO

tyavepov ovbets

Lucian. Lapith. t. iii. p. 426. Mev is sometimes suppressed in the first clause or member : ra ye pripara OVK epaQof rr]v pevToi biavoiav bietpt: Plat. Phredr. p. 228. (p. 283. ed. Bip.) So in Euthyphr. [p. 1. 1. 9- e d. Bas. 1.} And sometimes not only JJ.GV, but some preceding word, is understood ; as to Socrates
eroXjua Xeyeiv, yet

however

saying, shall we read the exordium? Phaedrus replies, ei aol ye boxe'i' pevTOi SrjTels, OVK eor* avroOi l Plat. Phaedr. p. 263. (357. Bip.) underst. a.vayvS)p.ev p.ev. XI. In this use of pevToi, o/zws is sometimes added : when one of the particles may appear redundant, unless opus be supposed to retain something of the signification of 6/jws, in the same manner.
o

Sometimes, says a military officer in Xenoph. Cyrop., / march in the front, and at other times in the rear ; e/K>i ftevroi ofjuas ireiQovTO.I vorepw I6vn t Iva edi^wrai Kal eirevdat Kal atyrjyeiffdai opolias iretdoor in the same manfjievot, ii. 3. 22. yet the soldiers obey me equally,
ner,
1.

&c.

in Plato de Rep. i. p. 329. (P- 150. ed. Brp.) [p. 371. w avdpwire' aajueveorara perroi avro azre45. ed. Bas. 1.] ev0r/^tet, is translated vero by Cicero, de Senect. c. 14. -, [. 47. p. tyvyov 17- ' penult, of Mr. Barker's fourth edition.] XIII. In those verses of Aristophanes, Trrwxpv pev yap j3tos Treptyi^eiSoyuevov, $jjv krsriv fjvjbev e-^ovra' TOV be Trevrjros,

XII. Merroi

^v

yveodat

5'

ctvrw

fj.r)bev, fit]

pevTOi

ft^6' eTrtXetTretv, Plut.

554.

Budaeus

translates yuevroi, vice versa, rursus, [on the other

hand ;] Hoogeveen,

tamen.
in Thucydides is frequently followed by ye, which separated from it by some other word, and affects not but the intervening word, [or the intervening word with fjievToi, others.] Thus, the Athenians, says Thucydides, after their battle with the Boeotians, set up a trophy, ov juevrot eV ye TW vavrt epyw f3eHere pevToi is iv. 72. (3ai(t)s ovbeTepoi TeXevrrfffavres aTreKpidrjcrav used adversatively, and ye limits kv TTCLVTI epyy, with respect at least to the total result of the engagement. So Brasidas tells the Thessalians, that he would not force a passage through their country ; ov he ought /zevroi a&ovv ye e'ipyeffdat, but yet he thought at least that not to be opposed: iv. 78. The name "EXXrjves was derived from

XIV. Me^rot
is

however

Hellen, says Thucydides, ov /ue^rot TroAXow ye ^povov r/Suvaro Kal airacrtv eKviKfjffat, but yet that the name could not obtain, at least for a long time, &c. i, 3. [See Abr. of Vig. p. 199. r. xii. and note <?.]

XV. 'AXXa HCVTOI is put for aXXa p)v in argumentation. Which do you think more prudent, says Tigranes to Cyrus, to punish so as

MH.

113

The latter mode, replies to benefit, or so as to injure yourself? Cyrus, would be to punish myself. 'AXXa av pevToi, rejoins Tigranes, ^ueyaXa y' ay cfyjuicuo, el TOVS aeavrov KciraKaivois Tore, OTTOTC ffoi 7r\etaTOV afrot eiei> KKTTiat)ai: Cyrop. iii, 1, 9. [and yet, or but, to do so

and

so,

as

therefore it

you propose to do, tvould be to injure yourself greatly ; would be imprudent to act as you propose.]

I.

OF THE PRIMARY POWER OF THE PARTICLE MH, TAKING AWAY BY ITSELF THE CERTAINTY OF ACTION.

I. The primary power of ju>) indicates a mind solicitous in wariness or taking heed, earnest in dissuasion and prohibition, ardent in deThese precation, vehement in aversation, eager in interrogation. affections or emotions are not denoted by ov, which simply denies : and the difference between the two particles is that /ij is prohibitory,

and ov negative.
p. 165.]
II.

[For more correct information, see Abr. of Vig.

in

The form
by

threefold,
effect,

When
flXcTre,

it

/u# takes away the certainty of action is or joined with some word having the same or, lastly, with a word, having the same effect, understood. takes away action by itself prohibitively, the imperatives
itself,

which

opa, npoaexe, preceding, it is construed either with an aor. 1. subj. as, /SXeTrere, p{j TIS vfids TrXavriffrj, take heed lest any man, &c. St. Mark xiii, 5. or with the imperative mood, as, opdTe, fjrj 6poe~iade t Matth. xxiv, 6. or with the indicative of the future, as, /3Xe7rere, pri TIS vfjids earai 6 avXayuytiv bta rijs But 0iXo<ro0ms, Coloss. ii, 8.

more frequently &c. are absent

the sense of prohibition those imperatives /3Xe?re, Rom. /ii) e'iirrjs, say not, x, 6. : see Coloss. ii, 21. : with the imperative, /u?) o'iov be'iv rjpds oi/roi Ka\ovs fyQaXfiovs ypa^ety, Plato de Rep. iv, p. 420. (p. 328. ed. Bip.)
in
:

thus, with the subjunctive,

fti)

dvayca2e

j'/^uas

roiavrrjv

ev&atfjtovlav

ro7$

tyvXafy

Trpoffcnrreiv,

ib.

But, as Thorn. Mag. teaches, when construed with the imperative mood, it must have a present tense ; when with the subjunctive, an aorist : [see Abr. of Vig. p. 166. 1. 31.] /u>) vvv XaKrjays, \iaao^a.i a. v irovrjpol, /*>) oiwTrare, Aristoph. Pac. 381. An aorist of the imperative, in the third person, is used by St. Matthew xxiv, 18. III. Greater emotion is expressed, when the imperative or subjunctive is suppressed after /D) prohibitory: as, opa /u^, viz. or TTpoaMVYiaris, see thou do it not: Revel, xix, 10. cf. xxii, 9bnrXovv avff uTrXov Tovveibos yiyverat' Kai yap piaelv TOVS bfiofy Aristid. Orat. ad Achill. bowls, KO.I 0o/3e7<70cu TIIV puj^r. Mrj av ye t. ii. p. 426. ed. Jebb. IV. When there are two clauses or members, the prohibition extends to both ; as, pri p eireffty yuei/ ffrtpye, voov 6' e^e KOI typevas
:

a\\r]

Theogn.

an infinitive mood follows it, the infinitive depends on something preceding, as in oblique phraseology, and then jo) forbids what is expressed by the infinitive thus, ere MrjSeiav, elirov rfjffbe teat y)]s e'w irepqv (ftvyaba, Eurip. Med. 274. Ou pe\pi) n jueXXei*'
V.
:
:

When

Hoog.

114

MH.

fjiri

Xeiv could not have been properly said. Xprj^aTtaOeyres KCIT* ovap, avciKafJi^at trpos 'Hpwbrjv, St. Matth. ii, 12. not OVK avaicafi^at. But infinitive VI. the seems sometimes, especially in poetry, to be
\lsevbca
pr}
fjujjiov

put independently with

KWS,
pr)

75.
vi,

for an imperative: e. g. pr} -n-XovTelv abiSo, pi) irtoreve ra^iera, [Phocylid. 3, 5. In prose : pi) curoppepQeaOai, u\X' eTfl KaKOTTjTa, 73.]
prj,

/3deiv,

Traffics

oppTjs TO

biKaiov aTrobibovai

Antonin.
it

els

eavr. iv,

14.

Add

15.

VII.

When

pr)

follows an imperative,

does not forbid the act

signified by the imperative, but some modification of it : as, rer/u?/<r0w bia TOV Ket'Tpov : Archimed. de Sphaer. et Cylindr. TTOff<f>alpa' fj.fi
ptff.

1.

VIII. Secondly, when certainty of action is taken away after words signifying fear and solicitude, pr) is construed usually with an aorist, especially with the first ; as, bebia, pi) rovrois per' CKCIVOV TroXepelv avayKaadutpev, Demosth. de Class, p. 73. <J)oj3r)Oel(ra, pri 6 veavioKos e^ayopevary TO aiy^os avrrjs, Lucian. Dial. Jun. et Laton. IX. When a verb has either no first aorist, or one seldom used,

construed with the second : bebtevai, Trudy avro : Plat. Phaed. TroXXa Kal ^oXeTra, tJv OVK ^/3oi/Xt>yue0a, be&oiKa, p.?) p. 78. ^ue7s els avayKrjv eXdwjJiev Troielv, Kat Kiv&vvevaw per irepi TUIV kv avrjf Demosth. Olynth. i. p. 3. [p. 13. 1. 19. ed. Reisk.] Ty xup? X. M^, after verbs of fearing, is construed not only with a subjunctive having a future signification, but with an indicative even of a past tense, when something already past, or already decided either affirmatively or negatively, is spoken of: f}v (dprjvr)*) SeSouca per, <5
is
'-

'AOrjvcuoi,

SeSouca,

p.ri

ayovres
0o/3ov^ue0a,

Demosth. [de
I.

\\i{Qap.ev t wvirep fals. Leg. p. 372.

:

ol
1.

Saveie?ojuei>ot, enl 1. ed. Reisk.] v\>v

iii,

/ii)

afjufioTepuv rifj.apTrjKajj.ef

Thucvd.

53.

[See Abr,

is construed with the optative mood, a.v in its poappears to be suppressed: [see Abr. of Vig. p. 167. 1, icai 11.] as in Iliad. 0, 329- and in Aristid. a<f>6bpa Selo-at (viz. eboKovv) fit} eTTidelvTo pot : Serm. Sacr. 1. p. 278. ed. Jebb. XII. Sometimes ^o/Sou/ueu, or some other verb expressive of fear, is understood ; as, fjfj \aJ3(acri a aa^voi, Eurip. Or. 77 *. [pr] ov X. Pors. 766.] Decimus, says Appian, used many precautions, pr) xpoVtos B. C. iii. p. 558. See Odyss. e, rj 7ro\LopKta yevoiTo,fearing lest, &c. 467. compared with 473. XIII. Thirdly, the certainty of action is taken away by ^>), when used in deprecation : for this use the optative mood is most suitable ; But a subjunctive is in as, /EIJ) TOVTO deos reXeo-ev, Odyss. v, 344. Aristoph. Pac. 376. fjr), irpos Qe&v, fifjiwv fcare/Trps, a*T(/3oXw ae : and in Plato, fj-rjt Trpos Atos, cnroffrys, de Rep. v. p. 506. and an indicative of the future, in the second person, in Euripides, fj.fj, Trpbsde&v, KYJPVKO.

of Vig. p. 167. XT. When it

13.]

tential sense

T0\priffets Qeveiv

Heracl. 272.
as of prohibition,
:

XIV. The vehemence of deprecation, as well increased, when the verb is suppressed after fir}

is

thus

Medea, when

ordered to go into exile, exclaims, /u?), Trpos re yoydrwv, KUI veoyupov Eurip. Med. 324. and still more by the reduplication of the

MH.
particle; as,
yur),

115
flewy
:

pi] jcaXea^s, Trpos

rwf

Aristoph. Vesp.

1409.

See Virg.'^n. xi, 2/8. Fourthly, certainty is taken away by pi}, when used in averIt is then construed with the optative mood sation. and, when the object of aversation has been mentioned before, yevoiro usually follows as, eirtpe vovpe v TTJ apapricf., tVa ?/ X"*P 15 TrXeovao-j? prf yevoiro,
[14-18. ed. Br.]

XV.

God forbid! Rom.

vi, 2.

So

v,

15.

and
;

xi,

1.

XVI. And in this use also //>} is emphatically repeated, the object of aversation being suppressed after it and to Mars as, "Apet be also? Tryg. p), p>] Aristoph. Pac. 456. Thus it is used for pqbaptis :
;
:

irporjcreffOe ri]v Trpos

TOVS 6eovs evaefieiav

pi],

'Affyvcuot,

jj.fi'

bewov

Dinarcb. in ed. Dem. p. 103. but pfi repeated is more energetic than prjbap&s. Aristoph. uses both in the same passage Tryg. povXeaQe Aaptry fioi Chor. (3oi prjbap&s. Tryg;. aXX' w Tra^eia Kal peyaXy ; Chor. pri, pj. Pac. Q26. XVII. Fifthly, pij takes away actuality, when a supposition or case is as, ris be put negatively, either with or without interrogation bovvai. bvvarai erepw, a Enchir. c. 31. [See Abr. ^ur/ e'^et avros; Epict. of Vig. p. l6o. 1. 33.] OVK were irpoariKetv ovbevt ap^rjv t ocrns fj)j Xen. Cyrop. viii, 1, 37. /3e\r/wr eirj TWV ap^opeyiov XVIII. Sixthly, it denies somewhat with respect to a thing put or regarded as actual, although not actual ; as, TTO.V bei'bpov JJLYI TTOIOVV

yap

Kal

alaxpov
:

KapTrov KO.\OV eKfcoTTrerot, &c. St. Matth. iii, 10. vii, 19. See also xviii, 13. and St. Mark vi, 34. Ov and ju>) are distinguished in Xen. Mem.

/3m be Kal avopla TI eanv ; up ov\, orav 6 Kpetrrii)V TOV dXXa piaaanevos, a.vayKciffV] Troieiv o TI civ ai/rw boKy XIX. Hence it has some similarity to condition; for pi} Kapicov ica\ov may be interpreted eav pfj iroifj. It is chiefly with a genitive case that pri is used with this sense as, 0eoD biborros, prjbev irovos Nazianz. i.e. Iff^yei fyQovos, Kal pf) bibovros, prjbev la^vet eav 6 0eos 5tSw, and, euv be pt) biby. Et pev yop> epov pij brjX&ffctVTOs, a j3ov\opai Troieli' vpas, biapapTavoire rijs epijs yv<ji>pr)s, OVK civ CIKOTUS Isocr. Nicocl. p. 56.
\,

2, 10.

pif Treiffcis,

',

II.

ON THE PARTICLE MH, WHEN JOINED WITH OTHER WORDS TAKING AWAY CERTAINTY OF ACTION.
As
pi]

I.

takes

away
effect
:

having the
TI

same

av

prj tKeHvoi btiatv

aptly joined with other particles ovbev yap kanv fjplv ayaQov, 6' Plato Eulhyphr. (c. 18. ed. Fisch.) and thereactuality, it as with av
is
:

fore

it

fitly

follows OTO.V,

compounded of

ore

and ar, because orav

in

signifies uncertain time : orav ye aXrjdri pi) o'irjrat olupevos, Plat, Theaet. and us eav in St. Luke vii, 13. cf. viii, 18. and av> when

av

affects the whole sentence, of which p?j, with the word to which it is added, constitutes a part as, uvrv yap av arroreXotro KaXXtwra TUIV de Rep. opyavwv e/caorov, pr) vroXXoTs epyois, aXX' e^t bovXevov Aristot. itself take i. here indeed 178. away actuality although p. pi) may by by introducing a condition, for it may be explained by el pjj and the
;
:
:

116
negative particle employed,
as, el %s cube,

MH.

when not in the conditional clause, is ov: OVK av airtQave JJLOV 6 abe\<i>6s, not urj av cnredave. This is more evident in conditions constantly denoting something whence fjij is most aptly subjoined to el, euv, and the like uncertain conditional particles. Thus, eay rals yXwo-jrats TWV dr0pa7rwf XaXw Kai
;

rSiV
K<j.v

dyyeXwv,
fj,r)

bia

ireipwvTat:

1 Cor. xiii, 1. /ZT) e^w, ye"yoj'a ^aX^cs rfX&v : XP^-iariortfCtyS bvviovTai 7ropieiv, bt' aXXijs alrlas TOVTO Thus it elegantly concludes a Arislot. de Rep. i. c. 9.

aycnrr)V be

r//s

sentence with a double condition, ei re ris faiaiv, el re prj Plato Phaedr. p. 277- the preceding verb being understood and also after re, signifying a condition : ayopagetv lecrrt, ef $ re TrwXe?*' e0' Trpos eyue, Aa/ja^w be JM'I Aristoph. Ach. 722. II. Because what we have in view is not yet attained, [and so not actual,] jjLrj is very frequently subjoined to particles signifying the final cause as, eVSov KaQeipfas, tva 0i/pac?e fjtrj '07, not Ira ov : AriseV vu elypv rows 'iva pr} y ayiaim, 1 Cor. xii, 24. toph. Vesp. 70.
:
:

eerTrXows row \tjjievos e^0pa|ae, OTTWS pr} es avrbv, Thucyd. iv, 8. and with a^

p rols 'A.6rivatois

<f>opf.daa.aQai

between:
vi.

Trav

epyov

Trpar-

rerras,

OTTWS ai^

jjirj

TreioOij:

Plat,

de Rep.

p. 494. (p.

91. ed.

Bip.)
III.

When
:

as,

t'Trt

an optative follows, av potential seems to be suppressed : rov rwrov e<f>epov t rw ^e7pe es roviriaut ^vjUTrXefCorres, orrws /LtjJ

aTTOTrnrroi

Thucyd.

iv, 4.
:

IV. "OTTWS /ur/ is construed with a future indicative also aXX' fiGpei, Kara Ttjs TrweXov TO Tpfjp 6Vws pr) \bvfferatl Aristoph. Vesp. 141. although with the future the manner rather than the end is signified : how, or in what manner he may be prevented from escaping. V. The final cause is indicated also by els with the neuter article and infinitive mood with JUT),* following ravra be TVTTOI fyu o-av, els TO p^ elvai ijpas eiriOvprjTas KaK&v: I Cor. X, 6. not els
:

ctvai.

Thus av

taking away actuality are sometimes suppressed. suppressed not only when ^177 must follow, even without such suppression, because of OTTWS preceding, (sec. iii.) but also when follows oTrore or, (which comes to the same thing,) orore is in fjirj that case put for oTrorar, either in its potential use, or in that in which it renders the sense indefinite, with an optative mood following; as, dei, OTrore pr} aXXo rt ffirovbawTepov Trparrotev, ravr^ TTJ TraibiJji e^pwvro : Xen. Cyrop, ii, 3, 20. whenever they were not doing, &c. So viii,

VI.

The words
is

1.

38. VII.

When

/IT/

is

construed with a participle, an indefinite person

[or thing] is signified, a> being latent ; which appears, when the participle is resolved into a verb, with os oV, or os eav, preceding it : as, TTO.V bevbpov, prj iroiovv (for o ear f*rj Trotj;) Kapirbv, e/CfcoTrrerat : St. Matth. vii, 19. See also xii, 30. VIII. "I^a, or O'TTWS, is suppressed in xxxiv, 16. of Son of Sirach :

&s avdpwTros, rd irapaKeifJ-eva ffot, ical prj Stayun<T(J, pr) piffrjOrjs. IX. Nor is tra only with a subjunctive defective, but av, in its AQrjvri bvv* "A'ibos Kwer)v t nn ptv potential use, with an optative i Sot o/3pt/zos "Aprjs: Iliad, e, 845.
,
:

MH.

117

HI.__OF THE NEGATIVE,

CAL, USE OF

AND AT THE SAME TIME MH.

ELLIPTI-

I. Mi) also, as well as ov, denies ; but with this difference, that ov denies the whole, p) only a part ; or, which amounts to the same, pj denies the predicate, and not the subject : and here an ellipsis is to

be particularly observed for a word is very frequently to be supplied from what precedes: thus, TOV ep&vra re, KCU /u), Kpwovpev: Plat. Pheedr. p. 237. (p. 301. ed. Bip.) Kptvovpev comprehends the whole: the parts are rev cp&vTa re Kal p] epwyra, the last word being assumed from what precedes. If the particle employed had been ov, Kptvovfj.ey t and not epaJn-a, must have been repeated so p. 238. (p. 304. ed.
; :

Bip.)
II. In this use /uj) elegantly closes a sentence; as, kv J re avayKij TO irXfidos 7rXava<70at, Kal kv pfj : Plat. Phsedr. p. 263. (p. 356. ed. Bip.) and a little afterwards, TOV epwra Trorepov ywfiev clvai ruv afji<J>iff(3r)Tr)(rin(i)V t rj

TcHy

fji]

III. It denies a predicate understood, which has been affirmatively expressed as to a fore-mentioned subject : orav Kpiveiv fjieXXrjs tyvaiv Kal p.ij, Plat, de Rep. vi. p. 486. (p. 73. ed. Bip.) <j>iX6cro(f>6v re

IV. By an idiom peculiarly Greek, /ur/ with the article before it denies eliiptically what has been before affirmed of another subject : as, <t)<T7Tp VTTO TWi' TTTreviv betvwt', ol ju r), TeXevrwiTes u.7TOK\eiovTai f for ol HT) beiroi Plat, de Rep. vi. t. vii. p. 75. ed. Bip. V. The ellipsis is evident in the foregoing examples it is supplied in Plat. Apol. Socr. p. 29. (c. 15. ed. Fisch.) VI. To make the difference between prj and ov plain, it is to be observed, that JUT) is used when either the whole is denied by opposition of the contrary, as, typ T) ov; Plat. Apol. Socr. p. 29. or when
: :

a whole, different from what precedes, is denied; as, aTroKTeivai jjie bvvat'rat, /3Xd^/ot & ov : Epict. Ench. c. 79[The Reader should be apprized that Professor Hermann considers this doctrine of Hoogeveeti

about the difference of /z>) and ov as entirely erroneous.] VII. MT) denies in conjunction with an infinitive, being prefixed to a part of a proposition, not the whole: /3ov\et /^r; Trpoo-ayopevetv e/*e; Aristoph. Ach. 1112. [1113. ed. Br.] Here p) affects npoffayopevetv,
not /3ov\et

you

will you refrain from addressing me ? [may I beg that : will say nothing to me ?] apa betvbs r) ro0', ware iratra fir) beSotKwai, so as to contemn all dangers, to fear nothing: Id. Vesp. 1086. VIII. And so with a participle : rov be KXeoS^ov, Ka& ov o \j;6<f>os

Lucian. Conviv. p. fj.rj irpoaTrotovfuevov Tr\v a.Tr6ppi\fjt.v 429. [not taking it to himself; i. e. dissembling his consciousness that he had done it.'] ovv kirotriaev ?/ "Epis ^T; irapovaa, because TI she ivas not one of the company : Id. dial. Panop. et Galen, [p. 195. D. ed. Salmur.] IX. But ov also may be construed with a participle, when some whole, and not a part only, is denied as, ewpa ovs eibelev <j>i\ovveyevero,
:
'

ras avrovr, rovrovs

pi(T~ii>

ov 6vr/u^rovs

Xen. Cyrop.

viii,

3,

49.

118

MH.

MH TAP.

where

eo> &

ov does not affect bvvafj.erous alone : epj>ras /iv els virepfioXijv, aTToXavetv, ov roX^uoivras, i. e. ov roX/jaivras awoXavetv : Lucian.

Timon. c. 14. X. What has been hitherto said of p), and of the difference between it and ov, applies to the compounds also of /IT), and to the difference between them and the compounds of ov prjbels, /u^iceri, ot/SeJs, ovicert, ovbafj.c7>s ov&eVore, &c. See St. pqbautis, jUTfSeVore, Mark xii, 24. 1 Timoth. i, 7. Epict. Enchir. c. 18. Acts xxviii, 18. and ov is plainly marked in the XI. The difference between t following passage w Xpvtravra, fATjbev ore Xvirovvritiv at rov 'Ao-en/: )

p/ov TOVS

irapaKeXevcreis'
fj.ii

ovbeuta yap

ovrws

ecrrat

KaXij

irapatvcffts,

tfrts

a>

OVK dyaflovs avdrjuepbv aKovaavras ayaBovs Troirjcret. ovv rooras ye, et fir) efjnrpoadev TOVTO /ie//eXeri7cor6s clef ovb'
6Was

cLKovriffTcis,

ov&e

fir)*

/7r7reas

ye' oifbe
:

pf)i>

TO.

ye <rw^iara IKOVOVS
iii,

irovelv, f/y pr) irpoffOev ytrKriKores wviv

Xen. Cyrop.

3, 50.

Mr)bev

a prohibition, not a negation ; ovbepla irapa/veo-ts, because it is a manifest negation ; rovs /LU) ovras ay. not OVK oVras, on account of the nature of the participle. On the contrary,

\VTTOVVTVV, because

it is

OVK av
ov,

ffwfjara,

ovS' a/coriaras, ovSe p^v tTTTreas* oibe fjiriv TO. ye because it is negation that is expressed ; but fjv /ZT), not fjv because the clause is conditional and so et /Ltr) epirpoodev before.
To%OTas,
:

IV.

OF THE INTERROGATIVE USE OF MH.

I. gives emphasis to questions that are figurative, and not put for the sake of information : as, pfj TTTJ boKovpev aoi OVK uvayKuHa eKaara bie\r)\v6et>at ; Plat, de Rep. vi. p. 486. (p. 74. ed. Bip.) So Rom.

M)

iii,

3.
II.

The emphasis is increased by asperity; ft)? a.ve\elv pe av OeXeis, ov Tpowov avelXes %0es rov AiyvTrrtov ; Acts vii, 18. Mi) av fiel^wy el rov Trarpus fiuwv 'A.(3paan ; St. John viii, 53. III. Since a desire of discovery is common to persons conjecturing, the conjectural paris fitly prefixed to suspecting, and inquiring, eVetra be elcrrjet pe, [Jirj apa TO VTTO TMV TroXXw^ ticles apa and Trore

Xeyopevov aXrjOes y, whether what is commonly said, or the common saying, may not perhaps be true: Lucian. Lapith. t. iii. p. 441.
1. M?) deprecatory, and TAP, with the annexed particles. in : are used as, eKwv OVK aKoXetyw. ratiocinative, replies yap elliptically Glauc. prj yap. no, do not, I pray : Plat, de Rep. vi. p. 509. The elthus, KaXwselTras, 6'rt efcwr OVK airoXei^a)' tKerevu may be

MH

lipsis

supplied

if the

The nature of the phrase will be more evident, deprecation be changed into negation ; KaXws elects' ov yap aTroThe ellipsis is supplied in Lucian. Dial. Menel. and Xenrreov ovbev. Prot. [p. 193. E. ed. Salmur.] It. Tap causative also is joined with /o) interrogative, elliptically : ciXXoi eXeyov, Olros eartv o Xptaros. "AXXot be eXeyov, M^ yap et: r^s FaXtXa/as 6 Xpi<rros ep^erai ; St. John vii, 41. [q. d. why how can that be ? for is it possible that Christ can come out of Galike ?] The
yap
pri
r.i

airoXel^ys.

MH

OTI,

c.

nature of the ellipsis will be seen more plainly, if ov yap negatively be This is not Christ, for Christ put instead of pi} yap interrogatively. will not come out of Galilee. III. But in the following passage each of the particles retains its proper force distinctly and independently of the others, ^77 being
proliibitive, [or deprecatory,]
ov^fl

yap causative, and ye restrictive

rfjs

ris

TroXews ye, pr)b' epov ; Demosth. de Cor. [p. 295. 1. 9. ed. Reisk.] Tap gives a reason for his having said oov, and ye limits TroXews. TV, And so in p) yap &// : dXXa TO ye irpoaipelffQai ra /3eXnorra 6
crov, pff

KaT7rrvffev av

yap

batpuiv OVK a(j)aipr}aTai,

:

>}

yap

b)j Kal n/s

yvwprjs fjpatv ov

Kariaf)(yffeie %

where brj appears to be superaddilory or augmentative. Synesius [M// yap ot) is in the passage last cited from Demosth. See also Abr. of Vig. p. 164. r. ix.] V. M?) yap ovv also is said It is not fit, says Pyladts to Orestes, that Menelaus should enjoy prosperity, and that your father, yourself, your sister and your mother should perish ; and that he should possess your habitation after having recovered his wife by your
:

father's arms ; pi] yap ovv yrjv en, el pf) Vi Keiry (Helen) <f>aaya.vov (TTracrto) peXav, Eurip. Or. 1147. [1145. ed.Pors.] Mi) is expressive of a negative wish oty is collective, therefore. [I should explain yap by the following ellipsis, rather than by Hoogeveen's improbable periphrasis : Menelaus ought not to prosper ; and he shall not prosper ;
;

for, &c.]
1. An OTI AH. OTI FE, OTI, ellipsis o or Xeyotpi after pr) in pn on gives that combination a signification equivalent to not only: it differs from pt) povov in that it conjoins unequal things, whereas /nr) JJLOVOV may join equal things : ovbevl av ort Trpolk'a boirjs, dXX* ov6' eXarrov rrjs afyas Xa/5wv : Xen. Mem. i. /u?) ov6' av ryyuets da^aXujs epyaoifjieOa, pr) on rrfv TOVTIOV, dXX* p. 731. See also Flat. Ep. vii. p. 01/6' av rrjv fiperepav : Id. Cyrop. iii, 2, 21.

MH

MH

MH

--

329II. Strictly speaking, neither is ore put for povov, nor does prj on is understood ; as in those words signify not only ; but rather povov of Plato, veos ael ytyvopevos, ra.ce a.7ru\\vs, Kal Kara rpt'^as, K'at erapf:a, Kal typTrav TO ffwpa, Kal pi] on Kara TO awpa, aXXa Kal oara, Kal

alpa,

pi)

&c. Conviv. p. 207. (p. 240. ed. Bip.) i. e. Kal povov Xeyotpi, on Tabe axoXXvs Kara TO ffwpa, &c. The ellipsis is of py OTI. supplied in Philipp. ii, 12. where py ws is used instead III. Sometimes another word intervenes; as, piiyuponTov aXXa Kat ovs tyofiovvTat, pa\\ov TOVS alcovpevovs alcovvrat T&V
Kal KOTO. TI}V -^v^ljv,
ol

avdpwxoi : Xen. Cyrop. viii, 1, 28. IV. Sometimes ye confirmative or corroborative

Bepts, prj
vii,

is

added
:

as, ov

yap

on ye
11.

Oveiv, dXX'

ove

eirifiaivetv

rov vew

Heliodor.

JEthiop.

V. When what exceeds, or is most urged, is placed last, if the former part of the sentence is affirmative, dXXa, or aXXa Kal follows in but if the former part the latter, as in the last example from Plato first examples from is negative, dXX' ouSe follows in the latter, as in the
:

120

MH

OY,

MH

DTK.

MHAE, MHTE.

Xenophon. But when that which has the greatest stress laid on it, or is most urged, precedes, /u^ OTI, or pr) OTI ye, follows, aXXa disappearing; and the particles may then be rendered much less: &are
ovbe oiroaoi Tives avrols
elertv ol /3aertXe7s,

e/jeXXov evprjffeiv,

jjiri

OTI r^v

py<* trot /ua6etf, on yeffrpaTiav: Aristid. pro Quatuorv. p. 429. yevrjTaf TO be TTWS, ovbe ayyeXois evvoelv, (jfj ort ye ffot ovy%<t)pr}oo[Ji.ev : Gregor. cited by Budaeus, p. 479VI.
A>) also
r)

confirmative
brj

is

added

KO<

Xdyw

eyrlv aKovetv OVK

OTI

epyy

1. In OYK. ov, or tf OVK before a vowel or OY, diphthong, or /ni) ov% before an aspirated vowel or diphthong, also prj ov^l, each particle has manifestly its own proper and separate office, when prj interrogates directly : as, JJYI OVK ifcovaav ; have they not heard? Rom. x, 18. pij OVK eyvw 'Ic-pmjX ; ib: v. 19. So 1 Cor.

MH

MH

Plat. Phuedr. p. 240. (p. 308. ed. Bip.)

ix, 4.

II.

After verbs of fearing,

yu?)

in

p/ ov expresses suspicion or doubt

KCU
v/.tas, pr)
iii,

as to

what

is

feared

vTTOTrrevo/uev

ov KOIVO\ a7ro/3J77e, lest

you should prove not impartial: Thucyd.

roffavTrjv oo(f>iav,

53. SeSonca, p) OVK

e^w

Ifear I have hardly so great wisdom: Xen. Mem. Sometimes the verb of fearing, or the kindred verb opa, or ii, 3, 10. the like, is suppressed : aXX' OTTWS ^7) ovj^ olds T eVoyuat, but I doubt I shall not be able : Plat, de Rep. vi. p. 506. (p. 115. ed. Bip.) So Iliad, a, 28. III. Mri ov is joined with an infinitive; when effect is signified:
T<JJ

"iffov

?) 7rapaf.ivOiov t y Ttvas fjbovus bicovs, Trotrfffet TOV br) epwpevy irolov Plat. Pha3dr. \p6vov OVVOVTL, ju?) ovy\ ITT' ea\a.Tov eXdelv nqbias p. 240. (p. 307. ed. Bip.) and with caution ; elite pot, rl Qeicofiieoda T&v\iQwv t (as if taking heed) pf) ov KaTaaiveii> TOV avcpa TOVTOV es OVK eK(j)evyi TTJ aXrjOeiq. p.^ OVK CTTOQotvtKtba', Aristoph. Ach. 310. veibtffTov elrat, Plat. Phaedr. p. 277. (p. 386. ed. Bip.) or prevention ; roaov 5' eKo^Trao-e, ftr)b' av TO ae^ivov trvp viv elpyaBeiv Atos, ro fi?) ov Kar' afcpwv TrejoyA/uwv eXeti/ TroXi^ : Eurip. Phoeniss. 1183. or with a verb of pretermitting before it : ovbe 0eXw TrpoXiTrelv roye, /^j) ov TOV aOXtov : Soph. Electr. 136. or of abstaining; fjLor ffrova-^elv TruTep' And ov TroXiTrjv TiOevai, Aristid. Orat. in Apellam. OVK cnre^ovTai with negative words preceding; vvv juer, w 'AXe^ai'Spe, OVK av eapvos yevoto jjr] OVK e/jos vlbs etvat you will not deny that you are my son : Lucian. Dial. Mort. t. i. p. 94. So, OVK av efapvos yevoio prj ovj(l <f>appaKov airobecoffQai Kp/rw^i enl TOV Trarepa, you will not deny that you sold poison, &c. Id. Lapith. p. 440. [See Abr^ of Vig. p. 163. r.

b&

iv, v, vi. p,

167.

1.

31.]

is

1. Mrfe and /u^re differ in this, that relative, /u^re copulative : yet, as be is sometimes copulative, being put for KCU or for re, so fjirjbe may sometimes be put for /u>/re. These

MHAE, MHTE.

After /) particles differ from ovbe and oi/re, as pit differs from ov. or priT, follows ft^re, after oil or ovrc, oi/re : vpels 6' Aiytvees OVTC
Tplroij ovre reraproj, oi/re bvubtKaToi, ovr'

ev Xoyw,

oi/r'

Lv

api&fjif).

Orac.

MHIIOTE.

121

ap. Suid. ; but it may be otherwise, when the tenor of discourse is interrupted by a fresh partition^. The following particulars are to be observed : first when after ov or //>), ovbt or nrjbe follows, then in the first division or clause of the sentence per is to be understood, as correlative to be in the compound following jurj Tvpfiov fydinevwv avopvlfys, JJLII& aBeara betfys fjeXty :
:

Phocyl. 95. i. e. p) avopvfys /ue>. Add St. Matth. vii, 6. 1 John ii, after an affirmative part of a sentence, 15. Pythag. v. 37. Secondly, or at least after a part which is negative or prohibitive, /uijSe and ovbe follow rather than /ur/re and ovre : as, (j>oira KrjpvKeffai Xtyv00dyyoifTi fceXevwy, K\rjbr}v els

Iliad,
is

ayopijv KtK\r]<TKetv avbpa exaffTOV, prjbe fio<j.v : Thirdly when there are many divisions or clauses, p) put once, and p^be many times afterwards, as in Phocyl. 168. sqq.
i,

12.

when there are two or more distinct prohibitions, or when Fourthly, two or more parts of one proposition are denied, /ur/re, prjre are used, not ovre, ovre as, /u>;re yajjioK\07reiv, ju^r' (ipcreva KvTrpiv opivew, fj.rjre boXovs paTTTetVj /a/0' a'lfjLUTt X e a /"a/yew Id. Novderttc. 1. So St. Matth. xi, 18. Fifthly when three or more things are denied, those of the same kind are denied by ^re, those of a different kind by prjbe :
: :
'(

as, ^LabbovKoloi fjiev yap \eyovffi, fjirj elvai avaaraaw, f^rjbe ayye\ov t ju/re TTvevpa : Acts xxiii, 8. In a single passage of Plato's Parmenides, ov, ove, oi/re, ov5e, p/re, /u?/re, ovre, ovre, ov5e, jLtJ?re, /u//re, &c. occur with surprising variation, each particle preserving in every place its peculiar force. That pasdXX' e$ 'iaov or, 'iffov det eirj eai/r^J, which sage, d\\a f.ir)v avro jieyeOos will serve to illustrate what is said of the use and difference of those particles, is in p. 150. (t. x. p. 124. ed. Bip.) [p. 147. ! 48. ed. Bas. 1.] II. When what is expressed in the latter of two clauses or members is less than what is expressed in the former, which is denied or prohibited, fjtrjbe is emphatical, and may be rendered not even ; and in this use there is an ellipsis, to be supplied either from the first clause, or from something extraneous: ot orparr/yot prj tfvovs \OVTS TOVS fjikv

Kal avfjfjici^ovs ayufft

^tepwfft,

TOVS be TroXeyu/ovs

fjirjbe

bpwffiv

'.

Demosth.

de Rep. Ordin. p. 68. Let not the generals with their foreign troops harass and plunder the allies, while they do not even come in sight of the enemy : for, but as to the enemy, not only not harass and plunder him, but not even come in sight of him. So 1 Cor. v, 11. Of the second kind of ellipsis the following is an example OTTWS pev eyw a^dofjiat rpe^xur v^uas, /UTJ&' vTroyoetre Xen. Cyrop. iii, 3, 20. for Trurrevere /uev, juqd' vTro^oelre, believe not, nay suspect not even.
:

/LJ>)

III.
fjtrjbe

And

in this use jurjSe follows

pyre

/u^re Xaju/xa-etv erepov erepov

TWV

vTreoT/juepwv,
1.

Demosth. adv. Mid.

These
particles are

p. 386.

sometimes separated by other avrov bp^^evoi TTOTC atytat. /ue/S.OVL TrapaaKevr) eTreXdwatv l Thucyd. iv, 1. So ix, 29- anc^ Aristoph. Pac. 487- [438. ed. Br.] dXXa /i^roi Trore Sicnreipav Xd/3otjut : Synes.

MHIIOTE.

words:

tyofiovftevot'Adrjvaiovs, prj e

P. 479. II. Ilore

is

an adverb of time

and with a signification of indefinite

Hoog.

1*2

MHT10TE.

time, explicit or implicit, it is joined to p/ in all the uses of the latter; signifies the final cause, something to be avoided being spoken of, it takes away so much from the certainty of the thing, as caution may prevent ; and then Iva or OTTOIS is understood before : thus, 'iffdt evvoStv TV avribiKu arov ret^v, {.trjirore ae irapaby 6 fji^TTore avTtbtKos T$ KPLTT) i St. Miittli. v, 25. lest at any time, &c. See also "I^a is actually added by St. Luke xiv, 2$. xiii, 29. and Hebr. ii, 1. iVa pfiirore iravres ol Oewpovvres apwrat fj.iraieti> avry. III. When pi) is prohibitive, TTOTC excludes all time /i^Trore <bev-

When

yovT avbpa iir eXTribi, Kvpve, (piXfjffrjs Theogn. 333. do not ever or at any time. Here not only iva, but also /SXeVe, opa, or irpoyexe, is understood. IV. The ellipsis of the imperative is supplied in Hebr. iii, 12. where /n/7rore is construed with a future of the indicative. See also St. Luke xxi, 34. V. It is construed with an infinitive mood in oblique phraseology, in TroXXas yereiov Tovb' av eKrelvai Xtras, ol/uat be irarepa Eurip.
:

(ucrat Orest. 29 1 [f") T ^s reKovffqs, tytyos Pors. 285.] VI. It has the same force after words signifying fear or solicitude, as in the final cause, or in prohibition ; and in that situation it is construed with the subjunctive of the first aorist, or of the second, when the first is wanting or little used ovbev beivov, pfiirore rj a\\rf

ju^TTore TCKOVffTis els atyayas

iroXts Trjoos

TOVTOVS,

t]

TTjOos

465. (p. 35. ed. Bip.) VII. M^Trore, as />), is used in deprecation, with an optative mood, Trore excluding all time: /i^Tror', w T&KVOV, K\eos roiovbe aol yevoer'av
v<f
its

Plat, de Rep. v. p. aXX>;Xous bt^offTarriffy Add 1 Maccab. xii, 40.' Hebr. iv, 1.
:

'EXX^ywv \a(3e?v

Eurip. Phoeniss. 579.

VIII.

From

its

signification of uncertain time ^Trore has acquired

conjectural use:

fceXevow

a.fffyaXiffdijvat

fi/Ltepas, fj.i']irore

^wo-iv avrov : IX. In this use

(lest perhaps) eXOovres ol fjiaOrjTal St. Mattli. xxvii, 64.

it is
:

TOV rafyov ecus rrjs rptrrjs avrov VVKTOS, K'Xe-

being interrogative Athen. xiii. p. 586.

p)7rore

construed with an indicative mood also, pff e beH ypa^etr avrtTfjs 'AvOeias "Avreinv ;

fitly understood ; as in biaXoyt^ofievwv TTO.VTWV ev rals Kapbicus avrGtv Trept St. Luke iii, 15. TOV 'Iwa^vov, jArjTrore avTos e'ir) 6 Xptoros XI. This particle suits suspicion and circumspection, being construed with a subjunctive mood VTTOTTTOS be yevopevos 6 dp^tcpei/j, 2 Maccab. iii, 32. and doubt : yu^Trore yuT/Trore bia.Xr)\jjiv 6 ftatrtXevs a^iy by avrols 6 Qeos ^erdvotav, (/ perchance : 2 Timoth. ii, 25. XII. When tipa conjectural is added, Trore has rather a signification of time : as, TO pkv yap avrtKpvs aireveyKaffOat ypa<j>fjv icar' avrov
:
: :

So St. John vii, 26. X. When an optative mood follows, av potential may be

irapaxpfjfjia

OVK eboKifjiaZov,
:

KO.I bt

at some time) ayptavavres

TOVS biKdffTas
fiLl.

ol

0t'Aoi

eKelva be, fjrjTrore apn (lest perhaps TOV J^uKpaTovs e|a\//(u<Tt cor' avrai*
fjirjicore

V. H.
:

viroppvfjs els IbitaTifffioy

13. eVreraaflw aol Trpooro^f ii, Epictet. c. 45.

apa

XIII. MfjiroTe

is

the purpose of softening

sometimes used when no doubt really exists, for what might otherwise appear too harsh or

MHIIft, &c.

MHITftl.

123

Xvfi//<rerat'

Uiicourteous : tav ?/ e avQpunrwv fj ftov\>] avrrj rj TO epyov rovro, eav &e CK Qeov ecru', ou bvvnafte KaraXvaat auro,
:

KOI 6e()fj.a^oi evpeOiJTe

Acts

v,

39-

does not absolutely nullify the thing denied, but merely doubts, Trore being either conjectural or significative of time aireKpidrjffav e)e at 0port/jot, \6yovvai* p-rjiroTe OVK apKevrj St. Matth. xxv, 9. This passage is cited on account of r/yu7v KO.I vuiiv the ellipsis; for OVK pertains to apjceoT/, not to/j?;7rore, OVK apKecry being equivalent to aTroXtirr/. The ellipsis being supplied, the full phrase
M//7Tore ou, like
ju>) oi/,
: :

XIV.

would be,

JUD)

yeVotro,

'iva yu//:rore

OVK apKeay.

1. imriOTE. also, a particle of MHFinrE, but yur/7rore usually respects the time, as well as Trore, is joined to prj future ; /^>;TTW terminates the past with negation, and, on account of
:

MH

--

ny

conjoined with particles taking away actuality, as for as the Greeks say el ^u>), not et ov, so like einep ra-ye Trpaira (o^oyuara viz.) /ur/Trw they say ei ^//TTW, not et OVTTIO ovros epol TTOcKeiTo, Plat. Cratyl. p. 438. (t. iii. p. 342. ed. Bip.) not yet : Deinosth. Philipp. iii. p. 46. Xe/ie7, K$V nr)trw fta\\rj II. M//TTW, as well as pr), is put before an infinitive in oblique
yuiy,

the nature of
el,

is

ear, K$V,

and the

phraseology : rovro brjXovvros TOV n^e^aros TOV ayiov, JUI/TTW ire(j>areHebr. ix, 8. pwn'dai TYfv TWV a.yiii)v bbov III. And as pf) is usually joined with a participle, so ^TTW, not ovirti) : veov ovra, KCU ri TO -^prjaTOV KCil fjtj) : Plat. prjira) \6yov e^oi^ra, de Rep. v. p. 475. (p. 56. ed. Bip.)
'.

IV. Fe restrictive

is

added
irp'iv

to

/UJ/TTW

Socr.

*:at

eyw TOV

Trora/uov

rnvTOv biafias aTrepy^nuai,

VTTO (rov TI ^.elSiov a.vayKaadfjvat.

I

Mj/Trwye, <J ^uKpctTes, Trpiv a.v TO Kav/uia TrapeXdy Plat. Pliaedr. p. 242. (p. 310. ed. Bip.) V. Ti also is added to p/ Iliad, b, 234. : VI. Mr) TrwTrore is, not as yet, or never as yet ovb

Phaedr. not yet at least:

yap

et\>700at

<f>vyovTos ijfjias:

mode
o'pa,
>'

MHIlflS. or manner
or opa iva,

eywye at^aXwroj' Tavrrjv Xen. Cyrop. iii, 1, 3?.

1.

rofj,i(*>,

airayov TYJV aftf aov ye fti] TTWTTOTC

Hws added
what
rot
is

as to

to

to pi} gives a signification of indefinite be shunned or doubted ; and o>a,

is

5'w

or the like,

usually understood before

it
:

Atos

e7ro7rt'c?eo yuJ/nj', JUJ/TTWS

e,

147. underst. 7va.

(raro, /i//7rwsovce aov 0e/o-/?rat II. verb also or noun signifying fear

Iliad. peTOTrivOe KOTEffaapevos ^a\7ralyr] Et yap o Qeos TWV KCLTO. fyvffiv K\ab(t)V OVK e^et: Rom. xi, 21. underst. opa.

stood, as SetVas in the following passage:

riiv TOtavTTjv eTTtaTr/fjtrjv,

or solicitude may be under/cat OVK us drt^acjwj' Xeyw

ToaavTCis
5//cas
fyevyotfjii
:

priirws

eyw MeX/rov
is

Plat. Apol. Socr. p. 19.

This

ellipsis

supplied by Homer, Iliad,

:

e,

298.
III.

Mrjirus

is

used

in

a dubitative sense

araaras,

TretpT/o-w, /nryTrws

^at irobas olvos e-^y: V. 506.

5.

by Theognis dXXa y whether in some

manner, or tvhether perhaps.

IV. .In
1

Thessal.

iii,

eVe/^a

els

TO yvStrat T)}v iriffnv

124
/<//TTWS eirelpaffev

iMHTI.

MHTOI.

vpas 6 TretpcicW, Beza translates /H//TTWS, ne quomodo, by some means, or in some manner ; Castellio, ne forte, lest perIf it is not expressive of fear or of doubt here, it is at least haps.
test

exploratory.

and ^TTW exclude time, and /UT/TT^S mode p')-rroT excludes anything indefinite. Sometimes is separate from /LI?/, and does not affect it ; as, jj.ii rt Qofiovb* ayopeve, say not anything in recommendation of flight : Iliad, e, 252. /u?/ eiXXo (liny thing else} Xeyeis TO btKaiov eivat ; Plat. Gorg. p. 487. So in Phaedr. p. 273. (p. 376. ed. Bip.) [Tc this head belongs the passage of Aristoph. Pac. 326. cited by Hoogeveen (vi.) as an example of a question indicating wonder.] II. But when there is no other word on which it depends, or to which it is referred, it assumes the nature of a particle, and coalesces with yu//, to which it communicates an unlimited force of prohibition ; as, fjiiffTt ffv TO.VTO. eKaoTo. bteipeo, not at all ; excluding inquiry about any particular whatever: Iliad, a, 551. So, /^/rt<rv, (5 Tiypa^T?, tfyij,
1.

MHTI.

--

As

or manner, so

firirt

art curoKTevel

fjte,

^aXe-nijvrjs

T<jj

irarp\

Xen. Cyrop.

iii,

1,

38.

emphatically used in figurative questions which imply, and are equivalent to, an absolute denial of what is asked : pjrt av\\eyovfftv airo aKavQuv 0ra^vX}i/ ; St. Matth. vii, \6. p.rjTt TO vbwp KuXvcrai bvvaTal TIS ; Acts X, 47 IV. But when the question is not figurative, TI indicates incipient serious opinion in the case of good, and serious fear in the case of evil. 1. M^rt OVTOS etJTtv 6 vws Aaj&'S ; said the people who saw the miracles of Christ : St. Matth. xii, 23. But this seriousness of opinion disappears in sarcastical questions; as, p/ri aitoKTevei eavrov, on \eSt. John viii, 22. yet, OTTOV eyw ifTrayw, vjjLels ov bvvavde eXdeiv 2. An example of the indication of serious fear is in St. Matth. xxvi, 22. fjttiTi eyw etp, Kv'pie ; Cf. v. 25. and St. Mark xiv, 19.
III.
is
',

M/n

MHTOI.
any other
prohibitive,

-and

T.
:

Mjjroi seldom or never occurs unconnected with

if it ever does, it must be compounded of ju) corroborative, adding force to the prohibition. II. But jjiriToi ye very frequently occurs ; nfj usually prohibiting, rot assuring or enforcing, and ye limiting. To Cyrus, promising to give his soldiers a double feast, an officer replies, fj^rot ye ev piy.

particle

rot

fj/mepqi, el /zj)

KOI &tir\as TO.S

yavrepas

rjfjTiv

least in one day, of Synesius cited

&c. Xenoph. Cyrop.

by Budaeus,

ii,

7rapeets, by 3, 24. and in

is

no means at
the passage

Comm.

p.

475. ye

referable
/^/rot

to^roi

av

e firj&eTTOTe irXevaetas' et be Trore

Se>/<rot,

d\\a

fyQivovTos

ye

fjujros.

So

of

fjLTjroi

alone.

that this passage is not altogether a * dependable example M/yrot is separated in a similar manner from ye in
:

the following passage

ftriToi deovs
fJLOt

TTO\V

ye

iroielv 6bvpop,evovs,
b'

bvffaptOTOTOKeia' el

TOVTWV fiaXXov eerjaopeda (Opripov) Kal Aeyoiras, w ^tot tyw betXt), a ovv deovs, //r/rot TOV ye ^eyiaTOV TWV dewy, &C.
6' ert

See Supplement to Mr. Todd's Johnson by J. S. published in 1819.

MHN.

MftN.

125

not certainly, or, not by any means, at least to represent the gods bewailing, &c. Plat, de Rep. iii. p. 388. (p. S65. ed. Bip.) III. For greater vehemence of expression bfi is added ; to compensate, as it were, for the loss of asseveration and emphasis which rot suffers by being subjoined enclitically to /u//: eyw Se ovb' aXXoV riva much, much less rj^iovv av Tdi'ira 6veikieiv, pij rot ye bfj Tl\aT<i)i>a Such beauty Plato certainly: Aristid. pro Quatuorv. p. 36s. could not fail to strike even a tasteless clown, /^rotye bi'i ae KUL rrjy ariv TroXvTretpmv, says Heliodor. jEthiop. vii, 10.
:

M?)v is a particle which augments the force of affirappears to differ from rot in simply affirming that part to which it is added ; from /, in expressing exultation, as it were, at the establishment or confirmation of something brought to its highest from ye in this, that ye urges what follows, at the same time pitch remitting, conceding, or waving, what precedes ; whereas ju/}> affirms what follows without remitting or waving anything that precedes, and often adds a fresh asseveration of what has been already proved or affirmed. Affirmation or corroboration is its primary force, and this it has even when it is said to be adversative. Hesychins explains vat fij^v by ovrws btj it signifies therefore, in reality, in truth : Trav-

MHN. -- 1.
It

mation.

TCf)(rj brj

K Ttjf

vofjtuH' etpjjvrjr Trpos

a\\i]\ovs ol livbpes

e^ovcri.

Oo\\?/i'
fJtrjTrore
//

ye.

Tovrvv

JJLTJV

ev eavrots

/uj)

orama^wTiav, ovbev

beivbv,

a\X?7 TroXis Trpos TOVTOVS rj irpos a\\r]\ovs t)(00Tar//C77 : [but truly, or now:] Plat, de Rep. v. p. 465. (p. 35. ed. Bip.) And Plato, after saying that the true philosopher bestows all his attention on what

benefits the mind, not the body, adds,

<rw<ppwv

/u>)v

oye rotovros

*cai

ovbaprj ^tXc^pv/uaros : de Rep. vi. p. 485. (p. 72. Bip.) II. After negation, piv added to a negative enforces negation ; as, when Orestes has said iu p/i> TO& epas, bis Qaveiv ov ^a^o/tat, Pylades replies, aXX'ovS' eyw /u//r : Eurip. Or. 111?. III. The corroborative force of p^v is augmented in a challenge to

make

the experiment of something which a person

:

is

dared to do at
ntJ/a rot
a'if.ta

his peril

et 5'

aye

fj.f}v

ireipriffai, Ivu.
:

yvwuai Kal
302.

o'lbe*

epwjcret Trepi bovpi

Iliad, o,

1. Mtiv interrogates, and MftN, with its concomitant particles. concludes or infers at the same time. Thus the sausage-maker, who says he does not think himself worthy of being at the head of affairs at Athens, is asked by Demosthenes, with a keen stroke of satire on the Athenians and their demagogues, p&v ex KCI\>V el KqyaQ&v why ?
;

how

you then sprung from worthy and respectable progenitors? Aristoph. Eq. 184. See also Aristoph. Ach. 329. Pac. 157.
so ? are

[258. ed. Br.] 280. [281.] 1042. II. Sometimes that from which the inference expressed by p&v is drawn, is put after it with yap: ri\ ^77. vpiv -a Xejf&^vra puv /ur) Sofcet eVSeoJs Xeye<r0at ; TroXXas yap bij en ej(ei viro^ias Kal avriXafias : Plat. Phaedr. p. 84. (c. 35. ed. Fisch.)
III.

When

p.wv

wv p)

signifies

in a following, is in a /itj) preceding clause, and utrum, whether : lav Se iv evl eyy^vr/rat ubiKta,
?*/

J26
/ur)

NAT, NH,
7}

ciTroXet TYJV avrfjs bvvajj.iv,

:

ovSev JITTOV eet

M*/Sey jjrrov e^eYw,

I0i7

Plat,

de Rep.

i.

And so p&v yur/rt ' eXarrovos wXdvifs e/u?rXeot r&v erepajv; rj ov ; Id. de Rep. vi. p. 505. (p. 113. ed. Bip.) IV. But when a negative is required in the interrogation, ov is added ; as, ev ols ri \pijv Trotetv efj.e ; p&v OV X* '* 7reP eVotovv ; ought See also not I to have done what I did do ? Plat. Ep. iii. p. 316. Aristoph. Pac. 280. [281.Br.] Plut. 372.
1. Nat is a particle expressive of affirmation or NAI, NH. OVKOVV dpflws, ety/v, <u 'ASet'juavre ; Nat, r]o' os. assent ; as in replies yap yes, said he : Plat, de Rep. v. p. 449. (P- 3. ed. Bip.) vai Id. in Phaedr. p. 266. (p. 363. Bip.) rijs Texvrjs II. By affirming a negation it sometimes has the effect of a nega:
ij[

p. 351. (p. 200. ed. Bip.) TI be ; oi rr\v f]bovr)v ayadov opi6/j.et>oi, fji&v p^rt

av TI efoQev \^v\rjv & avrrfv a.vbpeioTa~r)V Kal (f>povifj.(t)TaTr)v r/'faor' rapafae re Kal a\\otw<reie ; Answ. vai. it is as you say, i.e. it by no means can. Plat, de Rep. ii. p. 381. (p. 254. ed. Bip.) and abiKOvvras be ical abiKovfuievovs abvvarov TTOV without interrogation vai. Id. in Lysid. p. 215. Nat affirms the negation (j)i\ovs elvai. Answ. or there may be an ellipsis ; vat, rovro ye expressed by abvvaror
tive
:

Trados

icaXws oraXrjdes etnas : for similar words follow vai in Plato's Euthyphr. P- 9- ( c - 9- e d- Fisch.) oubels ovre Qewv, ovre avQpuTrwv TO\U$, \eyetv, us ov TV ye abtKOvvTi boreov biKijv : Answ. vat, rovro prjv aXrjdes Xeyets. III. Without previous interrogation vat assents, with confirmation,

words of others, or of one's own to those of others, as adv. Ctesiph. p. 281. [p. 437- 1. 11. ed.Reisk.] Of one's own words it is altogether confirmatory or corroborative and in this use it is sometimes emphatically repeated vat, vat, rev^eo bwua, Callim. Hymn, in Cer. 64. KVOV, KVOV, $ evl balras Troo/ereis It is confirmatory in obtestation also, and indicates vehement desire : vat dSeX^s, eyw trov ovat^rjv ev Kupt'^' a'vaTravo-dv TTOV ra
either to the
in jEschin.
:

Xeyet 6 naprvp&v ffTrXay^va ev Kvply : yea brother, &c. Phil em. 20. ravra. Nat ep^o/jiat ra^y. 'A/xr)v. Nat ep%ov, Kvpte 'Irjeov : even so, come Lord Jesus : Revel, xxii, 20. [Abr. of Vig. note/, p. 147-] IV. Nat bri assents with confirmation : vat bfi, ovrws br), Hesych. and a'XXa is added in the figure anthypophora : TOV b' aTra/jteiflofjievos
TTpocrefyr)

eenres'

Nat
H^v

Kpeiwv 'Ayaueuvwv' vai br) ravrd ye Trdvra, yepov, Kara fjLoipav ob* dvrjp edeXet trepl Trdvrwv e^evai aXXuv : Iliad, a, 286. Nat assents, br) confirms, and a'XXa objects. See Iliad, t//, 627has the same force as vat bri : see Oppian. Halieut. iii, 482. [On

a XX'

Abr. of Vig. pp. 147. 1*8. and notes ,/, g, A.] V. The particle vri confirms, affirms, and assents, being at the same time juratory as, Megar. btaireivafjtes del TTOTTO irvp. Dicaeop. a'XX' ilbv rot, vj) rov At', r\v avXos napfi : Aristoph. Ach. 751. See also Pac. 217. [218. ed. Br.] and it is used in expressing approbation of the sentiments of another : thus to Socrates, saying, ov yap oljuat ye rov
vat, see
:

avro Trpa^ai, aXXa Troppw TTOV ijbrj aotyias eXaveTrtrv^ovros elvat opdws vovros, Euthyphro replies, Trdppw pcvroi, rij A/a, <3 ^Kpnrfs : Plat.

E^hyphr.

(c. 4.

ed. Fisch.)

NY, NYN.
VI. NJ)
[p. 22.
1.

127
answers
:

Am

is

much used

in affirmative

see

Cebes Tab.

15. ed. Simps.

Oxon. 1738.]

Plat. Phaedr. p. 263. (p. 357.

ed. Bip.)

And
vfj

in one's

own answer
:

awakens attention
;

ri

aoi TCLVTO.

to a figurative question put by one's self, vvv Xeyo ; KOI KaXelv 0?;/ut beHv

eyw, vij TOVS deovs, d\r)6fj ^uera Trappqaias epw Trpbs v/zas, &c Demostli. Philipp. p. 28. VII. It appears to be used ironically : irXrjv el p) TOVTO Xeyovtrt, vrj Am, &c. Demosth. de Cherson. [p. 91. 1.26. ed. Reisk. See note /, p. 148. of the Abr. of Vig.] VIII. In the oath vi} rw 0ew, when used by women, r^ 0ew meant Ceres and Proserpine ; when by men, Castor and Pollux. See ArisSee Abr. of Vig. p. 148. notes g toph. Pac. 213. [214. ed. Br. and k.'\ IX. When an appellative noun, and not the name of a god, follows vi), that particle is significative of protestation or testification, rather than of an oath: KO.& fipepav d*oQrf)9K t vij TYJV v^erepav Kav^rjanv, r> e'xw tv XpiffT^ 'Irjffov i I protest by your rejoicing, &c. 1 Cor. xv,
TOVTOVS
3
I .

X. It has a notable use in concession, when ye following assists the argument or assertion of an adversary by some addition; as, W, <firj(TW a\\a TO TOV Ke<j>a\ov Ka\ov t TO fJLrjbefjiiar ypa^v (bevyew [co<] vri At", evbatpov ye yes truly, and what is more, fortunate too : Demosth. de Cor. p. 348. [p. 310. 1. 2p. ed. Reisk.] Then immediately follows aXXa introducing an objection opposed to the adverctAXct ri pdXXov 6 TroXXam sary's jue^^vywr, //?/5e7ra>7rore 6e e^eXey^Oets
:
:

ev eyfcX>;^uort ytyroir' av bta TOVTO biKaiws But the subsequent aXXa does not always introduce an objection by an ellipsis of ov povoy it is sometimes superadditory Xanthias, accusing Labes the dog, Tvpov iroXvv KareaiKeXtSe, Kq.veir\riT ev TW (TKora) Philocleo (the judge) vfi TOV At", aXXa brjXos evTtv Aristoph. Vesp. 907. [911. ed. Br.] i. e. vrj TOV At', ov povov ijKovffa, aXXa *:at
a&iK<Jji>,
; :
:

&ii\os eari.

XI.

N^
:

At"

aXXa and aXXa

vr}

Am

differ in this, that the latter best

;

supposed by anticipation the former replies to obDethus, aXXa vrj Am, cKeivo av "iotas e'iiroi irpbs raOra jections mostli. adv. Leptin. [p. 457. 1. 22. ed. Reisk.] [See Abr. of Vig.
suits objections
:

notes

andj, p. 148.

I.

NY, NYN, NYNI, NYN. OF THE PARTICLES NY AND NYN.

particle,
:

I.

NO
TI

is

a poetical

instant, of present time

vvv

b'

or signifying an indivisible point, opKia Trtora ^evffajjievot p.a.\o^.eaQa.' rp

Kcpoiov fjfjfiv eXirofAat eKTeXeetrdai, Iliad, rj, 353. now : although passage vv may denote conclusion or consequence, as in Iliad. a, 383. TU ov vv standing for TOIWV ov by tmesis ; TOIVW being compounded of roi (whence rw) and the enclitic vvv. This vvvis formed by the adjecfion of v to the enclitic vv, and has the same signification.

ov vv

in this

128

NYN.

See Iliad, i//, 485. compared with Aristoph. Nub. 644. [634. ed. Bekk.] [See Abr. of Vig. note m, p. 148.] II. Ni/*' signifies either present time, or past or future time bordering on the present oirep vvv irpovdefjieOa, Plat. Phaedr. p. 259. vvv egfiTOvv ae \tdaaat ot (p. 349. ed. Bip.) i. e. aprtusyjust now.
:

'lovbaloi, Kal TcaXiv vTrayeis ecei

The disciples represent \ St. John xi, 8. the occurrence as but just past, although some considerable time had elapsed. III. With a future tense it signifies time removed from the present by a momentaneous interval if /uaXa a ov /3e/\os &KV bafjiaaaaTo iriKpos Iliad, e, 279* 6'iaroSf vvv avr' ey\iy Treipfjaofjiai, at KC Tv-^oifjn IV. NvvJ is Attic; and Eustathius observes that it is used of present time only: p. 1840. V. As %YI from its primary signification of time acquired a hortatory use, so vvv also ; for those who earnestly incite others, wish to exclude all delay. Hence vvv suits imperatives av vvv biatyepe T&V KctK&v, Eurip. Or. 251. [av vvv, ed. Pors. 245.] Xeye vvv avvaas TI irtdov vvv t Ttjv rpoirtv TOV irpaypaTos, Aristoph. Vesp. 30. Eurip. Or. 1101. [1099. ed. Pors.] aye vvv, 'iupev : Aristoph. Vesp. 1255. Pac. 851. Cf. St. James v, 1. i0t vvv t aicovaov: Aristoph. Pac. 669. 0epe vvv t /care/7rw ro7$ dearals TOV \6yov Aristoph. Vesp. 54. VI. There is so close an affinity between vvv (or vv) and &), that not only both particles are similarly used in impatient interrogation, (see p. 43. and Iliad a, 414.) but instead of the compound ewei^i} the poets use eirel vv I as, atfl' o(j>e\es irapa vrjvalv abaKpvros Kal dnrjfjuav 1717601, evre/ vv TOI aloa ftivvvOa Trep, ovrt /ua\a MIV : Iliad, a, 41 6. where the Schol. explains eirtl vv TOI by eTreiSiy trot.
: : : :

II.

OF THE PARTICLES CONJOINED WITH NYN.

I. Nv*> b& is frequently used in of the present time to opposition ; the past, as, os irptv /zev v/utis bvarvyjiiv, 0/Xo$ Trap^r, vvv 6' OVK&T* of elfAt bvaTvxpvvTi aot (f>i\os ; Eurip. Orest. 1096. [1094. ed. Pors.] the present to the future; as, ravrct p,ev pot elaavQis erri ff\o\ijs Plato btrj-yfjffeC vvvl &e, oirep apri ere rypo/i^v, Treipa) ffafyearepov eiTrelv
:

Euthyphr. p. 6. (c. 7. ed. Fisch.) II. Sometimes vvv Se, without any evident
:

signification

of time,
:

is

opposed to a past tense preceding as, Tifj.f]v Trep //ot o^eXXev 'OXv/xTTIOS eyyva\tat Zevs Iliad. v^/t/3pe/xer^s* vvv & ovbe /Lte TvrQov ertaev
a, 355.
III.

Often the signification of time almost wholly disappears: as

e'irj

in TO.VT

fjLa.Kape.aai. decfis <j>l\a'

:

vvv

6'

fj.ev

Theogn. 739- Here also however there is an opposition, indicated by 5e, to past time latent in the wish rai/r' eirj which is equivalent to ravr' w^eXer elvat <J>i\a. <f>i\a, IV. This adversative use is most frequent, when the conditional as, et pev pi) virwirTevov , OVK av opoiws particle et, or av, precedes
a\\os
eTretra 0epei
:

&

epbtav ec0evyet, TO KOKOV

biba^v &p.a ry TrapaKeXevaet eTroiov^rjV vvv be 7reipaffO/j.ev ircidetv Thucyd. iv. c.' 126. See also Hebr. xi, 16. And with yap following
:

01, Oi
fjitv
:

MOI.

OMftl.
tyfyos

129
/^efleZ/uev, bv<TK\et}s

ei |tev

yap

els

yvvalica ffbxfipovea-epav
curaffrjs

'EXXdSos buffet btKiyvi Eurip. Ores!. 1 134. The fj.ev is sometimes omitted as, el irdai TUVTO [1 132. Pors.] KCL\OV e<f>v, aotyov 0' ap,a t OVK i']V av dfifyiXeKTOS uvdpu)Trois epis* vvv b" ovff ojjoiov oi/&tt>, OVT 'iffov flpoTo'ts : Eurip. Phoeniss. 504. V. Nvv oyy serves for transition, and, with an imperative mood, at the same time for incitation vvv ovv, Trpbs Aios, Xeye juot, o vvv OTJ^WS
at>

%v

fyovos* v\iv 6' vTTt-p

eibevaL biiff^vpi^ov' Trolov br'i ri TO evaefies ^ys elvai Kat TO acre/3e< : Plat. Euthyphr. p. 5. (c. 6. ed. Fisch.) now therefore. Qvv concludes, from the assertion of Euthyphro, that he was able to give the information

required. VI. When what has preceded is more brief, the close or conclusion with incitation, rather than transition, is indicated : thus Cyrus, after a short question : v\)v oivv Xeyerw rts evdabe aVctoras wept O.VTOV rovrov,

now thm, &c. Xen. Cyrop.

VII. Kcu
viiv is

ii,

3, 4.
KO.\

used

avroi yudXtora pev es

same manner by Thucydides: aibiov vfjifi(i>iJ.ev &c. iv, 63.

in the
t
:

vvv

it is often 1. Ot is a particle of lamentation OI, OI MOI. joined with a nominative case, as, ot eyw, Eurip. Orest. 1018. and 1347. [1340. ed. Pors.] II. More rarely with an accusative ; as, ol epe SeiX>7i', Epigr. cited by H. Steph. [Thesaur. Index 1524. d.] III. But it is most frequently joined with the dative po\ t and coalesces with it in one word, ofyot; which is sometimes used independently of construction, as an interjection ; as, oV/zoi, Starp^ets, K$iro\eHs rpufapp&y Aristoph. Vesp. 845. but it assumes the nature of a compound, as to its use, when construed with a nominative : oVjuot KaKoba.LfjL(t)V t o>s anoXwXa beiXatos Aristoph. Plut. 851. IV. When a genitive follows, eVemis understood oijjioi TUV KUKGJV Aristoph. Plut. 389. oe/uot TO)*/ KTrjfiaTwv ! o'ifjioi r&v a-yp&v ! Lucian. Catapl. p. 642. V. For oV/iot, w/zot is sometimes used w/ioi e^HJv iraBewv ! Eurip. Phoeniss. 1545. ypot eprjs arris, Apoll. Rhod. i, 290. And the ^ot is a ft 'ia^ey, ta^ev, w/^ot, poi : ib. 146'5. sometimes repeated VI. By the abuse of a rustic it expresses immoderate joy oV'/z' Aristoph. Nub. 771. [See Abr. of Vig. note o, p. 149.]
:
: :

--

and there1. "Ojuws and 6^o/ws are of the same origin sometimes put for o/Wws, in like manner ; as, KCU esXeovra OTrore dXXaye/T/j, ovbe TOVTO e^w TT/OTCWS Lucian. Dial. Menel. Ofj.ojs et Prot. and so 1 Cor. xiv, 7- and opoiws for fytws, nevertheless, not-

OMftS.

fore fyws

is

withstanding; as, ovbev yap KU)\vei t elbevai fnev ypdju/zara, Kal naTe^iv ra fjiaGrifiaTa Trdira, o^uo/ws be peQvaov Kal dfcparfj elvat Tab. Ceb. p. 220. [See Abr. of Vig. note r, p. 149.] II. Hence it appears why ofjicos is reckoned among adversative parfor it supports or enforces the affirmation or negation of one ticles or other, or of both, of two [opposed] propositions, with some comit therefore regularly a sentence of parison or association
:

requires

two members, Hoog.

Kcu'rot, Kcrurep, et /ate,

ws, or the like, being in

the pro-

130

OMA2.
and
<J/iws in
:

the apodosis e. g. el ica* ota fy w 0pa<rat, fyua* p tasis, Not only however is Ka/rot, or the like particle, trot 5t* alviyfJLuv. sometimes defective in the first member, but opus is sometimes found in a sentence consisting, as to form, of only one member: as, eis TO. Lucian. prjbev aot ^pi]ffipa > opus CK TroXXf/s rtfs Trepiovffias avaXiffKets t. iii. adv. Indoct. p. 115. to explain which the sentence must be put into the following form el Kal eVm prjbev aoi -^pfiaripa eerrtv, opus e/c iroXXijs wepiovffias els avru avaXlffKeis. And so, when a preceding verb is changed into a participle : Aapa^os pev ravra etiruv, opus irpocreQern KOI avTos rrj 'A.\Kij3iabov yvuprjj Thucyd. vi, 5. for Kairoi [el KOI\
: :
'.

ravra
III.

e'nrev,

opus, &c.
:

may

The particles el KO.I, im/rot, &c. with the whole protasis even, be understood, when dXXa is prefixed to opus as, Kal yap ol orparjjyot, u <piXe' a XX' o/uws ro KetiaXatov avrwv pybius av etTrots, ore

TroXXa ye, ol/^at, KOI fcaXa Kal ol yeupyoi' a XX' o^ews ro *ce0aXatov avr&v effri rfjs airepyaaias fj e/c rfjs yfjs rpo0?? : Plat. Euthyplir. (c. 16*. ed. Fisch.) for, aXX', el /cat TroXXa Kal Ka\a ol aTparrjyol a.7repyaovrai t ouus TO K'e^dXatov, &c. and, dXXa K$V TroXXa Kal KctXa. ol yeupyol, opus TO K0aXatov, &c.
vtKrjv ev T(g TroXe/uw cnrepyd^ovTai.

IV. For dXX'

lipsis
;

6'juws,

opus be

is

frequently used, with a similar el-

as, effTi yap Kal arev TOVTWV /3eXr/ovs yeveodai' opws Se OVK a^prjffra KolKelva eortv : Tab. Ceb. p. 21 9. And ovv also is sometimes

added:

Plato, after mentioning several obstacles to his voyage to

The Sicily, adds, 6'juws 6' ovv navTa. ^aipetv cactus ?jXQov : Ep. iii. collective force of ovv may be made apparent by an admissible transposition ; the participle eaaas being changed into a verb, and the protasis being assumed either from what precedes or extraneously ; thus, roi/rwv be Kaiirep oi/rws e^ovTcw, opus TO.V-O. %aipetv etwv* -fiXQov
ovv.

V. Meyrot also

is

subjoined to opus

&m

pev OVK

'iaov

Trpoy revs

el Trpa^a^ras bcaXvaapevuvs r&i' OVK elboTtav KaTrjyopelv opus pevroi, peyaXa vplv Kal davpaara TO. btKata elvai ravra viroXapfiaveTe, airo-

''Opus compares OVK

Ta\avTa % TrepaiveTe Demosth. adv. Nausimach. p. 634. "LVOV TUV OVK eiboruv KaTi]yopeiv, and vTroXapfiavetv ravra btKaia e^etv, and pevTot confirms and supports the comparison. bi VI. Fe restrictive is added to the last mentioned particles
bovTes
TO. Tpia,
: :

opus pevrot ye OVK a^prjffroy Tab. Ceb. p. 219. i]V) Kal fjpas ai>TOvs TTJV Quvfiv aKptfietTrepuv e^etv where there may be a transposition, for OVK &j(pyfffr6v ye, (/" not absolutely necessary, yet at least not without use. VII. "Opus ye jueiToi also occurs: see Aristoph. Ran. 6l. Vesp. 1335. [1344. ed. Br.] See p. 35.
epprjveus arvpfiaXXopev
TCI

Xeyopeva

Trore*

OffTts

VIII. "Opus ye pijv also is said : OVK eTSor ovrus avbp' eTriXijffpova' ffKaXadvppaTt arra piKpa pavQavuv, TUVT eirtXeXrjffTai Trplv padelv Here opus ye priv avrov KaXu 6vpae bevpi Aristoph. Nub. 631.
1

are two different things, e7riXeX?;oTat trplv pa6e~iv, and KaXu 6vpae. These two are set together, as equally true, by opus : ye limits KaXw : yet nevertheless I will at least call him forth, and do all I can ; I
will

make another

trial

and

this is

confirmed by

pfjv.

OHM,

&c.

131

OHH, OnOTB, OnOTAN, OnOY.

what part where,
t

1.

"OTDJ

signifies,

in

in

what

respect

eyw ovv Tovry ctadepouai TW

TrotyTrj'

(c. 13. ed. Fisch.) eupoip.' av In this use oVr/ and ravrrj are correlative : dXXa ravra fJLev bt), oirr) TV 6ew <f)l\ov, Tavry e^erw re Kal Xeyea6a> : Id. Phaedr. p. 246. (p. 321. ed. Bip.) II. Sometimes motion is signified: [Abr. of Vig. p. 150. r. i.] TOVT 1/617, ovrj aTrofifjcrerat, abtj\ov : Plat. Phaedr. p. 3.
e'lTTbt

croi oTrr)

Plat.

Euthyphr. p. 12.

oirrj

vadpos

eorij', ib. p. 5.

III.
rr\s

With av following

it

is

rendered wheresoever:
(c.
:

oTrrj
OTTTJ

yf/s,

lacrirep

Plato Phaeclo p. 113. irvevaa fyepr], ravrrj treov

6l.

ed.

Fisch.)
ii.

av ri/x<t><rt uv 6 \6yos
}

Id.

de Rep.

IV.

Ovv

is

sometimes added;

as, Trorepov

eaaouev avro,
ywj/v,

eTrcericeif/o-

/ue0a aXXoi> rpovrov, ^ o\iyov Trporepov ; TheEet. rt e tire/a ye KOI OTrrjovv tiaiverat 5e7v : Plat. Theact. p.

w Zw^pares;
(p.

187
full
oirr)

146. ed.

Bip.)

That the force of ovf may not be lost, the be supposed to be eiirep ye el prj Travrr), d\\' ovv

expression

may
I

(paiverai belv

the order being, e'iirep ye ^aiverai beiv, el pi) iravrrj, d\\' ovv OTTTJ 6e7. V. Ti also is inserted between OTTIJ and ovv : ravra yap, tu av&pes 'A.drjva'iot, ovre vfjtds ")(f>rj irotel.i' t TOVS boKovi'Tas KCLI OTTIJTIOVV eti-'at,

av fi/ne!s 7roiu>/uev, vyuas eTriTpeTreLV I Plat. Apol. Socr. p. 35. (c. 23. ed. Fisch.) you who seem to be something, of some consideration, on whatever account, or on all accounts, or in any respect. The force of n appears more plainly when it is in an oblique case seoi/re,

parately from
CTtffTJjfiijv
TI

npos ye TOVTOV iravrl Xoyw /za^T/reor, ds av vovv a(f>avi(t)v, Iff^vpi^riTUL Trepi Tiros birrjovv : Id. in Soph. 'p. 249. (p. 266. ed. Bip.) VI. Hep added to OTHJ makes the sense more indefinite : Trpwrovyuev aoi TO. Trepl Alofra v/rap^st rnvTrj yiyvopeva, OTnjwep av avros idcXys I
oTTrjovv
:

<j>p6vrjffiv

r)

Plat. Ep. vii. p. 339. in what way or manner soever : here it is correlative to ravr-g. VII. 'OTrore is construed with the indicative, subjunctive, and

optative moods. With the indicative of the imperfect, denoting somewhat actually past, and at a definite time o-mrore piv vvbfjaat 'O\i/juTtiot i)Qe\ov *ii\\ot, when : Iliad, a, 399. and so 0, 230. With the
:

optative of the imperfect,

definite time, for oirore
avffKrjvoleiv,
opfiiat-Tes
els

to signify

something past, but

:

av or birorav

as,

tTre^ueXero 6

at an inKvpos, oTrore
teal

oxws

ev^ctptcrrdrarot re a//a Xoyot t7J/3Xr/0//crovrat,

Trap-

Tuyadov: whenever; as often as: Xen. Cyrop. ii, 2, 1. and in the same sense Lucian joins it with the optative of the 1 aor. 01 pev ovv a\\oi eye\u>v, wore For Lapith. t. iii. p. 432. oKiatyQeiev oirorav or cJTrdre ctr, it denotes, with the optative of the imperfect or aorist, a time indeterminate and mixed, future with regard to the time at which the words are used, and past with regard to the case or thus, epoiye Kal avru Oavp.aarri av eiij ?/ ciarpifirj supposition put avrodt, OTrore ivrvjfotfjit YlaXftfjfj^y, Kal Amvrt rJ TeXojLitDvos, Kal C'ITIS uXXos rivv TraXai&v bta Kplcrtv abiKov redvrjKev : Plat. Apol. Socr. p. 41. and in the same sense with the subjunctive of the 1 aor. ro be bi) Plat. Till!, p. 84. (t. IX. p. 417* fmptcas offTols avvbovv birore voffjjffy ed. Bip.) and so Iliad, a, 163.
: : :

132
VIII.

OnOTAN, OIIOT.
On
account of the
it
(5

in ratiocination,
fjieyas

&e av ye,

Xen. Cyrop. viii, IX. By its junction with ar, oTrorav is formed wliich signifies, as often as, whensoever, when. It is construed with an optative of
;

affinity between consequence in time and takes a causal signification, since, seeing that : 0>epav\a, brrore ye Kal ^fjdv razees a av beat iroielv 3, 7. [See Abr. of Vig. notes c and d, p. 155.]

'.

the 1 aor. as, biroTav yovv avayKaadetr}fjiV,aTro\et(j)6VT5 irov, a<7tre7v, ovbev i\aav ol aXXot irpbs TO /cap repel )': Plat. Sympos. p. 219. (p. 266. ed. Bip.) or with the subjunctive of the present : ov yap irfpi ajjuKp&v

opwv

ri]v afjL(j>iffj3riTriffiv oiojJLai yej/^eretrflat rore,

oirorav iKavtis

(f>v\a.TTU)ffiv

Id. in Sophist, p. 231. (p. 229. ed. Bip.) or of the 2 aor. birbrav TI TUV eVet bfjLotwfjia. t^wtrtv, e/CTrX^rroirai : Id. in Phaedr. (p. 328. ed. It is properly construed also with the indicative of the future, Bip.)

away

because by the genius of the Greek language the future itself takes so much from the actuality of the verb's sense, as there is time biroTav 6j) between the present and the future case supposed
:

QdeyZofjC Iliad. </>,

a^eiv afca/zaroi/ Trvp, when I shall speak : 341. [But see Abr. of Vig. p. 154. 1. 11.] X. "OTTOV signifies the place in which any thing is, or is done ; where: and it is correlative with e/cet OKOV yap icrnv 6 dijffavpbs And whenever efcei eWcu /cat // Kapbia VJJL&V: St. Matth. vi, 21. vjjitov, OVK either of these correlatives is not expressed, it is understood eOeXei pet'civ, oirov av ibpvawpeda avrv I Plat. Euthyphr. p. 1 J . Cf. St. Matlh. vi, 10. [See Abr. of Vig. note s, p. 151.] XI. It signifies also motion to a place, whither: orrov eyw vTrayw, ls ov bvvaffde e\Qe~iv : St. John viii, 21. So xiv, 4. [See Abr. of Vig. p. 151. 1. 3.] XII. The correlative of oirov is not always e/cet : for in oblique interrogation 6Vov answers to TTOV : Streps. a\\' fj Aafce5a//iwr TTOM 'ffTiv ; Discip. OKOV Vnv; avriji : Aristoph. Nub. 214. before oVovVrtv, underst. cpair^s; which is expressed in Xen. Cyrop. ii, 4, 31. r\v b*

eyhv

la-^ovffa, roVe

OTTOV eljj.1, Xeye ra\r]Qtj, OTL en-i TUIS bpiots. XIII. Hitlierto of onov as an adverb : it has more of the true nature and force of a particle, when employed in ratiocination : as when Timon says to Jupiter that Salmoneus did not act so very absurdly in thundering against him; and adds, TTWS yap; oVou ye Ka0a>ep VTTO since, seeing that: Lucian.Timou. p. 103. [p. p.avbpay6pa xadevbets
epb)T<ji,
:

59.

A.

cd. Salmur.]
;

what

use obtains especially in arguing from what is greater to and the contrary and it is to be accounted for from an analogy between place and a circumstance : KOI ri Qav^aarbv, el rovro
is less,

XIV. This

avorjTos Kal curaibevTOs avdpwrros,

TTjv, TO.

OTTOV

aXXa OavpaffTOV avbpa, OVTWS

t

/cat TIvppov, 0ao-<, rbv vicb KO\O.K(I)V eiri raj o^uot'w

:

e bia<pdap?jvai, los 7riffTevew ort Lucian. adv. opotos i\v 'AXe^a^Spw Indoct. t. iii. p. 116. when they say that even Pyrrhus, &c. for we, as well as the Latins, (who use, cum, quando, for quandoquidem,) suppose an analogy between a circumstance and time.

XV.

In this sense

i}irov,
e')(et,

doubtless, undoubtedly,

is

correlative to

it

ijTrov avTos ye TroXXa

Xen. Cyrop.

viii,

4, 31.

oirov ye Kat fipuv e^aorw roaavra [See Abr. of Vig. p, 151. 1. 14.]

OFK12.

133
effect as

XVI. To
to om)
'.

6'rrov is

added o^, with the same

when

it is

added

av

(see virrjovv :) r/ be', avev rovrou' vovv KaOopys ovra,i) yevouevov Kdl VTTOVOVV ; flw^ ivhere; Plat. Soph. p. 249. (p. 266. ed. Bip.)
(i>>
?/

orwov*', wcrre peveiv OTTOVOVV, irorepos Iff^vpOTepos GTrtQvpia; Id. in Cratyl. p. 403. (270. Bip.)

t<mv,

1. The Onil2. primary power of 6W's is that of designating manner relatively hut the word to which it is referred, i. e. ourws or
;

not usually expressed thus, bripotyayov be rvpavvov, OTTWS etieXets, KaraK\~ivat : as, in whatever manner : Theogn. 1 183. With indication of douht, rpuTTov is understood in Aristoph. Pac. ovS', OTTWS avTrj TrpoarfjKoi Qetbias, r/KrjKoeivl how : V. 6l5. So OTTWS e'^w trpos belirva, 6 7rape\r)\vdb)s pov fitos arras paprvptov av yevotro : Lucian. Lapith. t. iii. In Plato OVTWS is expressed as its correlative KO\V p. 434. Phaedr. p. 228. (p. Kpariffrov kanv, oi/rws, ovrws bvvapat, Xeyetv 283. ed. Bip.) ptjreov aol iravros paXXov oi/rws, OTTWS olos re el p. 236.
rpoirov, is
:

(299- Bip.)
II. This primary power of OTTWS is not lost, when in construction with the suhjunctive of the 1 aor. it denotes the final cause; for then it properly signifies that so, or that in this manner, or by this means : as, iirav be evprjre, otTrayye/Xare yuot, onus K^tyw eXQuvirpoaKWiiaw airw : St. Matth. ii, 8. See also v. 23. where the full phrase would be, KCU ovr<as eyevero raura, O'TTWS, &C. Ol fyaptaciioi avn(3ov\iov e\aflov, OTTWS avrov Trayibevauxnv ev Xoyw : Id. xxii, 15. Here not only the end is signified, but the manner of When the first aorist is attaining it. not in use, the second is employed : eKnXevaai, oirws eTwrXeov o airos iarriff^n Thucyd. i. 65. TrapaaKevaaaoQai TYIV raj^laTr]v, OTTWS evBevbe
:

Tradrjre ravrov, cnrep Kat Trporepov : Demosth. Ol. Here the first aor. of the verb that has one is used. [See Abr. of Vig. p. 151. 1. 38.] When it is construed with the optative, av is understood, commonly in its potential use Trap be ol avros earr), OTTUS Qavaroio fiapeias ^elpas aXaX/cot : Iliad. <b, 548. ebuKei ouv P.GI afyefjievto r/7s evdv obov, a.TravTq.v avrols, OTTWS pq.ara ofj.ov yevoifjieGa: ^Eschin. Socr. Dial, de Morte. [Abr. of Vig. p. 151. 1. 45.] Nor with the indicative of the future does it lose its signification of manner: it may be rendered, by which mode, or that in this manner : OTTWS pev ravra e'ere, manner: Xen. Cyrop. ii, e/nol ue\)]rrei t in what
fiorjdi] arjre, KCU
i. p.ij

[p. 9.

1.

17. ed. Reisk.]

1, 15.

[See Abr. of Vig. p. 152.

OTTWS

1.

13.]
:

opOws cart r&v vetav Trpwrov

Plat.

Trtpe\r)6tii>ai,
7kyi'Tt]v,

eaovrai
rtfjTiv

on
:

apicrrot

Euthyphr.

KOVK e%eis

OTTWS Bevels TTC/JO' to OVK ead' onus percHs.

Eurip. Med. 322. which is equivalent I3ut although OTTWS is not properly of itself significative of the final cause, yet, without detriment to the sense of many passages, it may be rendered as if it were, that, in order
that.
III.

The

where
o 2, 1.

in Latin the

Kvpos
IV.

is put after a past tense, act tTre/^eXero subjunctive of the imperfect is used OTTWS ev^apiffroTOToi re apa Xoyoi eju/3/\r?0//0wrcu Cyrop. 11,
: :

indicative of the future with OTTWS

e-rrpaaffur, OTTWS

ns

/3o//0em ?y'a

Thucyd.
:

iii,

4.
in

construed with the indicative of the future how, in what manner, after verbs of fearing cv
It is

the sense of

134

onns.

OTTO** eytl -rt\v {fra/Mf, ^y fyuets dare #x ctv P e Tavrrjs Aristoph. Plut. [200. ed. Br.J V. Also in injunctions : dXX' OTTWS aywviel, 0povrt5e, ra V/XotTr* apiffra I Aristoph. Eq. 6&5. aye yui', OTTWS, orav n TrpofiaXwuai , Id. Nub. 489. but the verb expressing the inevdeus vfyapnaaei junction or exhortation is usually omitted. [See Abr. of Vig. p. 153. note x.~\ VI. And in that sense it is construed, in entreaties, with the vvv ovv OTTWS awffrjs p, e-rrel KaVwXe<ras : Id. Nub. subjunctive mood
: :

1179VII. When oVws appears to be used interrogatively, either the interrogation is latent in the whole sentence, or epwrps is understood : thus, Streps. TTWS yue xP*) KoXetv ; Socr. OTTWS ; viz. eowr^s ; do you ask me how? Aristoph. Nub. 677. And thus in Eurip. Hecub. 398. where OTTUS is said to signify so or thus, Hoogeveen understands epwrps, with reference to TTWS in the foregoing verse. VIII. In the protasis of similes it signifies as, i. e. (without loss of its primary signification) in the manner that, in the same manner as ; and then it is usually not put first ; as, Xewv OTTWS, for ws Xe"wv :
thus, Kairpoi
5'

OTTWS Oi'iyovres

aypiav yevvv, ^vrri^av

Eurip. Phoen.

this use is derived that in which it signifies time relawith reference to some occurrence following the particular time denoted. When the time is definite, OTTWS is construed with the indicative of a past tense ; as, 7/^7/5 6' 6Vws 7/^ovo-av, apyos ovris ijv : when; s soon as: Eurip. Phoeniss. 1155. See also 14(54. but when erri Mo/ptos flacriXijos, OKWS indefinite, with the subjunctive mood e\0y (ill some edd. eX0ot,) 6 ?roro/zos eirl d/crw tr^eas TO eXa^tcrror, apbevKev A'iyvrrTov rrjv eVepOe Meptyios, whenever : Herodot, ii, 13. X. "On-ws av is -used potentially; as, with the optative mood, c<

1389. IX.

From
i.

tively

e.

7TO\vv ^povov

ecrfcoTret

^iXoK-par^s, OTTWS

OVK

civ O.VTOV

fifjtetvov

evpelv oipai,

r)

av apiara evavTiaiOeirj rrj elpt]vy t Deuiosth. de romura ypatyovra

i

fals.

Leg. p. 202. how. *Av may also be considered as potential, when OTTWS is construed with the subjunctive mood, in signification of the end or purpose : avros aoi 4vyu7rpo0y/^//To/iat, OTTOJS av pe bibafys
Trepl

TOU offiov

v rais

Plat. Euthyphr. p. 1 ywiais T&V TrXaretwv ecrroires

: :

avdpwTrots

that, in order that: XI. "OTTWS av denotes proportion OTTWS av, oljuai, icai Trapaerrwatv rv\ui\ accordingly as ; prout : Eurip. Med. 331. see Acts iii, 19. XII. Also time not defined or limited XIII. When oVws is used with signification of the end or purpose, and of prevention at the same time, p) is added with the subjunctive mood (see on p; :) vvefir)aav 7rpa5-a pev ra fiatcpa reiy(ij eXelv 'A0^raiovSy OTTWS/X?) e7r//3o^0>/crwo tv e/c Nra/as oi YleXoTrovvi'jffiOi, in order that the Peloponnesians might not, &c. Thuc. iv, 66. The manner also is indicated here. See too, Thucyd. iv, 8. XIV. Neither is the indication of manner lost after verbs of fearing as, ov <pofiij biKagofjevcs T(p irarpl, 6Vws p) avoaiov irpaypa
: :

(c. 13. ed. Fisch.) fyiXovrtLV Trpotrev^effQat, OTTWS av fyav&ai rols St. Matth. vi, 5.
1 .

>

Plat. Euthyphr. p. 4,

(c. 4.

ed. Fiach.)

OTE, OTAN.

135

XV. And, as onus is construed with an indicative of the future in injunctions or adhortations, so OTTWS pi] in prohibitions [or precauoVws prf \6yovs epovffi povov ol Trap' tion :] ffKOTrelade pevTOt TOVTO, Demosth. Ol. ii. p. ijp&v Trpeafieis, dXXa KUI epyov TI betKvvetv ej-ovfftv 7. And, as in the former case, so in the latter, o'pa, or the like, is understood : O'TTWS pri TOV TroXepov eYcWvp/ynrer', Aristoph. Pac. 307. for opare, OTTW* pi) : see you do not ; take care lest. XVI. There is some difference, when the first person of the future
:

follows: d/\X' OTTWS pt) ov-% olos r' eaopat : Plat, de Rep. vi. p. 506. (p. 1J5. ed. Bip.) uuderst. ftXe-rrreov, evXaf3r)Teov f or aKoirovpaij evXafiovpai : [but I doubt I shall not be able.]
ov is construed with an indicative of the present in Oavpa^a) be TWV TavTijv T^JV yv&prjv e^oVrwr, OTTWS ov KO.I Trjv pwprjv, teal Trfv avbplav KaK&s Xeyovtriv I [p. 64. 1. 13. ed. Battie. / wonder how it is that they do not, &c.] XVIII. Several particles are subjoined to OTTWS, which render the awprjbov KaTeiripsignification indeterminate: as, &) : ra be vrrw/uara TOVTO TreTrpa^crat Trparo, ?/ OTTWS 6>) epp/vrrero : Herodian. iv, 6. bfjTrore Demosth. Ol. iii. p. 11. Ovv: 6 ra prj UVTO. Trepi vvv otrwabriiroTe OTOVOVV bo^atZwv, OVK ecr0' as ov \^evbfj bofctiaei, Kq.v OTTtiiffovv aXXws ra rrjs biavolas e^f; : Plato Tiieaet. p. 188. (p. 148. ed. Bip.) TIOVV: Id. Apol. Socr. wep: ro pev wv prjb* oTTMffTtovv beivos Xeyeiv XevKov biaKpivet T'ijv v^jiv, TO be peXav ffvyKplvei, oKd)s irep (for OTTWS wep) TO Oeppov bia^el TQ.V atyav, TO be \Lv)(pov avvayetv bvvaTat : in the same manner as : Auct. inc. de Anima Mundi. [See Abr. of Vig. pp.
Isocr. Nicocl.
: :
:

XVII. "OTTWS

151

153. and the notes.]

1. When ore signifies definite past time, it corresconstrued with an indicative of the preterperfect

OTE, OTAN.
ponds to
or of an
rore, aorist

and
:

is

elirovTOS OXaron'os,

ore

'ibev

avTOV, "H/cei rjplv 6 KaXos re

II. When the time signified is indefinite, ore is construed with the optative mood, av being understood; and it may then be rendered, as often as, whensoever: TOIOVTOI vvv navres, otroi Tpweffffiv dpwyoi, eKuXei be KOI Ttpa t ore eley, oV 'Apyetotct pa^oiaTO : Iliad, fy, 42.9. With a subrivas'iboi TOIOVTO TL TToifoai'Tas : Xen. Cyrop. ii, 1, 30. junctive in Homer : ovcJe TI ptv %pew eorat Tvp(3oy(oiis, ore ptv OcnrTwatv as often as, ''Axatot : Iliad. 0, 323. Here however it does not signify

rat 'xpvaovs Topyias, e^rj 6 Fopyias' ij KaXov ye, sopb. xi, p. 505. when. So St. Matth. xxi, 34.

&c. Athen. Deipno-

but when indefinitely.

III.
It signifies

Plat.

Symp.

IV. 'Ore pev aXXois, ore be aXXois, peptKTai rals \pv^a1s 6 trapa TOV 0eov ^pvaos, ore pev Ooa yovvar eiraXXev dXX' det rots av-o~is Aristot. Polit. ii, 5. (3oaaaKV : Apolloii. avvve-^eios, ore 6' avre peraXXiiyvv Kaparoio, Rhod. i. 1270. [See Abr. of Vig. p. 154. note 6.] V. Sometimes aXXore be follows ore pev, as in Iliad. X, 64. VI. Ilore pev Trore be is put after ore pev ore be, as equivalent :
:

since, seeing that : ore 5?) rovro 6 e'pws eanv dei, p. 206. (p. 236. ed. Bip.) pev ore be, is, at one time, at another time: ov yap ore

'rocl. in Plat.

Theolog.

i,

4.

136
VII. Sometimes brt fa
Iliad, p, 178.
is

OTI.
expressed, and 6re
/uev

understood

as in

v,

VIII. "Ore IJ.YI is an antique phrase for el pr), unless, except: Iliad. 319. See Eustath. p. 984. 1. 59. [II. *r, 227. Od. TT, 197.] IX. "Orav is compounded of ore and av : this appears from the poets, who use KCV for av, using ore KCV for 6'rav, as Homer, in Iliad, av separately for orav, as in i, 498. and from the occurrence of ore
Iliad. 0,

347.

time, and is therefore fitly construed with the subjunctive mood, especially of an aorist : orav ovv e\0r/ 6 Kvpios rov afj.7re\a>vos, ri irotrjffei TO!S yewpyols eKeivois ; St. Mattli. xxi, 40. when. It may sometimes be rendered, if ever ; if at any time: as iu vv TOI ov ^pa/oyiwo'iv, 6'rot deoi eld ev 6\vuTC(j), ore Iliad, a, 567.

X.

It signifies indefinite

icev roi acnrrovs

^lpas

e^e/'w.
:

XI. With the subjunctive of the present

TI av, Forst. o, r av, Fisch.) irorepov btKata
f/

aKoirelv,

6'rav irpurrrj t (o
:

Plat. Apol. Socr. p. 28. (c. 16. ed. Fisch.) XII. \\iththeindicative: OVTWS ov&e avfifyepet apa eviois ir\ovTelv t vrav pr) cTrirrTavTai rw 7r\ovr<p xpfjaBat : Ceb. Tab. p. 229 [p. 51.

abiKa Trparret

1. 7.

ed. Simps. Oxon. 1738. Hermann rightly pronounces this phrase a solecism, and reads eVt'orwyrat : he refers to Bast, on Greg. Cor. p. 115.] XIII. It sometimes signifies, whilst ; as long as: orav ev T$ xofffjup TOV KOfffiov : St. John ix, 5. seemingly for els ore av t for cS, ^tDs i/jtt which Homer says eloroKe : see II. /3, 332. XIV. "Orav occurs in a causal sense, since, seeing that ; but seldomer than ore eTret ro UKOVCTTOV VTTO TOV oparov iretyvKe <f>6avecr6at, TOV fiev Kal TTVppwQev opupevov, TOV 5e, eiretbav epTreXaffrj Ty aKOp' Kat uaAtffra, o ra v TO fiev Ta^iffTOV y r&v OVTWV, Xeyai 6e ro Trvp&beSf TO be %TTOV Ta*xy : Aristot. de Mundo c. 4.
:

OTI.
I.

OF THE ETYMOLOGY AND PRIMARY POWER OF

"On
is

OTI.
ri
:

I.

compounded of
:

the relative o and

the indefinite

this

appears from Homer's using o alone for on, yiyvwoKuv, o ol avros vTretpexex^P^'ATroXXwv Iliad, e, 433. See also a, 120. and Eustath. p. 669. and p. 1057. 1. 18. which is to commence a II. Hence appears its genuine power clause or member, making, by its relative nature, that clause, containing a finite mood, depend on a preceding verb ; so that 6V/, followed by such a clause, is equivalent to ro followed by a clause with
;

infinitive mood : thus, rJKovtra OTL TOVT aXrjQes eoTt ri^ovaa TOVT aXijSes elvat : i. e. ffKovaa TO aXrjdes eivat aXrides elvai is in place of an accusative.

an

is

TOVTO.

equivalent to So, TO
fol-

III.

In construction

it

answers to rovro either preceding or

lowing : Jud. 5.

See ov iravaofjiai, TOVT'iaO* OTI: Aristoph. Av. 1408. Homer puts roye before o, instead of TOVTO before oVc, Iliad.

eyuy

OTI.
o,120.
IV.

137
11 76\

Tovro follows

ill

Aristopb.

A V.

ok- tVjueK

on &

efye

Trrfpa, TOUT' <<T/UJ>.

The

uses of

on

and the intensive or augmentative:

signification of time.

are principally three ; the narrative, the causal, lo these may be added its use in

II.

OF THE NARRATIVE USE OF OT[, FROM WHICH OTHER USES ARE DERIVED.
The
narrative

ITS

I.

use of on

is

twofold:

1.

when

the

narrator

2. person, employing oblique phraseology, and when he relates as in the person of another, employing direct phraseology. In the first case, the oblique phrase may be resolved into an accusative case and infinitive mood ; as, Xeyw on ^wKpaTys can aofyos, into Xeyw ^.<i)Kpa.Tr)v elvai aofyov : and it is to be remarked that, when

relates in his

own

something past
tative
ffi\evs t

mood

is spoken of, the best authors generally use the op'Ivbol as, ol e'Xeai', on Tre/u^ete c(f>as 6 'Ivbuv /3aKal Ke\f.vfftev ep&Tqv, &c. Xen. Cyrop. ii, 4, 7 that the king
:

&

had

sent them,

&c. But of something present Xenophon uses

the

indicative, presently afterwards : aKovere ovbev. Add Dion, xxxvii. p. 56. c.

on OVK abiKovfj.v TOV 'Avovptov

II. In narration, if what is expressed by the verb or participle preceding ort, and what is expressed by the verb following it, were synchronous, then the verb following on is put in the present tense, a thus, although the verb or participle preceding it is in a past tense : 5 ta y y e\ eiarjs ovv t on vooel, 0>;/u7js Phil. Jud. Legat. ad Cai. p. 770- 77paro6 'Irjaovs betKvvetv TO"IS jj.adrjTO.'is ai/rov, on be~i CIVTOV cure\Qe~it> els 'Iepoi/oraX)//z : Matth. xvi, 21. But if what is expressed by the preceding verb or participle in the past tense was subsequent to what is expressed by the verb following a the following passage ort, then the latter verb is put in a past tense : exemplifies both cases : deupovvres ce TIIV TOV Tlerpov Trapprjalav Kal
:

'Ivavvov, Kal fcara\a/3o//evot on avdpionoi aypa/^taro/ et<rt, Kal i&iwrat, eSav/jm^ov, etreyivbtaicov re aurovs, on ovv r^5 'Itjffov ijffavi that they had been with Jesus: Acts iv, 13* See also St. John
iv, 1.

III.

An

infinitive
al.

mood

very seldom follows on.

H. Steph.

(in

Append, ad

and, Oewpo), on

Script, de dial. Att. p. 77.) cites Thucyd. and Xen. /utA\eti> ecrevdai TOV TT\OVV occurs in Acts xxvii, 10.

for ort /ueXXee. IV. When a narrator speaks as in the person of another, whose words he recites in direct phraseology, on and the following verb

cannot be resolved into an accusative case with an

as, TOV
6'

infinitive

mood

Xen.

airoKpivaffOai (Aeyercu) on fiaaiXeiav fiev OVK av >eai/*i]v : Cyrop. viii, 3, 26. See St. James i, 13. St. Matth. ix, 13. xxvii,

a This is one of many passages, which I have ventured to remodel, for reasons similar to those mentioned in the Preface to the Abridgment of Viger p. v. 1. 6. J. S.

Hoog.

138
43. Acts
iv, 20.
v, 23, 25.

OTI.

ix, 17. St. Mark i, 15. xiv, 26. 58. 1 John [See Abr. of Vig. p. 203. 1. 25.] V. Sometimes direct phraseology fol lows ort, even when the speaker

Rom.

recites
VJJLO.S.

his

own words
a?r'

ctTro^Wjoelre

rore bpokoyijad) avrols, on tyiou ol epya^ofjievot rfjv avoftiav

:

ovbeTrore
:

St.

eyvmv Matth. vii,

23. VI.

When

the words recited

person to whom or of whom he recites, the phraseology be direct or oblique : [i.

:

regard neither the reciter nor the it may he doubtful whether

e.

whether on be redundant

or not:] as, etTrctre, on ol jjLaOrjral avrov, VVKTOS eXOovres, eK\e\jjav St. Matth. xxviii, 13. So St. Maik vi, 15. avrov, fifjitiv Koipwuevuv
St.
is prefixed to a whole discourse or disquisition, be it ever * so long : as, ov be (Xo'yov) fjieXXw Xeyetv, 2r^<rt^opoi/ XCKTCOS be wSe* &c. Plat. Phaedr. p. 244. ort, OVK ear ervfjios o Xo'yos, os av <py (p. 315. ed. Bip.) and, Xeyw/xef br) vnep avrwv, ort, 'ft Imparts re Ka.1 Id. de Rep. v. p. 452. (p. 10. ed. Bip.) t &c.

John iv, VII. "Ore

10.

III.

OF THE

ELLIPTICAL USE OF OTI.

1. of something previously exT&V ai/0pw7rwv <ro0wraro$ : yeyove pressed where, in the answer, Xeyet is understood before ort. II. 2. Of something extraneous : as, o e irfnvr^v jcarayeXaffro'rarov, (underst. rovr' eort) on TOJV yeypapf.iev(t)v ev rais 6/ioXoy/ats ra ^e/ptora feat, ort ravr' early Tvyya.vop.ev Sta^uXarrovres : Isocr. Paneg. p. l6l. aX^y//> Xa/3e fjioi ra \^r)(j)ifffjiara t ical rrjv eKfjiaprvpiav avdyvtaOt rrtv

I.

There
;

is

an

as,

rl

Xeyec

ellipsis before on : ort TLwKpaTqs ;

'AptoTo5//^ov, KCU KaXet Trpos ovs efafjiapTvpriffev, &c. yEschin. de Fals. Leg. p. 249. Before 6Vt, tva ofjXov y, or the like, is to be understood.

So, ort
parevs,

6'

ovbev

\jsevbos eiprjKa Trpos v/ids,

Xa/3erw

/not

ro ^?/0tr/ia 6 ypa/i-

&c.

ib. p.

253.

III. The grammarians also and expositors prefix 6'ri before a fresh observation, understanding lareov or arifieitaaai : examples may be seen in almost every page of Eustathius's comm. on Homer. IV. Sometimes, especially in compilations, 0a<rJ>, or <f>r)<r\v 6 KO.I 6, is understood before ort : thus, on biajjapravet ^rjfiocrBevrjs ev raj Kara Nea/pas, Xeywr, DXara/eas yeypa00at ev rrj TlotKt\y aroq, : Harpocration. ort Trpos rf)v <f>v\r]v rov Krrjcrafjievov at Trpos rovs bovXovs Xay^uvov-

rai btKat

Suid.

in. v. ort.
;
:

The
Ip.

full

expression sometimes occurs

*

as,

\iyovffiv

on AtoXos
C.

\eyovnLV on

yvvalices
in

tyaalv

on M/yws

Palajphat.

11. 13. 18.

Harpocration, after the very same words which Suidas on vopos eortv, vTrep recrffapaKovra err) yevopevov uses elliptically ort vojuos earlv, inrep recrarapaKovra err) yevofj-evov ^ppYiyelv Trauriv : Suid. Xoptjyelv TratatVf Alff)(ivr]S re ev ri*> Kara Ttyuop^oy (f>r)al, Kai'ApiffTOTe\T)S

&c. and

ev ry 'A0/?vat'wv iroXirela

of Suidas,

ort ol Troirjroi
jj.fj

fjcrav Kvpioi, el

And to the following words eTraveXOelv els rov narpajov olx'oi/ OVK iralbas yvrfaiovs Kara\iiioiev ev rot O'IKU rov
:

Harpocration.

iralces

OTI.
pevov,

139

Harpocration adds, .'Ajri^wv iirtrpoinKw KaXX/ffrparov, KCII SoXwy v eiKOffrrj T&V vopwv. V. "On is used elliptically in concluding a sentence: as, OVKOVV KdKai vTrepflaXXov TO abiKeiv KO.KIOV av e'ir) TOV abtKelaOai. Answ. Aj/Xoy Plat. Gorg. p. 275. (p. 63. ed. Dip.) Here either the preceding brj OTI words are to be understood, or something extraneous, as, OTI rovr* Hence brjXov OTI, or, in one word, brjXovoTt, used in aXrjBes COTIV. assent, and sometimes in explanation. VI. Sometimes it concludes very emphatically ; as after aa^ 'iadt,
:

or oiba : Sycoph. OVK eir ayaOy yap evdab' eorov ovbei'l. Chremyl. ^ta TOV At" OVKOVV TUJ ye aw, acrf 'tatf on : Aristoph. Pint. 890. &XX' OVK airobwaets, ovbe <pmXe7s, olb' on: Id. Vesp. 1339- [1348. ed. Br.] See Eurip. Pho3iiiss. l6ll. VII. There is sometimes an ellipsis of OTI itself. Eustathius says this is the case in v. 194. of Iliad, a. aXXa xai OVTOS oy eXTroju' e^t TTpuTotaiv 6/^tXeI : but in that verse eX^o/mi is perhaps parenthetical.

IV.

OF THE CAUSAL USE OF OTI.

I. Even in the causal use of 6Vt, its narrative force will, upon due examination, be found to be preserved ; for its causal force is owing to an ellipsis of bta and TOVTO before it: rows TroXXovs XeXrjOev, on OVK 'iffaai TTJV ovalav ZKCKTTOV Plat. Phrcdr. p. 237. (p 301. ed. Bip.) because they do not, &c. The full phrase would be, bia TOVTO, on, on this account, that, &c. as in St. John xv, 19. OTI be e/c TOV KoafjLov OVK
I

bta TOVTO p.iaei vpds 6 KOO-/IOS. Sometimes TOVTO only is understood, and bia coalesces with on in the word bioTi. That biuri because, and OTI, are equivalent in signification, appears from their being used indifferently in passages apa TO oaiov, OTI ooiov corresponding as to form and construction CffTi, 0i\e7rai VTTO T&V 0ea)v, r/ OTI tyiXelTat, oawv eaTiv and, Trorepov ro <^fp6pevov t btort 0cperat, (frepofuevov eorti^, r; bt aXXd TL Plat.
core,
II.
:

',

Euthyphr. p. 10. (c. 12. ed. Fisch.) See also Plat, in Phgedr. p. 244-. (p. 315. ed.Bip.) III. In 1 John iii, 20. on is repeated without reason in the opinion of Hoogeveen who therefore reads v. 19. and 20. as follows (19.) (cat
;
:

K TOVTOV yivwaKOfj.r, OTI IK T%s a\r)0eius effpev, Kat eftirpoaQev avTou Tas xapbias f)fj.wv, (20.) o, r t eai> (whatsoever) // Kapbia, fjiet^dtv karlv 6 0eos Tijs Kapbias r/yuwv, Kat

on

IV. Other words besides bia and TOVTO are sometimes understood elvai yue QeHJv, Kal ws Katvovs iroiovvTa Oeovs, <j>r)al yap Troujr^v TOVS b' ap-^aiovs ov ropi^ovTa, eypdiparo, TOVTWV avT&v eVe*ca, &s <jiail Euthyphro. pavdai'io, ^MKpaTcs, ort bfj av TO batpovtov (fiijs aavru cKctaTore yiyveodat Plat. Euthyphr. p. 3. (c. 2. ed. Fisch.) Alter
:

as, Socr.

(!)

fjiavdavh) underst. uQev TrXarret ravra.

V. Sometimes rl kanv is understood before OTI whence dered, wherefore, or why : as, 6's K C'ITTOI, on Toaaov '\ir6\\o)v\ Iliad, a, 64. See St. Mark ix, 11.
:

it is

ren-

140

OTI.

VI. Under the causal sense of on may be mentioned that which 19 assigned to it, when said to be put for KctOoYt, in respect of being ; as being ; so far forth as ; for these senses are so nearly allied, that see the passage it is almost always doubtful which is preferable : quoted above from Plato, p. 139. ! 29- a d 1 John iii, 9. Rom. vii,
20. [21.] and perhaps there is no passage in which on must necessarily be taken to stand for KuOon. VII. "Ort sometimes denotes, not the cause, but the sign of a thing : as, KareSv 6 i}\ios t OTI vv^ eanv : and, d^ewvrat at d/iapr/at avrfjs at
TroXXcu, ore fiycnrrjffe TTO\V
:

St.

Luke

vii,

47- That

on

in this last pas-

sage expresses the sign, and not the cause, is apparent from what Se oKiyov d0/ercu, oXiyov ayanq.: he does not say, nj> Christ adds, be oXiyov ayanuvn oXiyov d^/ercu.

V.

ON THE AUGMENTATIVE OR

INTENSIVE, AND OTHER USES OF OTI.

I. The intensive use of ort with superlatives may be explained by reference to its origin : e. g. ore /udXi<rra evbalfjuov, as happy as possible, Plat, de Rep. iv. p. 420. (p. 327. ed. Bip.) is properly ovrws "OTnus eaorrat OTI aptorot, evbatfj,(i)v, (Js o, re /ndXtffra [evbaifiov tore.]

Id. in Euthyphr.

is

OTTWS caovrat
1.

rovro, o f

re ot apteral elffiv.

[See

Abr. of Vig. p. 204.

24.]

II. The real nature of the phrase was in the course of time forgotten or neglected, so that ore coalesced with its superlative in one word : thus 6n^ot<rra, Xen. Cyrop. vii. p. 175. 1.36. ort/zdXtora, Plat. or^eyaAoTr/oeTreararo*', Xen. Cyrop. ii. p. 57. Cratyl. p. 439. 1- 5. Lucian. adv. Ind. t. iii. p. 113. onxf^Wwrara, 1. 3. oriTropjOwrdrw, Thucyd. viii, 74. onrdxtora, Plat. Euthyd. p. 302. Instead of onnt\tffTa f as soon as possible, it is singular that ort rd^os is sometimes used : yp&Qwv on Tayps, Hippocr. Epist. ad Hystanem ; and in

one word,

e/3oi/Xero ortrd^os aTro^p^ffaadai ry irapovvy TOV arpaTevfjiaTos eK7rAj/et, Thucyd. vii, 42. III. "Ort is said to be put for ware, signifying effect ; as in 1 John
iv,

17. but there

6'rt is

perfect,

on

THAT,

explicative : kv Tovry, in this is our love made In the Gospel too of St. as he is, so are we.

John

vii, 35. TTOV OVTOS jjteXXet iropeveaQai, on ////els ov^evp^aopey CIVTQV ; ort is causal, and assigns a reason for the question TTOV, &c. It is causal also in St. Matth. xiii, 13. and in bebiws, ort aTrrixdavofjirii',

Plat. Apol. Socr. p. 21. (c. 7. ed. Fisch.)

f IV. One passage occurs

when
St

in which on has a signification of time ; ep^erai &pa, OTI QVK en kv Trapot/xmts XaX//<TW vfjuv : Gospel of John [xvi, 25. "Ore is the common reading.]
;

VI.
I.

ON THE PARTICLES JOINED WITH

except.

OTI.

"Ort

pf) is

A prudent man,
on
ftr)

Xots

%apiadai

/leXer^r,

says Plato, ought not b TrdpepyoF, dXXct c~eff7rorcus

or.

ui

Phaedr. p. 274. (p. 378. ed. Bip.) ov yap %v Kprivr), on fjtia ev our' en-i Oewpiav TrwTrore UVTTJ rrj aKpotoXet rijs IIuXov : Thucyd. iv, 26. els 'laO/Joy, ovre aXXoo-e, et Tijs TroXews e&XQes, on yuj) aira yu/ TTOI Plat. Crit. p. 52. (c. 14. ed. Fisch.) Here oVi pr) and ffrpaTva6jj.evos el p} are plainly equivalent. [For the true nature of the expression on pi], see Abr. of Vig. p. 204. 1. 13.] II. "On is sometimes put before ri in questions Charon. pciTrjv TOV Tlapvaaffov avry KaaraX/^t, Kal TI}V Oirrjv, Kal ra aXXa oprj peTeKtw'iMercur: on TI ; how so? literally, because what? Lucian. ra;uej/. in Charon, t. i. p. 497. [See Abr. of Vig. p. 204. 1. 6. and note /.] III. The expression of eagerness and impatience in on TI is augmented by the addition of 6?}, as in Aristoph. Plut. 136. Tfjs oldas
:

ffavTOv aXXoTpios yzyovas. Kal 6 zavdos, on TI brj ; Kal 6 AtcrwTros, on Planudes in Vit. ^Esop. p. X^es peduwv crvvedov rijv QaXarrav eKTriely 48. [p. 69. 1. 19- ed. Genev. 1628.] IV. For on ri btj ; on 5?) ri ; is said ; and on brj ri ^taXtora ; as in
I

Rep. i. p. 343. (p. 180, ed. Bip.) And as eneiri is put for and r/e for ?/6e, so onrj TI; for on 01) rl\ as in Aristoph. Nub. v. 782. [784. ed. Br. 774. Bekker's, for Mr. Priestley, 1826.] V. Of o n separately, as it is not a particle, this is not the place to treat: one thing however may be observed, that in dialogue it follows and answers to r/, in the same manner as O'TTWS to TTWS, OTTOV to e ri irpos ravr' TTOV, &c. thus, Bdel. 6 [do you ask el^'; Phil, o TI me what ? what did he say ? why~\ aieicTpvot'os /u' etyaaKe KoiXiav exetv: Aristoph. Vesp. 789- [793. Br.] See also v. 1434. [1443.
Plat, de
effetbrj,
;

ed. Br.]

1. Ov is put before a consonant, OT, OYK, OYX, OTXI. OVK before a vowel, vowel. before On the difference an aspirated ov% between ov and futj, see py. Ov denies a whole proposition, jo) a part ov ae 0ai/yua5w TV^as : Eurip. Med. 268. So St. only : thus, TrevQelv Matth. xv, 26. and 1 Corinth, xiii, 4. 5. 6. [See Abr. of Vig. p. 165.
'

1.

15.]

is joined to a nonn by hyphen : negatives that word only to which it is joined : as, eyw TrapaC^XwVw vpas eir OVK edvei, Horn, x, 19- *cara TY\V OVK efcovaiav TJJS uywv/aews, Thucyd. v, 50. atr/a ^e TOV TroXe/uov e^eXXev eaeadai TOV (popov fj OVK CLTC 6b oats, the non-payment of the tribute : Lucian. Ver. Hist. i. II. Ov sometimes denies absolutely or generally, and is opposed to vai: see St. Matth. v, 37. St. James v, 12. is

But there

an exception, when ov
it

for in that case

III. In negative answers it is often accompanied by an ellipsis as, Plat. Phaed. dpa fir) ciXXo TI y o davaros r; TOVTO ; Answ. ovc, aXXa rovro The p. 64. (c. 9. ed. Fisch.) for OVK ctXXo eortv 6 Oavaros ij TOVTO.
: :

ellipsis is supplied

by St. John i, 21. IV. There is an ellipsis also, when, in antithesis or opposition, ov ends a sentence, or a member, having always, on account of its emphasis, an acute accent, and rejecting K even though a vowel or diphthong follow as, <pa7juev av r) ov Plat. Protag. p. 330. (p. 127. ed. Bip.) ei Wara f/ ov ; Id. de Rep. v. p. 432. (p. 10. ed. Bip.)
: ;

142

OY.

is most frequent in sentences of which the clauses or members ' are distinguished by pev and be : as, TOIS pkv \6yots rjvfypuve, rots To~is ov Orest. e^ be kv 287/wev apa Eurip. oitfjupuvovfjiev, epyoicrtv TOIS ov : Plat. Phaedr. p. 263. (p. 356. ed. Bip.) So de Rep. v. p. 453. init. and p. 4/5. (p. 10 and 56. ed. Bip.) See Herodot. ii, 37. V. Me*' is not always expressed in the first clause or member: be typrjv ov : Plat, in Sympos. p. ?/ yXwrra ovv vTreo-^ero, ?/ (p. 221. ed. Bip.) and so in Gorg. p. 520. (159- Bip.) VI. Ov final sometimes ends a clause, and not a sentence; as, ov rrjs /Ltei>, rrjs 5' ov' a\\a Traertjs ; ffofyias (priaofjiev eiridvfjirjrrjv eti'cu, So Epict. Enchir. c. 9. Plat, de Rep. v. p. 475. (p. 56. ed. Bip.) in above Herodot. the ii, 37'] quoted, [and passage VII. The emphasis is increased when ov is repeated : ov perecm T&V 'iffiov ovbe r&v 6/Wwv TTQQS TOVS TrXovaiovs TO~IS TroXXots fyLcwv, ov

This

19

Dernosth. in Mid. p. 401. emphatical in figurative questions, equivalent to affirOVK apa bevTepoy boXovmations, and demanding assent : TT&S etnas In this use ov^l /ueOa ; Soph. Philoct. 1281. [ap ov bevr. Br. 1288.] very frequently occurs ri be ; r/ iarpiKi}, ovy(\ ^ evovcra KUKO. epyaop.vrj ed. Bip.) irepl TO. croj^tara tar/otfcwrepa ; Plat. Hipp. p. 375. (p. 223. So St. Matth. v, 46.
/uereortv, ov
:

VIII.

Ov

is

IX.
xiii,

It

expresses indignation

OVK ebet \v6fjvat, &c.

;

St.

Luke

l6.
It loses its

X.
xviii,

in the question, owe

emphasis when doubt is indicated as it eyw ae elbov kv ry KT^TTW ^ter' avrov

is
;

perhaps
St.

Luke

26.
:

XI. With the second person of the future indicative it commands OVK a<pr]ffeis rov aaKov ; emphatically in the form of interrogation ib. 825. ov Aristoph. Ach. 822. TOVS avKotyavra.* ov 6vpae e^etp^ere ov navvy fiapflapiKa ijfjuv ybuv ; ffiwTnjaeode ; Aristoplj. Pac. 308. Lucian. Lapith. t. iii. p. 445. See Aristoph. Ach. 564. Pac. 1124. and Plutarch. Apophth. p. 180. Aristoph. uses the imperative as equivalent ; see Vesp. 450. [452. Br.] compared with 446. [448. And in the same sense he uses the indicative of the present: Br.] See Ter. Eun. iv, 7, 29. ib. v. 456. [458. Br.] XII. But without interrogation, ov with the 2nd pers. of the future
;

indicative expresses prohibition : as, ov potxevvets, ov cXe^ets, &c. See Exod. xx, 13. 14. 15. 16. Rom. vii, 7- Matth. v, 21. 27- vi, 5. Without ov the second person of the future commands: see Matth.
v, 48.

XIII. Sometimes ov, when construed with a verb, does not merely negative the signification of it, but denotes with it the opposite of that ri narr)v ov% vyialveis; why are you signification: as, ri irirei
;

Thus ov tyr^t beside yourself, or mad? Aristoph. Pac. 94. taken rather as a positive than a negative expression, /
<j)r)criv
:

is

to

be

deny: ov

See Aristoph. Ach. 6l4. 771. ol p.ev bwffetv, Horn. II. 77, 386. qaaiv abiKelv a\\{]\ovs' ol be ov tyaaw Plat. Euthyphr. p. 8. (c. 9- ed. Fisch.) [See Abr. of Vig. p. 164. 1. 10.] XIV. Ov with Xeyw and other kindred verbs has not this signifisec St. John xvi, 26. The reason why the use is confined- to cation
:

OY.
is,

143

has a peculiar sense of assent or affirmation : thus, </?jut ov KaTafyaovels faceivov TOV o-fcvroroyuov ; says Socrates to Alcibiadcs
that
:

<j)T]ffavTOs be TOV 'AXa/3idoi;, vnoXafiiov TrdXti' 6 ^.wKparrjs,

&c. Aid-

blades having assented, having replied in the affirmative : ./Elian. V. H.ii, 1. XV. This opposite signification is sometimes given to nouns as well

by ov : as, e epywv vo/jiov ov btKa.iti)6rj(TTa.i Traua o"d|o, Rom. 20. which does not mean, all flesh shall not be justified, but some shall be excepted : the meaning is, NO FLESH shall be justified. M?) is used in the same manner. See Psalm Iviii, 5. 1 Corinth, i, 29. Aristoph. Vesp. 1086. [1091. ed. Br.] Also ovSezrore, and similar negatives: ovbenoTe etyayov nav KOIVOV, I have never eaten any thing that is common : Acts x, 14. XVI. Ov affects the adverb VJKHTTO. also in the same manner :
as verbs
iii,

cpwres YHMV rS)V djO^cuwv TroXXot fj.ev KOI ctXXoi els fjvr)fj.r)V eboQrjaav, Kat OVTOS be ovx i]Kiara jElian. V. H. xii, 34. for /uaXttrra, principally,
'.

especially.

XVil. Ov sometimes virtually affirms, when it is used elliptically to express assent to a negative proposition : thus, Chor. ov 7rw7ro6' ovrta KaOap&s ovbevos ry/covcrayuev, ovbe ^vverws Xeyovros. Phil. OVK. dXX'
epfipas we0' oi/rw pctbiws rpv-y^aeiv
:

Aristoph. Vesp. 629-

[634. ed. Br.

where

True ; you say true : you have never heard any one speak so well: but &c. XVIII. There is often an ellipsis of p.6vov after ov: OVK e^evcru Acts v, 4. for ov povov avOpunois. See St. avdpunots, aXXa T(J> 0ew
ovros.]
t :

Mark

ix, 3/.

St. John*

this ellipsis has

The existence of 27. 30. vii, l6. xii, 44. been denied except when dXXa nai follows the neiii,

gative, as it follows fjtrj in Thucyd. ol Kat pr) TOVS eyyvs, ctXXa KCLI TOVS antaOev Tretpwvrai bov\ovaOai,iv t 22. See Duker. So, /ur) ra lavrwv eKaffTOs aKOTretTe, aXXa KO.I TCI erepwv e/cacrros : Philipp. ii, 4. and ov
in

Homer

II. e,

379.
ov
is

ad

XIX. When
:

Jn Plat, de Rep. vi, p. 492. accompanied by another negative word

in

such

passages as the following, it cannot properly be considered as redundant cu'ct/3Xe^as be 6 2a/cas epwr^, T'IVOS erv%ev ; ov /ia TOV At", etyrj, ovSevos T&V TrapovTuv: Xen. Cyrop. viii, 3, 29- for ov denies simply, whereas oit&els for ovoe els, (ove being equivalent to ne quidetn, not even,} excludes all exception. XX. But when ov follows ov5ev, a more emphatical affirmation is
Trpoyovoi,

produced: as, vnep uv ovbeva Ktvbvvov OVTIVOVV ov^ virefjietvav ol Demosth. This however is not the case, when ov& and OVA: regard different clauses or members as, ov' fjv ei'0' a.<ptKrjni Iliad. 0, 482. for the obaXwHevr), ov aev eywye 0Kvo/uevris dXeyw
; :

servation in xviii. will apply here ; the order of the sentence, with respect to the signification, being, eywye OVK: dXeyw aev <7Kv5oyuej'?s, ovb' T/J> eV0' a<f>iKr)CLL aXwfjievr). Ou negatives ctXeyw, and ovbe excludes the supplace. [OvK denies simply; ovbe repeats the negation even on no, not even if you position of the strongest case that could be put go to the abodes of lapetus and Saturn.] Nor is it the case when there are many negatives, provided they deny different things as, edrjxav
: :

iv

fj.rijfj.aTi

Xaevr,

ol

OVK

>}v

OVOCTTW ovbeis

neifjtevos

St.

Luke

144

OY

TAP.

Ob negatives the verb, xxiii, 53. wherein never man before was laid. ovbtirv excludes all past time, and ovbeis every person : thus, ovbevl
ovbauij ovbapws ovbepiav Kotvwiav \ei t Plat. Parmen. [Abr. of Vig. p. 162. r. ii.] XXI. Secondly, after a negative verb, as, dpvov/uat, ov cannot
b properly be deemed redundant : thus, ris eortv 6 ^/evoTrjs, ct apvovuevos on 'Irjaovs OVK eariv 6 Xpioros ; St. John ii, 22. So /w?) is usually put after negative or prohibitive verbs ; as, rov natblov dpvovfjievov fiij a.Trofle{3\r)Kevai, the boy denying that he had dropped them : Lucian. La pith. [p. 853. D. ed. Salmur.] cnrayopeva) pi) Troielv : Aristoph. Ach. 168. [See Abr. of Vig. p. 167. 1. 31.]
1. Whenever negation is acOY TAP, with annexed particles. companied by statement of a cause or reason, the particles ov yap are employed, independently of each other, so that they may be

--

separated : ov yap ffecroQifffjievovs pvdovs eaKO\ovdriaavTS, eyvuipiffauev cvyafj.lv : 2 Pet. i, l6. St. Peter might have vplv TI)V TOV Kvpiov TW yap vbu.ut said, ffeaotyifffjttvovs yap uvdovs UVK eaKo\6v6riffavTS, &c. TOV Oeov oi/x vTrorafffferai Rom. viii, 7. Here, on the other hand, St. Paul might have said ov yap vTrordo-aerat. The same may be said of ovbe yap and ovVe yap. II. In argumentation the reason of a reason is often given, as in Iliad, a, 152 154. So, ov y a p CI'ITTOV \frevbeTai ye' ov yap deftis avroj Plat. Apol. Socr. p. 21. (c. 6.ed. Fisch.) See Bud. p. 495. and Rom.
: :

viii,

used elliptically in negative answers, yap having the the is understood would have had if expressed ; effect of putting the matter beyond doubt by establishing the negation on a reason ; so that ov yap thus employed may be rendered, no indeed ; by no means : thus Pbaedr. OVKOVV &) TO y' ekos. Socr. ov yap. Plat. Phffidr. p. 276. (p. 384. ed. Bip.) Cynisc. ov5e TOVTO deuts eibevat ; Jup. ov yap. Lucian. Jup. Confut. t. ii. p. 638. The jite ellipsis may be supplied in some such manner as the following

7. III.

Ov

yap

is

same

effect, as

what

ov Oeuis TOVT el&evat' ov yap av d)<pe\i]6eijjs ovbe ev. IV. And when not responsive, ov yap subjoined to a negation, or to a question, denies emphatically and decidedly : e/3aXov els 0i/\a/o)i>, Kal vvv \adpa fjuas CK^aXXovfftv ; ov yap : Acts xvi, 37. and now do

they thrust us out privily ? nay verily : T'I b' ; avXrjTas TIS el^v rot or not at all ; or by no means : Epicharm. r) ov yap ; ap. Diog. Laert. iii. p. 1$5. V. With an ellipsis of apa, ov yap is used in an interrogation thus, ov yap equivalent to an assertion with its reason subjoined <t>ayu TOVS iroXeplovs ; (Aristoph. Ach. 826.) is equivalent to e^prjv
boKel avOpwiros,
:

TOVTOV

eart yap TroXefitos. yap; by itself, is sometimes a question intended rather to elicit assent to something preceding, than to gain information : is it not so ? bel fj.ev yap br), CK TU>V vvv (J^uoXoyijjuerwv, avroi' eavrov /zdXcora ^vXarretv, OTTWS /UT) abiKYjffr), as iKavov KUKQV efyvra. ov yap ; Plat. Gorg. p. 480. (p. 73. ed. Bip.) [See Abr. of Vig. p. 183. note A.] VII. Ov yap dAAa, translated /or, is an elliptical phrase, in which
<f>aiveiv,

VI.

Ov

OY TAP.
fjt.ii

145

ov yap assigns a negative reason, and dXXd opposes something different : ffKGjTrrt p , <L 5eX0'* ov yap, dXX' e^w KUKWS : Aristoph. Ran. 58. i. e. ov yap crKwiTTU), dXX' e^w KO.KUH. In the foregoing example the ellipsis is supplied from something before expressed : in the following it must be supplied by something extraneous: Phaedr. ov /) TO y* CIKOS : Socr. ov yap, dXXd TOVS /zev kv
ypafiuaat ed. Bip.)
Ktjirovs
<T7repe7

re cat ypdi//ei

Plat. Phaedr. p. 276.

Here

after ov yap, KaTopduaeiev

av

understood. [See Abr. of Vig. p. 168. r. iv. VIII. That this ellipsis is not imaginary, appears from Aristoph. Ach. 402. where the words expressed between ov yap and dXXd, show that some such are to be understood when not expressed : Dicaeop. eKKoXeaov avroV. Cephis. dXX' abvvaTov. Dicaeop. dXX' b'uws' ov yap av a7reX0ot//, dXXd Ko^ia Trjv Ovpav. He might have
said elliptically, ov yap dXAd KO^JIH TI}V Qvaav. IX. Sometimes ov and yap in this phrase

(p. 384. or the like, must be and note g.~\

rt,

may each have

reference

to a different ellipsis
KJ3a\\ovffiv
:

as, belpavTes raid's ^t^uoaia, aKaraKpi-ovs, avQpta-

TTOVS 'Pwjua/ovs vTrdp^ovray,

xvi, 37. Oy tioned, ov be~i

ya'p eo-^ev
:

ej3a\ov els QvXaKrjv, Kal vvv \aQpa fjfjias ov yap, dXXa eXdovres avroi ^as t^ayayerwo-av : Acts denies the justice of the proceeding just before men:

yjfjias Xd0pa e/c/3dXXetv yap assigns a reason, 'Pw/xatoi and dXXa opposes what follows to what precedes. X. In ov yap dXXa teal there is a twofold ellipsis for p6vov is supand these particles do not deny what precedes, pressed after ov yap but signify that it is not all, and of Jess weight than what is afterwards introduced by dXXa Kai as, riva ovv aXXov ao^iarrfv o'iei Kparrjareiv ; Ov yap, i\v 6' eyw, dXXa Kal TO eTrt^eipelv Qifjiat pev ov&eva, ?]& os. Plato de Rep. vi. p. 492. (p. 87 ed. Bip.) More fully, 7roXX?7 avoia ov ydp fjiorov ov^eJs /cparJ/ffei, dXXd Kal r &c. XI. In ov yap av, av pertains to a following verb, and there is a condition understood. Thus in the passage quoted above (I. 14.) from Aristoph. ov yap av aireXdoifM would be more fully expressed, And with a signification of el yap OVK eKKaXeveis, OVK av aTreXflotjut. an oblique future ov yap av TTOTC oura> avpfywva r\v avrw dVavra, for
;
:

all would never have been, &c. Plato Cratyl. p. 436. (p. 338. ed. Bip.) More fully, et yap ravr' ov% ovrws e^ei, OVK av uore, &c. XII. A;) added to ov yap confirms the negative argumentation of those particles Ttva j) car' avdpuirov ffofytav ffofyoi elcrtv, ?} OVK ^te/5o;

otherwise, for

had he not possessed such knowledge,

e^ai o TI

Xeyw' ov yap
Fisch.)

6?)

eyo;ye
in

avrrjv eTrtarafjiai
it.

Plat.

Apol. p. 20.
:

(c. 5. ed.

for I truly know nothing of

bt) is

XIII.

Ov yap

used

as, ei ol (f)v\aKes

/to)

ev&aiuoves, rives erepot

ii,

&c.

Aristot.

not.

de Rep.

arguing from the greater to the less ov yap by) o'i ye re^vtrae, ; 5. for certainly the artificers at least are

XIV. The force of 5>) is so far diminished by TTOV subjoined, that a readiness to hear any objection is indicated : ov yap ay bq-rrov e Xen. Cyrop. lli, 1, 17 a^poros crwtypwv av TIS yevoiro Trapa^pfjfJia for you will allow, T suppose ; for I think I may say ; or the like. XV. The causal power of yup in negative answers has already been
:

Hoog.

146

OY TAP.

treated of; ovv strengthens the support given by ov yap in a negative answer to the preceding negation of another person : so that ov yap ovv is never used except after a previous negation thus, ovSe evavriov ye ea-i bvas Tptabi : Answ. ov yap ovv. Plat. Phaed. p. 104.
:

^v

(c.

TOVTO be ye TreirovOvia (^v\^) ovbev irXeov apaovias ueTe\ot av. Answ. ov yap ovv. Ib. p. 93. Here the particles are left as vestiges of argu(c. 42. ed. Fisch.) mentation and conclusion, of which they perform the office, and the But ellipsis of which must be supplied from something extraneous. when the preceding negation is either supported by a reason, or introduced as a conclusion, the ellipsis with ov yap ovv needs not be for either the reason or the conclusion may supplied extraneously be assumed from what has been previously expressed ; the former when yap precedes, the latter when apa : thus, Euth. ypafflv <re m, ws eoiKe, yeypmTTai' ov yap TTOV CKCIVO ye frarayvwao^at, us av ye erepov. Socr. ov yap ovv. Plat. Euthyphr. Here the ellipsis is to be erepos /ue ypatyqv yeypaTrrai* ov yap e'ywye flovXoturjv supplied thus

53.

ed. Fisch.)

avap/jtoffrias, ovbe

When the illative particle apa precedes, erepov aXydtis ovv eXeyes. ovv concludes from the preceding inference ; as, ov ravrov apa ean. Answ. ov yap ovv. Plat. Soph. p. 256. (p. 280. ed. Bip.) XVI. FIov added to ov yap lays out for assent by semblance of
(5 ^w^pares, on (TV e.v6abe biarptfiets \ ov ovaa Tvy%avet : Plat. Euthyphr./or to be sure you also are not engaged hi a cause, or, for I suppose you too are When av is added, it is potential, and is to be referred to noty &c. its own verb, from the sense of which it takes away actuality OTTWS

doubt:
yap

as,

tl

vewrepov,

TTOV Kai aoi biKr) rts

av

<f)aivr]Tai

KaXXtcrcs rols

pri yiyvwffKovffiv,

ov

yap av

TTOV rols ye

Sympos. p. 221. ed. Bip. XVII. Sometimes a limitation or restriction is expressed by ye following rivos eveK av ns ^WTJ, a\\' 7} TWV TOIOVTUJV fibov&v eveica ; ov yap TTOV e/cetVwv ye, Jv 7rpoXv7r776?)t'ai bc~i Plat. Phaedr. p. 258. ei (317. ed. Bip.) Here is an ellipsis, which may be thus supplied yap av juaXtora cfwTj, OVK eKeivwv ye TTOV rjbovwv ctur) av, uv TrpoXvTT^elboaiv: Plat.
: : :

Qfjvai bel.

in

XVIII. That TTOV is not always dubitative, appears from passages which doubt can have no place ; e. g. ov yap TTOV airobefy ye

(reavTOv Xeyoj'ros, cJs irporepov fjv apjuovia avyKetpevr], vrplv eKelva elvai, <5v ebet avrfjv ffvvTedijvai' yj airobe^rf ; Qlbaftus, etyrj, w Xwnrpares : Plat. Phaed. p. 92. (c. 41. ed. Fisch.)

XIX. Ov yap
Xoyoi',
TTcDs, e<pr)v,

TOI is

equivalent to ov yap brj : eyw 5e Qav^aaas TOV A(ovv<Towpe, Xeyets ; ovyaproi, dXXa rovrov ye rov
I

Xoyo^ TroXXwv 6?) Kal TroXXaKis aKi]Kotos ael Oavua<o Plat. Euthydem. Here ov yap, avvlv\\i.i being understood, p. 286. (p. 35. ed. Bip.) gives a reason with negation for the words irws Xe*yeis; that negative reason is confirmed by rot, and aXXa opposes something different to what precedes. The ellipsis is supplied by Homer (5 0Xot, ov yap r 'ibuev, oirr) 6(j)os ovb* OTTTJ ^ws, ov' OTTIJ tfeXws fyaeatufipOTOS etffiv vrro
:

yrjv,

[elcr

VTTO
I

/ue0a Odffffov

yata^, Odyss. Od.i, 190.

/c,

191]

ovb'

OTTYJ

avvewaC

dXXa

<f>pav-

or

AHiior,

&c

147

MEN. i. in ov ifaov, TE, of the negation expressed by ov //, arid makes it depend on the suffragant negation of another person, which it is intended to elicit as, ap-^ovros yap TTOV, 7]v 5* eyo;, TtOevTos TOVS vofJLOvs Kal ~ii eTTLTTjbevuaTa, a bteXrjXvdajjiev, ov bijTrov abvvarov eOeXetv Koielv TOVS iroXtTas. Answ. ovb' biruGTiovv Plat, de Rep. vi. p. 502. (p. 106. ed. Bip.) it is certainly not impossible, you will allow, &c. II. Ovbi'iirov ye is, certainly not, at least as I think: 6avpa$(i) b' eywye, el Tols pev TO v6u.iaua, btatydeipovvt Qa.va.ros Trap vulv
TTOW softens the positiveness
:

or Annor, or AHnor

or

&Ttv

'

r/

r]nia,

rots

oXrjv

rf)v

iroXiv

Kt0bi]Xov Kal
:

uTTtaTOV iroiovat

\6ynv buffere. ov briirov ye, J ZeO Kal foot [p. 508. 1. 16. ed. Reisk.] III. The use of ov fj.ev is obvious, when it
*

Demosth. adv. Leptin.

is

correlative to

some

particle following in the apodosis, as, be, aXXa, ardp, or the like : ov fjev ffot Trore loov e^w yepas aXXaVro f*v 7r/\e7ov ^elpes ep.a.1

lieKovd, &c. Iliad, a, \6$.

no such particle corresponds to it, its use is more obscure; same book of the Iliad, baivvvr" ou' en dvpos ebeveTO batros v. 60S. Here it seems to be in civics, ov nev (bopfiuyyos irepiKaXkeos a manner circumscriptive or limitative, accompanying an addition worthy of more particular notice nor indeed of the harp. IV. In oil /iev ^?), ov is negative, per restrictive, and 5?) confirmative eaTiy vi] A/', avrip ffvaKrivos epos, os ev TTO.VT\ ^uctarevet TrXeov e^eiv. "AXXos b* a.v e?r/?pero UVTOV, i] Kal rutv TTOVWV ; Md At", e^?7, ov Xen. Cyrop. ii, 2, 22. /uev b)j V. In ovfj.evovv, ov denies, /nev limits, and ovv concludes ovas in the
: :
:

When

fjLevovv /ue trpoaebuKas, orj) KoQopvovs elx. S f

fivayvajvai a eri

Aristoph.

plainly,
/u'

Ran. 564. [557- ed. Br.] The force of each word will appear more upon transposition ori fjiev KoQopvovs ei^es, ov irpoaeboKas ovv
:

avayvSivnt ae en, because truly you had buskins on, you therefore did not expect that I should any longer recognise you. T Ap' ovv ovbe ov Xeyev t &a7Cf.p ovbe eypatyev, fjviKQ. kpya.aa.aQai n beoi KUKOV vpas pev ovv i\v cive'iv erepu) : Demosth. de Cor. p. 333. [p. 274. 1. ]6. ed. Reisk.] i. e. ov p.ev erepa) i\v elxe'iv, pot'h) ovv Aiayjivri. 'AXXd ri TOUTO 6 QpavvKXfjs o (biX6ero(f)OS ovros eoTiv ; ovuevovv aXXos Lucian. Timon. t. i. p. 169. i. e. aAXos [*ev OVK CCTTIV' eaTiv ovv o QpaffVK\ijs. The office of pev is more apparent when be, aX\a, or a similar
',

',

particle, following, corresponds to it : thus, A\. 'E/^e bel TrpoKtKp'taQai 0ov, o A//3t/' aueivuy yap etui. Av. Obfuevovv' aXX' e^ue. Lucian. Dial.

Mort.
ovv.

t.

i.

p.

380.
in

for, ov bel

f.iev

ae

Ovv however

this

expression

may

irpoKeKpladai, dXX' ovv possibly be confirmative.

e/ze.

See

VI. As to the use of ovuevovv, it is corrective, denying somewhat preceding, and substituting somewhat following, as more true: thus, Car. 77 TWV irovriptov rjtrda KUI Toi^wpv^wv. Sycoph. //a A/', ovuevovv ecrd' vyies VUMV ovbevos Aristoph. Plut. 871. [nay, but rather ; nay, but on the contrary.,] VII. But when the ov pertains to something following, ovuevovv cannot be rendered by nay t without repetition of the negative eyo>,
v :

148

OV MH.
1

aol OVK av bvvaip^v dvrtXe'yety dXX ovrws says Agatho, <! ILuKpares, e^erw, ws av Xeyeis : to which Socrates replies, ovpevovv rfj aXrjOeiabvvaffat avTiXeyeiv, CTTCI Xwicparei y' ovSev xaXeTrdV : Plat. Sympos. p. 201. (p. 226. ed. Bip.) nay rather it is the truth that you cannot

contradict, &c. VIII. IIws is subjoined to ov pkv, but it qualifies its own verb, and not ov pev : the particles are rendered, not certainly by any means : ov uev TTWS iravTes (3affiXevffofj.v evdab' 'A^atot : Iliad. /3, 203. IX. Tot is more frequently subjoined ; which confirms the negation limited by pev : appovla ydp brjirov, TravreXws avro rovro ovffa apaovia, avapfJioffTias ovVor' av /zerdo^ot. Answ. ov uev TOI. indeed it cannot 9 So afterwards, p. certainly : Plat. Phaed. p. 94. (c. 42. ed. Fisch.) . Ov uev rot, ud At", ^6' os. (c. 32. ed. 82. ov ydp av irpetrot, eQrj And in answer Fisch.) See also Aristoph. Vesp. 663. [665. ed. Br.j to a question, especially to one including a negation : Aristoph. Av. 1667. [1668. Br. 1666, Bekk. There is no interrogation in these
editions.]

X. Ov iiivroi, by its asseveration of denial, effects an opposition of a succeeding clause or member to a preceding one having pev in it ; and is in that case rendered not however, but not : e^oi e So/covo-i Travres ot roiovrot irapotyvriKol fj.ev elvai irpbs TO rds drcXe/as vfias Treiffac ov fi^vrot biKaioi yc ovbanrj : Demostb. adv. Leptin. a<{>e\ffQai
p. 375.

And

this adversative use it

may

have, even

when

/uev

is

not ex-

gv/uj3a/i'e pressed, provided it may be understood : as, rvv cij rifj.1v aptora pev elvai a \iyopev, el pevoiro* ^a\7fd be yeveffOai, ov fievrot abvvaTa ye : Plat, de Rep. vi. p. 502. (p. 107. ed. Bip.) He might have said, yeveadat be ^aXeira fjiev, ov pevTOt, &c. To ov p.ev TGI the particle dXXaalso is added, which is followed by ye, the latter affecting not ov pev TOI a\\d, but some other word : ov denies something not expressed, but to be assumed either from what precedes, or extraneously ; fiev limits what ov negatives ; rot confirms the limited negation ; and a\\d introduces something different ; so that ov pev TOI dXXd ye is, certainly not indeed, but at ovrws y' elvai aXoyov ov uev rot, dXX' least. Thus, ical yap av bofatev N taws y e'xet rtva Xdyov : Plat. Phaed. p. 62. (c. 6. ed. Fisch.) After ov uevTot underst. cbrXws ciXoyov eort. The ellipsis is partly supplied in the Vesp. of Aristoph. x^P t > npopatv eppwuevws. i5 Kw/^/a, fipabvv. 231. He veis ; fj.d At", ov fjievTOt Trporov y', a XX' ^<70' t/uds Kvvetos might have said in the usual order, ov /*erot, dXX' fada TTQOTOV y

XL

tjuds Kvvetos.

XII.
btrjye~iTO

Ov
;

uevTot dXXci

/cat

qualifies
KCU,

dition being
r]

made

to

it

by

avros SwK'pdr^s ; ov pevrot, dXXa KCU ^.wKpaTrj ye evta rjbtj avrjpofJLijv, 'Apiarobripos r\v rts &v eKeivov tficovffa, Kal pot u)uo\6yet, KaOaTrep eKelvos btrjyelro : Plat. Sympos. p. 173. (p. 166. ed. Bip.) for ov ^ueyrot 'Aptarubrjfios povos
.

something already said, an adis superadditory as, rt's ooi ov pd TOV At", yv b" eyw, dXX' oo-Trep OotVtK't*

which

OY MH.

iTo t

a\\d
1.

Kal 2.

&c.
and disposed, are

These

particles, thus joined

OY MH.
in auxiliary to each other

149
;

vehement

denial or prohibition

and negation by its prohibitive prohibition by its negative power, power. The force of the one or of the other prevails according to the occasion on which they are used : both are referred to the same verb ; takes away the sense of actuality, reducing it from which py always to power or will : what has been said therefore of the construction of av will apply to that of ov f*fj. Thus in negation, ov prevailing ; ovrws Toy ireptTraTOV MeydpaSe, eTriTedvfirjKa aKovffat, ware, av /3aS('c?wv Troirj ov uri ffov a7roXe/>0ai : Plat. Piifcdr. p. 227.' (P 281. ed. Bip.)
II. It is

ov assisting

ov

uri

OK&^S, Aristoph. Nub. 295.

Starpt'tJ/T/s,

seldomer that the prohibitive particle pri prevails; as in Br. Bekk.] ov //j) [o-Kw^ets, 296. Id. Ran. 465. [Siarp/^eis, Br. 462.] ov pj 0\vap?)<7rjs, ib.

527.

[^\vapr']ffiSj Br. 524.] III. The negative power usually prevails. Examples are very fref quent in the Holy Scriptures : thus, ot TrvXwves avr^s ov pj KXetaOtiffiv :

Revel, xxi, 25. IV. The prohibitive power is rather more apparent in St. Matth. The sense v, 18. twra ev, ?/ pa Kepaia ov p.fi napeXdrj a-rro TOV vofiov. seems to be the same as if he had said, ov TrapeXevVercu, itou yu) Trapthus eXOy, a degree of assent, and the speaker's approbation being adcted to the negation. So 2 Pet. i, 10. Revel, xviii, 22. 23. St. Mark ix, 1. St. Luke xiii, 35. V. It is more faint when it follows futures which have not p] added
to

them : as, ov t<raKovffTa.i.

1

X^erat

Ov

See

10. 11.

put for av

entirely void of all sense of prohibition, being the signification of power or will : as, eaV p) o-^/xeta KO.\ St. John, iv, 48. repora tojyre, ov p) Triffrevcrjjre VII. And this is the case when it is construed with the first person singular : rwv avofju&v avT&v ov p} fjivrjadw en: Hebr. viii, 12. x, 17 Here either will is signified, or aversation: far be it from me to . In the following passage possibility is denoted : KaOrjpai /Baa/Xtaaa,
in
:

Maccab. ii, St. Luke i, 15. VI. Sometimes /*} is

Trrw^ov, KOI berjctv rjbtKTj^ievov iKereiuv opfyavov : Jes. Sir. xxxil, 13". 63. St. Matth. xxiv, 2. St. John x, 5. Hebr. viii,
Trpo'crwTrov ITTI

prj vTrepiby

icat

\r]pa.

OVK

elfj.t,

teal

irevtios

struction ov always precedes

pi

ov p) tSw : Revel, xviii, 7: see Thorn. Mag. in p\.

I Q this

con-

Nor is it prohibitive, when used in interrogation ; as, TO TTObebwKe fj.oi 6 7ran)p, ov p) TT/W avro ; St. John xviii, 1 1. Here p] may be put for av in the sense of necessity or duty. IX. Ov pi is construed with the indicative also, but of the future ^Escbin. only ; as, rovs juev yap Trovrjpovs ov p'j Trore (3e\riovs Trotr/ffere
VIII.
T)'ipiov, u
:

c.

Ctesiph.

ov

pr)

irepto^opii, Aristoph. ov prj 7rav<ro/ucu ^tXoao^w^,

:

Plat.

See the reason in av and /UT}. 6 last mentioned tense it is used in interrogation 0eos ov ju>) 7roi//<ret e<cok>yo-tv TWV eK\eKT&v avrov ; St. Luke xviii, 7. XI. The indicative of the future with ov appears to be equivalent to the subjunctive of the aorist with ov Karaiffprj: 6 iriffrevuv ov pi In speaking of the same thing, St. Matth. "XyvQij, Isai. xxviii, 16. uses ov fjiti with the indicative of the future, St. Mark ov pj with the subjunctive of the aorist, and St. Luke ov alone with the indicative of

X. With the

150
the future
I

OT MHN.
ov pr)
:

a<j>edfj

w5e \iQos
xxi,
6.

eirl

\iQov t os ov
:

ju

St. Matth. xxiv, 2.

raXi/0//0-erfu

osov/i)) KaraXvBy

St.

Mark

xiii, is

2.

os

ov

KCL-

St.

Luke

but

the

negation

more

forcible

with /nfj. XII. What has been said of ov followed by pr), applies to the compounds also of both ; as, ovbe /u), ovbels /u^Trore, ov /^Trore, &c. ov See also Aristoph. Vesp. 393. [394. /ur/7ro0' uXw, Aristoph. Ach. 662.
ed. Br.]

XIII. When ov and pr) are separated, ov pertaining to a preceding verb, and /nij to one following in the infinitive mood, ft?) and the infinitive mood are equivalent to an infinitive of an opposite sense, and the two negatives effect an emphatical affirmation thus, o
:

a
;

e'ibofjLev

Kal riKovvapev, pr) XaXelv

Acts

iv,

20.

fj.i)

XaXe7'for

So, ov

bvj'a/jiat pi] fj.vr}aOfjvat

avrov,

Xen.

particles redundant, when more than two Greeks were accustomed to connect negations by a negative e'orcu yap rare OXi\pis fteyaXr), o'la ov yiyovev avr' up^yjs TOV So St. Matth. xxiv, 21. yevrjTai Kocrpov CMS TOV vvv, ouo' ov

XIV. Nor. are negative

;

are joined

for the

IJ.TI

xiii,

6.

neither of the negatives serves as a copulative, as, vpds ov pf) abiKriffei :. (St. Luke x, 19.) If a transposition be admitted, there will be nothing redundant ov pr) abiKfiaei, ovoer, i. e. ovb& ev. However this may be, the force of negation is increased by this accumulation of negatives. XVI. Either a subjunctive of the aorist always follows, or an indicative of the future, with which p), not preceded by oi>, would be deprecatory ; for OVKCTI ov p} iriu (St. Mark xiv, 25.) is one thing, and ovKert p) iriut another. OVKCTI ov iriw is not Greek. OVKCTL ov
Kal ovbev
:
.

XV. And when

IJD)

0ctyw e^ civroO, St.

Luke

xxii, l6. ov/cert ov

p.ij

evprjffys

UVTO.

Acts
'At,

xviii, 14.

XVII. When an optative

OVTWS ov ptinoTe
TV-^OI
:

follows, av
ii.

is

suppressed

Tfjs

Plat. ep.

p. 323.

1. In ov piv the latter particle confirms the negation of the former. The combination is used in denying a particular added, on which the main matter spoken of hinges, and it is rendered,

OY MHN. --

but not, but yet not, not however

iroTijpiov viro TLVQS TtHjv GvvrjQwv,

'Ap\eXaos
CTrtetfCwv,

ov

jj.t]v

aiTrjdels napa KOTOV e/ceXevcrev sLvptTriorj

TOV TToiba bovvai' Oav/jLaaai'Tos be TUV ai'dp&Trov, 2y JJLZV yap, elVe^, atretv, ovros be Xajufiavetv u$t6s eart KCLI /j?/ CIITUV : Plutarch. Apophth. Here eTrietKwv being a word of great weight with regard to p. 177. the following apophthegm, ptjv is added to the negation of it instead

of

be,

which would have been

if

less efficient in

the present case, al-

though, apophthegm had not followed, it might have been employed, with an ellipsis of pjv after avvridwv: avrifiiav fjirjv, OVK
the
II. Ov pjv aX\a is corrective ov p)j/ denying something either before expressed, or to be assumed extraneously, and dXXa opposing something different : thus, ov //', aX\a TOV Mapiov aTrovbagovTos v<peavTOv : .Marius howOijvaif TroXXas avafioXds iroirjaafjLei'os, cHfifjKev
;

OY MHN.
ever,

151
ov p)t> rov

&c.

Plut.

aTTOffTctvTos,

a\\a cnrovbaovTos.
1.

217. [p. 382.

understood after ov pr}v. a III. Hence it is used in putting off the consideration of something to another time which is a sort of correction ov p^v aXXa ravra pev els rov oi/celov ctvadio/neda rov Xoyov TOTTOV Plut. de Adulat. et Atnic. p. 54. The full expression would be, ov prfv TrXet'w vwl nepi TOVTWV, uXXa, &c. and in pretermission, as, ov /jr/v, dXX' et bel iravra raXXa KapaXurovra avvTopus etVetv, &c. Ep. Philipp. ap. Dem. p. 62.
; :
:

fully, Maplov See also Demosth. de Fals. Leg. p. 25. ed. Reisk.] where ovrws eipyvrjv Trotrireov may be

in

Mario

p. 409-

More

for ov

p.i]v ^uaA."0oXoy//t7w.

expression occurs in Isocrat. xprjo-i/iwrara fjiev anavres [*r]v ijbtffra ye avT&v CLKOVOVCFIV, aXXa ravrb TrenovOafftv, He might have said, irpos rovs vovQerovrras : ad Nicocl. p. 45. ov prjv aXXa ravro ireTrovQafftv, &c. See also Aristoph. Vesp. 268. IV. When pei> precedes, it is not certain that /u?)> corresponds to it instead of &e, for 6s may be understood after p/v TTO.W ptv 90Demoslh. Phil. iv. p. 57. i. e. ov fiovpat \eyetv' ov p/v dXX' epw or ov fa)y ffiyfjaw be. See also Demosth. de Chcrson. p. yu))v aiyr]Gw, Ae is expressed in 3 Maccab. v, 50. 56. [p. 92. 1. 2. ed. Reisk.]
full
ot/fjtv

The

ov

ov prjv be,

dXXa

/cat,

&c.

Mev may be

latent in
:

what precedes
in

and
1. iii.

Hesych. explains ov ^v be by ovba.fj.ws be e read ov fju}v be riav^aaev 6 p. 199 ro^y

and

Diog. Laert.

&IOVVCTIOS.

V. In ov pity ye, ye affects not the other particles, but limits some other word with which it is joined ; as, ov ptjv ra ye aXXa ovrw Xen. Mem. i. p. 715. "ov prjv dyioovvres ye TOVTWV ovbev Kpiverat riywrlwv Polyb. i. p. 9- That it does not affect the other particles appears from this, that it occurs sometimes after ov fji^v aXXa, some
:
:

at other times between other word, which it limits, being interposed then also interposed: 1. earn /uTff and dXXa, other words being ctXX' e^ei ye Tiva Trpofyafftv Demosth. jj.kv OVK opBaJs e%of ov fj.rjv, Philipp. iv. p. 50. ov fA)jv a'XX' vTroTrrevw ye f)v olficii ae Xeyetv l Plat. Gorg. p. 453. (p. 17. ed. Bip.) 2. Dionicus, says Lucian, was among the guests ; ov fj.i]v e dp\i]s ye, ov5' civros aitaai. Trapeyevero, ctXXa o'^e, &c. Lapith. [p. 844. B. ed. Salrnur.] VI. Ov nrjv dXXa KCU adds something of greater moment to something of less, which has preceded nay what is more ; moreover: WVTI TO> A^aperw* ov ^t^v, dXXa ovbafj.ov (jiavrjarovTCtt btKTjv etX^ores feat TO Trpdy/uia av TIS CTKOTTWV avro KCU dekipuiv, 'ibot ov poi'ov ovj(l Xa/3dj'ra (xpfipcfra), dXX' ovS' evov avrw \afleiv : Demosth. adv. Nausim. For this, ov povov dXXa /cat, and ou [JLOVOV be dXXa /cat are p. 633. sometimes used : ct^0ts be d^eXeo-fcu, a bebwKeV ov JJLOVOV be, (d0eXecr^at a bebwicev, viz.) dXXa :at ra TrpovVap^ovra : Ceb. Tab. p. 21 6. But most frequently by the later Greek writers: see 2 Corinth, viii, 18. 19. The ellipsis is supplied in vii, 7. This use will account for
;

ov

That an ellipsis of these words is quite inadmissible, will appear upon consideration of the whole passage, beginning atl. 15, of Reiske's ed. The words to be un-

derstood are rather those expressed in 1. '~ ov (JL^V apx^l 7z/V 6TCU T ^ s ^P^ 5 * l 16. \nrirov e^^pas, i TWV irpeff&tvad.in<DV t^v
flprjvrjv

Kara^tpi^ffQ^

J. S.

152
Hesychius's explaining ov

OYX OIL

ov /uovov. (Ov /uovov, not only, /u?)v by from puvuv ov, which is, all but, almost.) VII. What is added, is not always of more moment considered in thus Isocrates, itself, but with reference only to the person addressed after encouraging Demonicus to the practice of virtue by the examples of Hercules and Theseus, adds, ov /u?/v, dXXd jcae rds rov Trurpbs Trpoatpeaeis, oiKelov KUI icaXov eeis Trapabeiypa. ~wv VTT' epov Xeyo/jva>v p, 7 VIII. Fe is added here too ; expectation, says Isocrates, may perdiffers
: :

haps be disappointed ; ov /ujyv, dXXu Kal TO ye y\eipr)na icaX&s e^ei : however the very attempt, &c. IX. And here too yuev precedes, to which ovv inceptive is subjoined : ael fjikv ovv o? re fytereooi npoyovot Kal Aa t>at/uor<ot 0iXor//iws Trpos dXXrjXovs el^or' ov /*?/v, aXXd Kal irepl KaXXiarwv ev eKetvois rots
Xpovois e^tXove/KT/ffav, OVK e-^dpovs t dXX' es : Isocr. Paneg. p. 112.

avTaywiaras

ff(f>ds

avrovs civat

sometimes inserted, to abate the positiveness of assertion feat "KXetvly, rybe dpevKetv Gel ret vvv vo/xoOerov/xeva Plat, de Legg. iv. p. 722. (t. viii. p. 197. ed. Bip.) XI. Ovbe also is added to ov JJ.YIV : Xenophon after mentioning the absence of all ostentation and effeminacy in the dress and mode of life of Socrates, adds, ov p.rjv, ovb* epaat^prjfjLarovs ye rovs avvovras e7ro/et Mem. i, 2. nor truly again did he, &c. he was not ostenta~ tious or effeminate; no truly, nor did he, &c. XII. When these particles include an adversative sense, they may be rendered, nevertheless; however; and both negatives pertain to what follows, but differently, ov denying simply and generally, ovbe KaXbv, as, jcy'/x* IK rw iivrput ovvotypvs Kopa e\6es IboHaa, particularly KaXov ^jnes e(j)aaKev. ov pav, ovbe Xoyov eKpidijv airo rov TriKpbv avr^t, a'XXd, &c. Theocr. viii, 74. Ov denies dTreKpiQrjv more generally, ov6e
IToi/ is
:

X.

as, ov

p.riv

ctXXd TTOV

more

Ov fj.6rov particularly, ro> Xoyov TriKpov. scholiast, a'XX' ovbe Xoyov rov irtxpov. XIII. Ov ^ur/v ovSe is used in transition to a
subject
:

Xoyov

rjbvy,

says the

as, ov

yui/v

ovS' e*ceTvo

ye v/xds dyvoelv bel

:

principal part of a Demosth. Ol. iii.

'.

ov fjiijv ovbl Toye irapaXetyeis p. 12. 74. ed. Bip.)

Plat,

de Rep.

vi.

p. 486. (p.

XIV. Ov^e is sometimes repeated after ov p/v even in one member, when two things are to be more distinctly and particularly stated ov
:

ovb* os dpdtis 134. First ?repi rrjs eiceivov bvrajjtews ytv&ffKovfftv : Isocr. Paneg. p. generally, ov /x^v ywuffKovcrt, then more particularly, ovSe et avvayo/u>/v,

ovS'

el

avvayopevovffi rols

VTT'

eftov Xeyojuevots,

pevovai.

OTI. 1. Ovx on, not that, or not because, is an elliptical expression, serving for explication : ovx> OTl ^fl e'Xa/3ov, TJ ifin rereXe/w/xai* bio)K<i) be, el Kal KaTaXapw : Philipp. iii, 12. i. e. ov Xeyw be . See also iv, 17. The full expression is in v. II. ov^, TGVTO, on on
Ka0'
vareprjatv Xey<y.
ElTre
i\v
:

OYX

e/xeXev
eTrrev

ctvrdi*

dXX'

on

KXeirrys

be rovro, ov^ on Trepl rS>v "mtsiyjav St. John xii, 5. i. e, rovro V OVK

on, &c. but he said this t not because, &c.

OYX OION, OYX OION.

II.

153

Sometimes Xeyw
is

is
:

not understood, but

as, OVK eiraivij TOVTO,

some preceding verb,

<3

which
[jtfj

to

be repeated
otjueu

'AXeav5pe' ov%

ort

Ka\ov eivat

bvvtvetv TOV or/octroi;, Dial. Mort. t. i. p, 397* for OVK eiratvui 6e,
vii,

Kal TtTpwaKcadai TTOTC TOV flaaiXea, Kal -irpoKiva'XX' 6'rt aol rotovro vJKiaTa avvetyepe : Lucian.

on p), &c.

So 2 Corinth,

Wlien a'XXa follows, ov% on may be rendered not only: baov^ or L Trapa T&V (Stwrwv, aXXa Kal irapa T&V Tr6\eu>v Dio xlii. p. 235. i. e. ov povov Xeyw dXXd /cat, &c. When ovbe, or a negative proposition, follows dXXd, ov appears to be suppressed after
rei^o/jLevos
:

9III.

on, as in Latin non modo is put for lion modo non : see Cic. in Verr. iii. 78. [ 182.] ov% on i]fj.wv TIVU TrpoaftXeirovTes, dXX* ovbe dXX//Xovs : not only not any one of us, &c. Atlien. cited by Budaeus, When ovbe is put first without dXXa, and ov% on last, the p. 479'
ov)(

latter particles may be rendered much less: as if Athenaeus had said, ovb& u\\r]Xovs TrpotrfiXeirovTes, ov-% on r/^uwv nva. IV. M?) is added to ov% on, affecting, not those particles, but the

word following

as in the passage above cited it, which it negatives from Lucian, p} KaXov is put for alayjpov or abofyv.
:

OYX OION, OION. 1. Ov X olov, which also is rendered not only, or not only not, differs from ov% on in carrying some signification of quality thus, ov-% olov avdpuTra) nvi Tretadeirjv KaTadeadai
:

OYX

TI]V

(rvpavvibos) etyvaiav, dXX' ovbe Oewv rw bwavrevovn : Phalaris, cited by Budaeus, p. 470. which may be thus explained, T^V TTJS rvpavvibos ttyvaiav TOIOVTO ri eortv, olo^ OVK avSputiru
ravrrjs
at'
.

So,

fjLevovffa

0dXay|

ev

ro'is

eTrirrjcetorarois

ov% olov <J0eXev 6vvatr' av TOVS 0/Xovs, dXX' Polyb. cited by Budaeus, ibid.
trois

avrrj TOovb* avrr]v crw^eiv :

II.

As some

in oi/x olov,

traces of the signification of quality are discoverable so of quantity in ov-% oaov, not only Trody^ara aif tr^icrra crvfjfiijaeo'Qcu, Kal ov-% oaov TO Tijs bovXeias, dXX' anobpavat bovXevetv Aristid. pro Quatuorv. p. 319. i.e. ov TO, elra So in Latin, non tantum. Non Trpayfj.a, oaov can TO, &c.
: :

tantum dedecus, quantum est servire, sed (quod inajus est) primum fugere, deinde servire. III. The remark made on ofy on, and which applies to oi/x olov also, is to be made here too, that ov sometimes appears to be understood again ai/ro rovro Trpwroj/, TO TTCLVTCIS TOVS ev \peiq. (3or)6elas
:

TCKJ)vyLV

TWV aXXwv

K bvolv TToboIv (jJS U\T)6wS, K bpyv, jueya Kal fyavepov avfipoXov can, Kal afjietvnv, TOV irpoe-^eiv evOvs e ap^rjs, ovy^ oaov Xavdaveiv : Aristid. Pariathen. p. 202. for ov% oaov ov Xa.vQa.vetv. [See Professor Hermann's If the last words be interpretation in the Abr. of Vig. p. 47. I. 13.]
TTl

TY)V 7TO\tJ', (jJCTTTfp

TroXeojv

transposed, dXXa, or dXXa Kal, must be added, and then the signification of quantity, or of the advance or increase of quantity, will appear ; thus, tyavepov o-y/u/3oXo'v eanv, ov Toaoirov Xeyw, oaov ov XavIn Thucydides the second Baretv, aXXa Kal Toaovrov, oaov Trpoe^iv. negative is expressed: ol uev ov*% oaov OVK II/JIVVUVTO, dXA* ovb' iv. 62.

154

OYX onns,
OnftI,
;

&c.

oY'KorN, OVKOYN.

is rendered not 1. Ov X only; but some traces of the primary and genuine ovS' Zaravai ^a^ial, signification of O'TTW* may be discovered ov^ virus (much less} (3abieiv ebvvaro : Lucian. Dial. Mort. c. 27. p. 440. i. e. ov Xeyw OTTWS, I do not say how, or in what manner, &c. [Abr. of Vig. p. 153, I. 20.] ovSe nvrifjioveveiv els Trjv vffTepalav en yfjtrjv Toy Am, ov^ OTTWS Kal TrjXiKavra err' avrols ayavaKTijoreiv I Id. in Prometh.

OYX

OYX

ftS.

--

&s

not only not

much

less:

p. 192.
II.

i.

e.

ov Xeyw OTTWS.
is

Ovx

ws also

used in the same sense

:

but here too there

JJLEV

may
(3s

be traced some indication of manner

els

tlapnevibij
rj
:

yap Kal eXOelv

Xdyovs TOV IlXdrwros

or in

^.(aKparrjv,

jjoXis

Kal TOIOVTOVS elirelv Kal aKovaai \6yovs

Athen.

i)\tKia ffvy^upfl, xi. p. 505. F.

ov%
i.

e.

ov

Xyw, ws (how
eixew Kat

what manner) ov avy-^pei fi\ticia TOIOVTOVS anovaat Xo'yovs. However it may be rendered, much less.

OY'KOY~N, OY"KOYN.
a conclusion interrogatively
fjLO\6vri. 5' e\7ris

1.

it is

Okovi/ serves to suggest or press put therefore for ap' ovv OVK Pyl.
;

eon

aiaQTivat

KaK&v

there

OUKOVV TOVTO vpelffffov i) fjieveiv is no So Soph. Aj. 79. [See Abr. of Vig. p. interrogation.]
161.
II.
1.

Orest. et TV^OI, yevoir av. Pyl. Eurip. Orest. 778. [770. Pors. where
;

34.]

that from which the conclusion signified by OVKOVV drawn, or the reason for it, follows instead of preceding: as, Then follows the reason, ovKovvt) ajutXXct avry r^rarat irpos TOVTO Tracrn iretdio yap kv Tovru iroielv Plat. Phaedr. p. 270. (p. 372. ed. eTri-^eipel: Bip.) So, Merc. aTroXwXas, w Kra/cdcjLJov. Tryg. OVKOVV T)^ Xa^w' 'Epftiis yap wv K-X/ypw Troiriaeis oI6' o TI Aristoph. Pac. 363. See Class. Journ. vol. ii. p. 718. Instead of yap, eTreibij sometimes follows, inis
;
i

Sometimes

troducing the reason : OVKOUV, eitetbr] TO Soicelv r)v ctX?70etai' ftidrat, enl br) Tpe-nreov o\ws ; Plat, de Rep. ii. p. 365. (p. 222. ed. Bip.) Ilf. The reason is sometimes implied in what follows : thus Strepsiades, having been reprehended by Socrates for calling Amynias a
TOVTO

woman, answers,
;

OVKOVV biKalws,
'AfjLvvia.s

OCFTIS

692. i. e. a//, cTretori yvvalKa IV. The conclusion

ov aTpareverai ; Aristoph. Nub. ov aTpareverai, ov KaXu ovv bLKatus

may depend on
:

marked by

; cnrepxcTai OVKOVV a<r0aXws av yeywotre, iii, 2, 20. V. Like ovv alone, OVKOVV

eav, or ijv K TOV dearpov

cl t

a condition following, and ejjfAevrj, yeyiyOws Plat. Phaedr. p. 258. (p. 346.' ed. Bip.) et ra aKpa e^otre (rv/i/ia^o ; Xen. Cyrop.
as, OVKOVV,

ectv per ovros

is

used in transition to a fresh topic or

ffTaffia$ovfftv 01 6eol t Kal
e'iprjrat
;

head of discourse : as, OVKOVV KOLL on rai dXX^Xots, w HLvdvQpov, Kat TOVTO
further,

Sia^epov-

Plat.

Euthyphr. p. 7

OVKOVV Tobe y it has been said too, has it not, that, &c. cad* i]fMV Trepl Travra Kal xra0' eKaaTOV, TJTOI elbivai, 7) jjiri elcevai ; but moreover, &c. Plat. Theaet. p. 187. (p. 146. ed. Bip.)

VI.

When

ov follows OVKOVV, OVK in OVKOVV

Plat,

is

not necessarily reXeyctv, ov

(j>oj3r)T^ov

dundant: e.g. OVKOVV, %v & eyw,

cTreiTrcp tapfJi^arafAev

de Rep.

v. p.

452. (p. 8. ed. Bip.)

OYAE, OYTE.
must we not therefore not fear, &c.
disregard
?
i.

155

e.

must we not contemn or

to

ov
eir)

OVKOVV OVK av

<popr)Teov being equivalent XvTTelcfdai Trore ravrov TO

ry ^nip-en*

/cara^pov^reev. Id. in ;

So, Phi-

leb. p. 43. (p. 274. ed. Bip.)

Is it not true therefore that

freedom
for ovv
:

from pain, and pleasure, cannot ever be the same? VII. With the imperative mood OVKOVV appears to be put
OVKOVV TO fnev re^rrys re KO.I ciT\rias Xoywr Phaedr. p. 274. (p. 379. ed. Bip.) OVKOVV
TO. Trepl
:

irepi
ilbrj

tKavtis

e^erw

Plat.
jjfj.lv

TreTrmVflw perpius

\6ywv Ib. p. 278. (388. Bip.) [See the explanation, from Professor Hermann, in the Abr. of Vig. p. l6'2. 1. 1.] VIII. In OVKOVV the signification of ovv predominates; in OVKOVV that of ov. The use of OVKOVV is to draw from premises a negative conclusion. Thus, in Plato's Phaedrus, after mention of certain evils caused by the invention of letters, the following words are addressed
to their

supposed inventor: OVKOVV

jLU'7^ui;s,aX\' vTroyim/crews

(^appaKov
:

evpes, aortas be Tols /ua0>?ra7s b6%av,

OVK aXyOetav

7ropieis

p.

275.

(p. 381. ed. Bip.) it

was not therefore a remedy for memory that you

invented, &c. See Eurip. Phoeniss. 1583. IX. Sometimes, especially in negative answers, its conclusive force elicited from the preceding words of is not manifest, but must be another person, or from something extraneous thus in the Phsedo of Plato, when Socrates has concluded from arguments before adduced, that the soul is immortal, Cebes says, OVKOVV eywye c^w napa TCLVTCL ciXXd Tt \eyetv, oue Trrj a.iriGT~iv ro7s \6yois p. 107 (6. 5o. ed. Fisch.) Here something extraneous is to be assumed, upon which the conclusion may rest, as, erretci) ravra brj\a ttJTt, or the like. [Hoogeveen cites Aristoph. Vesp. 309- as an instance of the conclusion being drawn from preceding words of another person ; but in Brunck's edition the reading is OVK, not OVKOVV , which indeed the metre will not
:
'.

admit.]

X. Sometimes all the collective or conclusive force of OVKOVV disappears, and there remains only that assertion of certainty which arises from conclusion: thus, Sycoph. OVK e?r' ayadbj yap evBab' earov ovbevl. Car. pa TOV At", OVKOVV T<5 ye cu, aaty 'iad' ori. no, not for yours at least, of a certainty: Aristoph* Plut. 889. [See Abr. of Vig.
1

p. 16'1.

1.

22.]
is

OTAE, OTTE. --- 1. There

and ovbe, of above.
,

the

OVTC, as

between p) and

same difference between ov, which have been treated

or

ovre is II. When discourse proceeds in the same tenor, ovbe used; and Eustathius (p. 1813.) observes that these particles connect similar things as well as dissimilar : thus, TWV ovbev rot eyw Horn. ov5' eTTiKCvcru) Kpv\fr(i) eiros, III. But when the tenor of discourse is broken by a new division
:

is repeated or reiterated : thus Agamemnon says, that Chryseis was not inferior to Clytaemnestra, ov Styms, ovbe tyvriv, OVT apt <j>pevas, ovre TI epyn : Iliad, a, 115. Here ovre suits the se-

after ovbe, then ovre

condary

Thus again, division, that of <j>vr}v, into <f>pevas and epya. iira\Kis erjv debs, ovbe dcatavTuwv, air* uvbptiv ir6\f.ior Ka-aKOipaveovoiv,

156

OYAE, OYTE.
:

ovr' up' 'AQrjvairj, ovre 7rroX*7rop0os 'Eri/w

Iliad, c,

333.

ovbe /u/y Iblq

ye ovbeva
fiaXev:

TnJrrore arBpuirtav ovre Xen. i, 2.

ayadtiv aneffrepriaev,

oi/rc KCIKOIS Trepie-

Mem.

IV. Ovbe thus preceding cure may be latent in ovbels, for oy>e els : Plat. Euthyphr. p. 8. as, ovbets ovre Qeuv ovre cbfywTrwv ovbe yap Trapa V. Ovre is put only once after ovbe in Gal. i, 12.
:

av6pw7rov TrapeXa/3oj> avro, ovre ebibaxdrjv, uXXa 5i' aTTOKaXvi//ea>s 'Iqirov But ovre is to be understood before Trapa, that the first of Xpiarov. the two opposed members of the sentence may be thus subdivided, vvbe yap ovre Trapa avQpajirov TrapeXaflov, ovre ebiba^d^r. VI. On the contrary ovbe follows ovre repeated ; because it introduces a principal member, contradistinguished from a preceding one subdivided by ovre so repeated : OVK ervirap-^ei aireppa ovrekv ry Trpwrr/ r/XiK/a, ovre kv ry y^/p^, ov6e ei/ rats appwar/ats : Aristot. de Generat.

649. from ovre in being put after a simple negation : when ovre appears to follow a simple negation, there may be an ellipsis to which that thus, in OVTTW yap ^Suyacrfle, particle has reference u\\' ovr' en vvv bvvaaBe, 1 Cor. iii, 2. ovre TO TrpoffGev, or the like, may be understood before aXXa.
VII.

Animal,

xviii. p.

Ove

differs

VIII. When ovre precedes, ovre must again follow, if what comes after be negative; but not so, if it be affirmative ; for in the latter case ovre may be put once only, followed by ical or re: as, ovre avrX^/ia Kai TO ^peap eort /3a0v : St. John iv, 11. So neque is followed e'^eis,

by

et in Latin. See Sueton. in Aug. c. 66. IX. Ovbe is used after negation, to exclude all exception neganot even : Kat OVK: e'Swjce avrw K\r)povopiav kv avrfj, ov be fifjjjia. tively irobos Acts vii, 5. ovels olSev, ov^e ol ayyeXot r&v ovpavuvl St. Matth. xxiv, 36. X. The preceding negation is sometimes not expressed thus in Iliad. 0, 234. where Agamemnon tells the Greeks that they had for;
:

TroXeju^'

merly boasted, TpwW avff e/carov re btr^Koaiuv re eicaorros aTrjrreod' ev and adds, vvv 6' ov5' ei'os a^tot efffiey "Efcropos, the full expression may be, vvv b' ov povov eKaoros OVK t<rrayL(0' O.VT\ eKarbv
Kal bir}Koaif)v, aXX'

2oXo^w^ kv
vi,

29-

ovb' evos atyoi efffj.ev. So, Xeyw be v/ity, ore ovbe Tracy ry b6y avrov 7repie/3aXero ws e^ rovrwv : St. Matth. f r > ort ovre ol bwcurrevovTes, ovre /3<riXe7s, aXX' ovSe

2oXojuw'.

ad a, l6l. avrap epol yepas avriK eroiyudo-ar', o0pa ^17 olos 'Apyeiwv ayepaaros ew, eTret ovbe eotfce, the full expression may be, evret OVK earir, ovbe eWe, since it is not just or allowable, &c. "Erri is expressed in Odyss. 0, 358. OVK ear, ovbe eowe Teov eiros ap-

XI. In

!!-'

sometimes equivalent to KO\ ov, emphatically: ovros eyw be, Aairep ovv OVK olba, ovbeoiopai: as I do not in reality know anything, so NEITHER do I think that I know anything: Plat. Apol. Socr. p. 21. (c. 6. ed. Fisch.) e<3
it is
/uei'

XII. But

oierai TI elbevat, OVK etSwV

Xeyeiv, ort ov6e ras reKOvaas ejuatovro, irapQevos ye Knl avrtf ovffa : Lucian. Deor. Dial. xvi. [p. 154. B. ed. Salmur.] I forbear to obsewse&that neither would she have acted as a midwife, had she been herself a virgin.

OYAE, OYTE.
XIII. Oi/re signifies not even
ovbeis iibvvaTO avrov btftrai : avTov bijeai, ovre ciXXois beafio'ts, ovre aXvaeaiv.
less frequently ; KCII ovre St. Mark v, 3. More fully, KCU owlets

157

XIV. Like ov, ovSe, signifying w0 even, is emphatical in interrogation, apn being suppressed : ovbe 0o/3?jf <rv rev 0eov ; St. Lukexxiii, So vi, 3. St. Mark xii, 10. 1 Corinth, xi, 40. i. e. ap' ovbe av 0o/3/7
'>

14.

XV. When ovbe is repeated in the same clause or member, neither of the particles is properly redundant: in ovbe pkv oi>& ot avap-^oi eaav, Horn, in Boeot. v. 210. [Iliad j3, 703.] the first ovbe pertains to the first denies more generally, the avapxpt riaai>, the second to 01 second more particularly, and with exclusion of exception, not even In the same manner, and with the same sense, the negatives these.
:

are referred to different things in Aristoph. Vesp. 478. [480. ed.Br.] In ovbe yap ovbe TIS aXXos arr}p ra.be ^apjuaK aveTXrj, Odyss. K, 327aXXos, OTIS, &c. Od. 6, 32. ovbe TIS may be the see Rom. iii, 10. not even one : as OUTIS is put for In eirei ovbe /tev ovbe eotKev brjfj.ov eoVra Trape^ ovbels, Iliad, o. [88]. ayopeue/ue>/, Iliad, p, 212. the repetition makes the negation more

and ovbe yap ovbe

TIS

same

as ovbe els

emphatical and peremptory. See Eustath. ad 1. p. 901. So, ovbe yap ovbe TOV aov eTa~ipo*> bel napeXdew : Plat. Phaedr. (p. 38p. ed.
Bip.)

and ovb' av els, av does not affect the particle verb, from the signification of which it takes away Besides other uses of av, with ovbe before it, it has a conactuality. ditional power: OVK eK(j>evyei rfj aXr/0e/ /o) OVK exoveibtffTOv elvai, ovb* av 6 Tras o%Xos avTo eTratvearj : not even if: Plat. Pha2dr. (p. 386. ed.
In ovb'
its
ai>,

XVI.

ovbe, but

own

<rot

Bip.) eytt) p.ev OVK a7roXel\^ofj.ai aov, avvaKoXovdelv Xen. Cyrop. iii,
:

w Kupe,
1.

42.

Nor is II. t, 389. emphatical negation should precede ; for it sometimes follows ovb' re KOVIS re, ovbe xev ws ert QVJJLOV euov e'i p.oi TOffa boirj, ocra \^apa66s Treiffet 'A.yapejj.v(i)v Iliad, t, 385. XVII. When negation is accompanied with a reason, which the speaker wishes not to insist on too positively and confidently, yap TTOV is added to ovbe: as, ovbe yap nov, w 'Abeiuavre, o^oX?) rw ye w's
same manner by Homer,
:
'.

av aKevo<j>6pov p.e betj Qvb' el is used in the it necessary that the less
01/6'

aXr)Qws Trpos Tols OVUL

Trpayyuare/as
:

TJ}V

btaroiav e^ovTt,

KCITU)

/3Xe7retv

eis

avQptoirwv

Rep. vi. p. 500. (p. 102. ed. Bip.) XVIII. In poetry uev without be following is added to ovbe, the more vehesignification of which it renders, by its limitative power, ment and emphatical than that of a preceding negative ovbe ri oi Iliad, i, 3?6. ovbeva TWV e-^dpu/y ftovXas ffv/j0pao-ffo/zai, ovbe uev epyov eovra QiXov Theogn. lutwuf]aoitai eoOXov eovTa, ovbe ^ev alvrjaa) betXov 1078. nor will I either, &c. but in these passages it may be rendered
Plat, de
:
:

also,

KOKT),

confirmative sense also is added to ovbe: ovr ap' nor indeed, or nor truly, good: Phocyl. XX. Socrates, agreeably to his usual simulation of ignorance, uses the conjectural particle TTOU, instead of the limitative ye, after ovbe after censuring those who spoiled the dead, he adds, ovbe
its

much less. XIX. Mev in

ovbe
p.ei>

eaOX?),

158
ret

OVTL
*cat

lepa ret oVXa o'lffofjtev ws avaQfjffovTes, aXXws re Plat, de Rep. v. p. 469. (p. 45. ed. Bip.)

ra rwv

'E*\\rjt>(t)t>

XXI. Ovv also is added, in the affirmative orassertory sense which acquires from its conclusive or collective power : ovre yap yiyverat, ovre yeyovev, ovfr ovv tiri yeVjjrat : nor in truth, nor indeed: Plat, de Rep. vi. p. 492. (p. 87. Bip.) It is added to ovre also ijroi votrros OTrcJXero irarpos eyuo/o* ovr' ovv ayyeXirjs ert Treidofjiai, e'iiro&ev e'X0ot, ovre deoTrpoirirjs e/i7rac?o/uat : Odyss. a, 413. But here ovV retains its conit
:

clusive or collective force.

1. Tt, when subjoined to OYTI, with the particles annexed. ov, ovbe, or ovre, renders the negation total and universal, excluding

every kind of exception.

be tcXeos
olo)>

aKowo/uev, ovbe ri Ibpev : Iliad. (3. 586. and tive case after it : ovbe rt Kivri&ai /*eXeW ^v : Odyss. 0,
it

times

governed by a verb //ue7s with a geni298. Sometakes the nature of an adjective, and agrees with a subrt is
:

Sometimes

stantive

ovb& ri

TTO)

LLOL

Trpotypuiv

rerX/Kas

tlireiv

eVos o TTI

vofitreis

same as ofy e>, and ovbe rt as ovbe ev or ovbev or as KCU ov5er Between ovb' bnovv and ovrt or ovbe rt this little difference may perhaps be observed, that the latter exclude genus, the former every species also; that ovrt and ovbe rt, without any other particle, as ye or TTOV, added, are more common in poetry,
Iliad, a, 542.
t

Thus

OVTL is the

ovb*

bnovv
(c.

in

prose
:

e/Jiot

p. 32.
II.

20. ed. Fisch.)

Plut.

Qavarov peXet ovb* onouv, Plat. Apol. Socr. orav encTri/pwVwo't Toy Koapov, KO.KOV ovb*

OTIOVV aTroXetTrerai

de Sentent. Stoic.

expressed governs or agrees with rt, KOTO, or 5m is perhaps understood. Thus ovrt is nearly the same as ovba^S>s t not at all : T&V ovrt juerarpeTT^, ovS' dXey/5ets Iliad, a, 160. eirel OVTL LIOL oirtot elcrtv : Iliad, a, 153. So, ovbe Til ovbe rt 7ra "tbp.ev fyvrjia Keineva. ?roXXa : Iliad, a, 124. and with little difference, oi/re rt : ov 5e//as, ovbe fyvriv, ovr' dp <f)peva.s t ovre rt epya, ib. 115. The case is different when ov and ri are to be regarded as two distinct words ov then negatives the act of the verb, which rt lessens by its diminuent force : aVtorovyra be Kal $r)TOvvTa &pa TOVS Xoyovs
: ;

When no word

6 by eyw Sow, 0o/3epoV re Kal ff^aXepov, ovrt yeXwra o^Xetv, , V yap rovrd ye) a'XXa Lirj fftyaXels T?IS dXrjOeias Keiaopai, &c. Plat, de Rep. v. p. 450. (p. 6. ed. Bip.) non ne utcunque, &c. not

in whatever manner, [or in whatever, or some, degree] I should incur ridicule, &c. III. Fe is added, but it affects not ovrt, but some following word, either restrictively or confirmatively : ovrt ye irpos e/ue ovro> Trotetv Lucian. Lapith. t. iii. p. 420. , towards me at least: IV. In ovrt TTOV, ov denies interrogatively, n is diminuent, and TTOV conjectural : thus Ulysses, afraid that Neoptolemus might return the bow to Philoctetes, says, ovrt TTOV Sovi^at voeis ; Soph. Philoct. 1226. [1233. ed. Br.] to be sure you do not think of such a thing as
lest,

giving it? V. Ovrot, compounded of ov and rot, denies with asseveration not ty any means : OVTOI av^opov eVrt yvvri vea avbpl yepovTt Theogn. 437. OVTOL ret xp^juar' 'ibta KeKTrjrTat fiporoi Eurip, Plioeniss. 558.
: :
:

OVN.
OVTOI
Trork

159

: Aristoph. Vesp. Ill/, ovroi Lysias adv. Agorat. p. 227. VI. The asseveration is sometimes enforced by an oath ; as, ovroi, eatreO' ws OVK dnoQavei : Aristoph. Pac. 187. Or by the HCL rrfv yfjv, confirmative particle fi>/ : OVTOI >} 'A0r)va~ioi ye MKTIV avrrjv KaXovviv, d\Xa ypafr'iv : Plat. Euthyphr. [p. 1 1. 4. ed. Bas. 1.] VII. The asseveration of a denial with an oath is sometimes enas in Aristoph. Vesp. 1136. [1141.Br. where forced by ov Tolvvv ye ye is not added to roivvv.~\

&v TOVTOV

a7roy0)7<70juai
:

iriffrevet

KaX&s dyuvtelffdat

1. The difference between apa and ovv is that apa is ovv conclusive ; apa syllogizes or argues, ovv applies. Thus in Plato, one draws this inference from something before said, ro be bi) apa btfXov, e'ire rvfyXov, e'tVe ov opwvro, j^prj TOV fyvXctKa Trjpelv OTIOVV : and then, after describing those whom he means by the blind, and bringing the matter to the intended point, concludes in the following

OTN.

illative,

manner, interrogatively; TOVTOVS ovv paXXov QvXaKas orrjao/jieOa, TJ TOVS eyvwKoras ; &c. de Rep. vi. (p. 70. ed. Bip.) So St. Paul, in the close of chap. iv. to the Galatians, infers, apa OVK eVyuev TratS/o-^s so then we are not, &c. and in the bere^va, a\Aa rijs eXevdepas
:

ginning of chap.
Galatians,
/u?)

rfj

he applies this inference to the duty of the eXevdeptq. ovr, rj Xpicrros ij^ds r/\eu0epwffe, arrjKere, Kal
v.

TraXtv

vya> bovXeias

eve^eade

stand fast therefore in the liberty,

&c.
II. As to its use, it peculiarly suits 1. admonition, when duty is urged by conclusion from something before said. To the example just 7raparaXw ovv vjuas, /utjujjrat pov given the following may be added
:

wherefore I beseech you, &c. 1 Cor. iv, 16. 2. entreaty founded on an enumeration of benefits conferred on the person entreated as, airoTiaov ovv uoi ravro, rovr' eVel Xafiwv l Eurip. Orest. 3. invitations or challenges to come to the proof 654. [647. Pors.] of what has been said : as, j^py o-Sets S' 3>v eaibelv ; ^pya^eis KaraOelvat
yereffOe,
:

aeOXov; Theocr. viii, 11. 4. explication founded on a previous statement of circumstances : thus Palaephatus, having stated some particulars of the real history of Cottus and Briareus, concludes,
e'Aeyoy ovv ol a'0|OW7rot, Korros, Kal Bpmpews, Kal Tvyr)s, ol ecarovrarovs Ttravas CK TOV Xetpes, fiorjOtjffavres TO?S deols, avrol efy'iXaaav

'OXvfjnrov

5. narration, in which a person is reIncredib. c. 20. all things presented as setting about a thing from a conviction that are ready for his enterprise : thus Xenophon of Cyrus, who saw that his soldiers were now strong, bold, expert in the use of their arms, and obedient to their officers, etc TOVTCJV ovv eTredvpet n ijbr) rSiv TTOOS
:

TOVS TroXejjilovs Trparretv

III. It

Cyrop. iii, 3, 9. sometimes concludes a very long passage or speech ; as one ovv consisting of forty-four verses in the Medea of Eurip. roffovrov aov Tvy^avetv jSovX^troyuat, &c. v. 259 IV. The conclusive force of ovv will scarcely appear in some pasthus, Socr. Trpoaye >} u ffKoiret sages without supposing an ellipsis
'.

afjLo.,

OTTOV
;

;ca0(C?7?<7o/ze0a.

Phaedr.

cpys ovv cKeivrjv Tt]v v\^r]XoTarr}v

irXaravov

Plat, Phaeijr, p. 229- (284. ed. Bip.) [196, 15. ed. Bas. 1.]

160
q. d. since then, &c.

OTN.
you
will have

me for a guide,

to select a spot,

do you sn

V. Sometimes, by an inversion of regular order, the conclusion with is placed first, and that on which the conclusion is founded, last, with 7re/, yap, or some other causal particle : as, Merc, ovbtv airiwv Chor. kv blicy p.ev ovv' eirei roi rrjv avbpGJv ye ras Kpabas Karrjadiov. eyw fjiev ovv avrw Kopuvewv ye fjiov e^eKO^av, &c. Aristoph. Pac. 627 biaXXa-^d^ffOfjiai GKUV, oyuoXoyai yap iraraat : Id. Vesp. 1412. [1421.
ovv

ed. Br.] VI. From the conclusive power of ovv, arises its inceptive use. This it has in common with /*' in) : but, with the same sense of readiness or preparation, it has not the sense of alacrity expressed by /^ei> /. This further difference too may perhaps be remarked, that pev ovv and fAev bri are oftener employed in the beginning of a whole work, ovv alone, either always or most frequently, in the middle of a work, for the commencement of a part of it, after something introductory. Thus Plato, to explain the nature of the soul, compares it to a charioteer, and after prefatory information about the nature and properties of the horses, commences his account of the proceedings of the charioteer in the following manner : orav & ovv 6 r\vio-^ps, &c. So St. Paul in 1 Cor. viii, 4. thus enters on a subject to which some preceding verses are only prefatory : ?rept rf/s (Spwcrews ovv ruv elbuIn Latin ergo, origitur, \oQuTvv, o'ibafjtev on ovbev e'ibt\ov iv KOfffia*. is used in the same manner as pev bij and pev ovv. See Cic. de Orat.
i.

c. vii.

24.]

VII. Closely connected with its inceptive use is that in which it is employed for resuming the tenor of discourse after interruption ; such 1. after resumption being a fresh commencement. It is so employed
digression
1.
;

2. after a parenthesis

Homer, having

Lycaon, happened to Lycaon, and afterwards thus returns to his subject ; rov b' ws ovv evoijcre irobapKris bios 'A)(tXXevs, &c. Iliad. 0, 492. Examples of ovv after a parenthesis (which resembles a VIII. 24. xviii, 5. 6. Rom. v. digression) may be seen in St. John vi, 22
12
1.

with

3. after a long hyperbaton. ; said that Achilles, in the battle at the river, met digresses to inform the reader of what had before

18.

IX.

3. After a long

hyperbaton ovv occurs in Plutarch. Thes.

1220.

[p. 1.

ed.

may be added

To this use Poplicol. [p. 177. 1. 25. H. St.] that in which a number of particulars already enumerH.
St.]

ated are at length comprehended in one more general term, and the scope of the enumeration concludes the period. Igitur is thus used by Cicero : pro his igitur omnibus rebus (avrl TOVTUV ovv
iravTwv) [. 23.]

hujus temporis memoriam postulo.

used also
in

In Catil.

iv.

c.

11.

X.

It is

thesis,

or hyperbaton,

mere continuation, when no digression, parenhas preceded but in this case something
:

resembling a new commencement may always be discovered. Thus Socrates, after saying that himself and Glauco were on their return to Athens from a public spectacle, proceeds, Kartbwv ovv troppwQev >/jua$ o'tKctbe wpjj,r)fJLet'Ovs YloXepap^os 6 Ke^dXov, eKeXei/o-e bpa^ovra TOV

OYN.

l(Jl

iralba treptpelvai e KeXevaat, Plat, de Rep. i. [p. 371- ! 5. ed. lias, i.] and a little afterwards, [1. 10.] 6 ovv IIo\e/Ltapx os tyy, &c. So St. John, elra fiaXXei vbwp els TOV rnrT^pa, Kal ?'/oaro vhrreiv TOVS irobas

rwv

Trpos ^Llfjnva Flerpov,

/uaffyrwv, Kal eKpaaffetv T<p Xevr/w, w ?)v bte^cjfffievos. "Ep-^erat &c. xiii, 6. Here ovv f though in the middle

ovv
of a In

commences the recital of Latin ergo is used in the same manner. Ovid. Metam. iii, 370.
narrative,

a remarkable particular.

See Hor. Serm.

ii,

6, 106.

XI. In transition
a

also,

new

part, ovv
;

is

employed

transitive

as in a fresh

which is nothing but the commencement of and when so employed may be termed objection, Rom. ix, 19. eps ovv poi, TV en
:

XII.

When

alacrity also is to be expressed, the latter is inceptive, but when

1.

when

besides readiness or preparation to go on in speaking, to ovv, not only when br) is added it is conclusive or continuative too. inceptive : OTTO 'EXe^avru'Tjs iroXtos ava> tovri, avavres can
'Yavrrj tav
bt]

3wp/ov.

TO TrXolov btcibrjrrctVTa a.jjt,fyoTeQw6ev, KciTcnrep (3ovv,

Herodot. ii, 29. unless indeed bel should be substituted when conclusive Herodotus, having proved that Egypt from Heliopolis towards the upper parts is narrow, thus concludes, TO ovv br) O.TTO 'H\/oi/ 7roXeo>s OVK en iroXXwv ^wpiuv, &c. ii, 8. and again, el wv by edeXrjffei eKTpe^ai TO peedpov o NelXos els TOVTOV TOV 'ApdfSiov 3. when continuative: TOVS &v KoXvov, &c. ii, 11. >} AlyvKTiovs Tpla erea (j)povp^aavras aireXve ovbels TTJS fypovpfjs, &c. Herodot. ii, 30. XIII. From the conclusive power of ovv is derived its affirmative which is exerted principally in answers, wherein what is asforce sented to is moreover supported and confirmed as by a conclusion
TTopeveadat : for 77. 2.
: ; :

thus, Socr. OVKOVV rots trapa ret OVTO. boaovai Kal aTrarw/ievots brjXov MS TO Trados TOVTO 5t' opoioTtiTUV TIV&V elcreppvr) ; Phaedr. F/yverat ovv

OVTUS, Plat. Phaedr. p. 26*2. (p. 354. ed. Bip.) XIV. And without any answer, it is affirmative, when opposed to a negative, so as to supply the place of a verb, which must otherwise be repeated as, ctre /i?) yp&^et, etre ovv : thus, eW ovv bvvaneQa,
:

Plato de Legg. ix. p. 859. (p 14. ed. Bip.) [this example is certainly not in point, as to ovv supplying the place of a verb supeir ovv, e'tTe fjtt} yevriarerai : Eurip. Heracl. 150. [In this pressed.] example there should be another comma after /*j), to connect yevi}aeTcii with ovv.] Eliam is thus used in Latin. See Cicero pro Rose.
ctre
ju>}
:

asserts positively what has before been proposed hypothetically ; and it is then subjoined to a relative word : as, ei 6* Plato Phaedr. p. 242. eariv, wo-Treo ovv fffTt, 6eos, ?; rt Qelov o "Epias (p. 312. ed. Bip.) XVI. It retains, though somewhat obscurely, its conclusive power also after wWep and other relative words 6 be KVWV, offtrep ovv avTai
: :

Com. c. 3. [ 9-] XV. Ovv also

irapeKctOevbev,

^lian. V. H. i, 13. Had jElian said only oWfp avru irapeKadevcev, the reader would of himself have concluded, 6'n, KVWV ovv avrw TrapeKctdevbev : the author therefore
etc rijs

/5or/s

bterapaxQn

inserts the reader's conclusive

Its inceptive

power

also

is

word ovv by anticipation. retained after a relative, but with some-

Hoog.

162

O$PA.

thing prefatory premised : thus, after the words TXavKuvos (f. KavKWVOS) TOV Yloffetbwvos, Kal 'AptoTO&a/ie/as T^S Qopfiavros, yiverai Trait A.7rp6as, /Elian begins the narrative, to which those words are introductory, with the following, oairep ovv avveftovXevtre ry Avyea, &c. this power of ovv will appear more plainly, if the relative be changed for a demonstrative, ovros ovv trvvefiovXevae, &c.

After a relative it serves also for explication of some foregoing ; r/00' ovrws eWijre refljjTrores jjvre vefipot ; these words are then explained by the following, with a fresh commencement as it were: at r' eirelovv eKa^iov TroXeos Treoloto Beovtrat, eoraor', ov' apa TIS o<f>t fjiera ^peo-i ylyverat 01X107 : Iliad. 6, 243. which to wit, or these

words

therefore t

&c. But when ovv coalesces

is
:

in

aopiaroXoyiKos,

to render the

one word with a relative, its use, termed meaning of the relative indefinite, as
;

cunque does in Latin this use arises from its conclusive power, when from several particulars a general conclusion is drawn as, Aeyw
cavre Trarfffi o>i/ rvy^av//, eavre prjrrjp, eavre aXXos oomcrovvi Plato Euthyphr. p. 5. if one's father, mother, and (which is understood,) one's brother,
roivvVf ori TO
fjikv offiov

effnv

r^J

a&tKovvrt

eirefyevai,

sister, relations, friends;

therefore,

whosoever.

Such are

OTTOIOOTIOOVV,

by a general conclusion, any one of whatever quality or nature;

of what sort soever ; oirwffTiovv, in whatsoever manner ; oirrjTiovv, anything at all; anything, in whatever way considered; biruaIIJTTOTOVV, howsoever, in whatever manner; biroaairXa.nioaovv, how manifold soever, however multiplied ; birooooTtaovv, however great ; biromoaovv, among whatever number ; one of whatever number; &c. So too biroQevovv, whencesoever ; birwaovv, in whatever manner ; ireol
; about any thing whatever. of such indefinite meaning occur together, ovv may be expressed with the last only, and understood with the first as, oiei ovv Tiva T&V TOIOVTWV, oaris Kal birwaovv (for banaovv nat btrwaovv) bvffvovs Avcria, 6yeioietv avro TOVTO ; Plato Phaedr. p. 258. (p. 34>6.

brovovv, about whatsoever

When two words

ed. Bip.)
1. "O(f>pa is a poetical word, the meaning of which, . whilst, as long as, is expressed in prose by ews : but the meaning of e'ws cannot, on the contrary, be always expressed by o0pa, for the former limits both time and place, the latter time only, ctyp' kv vrji
6orj /3pw<r/s
irotrts re, pvrjaroneda I ^pu)fj.r]s Odyss. K, 17 6. present duration is spoken of, then, on account of the uncertainty of its termination, ofypa is construed with a subjunctive

-re

II.

When
as,

mood

o0pa T

eXatypa yovvara

KCLL

Ke^aXr/v arpofjietav Trpo^epw

Theogn.971. So 1139. III. But in speaking of past and terminated duration, with an indicative oc[)pa pei> es TroXefjiOV iri>>\iaKero Slos 'A^iXXeus, ovbeTrore Tpwes TruXawv kapbaviauv oi^veaKOV So i, 352. Iliad, e, 788. TT/OO
: :

IV. Sometimes ntypa is put as correlative to 6<f>pa t as in Iliad, 546. V. Sometimes it signifies until, [when the term of duration indicated together with the signification of the duration itself,]

i,

is

DAMN,
either expressed or understood,
Tpweo-ffi riOei Kparos, o0p' 509. In Iliad, v, 141. ro^pa
eTrt

DAISY.
:

163

still as, r%>a 5' corresponding to it av 'A^atoi vlov e/xov riffwffiv Iliad, a, is understood. Sometimes o^>pa follows 570a instead of romper, as in Iliad, e, 588. VI. "O0pa signifies \\iejinal cause also, and is rendered, that, in order that. This signification it seems to have acquired from expressing a term of action not yet in act, but only in contemplation or it as when one is said to seek until he finds desire may be concluded that the finding is an object of desire, and the final cause of his seeking: and so he seeks in order that he may find. In this sense o^pa is construed with the subjunctive mood, because something is spoken of which is not actually in existence: dXXd o-oi, w ^ey'
i ; :

dynuSes, afi eerTrojueQ', o0pa av y^aipys : Iliad, a, 158. VII. When an optative mood follows it, a.v seems to be understood : eoos do^aXes alei : HeeyetVaro oi/pavoj', -o0p* 6117 fUctKapecrffi Oeols
siod. Theog. 328. [See a more accurate account of the construction of o(f>pa in this sense, in the Abr. of Vig. p. 156. 1. 20.]

I1AAIN, I1ANT.
local
;

1.

The primary

signification

of TrdXtv

is

back, backwards, back again : KO.I TOTE 6>y p' avroio TrdXiv yyro See Galat. iv, 9. 0eo-0aros ar)p, Odyss. 77, 143. II. Hence with some verbs it has the same sense as ara or d?ro in thus naXiv cibovat is not always to give composition with a verb again, but sometimes cnrobtbuvai, to give back, to restore ; as, dXXd See Eustath. ad 1. p. 62. icat tas edeXw bopevai TrdXti', Iliad, a, Il6. So 7mXti> lva.i, iJKetv, e^eaQai, for avievai, eTravep^effOat, as Odyss.
:

Aristoph. Ach. 820. in a contrary or different direction, without mention of any particular place; as TrdXtv rpeTrev oaoe 0aeivd>, Iliad.
i,

225.
III.

It signifies also

v.

[3.]

And because he who returns passes again over the same ground, TrdXtv signifies also again, a second time, anew: thus, TrdXtv in the same sense els TO TraXtv, 2 Cor. eXflfyiev, Odyss. r, 533. and
IV.
xiii, 2.

V. And because one returning goes in a direction opposite to that which he went before, iraXtv signifies contrariwise, oppositely, on the contrary: ovS' oy' aXrjQea etTre, TrdXti/ b' oye Xacero /uv0ov : See EuOdyss. v, 254. i. e. he said what was contrary to truth. stath. p. 1740. dpyiaai re av TTO\\OVS tipa Metros avr)p yeyore, KO.I 7r&\tv Plat. Pliaedr. p. 26?. (p. 365. ed. Bip.) wpyivpevovs eir^biav K^Xe'tv
in
:

ol //ev

boKovvres ^alpetv KXaietv TraXtv KUK^V

1.

VI. The words or things opposed to each other by iraXiv have not thus in St. always any opposition or contrariety in themselves " he Maith. iv, 6. to the text cited by Satan, from Ps. xc, 11, 12, hands their in and they shall give his angels charge concerning thee, shall bear thee up, lest at any time thou dash thy foot against a stone" Christ thus opposes another text from Deuteron. vi, 16.
:

[p. 16.

8.

ed.

Tv^n v avr^v KaXovviv* ol be boKOvvres Tvyyv avriiv KiiXovatv Ceb. Tab. p. 17$. Simps. Oxon. 1738.]
dyafl;}^
I

164
TraXtv

HEP.
yeypaTTTat,
(TOV.

(it

is

written again} OVK eKireipdaeis Kvpwv, rbv

its

eov

VII. IlaXiv

is

joined with

kindred particle av, but not

<j>r}^i

in

the

same sense

as, rovr*

av

eirj,

o eyti

eadai, deovs ov-% yyov/Aevov tydvai pe,

alvtTTeirdat Kal ^aptevTi" Beovs av fjyeladai naXtv : Plat.

are

Apol. p. 27. (c. 15. ed. Fisch.) here naXtv denotes repetition, ai/ opposition of contraries ; ^yov^evov and again fiytfodai, ov deovs elvai, and on the contrary Oeovs elvai.
VIII. So TraXiv avOis I birorav y TO jj.effov, o TI irep TO TT^MTOV Trpos avro, TOVTO avro Trpos TO ea^arov* Kal irdXiv avdts (and again on the Trpos ro fjikaov, TOVTO TO pkaov irpbs TO TTO&TOV I contrary ,) o TI TO

eVxv

32. (p. 308. ed. Bip.) IX. IlANT has a signification of completeness, totalness, absoluteness; whence it may be rendered quite, entirely, altogether: ol/ucu yap av TOVS iroXXovs, avTo aKovffavTas, boKelv ev iravv elprjffdai els TOVS Plat. Phaedr. p. 64. (c. 9- ed. Fisch.) : eyw 6' eTryt'ovv (f>i\offO(j)ovvTas TOV Qebv Travv cr<f>6bpa t Aristopli. Plut. 7^5. X. Hence, when joined with a verb, either by itself or with some
Plat.
p.

Tim.

other adverb, it is properly rendered etiam atque etiam, again and again, over and over again: Kal fjtevTOi Kal iravv TOVTO vu&v beo/mai Kal Trapie^ai, Plat. Apol. p. 17 (c. 1. ed. Fisch.) evvovs yap wv aoi itvvQavopat travv rttyobpa, Aristoph. Plut. 25. [In this last example Travv fftyobpa is to be construed with evvovs, not with Trwddvouai as

Hoogeveen supposed.] XI. Flaw KaXws is a form by which an invitation is civilly declined Anc. aXV eio-tQ' ap epoi. Xanth. Flaw icaXws, excuse me. Aristoph.
:

Ran. 515. [512. ed. Br.] In this sense benigne is used in Latin. See Hor. Ep. i, 7, 62. XII. In affirmative answers it is sometimes, although rarely, found
alone
;

as in Aristoph. Plut. 393. but

it is

affirmative particles : thus Travv ye occurs very frequently in So Trdvv jjiev ovv is found both by itself in affirmative answers,

oftener prefixed to other Plato.

and

in

construction, where there

Trany/).

is
;

no answer.

2.

TIS
I

OVTOS

Ev. 6
ere

2. 6 aos,
tu

/3eXrtore

Ev.

Haw

epos
:

fj.ev

ovv

Plat. Euthyphr. p. 4.

Ilayv pev ovv,

ILwKpaTes,

irapa

TO eiwdbs

evpoid

TIS

e'iXrjfye

Plato, [Phacdr.] p. 238.

XIII. And it is used in approbation of preceding words of another person, even when no question has been asked : Soc. Ai)Xoi/ ye or* ov% MS v7Tp(f)povovvTes TOV emTTjbevfjiaTOs, dXX u)S re0av/uac(5res. Phaedr. Da plv ovv. Plato, Phsedr. p. 258. (p. 346. ed. Bip.) XIV. By the subjunctiori of n some limitation or emphasis is added f] uev yap ovaia ovbe Tpi&v TaXdvrwv irdvv TI %v, Demosth. p. 518. [In Neaer. p. 1347. 1. 14. ed. Reisk.] was not even quite, &c.
:

jj.rj

Trdvv

TI,

nearly nothing.

1. Ilep is a HEP. particle used in poetry (for in prose it seldom or never occurs by itself, or unconnected with some other word,) to augment the force of affirmation. It signifies very, quite, absolutely, altogether ; and affects the predicate of a proposition rather than the

HEP.
copula

165

as, aoi aiaa fj.ivvvQa. irep, Horn. [See Odyss. ^ 473.] vrjirvrt, ; ovbe rv TT& irep eVe^pdffw, offaov apeiwv ev^o^ eywv e/ierai : Iliad. 0, 410. ws avoov Kpabirjv e^es, oi>be vv TWV irep /uejuvrjou, oaa KOKO. "IXtoy apfyi : ib. 44 i. #0w do not at all remember, &c. It occurs
arfjOos
TrXf/pes

by itself in Plato, TrXi/pes Trep, w Scu^dyie, TO &c. Phffidr. p. 235. (p. 29^. ed. Bip.) but

e'^wv ataflai/o/ucu,

wep ro orfjOos e^wv

will certainly begin an hexameter. II. Hep retains the same signification when annexed to another word, as tiairep, r)irep,Just as : ov yap irov Kai aoi btKT) TIS ovaa. rvy^d-

TOV flafft\ea, wairep e^oi : Plat. Euthyphr. evdvs Tropeuerai See Aristoph. TOV Kvpov, rjirep el^ev, Xen. Cyrop. Hi, 1, 7Vesp. 1262. [1270. ed. Br.] III. It affirms too in composition : as in ovrep eortv, which is really the case: Demosth. de Rhod. Lib. p. 7.9- [p. 193. I. 25. ed. Reisk.] and in bwwep. See Demosth. Phil. iii. p. 49. [p. 123. 1. 1. ed. Reisk.] OJynth. i. p. 4. [p. Ifj. 1. 2. ed. Reisk.] IV. Where its assertory power is more faint, it serves at least for
vei
Trpos Trpos

explication, as

nempe

in

Latin

Arjorai a/za

rrfv

AaKwvtKrji' eXv-rrovv

CK QaXaffarjs 07rep /JLOVOV olov

Ke0a\)v KaraOa-^/ai, ivairep

Indoct. p.
1

KctKovpyelvOnt, Thucyd. iv, 53. rffv vvv TO BafC^etov avro7s eart : Lucian. adv.
r' i\v

10.
like

in Latin, is used to render the sense of other thus a/\\oi7rep is others whosoever: Iliad, t, 301. In this use it is most frequently joined with relative words; and the like : and it denotes os, offos, offa^rif w*, ore, ev&a, ort, odev,

V. Hep,

cunque
:

words more
jj,

indefinite

an indefinite person : KO.\US Troiwr, otrrts ?rep jjv Aristoph. Ach. 2. an indefinite thing: av\\rj(3bt]v oVaTrep e^et yeveo-tv, Plat. 1049. See Aristoph. Ach. 559. [560. ed. Br.] 3. an indePhasd. p. 70.
1.
:

finite

manner or method:

biaipedfjvcu

ravrri,

rj-rrep

avvereOr]:

Plat.

4. indefinite time: ore Trep, Phaed. p. 78. (c. 25. ed. Fisch.) 5. indefinite place: evQa irep r/, wherewhensoever: Iliad. , 259. soever : Theogn. 270. aQiKeadai 061 irep al ciXXai, Plat. Phaed. p. 108. So odev ?rep, whencesoever : Aristoph. Ach. 821. [in this last passage it has the signification of the Latin fere.] aXXo TTO.V 6 TI irep VI. "Av, or K-e, when added, pertains to a verb av bvvriTcii, Plat, de Rep. v. p. 4?7 (p. 60. ed. Bip.) [See Abr. of
:

Vig. p. 157. 1. 7-] K VII. The adversative power of ?rep is deducible from that by which " for " wheresoever he may have been it renders meaning indefinite is nearly tantamount to "although he may have been here or there;" and " whosoever" to " although he be this or that man." In this sense, which is confined to poetry, irep is very often joined with a Iliad, a, 131. cXe7rre roy fjirjb' ovrws, ayaQos irep ewv, participle
: : :

i.

ayados wep ewy, p) fcXeTrre opus roy : how much soever you may excel in courage, yet notwithstanding, &c. So 275. and e, 382. VIII. The participle is often suppressed: yfj Kara Kparepov irep
e.

epvKei, Iliad. 0, 63.

for Kparepov ?rep eovra. and, ovb' VJMV Trora/uos ?rep

is irep itself

evppoos

apKeaei, 0, 130.

IX.

And on

the other hand

suppressed

av

6'

166

nir, rm.
<3# cKTrayXos kuv". Iliad. 0, 589* eyw && piv (j>e\l>ets t TOtov eovra, Odyss. , 250. for ovra Trep roTov. It is sometimes joined with an adverb ; ei K oXiyov ircp
oirj

dv-

iyvwv

X.

Iliad. X,

391. of an arrow or dart.

IIH.

ILji is by nature an abunderstood : and therefore it signifies the place through which motion is effected, either properly or figuratively TTJ? 7rape/3f/v; ri 5' epea ; rl /-tot beov OVK ereXeffOr) ; Pythag. 42. in what way have I transgressed? II. It is used in poetry for Trot, whither: iry br) Tovbe poXofipov So o, 578. and Iliad. 2, 377. iiyets ; Odyss. p, 219. III. A) is often added to vr/y, indicating the eagerness of the in-

--

1.

The

interrogative particle

lative feminine, agreeing with bby

:

quirer: TTJ; 5?) ovroi evbainoveffraroi ; Plat. Phsedr. p. 82. uXXa TTJ; The 5*;; but how, I pray ? Id. Phredr. p. 26.9. (p. 369. ed. Bip.) particles are sometimes separated by another ; as, TTTJ yap t>) eoi/<ni>
afji^tff(3rirtjffat
;

Plat,

de Rep.
irrj

vi. p.

501. (105. Bip.)

oirrj
:

It is

sometimes

bfj ypafrjs yiyvo/uevov KaXws av e^ot, icat OTTT; otTrpeTrws, \our6v. TI yap; how. Plat. Phaedr. p. 274. (p. 379. ed. Bip.) iry &j ovv QVVJTOV re KCU d0ctyarov ^WOK e/cXryO);, ireipareov direiv ; ib. p. 246.

used relatively, as synonymous with

Kal ctTrpeirelas,

TO

6'

evTrpeireias

Tr^pt,

(320. Bip.)

IV. IL;, enclitick, signifies, by any way: ovSe ri Try e* /ueXXo/zev TT?; Trpo^eetv poov els aXa Star, Iliad. 0, 219 et ?r?/ is also if any where : a Plat, de Rep. v. p. 474.
pabbav, cu.y evprfre ira.: Aristoph. Ach. 732. V. Like TTJJ, it has a figurative sense also
in any way ; by any ; e\ts avrtXtyetv ifiov Xeyovros, avriXeye Plat. Crit. p. olv t $v 6' eyw, ^eldo^v irrj eKeivovs ; Id. de Rep. vi. p. 501.
ei
TTTJ
:

method:
48.
op'

(p. 104. ed. Bip.)

it has a diminuent power, by which it detracts from the import of an expression in some degree ; in some measure; in some respects : KeKoivwvTjKe be TTTJ paXiffra T&V Trept TO erai/ia row Oeiov is used as equifyvyYi, Plat. Phaedr. p. 246. (p. 321. Bip.) thus it valent to Kara ri TO re pr) ov <as effTi Kara n, icai TO ov av rraXtv cJs OVK earl TTI; : Id. in Sophist, p. 241. (p. 150. ed. Bip.) VII. As Try signifies whither? so irq to some place, some whither ;

VI. So

full

as in Iliad,

c?',

377.
its

accent, like other encliticks, when it constitutes a kind of beginning, so that no word precedes it, on which it can throw back its accent ro 6e, TTTJ uei> "iaov, irrj 5' aviaov partly, in some respects: Plutarch, de Or'ac. Def. p. 417. if the order of the words were changed in the following manner, Try would throw back its
IL; retains
: :

accent, ro

TrXaaaofjievrjSy

So Alcinous, Trjs pep emuviaov be irq. TTTJ be TreXtas. wepi IlXdr. Soyyu. c. 17 Secondly, it retains its accent, when the preceding word is of such a nature as to be unable to sustain it : as, fj.wt> 6 yeaiav ny biabverat ; Aristoph. Vesp. 395. [rather, when the word qualified by TTJ), follows instead of preceding it.] Thirdly, when it is emphatical ; as it is in
"HSOV

&

per ny pev

TTT;,

XevKijs,

IIAHN.
all

167
irfj.

distinctions

thus,

o.v/c
:

eircHveroy 6 ti&ovos, o$ff o anXus, ovre o

t

same manner TTWS ov 4/eyercit 6 airXws 6pyi6f*evos d\\' 6 TTUS : Aristot. Eth. ii. That try is accentuated when taken materially, every one knows for it is then also emphatical.
in the
;

The primary signification of irX^y is exception; 1. construed with a genitive case : iravTes 'AOqvaiot KaXovs Kayadovs TTOIOVGI, irXriv e/iov, except me: Plat. Apol. Socr. p. 25. It excepts from number or multitude in a twofold (c. 12. ed. Fisch.)
and
it

IIAHN.
is

manner;

1.

by negation, when that from which the exception

is

affirmed, Xey' o TI fiovXei, TT\^V evos: Aristoph. Vesp. 758. irXfiv yap reKvuv, epoiye 0/Xrarov TroXv : add Dio. xxxvii. p. 57. extr. 2. by affirmation, when negation is used with regard to that except.
is

made

from which the exception

St.
viii,

is

made

OVK

Mark
10.

xii,

32.

fjtrjbeva

Beaaapevos, nXfiv
:

eariv aXXos, TrX^v avrov : rfjs yvvaiKos : St. John

It

excepts from totality or entireness

7rX?)>> rfjs

iVTrwv /iey el^ov oXrjv rr\v

ibeav,

KefyaXrjs

Pal%pliat. C.

i.

II. Sometimes, instead of its own proper case, it takes one dependent on foregoing words as the nominative rw SeStevai apa KCU Seei
; ;

avbpeloi eiai rofrec,

So Fisch.) aXXos, TrXijv eyw\ viz. ci/ni, but myself, Aristoph. Plut. 10(5.] III. A general or indistinct signification of multitude or totality is latent in the words ovbev, ctXXo, ovbeis, ri : hence 7rX>/v is used for exception after them ; KCLKLGT' aTroXoifjirjv, e'i ri a ahijaatfjC en, 7rXj)v ev p-ovov : Aristoph. Ach. 476. opti yap fyuas ov&ev ovras aXXo, TrX^i/
eibwX: Sophocl. Aj. 125. IV. It has sometimes a case after

TrXrjv ol <f)iX6ao(pot, Plat. Pheed. p. 68. (c. 13. ed. in Phaedr. p. 249. init. (p. 325. ed. Bip.) [ov yap karw

when

it

signifies

prteterquam

irXi}v els

dvyarepas, except as to

it, governed by a preposition, eyw be raXXa paicapios ntyvK avrip, : Eurip. Orest. 540. hence it is ren-

dered but only ; airofloXri ^v^ijs ovbefj.la earai e vfj-wv irX^v TOV 7rXc/ov, Acts xxvii, 22. where if the exceptive force of irXrjv is to be preserved, it must have reference to aTrofioXr], not to v/xwv : [after roo 7rXo/ov
underst. airofioXrj carat.] V. It is still exceptive, when put, without government, and so that the construction of the words following it does not depend on that of those preceding it, for dXXd : avTaTrobwaei auroTs, KUI TO avrairobopa avrwv els KefyaXtjv aiiTwv aTroSwaet : 7r\r)v fieTavoovfftv ebwKev cTravobov,
S. ofSirach, xvii, 24.

VI.
f-tovnv,

It

is
efjiol

sometimes corrective

ov iravv TroXXwv ibovTwv,

:

TrXiyv

Lucian, Lapith. p. 429' t. iii. not many seeing, nay only Aristcenetus. VII. Sometimes that, from which the exception is made, is understood whence 7rX//v appears to be used for o/^ws, nevertheless, but : as, cu'dyfcq yap e<mv eXQeiv TO. crKarbaXa* irXrjv oval T avQpwiTti) the sense ov TO ffKuvbaXov eKii'(t), bt ep-^erai : St. Matth. xviii, 7here may perhaps be, that offences are necessary for the salvation of the elect; from the number of whom he is excepted by whom the
;

ws

ebofc, TOV 'AjOierrcuveYov

offence comes.

168
VIII. Its

IIAHN.
power of expressing plenitude or
totality appears,

when

a whole

mentioned after specification of some of the parts which help to constitute it: thus Lucian, after mentioning the wounds mutually given and received by the philosophers, adds, ir\f)v rapn^fjs ye Kal batcpvuv /-teora iyi> Travra, Lapith. t. iii. p. 448. Kal yap Sorts yvis

vaiKa v(3piei TYJV or)v, els ae vj3pi$ei, Kal carts 7ra75a, Kal 0t'Xo>, Kal ye oiKeTrjv' TrXrjv yap (or rather ir\r)v ye) Trepl T&V irpaypaTuv Id. Soloecist. t. iii. p. 581. OVTWS e^et aot IX. It is used in pretermission also, when things are mentioned
Offris
:

summarily
ov&ev,

as,

elcmufjieBa

ovv,

Kal

dlfjiai,

^pr) Kal

ravra

KaTaptdfJieiodai,

TrapeffKevavTO iroiKiXa' TrXffv ^vpovs, Kal vreyuyuara, Kal

KapvKetas' aTravra yap afyQova. : Lucian. Lapith. p. 425. X. It shows somewhat of the power of supplying deficiency also, when it in some sort performs the office of the conclusive particle ov/,
signifying, it remains therefore that: thus Simon, after saying that all his brethren had died for their religion, adds, 7rX)v tfcSiK^w irepi
irept TWV ayiuv, Kal irepl TWV yvvaiKwv, Kal irepl r&v TeKvuv rj^Hjv : 1 Maccab. xiii, 6. 7rX?)i/ rat vjucls ol ca0' eva, eicaoros rrjv eavTOv yvvaltza ovrtas ayaTrdrw, <Js eavrov : Ephes. v. 33. this admonition may either be a conclusion from what St. Paul had before said of the love of Christ to the church, to which he compares the duty of husbands towards their wives; or irXfjv may preserve its

TOV eOvovs pov, Kal

suppletory power, and signify, as to what remains; the

sum of

all is

this.
when
XI. Somewhat of the power of completing plenitude appears too, 7,-X//i> is used in adding something which surpasses all that has thus our Saviour, after answering the High Priest, that he preceded was the Son of God, adds, 7rXj>}i> Xeyw V/KJ>, d?r' aprt o\^>ffQe TOV vlov
:

TOV avOpcjTrov KaQfifjLei'ov eic ce^iUJv rrjs bwanews, Kal fp-%6fjiet>ov eirl rtai' veQeXtiv rov ovpavov : St. Matth. xxvi, 64. thus too, after warning his disciples not to seek things which are of no other use than to sustain life, he adds, 7rX?7i> cfyretre TTIV flatriXeiav TOV Qeov : but rather seek,

&c.

remains therefore that ye seek, &c. suppletory of something to be further said or known, and dXXa demands something different from what has preceded. It is used before a question, when more than has yet been answered is requisite for the full comprehension of the subject of
St.

Luke

xii,

31.

i.

e.

it

XII. In nXi}i> 'AXXa,

7rXj)v is

inquiry

thus in Lucian's Timon, Mercury asks Plains, how he, being : blind, could find his way, or distinguish the persons to whom he is sent ; and when this question has been answered, Mercury proceeds,

irXrjv

dXXa

in

my

but to proceed ri irpaTTets KaraTre^deis ; [but further ; or, inquiry, what do you do, when sent down by Jupiter ? p. 74.
is

D.

ed. Salninr.]

XIII. Sometimes dXXa

fypovels,

to

be taken adversatively
ere fj.er"

fjieya,

&

"Hpn,

&c. but
Deor.

Kal vfiptZets' 7rX>)j'dXX' v\lofjiai I shall soon see you, on the

6\iyov avdis baKpvovfrav,

contrary, &c. Lucian. Dial.

xvi. [p. 154. c. ed. Salniur. but however ; but nevertheless.] XIV. FlX>)v dXXa sometimes introduces a finishing addition to what has already been said: thus Mercury, after recounting toPlutussome

instances of the desperate love of mortals for the latter, adds,

IIAHN.
dXXd
Kat
crv

169
/copv/3avrtv
O.VTOVS

av, ev ota,
:

b[jioXoyf]ffeia.s,

epupevu
Lucian.

TotovTy

eTrt/^ejurjvoras

as to

what remains;

to conclude:

Timon.

A. ed. Salmur. The meaning is rather, but nevertheless; and yet : Mercury had before (p. 75. D.) asked Plutus how it came to pass that he, blind, and pale, and lame, as he was, had so many admirers.] XV. 'AXXa may be thought to have its impulsive or incitative
c.

26.

[p. 76.

force in 7rX/)f dXXct rl yeXs ; Lucian. JVIort. Dial. xiii. p. 391. for7rX?)i> Yet it may have its signification of diversity: aye, but tell me. as to what remains, or, for the rest, tell me MOREOVER, or tell me

ANOTHKR THING.

XVI. TlXfjv dXX' ii signifies pr&terquam, except; dXXo opposing a foregoing negation ov yap avdpwirov vytdc?et 6 iarpevwv, 7rXi)v dXX' Aristot. Metaph. c. 1. r/ Kara <rv/i/3e/3jj/cos : XVII. In the same sense 7rX//v f/ is used a^Xov Travri 7rX?)v 77 rf
: :

Oey

Plat. Apol.
: Tryg. rai/ra Chor. ovb' eywye, TrXrj v Aristoph. Pac. 6l3. [6\7- ed. Br. where Trplv is printed for an oversight noticed by Brunck in his note.] ical TrX?/*' yerwv a rjyrjffofjieoda Trpwrov : ib. 917- See also Vesp. 1305. [1314. Kal TIS av av eiirhv erepov, OVK e^a/udprot, TrXrjv ye TOV Oav-

XVIII. HXriv ye

is,

except

indeed,

except only

Toivvv, [*a TOV 'ATroXXw, 'yio TreTrvapriv ovbevos*

ye wvi
ir\r}v

by

6ewv ael
ed. Br.]

paaTov

Plat. Sophist, p. 225.

FIX//*'

ye performs the office of 6t, following fjiev in another clause or member : KUI TrXovret pev curb TOV TOIOVTOV (Apollo, by his oracles :) TroXXoi yap ol CLVOIJTOI, Kal Trape^oTes avrovs KaTayorjTeveadaC ?rX^ v OVK ayvoeirai ye VTTO TWV ffuverwrepw^ rd TroXXd TeparevofAevos I Lucian. Dial. Jun. et Laton. Here ye enforces the negation which it follows : but the more knowing are far enough from being ignorant,
that,

XIX.

&c.
confirmative particle
beofjieada,
5;)

XX. The
yap

also

is

sometimes added
bf)
TTJS

iravra
:

Trdpeort vyv, ocrwv

TrXjyv

ye

KXeipvbpas

Aris-

toph. Vesp. 853. [857. ed. Br.]

XXI. The particles TrXrjv et except hypothetically : ri ovv TOVTO oyetbiSofjiev dXX^Xots ; /cat Trpo^daet ^pwjueOa TOV p.ribkv T&V Trotetv ; 7r\r)v el rfjs TV\TIS fiorjdeiy yeyovvty rots cnropots (j)6o unless perhaps : Demosth. Phil. iv. p. 57. [p. 141. 1. 21. ed. Reisk.]
Since nothing remains to be excepted but what no one will allow, the orator by this very hypothetical exception enforces his argument. Socrates, in his Defence, says, it was not permitted him even to know the names of his accusers, ir\i]v et rts Kw/u^StoTrotos Tvy^drei

wv Plat. Apo). p. 18. (c. 2. ed. Fisch.) Here there is some expression of indignation. [Wonderful indeed is the variety of significations, which Hoogeveen fancies he has discovered in ir\r)v, and other par:

ticles.]

Thucyd.

insertion of another word between 7rX?)>/ and et by the cause of some obscurity : 'A0r)valois evvot >)<rav, irXtjv for irXr)v et KaQoaror el n)v StfceXtav yovro avrovs bovXwareaQai : vi, 88. Kara TUCTOVTOV OVK evvot ^aav y KaQoaov, &c.
is

XXII. The

XXIII.

IlXj/i/ ei

denotes a certain case or condition; but

Tr\f\v

euv t

Hoog.

170
on account of av latent
is

IIOTE.

in eav, an uncertain one ; for which reason it construed with a subjunctive mood Isocr. ir\f)v eav av^epy irXrfv eav \fjpos rj xnpa yevi]Tai Theophr. XXIV. Mr) is added to TrXrjjv ei, without changing the signification
: : : :

ov%

opuj 6 ri airoXavets avrov, irXr)v el p,i) TOVTO 07/s, art,

&c. Lucian.

Dial. Diog. et Mausol. [p. 281. A. ed. Salrnur.] axobrjfjilas be OVK So TrXr/v ei pf) errpareveffOai ebei : Diog. Laert. p. 102. irXtjv eav pr) and ir\^v av pri, but with the difference between rrXrjv
eberjdrj,

eav and TT\^V

el

remarked
is

in xxiii.

prefixed to relative words for the purpose of excepting or limiting quantities, qualities, modes or manners, parts, times, places : as, irXfjv oaov t TrXr/v oloi', TrXfjv OTTWS, ir\i)v OTTTJ, TrXjyr few words on TrXr)v oaov and 7rXj)i> on. will sutiice orav, nXriv OTTOV. to make all understood. UXriv oaov then excepts a certain manner or
FlXr/v

XXV.

part, in Pausan.

TrX^v oaov \6yy

Ty
ev
jjiev

6eos cyevero ovbels en t^ <iv0pw7roi/, KoXciKety vpos TO V7repe\ov in Arcad. p. 457- Kal eiutyaves ffVf40rjvai trapa TOV fiiov ibaalv ovbev, 7r\rjy ocrov OVK
ITT'

e/*ov be or/re

teal

pacrtXeiav Karearfjffaro, dXX' kv Tpaire^ovvn, p. 462. is added to 7rX?)v, it is only narrative or expositive of that which is to be excepted ; and ev or evos is understood

Teye^

777^

XXVI. When on

after irXrjv : 7rXe/o> && TOVTWV ov icarotSa, irX)v ire^uvret pe Keii'Tj rovbe TOV tiofiov \aptv : Sophocl. Electr. 427. [426. ed. Br.] for wXfjv ev rovQ\ on. See Acts xx, 23. Aristophanes supplies the ellipsis : OVK oTSa, irXr)v %v, Ovetav evTtepas virep<pvd TO peyedos eiffrjveyKaro

on

on

'.

Pac. 227.

XXVII. In irXyv y on. Kal, nXfiv is exceptive, ye restrictive, and Kal superadditory : &ar* ep.oi ye boKel TTJS TepTrav&pov pdXXov av elvai
fjiovotKTJs elKaoratg

ir\rjv

y'on Kal

surpass

it ; or,

nay they even surpass

irapeXi)Xvdev : except that they even it : Aristid. pro Quatuorv. p.

305

<

XXVIII. The nervous further strengthened by

er)ye~ia6at Oavfjiaffu), ri

limitation of the exception by irXrjv y 6Yt is the insertion of brj : av be avTo TOVTO TO
atreTeXeffdrjv

#AXo rj ypapftaTiKos TrX/JvyeSr) ore avn 'Oprjpov XpvatTTTroy this only, that, &c.

avn
:

^iXoo-o^ov

efyyovfjievos

except indeed

1. Ilore IIOTE. usually signifies time long past ; whence it is joined with TraXcu in that adage TraXcu TTOT ifo-av aXm/toi MiX^ortot. And after i]br) it is rendered long ago, long since : r/Sij ?rore eytaye Plato Cratyl. airopwv, Kal et'Tavda e^eve^drjv, airep Ilpwrayopas X^yet p. 386. (p. 235. ed. Bip.) [Rather, before now.] II. In some passages however it signifies time but just past, as, ov* See Eustath. p. 702. Tror' d?r' Ahetav eXopriv, Iliad. 0, 108. III. But subjoined to fiev and be it signifies time generally and indeterminately; at onetime; at another time : rrore pev vvpfioXiKtis eayyeX\(dv ras apprjTOvs avrutv ibiOTqras, Trore be CLTTO TU>V eiKowv CTT' Procl. in Plat. Theolog. i, 4. In the following ai)Tas avaTpexw
: :
'

passage

it is
r)

opposed
f.iev

to de/

boait>,

wore

aXrjdfj, TTOTC

iroTeoov aXr}df) (^w^ev ael TOVS avdpurrovs be Kal \bevbfj ; Plat. Theset. p. 170.

(p. 108. ed. Bip.)

nov, nor.

171

IV. From this use in signifying time indefinitely, is derived that in which it takes the nature of a particle, and is joined emphatically to This it does relative words, rendering their meaning indeterminate. 1. simply, like the Latin cunque ; or 2. if there be an adeither mixture of doubt, it heightens the expression of solicitude in one 1. birota. nor* e<mi> avn), doubting, or eagerness in one inquiring. such as it is ; be it what it may : Demosth. de Pace p. 23. [p. 60. 1. 15. ed. Reisk.] The English idiom resembles the Greek of what ever character this peace I speak of is. It expresses the solicitude of one V. 2. doubting Kyicelvov
: :

fjyeladcu ^p?) vvv ?/S7 afyobpa a7rope7 , O'TTJ; Trore ert biabvcrerat rbv\6yov : Plat. Soph. p. 231. (p. 229. ed. Bip.) by what possible way ; how ever. So 2 Maccab. xiv, 32. Also the eagerness of an inquirer : oi/rot
;

HCL rr)v yrjv eacred'

us OVK airodavet,
is

el pi)

KarepeHs

JJLOL

rovvop.
:

&

rcor

earl

trot

VI.
wore
:

Km

Aristoph. Pac. 188.

superadditory

sometimes subjoined
:

r>}^

6pTjrr)de1(rav

VTTO Qeafjtei'ovs
'ibwfj.et>,

rjns Trore KCU eoriv

Heliodor.

ii,

8.

or inserted before
:

ro a Kai

Tror'

e%i

rrjv rrjs re^vrjs bvvafj.iv

Plat. Phaedr.

p. 268. (p. 366.). VII. In direct interrogation also Trore denotes the eagerness of the inquirer: iroias iror avtip XaKicas alre'irai TreVAwv ; Aristoph. Ach.

422.
eorti',

[?ro0'

wV?}p, 423. Br.]

yuot,

TTOV TCOT %v;

Id. Pac. 600.

irriXov

yap

TTWS Trore; Plutarch. rl Trore \eyet 6 deos; what can it be that the Qua3st. Plat. p. 1004. god says? KUL ri Trore alvlrrerat Plat. Apol. p. 21. Sometimes other words are inserted between rl and ?rore rl xpr'j Trore etVen/ ovrtas elvai TOV ao$iari\v Plat. Soph. p. 231. (p. 229 ed. Bip.) rl ovv Trore \eyei; Id. Apol. p. 21. (c. 6. ed. Fisch.) OVK eaff onus
etVe
; :
'.

rivos Trore; Id. Ach. 588.

aty^aofj.ai t rjv

/u?y

typaarjs,

ryft aKoXovQovpev Trore:

Aristoph. Plut.

With a signification of time it is used in figurative questions equivalent to assertions, and denotes a confidence, that no opposition can be offered r/ <ru o't'ei Trore TO ev kv rols pij ovaiv eh>cu ; Plat. Thea?t. p. 188. (p. 148. ed. Bip.)
:

J9. VIII.

Trore is quicunque nimirum tandem: evioi ra //ei/ yrt vi 5>/Tror' alriq. Trpoayovrai Xeyetv Demosth. de Cherson. [p. 90. 1. 7- ed. Reisk. by whatever motive ; by some other motive, whatever forsooth it may be.] 'Aei Trore comprehends all time always without exception : rots 'AQrjvaiois aei Trore ro ruv QetrffaX&v evvovv VTrrjp^ev Thucyd. IV, 78.

IX. "O<ms

Irj

^iXoyetAT/oc, TO. fr

aei Trore rols 'A.0rjvaiots ovres

i/TroTrrot, ib. C.

In questions wore has the ame rl cq Tror' av see p. 43. hortatory use
:

103. sense, with

e'ir)

by) subjoined in its ravra ra Trap' /^uwv 6wpa

Plat. Euthyphr. p. 15. (c. 18. ed. Fisch.) what, I pray, more literally, what gifts can me, can be these gifts ? &c. there ever be? &c.
Tols Oeols;

or

tell

nor. -- 1. now
where? Sometimes
aneXrjXvBe
it is
;

is

a particle

put for rot, whither? Luciau. Dial. Mortuor.

interrogative of place; trov <rov ro 6eov eKelvo

3.

OVK oTas, iroQcv ep-

172

nor-, nor.
KO\ irov virayet
:

^Tat,
vii,

St.

John

iii,

8. irov ovros /jeXXe* iropeveaOat

ib.

35.

So

irov,

I am
Oov

the enclitic signifies motion to a place; as, airevbu hastening to some place, somewhither : Plat. Euthyphr.
irov

p. 15.
II.

enclitic signifies

place indefinitely

anywhere

ov pkv

eArris eicel, etTrep avbpos : Iliad, p, 446. trov aXXofli, KTfaaffdai TOVTO : Plat. Phaed. p. 67. (c. 12. ed. Fisch.) III. It signifies place definitely with regard to certain limits, but

yap

TI TTOV itrrlv otcji/pwrepov

indeterminately with regard to the whole space within those limits : aXXa TTOU iv peyapoiffi A.VK&OVOS evbeKa Stypoi : somewhere: Iliad, e,

193. IV. Hence it is joined with adverbs signifying place definitely : Lucia n. Dial. ovSe KO\OV ivravda. irov Kelodat viro ry ^/ayu/uy avrr/v &e irov o "Apyos /3oi/*coXeI : Id. Dial. Jov. et Nept. et Nereid,
:

em

Mercnr. V. Iloi/ has a circumflex, not only when

it is

it

interrogates,

and when

taken materially, but also when it signifies place neither definitely nor indefinitely, but considered as the limit of something bounded and included by it : TO b irav ov irov' TO yap irov avro re ecrri rt t KOL

en aXXo
5.

TI ie~t elvai Trapa rouro, cv y o irepte\i: Aristot. Physic, iv, 10.] [See Locke on Hum. Underst. b. ii. ch. 13. VI. The indefiniteness of its signification with regard to place is transferred to other things, and hence arises its conjectural use, in which it is rendered perhaps ; it may be ; if I mistake not ; &c. dXX' tfri irov Tpwwy >/y>/rope$ ?jSe pebovres evpv Koviaaovaw Iliad. 144. So o,48. ^, 83. o;, 488. VII. It is filly therefore joined with ekd^etv 'Apff&nris, ws eW<m>, erepov TTOV KO\ Kaivorepov Ttfiuptas Tpoirov ravvv enivoovarjs : And it suits interrogation: KaXoV irov n Heliodor. ^Ethiop. viii, 11. av eiij, o TOVTWV airoXet^dev, Ofjuas Te^rj Xa/u/3a^erai ; Plat. Pha?dr. p. 226. (p. 363. ed. Bip.) Also ironical jocularity: "ATroXXoy, os irov A>7Xov T] Hvd&v' e^cts, says Bacchus in the Rana3 of Aristoph. 772. [659' ed. Br.] but here perhaps it may be taken in the sense ex, :

plained under iii. VIII. From its conjectural use proceeds its diminuent signification ; which qualifies what might otherwise seem too positive or peremptory : avra irov a^e^ov <pys TO. yiyvopeva : Lucian. Timon. c. 42. what you
describe i s pretty 'nearly

what

IX. This diminuent use

suits

really happens. those peculiarly, who, either dis-

trusting, or feigning to distrust, their own opinion, su&pend it on the assent of others, and therefore speak cautiously : thus Socrates, who always dissembled his knowledge : 6 avros irov Tpoiros Te^vr)s pr\roptKfjs, offirep

KOI larptKrjs: Plat. Phaedr. p. 270. (p. 370. ed. Bip.)

:

elegant when followed by ye : teal yudXa irov trv^va, c5 Swcpares* ra y' ev rols /3t/3X/ots ro7s Trept \6ywv re^v^s yeypafjfjivots Lest the more general asPlat. Phasdr. p. 266. (p. 363. ed. Bip.) sertion should have been too much qualified by TTOV, the more particular one, which follows, is urged by the restrictive force of ye. XI. By this sense irov is adapted for eliciting, and as it were ffvvoioda irov KO\ avrbs, OTI ol /ueyiarov bvyauevoi Kal asking, assent

X.

It

is

npiN, npiN H.
ev
rals TroXeo-tv ala-\vvovTai \6yovs
ypatyetv,

173

&c.

Plat.

Phaedr. p. 257- (p. 344. ed. Bip.) You yourself, as well as /, know, So, evvoels TTOV, ds eyw/m<, if I mistake not, or doubtless, that, fyc. p. 264. As in this use of rrov assent is anticipated, so an expression of it abtKovvras b& teal abtKovperovs abvvaTOv irov (f>i\ovs usually follows civat: Answ. vol. Plato in Lys. p. 214. (p. 234. ed. Bip.) eiVl 5e TTOV ovrot ol ?rept yvoews re KCU rov o\ov SiaXeyojueyoi KO.I ypa^ovres. Answ.
:

a.\r)6rj

X^yets

ib.

XII. Sometimes it extorts, rather than elicits, assent, and suits reprehension and rebuke "Eicrop, TTOV // rot peros o^erat, o 7rp<j> e^ea:

Kes",

(j>rjs

TTOV

arep

Xawv

TroXiy c^epey

776'

kirtKovpwv

Iliad, e,

4?3.

I am not much mistaken, &c. XIII. No one has shown by sufficient examples, that irov is ever redundant ov &% nov, e. g. is, no, indeed, as I think ; not, truly , in
said, if
:

you

my

opinion.

-I. n/ol> and irporepov have the same IIPIN, FIPIN H. meaning, formerly, hertofore ; but irplv is more usual in poetry, Trporepov in It is opposed to vvv in Iliad. (3, 1 12 114. to &>), (now) II. e, prose. 472. Plato prefixes the article ro : Tras iroir)n)s ylyverai, K(J.V apovaos y TO irplv, ov av "Epws ai/^rai : Sympos. p. 196. (p. 21 6. ed. Bip.) II. Ilpa', like TrXrjv, is construed with a genitive, after the manner of prepositions, or rather of comparatives ; as, irp\v Oepovs, before summer ; Trplv &pas, be/ore the time : Pind. Pyth. iv, 76. Like irporepov, it admits before it words which augment or intend its signification, as TroXv TTjotv, long before, Iliad. X, 236. III. It is followed by the particle r\ more frequently than by a

genitive case

fj.rj&e

TToXiv) 7) aurol Trotrjcrai: See St. Malth. i, 18.

ypatyeiv v6fj.ovs irpli> r] TrapaXafielv KaQapav (ri]V Plat, de Rep. vi. p. 501. (p. 104. ed. Bip.)

fj.e

often suppressed : irplv aXeKropa Qwviiffat, rp\s curapviiffri xxvi, 34. 75. before the cock crow. Karaj3adi trplv cnrodavelv TO Ttaibiov pov : St. John iv, 49- It appears from the following example, that the act or event, priority to which is signified by Ttp\v, needs not actually take place, but may be prevented : aXX'

IV.
:

*H

is

St.

Malth.

eKTrob&v

aTrctfti,

iTplv

TrXrjyas

Xa/3eTv:
it

Aristoph. Vesp.

1316. [1325.

ed. Br.]

V. From what has been said, an

/3,

infinitive

mood

after it:

and

this Eustath.

374. (p. 1450. 1. 29.) Homer speaking of something future : rrjv

eireicrtv
:

appears that irplv requires properly observes on Horn. Od. construes it with an indicative in

b* eyw ov Xv<ru>, irpi v piv nal yfjpas indicative of a past tense is used, when something past is spoken of, and spoken of as past : \pr]v TOLVW AeTmVTjv IJLYI Trporepov TiQivai TOV eavrov VOJJLOV, irpiv r} TOV TrdXatov

Iliad, a, 29-

An

TOVTOV eXvae

where

: Demosth. adv. Leptin. p. 374. [p. 486. 1. 13. ed. Reisk. does not appear.] In its construction with an optative mood, av is understood, when time is put as past, although the thing spoken of has not actually taken place, but is indeed yet to come :
?*/

OVK effrtv %Qos 'PaifAaiois

xapieaBai Tiva

tivdpuirov

els air6\ffii',

174
%

rm.

o KaTijyopovfJtevos Kara Trpocrwirov ej^ot TOVS KaTrjyopovs, TOTTOV re airo\o-

yias Aa/3ot irepi TOV eyicXJifjiaTOs : Acts xxv, 16. It is construed with a subjunctive mood in St. Luke's Gospel : Ibelv OavaTOV, Trplv r) 'iby TOV XptoTov 7]t> avr<j> fj,y} Ke^prjfJiaTifffjievov, Kvplov : ii, 26. But an infinitive might be substituted for either the optative or subjunctive ; as, irplv Ibelv for irplv rj 'iby : see v. 20. VI. As TrpoTepov in prose is put before nplv in a preceding clause, see Iliad. /3, so in poetry Trplv is repeated, for the sake of emphasis 348. 354. The last irplv requires an infinitive, says Eustatliius on ov yap olov Iliad, a, 07. This rule is not however without exception re f)fj~iv Trplv bibovai, irplv Kal XVKOS olv vf*evaio7 Aristoph. Pac. 1 1 12.
: :
'.

avagrjrrivis re T&V TraXcudii', /*era a^o^fjs &fji' eirl ras iroXeis ep-^eadov, OTCLV 'ibrjruv TIHIV ijbq ruv /3/ov TavayKoia KareffKevafffjieva' 7rp\v be, ov : Plat, in Critia p. 110. (p. 41.
;

VII. There is sometimes after irplv an what has preceded as, pvdoXoyia. yap,
.

ellipsis

to

be supplied from

ed. Bip.)
r.

The

full

expression would be,

is

irp\v

be

'ibrjTov

TUJW

r\.

r. /3.

KareffKevafffjieva, ov.

VIII.

When

ay

mood

as, /i^re biKqv bucavys, irplv

added, the construction is with a subjunctive av ajufyoiv pvdov d^ouar/s* Trplv a.v

/ua0w: Plat. Euthyphr. p. 15. IX. Hplv TI; expresses great eagerness to be informed of something, considered as the term before which some other thing is not to take place : Aj. Qavelv yap avrov ovn irw 0e\w. Min. Trptv av ri [bpacrrjs,]
rj

TI

Kepbavgs ir\eov

Soph. Aj.
?

what further advantage

107. before you do [Abr. of Vig. p. 157.]

what? or gain

rift. 1. IIw denotes way or manner, and also time. An example of its junction with a negative to exclude way or manner is in the Acharn. of Aristoph. Lam. ri b" el-iras fi/uas ; OVK epels Die. OVK olbd via. 580. / do not at all [VTTO TOV beovs yap T&V onXbtv tXtyytw.] know, i.e. in any manner: [in Brunch's translation, hand memini
;

amplius.]
II. But it much more frequently denotes time, especially when joined with negatives to exclude it thus, OVTTW, /Z^TTW, ovbeird), fj.r}beTT(t) t ovrt ww, &c. So subjoined, it negatively limits past time by the present, without regard to the future ; wherefore with a future tense, as future, it cannot be construed. It is commonly construed with a past tense ; as, o TI be ov t OVTTU) elires you have not yet said: Plat. Euthyphr. p. 11. (c. 9. ed. Fisch.)
:

QiXtTTTTov

fleets

KaTearTriaafjiev

TT)\IKOVTOV, f]\iKOs ovbets

TTW

fiaariXevs

yeyove MaKebovlas: hitherto, till the present time : (nothing is denied of the future :) Demosth. Ol. i. p. 2. [p. 11. 1. 26. ed. Reisk.] Sometimes with the present tense : orav <j>rjs pev elvai ryv 4>v\rjv, Trplv Kal els avdpuirov elbos re Kal <7a>/ia atyiKeffdai, elvat 6' avTrjv avyPlat. Phaed. p. 92. Keiftevyv etc T&V ovbeirw OVTUV III. It is sometimes separated from the preceding negative ; as, rovTl fj.ev, avbpes, ovbev The iria'. Aristoph. Pac. 243. rjfjiiv Trpdypa separation is constant in OVTHTW, wherein the diuiinuent ri excludes all Qaveiv yap avrov owrrw 0Aw, Soph. Aj. exception whatever
: :

mri, IKE.

175

IV. In the signification of time the difference between TTW and irore is this; that with a negative Trore excludes time past, present, and future, TTW past and present only ; and Trore is rendered simply never, So TTW and irporepov are joined iru never yet, or never before. by

Demosthenes
p. 321.

oar\v ovbeis TTW irpoTepov

jJtefjivrjTat

yeyovvlav, pro Cor.

Hence with a negative it may sometimes be properly rendered not as yet, with exclusion of all past time up to the present ovbe TI TTW cratya. "tbpev, OTTWS earai Tube epya: Iliad. /3, 251. Here oi/benore would be inadmissible. So Iliad, a, 543. YId) with a past tense, and TTOTC with a future, are plainly contra:

distinguished in the following passage

TIS
vfjii'rjffe

TOV be virenovoaviov TOTTOV ovre

vpvi'iaet.

TTW T&V Trjbe

Trotqrj/s,

ovre 7ro0'

KO.T

afyav

Plat.

Phaedr. p. 24?. (p. 322. ed. Bip.)

V. OI/TTW and OVKCTI dinner

present time,
ov^-ert

in

this,

that ovnio
Kaipos, is, be time.

excludes past and

it is

future

OVTTW earl

not yet time;

OVKCTI corral Kaipos, there will

its signification of time is either subjoined to a negative, or, if the sense be affirmative, is supported by TTOTC following it : ocroi efjov TrwTrore aoj/coare : Plat. Apol. See Iliad, o, p. 19. ever till this time ; at any time before now.

no longer VI. IIw cannot stand alone ; but in

354. VII. Mi/Trwrt

(says
Oovptboi aXtcijs
:

is,

not even now, in the

is

least,

or,

at all

Agamemnon) although Menelaus

Iliad. 5,

wounded, yet

p/7rwri

235.

AND
I.

ON nT2 AND THE PARTICLES JOINED WITH

how, interrogates concerning manner
e.
;

IT.

I.

IIws,
i.

and that either

Soph.
p.

properly,

with a desire of information, as

:

in Plat.

239.

1. it exIn figurative interrogation (249. Bip.) or figuratively. TTUIS bvcrKoXws ol TO. presses wonder ^p^juara e^ovres els ri]V flaffiXeiav how hardly! with St. Mark x, 23. for ws rov 0eov elae\ei)aovrnt. what difficulty ! 2. It is equivalent to negation, by defying one, as it were, to give a satisfactory answer : TTWS ovv eirl ry p.rj irapefyvTi yv&aiv TWV Xvirrjauvriov yevoir' av // XVTTJ/ ; ^Eschin. Socrat. Trepl 0a'ar. c. 16. [Abr. ofVig. p. 158. notes A, J.] 3. It denotes expostulation
; :

and reprehension : OVK o'tbare riiv TrapafioXiiv ravr^v; KUI TTWS Trdaos ras Trapa(3o\as yvuaeaQe St. Mark iv, 13. 4. It is prohibitive : drives Rom. vi. 2. 5. It is ev ert TTWS ; avrij rrj ^riaofjiev aireQa.voiJ.eif afjiapTiq.,
',

expressive of doubt
K rovT(i)v
1.

oi fjtev

av

ris ffKtycuTO uv

^a\TTuJs

ovv TroXXoi Maicebovuv nuts e%ovat $tX/7T7rw, Demosth. Ol. ii. p. 8. [p. 22.
'.

29. ed. Reisk.] II. With the article prefixed, TTWS

KCII ol

is

taken materially
:

C^TOW
xxil,

ol

ap^iepels

and

ypafj-naTels TO TTWS aveXvfftv avrov afterwards in v. 4. (rvveXaXrjoe TO'IS apx^pevat nal rots
St.

Luke

2.

orpctrij-yols

TO TTWS avTov irapab<j> avro~is.

[The

article

does not pertain to vws

176
alone, but to
all

nn-% nni.
TTWS afoot?
:

ner to

the clause TTWS av^Xwo-tv avTov t and in the same manirapaby avrots TTWS therefore is not taken materially.] III. It is construed with an indicative mood, when actuality in the sense of the verb is not to be taken away : KaQws 7rapeXd/3ere Trap* To TTWS even follows fjuvv TO TTWS 5el TrepiTrareiv : 1 Thessal. iv. 1. avrovs finding nothing jjir)$i> : fjirjbev evpiffKovTes TO TTWS KoXaatavTai how they might punish them : Acts iv, 21. IV. Sometimes TTWS is neither interrogative nor dubitative, but determinative of manner, signifying, in some certain manner. It then still retains its accent, because it is emphatical bei yap TTWS /ue> elvai Koivas (/cruets), 6'Xws 5* tiias : Aristot. de Rep. ii, 5. [See Abr. of Vig. p. 158. 1. 26.] V. Other particles are subjoined to TTWS, as ai>, yap, S>), ov. Hws
'.

ay sometimes

signifies

utinam, I wish

as, TTWS

av 6Xoif*av

Eurip.

See Valcken. on Alcest. 864. TTWS av av pot Xe^ems, Hippol. 345. Hippol. p. 185. [Abr. of Vig. p. 158. note /.] VI. Hws yap interrogatively supports and strengthens, by a reason, a preceding negation : ou yap irov TT\V ye ibiav avrryv 6^jutovpye7
ov&els
T<5t> biyjuovpyvv' TTWS yap ; Plat, de Rep. x. p. 5$6. (p. 285. ed. Bip.) for TTWS yap av brjjjuovpyol ; VII. It has much elegance, when thus used parenthetically : as, e<m fj.et' OVK 'ioov (TTWS ydp ;) Trpos TOVS Trpd^ajras biaXvaafjitvovs TWV

OVK etSorwv KaTrjyopelv

Demosth. adv. Nausimach. p. 634.

i.

e.

TTWS

yap

*iaov eir].

6eias, OVK av ?rore, TTUS yap ; Plat, de

VIII. It has a negative power in answers also : ^yovjuev?;s Ik aXrjI Answ. olfj-at, ^al/xev, avry \opbv KUKUJV aKO\ovQrjyetv Rep. vi. p. 490. (p. 82. ed. Bip.) i. e. TTWS yap av

is

IX. In this use the negation [of which yap represents the reason,] thus the Eunuch, to the question of Philip, whether understood he understood what he was reading, replies, TTWS yap av bvvaifirjv, iav jjiri TIS obrjyrjffr) p,e ; Acts viii, 31. ov yt>'ao-cw being understood
:

before

TTWS.

X. IIwsou; is a question put 1. properly, for the sake of information, and not figuratively ; ou being closely connected with a Ceb. Tab. p. as, rrws ov^ ofioiav e^ovfft TTJV poptyriv following word 175. [p. 16. 1. 1. ed. Simps. Oxon. 1738. where TTWS ovv ov% ] i. e. irws 7roXvei5e7$ e'xowai ros poppas See Lilian. V. H. xii, 13. Eurip. Phceniss. 907. Aristoph. Pac. 4?2. Ceb. Tab. 177- [17, 1- ed. Simps.]
;

2. Dais ov is

affirmation of what VMS OVK aXoyoV e<m

sometimes a figurative interrogation equivalent to an is negatively asked, but more emphatical: as,

Plat. Phileb. p. 55. (p. 298. ed. Bip.) TTWS ov ; KaKiaros cnravTuv avQp&iruv biKalus av vojjiioio ; Demosth. adv. Tiniocr. p. 475. 01 Kat pfi TOVS eyyvs, a\\a Kal TOVS airtaQev ireipwvTai &ov\ovadai, TTUS ov ^pr) Kal enl TO ea^aTOV ay&vos eXQelv ; Thucyd. iv,

See Plat. 92. TTWS ovyl Xrjprivet; Aristid. pro Quatuorv. p. 476. Pha3dr. p. 343. (p. 315. ed. Bip.) Thucyd. iv, 62. Rom. viii, 32. 2 Cor. iii, 8. [Sometimes the question rather expresses surprise with some degree of reproach:] irws ov vowe; St. Matth. xvi, 11. See
Eurip. Phoeniss, 907. St.

Mark

viii,

21. St.

Luke

xii,

56.

nni, &c.
XI. Dais yap ov
;

177
a

asserts

and confirms

preceding

affirmation

interrogatively : TO be ye, olpal, ae 0avai av belv, iravTa Xoyoy, &GTrep e?wo>>, avvearavai, crw/ua rt eyovra. avrov avrov, &C. Answ. TTWS yap ov ; Plat. Plraedr. p. 264. (p. 359- ed. Bip.) certainly ; for how can it be

precedes
tively.

otherwise? Tap denotes an ellipsis, which is to be supplied from what : iras Xoyos e'^ei au>ud TI, and then TTWS interrogates nega-

XII.

It is

eivaii Answ. TTWS yap ov ; Plat, de (p. 60. ed. Bip.) q. d. OVTWS e^et' TTWS yap OVK av ri

\eyouev

n b6av

frequently used in answer to questions also

e'irj

as,
v.
ff

ap
;

olv

Rep.

p. 477.

b6a

See

Plat. Euthyphr. p. 7. XIII. Hws be ov; is a phrase of similar import in continued speech, and connected with following words, be being transitive, and indi-

cative of fresh

commencement
b'

as,

TTCUS

be ov KaVelyo ata^pov

Lucian.

adv. Indoct.

c. 18.

XIV.

Hujs

ou
:

also

is

used

elliptically,

as an affirmative answer

to an affirmation

abuvarov. Answ. XV. And as an affirmative answer to a question also: Soc. J\ eirl o't'et TOV depairevofjievov Ti]v OepaTreiav elvai ; Euth. p.a At" OVK fiXafly eyuye. Soc. a\X' CTT' w'^eXe/a ; Euth. TTWS 6' ov ; Plat. Euthyphr. p. 13. (c. 15. ed. Fisch.)

elbora ye /zj) elbevat TO CLVTO, 7) prj eiboTa eibevai, TTWS b' ov ; Plat. Theast. p. 188. (p. 147. ed. Bip.)

II.

OF THE PARTICLES
Ylws, the enclitic,
is

FK12, ftAE

AAAH2 TE
manner;
:

Dfll,

OVTO

EKIS,

somehow or other;

in a manner; somehow; sometimes extenuating or invalidating, sometimes expressive of doubt ov^ e'x w **w 0* eWo), o row. Plat. Euthyphr. p. 11. ITepiepxerai yap TTWS ael >^7^, o av vnoQw^eQa
I.

in some dimitiuent

>

'.

(c. 12. ed. Fisch.) II. Hence this particle suits

those who speak circumspectly, and with diffidence of their opinions. Thus to the question of Socrates, whether the art of rhetoric is practised not only in courts of justice, but in all assemblies, public and private, Phaedrus replies, //aXtcrra Trass irepi ras biicas X^yerat Kat ypa^erai TC^VT] : Plat. Phacdr. p. 26l. fj.ev
(p. 352. ed. Bip.) III. "AXXws ye TTWS, literally, in

some other way at least, signifies, with a negative preceding, absolutely in no manner whatever: /i?) Kurd TO iiveiricrTTiuov, OVK avvvTrodefj.evos aXXws ye TTWS fjiiav uiadrjfftv av Trore Trri/pet^s TOV QavaTov JLschin. Socrat. Dial, de Mort. c. l6. IV. 'Aynuis ye TTWS (usually wrilten in one word a/uwo-yeVws) signifies, in one, or some, manner at least : boKeHs av ovba^ws pe atyiiaeir, av eiTrw auus ye TTWS Plat. Phaedr. p. 228. (283. Bip.) jrplv V. Tints preserves its diniinuent power in such expressions as paXa. TTWS, considerably, pretty much ; fj.a\a TTCJS ue KaOiKco Ovuov evnrrj Iliad. 04. dfcpt/3dis TTWS, with tolerable accuracy ; pretty accurately ;
: : : , 1

TTWS,

J^

TT(Ds t

nearly thus.
%

Hoog.

178

PA.
I.

PA.
it

The
;

particle pa has been very

mere expletive
or in
II.
its

but, except in differs not at all from apa,

use.
Its

commonly considered as a being more appropriate to poetry, either in its origin, or in its power,

primary indication
in

is

that of something accomplished and

every respect : this indication is discoverable in the sigiv. nification of order or succession ; see p. 20. Homer, about to describe the complaints of Mars to Jupiter about his wound, first recounts several preceding particulars; his arrival in heaven, his taking a seat by Jupiter, the vexation of his mind, the exposure of his

complete

bleeding wound ; and things being prepared by this introductory he then proceeds, Kal p' 6Xo<f>vp6uei>os eVea Trrepoevra irpovrivba, and then ; and so, &c. Iliad, e, 8? ! So, avrap eVei p eooavro irepl Iliad. , 383. Here the first pa may Xpoi' vwpoTra j(a\Kov 9 fiav p 'ifjiev indicate transition ; the second, full and Jit time. HI. Hence it is fitly joined with /} in its signification of time : dXX' ore bq p' CK ro1o bvubeKarr) yever r/ws, KO.I Tore by irpos oXvfjnrov where in like manner it may indicate tran'irrav i Iliad. X, 493.
recital,
:

sition.

IV. 'Pa, as well as apa, has a collective or conclusive power; which however, as in apa, is often not very apparent ; and especially when pa is joined with yap, or other such causal word, is so obscure, that pa seems to be added to yap merely for the purpose of augmenting
causal signification : thus, ov6' avadrjX^ffef Trept yap pa e ^aX/cos 0vXXd re /cai ^XotoV : Iliad, a, 236. nor will the sceptre bud anew : and no wonder ; for, &c. Again, Agamemnon says that he was unwilling to receive the ransom of Chryseis, because he chose rather to keep her, and adds, Kal yap pa KXvraiuvrjffTprjs ?rpo/3e/3ovXa Kovpibiijs dXd)(OV, CTTCI oil eQev eri Xepeiw. Iliad, a, 113. V. But perhaps some may here prefer admitting an inverted form of argumentation, (seep. 17. vii.) in which the inference precedes that from which it is drawn. With such an admission, the collective force of pa will appear upon a transposition of the words : Kal yap,
its
?Xe;//e

OVK earn ^epe/wv KXvratjjLv^aTprjs irpofiefiovXa apa avTfjs. There is a plainer example of this inverted form of argumentation, which indicates commotion of mind, in Iliad, /z, l6'4, where Asius says, Zev Trdrep, ij pa vv Kal av tyiXo^evbrjs erervo vdy^v judX'' oi; yap
eTret

tfywy' tyafATjv

jjptaas

'Axatovs oyi]aeiv fyuerepoV ye ftevos Kal %e1pas

His argument, in a more regular form, runs thus: 7 thought would not withstand our force ; but they do withstand it : therefore Jupiter is false. Tap in the member following pa is the sign or mark of this inverted form. VI. From this inverted form of argumentation arises a new sense and use of the particle, which may be of service in explaining the foregoing passages, and in which it is rendered nempe, scilicet , utique ; to wit. It may be so rendered in the passage last quoted from Homer, if transposition be not approved; and in Iliad, a, 56. KTI^TO yap
the Greeks

179
u/v, OTI

pa
as,

dvi'iffKovras

opdro.

It

frequently therefore follows the

:

SeXayov viov, os p" eVt Tlaifftp vale TroXvitn/^wv II. e, 6l2. So in numberless places, as in II. 0, 206. 236. 283. 344. &c. VII. But after os it sometimes manifestly denotes consequence or effect : thus in the following verses the performances and powers of the dogs are mentioned as the consequence of certain marks or
relative os
:

qualities ascribed to
irrjyovs, rpe7s be

them

T\V

&
'

Trapovar/oi/s,

eVa

atoXo)',

yereifjrrjs bvo /uev Kvvas rj/ntcrv ot pa Xeovras avrovs av

epvorres, ore bpa^aivro Sepawi', elX/coy

en

cjwovras eV' avXtof

at

eWa

&'

ebwKe Qaffffovas at>pawv

re Kal

Ki>voo-ovp/5as,

pa

iwcu

affaorai

vefipovs

ov juvovra Xaywo>,

&c. Callim.

h. in

Dian. 91

94. which

therefore.

VIII.

When
:

syllogistic use of

or event

the consequence comprehends an act, then from the pa arises another, in which it indicates either effect thus Homer, having said that Briareus excelled his father,

adds, os pa Trapa Kpovlwvi Aca0ec?ero, Kvbe'i yaiwv : II. a, 405. whence he sat, &c. indicating that his valour procured him that honour. IX. Hence Kai pa may be rendered, and thus ; and so : 6
bovpacrtv afj^ls ijpws 'AtrrepoTratos,

eVei Trepibe&os

>)ev'

Kai

p'

erepw

rw 6' erepw, &c. Iliad. 0, l64. X. Like apa, pa denotes the execution of an order ; a sense which is next to the preceding one: after the words of Jupiter to Juno, aXX' ueKovva Kadrjcro, Homer says of Juno, ebbeiffev be aeKovaa , Kai p II. a, 669. And of the Greeks, after the injunction of KaQrjOTo Neptune to arm and meet the enemy, ai/rap eirei p eaaavro nepl xpoi>apo7ra II. , 383. XaXfrov, (3dv p 'ifjiev XI. From this use spontaneously flows that in which it marks transition ; which indeed also is signified in the passage last cited. Thus it performs the office of /*ei/ and be: % pa, /cai ey^os : Iliad, e, 280. equivalent to OVTW fj.ev
bovpl aaKos /3aXev
: :

XII.

To

comes next;
that is in dXX' ore brj

the signification of transition, that of continuation fitly in which pa has the same effect as /uev ovv and fj.ev bij : resuming narration after interruption or digression : as,

&c.

II.

p' e/c/^ave, 0, 171.

&c.

Iliad, e,

334.

Kai row /uev

p'

a^a/^aprev*

XIII. Hence it may frequently be rendered, then; afterwards; next ; &C. <5s 0aro* row 6' avrov XVTO yovvara KQI <j>i\ot> >)rop' ey^os /^ev
p' cuberjKe'

o & eero xelpe Treratrcras : Iliad, (j), 115. rtvrap 6 (Achilles, after slaying Asteropeeus) {3rj p ievat /nera Ilatovas : Iliad. 0, 205.

1. The dative IXOAHt. ayo^, having first assumed the nature of an adverb, of the same form as &}/io0/f, (nyfj, ffTrovbrj, fav^r), v?rep/3oXj/, and the Latin forte t sponte, and the like, became at length, by

a gradation of changes, a particle indicating that much is wanting to complete affirmation, and bearing a signification therefore amountthe genuine As ing almost to negation. signifies leisure,
o-^
:

meaning of ff\^y

o'lye tr\o\y ^epl TUV elauyye\\op.vwv (TKoircvvTai Andocid. ap. Bud. Conmi. I. gr. p. 4S9 II. Because what is done at leisure is not done hastily, ff\v\y has
is

leisurably
:

thus,

180
next the sense of slowly
rop.
viii,

TAX A.

: dXV viraKovdtv o^oXJ vm'iKovffa ; Xen. CyHence it is opposed to renews, as the comparative 3, 21. is to OO.TTOV in Plato ; TOVTO ye TTO.S irotetv Si/varos Qarrov 7} a^oXairepov :

Theaet. p. 206. (p. 18ff. ed. Bip.) III. When an affirmative condition or case precedes
easily
.*

it,

it

signifies

yap &t), TTJV re pj/ropiKr/v Kal TT)V fytXoffotyiav, as Sta yevvatorrjra Kal eirtcrrfi pas laro^alvoyrai rives* eireibav yovv Kal rovrutv a7roetai/u TYJV Trapao-trtKrjv iroXv fcparovtrav, ff)(oXy bqXovori T&V aXXwv re^vuv 5oei Trpo^epeardrTj Lucian. Parasit. t. ii. p. 85$. [p. 360. B. What one has leisure to do, he can do with greater ed. Salmur. ease; but still, unless the words are to be taken ironically, the true
ufjioXoyrjrat
:

reading perhaps is, iroXv fyXovon, &c.] IV. But when the case or condition preceding is negative, <r\oXfj signifies on the contrary, hardly, scarcely : el avrai T&V irepl TO otiua. alaQfjaeiav prj aKpifiels eta/, firjbe aatyels, o\oXy ye at aXXat : Plat. Phaedr. p. 65. (c. 10. ed. Fisch.) much less: an extenuating expression : q. d. slowly ; i. e. scarcely at least ; for, by no means. V. So when the condition and negation are implicit: o Se avrb

avry avopoiov

Kal Sta^opor, ff\oXrj ye T(f aXXy opoiov 77 <j)i\ov e'irj The negative conyevotTo : Plat. Lys. p. 214. (p. 234. ed. Bip.) avrb dition might be made explicit by the following change : e'i ctvrw jiji/ Ofjiotov av e'irj, ff^oX?/ ye r<p c'iXXy yevotTo opoiov. VI. Sometimes the whole negative condition is to be understood,

or at least to be assumed from what has preceded : cav rts avev TOV ffirov Kal TO o\^oy avrov eaQt'r], ju>) affKrjaews aXX' rfiovijs eveKa, irorepov tyofyayos elvai 5oce7, 7^ ov ; ^^o\y y GLV, e<brj, aXXos rts o^o^ayos etr; : Xen. Mem. iii. p. 789- i. e et ovros o^ofydyos OVK ecrri, ff^oXy y av aXXos etr;. VII. This mode of reasoning is rendered more formal by the thus ^Elian, of an effeminate, who addition of yap, put for ye apa complained of having suffered from the hardness of a bed of roses, TTOOS kv Trpoaavret ff\oXy yap ovros eirl -^apevrrfs KareKXidrj, rj ort/3aos, 77 24. TretyvKvias, rj ravpov 6opas : ix, VIII. Thus by degrees it arrived at absolute negation a\o\^ oi>& o\u)s, ouSajuws, says Suidas : ra be riuv /3ap/3apwj> rt ^p?) Xeyetv ;
: : t

yap av

cKelyot ra 'Opfjpov pdQoiey

Max. Tyr.

Dissert,
it

vii.

TAXA. -- 1.

Tci^a

first signifies

quickly: next

is

a particle

which simply extenuates or diminishes the force of affirmation, perhaps ; as, rax', w 'ya0e, /3eXrtov elaofiedal Plat. Euthypbr. p. 9. Demosth. adv. (c. 12. ed. Fisch.) rct^a roivvv cat rptrypap^'as epovfft
:

Nausini. p. 635. See Rom. v, ? Philem. 15. II. In some passages it may have both significations

as, ruya. o~v

av

VTTO (jttXoTifJiias eiriayoi 7/jutv

(p. 344. ed. Bip.) On sub junction to ra^a, p. 12.

III.

av TOV ypafyeiv Plat. Phaedr. p. 257the repetition of av see p. 16. 1. 2. and on its
:

1.

39.

as,
iv.
iii,

Otherwise av subjoined to rd^a pertains to a following verb ; Tax avbolev: Plat. Phaedr. p. 25p. (p. 348. ed. Bip.) So de Legg. Luciau. Lapitli. t. p. 708. 7-d^a 5' av rtvos fjaO/Vero TTJ fiaKTrjpla
:

p, 430. See Aristoph. Vesp.

277

TE.
IV. Tu"xa and

181

fjti>

and Suid.
V.
til

i<rws are used indifferently as synonymous: <rws aXrjOovs Tiros eQa-TTTOuevot, ro^a 6' af icat aXXorre Trapafyepouevoi : Plat. Phaedr. p. 265. (360. Bip.) So de Rep. v. p. 451. See Hesych.

To

expressed by
VOIVTO

the conjecture indicated by T&XCI, a supposition of chance, et rvyoi, or et ovrw T^\OI, is very congruously added :

us, ra^tt av, et ry^otey, ffwfypoveaTepoi Trpos TO XotTrov TOV vpovov ye: Demosth. pro Rhod. Libert, p. 79. o per yap Trepl Trdvra (or iravTasI) abiKOs, ra^ ay, ei ru^ot, Kai rouro)' ffbiKet I Id. pro Phorm.

p. 607. [p. 961. 1. 15. ed. Reisk.] VI. Ta^' a " * ffw s> is> it may
5'

ay

'iffias

very probably be perhaps, that: rd^a TOVTO (ovoua} per yap Aristoph. Vesp. 1147. tows Kat 6 KaTOiKtafJus avrjys, ?/ n$ TOTTOS, rj TroTajjiov TWOS, rf Qe&v eTrwvvpla TWV kv T<jj TOTTW Trpoadeiij T)JV aurwf (p^/jiTjv rj
OVK eOeXoi
:

yevofj.vri ry iroXet

VII.
fjievos

The same may

KaXXos:

Plat, de Legg. iv. in princip. be said of ra^a vov: ra^a TTOV TO aov
:

ntSoi/-

Aristaenet.

ep. x. p. 60.
:

where however
br)

irov

mav
>'/

signify place. Kai a(})tXoa6(f)b),

With av interposed
<f>iXoTtfj,<t)

ear be

b& xpTivwvTcti,

ra^'

Stairy tyopTiKwrepa. re a ^ TTOV kv jueQats, rtiu

aXXrj u/jieXeia T<5 aKoXaoro) aurol^ V7rovyiw XaflovTe ras \^v\as afypovpovs\ &c. Plat. Pha3(lr. p. 256. (p. 342. ed. Bip.) Here rd^a is either

probably, or rather quickly, for Ta^eus, and

TTOU

perhaps.

Te has a copulative power, signifying, and. the copulative word is to be repeated with variation, re is usually put in the preceding clause, and KCU in the following; as, 'ArpetSa/ re Kal aXXoi evKvfj/jiibes 'A^atoi' : Iliad, a, 17. fiovXopai re Kal See also Plat. Theaet. p. 150. init. exofiat: Plat. Phaedr. p. 278. (p. 64. ed. Bip.) Parmen. p. 151. init. In poetry there are innumerable passages in which re is III.
1.

TE. -II.

When

repeated

I0i avacraeis

g. KiXXuv re ZaOerjv, Teveboio re prose such a repetition is not very See an example in Plat. Phaedr. p. 248. (p. 324. ed. Bip.) frequent. IV. Sometimes a subdivided member of a sentence is connected with a preceding member by mt, and its subdivisions are connected by re and another ^a), some other word intervening between the first

even
:

without Kal

e.

Iliad, a, 38.

In

Kal

: brrXtTuiv be^afjiei'bjVj vire^prjffai TraXiv' Kal thus, rwi> b (ivbpes Tt Tires uireQavov ai/rwv oXtyoi, Kal OTrXa eXi'ifyQrj I Thucyd. iv,
1

and re

56. Here the former part vn-e^wp^ffav is connected with the latter, as cause with effect, by the first KOI, and the effect being twofold, its divisions are again connected by re and the second Kai. So, aipovai TIJV QvpeaVj KUI ri]V re iru\iv KaTeKavaav, KUI TO. kvvvra. t'^eTropdrjaar I Id. iv, 57. In the same manner in Latin que is repeated after et. See Virg. jEn. v. 619.

V. Te seems to be superadditory in
TrnreiOr)Tat,

ua\a

eKXvov aurov

gods, they too in return

a

pay
;

os Ke Oeo~is a, 218. 218. if a man obey the great regard to his prayers." [In Aris-

Iliad,

Iliad, a,

Weiske

translates the sentence

Qui

diis obtempcratj illius preces vcl

maxitne

rntas habere soknt. J.S,

Pleonasm. Gra>c.

182

TE.

toph. Ach. 598. the true reading is KoKMytt ye, not re, as Hoogeveen quotes.] VI. When re and KO\ are joined in the same clause or member, re is copulative and KCU superadditory : TO be r' wica KaTij36fjievov KeXa""poaXeT, (j>davei be re xat ro> &yovra : Iliad. (f>, 262. pvet X^PV [See note*w on p. 191. of the Abr. of Vig.] VII. Te follows the relative os, involving an ellipsis : OVTCOT ofiotrjs

^
;

%HfjLOpe Ttn^s aKYiitTovyos fiafftXevs,

re Zevs

Kvbos ebwicev

Iliad,

a,

279.

<z

king

and such a king

r'

too as one to
:

whom

Kelrat avfjp, ov

laov eriopev "E/cropt biy

II. e,

Jupiter, &c. 4>6f. and such a

So,

man

[See Abr. of Vig. p. 191. 1. 29.] s V VIII. So ol6s re with another word intervening : IX<*>P> ^P T Iliad, e, 340. peet paicapefffft deolatv IX. Olds re, signifying able, ready, willing, is an elliptical expression, in which olos is correlative with ro?os or rotovros expressed or understood : o{/^ olds re elpt Xa\e7^ is for O&K etfil TOIOVTOS, olos o jjieXXwv, or bwapevos, or flovX6fjievos, Xa\e7v. The ellipsis is partly supplied by Theophrastus : 6 bi XaXos TOIOVTOS TLS, olos T$ evTvy-^a.VQVTL eiitelv, &c. Charact. [c. vii. p. 39. 1.3. ed. Simps. Oxon. 1738.] where it signifies readiness, inclination : as it does in Plat. Phaedr. The particle re, which is almost always p. 256. (p. 341. ed. Bip.) annexed to olos in this use, [see Abr. of Vig. p. 44.] serves to connect rolos or rotovros with olos, and thus to make the structure of the sentence fuller ; for that teal may here be employed instead of re appears from the following passage : ap' ov TavrA re (for rai/ra, Tviavra might have been used) XeKreov, icai ola avrovs Troiijaai fJKitfra Plat, de Rep. iii. itiit. (p. 26l. ed. Bip.) for rbvQa.va.Tov beblevat rctvra, or romra, icai ola. jj-eXXovra avrovs iroirjffai, &c. [See Abr. of

too as, &c.

Vig. p. 44;

1.

1?.]
:

X. To 6'ffos also re is annexed fioOpov opv^a offov Te irvyovaiov : Odyss. X, 25. a pit, and one too of the measure of, &c. [Abr. of
1.

Vig. p." 47.

15.]
OTTOV,
is

XI. I. "Eyfla too, put for

:

among
icar'

take re after them

><rrpe0erat
:

flaXev Alveiao

ttr^iov,

the relative words which evda re prjpos iff\iy

XII.
v,

And

'iva,
njf

Iliad, e, 305. for e/3aXei', xal %(3aXev eKel, oirov, &c. in its signification of place: 'iva re tyveyovai tevov-

res aynuvos,

TOV ye

tyiXrjs

bta.

)(ipos eneiQEV al^jj.^ xaXiceir)

l

Iliad.

478. XIII.

And

Iliad, e, 500.

for

ore: avbpSjv Xtfyiwvrwy, ore re ai'0j) A^jur/riyp Kpivetl avbp&v Xi/c^uoj^rwv, Kal rdre Xtfc/u^vrwv, ore, &c.
:

XIV. And
Iliad,
t,

wcrei

/cat

pe ^/X^o ',

wcrei

Te

Trar^p

ov iraiba ^tXrjarj

477.
eTrei
:

^.Kvdas yap, eTre/ re <r0t Aapelor ecrfiaXelv es r?)j/ raOra pe/uovevai fjnv TiaaoQai Herodot. vi. 84. [On the effect of re subjoined to relative and other words, see Abr. of Vig. p. 191. 1. 28.]

XV. And

X&pav,

p-eTo.

XVI. Nor do
them, but
:

relative

all

words, which
:

foregoing ones

words only, properly so called, take re after in continued construction depend on thus, 'AXefavbpos yap, es re pev (j>dos ^vt ava Kparos
11.
i,

Arrian.

ii,

e.

e&Wep,

cat is TOCFOV

^/wicev,

o<f>aos%v.

TOT.

183

XVII. The effect of re in yap re (which answers to the Latin namque} may be understood by referring to what has been said under Kal yap SetSiores* /zuXa yap re icare<70/et, oy KG Xafiyffiv : Iliad. 0,24. XVIII. Ae and re conjoined signify, but moreover, or, and truly: ris, iroQev els avbp&v, o jj.ev erXrjs avrios eX0e7v bvarrivuv be re iralbes
:

fjy fj,evei avTwwcri

Iliad. 0, 151.

viiii

be

but we returned,

and

that too instantly.

is,

ib. 456. [See Abr. of Vig. p. 192.

r'

avpoppot Kiofjiev

XIX. For
and
re

the case

that be explains what

is last,

or nearest to
:

it,

connects that explication with what has preceded rw fiaXev Atvetao Kar' ioyjiov, evQa. re jjirjpos lo\ito crarpe^erai' KOTV\TI>> be re ptv KaXeovfft Iliad, e, 306. XX. In these and the like passages fj.ev or /ue> re may be understood before be re : /*e'i> re is expressed in Iliad, e, 139 0> 260. XXI. In the conclusions of a protasis and apodosis be re repeated has a pleasing correspondence : thus in the passage last referred to, the protasis ends with $0avet 5e re cat rov ayovra then follows the apodosis of the simile ; ws atet 'A)<X?7a Ki^jjcraTo Kv^a pooio, Kal Xat-fyripov eovra' 6eol be re ^eprepot avbpwv : the gods to wit are more mighty than men. XXII. Kcu re is put for /cat be, and has a superadditory sense, and also, and moreover : ec KaKov eadXov eyevero, Kal KUKOV e^ ayadov* Ka Ire Trevf^pos avflp al^/o /^aX' eTrXoi/n/o-e : Theogn. 662. So 138.
: :

1. Tot has nearly the same signification as rov'rw, or r on this account, therefore, wherefore ; in reality. Homer uses TO) where he might have used ro<, in the sense of therefore ; II. /3, 354. Its power therefore is confirmative, and founded on something foregoing thus rot for ry oVrt, in reality, in truth : ev rot Xeyeis

TOI.-

Aristoph. Pac. 933. II. Tot agrees with ^IJTOL in being usually accompanied by other it is alone however in Synes. Epist. 126. ot/uor rt 6' difjioi ; particles
OvrjTa rot TreTTovflajuej/, truly. III. Toiyao is to be considered as three distinct particles,
sisting of ye

yap con-

'AxtXev, /ceXeat p.e, Ad^/Xe, juv0//<raff0at ^ijviv From the proposal '\Tr6\\wvos rotyap eywv epew : Iliad, a, 76. just before made by Achilles to consult a soothsayer, Calchas, whose words these are, infers or collects that he himself is called on to speak :
fi

and apa.

this inference is

marked by apa

latent in yap.

Then

rot

concludes

speak. Lastly ye limits the conclusion, by selecting from the many causes or motives which might prompt him to speak, that one alone, the command of Achilles.
because

you order me,

therefore

iv ill

Totyap however

is usually and rightly rendered therefore, simply. IV. ToiyapoCi> is consequently to be considered as four particles; of which apa collects or concludes ; rot supplies matter of reasoning or argument, which ye limits ; and lastly olv applies the argumenToiyapouy eawtation, so limited, to the point under consideration. ZOVTO fjiev (the kings of the Lacedaemonians, because they had a be perpetual command of the fleet) TroXe/iov^res, ttTrwXXvyro

184

TOI.
Aristot. de

&ia TO uri erriffTaffdai ff'^oXa^eiv, /ZTjSe ^ffKrjKevai

Kvpi<*>Tpav

Tijs

TcoXeuiKfjs

Rep.

ii,

9-

fujceuiav uffKrjfftv ertpav <*nd on this account

truly*-;

or, this

being

so,

latent iu yap,

may denote

(or from that cause) came V. Effect is manifestly denoted,

it follows therefore that, &c. Or apa, effect: therefore, this being so, it thence to pass, that, &c.

when the consequence

consists of

a fact, or

Thus

a thing is proved not hy argumentation, hut by a fact. Lycurgus, after mentioning the severe punishment inflicted by

when

the Athenians on one who had been sent by Xerxes to demand earth and water of them, subjoins, Totyapovv romvrais ^(/pwuevot yv&uats
evvevrjKOVTa pev err) TWV 'E,\\r]vuv fiyeuoves Karearrjaav : adv. Leocr. So in c. 27. ov yap c. 17. therefore the effect of this was, that, &c.
TTJV apSTijv eTren/Sevor, dXX' epya) irdffiv cirebeiKVVVTO. TOtyapovv ovnas -fjaav avbpes ffirovoalot tuore, &C. VI. This particle^ is used by those who excite themselves to action, urged by some argument or reason : thus Demosthenes, after saying that the Athenians neglected the arrangements and preparations for

Xoyw

war, adds,
Philipp.
i.

rotyapovv aua
p.
18. [p.

50.

1.

aKTjKoauev TI, Kal Tptrjpap^ovs KaBlaTauev : 18. ed. Reisk.] [This alleged use is

another instance of the more than Lynceau faculty of Hoogeveen.] VII. Hence it is extremely well suited to serious exhortations; the second person of the imperative mood, or the first person plural of
the subjunctive, following
vj3piei,

a\\a

TO
?/

boypa TO
ai\

ere res, 'iffdi

on

as, fjteuvrjffo, on oi>% o \otbopwv f/ TVTTTMV TOVTWV, os vflpt6vTit>v. OTO.V ovv epeOtarj ae vTTO\r)\^ts ijpedure. roiyapovv kv Trp&TOts Tretpw
it
:

irepl

VTTO Ttjs <f>avTaaias

povv

Kal

iijjLeis-

VIII. "Apa
fifjas

TotyaavvapitaaQiivai I Epict. Ench. c. 27 ^u>) rpe^w^uev TOV TrpoKeifJievov f]fj.1v ay wv a : Hebr. xii, 1. and o\>v may sometimes refer to different things : ov yap 6 Qeos enl aKaOapffta, aXV kv ayiaapw. rotyapovv 6

Here wv, OVK at'dpuTrov aderei, dXXa TOV 0edv. [l Thessal. iv, 8.] apa collects : if God hath called us not to uncleanness, out to holiness, hence it follows that he that despiseth, despiseth not man, but

God: and as two things are opposed, the one negatively, OVK: av6pu)nov, the other affirmatively, dXXa Qeov, ovv adheres to that which is affirmed, and strengthens the affirmation by its confirmative sense ; a sense arising from its conclusive power ; for if he does not despise
call him, then by consequence it is God, who did him, that he despises. IX. Totyapovv is usually placed first, but not always : eppuftevos <re Totyapovv, <o Toiyapovv VTTO TWV irorwv : Lucian. Timon. c. 37 Ai/o-Trapt, OVK d0/7<7w : Id. Dial. Mort. xix. X. Totydprot is used in serious confirmation : apa collects or concludes; TOI supplies matter for argumentation, which ye restricts; and the last roi confirms all. Socrates had refuted an adverse opinion by a ludicrous argument; and Callicles had said, ws arotros Socrates answers: Toiyaproi, el, <3 Zwtfpares, Kal aTey^vws brjurjyopos. (in truth it is just so, and in consequence} <5 KaXXkXets, OwXov /uev Kal Topyiav KUI e^7rX^|a, Kal alayyveaQai 7rolr]ffa. av 6e ov uij ec*

man, who did not

call

ifXayrjs, ovbe pri alffxyvdys:

'

Plat.

Gorg.

p.

494.

(p. 103. ed. Bip.)

XI.

Toifvv

is

not placed

first,

as Toiyapovv

and rotydprot are

TOI.
rot retains its

185

signification of therefore, and vvv has an obscure signi-

fication of time.

XII. The first use of roivvv is inceptive, in commencement of a subject after something prefatory: thus, ovrw<rt roivvv, c5 TTCU KaXe, vv6rjt7ov, os 6 fj.ev irporepos ?jv Xoyos Qaibpov, &c. wherefore now, &c. Plato Phaedr. p. 243. (p. 315. ed. Bip.) So, apen) be TIS TOV ayaQov, Then he begins the account rj KUKOV KCIK/CI, ov bieiTTOfjiev' vvv be XcKreov. thus, 6 juev roivvv avTolv ev rrj KaXXiovi aractei wV, TO re elbos 6p66s KOI / In dialogues btrjpOpvpevos, vi//avx r/ > &c. ib. p. 253. (336. Bip.) also it is inceptive, when one begins a recital at the desire of another : the first passage from Plato is one example; another is in Aristoph.
fj.vd'jvs.

Vesp. 1175. [1185. ed. Br.] where Bdelycleo having said, ^rj "poiye aXXa TUIV at>6p(t)7riv<i)v olovs Xeyopev /udXt<rra rfov car' oiKiav Philocles replies, eyyba TOIVVV TWV ye iravv KO.T' olKiav eKeliov, ws ovrat
:

Tror'

t'iv fjLvs

KO.I

yaXj/.

Lucian Toivvv, as an inceptive particle, resembles ovv. 6 roivvv "Iwv, IT/uwros ovv accordingly interchanges them ap^o/iai, el boKel: e<f>r), Lapith. c. 39. Ovv however has no signification of
:

XIII.

Thus

time, as roivvv has.

XIV. Its second use is continuative ; when, part of a narration thus, having been already despatched, the main point is entered on
:

c0' eavrov TOIVVV o XaptTwv fiaXXopevos TO ^Elian. V. H. ii, 4. TOV Tvpavvov

'.

TTO.V

ToXfjirjfAa,

utpfjiaTO

CTTC

XV. Its third use is transitive ; in which it concludes a preceding In this part, to prepare a convenient transition to a following one. use it is equivalent to /uei> ovv. Aristotle de Rep. i. divides the art of gain into two kinds, the natural and the artificial : he concludes his account of the former, and with it the eighth chapter, thus : on pev
roivvv
bt fjv alriav, brj\ov

earl KTrjTtKrj Kara. Qvfftv TO!S otKovoftois, /cat ro7s TroXtm'oTs, KCU : and passes to the artificial kind with the follow:

eort be yevos aXXo KTTjTtKfjs. ing words, which begin the ninth chapter It is especially used in transition from thesis to hypothesis, from a general question, or common place, to a particular case: thus Demosthenes applies to ./Eschines his distinction between accusation and abuse, raura TOIVVV eibus Alff\ivrjs ovbev ^TTOV epov, iro^ireveiv avTt TOV KaTTjyopelv etXeTO : pro Cor. p. 330. [p. 268. I. 24. ed.

Reisk.]

XVI. Its fourth use is conclusive ; and that either simply, or with 1. St. Paul concludes a comparison beinference from premises. tween the Christian life and a contest for victory in a race and other ' public games, with these words, eyw TOIVVV ovrw rpex w w s OVK cibrfXtas' ovTd) irvKTevw, ws OVK aepa bepwv : I therefore so run, &c. 1 Cor. ix, 26. and Lucian thus concludes his book entitled Adversus Indoctum, &c. Ka\ av TOIVVV ctXXw berjdevTi ^{jcretas av TO. (3i(3\ia t 2. With inference from premises, Xp77<ra<r0cu 6' avros OVK av bvvato.in the same manner as apa : Cario having been informed that one in arroXXvrai : distress was a very bad man, vrj A/a, KaXws TOIVVV
says,

Aristoph. Plut.

86*4.

XVII.
time

Its fifth use is

in vvv.

Hoog.

hortatory ; arising from the signification of See on &), p. 43. also on vvv and vvv ovv. In this use 2 A

186
it is

1C.

commonly construed with the imperative mood, as, ro5e Plat, de Rep. vi. p. 485. (p. 71 e d. Bip.) yuera rovro aicovei roivvv, us iepov ^pfjfj.a avpflovXtf : Lucian. adv. Indoct. c. 25. where It has the same use there is a sense of eagerness and impatience. and force with the first person plural, when one incites himself and ' Hehr. xiii, others : roivvv i^ep-^otfjieQa irpos avrov ew Tfjs irapejjfioXfjs of in where the unusualness of situation the first place, the 13. rniwv, adds to the vehemence of the exhortation. When /) is added, it reverses the signification of the phrase, making it prohibitive: Kut roivvv /u?) rcc fleojjOj/yuara rols Ibiwrats cirtbeliervG : Epict. Enchir. erv
:

.69.

To
cited

its

hortatory use pertains that,

in
is

by the exhortation of another,

which one, who has been exrepresented as setting about

something with alacrity

Qrjs

ri thus when Socrates has said, Xeye : 17, ctvat TO oaiov, Kal ri TO avofftov, Euthyphro replies, Xeyw TOIVVV, vrt TO nev o'yiov, &c. Plat. Euthyphr. p. 5. well then.

XVIII. The sixth use is in exclamation when one is struck with something new, strange, atrocious, &c. In this use rot is confirmative, and vvv has its signification of time thus Trygaeus, Tavra roivvv,
;
:

pa TOV 'A?ro\Xw, *yw

Br.] q. d. any one.

ireTrvvprjv ov&evos

Aristoph. Pac. 6l4. [6l5

this

now

in truth

I must confess I have not heard

from

XIX. Its seventh use is in the assumption, or minor proposition, of syllogisms. This use is derived from its continuative one ; for here An example is in the it continues the process of argumentation. the major proposition amounts to this, Cyropa3dia of Xenophon those who lead the soldiers into bad practices, are to be removed: KOI roivvv, ?}i> /uev rives /3\ajte/? Kal then follows the assumption
: ;

curovotq. juovov KaKOt

eyii) vofii^w, utcnrep Krjtyijvas, bairavri fiovov ^rj^Lovv TOVS KOCVWVOVS' 01 & av TUP pev irovw KO.K.OL uai Kotvwvol, Trpos be TO TrXeoveKTeiv fffyo&pol Kal a.vatff^yvTOi t OVTOI Kal ijyepoviKoi elffi Then the conclusion : afore iravTcnraaiv e^atpereot ot vrpbs TO. irovrjpa.

&ai t TOVTOVS

TutovToi

as a\Xa

In this use it performs the same office 2, 25. English word is but, or now. XX. Sometimes, rot being confirmative, the signification of time in wv is urged with great emphasis by the restrictive particle ye.
f]fji~iv

elffiv, ii,

\j-i\v.

The

q. d. if at tyavw Tabi

TO. ^otpibia roivvv y'eyw' time, now certainly at least. Aristoph. Ach. 819 for e'i Trore, aXXa rotvvvye* [Fedoes uot appear in Brunck's edition.]

any

ill.
I.

OF THE PARTICLE

ft2

WHEN UNCONNECTED WITH

with regard to power, ; in the same manner as : thus

OTHERS.
I. 'fls is,

with regard to order, prepositive

It signifies as relatively
:
;

comparative.
it is

correlative with ovrws

1

r/

Thessal.

v. 2.

On

o5$ KXeTrnjs, OVTWS epiifjicpa Kvp/ov, the contrary ovrw often precedes : 01'-

fir. Sen-ore ovrws tXdtX^ffev avQpwiros

is?
:

ws OVTOS b uvBptairos

St.

John

vii,

46.

put in oblique construction also for TT&S, how, in what eOeuyavTo ro fj.vr]fjie1ov t KOI <Js tre0/ ro awfjta avrov : St. Luke xxiii, 55. See also xxiv, 35. III. "Efl-nj> ws is properly Mere is how: but it is rendered, in some manner, in a certain manner. [Abr. of Vig. p. 212. 1. 1.] So, eariv ore, sometimes ; ecrriv UTTOV, somewhere ; eanv ol, some men, which
II. 'fts is
:

manner

are elliptical expressions, for

afdpu-TTOt
o'l.

earn

yp ovos

e<m

TOTTOS

OTTOV,

da\v

IV. When Js denotes similitude most fully, it is found without a This use is twofold: 1. protasis; which however is understood. when it denotes real conformity, and is rendered utpote: thus in the Phoenissae of Eurip. the attendant of Antigone says to her, wait while I look out, lest any of the citizens should be in the streets, aol &', us K$/jtol jjiev eXOoi QavXos, ws bovXa), $6yos, cLvaacrj. v. 04. [Absolute identity, not merely conformity or similitude, is here signified : Antigone was actually a princess, and her attendant actually a slave : in those characters or relations they are considered ; to me, as, or as being, a slave ; to you as a princess. Hoogeveen himself
<3s

remarks that Hesychius explains it oi/rws.] i\v yap libauKuv avTovs, Matlh. vii, 29* as one having authority. 2. when efrvalav e"%<av it signifies feigned or unreal conformity [when resemblance or proor when semblance only bability, rather than actuality, is affirmed is denoted :] thus, Lysias appears, says Socrates, b\s Kal rpls TO. uvra
'.

itarv eviropuv TOV TroXXa Xeyeiv Trcpl TOV avrov Plat. Phsedr. p. 235. (p. 296. ed. Bip.) as though; as if. See Acts xxiii, 15. where a feigned motive is held out instead of the real one. When <Js in this sense is construed with a verb instead of a parjs, tfyv avrols ra ev ticiple, the verb is put in the optative mood as if, &c. 2t*ceX/et KaTCHTTptyaafiai, Swpots Treiodevres aTro^wptiffeiav Thucyd. iv, 65. When a negative precedes Jr, a feigned conformity is not affirmed, but a false one denied rjvayKatrQrjv eirtKaXeaaaBcu.
eiprjKevai, oJs ov
: : :
:

Kaiaapa, ov% tas TOV edvovs pov e%wv TL KaTyyoprjaai Acts xxviii, lp. V. When a comparison is instituted between two things, of which ov yap one exceeds the other, ws is used after ov-ws with a negation X W 'y w 7 e ovbev OVTW pot evapyes ov, ws TOVTO: Plat. Phaed. p. 77. or without ourw, the order of the things compared being reversed :
:
:

<Js erepos ovbels avfjp: Aristoph. Vesp. 150. \apirwv e'///, /TLlian. V. atyBoviav el-^ev (Aspasia) ws OVK aXXij TrapOcvos T&V TOTE: H. xii, ]. In the following there is comparison with limitation:

aOXios y

Tv<f>Xos

Avyxevs

eKeivos ws irpos eyue

Lucian. not simply blind, but

VI. hen one is compared with himself, there is limitation either with respect to age, as fiiKpos ye ws TOGOVTWV eroii>, Athenaeus : little, for one so many years old: or with respect to the ability, genius, &c. of his nation, as, i\v bk ovKo.bvva.Tos y <Js AaKebaipovios, e/Veir : Thucyd. a Lacedaemonian; i. e. if compared with the rest of the iv, 84.

blind, in comparison T

with me.

for Lacedaemonians

or with respect to such adjuncts as power and

l tat pi evbtbvrai, as strength, as, <Js e/c TWV virapypvTwv, eboKci xP f 1. i. e. ovw$ ^t} h' to the utmost viii, as, of: Thucyd.

far

18S

ft.
to habit or custom, with

&c. or with respect

which something

is

contrasted, as, 6\^/e yovv aveffr^Kaai vvv, oJs OLTTO pkawv VVKTWV trapaKaXOVVTCS fjC aei : Aristoph. Vesp. 28. [as being in the constant habit, or, for men who are in the constant habit, of calling on me to come out, in the middle of the night ; 218. ed. Brunck. where there is a
full

stop after vvv, and TrapaKaXovffiv y for irapaKa\ovvT6s p. M* indeed, in the mouth of Bdelycleo, is quite inconsistent with the circumstances of the story.] VI f. 'fts signifies proportion in, ware ov jue7oi> ?* ireZtiv (f>6vos ev rrf T&V Inirewit eyiyve-o, Arrian. Exp. Al. ii, 11. Tlie meaning is, <}>vyrj that the slaughter was not less, in proportion to their respective numbers. So with an infinitive mood rovs TroXe^u/ovs eyw crcuptis tStwras cWas, <Js Trpos Tjfjuds ayuviaraodat : Xen. t7r/<rrayuac avros ibcjv Cyrop. i. 5, 1 1. to cope with us ; if opposed to us in battle. VIII. Another use of ws is augmentative or intensive ; in which it is usually prefixed to superlatives, as ws /idXiora, as much as possible :
:

Ta^irrra (or wara-^itjTa, Thucyd. vii, 60.) as quickly as possible: Eurip. Med. 322. Acts xvii, 15. elliplically for OVTWS ws bwarbv rn\iara. [See Abr. of Vig. p. 209. ! !] The ellipsis is sometimes Xen. partly supplied, as, fcarera^ev u>$ ebvt'aro JcaXXtitrra re /cat aptara ws olov re /uaXtora Ka\6v re mat ayaQov : Plat. Phsed. Cyrop. iii, 3, 1 So, w$ eVt /uaXtara, ws ^VVCLTOV KaXXtara. p. 77 IX. In ws on, the most ancient authors probably wrote o, n: of ffntvoTTOiot efrXaaav avrov, ws on K&XXtarra efaiK&ffavTes ^Elian. V. H. ii, 13. i.e. ej-fucaffavres ovrws, ws o rt e^etica^erat KaXXiarra. X. Its augmentative force is less intense, when it is joined with words in the positive degree : evpfaet rovs ws aXr}da>s btKaoTas : Plat. Apol. Socr. p. 41. those who are really judges, for ovrw biKaaras ovras, MS aXrjdws ovopa^oi a.v ris, or &s TIS av orofjta^wv, aXrjd&s ovous aXrjO&s TroXv Kpartaruv can. : Plat. Pha3dr. p. 228. fid5oe. 'Efj.ol a (p. 283. ed. Bip.) ^t'Xraros el, nal ws aXr)Qws ^pvffovs : ib. p. 235. XI. From its relation to words having the nature of superlatives, it is naturally suited to exclamation: ws avrUa /uaXa rovs yvadovs aXytfffere, how, &c. Aristoph. Pac. 236. [237. Br.] See 242. 245. 247. 249. 256. of joy, Aristoph. Ach. 7. grief and lamentation, Eurip. Med. 328, 330*. fear, Aristoph. Vesp. 425. [427. ed. Br.] [In Aristoph. Vesp. 434. (436. ed. Br.) ws is not used in exclamation, but signifies for.] admiration, Aristoph. Vesp. 1266. [1275. ed. Br.] XII. Allied to this is its use in epiphonema. See Eurip. Phoeniss. 526. So Socrates, after asking for assistance against Alcibiades, adds,
tus
: 1 . :

ws

eyiii ri]v TOVTOV HCLVIO.V re Kal (piXepaaTtav TTO.VV oppwbut : Plat. Sympos. p. 213. (p. 253. ed. Bip.) XIII. From the two last uses springs another, in which it is optative, or, with negation, deprecatory ; and that with emphasis and exclamation. This is especially manifest, when it is joined with &(peXov, the poetical form #</>eXXo>, or that without the augment o<f>eXov : &(f>eXe,

ots irplv

otyeXXov oXeardai

764.

literally,

I wish I had perished before! Iliad, w, how I ought to have perished before ! When ws
I

When &s is thus joined with the

positive degree,

Weiske renders it by prorsus.

J.S.

fl2.
&<J>e\e

189

occurs parenthetically, or at the end of a sentence, an infinitive mood, assumed from the context, is to be understood with it: as, ov yap irov Kal aQavaaiav (ws cltyeXe) eTrayyeXXercu : Heliodor. viii,
11.

an optative mood : ws epis a, 107. [but the meaning is very different. See the observations of Professor Hermann in the Abr. of Vig. p. 92.] And on the other hand os is omitted, and #0eXo> or otieXov put alone. Perhaps there is no more than one example of &<f>e\e construed with an indicative mood ; viz. w0eXe p.r)fr eyevovro

absence of &(j>e\ov is supplied by K re Qe&v, CK r* ayBptantav airuXotTo : Iliad,

The

Callim. Epigr. xviii. signifying number, ws may be rendered nearly, aoout oTrXIrcu T&V Mecrffrjvitav TOVTWV MS TeoffapaKOvra eyevovro i Thucyd. iv, 9 rpe^dfievot ebiwKov ws rpla r) rerrapa trraSta : Xen. Hist. Gr. vii. p. 617. This use may be termed conjectural. XV. To its conjectural use, rather than its causal, (which will be hereafter mentioned) is to be referred the phrase ws eiVe7i>, so to speak; as it were ; an expression by which some approximation to truth, rather than the very trutli itself, is indicated : bta TOVTOV trdXtv
:

Ooal fees

XIV. With words

."

apvbpws, as etTreli/, KOI Xavdavovrws avaKaXeaaaBai /3ouXerai rrfv aTrdI the same <paaii> : Chrysost. Homi!. xxi. in Genes, v. p. 237sense us ewos cltrtii : avrw yap rovrw (as GTTOS eiireiv) yepovre OVTC
1

ravrrjs rfjs ffofyias ^p^dadrjv

Plat.
is

the phrase ws eTrlirav, and ws Toeiriirav, i. e. ws eTriroTrXeloroi', Hesych./or the most part : signifying not, always, but almost always, or usually: ry be ev fiov\r)6evri Trpriypan

XVI. Of the same

Euthyd.

p. 272.

See Hebr.

vii,

p.

nature

reXevrj) ws roeirtTrav \pr}<rr^ ede\et eTrtyiveadr.i : Herodot. vii. c. For this Aristotle says ws eTrtroTroXw etTrelv : Hist. Anini. vi, 14.

157

XVII. Another

signification of

o>$ is

in order that t to the

end that;

1.

With the

that of the final cause ; that, aor. 1. subjunctive,

Aeov, yepovra rv^Xov os Kara oreyas e\0ovcra rep^/w : Eurip. Phceniss. 1095. 2. With the 2 aor. subj. TraVrwv npos aarujv (el\i(ra6pe6a\ as 6dv(o: Eurip. Orest. 446". [440. ed. Pors.] But the 2 aor. is for the most part used only when there is no first, as after OTTWS. (SeeoTrws, ii.)
In
its construction with the optative mood, ai> in its potential sense seems to be usually suppressed thus, Trapa TOV Tavpov ejre/xTrero, a o Taupos TijjiwpfiffatTo 3. With the future of the indiPalaeph. c. 7. cative, as OTTWS, the future taking away so much from the act of the verb as there is time between the cause and its effect, OVTCJS being commonly understood in the preceding clause or member, but some: :

times added

as, r//uas

yu??

ourw

vovfleVet, ws,

ai>

yewpyos yewpyos eorat, ovre 420. (p. 328. ed. Bip.)

:

6 /cepa^uevs fcepajueus:

vot TretdwpeOa, ovre 6 Plat, de Rep. iv. p.

XVIII. Mr) following it with an infinitive mood brings a great accession of emphasis thus, ofy Se anl ovbe eyyvs yevevdai TCOT av KaTrjtywerav (at Movo-at), dXX' avrl bdtyvrjs jj.vppivrj at>, ij Kai paXdxrjs
<f>v\\ots fj,a<TTiyovffat t

air^\\a^av av r&v rotoyrwv, u/s fj.ii fj.ta.vai /i^/re TOV 'tinrov Kpyvrji' : Lucian. adv. Indoct. c. 3. [p. 538. D. ed. Salmur.] to prevent your polluting; that you might not pollute, &c.

TOV

bXfjLeiov,

ftj/re

TT)V

XIX. 'fls rt, why, is an expression resembling JW re anil OTTWS r( ; [See Abr. of Vig. p. 206. 1. 24. and Weiske, Pleonasm. Gr. in "Iva, 3.] ws rt // toropets robe Eurip. Phoeniss. 624. for ws rt w^eXqft;*, roSe ; It is never construed with an indicative, except of /z' larTopels
;

the future.

XX.
iii,

A>) is

sometimes added,

in the

to denote eagerness for information iropevcrov Trarpos. Pyl. ws rt 5?/ roSe ; Or.
1.

sense treated of, p. 43. ii, 1 . and Orest. irai yue npbs Tvpfiov
:

<5s

vty

iKerevirw /ue

auxrai

Eurip. Orest. 794. [786. ed. Pors.] XXT. 'Hs signifies e/fec also, having an infinitive mood after it, and before it, in the protasis, either OVTM, as, ovrw j) Karefrrpe^ev ^ ru^i; ravra, ws rayayrta yej'e<r0at rols 7rpoaboK(t)jjivots : D inarch, adv. Dem. p. 96. or TOGOVTO, or the like; as, ra ^ei> ffweKriKTct T&V ?a/&;> Aristot. de Rep. i, 8. es roeroi/rov TOffavrrjv rpotyriv, ws 'IKCLVVIV et^at ^lian. V. H. xii, I, apfyolv ^ fylXia TrporjXdev, ws eyyvs tffori/jiias etvat
: :

XXII. Sometimes no such word precedes in the however contains the cause from which the effect

protasis
arises
:

which
ov/c
I

o!6'

oVws flpabvs dpi, Kal ^u)\os ayu^orepots, ws fjioXts reXelr CTTI TO reppa SO that; so as: Lucian. Timon. c. 20. peXybel iravv y\a<pvpbv Kal Id. Dial. Apoll. et Vulc. evappovinv, ws r^/ie avry <p6oviv XXIII. 'fts, like dJare, is, in its signification of effect, put before 1he imperative mood OVK ai> e: rwv Trapovrwv VT' turpoO Oepairevdijvat
:

//t'aet rore ais aStcov^ra t^Lie 31. So, or wherefore. XXIV. When what precedes contains matter for argument, rather than a cause, d>s assumes a collective or conclusive power thus ^Elian, after naming four Sibyls, says, to these, others add six, and then concludes, ws elmi rets Traaas 6e/ca. V. H. xii, 35. for elalv ovv

bvvairo'

ws, etye ciXXos TIS ttTraXXa^te,

c.

:,

Lucian. Abdic.

at Trdtrai 6efca.

sirnilitudinary

has also a causal signification. This is derived from its. power; for there is a constant congruity and similitude between things and their causes thus, vvv rjbij noie'tv epo\ ws a\r)dtis
'fts
:

XXV.

TTO\V KpCLTUJTOV
bafjitis

ffTlt>

OVTWS, O7TWS

frvVCLfJiCH,

X^yetV
:

(Us

fJLOL

boKe?S

(TV

0V-

pe d0/<ret',

irplv

ay

CITTW a//oayc7rws

Plat. Phsedr. p. 228. for*

:

The
for
it

similitudinary

power of ws may perhaps even here be retained

will discover itself in the following arrangement : <2s pot Sojcet* av ovba/ji&s //e a(piiaeiv, as you seem to me, &c. This is the protasis :
rjbrj

then the apodosis, oi/rw vvv

cart Xeyetv
:

iroieiv eyuot

w$ aXrjdws iroXv KpaTiarov

SO,

&c.

XXVI. So, eprjTwrov reKva ?etj'f/s afjiiXXrjs, ws 6 tdvbvvos peyas : Eurip. Phoeniss. 1267. An inversion of the order will show how the causal power arose out of the similitudinary : us o Kivbvves ovTU) av fprjTvaof, &c. XXVII. The case is the same with prohibitive sentences: rpevys rao-S', w$ Trapeio-' f]p~iv ^>/Xat Eurip. Orest. 1 104. XXVIII. fis,has a causal signification with a genitive case absolute also : Kal avros p.ei> 5^ irp&ros eavruv ev f.ieau) KarerideTO TOV orparoTre:
f

bov,

MS

ravrrjs

rijs

x^P as X y ow7"" ri s
l

ovcrrjs:

Xenoph. Cyrop.

viii,

5, 8.

because this place was the most secure.

XXIX. The

transition

from

its

comparative or similitudinary

sig-

ns.

191

This transition is nification to that of time is next to be treated of. not peculiar to the Greek language ; for in most others the words
of similitude and time are of kindred origin : thus; similis, simul, simulac, in Latin. Thus the Italians use come in both significations, the French comme, the Germans wie, [the English as.] In this sense <is originally and properly connected two events happening at the same time, and in that particular resembling each other. See St. John ii, 9- as soon as. XXX. This signification of contemporariness is especially to be noted when ws is repeated : os el', ws dfeTraXro : Horn. II. v t 424. us in reference probably to which, Hesychius explains us, evGews Iliad, r, 16. &s 'ibov, ws ejuavijv, UM pot eI6', &s fjiiv paXXov ebv ^oXos Theocrit. ii, 82. So, iii, 42. So, ut vidi, ut peril, ut nepi Ov/mbs la^drj me mains abstulit error: Virg. Eel. viii, 41. [It is impossible to preserve the idiom of these elegant morsels in any English translation.] XXXI. 'Hs, having once acquired a signification of time, began to
:
:

mean

simply, when : 6>s be ifXfle ro n-pwrov npbs Kvpov f) 'A<T7raa/a, : ws olv erv^e pev cnrb beiin>ov &v : Jilian. V. H. xii, 1. or after that elbev was ij ZavQiTnrri, &c. Piat. Pha3dr. p. 60. or the point of time since : irvaos jfjporos eortv, ws TOVTO at which any thing commenced yeyovev avrw ; 6 be etTre, HaibioOev St. Mark ix, 21. or the progress or duration of time ; whilst: wsbe^vev 'lepotroXvpois kv rw 7ra<rx a >
; :

ev
St.

rfj eoprijt

TTO\\OI eTriarevaav els TO

ovopa avrov

St.

John

ii,

32.

So

Luke

xii,

58.

writers, instead of a preposition

appears to be sometimes put, especially by Attic however that : it has been observed cs or eTTt, or TTPOS, is suppressed, and that ws is either redundant, or has an obscure signification : thus, nai fioi fiabiareov early ios Evpiws avrov 7r/r;j/, and I must go to Euripides: Aristoph. Ach. 393. TrapteVcu avr?)r, Lilian. V. H. xii, 1. See Aristoph. Plut. 89. Deraosth. 1. 16.] Philipp. i. [p. 54. 1. 6. ed. Reisk.] [Abr. of Vig. p. 210. XXXIII. The ellipsis of the preposition eyri is sometimes supplied : em/yev 'AXe^avbpos TOVS To6ras bpopy ws eirl TOV Trorapov Arrian.
'fts
:

XXXII.

i.

p. 15.

Trporrfjyev

ws

eirl

Aapetoy re KCU Tlepaas, Id.

1.

ii.

c. 6.

See

Acts

xvii, 14.

[Abr. of Vig. p. 210.

29. and Weiske, Pleonasm. Gr.

in ws,

6.]

Its last use is narrative; in which it may be rendered This use appears to be derived from its similitudinary or come. g. Xeyojres, ws parative use : for in those words of Demosthenes, Ke~ii>6s ye ov 7roXe/ue7 rrj TroXet. (Phil. iii. p. 45.) ws may perhaps bear the sense of in what manner, how. XXXV. Sometimes it is so used narratively, that it may at the same time be rendered, how, i. e. to what a degree: Kararouv be Kvpos, ws ev /iev avrw el^ov ra <ra/*ara ol arpanwrai irpbs TO bvyaadat OTpaTiwTiKovs TTOVOVS tyepeiv' ev be ras ^/v^as, &c. Xen. Cyrop.iii, 3, 9XXXVI. But the traces of the significations above mentioned are often so dubious, that they appear to be lost in the mere narrative and the like verbs: as, after sense;

XXXIV.

that.

especially

voju/c?w,

6/ioXoyw,

&s eu yua^ai Kpivovrai fj.a\\ov TOIS ^v^als Xen. Cyrop. iii, 3, 19aw/xarwv pupais
s

bfJioXoyovaiv,

i]

rais

192

ffi.

XXXVII. 'Hs is put for on also, when one speaks in the person of another, reciting his very words, just as they were spoken, in direct phraseology, and n<5t in oblique : as, 6'0' ovros, MS arr^XXay/zeu, irepiiwv
Demoslh. in Mid. p. 412. eXoyoiroiei, eybrjXoi rives %aav a^66fjieyoi where ws 7r/XXay/uai is said as in the person of Midias, the rest in that of Demosthenes himself. [Abr. of Vig. p. 209. r. x.] XXXVIII. 'Us takes an acute accent 1. when it follows the word with which it is construed, and is pronounced emphatically: as,
:

2. when it is put poXi&os MS, eTpcnrer alxw, like lead: Iliad. X, 237. MS ol pey troyeoyro. for OVTMS, thus : MS oye KOipayeMV bieire arparov. Horn, fully, they so labored as I have related. Ovbe &s t not even so, Thus MS and MS are correlative, like MS is common even in prose. and OVTMS : ens b', MS ij^aro yovvmv, MS e^er e/JLTre^wla l Iliad, a, 512. and in the same manner TMS and MS: prj p epede cr^erXir), fjirj ^Maaueyrj ae peOeiw, TMS be a aTre-^d^pM, MS vvv eKirayX' etyiXrjtra : Iliad.

7,415.
apodosis
Theocritus, inverting the usual order, has placed the with MS oxytoned, followed by ovrws and an optative mood ; so that there is an appearance of a double apodosis, without any protasis : $s per 6 Trals tyapti, KOI MjXaro, xat wXarayijae MS be Karefffjiv^drj (cat drerjoavtKijffas, OVTWS e/rt paT^pa veflpos aXotro.
first,

XXXIX.

Trero <j>peva XUTT^ a/repos, OVTUJ

Kal

for MS vcflpos aXotr av t * ay t MS 6 erepos

MS 6

vvp<f>a yapedeiff' aKQ^oirol itals e\dpr) Kal av^Xaro, ds

viii,

88.

II.

OF THE PARTICLES USUALLY JOINED WITH

112.

to MS affects, in some cases, only a following but in other cases it appears to affect MS by rendering its signification indefinite ; especially when that signification is of manner or time. Thus, MS av signifies, in whatever manner, with a subjunctive mood : fioqdovffiv iirl TO. cucpa, MS av emoros bvvrjTai : Xen.
I.

*Av subjoined

verb

it denotes proportion ; being put for ica0a, accordingly as ; in proportion as: MS av Troops, iravra-^pv yp^m-os y ear] : Soph. Aj. 1387. [l639. ed. Br.] t>polvi be Kal irepl TOVS a\\ovst tas av % Aristot. de Rep. i, 8. \jpela crvvavayKaffr) III. *A> very manifestly affects MS, and not a following verb, when, in recital of something past, it is construed with the imperfect : o'ibare, on edyrj fire, irpbs TO. etSwXa ra u(pMya, MS ay ijyeode, ctTrayopevot : 1 Cor. xii, 2. even as ye were led. IV. As MS is used for ore or ret, of certain time, so MS ay, for orav
:

Cyrop. iii, 2, 1. II. Sometimes

or eiray, of uncertain : TrpotrraVrei be rols ciairopevopevois, rt be? avrovs irately, MS ay eiffeXduatv els roy ftiovi whenever, as soon as: Ceb. Tab. p. 168. V. "Sis ye is, as at hast ; as far at least as, &c. rj Trjjyj) ^apteffrari/ VTTO Tfjs TrXarayov pel pdXa -^v^pov vbaros, MS ye rji irobl TKfjLrjpaffdai. : Plat. Phaedr. p. 230. (p. 286. ed. Bip.) When ye is separated from
ros, it

appears to

restrict the

word which

it

immediately follows, and

fil.
toot

153

ws

truth, the

thus to the question of Gobryas, whether he may speak the answer is, vi) At", os ^evbovs ye ovbejjia epwrTjorts belrat
:

Xen. Cyrop.

viii,

4,

13. q. d. OVTIVOS

av

JUT)

beofjievrj,

\^evbovs

oft

01 TO. VI. "Oc-Trep signifies just as ; precisely as: TU>V fjieXXovrw KadiCtjveadat vrcoaTtiavTes, ^ctipovai Kal yeXwatr, eiretbav 'ibwfTiv VTTTIOV avaTeTpaufjievov I Plat. Euthyd. p. 278. (p. 18. ed. Bip.)

oWep

And because ?rep signifies all the parts of a whole, whereas iravv denotes the whole simply, the meaning of uxnrfp, if considered with more nicety and exactness, will be found to be, in whatever manner you consider the things compared, they will be found alike in every part, in every particular. [But see Professor Hermann's account of irep in the Abr. of Vig. p. 157. 1. 7] As ws and ovrws, so &airep and oi/rws are correlative. See Rom. v. 19. When the apodosis with oi/rw follows at a great distance from the
protasis with tiairep, the latter particle, or ws

uncompounded,

is

re-

peated, with ovv, for the purpose of obviating obscurity. Thus in Rorn. V. the protasis in v. 12. tSanrep bi evos ai-Qpuirov / apaprta els TOV Kofffj.ov elafiXde, is separated from the apodosis by more than five it is introduced therefore in v. J8. verses by a repetition of the kind above mentioned apa ovv ws i' ei'os TrapaTrrw^uaros els Trarras av:

OpWTrovs, els KaTUKptfjia'

TTOUS, els biKaiiiHriv

ovrw

Kal bt evbs

tKcuw/^aros els Trdrraj

aiOpw:

(t)iis.

is to be assumed extraneously St. Matth. yap avdpwjros airobr)fjiu)V eKaXetre rovs Ibiovs bovXovs xxv, 14. This protasis is followed by no apodosis; one must therefore be understood such as, oy'rws eort TO. TTJS (3aat\eias TWV ovpavuv. Often OVTMS only is understood wo-Trep 0avctrw, ry KO.KW |3e/3Ai;/u^K?r,

Sometimes the whole apodosis

tioirep

Kal wffTrep

\frv\fis,

often,
TIS e%

when
PX^
S

*(&YfQTa kv TOVTOIS KaXXior' av ovra) Oewpt'jffetev ovTu) here expressed has no reference

And TOV Qeayerovs a^rjp^yuei'^v : Heliodor. i, 29OVTCJ is suppressed, KCU follows wffirep or as as, el MI r" ^uojuera j3\e\^eiev, waTrep ev TOIS ci\\ois t k'ctt
: :

Aristot. to &(nrep.

de Rep.

i,

2.

for the

VIT. It is peculiar to poetry to disjoin, by interposition of some other word, such particles as are commonly combined : as, ^ireaiv 1. in ivhatever manner you pet> oveibicrov, ws eaerai irep: Iliad, a, 21
please. VIII. In wtTTrep av, av pertains to a verb, not to wanep tia-nep av eiTTOi : Plat. Apol. p. 23. 'flinreparel also is said : vpds be bebouca, ^>) TWV 7rape\)/\i/6lorc;' TU>V naipwi' wairepavel KaTaK\VfffjLov yeyevijoBat
:

TOVTUV \6yovs vopiffrjre : Trpay/naTwv //yov/zeroi, fjiaraiov o-^Xov rovs Trept Dcmostii. pro Cor. p. 244. [p. 299- 1. 21. ed. Reisk. where tiairep av similitude is perfect in all ct.] 'fts compares ; Trep signifies that the
in

av denotes indefiniteness of manner q. d. on whatever side, whatever view, the things compared are contemplated, they will be found to tally in every respect; et indicates a condition, which however is latent, on account of the change made by the speaker, as he The goes on, in the construction of the sentence. construction^may TWV irpayuaTuv, be thus restored KUTUK\v(r^ov 7/yoy^evoi yeyevijirBat av el yet'otro KaraK\vffuos TUV vbarwv. When the construction 2 B
points
;

Hoog.

194
preserved entire and regular, &airep av el is written separately : ye 0a/i/ercu, &onep av et ns 'OXv/iTrtdcri viK^ffas TroXXdm, v<rTepov yepwv wv aTroypa^otro en : ^Eschin. Ep. xi. [p. 6^0. 1. 8. ed. Reisk.] IX. To ws also ei is subjoined, with some subindication of convv oe rotatf dition, notwithstanding a change of construction: epee, <f>LXov Tews, ovpavnovuiv fjia-^ibiajs, os e'i TI KUKOV peovaav eviairrji Iliad, e, 374. for ws el pecjots. The condition is more manifest, when the construction is preserved : as, KCU opoiov ws el rrepl rrjs 2*;vXX>?* TEschin. Socrat. Dial, de Morte. 'ft$ is rj TOV Kevravpov TIS obvpotro seldom suppressed before et, as in Aristoph. Ach. 558. Keu, OVKO<j>avTr)s et TIS j\v t wveibiffas ; for ws el avKofyavTYis TIS r)v. X. When oWi is written conjointly, the condition is latent ; and a verb is to be assumed either from the preceding words, or extraneously : as, TO evbvfia avrov XCVKOV w<reJ \uov t and eyeVovro oxret veKpoi : St. Mat th. xxviii, 3. 4. for ws et %v x^' ws et ^trav veicpoi. Though as and wVet are very often used indifferently, (for fa be Ibea avrov w*
is

ojjioiov

ad

precedes the words just before cited,) yet there is this difference, that uael signifies not the very thing itself, but the nearest approximation only to it, and that hypothetically. Hence it is used
atTTpcnrr)

conjecturally in speaking of number, and signifies about : wpa uoel SomecKTrj : St. John xix, 14. ^v^aJ w<rel rpta^/Xtat : Acts ii, 41. times, but rarely, an accusative follows it : elbev ev opdpm <f>avep&s

wpav kvva.Ti\v ^epas ayyeXov TOV Qeov ib. X. 3. XI. The construction of o^Trepel is the same as that of wVet. The similitude signified by oxTTrepet however is more perfect than that by The condition indicated by et were?, on account of the force of :rep. is latent, because a verb is suppressed ; for when the verb is expressed, In the following verse the verb tSffTrep el is the more proper form. is to be assumed from the wo-Trepei noXis Trpos e^flpwv, au>pa apodosis
u>ael
:

7ri/pyjypoujue0a : Eurip. Orest. TroXts Trupy^peTrat I/TT' e^^pwi'.

760.

i.

e.

TrvpyripovfjLeOa <7<D/ia, wo-Trep

et

participle follows
Tl
juoi
'.

So a verb is ^w KoXotos ovroat arw

for

to be

assumed, when a
oxrTrepet

Ke-^rjvev f

Aristoph.

Av. 51.

wairep

el

yairoi.

av t or w
:

The
Qebv

verb

is

sometimes to be assumed extraneously

oxTTrepet

TOVTOV TOV

('EpyuJ/'O)

CTrirarret

riffiv

6 vojJLodeTrjs'

<5

biKaiws av KaXoiro viro vfiutv Etpe^tiys* Ka\\u7riot'Ts TO ovopa, 'Epyuj/y KaXovpcv Plat. Cratyl, p. 408. (P- 279- e d. Bip.) Here Trpor/^o-t, or avviffTrjcri, or the like, appears to be understood before uxjTrepei. An ellipsis is to be supplied also, when one of the things compared is suppressed : aperfjs axnrepet irriyas Tols "EXXrjcriv Aristid. in Hercul. p. 63. for aperrjs e^^avriffaTo yeveuiv or ap-^v e/nrj-^av^ffaTO, (Sff-rrep el rots irrjyas av TIS /j.rj-^av^<TaiTO, XII. In 'ftairepovv, (which circumstances similar to those mentioned under oxnrepavet may cause to be written wo-Trep ovv,) ovv has sometimes its conclusive power as, atyavels etc TOV ^wpov cu irepiaTepai
e'ipeiv e/*/craro,

avOpunrot, os TO vvv be fjfiels, as

ol6fj.e6a

(when Venus leaves the place,) wcrTrepovv rfj Qey avvairobri^Elian. V. H. i, 15. From their disappearance it might be povffat concluded that they accompanied the goddess. Its affirmative sense
yivovTat,
:

fl2.

195

here be assigned to it : as if in reahty they went away Athenaeus certainly, in relating the same together with the goddess. circumstance, uses o>$ 5) for w(nrepovv : TOT ovv at wept TOV TOTTOV Treptorepat u0ave7s yivovrai, ws br) ry dey avvarrobr)iJ.ovffai : ix. 2. p. 394. Its affirmative sense is very apparent in the following el # 6 "Epws: Plat. Phaedr. p. 242. (p. 312. ed. tvTtv, uWep ovv tern, Oeos Bip.) So Apol. p. 21. [p. 8. I. 49. ed. Basil. 1.] Et TovroaXrides, tSvirep ovv Kal aXrjdes effTtv Cosmas. de magnitud. Solis. 1. vi. e'i TIS e\ei
also

may

ul ^etpovpyol TC^VIKO. ouua~a I ^lian. V. H. xiv, 47. XIII. Kat also is added rpt^ff btaffTqawueda brjfjLOKpaTOV^evrjv iroXt*>, (Sffirep ovv Kat e^et: Plat, quoted by Budaeus : i. e. da-rep ovv
ireTratbevjuiei'a

wra,

wffirepovv

ov

IJLOVOV

Kivbvvevet,

aXXa
et,

XIV.

In &airep av

Kat e%et. ovv, in its

'.

affirmative sense,

is

sometimes

inserted between axnrep and av

tyovras 7Tpoffe\6u)v

wa-rrep

ovv

civ el

yjp.ds

av

rts

etyeye

Plat,

de Rep.

iv.

avbpiavrns ypap. 420. (p. 327. ed.

Bip.) exactly as if in reality, &c.

XV. It is unnecessary to treat of the particles ws and re not united, each retaining its proper and usual sense; and as; and how: see
Apoll. Rhod.
i,

505.

are conjoined in <J5ore, as, like, before ws there is something understood, which TC connects with what follows: thus, av 5' 'Ayaueuvwv t'orctro baKpv%e<i)V, &OTC Kpyvrj peXavvSpos Iliad. , 14. for batcpv^ewv, Kal ovrw baKpv^ewv, ws Kprjvrj. 'Sis alone would have simply compared by &are amplification is added to comparison : q. d. shedding tears, and in an abundance as great too as that of the waters of a deep fountain. See also Iliad. 0, 493. e, 136.
: :

XVI. When they

re is conjoined with ws when the latter and &ore then exactly resembles are rov 5' Iliad, y, 381. where if pela e)/p7ra' 'Atypo&tTr) pela fjiuX', ware 6ea had not been expressed, it must have been understood, or at least
signifies utpote, as

XVII. In the same manner

being
;

something similar. XVIII. Teis annexed to wsalso, when oxytoned, and re in this case entirely loses its accent, and does not In it back on ws, as it does when w* has no accent. Paul compares the law of Moses to a husband, who
over his wife as long as he
wore, abeXfyol pov, Kat
lives
vfjtels

put for OVTWS : merely throw

Kom.

vii.

St.

has dominion

: then follows the apodosis in v. 4. edavaTwdrjre Ty v6py cia rov awfjUTOs rov XpuTTov : and so ; and in the same manner. In the same sense it is to be taken in Aristot. de Rep. i, 2. 'O Xoyos FTTI ry crjXovv C<TTI TO cruufyepov Kat TO 0\afiep6v' & ore Kat TO btKatov Kal TO abtKOV. XIX. It has a collective or conclusive use also; which is easily derived from its similitudinary power, since there must necessarily be some congruity between conclusion and premises : thus in St. Matth.

xii, 12.

KaAws

our Saviour concludes [a fortiori], <Dore ee<m TO~IS <ra/3/3aros : wherefore it is lawful to do well on the sabbath days. So Plato : &OTC TTO\V fjtd\\ov eXeetv TOVS epuyterovj, T) r)\ovv avTOvs
Troielv

Trpom'iKei

XX.
most

Phaedr. p. 233. (p. 292. ed. Bip.) so that, or wherefore. : In drawing conclusions it requires the indicative mood, and is frequently construed with the present tense: thus, a\\a TTC-

JPjS
iratflrai

.01.
perpius

[1228. ed. Br.]

j3abieiv Aristoph. Thesmoplj* See also Epict. Ench. c. 64. Sometimes witli the imperfect of the indicative: WOT' aiov %t> 7ri rw5e rore KeipacrOat TTJ 'EXXdSt, &c. Lysias Or. Fun. p. rif7 ra0g; 514. With the perfect of the indicative : wore KOI Trpoero^e/Xovres trot uXXus xapiTas ava.7rf(j>rivaf.iv : Xen. Cvrop. iii, 2, 16. So Galat. iii, 24. With the 1 aor. of the indicative : KareXnre TOVTO ftovov avrdts, TO ovv fia^aip^ KOI yepp'w KUI BwpctKt ^A\ea&at' c8ore evdirs avrwr TrapeffKevave
:

^1v' &a& wpa

5^ Vn

ras

yvtljfjiaSf

ws

oyuoo-e

treoi> et^ e?rt ro7$ TroXeyuiots,

&c. Xen. Cyrop.

ii,

1,21.

With the future of the indicative war ovy\ /uj) Travyet TTOT &v airaaiv oWe ovb* a.v a.Trobr)pij<rai /3ouAristoph. Pac 1034. \uvTai ibly, e^eorat ai/rovs, &c. Plat, de Rep. iv. p. 420. (p. 327. ed,
:

rj\(*)Tos

Bip.)

XXI. Construed with the imperative mood, it concludes either with adhortation or dehortation with adliortation, as, ov 0epo/4ev, <5 MevnTirov TOVTOVI TOV Kvva TrapotKovvTa* ware rj eKelyov TTOI , l Lucian. Dial. Tj r;/ue7s , peToucriffOfJiev els erepov roiror Mort. 2. See I Corinth, x, 12. XXII. And in this use with the imperative, it sometimes concludes a prolix demonstration by exhortation or dehortation : as, wore, a6e\:

(j>oi jjtov

dyaTT^rot, ebpalot yiVeo-^e,

&c.
is

after a long
:

argument by which

the certainty of the resurrection

ill

proved

Corinth, xv, 58.

So

39 <We, dSeX^oi, ^rjXovre TO 7rpo<f>r)TViv. XXIII. When a subjunctive mood follows, it depends on pr) pre<3ore ceding, or some word compounded with prf, as yu//7rore, &c.
xiv,
pri

TOVTO ye avro

QofiMpeOa

Plat. Phaedr.

p.

245. (p. 317. ed. Bip.)

So

p. 238. (p. 303. Bip.)

Before interrogation it has something of indignation : %dpos vpiv yeyova, a\r)6ev(t)f vfjCiv ; Gal. iv, \6. or at least of eviction of absurdity. So it seems I am become your enemy because I tell you truth. XXV. OtDs is often added : worre TTWS OVK CTT' avTotywpy ov el 6 ctTTGKTeivas so that how can it be otherwise but that, &c. Lysias adv. Agorat. p. 226. So Plat. Phaedr. p. 231. (p. 289. ed. Bip.) XXVI. Lucian has &OTZ ri : o^oX^ ayopev wore ri OVK airipey ev6v TJJS KaOobov 7repnrciTf](TOVTes Dial. Mort. t. i. p. 437 XXVII. From its collective or conclusive use proceeds that in which it denotes effect or event : e.g. ovrw yap jjyaTnioev 6 0eo$ Toy Koanov, (i)crre TOV vlbv TOV povoyevij e&wicev: St. John iii, l6. Tlidavol 6' OVTMS elai rtves, &aT 9 irplv elbevai TO Trpoorarro^ue^of, Trporepov netOOVTUI: Xen. Cyrop. ii, 2, 10. So ii, 2, 5. Plat. Euthyphr. p. 5. (c. 4. In all these passages oWe, preceded ed. Fisch.) Euthyd. p. 287by OVTW, to such a degree that, is construed with the indicative
oierre
; ;

XXIV.

mood. XXVIII. But when wWe has

reference to TOIOVTO or TOOOVTO pre r Ceding, either the indicative or infinitive mood is used indifferently : ro e vvv vnap^ov nepi ae TO IOVTOV iaTiv, wore TOVS e^ oiTracr^s r^s

ft2.
olicovpevrjs els

197

Plat.

Ep. iii. trovrov te0epov

:

eVa TOTTOV airoflXeTretv, Kal ev rovrw paXiffra Trpds ae : KoXo^wrtoi Kal tinrtKriv (tvcn/o-avro), ev 7; rop. 230.
raiv aXXa>j>, w<r0',
OTTOI/ ?rore

eirtKovpijffeie,

Xveardat
ovbe
rjjy

TOV TroXepov
7nduue~iv,
bibo/jevrjv

Strab. xix. p. 643.

erepot /jev

Totrourov yap Sew rwv aXXorp/wv

TJTOV(TIV eyw
5'

&u&
fj-ot

TrXeoveKrelv

^u>pav >;/(u<7a Xa/3e7> : Isocr. in Nicocl. p. 65. XXIX. The signification of event or effect is especially remarkable in the close of a long narration : thus Triton in Lucian concludes the whole story of Andromeda with a sort of epiphonema: <&rre atrl

Dial. Triton, et Nereid. : and so : optative mood following depends not on ware, but on av intervening: WOT* OVK av avrov yvuplffatp' av elaibwv : Eurip. Or. 3?9 wore Kai a\\ovs eluvrias av bibatTKotre r&bel Xen. Cyrop. iii. p. 82. So Aristoph. Ach. 941. [943. ed. Br.]

Qavurov yauov ov TOV rv^oVra eupero

XXX. An

XXXI. A
as

when

fjrj

cnroXeHpdw : Vesp. 1J2. [ws av

subjunctive mood following depends on something else, intervenes ovrws eTriTedv^tjKa. a.Kov<ra.t, ware ov yur/ aov Plat. Phaedr. p. 227- (p. 281. ed. Bip.) See Aristoph.
:

pi] '07, in Brunck's edition v. 113.] with an infinitive mood has the same signification of see I. vii. Newrepot elaiv t >/ wore etbei'at, o't'wv TTCLproportion as ws Tepwv eorep^vraf Trpeafiurepot, rj ware eTTiXaOeadai rrjs bvarv^ias : Lysias Or. Fun. p. 520. The use of the particle re is to be explained here upon the same principle as when it follows olo*. See on re, ix.

XXXII.

"ft^rre

young to know, too old to forget. XXXIII. When wore is construed with an infinitive mood in speaking of something not yet effected, it may be interpreted by Iva, and may perhaps indicate the final cause, since there is a close affieyw, wore a7re/\a<rat XaXa'ovs nity between effect and final cause
:

too

a.7ro
iii,

TOVTIOV

Twv aKpwv, 7roX\a7r\a<na av ebwKa ^p^yuara

^LKOTTOVVTCS Katpov, et

p. 73.

Xen. Cyrop.
'.

TrapaTr^TOt, w<rre rovs avbpas (raJaai

Thucyd.

iv,

23.

XXXIV. Examples which might justify the attribution of a narrative use to ware as well as to os, are rare : et be TroXXam yeyovev,
ware
velv
i

Kal rovs jue/5w bi'vapiv e^ovras VTTO

TWV aaOevearepuv
bf]

KpaTTjOrjvail
/u?)

Isocr. in

Archidam.

p. 245.

eXiriba be

TIV

eloper,

wore

0a-

Eurip. Or. 52. But even these passages may be referred to its sense of event or effect; for in the first a verb significative of event, yeyovev, is expressed ; in the second, one may be understood, eXiriba e^ofnev (jv/jifiijaeffdai ware, &C. XXXV. Iii a passage of Plato wore yap seems to be equivalent to Kal yap ovrws, ws being put for oi/rws. Socrates asks whether one, who is eager for any kind of learning or knowledge whatever, can be

properly called a philosopher

apa

to this question Glauco replies, iroXXol : aot voiovroc, and adds as a reason, wore yap QiXoQeauoves iravres euoiye boKovffi rw Karapavdavetv xalpot'res, roiovrot
Kal aroTroi eVovrcu

clvat

for so

for in that
notes.]

case,

&c.
see the Abr. of Vig. p.

[For further information on ws and wore,

205212.

and the

198

On

Articles,

Nouns, Verbs, and Prepositions,

SUPPLEMENT.
OBSERVATIONS ON ARTICLES, NOUNS, VERBS, AND PREPOSITIONS, WHICH ASSUME THE NATURE OF PARTICLES.
1.
is

delight is still in contention, and wars, and battles, and thou inheritest the headstrong and ungovernable disposition of thy mother, says Jupiter to Mars, who has been wounded; and then adds, r> a otw Keit'rjs Tube So ry vvv : the event of the 7rAff\tv efrefflymv : Iliad, e, Sp4. expedition of the Greeks is as yet uncertain, T$ vvv 'Arpelbr) 'Aya\awt> %<Tat oi'eiS/c? v : the words of Ulysses to jj.fjivoyt, Trot/iei'i Thersites, in Iliad. /3, 254. When a wish precedes, it denotes effect or consequence, and has av or KG following it : it may then be rendered, so, or in that case : at yap rocouroi 6e/ca fj.oi rrvfj^pabfjioves eley A \aiwv' ry KC ra% ^pvffete iroXts ITpiu/ioco avaKTos : Iliad. /3, 373. II. The dative feminine $ of the subjunctive article assumes the nature first of an adverb, and afterwards of a particle. As an adverb it signifies 2. 1. rest in a place, pepibi being understood. motion through a place, with 6 understood : [rather it signifies either the place in which something is, or the place or way through
:
'

far

for Tovrtj), which is for Sm Tovro,for more common in poetry than in prose

this reason,

therefore,

Thy

which

it passes.] 1. nefyvKev // Trrepov bvvanis TO e///3p(0es oyeti> oVo> fterewp/5ovora, y TO TWV Qe&v yevos otfcel : Plat. Phaedr. p. 246. (p.

321. ed. Bip.)

i.

e. oirov

o/'/cel,

where.

uses ^i, Iliad, a, 607. Ilep is added to rj, either rendering the sense less determinate, so that rjnep may signify wheresoever, or retaining its primary force, and meaning absolutely, altogether, entirely : Kat Xyaral apa TIJV AaK(uvto)' fjaoov \virovv CK OaXdffffrjs, yirep povov olov r' i\v KaKovpyeladai : Thucyd. iv, 53. 2. In signifying passage through a place, when bbos, or e^ocos, or 5teoos [or some similar word,] is either not expressed, or so expressed that y cannot agree with it ; then the latter drops the nature

For

rj

Homer

of the subjunctive article, and assumes that of a particle: thus, ra T&V SteoSw' <mj/zara, $ TO nrepov oppq. Plat. Phaedr. p. 251. (p. 331. ed. Bip.) by which way or passage.
:

is transferred to immaterial things; or respect, and perhaps quantity or degree also : avyeTTtcrKe^affde be, rj pot ^atverai rai/ra Xe'yeiv : Plat. Apol. Socr. p. 72. in what respect. KaOopy 5e einaTiifJir}, o\>xy yeveffts irpOffeaTiv, ov& rj effTi TTOU erfipa kv erepy ovaa : Id. Phaedr. p. 247 (p. 323. ed. Bip.) not in that respect, in which, &c. not in respect of its having, nor in respect of its being, &c. III. As jf limits manner relatively, so TTJ limits it demonstratively :

From place
it

its

signification

and hence

limits

manner

and

in this' use rp

JAW and

TV)

are frequently

correlative

partly t

which assume the Nature of Particles.

;

199

partly in one respect, in another respect: w cupa, ry piv a i/S<?w$ irpoabtpKopai Tpomflev eXOwv* TTJ b* ibwv Karaarevo) : Eurip. Orest. 356. ZwKparrjs Ty pey opdats tc^rei, TTJ b' ^/xaprarev : Aristot. Ethic.
vi.

must be understood before or sometimes expressed ; as, dp' ovv ry per Plat. TrpoffijKei TOVTO icaayjeiv, ravrr/, ynep crvveTedrj Phaed. p. 78. When oblique interrogation is involved, ravry cannot be understood, but rfj is used for TTTJ navTa TO. rotavra pavOaiets, on erepa aXXrjXuv eart, KCII fj erepa ; Plat. Euthyphr. p. 10. and in
IV.
all

On

these occasions ravrri

:

after the

particle avvQeTtj) OVTL (pvaei

it

is

what
V.
apa,

respect ,

&c.
discretive, rt indefinite,
rt
r/,

Of aXXo
fjifj,

and
used

r/

comparative,

is

com-

posed the formula aXXo

Abr. of Vig.

which

is

in

figurative questions,

or some other interrogative word being understood : [see p. 53. viii. and the notes.] Thus, ei /uei> yap (nrovba^eis

re, Kut Tvy\a.i>et TO.VTO. a.\rjOij orra, OL Xeyeis, aXXo rt rj iin&v 6 (3los avaTeTpapnevos av eirj TWV a.vQpuirti)v ; Plat. Gorg. p. 481. would not all the affairs of human life be subverted? would the consequence be any thing else but the subversion of all human affairs? More closely, would the life of us men be any thing else but subverted? 6 ayadus aw}p t KCU eTTt TO fleXriffTOv Xeywi', a av Xeyr/, aXXo re T) OVK eiKij epel ; ib. p. 503. will not such a one avoid speaking rashly ? more literally, will he say anything else but what may be not rashly said? When there is no interrogation, no vestige of the nature of a particle remains thus, el b' cart TOVTO ovrws e'x* A"7 $XXo rt etyat TO avro Ktvovy t
:

e avayKT]s ayevrjTOV re feat a.Qava.Tov ^X^ ^- v e '^ P^ a ^- Phaedr. p. 245. (p. 319- ed. Bip.) that what moves itself is nothing else but the soul. But when rt of itself interrogates, it is oxvtoned, and put before ciXXo, as, a> e ai/ro TOVTO TO e^yelaOat Onv^taaw, rt aXXo 7}
r/

^v\i]v,

Epict. C. 73. (j>i\offcxf)ov VI. "AXXo rt, without T/ following, approaches more nearly to the nature of a particle, and appears to be used elliptically for et p) aXXo rt boKel. aoi. "AXXort is put in the beginning, as well as in the middle, of sentences : as, 0epe *), TTWS // TroXts apKecrei enl TOffavrrjv
',

ypa/jL^ariKos aTrereXeaOrjv avrt

trapaoKevrjv
v(pai'Tr]s.
i)

"AXXort, yewpyos

jj.ev

els'

6 be

oiKobojjios'

iiX\os

be

ns

Kal ffKVTOTOjuiov avrols TrpoaQi)ao}j.v, rj TIV' ciXXov TU>V irepl TO aw/jia depaTrevTr'iv ; (QepairevTwv, ed. Bas. 1.) Plat, de Rep. ii. p. 369.

you are of a different opinion, unless you have anything The answer is different to propose, let one be a husbandman, &c. ^atWreu. These words however might be taken interrogatively. VII. OIov and ota are properly adjectives, but they are often used
unless
as particles, and signify as ; in the same manner as : \epaov xepacras ota rts aityvevs fcev0/zwros ovx). vavfiaTrj aroA^, aXX' cuJTiftipov olfiov, ev ffrjpayyt rerp/pas pv^ovs : Lycophr. 121. He might have said
oios TIS.

Many

signifies similitude

of the uses of olo> are the same as those of ws. Thus it both full and perfect, when it occurs without a

1. avros be protasis, and also feigned or unreal. [See 'fts I, iv.] as a god ; as : Ttjv ev fj.ff^ vricrov, ota S// Oeos, evfjiaptis bieKOffprjffev e being a god: Plato in Critia p. 113. Qappelv, ota vTrarov,

200

On* Articles, Nouns, Verbs, and Prepositions,

i.

App. Alex.

2. /uera Se*/<rews olov efaQouvTtav fie

:

Plat.

Ep.

vii.

p.

in its limitative use also Ktfyh ^eTea-^ov, ola btj Eurip. Orest. 32. i. e. as far as a woman could. Conjee turally also [see ws I, xiv.] TO arpaTOTrebov irpoaire^wprjaev cnro TOV AJ/X/OV olov beKa ffrabiovs : Thucyd. iv, 90. about. Also in its augmentative or intensive use, to express wonder : [see olov airavTes %a& avey : Odyss. /3, 239. how you all sit ws I, xi.]

339. as it were. It is put for o

:

yvvii, (purov

mute !
VIII.

When
it

it is

used

in exemplification,

and

signifies

for example,

for instance,

the help of an ellipsis, be easily made appear syntactical : thus, ap ovratal ytyvcTat airavra, ova aXAo0ev r) K TO;V evavTiwv TO. evavTia, oaois rvyycivei ov TOIOVTOV TI olov TO KO\OV TO) ala^py evavTiov TTOV, Kal btiaiov dStVw. apa avayKoiov,

may sometimes, by

',

oaots eari TI evavriov,

/i/a^uo0e>' a\\oOev avro yiyveodat,

>/

etc

TOV avro>

evai'Ttov' olov, orav jjiei6v TI yiyveTcti, avayKrj TTOV e| eXarroi/s ot'ros irporepov, 7retTa fieigov yiyveaOat; Plat. Phred. p. 70. Here olov be rendered syntactical in the following manner : olov TO KO.\OV TV

may

<ilff%p<5

effTtv
it

evavTiov,

sometimes
TTfpl

and olov roCr' eVriv, orav nel6v TI, &c. but cannot be made appear so e. g. eanv evlois yeypapneva
:

TOVTWV' olov (as for instance) Xapjjrt by T^ Ylapiy, Kal 'ATroXXodwpy T ArjfjLvty: Aristot. de Rep. i. p. 11. Here TOLOVTO or early

cannot be understood. IX. As olov denotes quality, so oaov quantity

roffov or Toaovro
I

it

is

referred

to
:

e. g. et TIS

ktratviaoei ae TOGOV \povov,

oaaov

of)w//

Theogn. 93.
It limits t-ither bulk, as oaov 6/3o\o', oaov Koyxrjv, as much as t or 1. of about, an obolus ; about a spoonful: or length or space; Plat. Pha3dr. p. 229 (P- 284. ed. place ; as, oaov bv f; rp/a arabia 2. of time ; as, eireibav aTroKoifjuidris, oaov Bip.) about three stadia. ii. Xe-n. p. 60. i. e. an-oKOtf.ir)Qrjs CTTI Toaovrov ypovov, fjerpiov Cyrop. in moderation : fully, ep' oaov e0' oaov peTptov av y : moderately ; Nor does it lose this elliptical use, when 1 Corinth, vii, 39. Xpoi'ov subjoined to superlatives, or words having the nature of superlatives, Even in the plural number xpr]as bavpaaTov oaov, ptyiarov oaov. : Plat. oaa e'Xa/3e 0av/Ktora Hipp. maj. p. 282. (p. 7. ed. Bip.) /xara oaov ^aXtcrrct. It is put before fj-aXiara X. After these observations, other syntactical forms will be more e. g. virvos e(f> oaov rjbiaTos, for virvos enl Toaovro easily understood 'Ev KVK\<^ irepuppaaaovatv es oaov orrov eaTiv rjbiaros. 7rpo/3e/3jjicws, es Toaov es oaov bvvavrni, or bvvarov, for irepuppaaaovaiv paKpOTctTOv, This ellipsis is partly supplied by Plato, TOV e^ovTa irepitypaaaeiv. evbuijjovelv iroioi/vres els oaov avdpuny bvvaTov yudXtora Phaedr. p. 277(p. 385. ed. Bip.) 'A^a/pe7rcu rjfJLas xprjpaTa, oaov eir' avT<p,for a. //. \. ToaoiiTOV Tpoirov, oaov ITT' avrw. 'EXot^opet 6Vov ye OTTO TOV \6yov TOVTOV, i. e. ToaovTO oaov ye airo, or eic, TOV Xoyov elKaaai efaariv. There is a similar ellipsis whenever an infinitive mood follows : K-apoaaov e-iriairelaai aoi. Epigr. for KapiroQopqab) Toaovro, oaov Trotyoprjau) Like MS, in its cone^apKel e-jriaire'iaai, or els TO or eirl TO eiriaTreiacu.
: : : :
'.

jectural use,

it is

construed in the plural with an infinitive wood,

which assume the Nature of Particles.

201

when

stood

neither efapKel, nor Swarov, nor Se7, can be properly underas, oaa ye K<pfAe t ^.vpov o*ra, eibevai : as far as I, who am a Syrian, can know: Lucian. adv. Indoct. t. iii. EtKos, or the like, is
:

probably understood.
Tragcedo.

So,

ovx>

#aa ye K^pe bpyv

Id. in

Jove

almost ; very nearly ; all but : as, oaov OVK airoproperly, roaovro TOV aTcoXwXevai dTre/^oyuer, oaov So Thucydides, TOV peXXovra Kal baovov efapKel els TO /n) aTroXwX^vat. Trapovra TroXepov, i, 36. XII. "Oaov ovTca) is, forthwith ; almost immediately ; only not yet: oXedpov TOIOVTOV Tols fiev atrtov tfori yeyorora, i]jj.1v be eoojjievov oaov ovbeTni) Herodian. i, 13. oaov ovbeTCb) TeOvrj^ofjievy eoiKas : Lucian.de Merc. Cond. c. 31. With ^intervening: rojjtiaavres, noXXaTcXaaiovs be ovbeTra) Trapelvai fjiiv T) i]\Qov eTTtevai, oaov Thucyd. iv, 125. It is elegantly placed between an article and the substantive with which the article agrees : TTJV oaov ovSeTrw a^ayfjv avapevuv Heliodor. x, 28. XIII. "Oaov pij and oaov priTrore, from the nature of the particle /^j), do not deny, but forbid ; or, if they deny, they deny a part only of the whole as, oaov y' av avros /u// irore \^ava) '^epo'iv Sophocl. Trachin. 1221. [1216. ed. Br. prj Tron^avwv] as far as lean without using my own hands to do it ; only not touching it myself. OuXaoraetv be rrjv vrjaov 'AQrivaiovs fjirjoev qaaov, oaa ftr) arroflaivovras : Thucyd. iv, 16. but without landing: as far as it could be done without going ashore. XIV. Tt the enclitic has often a diminuent force, and signifies, in some measure ; in a manner ; somewhat : el n aSdu/xot eerre : 2 Corinth, xiii, 5. And with the comparative degree ei rt eicelvovs <f>oftepwTpovs Troir'ioofjiev Xenoph. Cyrop. iii, p. 79- Joined with a verb, it detracts something from the force of the latter: [jtevti, TOV Eurip. Or. 1102. e^dpov e't rt Tinwprjaofjiai Thucydides places it ev rJ rore ceoftevwv rt /taXXov arrovbefore the word qualified by it btiv : iv, 21. for /itaXXov rt, rather more than usual. XV. On the contrary, when rt is negatived by another particle, it augments the force of the verb : [rather, it makes the negation more absolute and total :] ovbe rt olce voijaat fyua irpoaaw (cat oTfiaaw : Iliad. Tt auga, 243. So, ovcev rt Oavfj.aarbr t Xen. Cyrop. viii, p. 208. ments even without negation ; but with an ellipsis of peya, ae^vbvt Plat. Phaedr. p. [jieyaXoTrpeTres, or the like : aepvvveadai ws rt ovre 242. for fJLeya. rt. XVI. Tt oxytoned is interrogative. With an ellipsis it inquires into causes. 1. into the ratiocinative cause, or reason : rt OVK aireKpivaro ; Plat. Phaedr. p. 86. why t for eta ri; The ellipsis is supplied by St. Matlh. ix, 11. 2. the efficient cause : rt SetXot tare ; what is it that makes you fearful? St. Matth. viii, 27. for ri on. 3. the suasive or impulsive cause, or motive : rt e>?X0ere ets ri)i' epijfj.ov deaaaadat ; St. Matth. xi, 7. or, with a negative, the dissuasive or deterring cause: rt &'oi/xt QvyaTpvs'Epfjuovris Eurip. Or. 107. The ellipsis Tre/iTrets be^as of on is supplied in Acts v, 4. 4. the final cause, or purpose: ri
is

XI. "Oaov ov
:

XwXa/tey

that

is

ovv TTpeapeveTe

Demosth. de Cherson.

p.

39-

Here

fiovXofteroi

is

Hoog.

2 c

202

On

Articles, Nouns, Verbs,

and Prepositions,

understood, ri. ovv /3ou\o/ievot. It is expressed by Demosthenes, pro Cor. p. 336. -ri (3ov\6pevoi /uereTreyu^aafle ; XVII. Tt yap ; signifies why not ? to be sure. This it does in con1. Tynd. MeveXae, sequence of an ellipsis : trpoa^Qiyy-g viv, avotrtov Kapa; Menel. ri yap; Eurip. Crest, 481. [4,76. ed. Pors.] The full 2. And to a expression would be 7rpoo-00eyeytai* ri yap KwXvet ; question not figurative, as that just quoted, but plain and direct, it gives, by a figurative question, what amounts to a vehemently affirmative answer. Thus to the question, whether Sophists could impart to their disciples a faculty of denying such things as are manifest in the heavens and the earth, the reply is ri yap ; most undoubtedly : Plat.

Soph. p. 232. underst.

3.
It is
;

cvvavTtxt avriXoytKovs iroielv. ri yap KuiKvei

:

used in anticipation of objections

thus, ri yap
;

el fj7riorr)crav

rives Rom. iii, 3. [ATI r/ amoria OVTWV rrjv iriariv rov 0eov Karapyrjirei for what if some did not believe ? 4. In affirmative answers in which yap demands a reason why what is said should not be so, and n denies by interrogation the possibility of the thing being otherwise
:

Socr. TOVTO /*ei> apa. iravrl bfjXov, on OVK aiff%pov CLVTO ye TO ypfyeiv \6yovs. Phaedr. ri yap; Plat. Phaedr. p. 258. (p. 34p. ed. 5. Ill Bip.) for, OVK alary^por TO ypa^etv' TI yap av e'irj TOVTO ala^por continuation of discourse, when, something having been rejected or
e. g.,
;

proposed anew for consideration thus, epyy avdpwiros 6\jjo(f>ayos KaXelrat eoBiowt per yap bfi iravres e-rri TW airw o\frov orav napf}' d\\* olfjiat, ovTTd) eni ye TOVTW 6\po(payoi KaAoujrcu. ov yap ovv, Tts e<j>r] r&v irapovTUV, Tiyap; e'0?/, lay TIS avev TOV airov TO o\^ov avrov
denied, something else
etyr),

is

e%oifjiev av,
;

ai'&pes, eiTret^ CTTI TTO/W Trore

cadly, JUT) ao-K7y<rews a\V rySov/7s eVeca, irorepov fyoQayos elvai boKel, r/ ov ; Xenoph. Mem. iv. p. 7S9- [c. xiv. 3.] q. d. that case being set aside then, what say you to this? Again then . 6. With a\\'
rj

added ; and occurring either in the beginning of a sentence, as, ri yap a\\' 7) avoia. kanv for what is it else but folly ? or in the middle ; as, KraraXa/3ov<ra r?)i> Xap/K\eta_v kv o^vpfjiols /cat ba.Kpvai t Kal rt yap aXX*
;

Heliod. ^Ethiop. viii, 7. and what but mourning? and else (could she do? viz.) Ti denies interrogatively, that any thing else could be done. In the first use the particle 5^, either confirmative or hortative, is sometimes added: r/ ovv; olofieBa. TWO, TOVTWV T&V TroXtreiwv opQriv
in

Trevdovcrav

mourning; for what

elvat ; Answ. ri yap &} Kal K(a\vet ; Plat. Politic, p. 292. (p. 77Bip.) This answer virtually denies that any thing hinders ; and negation is strengthened both by the interrogative form, and by exhortation signified by bri to discover if possible anything that
:

ed. the the

can hinder it q. d. say you yourself, if you can discover any reason why it should not be so. XVIII. In ri be; ri gives expectation of something worthy of After an enumeration of attention, and be serves for transition. instances of the power of wealth, Chremylus says to Plutus, ri 5e;
ras

what say you

fnot Aristoph. Plut. 172. and again, not you that man the triremes pray ? The most common use of ri be; is in introduction of a fresh topic, when a preceding one has been already despatched. Thus Socrates^

Tpifjpeis

ov

trv 7rX)?po7s

cine

to this ? is it

which assume the Nature of Particles.

after
sition

203

showing that Lysias

which he

ov x v v boK~i /3e/3\7/<T0at ed. Bip.) Sometimes ri \oiuev etc \6%ov; Eurip. Phoeniss. 731. for, ri b' et. A/} loo is added ; either in its signification of time, now ; or in its hortatory use : as, TI be br), & iivbpes, TO Towvbe ; at enl TOVTOV 7rpdeis an-ao-cu ap ov KaXat xal fyeXtpoi ; Plat. Protag. p. 358. (p. 185. ed.

criticizes, passes

neglected compoon to another fault: r/ be ; raXXa Plat. Phaedr. p. 264. (p. 358. TO. rov Xdyou ; be is understood : el VVKTOS avrols Trpoa/xi-

had

definition in a

Bip.) q. d. but come, answer me this. And again presently after; wards, ri be brj ; apadiav apa TO Toiovbe Xeyere And as exhortation is used only on occasions of importance, hence ri be br) is employed when interrogation arrives at length where it exults and triumphs as it were: thus, ri be br}; TWV iro\\wv KOI KCIXa}i>,

ol deot aTrepydcJojTCU, TI TO

Ke0dXaioV cart rfjsaTrepyairias

Plat.

Euthyphr. p. 14. Sometimes the emphasis and hortatory signification of br) are less and it then probably signifies merely now. Thus in a freapparent ri be bri ; quent repetition of ri be ; intervenes ri be bff avdp&Trov fyvxjfiv KeKTijoQat, &c. Plat. Hipp. maj. p. 575. But the addition of brj is peculiarly proper and necessary, when by a gradation of propositions one has at length arrived at the main point, at the scope to which everything preceding has tended. Thus
; ;

that civil
at

after a series of questions, tending indirectly to establish the principle war was to be avoided in his imaginary republic, Socrates
last interrogates as

follows

ri be

bf}

f}

av 7r6\tv oiKigeis,

ov-%

OVKOVV Kai ayaOoi re Kal ijjjiepoi 'EXXrjvls effTai ; Ael y* ai/r^v, e(f>r). effovTai ; Plat, de Rep. v. p. 469. (p. 44. ed. Bip.) XIX. Tt 6' ov differs from TTWS 6' ov in this, that the latter excludes
every mode by which a thing may not be ; the former every reason why it may not be / be ye TU>V TOIOVTUV ibluais btaXvei . Answ. Plat, de Rep. v. p. 462. (p. ip. ri b' ov ; why not ? i. e. certainly.
:

ed. Bip.)

XX. T

b'

preceding sentence or proposition

fj,ev

ov sometimes replies to a part only, not the whole, of a e. g. TO ye /ieyuepto-juevov, iraBos :

ev elvat.
Tols pepefft iraatr, ovbev ctTrooiAuei, Kal this the answer is, rt 6' ov

rov evos e\eiv eni

KO.I o'Xov,

b))

irav re or

To

ravry not
;

r/ b' ov KwXvet,

&c.

able

but

ri b'

for so ri yap (/cwXuot viz.) would be more suitOVK ai> eir] ev ; Plat. Sophist, p. 245. (p. 257- ed.

Bip.)

XXI. Tt fJLnv; is used as an affirmative answer; rt signifying, by to figurative interrogation, that nothing imaginable can be opposed what precedes, and pfiv confirming what is so signified : OVKOV*' aXXo Kal epyov eKarepM npoorjKet irpocrraTTetv TO icara TY)V avTOv Qvvtv ; Answ.
de Rep. v. p. 453. (p. 11. ed. Bip.) But ri /*> ; is used in merely expressing assent op$s ovv eKeivtjv TJ/K customarily 284. tyqXorariiv i:\aTavov ; Answ. ri p^v ; Plat. Phaedr. p. 229. (p. ed. Bip.) So p. 272. (375. Bip.) XXII. T/ ovv is used 1. when it is inquired which of two or After observing that to the is true. more
ri pfiv;

Plat,

things

necessarily

mind of man some

others doubtful, things are plain and evident,

204
TWV

On

Articles, Nouns, Verbs,

to ask,
r)

and Prepositions,

rov eptara irArepov <f>wpev elrm Plat. Phaedr. p. 263. (357. Bip.) r&v py tell me therefore. Qvv denotes the conclusion that love must be in one or other of those classes of things, and ri inquires in which. 2. in the protasis or introduction of an objection which one supposes to be made to himself against a conclusion, for the most part a false one, which he has drawn from what precedes. Thus Socrates, having proved that love is a blind and mad desire, recants, as it were, and feigns himself amazed, as if he had uttered something absurd and profane: ri ovv ; what? what then? rov "Epwra OVK 'A0po/r7?s nat Qeov ru'a 7)777 and afterwards adds, if love be a divinity, as it is, it cannot be anything evil. XXIII. Tt Trore is used in interrogation significative of ardent desire of information. (See Trore vi.) In poetry the two particles are contracted into r/7rre, and, before an aspirated vowel, into rify& : ijprf,

Socrates proceeds

ri

ov v
;

a.fji(l)ifffir]Trialfj(i)v,

ffbs vlos kfjibv pocv e^ttG K/oW ; Iliad. <J), 369. [Hoogeveen quotes Demosth. de Cherson. p. 42. for an example of nVre used in prose ; but in the passage cited, ri Trore is the reading of Reiske's

rnrre

edition p. 105. 1. 17.] In Aristoph. Pac. 6l. [62. Br.] ri and Trore are separated by another intervening word. XXIV. The verbs which assume the nature of particles are aye,
i8t,

"Aye

$epe, etTre. retains the nature of a verb,

second person of the imperative ; Diog. Laert. in Diog. /uopos 357- come tell me. But it truly particle, when construed with a
\\iejirst

it is construed with the aye, Xeye, ris eXa/3e oe p. 415. aye, 0pac?e : Aristoph. Pac. and properly takes the nature of a different person or number. Thus

whenever
;

mood

as,

Ke^aXjj KCLTavevffOfjiai

person singular follows it in Iliad, a, 542. el b* aye rot the third person singular in Odyss. 0, 542. : d\\' ay', 6 per c^dera. The first person plural of the subjunctive mood more frequently follows ; as, aXX' aye 6r) xagwjjieQ' e^' 'ITTTTWV : Iliad, e, 24p. but come, &c. XXV. And if it be true, as Hesychius says, that aye<i> is terat, and it thence derives its hortatory force, the conversion of aye into a mere particle is indubitable, especially when it is put before tw/^er, as, aye vvv^nev, Aristoph. Vesp. 1256. [1264. ed. Br.] Pac. 851. For not only the disagreement of persons, but the tautology also, must in that case prevent its being considered as a verb. It is construed with the first person of the future indicative also : el 6' aye, rovs av eyw eTrto^oyuat d\X' aye, vfja ^weXatIliad, i, l67 vav epvaoopev : Odyss. TT, 348. XXVI. It is frequently construed with the second person plural, although it retains the form of the singular, e. g. dXX' aye, fyan'iKwv firjTapfjioi'es, oaaoi aptoroi, Tratcrare Odyss. 6, 250. Even with the
: :

plural bcvre

Sevr' aye, QCLIIIKWV >/y7;ropes rjbe fjieborres

Odyss.

6,

11.

does not always keep the termination of the singular number: e. g. dXX' ayer', o^p' ctv eyw TroXejutr'/'ia rev^ea Svw, ro^p* Iliad. 17, 194. where it may possibly retain the nature vfj.e1s evfteffde: of a verb, if c'iyere, ev^efrde be taken for 'ire KGU ev^eaOe. But it
It
is

XXVII.

manifestly a particle,

when

the

first

person

plural follows, as,

which assume the Nature of Particles.

\\' ayer', ws

205
i,

av eywv

ciVa;,

ireiOwfJieOa.

Trdvres

Iliad,

26. 700.

&

74.

particle ^epe has the same use and force as aye, does not occur in the plural number. It is employed 1. for self-excitement, with the first person singular of the subjunctive

XXVIII. The
it

but

mood

; as, tyepe vvv ayua rfjvb' eyxed/xei'os Kyyri po<pa> Aristoph. Vesp. 901. [906. ed. Br.] In this use it is most frequently followed by the first aorist of the subjunctive by the second, only when there is no first, or when the first is not in use : <epe >}, Karibw, troi rovs Xidovs It constantly retains the in Pac. 360. [36 1. ed. Br.] a<j)e\ofjiev : Id. form of the singular number, even when more than one are excited or instigated e. g. it is construed with the first pers. plur. ^epe 5),
: ; :

eTrto-K'e^w/ieSa,

e|erdc-w^ej>

plur. p. 81.

<j>epe

ri Xeyo/zev Plat. Euthyphr. p. 7 tyepe &? KtfKelvo Demosth. adv. Leptin. p. 369. With the second pers. Demosth. de Rhod. Libert. yap, irpbs detiv ^KOTcelre
:
'.

It is to be observed that KOI often follows (j>epe, as, <j>epe Kal irepl TOVTUV biaXafiwuev Diog. Laert. iii. p. 217XXIX. "I0i also, originally the imperative mood of a verb, has become a hortatory particle, even when construed with the second person singular : as, flacK, Wi t ovXe ovetpe, Ooas enl vfjas 'A\aiwv : Iliad.
:

As.
It is

construed by Plato with the

:

first

person of the

aor. sub-

junctive
brj,

IB i

/},

?rpos TOVTOLS
:

KUI roSe e-mffKe^wpeOa

Ctofj.oXoyrjaufjieda Kal Tube: Phileb. Id. in Gorg. cited by Thorn. Mag.

Wi

XXX. The imperative cine retains the form of the singular numIt has then the force ber, even when more than one are addressed. both of a verb and of a particle, and expresses both command and ri 0eiSo^ea0a instigation, being put for aye, eiTrare : e. g. enre ftot, ruv Xt'flw)/, w brj/jorai ; Aristoph. Acharn. 318. [319- ed. Br.] pray
tell

with their cases, which assume the This benature of particles, the first to be mentioned is av& wv. comes a particle, only when nothing precedes to which the relative <Ji/ can be referred ; or rather, only when the mention of something to be requited either follows, (which is the most common case) or avrbv ayyeXos Kvptov, avQ* e. g. precedes Trapa^pfj^a be eirura^ev Hv OVK ebwKe TIJV $>6av rtf e$ Acts xii, 23. because he gave not God the glory; or, more suitably to the nature of the phrase, tit &c. for the causal sense which requital for this, that he gave not, uv0* uv has acquired from this use is not a general one, but only one This proper and primary sense arising out of deserts, good or bad. of the phrase, however, being kept in mind, it may be rendered because, when it precedes the matter for requital, and /or whichreason, or wherefore, when it follows it : thus, el be pi o^w^oKer, evOus 5//Xos TWV b*6vrW a.v& &v effTL TrapecrKeva<7fj.evos ovbev (f. prjbev} Troii]<jeiv biKaiws av O.VTOV KOI vnep r&v Qewv TifAwpriffrjffOe Lycurg. adv. Leocrat. c. 18. wherefore, &c. So our Saviour, after saying, there is nothing covered that shall not be revealed, neither hid, that shall not be UKOVT< (purl known, concludes, ai'6' v ova ev TJ; worta ciirare, -h
:

me ; tell me now. XXXI. Of the prepositions

206
t'

On

Articles, Nouns, Verbs,

and Prepositions,

Kal o Trpbs TO o%s eXaX^ffare ev rois rapelots, 7rl TWV w/iara>v : St. Luke xii, 3. therefore, &c. [I cannot perceive any signification of requital here.]

XXXII. '<' y>, when it assumes the nature of a particle, signifies, on condition that. It is construed with a future tense as, virovbas TOVS avbpas KoptovvTat TTOiqffafjievoi, e0' Thucyd. With an intinitive
; :

mood

as,

e^/^tVavro

ol

Aa/teat/zoyioe be^eadat TT)V

TOVS re upfjioffTas CK TWV troXewv e^ayetv, TO. re arparoTreSa Xen. Hist. Gr. vi. p. 593. TTWS av OVTOS edeXot TO. dXXdrpia
e0*
$>

KaKoSoos elVat
e^>'
>

Id. Agesil.
TCLS

aTrobuHjetv,
first aorist:
'Ii7croi)
:

^117

Kaieiv

KwfjLas:

p. 665. So e0' Id. Anab. iv.

//j)

ol &'

e<f>aaav

btu)K<a Se, e< <cai

KaraXa^w,

VTTO ed>'^5 KareXfitydrjV

Philipp. iii, 12. if that I may apprehend I am apprehended of Christ Jesus : q. d. Christ apprehended 01* took me on that condition, that I should pursue, &c. With a future of
is not very usual) in narrating something KIV&VVOV TOVS ev ry vyey av&pas fftyiot rd re OTrXct Kal a<pas O.VTOVS KeXcvetv Trapabovvai, e<f> $ (j>v\aKrj TTJ ueTpioj, TYioijaovTat. : Thucyd. iv, 30. But possibly may here retain its nature as a relative, the condition preceding instead of following it: in that

a TOV Xptorov that for which also

p. 32i.

With

the indicative, and

(what

past

et /3ovXoivro ctveu

must be rendered on which condition, i. e. on the condition of With a subjunctive mood accompanied by av rols fj.ev \afjifla.vovffti' apyvpiov avayKoilov kanv uirepya^eadat TOVTO, ed>' w av fjtifftiov Xapfiavwcm'ji Xen. Mem. i. p. 730. [Here t-0* lias certainly no resemblance to a particle, but J retains the nature of a relative pronoun, and agrees with the antecedent rowro.] 'XXXIII. 'E0' wre requires an infinitive mood: ^e^nrirov Se a/pecase
it

surrendering.

0eVra ol&a vvb Tfjs orpartas tip^ety TTJS irevTyKovropov, ^s yrrjff&fieda ?rapa TpaTreSovvr/wj', e0' yre TrXota auXXeyetv, ols ffwctoifjieOa. : Xeri. Anab. vi. p. 390. It is construed with a future of the infinitive: thus Tithraustes directs gold to be given to the governors of the cities,
e^' <pTe 7roXe/*ov ej-plffeiv vpos A-dKebatfj-oviovs : Xen. Hist. Gr. iii, p. 502. With the aor. 1. of the same mood : aipedevres efi ^re fyyypfyai vofiovs : ib. ii. p. 462.

XXXIV. Ka0o, compounded of Kara and o, signifies literally, according to which. It is a limitative or restrictive particle, and may be rendered as, as being, considered as, so far forth as, &c. It
limits variously : e. g. a species ; being a man ; so far forth as he

Ka66 avOpwrros, in respect of man. A manner ; as, TO yap, TI TTposrev^fjieOa, KaOo e7, OVK oibauev: Rom. viii, 26. as we ought. XXXV. When av is added, that particle, by its power of rendering; expressions less definite, relaxes the restriction. In the New Testament tav is often substituted for av, as in o tav, oirov kav : e. g. Kado eav e-^Yj TIS, evirpoabeKTOS' ov Ka6o OVK e'^ei : 2 Corinth, viii, 12. according to whatsoever a man hath. XXXVI. The addition of TI also renders the limitation less strict. Kaflort is peculiarly appropriate, when things, which have not yet come to an issue, are spoken of: iroieiaQai TOVS Xoyovs, KaOort evrai // KaTa\vffis TOV iroXefjtov: Thucyd. iv, 118. how; by what method. XXXVII. Like KaQb, icaQoTt may signify cause, in respect of that
as, is a

which assume the Nature of Particles.

207

sense of Kara, according to, by which it may denote congruity between cause and effect e. g. /cat OVK l\v avrols TCKVOV, Kadon ^ 'EXtaafler 7]v ffrelpa, Kat ap^orepoi TTpofiefirjKOTes kv rats fyuepats avT>v?]<rav : St. Luke i, 7- because that Elizabeth was barren, &c. The following change in the form of expression will make the congruity signified more apparent : Kara TO rriv 'EXtaajSer arelpav elvat, KOI
:

aftfyorepovs

TrpofiefiijKoras elvat.

XXXVIII. As Kadb limits quality, so KaQooov limits quantity ; the force of limitation being in Kara, the signification of quantity in oaov. Til us, OVKOVV 6'Xws SoKet ffoi ?/ TOV TOIOVTOV Trpay/imreta, ov ?repi TO
aUjfJia.

aXXa, Kadoaov bvvarai, a^eoraVat avrov, irpos Se rr/v ^vyjjv rerpar/>0at ; Plat. Phaed. p. 64. as much as, as far as, he can ; for /cara roaovrov cKJievTavat, KaQoaov Suvarai. Lysias, cited by Budaeus, p. 130. has the full expression : KaQoaov eKaaros olos r i]v t Kara roetvat,

aovrov

efiorjOei.

In Ka0a?rep, for Kara ravra aTrep, Kara limits, a constitutes relatively the matter for limitation, and ircp heightens and amplifies the similitude. Thus, Kat /uoi w^uoXoyet Ka0a7rep iiteivos bir)i.

XXXIX.

he related ; particulars whatsoever that he had related. So, JLvQpaitj) juey avveflovXevffa, Ka.6a.irep eireffTeXXes, r&v awv 7ri[4\ovtarp//3et' : Plat. Ep. V. fjievov, Trepl ravra XL. KaQanep, as well as ws, may be rendered utpote, as being :
yelro: Plat.
e.

Sympos.

p. 173. (p. 166. ed. Bip.) exactly as

agreeably to

all

a use which arises from the signification of limitation included in Kaddirep : (3afft\ea be TWV roiovrwv &IKUIV fjifi ej-elvat biKaoTrfv 'yiyveadat,
Plat. Ep. viii. p. 356. Ka.6a.Trep lepea, KaOapevovra Kat befffjov KO,\ Qvyfjs properly, according to this t that he is a priest. XLI. Et is added to KaOanep with some signification of condition,
:

eart yap 5; rts tytitvr) TWV TroXtreiUjv eKaoTTyy, Plato (or Dio) Ep. v. p. 321. If fyuvri eori, taken from the preceding words, be understood after KaOairepel, the expression will be, more fully, Kara ravra, Ka0' a $wvi\ eari TIV&V, or Ka0' ci a*' e'irj. XLII. Ka0ws occurs in the New Testament" for KaQo or
elliplically
:

and

e. g.

KaOairepei TLVUV

5wwv

For KaQo
rat,
iii,

ra^ivri

eortv

//

cnroOeffts

TOV
JJLOI
'.

Ki/ptos fjfjiwv 'lijaovs Xpiffros ebrjXwffe

oKtiruaaros p.ov, xctOws Kat o Ka0ws yypa?r2 Pet. i, 14.

2 Corinth,

1.

in 2 Timoth. [Thessal.] tya 6 Xoyos TOV Kvpt'ov Tpe\rj Kat bo^aS,r]Tai t Kadws Kal Trpus vpas.
viii,

15.

It limits

manner

Hoogeveen was of opinion that Koflcta not to he found in ancient Greek Authors, because they did not compound with prepositions adverbs, although Moris says KaflJrt, 'ArriKus' icadus 3e
is

H. Stephens in the Index of E\\i\ves. his Thesaurus cites i(a6ws &VQ> \e\exrai, de Mundo. See the refeAristot. from
rences given in the new Edition, printed by Mr. Valpy, 10093. d. J.S.

THE END.

PRINTED BY

A. J,

VALPY, RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET.